IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) // ^ ^%<^ 1.0 1.1 12.5 £ U& 12.0 IL25 IH 1.4 0^ Wlil 1.6 I^tographic ^Sciences Coiporalion ^ \ k*^' ^\ 23 WKT MAIN STRUT WIBSTIR,N.Y. I4SM (716)I73-4S03 ^ CIHM/ICMH CIHM/ICMH c Microfiche Collection de Series. microfiches. vV Canadian Institute for Historical IMicroreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions Itistoriques Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques The Institute has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any of the images in the reproduction, or which may significantly change the usual method of filming, are checked below. L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire qu'il lul a iti possible de se procurer. Les details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-Atre uniques du point de vue bibliographique. qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite. ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la methods normale de fllmage sont indiqute ci-dessous. □ Coloured covers/ Couverture de couleur I I Covers damaged/ D D D D D Couverture endommag6e Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couverture restaurie et/ou pelliculAe I I Cover title missing/ Le titre de couverture manque □ Coloured maps/ Cartes giographiques en couleur Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur Bound with other material/ Relit avec d'autres documents Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion along interior margin/ La re liure serrAe peut causer de I'ombre ou de la distortion le long de la marge inttrieuro Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajouties lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte. mais. lorsque cela Atait possible, ces pages n'ont pas 6tA filmAes. I — I Coloured pages/ Pages de couleur Pages damaged/ Pages endommagtes □ Pages restored and/or laminated/ Pages restauries et/ou pellicultes r~^Ki*ages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 1^1 Pages dtcolories. tacheties ou piquies □ Pages detached/ Pages dttachies r^Tj Showthrough/ I — I Transparence □ Quality of print varies/ Quality inigale de I'impression r^l Includes supplementary material/ L_J Comprend du materiel supplAmentaire I — I Only edition avaiSable/ D Seule Edition disponible Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pages totalement ou partiellement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata. une pelure, etc., ont it A filmtes A nouveau de fapon A obtenir la mellleure image possible. Or be thi sic oti fir sic or Th sh Til wi Ml dil en re< mi D Additional comments:/ Commentaires supplimentaires; This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est filmi au taux de rMuction indiqui ci-dessous. 10X 14X 18X 22X 26X 30X y 12X 16X aox a4x 28X 32X Ills Ju differ ine lage The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks to the generosity of: Metropoinan Toronto Library Canadian History Department The images appearing here are the best quality possible considering the condition and legibility of the original copy and in iceeping with the filming contract specifications. L'exemplaire filmi fut reprodult grice h la gAnArositi da: Metropolitan Toronto Library Canadian History Department Les images suivantes ont At* reproduites avec le plus grand soln, compte tenu de la condition at da la nettet* de rexemplaire f iimA, et en conformity avec les conditions du contrat de filmaga. Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed beginning with the front cover and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All other original copies are filmed beginning on the first page with a printed or Illustrated impres- sion, and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impression. The last recorded frame on each microfiche shall contain the symbol — ^ (meaning "CON- TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), whichever applies. Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one exposure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as required. The following diagrams illustrate the method: Les exempiaires originaux dont la couverture en papier est imprimis sont filmte en commandant par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la dernlAre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration. soit par is second plat, salon la cas. Tous les autres exemplairea originaux sont filmte on commen^ant par la premiere page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par la darnlAre page qui comporte une telle empreinte. Un des symboles suivants apparattra sur la dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le cas: le symbols — ► signifie "A SUiVRE". le symbols ▼ signifie "FIN". Les cartas, planches, tableaux, etc.. peuvent fitre filmto A des taux de reduction diffirents. Lorsque ie document est trop grand pour Atre reprodult en un seul clichA, 11 est film* d partir de I'angle supirieur gauche, de gauche d droite. et de haut an bas. en prenant le nombre d'Images nAcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants iliustrent la m6thoda. rata > elure. 3 32X - 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 +- Gt Fi 6 R F7? isffm 01 -^' Jjl THE BRITISH AMERICAN NAVIGATOR. SAILING DIRECTORY FOR THB ISLAND AND BANkS OF NEWFOU]^DLAND, THB GULF AND RIVER OF ST. LAWRENCE, i5retott isflaritr, ^ NOVA SCOTIA, THE BAY OF FUNDY, AND THE COASTS THENCE TO tIiE RIVER PENOBSCOT, ETC. BEiKo VOL. I. Or THE SAILING DIRECTORPS FOR THE EASTERN COASTS AND ISLANDS OF AMERICA. ORIOINALLY C0HP08SD ^ By JOHN PURDY, Hydrographer, AND COMPLETED FBOM A GREAT VARISTT OP D0CVHBNT8, PUBLIC AND PRIVATE, By ALEX. G. FINDLAY, FeUow of the Royal Otdltrapkieal SocUitu. SECOND EDITION. LONDON: ^ PRINTED FOR R. H. LAURIE, CHAOT^BU.BB TO THE ADMIHALTY. THE HON. CORPORATION OF TRINITY HOO SB, ETC. ' No. 53, FLEET STREET. 1847. Jss,f^ J" if - THE FOLLOWING USEFUL AND IMPORTANT WORKS, LATBLr FVBI.IBHKO By R. H. LAURIE, ARE RESPECTFULLV SUBMITTED TO PARTICULAR NOTICE. 1. THAMES AND MEDWAY, &o.— A Neir Surrey of the Estuary of the Thames and Medway, with the Coast from Thorpness to Dover, and the Rivers to London and Rochester , with particular Plana, on enlarged scales, of the Sootu Cuanmils, Iblk of Tuanbt, &c. (Honoured by the speciar approbation of his late Majesty :) to which has been added, an additional half-sheet, containing; Captain Hewett's Soundinga to the Meridian of S" 10' East. With a Sailing Directory, 10$. The same Chart, without the additions, as btfon, 8i. 9. HOLY ISLAND, Fam Islands, &o. A new edition, materially improved, 6*. 3. The COASTS of HOLLAND, &c. (Estmitsd 10 lupenede tUformr Clmrt\ 9i. 4. General Chart of the Navigation from the BRITISH ISLES to the RIO PLATA, CAP£ of GOOD HOPE, and ALGOA BAY; with a Table of the principal Positions, and enlarged Plans of the Hurbour of Rio^ Janeiro, fiahia, Islsnd of Ascension, Roadstead of Ascension, Island of St. Helena, Roadstead of St. Helens, Saldanha Bay, Table Bay, and False Bay. By John Pnrdy. (^uemUd to mptri^t ih$formtr Chart), 10$. 6d. 5. The CANARY ISLANDS, with Madkiba, Pobto Santo, &c. (a tww lurwy,) with an enlarged Chart of the Islands of Madeira, Porto Santo, and Great Salvage, the Road of Fniichal, and Roadstead of Santa Cms (Teneriffe), with yiews, &c. 5i. 6. A Chart of the ISLAND and BANKS op NEWFOUNDLAND, and the CoasU between Bbllb Isle and Boston, Capb Cod, &c.; including the Gulf and River of St. Lawrence, Nova Scotia, and the Bay of Fnndy, compiled from recent Surveys by British and French Ofioers, and the Positions adjusted fro|n numerous Observations. Constructed by John Pnrdy, and drawn by Ales. G. rindlay. With a New Sailing Directory. {The above ha$ been ete e ut t d to tupereede the former Chart), lie. 7. The BAY of HONDURAS, including the Weaternpartof Cuba, the Swan Islsnds, and Mosquitia : with particnlar Plans of the Harbour of BaAse ; Bay of TrusiHo ; Port Royal Harbour, Roatan ; Haiboar of Bonaeea ; Waatem fNurt of Cuba, the Rio Dnlelb, and Mugere, Harbour; N.E. Coast of Yucatan. Improved firom the recent Surveys of Captains Richard Owen, R.N., and Bird Allen, &e.,1l>y JoM Pnidy. (EamuUd to eujtenede the former Chart), 9$. ^ *»* A MgrioM dswr^plJOR rf, and SaiHag Diemtimujbr, M the NatigatioH exhibited on thi$ Chart, areghmt in th$ Calambtan NavigtOor, Fol. 3, b^ Jokn Pnrdy, iO<. 8. Chart of TASMANL4, or VAN DIEME.'^i'S LAND, 9$. 6d. 9. A GENERAL CHART of the ATLANTIC OCEAN, according to the Observations, Survevs, and Determinations of the moat emipeat Navigators, British and Foreign: from a Combination of which the whole has been dedaeod, by John Purdy. With particular Plans of the Roadstead of Angra, Toraeira, Ponta St. Michael's, of the Channel between Fayal and Pico, Santa-CruB to Funcbal, &c. On four large aheeu. With Additions to the present time, J di. 10. The ATLANTIC, or WESTERN OCEAN,, with Budson'a Bay and other adjacent Seas: including the Coasts of Europe, Africa, and America, from Sixty-Five Degrees of North Latitude to the Equator; but without the partioular Plans above mentioned. Reduced, chiefly, from the larger Chmrte, by John Purdy, wi beautifully engraved on two large sheets, 8f . 11. GULF of St. LAWRENCE.— The Gittf' of St. Lawrence and Breton Itland, ou a large scale, from actual Surveys and Astrooomio Obsertationa. With particular Plana of the Gut of Canso, Louisbourg Harbour, Sydney or Spanish River, Ristigouohe Harbour, the Mingan Isles, 6ce. Two sheets, lOi. 6d. It. NOVA SCOTIA.— Nova Seolis, wUk a Part u a large »f the Gut le Mingan be Bay qf ftx, Sbel- The following work was at first intended to have been published under the title of the " Cabotian Navigator," • and to form the first volume of a series which comprehends a description of the Atlantic seaboard of the Ameri* can continent, by the late Mr. Johk Puedy, whose works will remain an honourable and lasUng memorial of the zeal and talent which, for upwards of forty years, were so successfully and usefully exerted in advancing the science of Hydrography. But, as the attempt would be futile to impose a name upon a territory which has no general designation, however desirable it woiild be to give the name of Cabot to the country that he made known to modern times, the titlie of the ** British American Navigator ** has been adopted. Three editions of a previous work on the same subject, under the title of the ** Newfoundlabd Directory," have been honoured with the public apptobatibni bat, firom the more complete knowledge we now possess of those regions, it was found necessary to remodel the whole of it, and to abaikdon % title which would be manifestly inapplicable to its entire contents. The former work was composed from the labours of Captain James Co<^, the circumnavigator, whose survey of the western coasts of Newfoundland is still the best we have ; from Messrs. Holland, Bouchette, Captain Bayfield, &c. in the Gulf and River of St. Lawrence ; from Messrs. Lockwood, Des Barres, and others, on the coasts of Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, &c. ; and these, as far as they were available, are retained in the present work ; but, from the great amount of information we have latterly acquired of these regions, it will be found that the present volume is far more complete than its predecessors. For the eastern coasts of Newfoundland, we have availed ourselves of the works of Captain F. Bullock, W. Bullock, and O. Holbrook, the Admiralty surveyors, which form a complete guide to this singular and rugged coast. In the description and directions for the N.E. portion, we have included the * See Vol. I. page S9, of " Newfoundland in 1849," bj Sir Richard Henry Bonnycastle ; an interesting work, containing a complete history and description of the island of Newfoundland. IV ADDRESS. substance o^the Instructions given by M. Ch. Lavaud, of the French marine, which will be found of great service,; while on the chart accompanying the present work is given the survey of the Banks of Newfoundland by the same officer, which delineates minutely thegf vast submarine elevations, and the chart of which is the best description that can be given. The valuable surveys of Capt. Henry Wolsey Bayfield, R.N., F.R.S., (whlcli •re still in progress,) in the River and Gulf of St. Lawrence, and the coast of Labrador, have given an entirely new feature to our knowledge of that pdrt'of our possessions ; and the corof^ete delineation and ample directions which we now have of the northern shore of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, will div6ftt thii^ desolate and inhospitable region of many of the dangers which were formerly 10 much dreaded, and it will be seen that it can now be navigated with com- parative safety. .,,..,. To Lieut. Charles Hare, R.N.^yr. Jemey, M.R.N., Mr. E. Dunsterville, «nd other gentlenien, we have to express oiir thanks for many valuable commu' nications, which &re embodied in the work ; and> in laying it before the pnblic, we do it with a hope that it will be found worthy of their attention. At the same time^ we earnestly solicit cominunications for itsi future inaprovement: these, as being original and authentic, are doubly valuable, as adding to our knowledge, and as being beneficial to the public service. ' ^^^"^ ^' This book is to be considered, as was mention^ above, the first of a series! describing the Eastern Coasts of AtDeri^a. The Coasts of the ll'nite4 States and of the West Indies are comprehended in )be volumes ^f the Colombian Navigator; and the continuation of the Eastern Shore of the cpnjtjnefit of South America is contained iii the IBrasilian Nkvigatbr. A.G. F. ^ ^N/y, 1846, •; .,-,- :, •■ ,■ -r .<■''' ■;■ ■ : :. iff r Si r mm» . - ■ "«'; ^>-''^^^^' ■ PAGE GENERAL TABLE of the Positions, or of Latitude and Longi- '' TUDEs of Places described* with the pages in which their respective Descriptions may be found • ' 'k NOTES referred to in the frecedivo Table, showing the Authorities, ,&c., including the Variatioks or the Compass .w.»;^y.t.«*i>'«».. xvi ]PH ARONOLOG Y, &c. . . i . ^-^ . * ♦* . ... . w . ♦ .^.^jV^; i4-i »%3X'i xxi '■'"' "•"•■ . "PATfT T „„:„„;,,■„„« .jr .,M „•. NEWFOUNDLAND. *c,,„ , I. — of the Winds^ p^rents^Iices, ffnd Pas^^ to Newfoundland, Nova ' ' Scotia, New Brunswick, c&c i .... .. ... ... .............. 1 , ujlVindj, t; Phenomena westward of Newfoundlaod, 2 ;' Cun-ents, &c., 4; ,jO J , Wreokt in St. Shot's Bav, Cbmusand Harpoonio^ 6, and H.M.S. Drake* 7 ; Spence and Marshal Macdonald, 8; Passages from England in tb« Spriug, ' 9; in' the Pall, d; Icehergs and Ices, 11; Wrecks of the Harvest Home, ^fj,, 4 Lii4y of the Lake, President, William Brown, &c., 11, 12; Preservation of Life at Sea, 13 ; General Directions for tli^Qiilf, 14. 11.— The Island and Banks of Newfoundland •...•>•... .... ....^..^.iH General ^emarks and Description of NewfoupdMuid, 14 ; ,theCit> of l^t. Jol^! \ ■ 15; Cbhcepiion Bay, 16; The Banks of Newfouudland, 17; Virgin (.^^fj^llQcks, 18 ; Shoal ne4r the Virgin Rocks, 19. EASTERN AND NO|lTHERN pOAST^ OE jNEWi;opNDjyVND, L— Cape l^pear and St. John's Harbour to Cape St. Francis 19 Cape Spear and Lighthouse, 19; Harbour of St. John, and Directions, 19 ; . St. John's to Conception Bay, 20 ; Black Head to Cape St. Francis, 21. IL— ^Conception Bay, between Cape St. Francis and Bacalieu Island . . 21 Conception Bay, 21 ; Bay Verde, 21 ; Carboniere, 22 ; Harbour Grace, 22 ; Bay Robert, 23 ; Brigus^ 23 ; Collier Bay and Harbour Main, 23. III. — Trinity Bay, between Bacalieu and Cape Bonavista 23 Trinity Bay, 23 ; Old Perlican, 24 i New Perlican, 34 ; Port Bonaventure, 24 ; Trinity Harbour, 25 ; Rugged Harbour, 25 ; Catalina Harbour, 26 ; Bird Islands, 26. IV.— Bonavista Bay, between Cape Bonavista and Cape Freels 26 Cape Bonavista and Lighthouse, 26 ; Bonavista Harbour, 27 ; Bonavista Bay, 27 ; Blackhead Bay, 28 ; Great Chance Harbour, 28 ; Broad Coves and Barrow Harbour, 29 ; Damnable Harbour, 30; Morris Cove, 30 ; Gooseberry Isles, &c., 31 ; New Harbour, 31 ; Northwest Arm, 32 ; Greeuspond, 32. v.— The N.E. Coast from Cape Freels to Cape St. John, including the Bay of Notre Dame and Archipelago of Exploits 32 Cape Freels, 32 ; Funk Island, 32 ; Brenton Rock, 33 ; Wadham Islands, 33 j F^o Island^ 34 ; Bay of Notre Dame, 35 ; Toulinguet or Twiltingate, 35 ; Morton's and Triton Harbour, 35 ; Nipper's Harbour, 36. vi CONTENTS. PAOS VI.— The Eastern Coast and White Bay, from Cape St. John to Cape Norman •.«.»♦ 36 CapeSu John, 36 { La Scie Harbour, and Harbour Ilound, 36} Paoquet Harbour, 37 ; St. Barbe or Horse Islands, 37 ; Ming's Bight, 37 ; Fleur-de- lis Harbour, 38 j While Bay, 88 ; Lojljater Harbour, 38 j Cooy Ann Head, ,;> - ] 30 ; Little Harbour Deep, 39 ; Fourch^ and Hooping Harbours, 40 ; Canada Bay, 40 i Canada Harbour, 41 1 Hillier'a Harbour. 41 i Conoh* Harboutay •' 42 i Cape Rouge, 42 ; Belle Isle South and Oroais Island, 4« : t'roo Har;,rp , , boar, 43 ; St. Julian Harbour, 44 ; The ll«ttet, 44 ; La Fonr Hartwur, 44 ; ' ' Fisbot Isles, 45 1 Hare Bay, 46 ; Or^mailftre Harbour, 46 ; St. Anthony, 44; Biahati aad S(. Luaaire Bay, 47 ; Origuat Harbours, 47 ; Kii^on or Quirpon, 48 ; Cape Norman, 49. . ...<. r.^,^..- THE SOUTHERN COASTS OF NEWFOUNDLAND. '(w L— The S.E. Coast from St. John's Harbour to Cape Race 49 Bay of Bulls and Witless Bay, AO; Cape Broyle, 50; Aquafort, 50; Feri noMfes, 51. H. — ^The Coast of Avalon, from Cape Race to Placentia Bay, including Trepaasey, St. Mary's Bay, and Placentia Harbour ^ , 5t Trepassey Harbour, 51 ; St. Shot's Bay, 41 ; St. Mary's Bay, &C., .52 ; Capf^ .yb St. Mary, 52 ; Placentia Bay and mrbour, 53 ; Directions by Mr. Owen, 64 1 Bearings and Distances in Placentia Bay, 55. '"^^ HL — ^The Northern portion of the Bay of Placentia, and Coast thenoi to Cape Chapeao Rouge ...«...«.••. 4 55 Red and Long Islands, 56 ; Come-by-Ohance, 56; Paradise Sound, 57; Mortier Bay> 58 ; Burin Harbours, 50 ; St. Lawrence Harbours, 59. IV. — ^The Coast westward of Cape Chapeau Rouge, with the Islands of St. Pierre and Miquelon ***r ^ Ferrvland Head, 60 ; St. Pierre Island, 60 ; Langley or Little Miquelon, 61 ; ^ ^' lliqnelon,61. V. — Fortune Bay, and the Coast westward to the Burgeo Isles. . . .'. ... 62 Forttttife Bay, &c., 62 ; Point May to Cape W\\6, 62 ; Harbour la Cotiti iiiid ^ ^ Belle Harbour, 68 ; Bande da TAiier Bay, 64; Harbour Briton, 64; CQa-a,i'f naigre Bay, 64 ; Hermitage Bay, 65 ; Bay of Despair, 65 ; Cape la Hune, 66; Ramea, 67 ; White Bear Bay, 67. '^ VI. — The South Coast, from the Burgeo Islands to Cape Ray ^ . ^,QS The Burgeo Isles, 68; Connoire Bay, 68; La Poile Bay, 69; Port aux ' Basque, 70 ; Cape Ray, description and appiarance of, 71. ^" THE WESTERN COAST OP NEWFOU^DUND, '^ FROM CAPE RAY TO CAPE NORMAN. St. 0f0ig8'sBay,72; Port au port, 78; Bay c^lslands, 74; Bonne Bayj-Tfj Cow Head, 75 .'^ Ingomachoix Bay, 7,5 i liawVes Harbour, 7Ai.PoiAt Rich, 76 ; Bay of St. John, 76 ; New Feiolle, 76 ; Old l^erolle, 77 ; Bay of St. Genevieve, 77 ; Bay of St. Barbe, 77. The Strait of Belle Isle and the Coast of Labrador, between dape Sii^ '■ .Ifiwis and Fbrteau Point .'♦';^;l'i^.'our, |109,;, River St. John, l06;' Manitou River, 100: River Moisic, 107; Seven Islands Bay, 107 ; Cawee Islands, 108 ; Trfaiity Bay, 109 ; Point de Monts Ligfhthouse, l09«-"-'"'v-v-';ji»- «f ••< •iv;-'.- * •^•;c..' r 99 109 no v.— The South Shore 6f lh6 Ertfrtthce Co' the RiVer, from Cape Rosier to Cape Chatte ^ .^ - Cape Rosier, 109; Alagdalen River and St. Anjpij^. 1,10 i Cape Ci^tte. 110^ VI. — General Description of the River * , .'. . . v, . . • ^ ■' The North Shore, from Capes de Monts to the Sagoenay Rirer ..... 1 111 St. Nicholas Harbour, 111; Manicougan Bay and Shoals,, 112; )^y of Outarde, 112; Jeremie and Port Neuf, 112; The Saguenay River, 11 3. The South Shore, between Cape Chatte and Green Island 113 ^atane River, 113; Grand Metis, 114; Baraaby Island, 114; Isle Bic, H6; Bicquette and Lighthouse, 1 15; Green Island and Lighthouse, 115. The Description of the River continued. Red Island and Reef, 116; Murray Bay, 117; White Island, 117; Hare Island and Banks, 117; Barren Ledge, 117; The Pilgrims, 118; Kamour- asca, 118; Isleaux Coudres, 119; The South Traverse, 119; The Pillars, 120; Goose Island, 120; The Bayfield Isles, 120; The Middle Channel and North Channel, 121 ; St. Paul's Bay, 122; Burnt Cape Ledge, &o., 122; The Island of Orleans, 123; Quebec, 123; Montreal, 128. Tides in the River of St. Lawrence ......... .^ ..... ... . . ... ... . 124 to 126 "GirectioD^ for sailing up the River, from Anticosti to Quebec . . . < ...... 126 Remarks on the Currents^ Winds, &c., 126; On Uie Aberration ef the Cpmpass, (mtt)^ V37 ; General Courses, &c., between Cape Chatte and Ii4e Etic, 129 ; Isle Bic to Green Island, 131 ; Green Island to the Brandy Pots, 13«; Ylii CONTKNTS. PAOr. Brandy Pots to Iho South Travene aiid Goow Uland, 133; Th« South Tnvtne, 183; The Pilien or Pillars to Crane Island, 134; Crane lalaml . .lii to Point St Valuer, 134 j St. Vallier to Quebec, 134. ,^ General Description of the River of St. Lawrence, downward, from' Montreal to Quebec, Ac » • 136 Island of Montieal, 180 1 WiUinm Hemy and Three RiTert, 1S«. Rates of Pilotage for the River of St. Lawrence, 1 841 1 37 From and to Quebeoand Bie, 137 ; Regulations of the Pilotage above Bic to Quebec, 137 ; Rales above the Harbour of Quebec, 137. Rates charged for Towing Vessels by the Steamers fit}tei Quebec td~- "^^^ Montreal, 1841 rV*;. ;...;« .J *V' 138 'i(t • } i-rik/'. IV.— The Bay of Fundy, and the Coast* between Cape Sable and '''" ^ Passainaquoddy Bay ii....«.«. ^f83 General Cautions, 183 ; Tides, &c., 184 ; Seal Island, Mud Isles, and Tusket Isles, 185; Cape Fourchu, 185; Bryer*s Island, 186; Long Island, 186; Bay of St. Mary, 187 ; Bay of Fundy, continued, 187 ; Annapolis, 187 ; Basin of Mines, 188; Chignecto Bay, 188; North Coast of the Bay of Fundy, 189 ; Quako Ledge and Lighthouse, 189 ; 3t. John's, New Brunswick, 189 ; Directions, by Mr. Backhouse, 100 ; Remarks on St. John's, by Mr. Lock- wood and Captain Napier, 191; Port Signals, 192; Point Lepreau, 192; /i(>T:P"M ¥!WU»,Miiif 193; Maqhias Seal Isles, 194; Passanaqnoddy Bay, F^H // 195; Qubddy Head, 195 ; St. Andrew's and^Etang Harbour, 196 ; Beaver Harbour, Tides, 196 ; Bearings and Distances of Places in the Bay of Fundy. ' 196 ; General Remarks and Oiiections fcr tkt Bay of Fun^, 197. ^ t< ('4 A^' ^ ' v.— The CoaaU of the United States, from Pasianaquoddy td^ih^ '^ Penobscot River ..............; 198 Mount Desert Rock, 199 ; Machias B^y, 199; Macbias to Qouldsboro', 199 1 ' Mooepeck Head Light, Dyer's Bay, and Pleasant Bay, 200 ; Penobscot Bay andRivfr, 200; Castioe)&c.^^^2;c: ,,.-.» ^^^^ , -» ,<.],.'<,. _ , ... bii&Ul biHwbH "V 1 • • • Ireland Rock (always breaks) Cape Fogo ; S.E. extremity OfflFr (Outer) Wadham Isle; centre* • • FoGo Harbovr ; Eastern islet [A] • • • • bATtTVDE M. 47 30 5S 47 34 2 47 48 4 47 42 48 47 44 30 48 9 1 48 16 30 48 21 30 48 21 30 48 27 38 48 32 28 48 42 10 48 48 5 48 37 15 48 37 15 48 40 50 48 50 8 48 53 30 48 58 20 46 4 40 49 9 15 49 13 40 49 18 49 19 49 19 6 49 23 25 49 25 49 30 49 41 49 44 21 49 41 49 54 49 47 49 51 45 49 39 30 49 35 30 49 44 20 18 LONCITCDC W. O / * 5« 33 27 52 36 56 52 43 41 53 5 58 53 10 40 52 44 46 59 18 10 53 16 50 8 30 52 53 53 52 56 6 52 59 20 52 58 15 53 16 53 22 53 30 50 53 32 15 53 24 40 53 27 53 31 ao 53 30 3U 53 16 20 53 17 10 53 26 8 53 20 58 53 32 20 53 37 30 53 54 S3 15 53 7 53 15 53 37 53 50 40 53 58 53 55 54 40 13 54 11 36 80 3 m paces. 19,49 15»I9 21 21,22 22 91 24 25 25 25 25 26 27 28 28 28,29 30 30 31 31 31 31.32 32 32 32 32 33 33 33 32 32 33 35 35 34,35 33 31 POSITIONS OF PLACES. XI Change Isles ; N.E. islet • • • • Bacfelieu Isle; centre* •' *'''*'^ Bay of Notrb Dame. Toulioguet Harbour ; Northern entrance Morton Harbour; entrance • • Fortune Harbour ; N. W. point* • • • • • • • Triton Harbour; entrance Cutwell Harbour ; East point •>> Nipper's Isles ; S.E. point • • • • • • Bishop's Hock St. John's Gull Isle PrpmoDtory of St. John [6] South Bill Middle Cape • ♦ North Bill • La Scie Harbour ; entrance Pacquet Harbour ; entrance St. Barbe, or Hone Isles ; S.E. point Fleur-de-Lis Harbour ; East point • • • Partridge Point Coney Arm Head • • Cat Head ; extremity « I Little Harbour Deep Head ' i^ Orange Bay ; entrance ••. Fourch^ Harbour ; entrance Hooping or Sans- Fond Harbour; entrance* * . . Canada or Canary Bay ; entrance Rouge Isle ; North point Southern Belle Isle ; N.E. point > . Groais or Groix Isle ; N.E. point Croc or Croque Harbour ; entrance • Fishot Isles; Northern isle < • How Harbour ; entrance, W. point • Goose Cape ; S.E. point CREifAi|.LERE Hakboub; entrance, E. point.. Cape St. Anthony • . • Br^hatjor Bcaha Shoal (6 feet)- Needle'i Rocks, near Brana White Cape, near St. Lunaire GriguetBay: East point •. CapeBauld Cape Norman [7] The SiE. Coast of Newfoundland, from St. John's Harbour to Cape Race, and Southern Coasts, thence to Cape Ray. St. John's ; South Head, Light F. Cape Spear; Light rev. 276 ft. one m. Bull Head ^ Cape Bi^yle; North point • • Cape Balhicd Cape ftacB^'t . . • * ..t If, I Southern Coast. CiJ^.Pln^8] Cape Si. Mkry • . * ^ Placeikfta Hiirbottr c lATITUDE N. LONGITUDE W. O « » 49 41 35 49 41 50 49 36 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49, 49 49 49 50 50 50 49 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 33 33 37 47 14 22 31 36 55 30 69 30 56 5 57 30 59 SO 58 58 30 11 6 40 9 20 57 30 7 42 30 54 48 58 30 2 25 12 30 20 17 20 18 30 21 25 40 26 5 SO 25 32 30 38 15 37 10 47 34 2 47 30 63 47 18 1 47 3 52 46 46 46 46 39 44 46 37 14 46 49 25 147 15 11 O t 54 18 64 28 48 54 41 30 PAGES. 55 10 55 31 55 34 55 46 55 21 30 55 16 Q 10 30 40 55 23 80 55 22 55 55 25 55 31 55 45 18 55 S6 40 56 2 56 3 56 40 56 84 30 56 27 56 21 56 11 56 7 56 2 55 42 55 22 30 55 27 55 41 32 55 34 30 55 51 55 31 55 30 30 55 25 15 55 20 55 22 45 55 21 S3 55 21 30 55 20 33 55 47 48 52 36 56 52 33 27 52 41 19 52 47 27 52 53 23 52 59 10 53. 30; < 2 54 8 45 53 55 10 34 35 5,35 35 35 S5 35 36 36 86 S6 36 36 36 37 37 38 38 40 40 40 40 40 40 40,41 42 42 42,43 43 45 45 46 46 46 47 47 47 47 48 49,78 16,19 19,49 49 50 51 51 51 52 53, 54 xu POSITIONS OF PLACES. Little South Harboar • Extremity of PUcentia Bay ..••.. Bordeaux Harbour (Ex.) Capb Chape AUROVOE St. Pierre; Harbour Light F. [9] Cape Miqoelon • Connaigre Shoal ..••••. • • Pass Island • • Cape La Hune Outer Penguin Island < Eclipse Island (Burgeo Ids.) £101 Cape Ray } S.W. extremity [l 1 J < LATITVDE N. Westebh and N.W. Coasts of New- rODMDlJkND. Cod Roy Isle; Sooth side Cape St. George Red Isle; S.W. point South Head of the Bay of Islands [IS} Cow HeiMl Port Saanders ; entrance, N.E. point • . Poinl Rich ; W. extremity Point Ferolle; Cove Point, N.E. extr... Anchor Points • • Green lalet ; N. E. extremity • • • • • < 'ape Norman • « COAST or LABRADOR, commbnciiic with TOE East. Cape St. Lewis ; S.E. pmnt [13] St. Charles Island > " • Belle Isle ; N.E. point {magneticy ..<•...• S.W. point Battle Isles ; N.E. extremity Henl^ Island ; middle of N. side York Point; Eastern extremity. • * • Red Bay ; Harbour Isle • Loup Bay ; the head of • • • • Forteau Point ; extremity Bradore Hills; Notre Dame (1264 feet high) Soath Uill (1135 feet) Greenly Island ; N.E. point > Bradore Harbour; ftagstaif Point Belles Amours ; S.E. extremity Lion Isle ; Isthmus Mistanoque Isle • De&d Cove ; South point Great Meeattina Point; S.E. extremity Ilare^ Harbour ; E. side Antrobus Point ; N. side of isle Wapitagun Harbour ; E. point of an islet Gape Whittle; S.W. extremity of an isle> Coacoacho B^y ; outer islel ........... Kegashka Bfty ; islet Natashquan River; entrance, S. point... Little Natashquan Harbour, head of Nabesippi River ; First granilic point • • • Watcheeihoo Peninsula; sonomit • • • » • • 47 47 47 46 46 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 51 51 51 51 5a 52 52 5t 59 52 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 5U 50 SO 50 50 50 50 50 60 50 50 50 43 32 49 46 45 28 64 19 46 52 8 11 23 57 29 2 31 55 22 10 36 6 36 56 52 SB 38 54 »3 58 6 13 55 12 38 36 41 47 2 22 14 30 24 18 37 10 21 34 13 48 1 16 54 15 44 8 58 1 43 55 31 S5 25 37 35 11 34 2 23 19 27 38 26 42 24 9 15 51 46 52 44 10 36 33 33 20 11 48 10 44 9. 13 11 87 7. 5 II 49 14 16 26 LONGITUDE W. O / M 54 53 57 52 58 55 20 56 8 66 19 65 67 56 11 56 50 56 68 67 36 69 17 59 23 59 14 69 16 58 23 67 51 57 17 57 24 57 2 66 46 66 36 66 47 60 60 38 14 30 31 44 80 19 13 23 7 16 10 46 34 13 40 16 67 14 38 SO 46 48 pages. 4 3 19 65 38 23 66 34 33 66 16 66 36 66 33 66 60 30 65 6ff 61 66 36 34 66 49 60 66 66 36 67 11 60 67 11 32 67 10 34 67 14 6 67 34 44 67 38 31 68 12 7 68 59 6 58 69 56 69 17 7 69 16 31 1 5 6 46 60 17. 66. 61 15 31 61 47 43 61 60 17 63 )6. 40 63 41 3 60 56,67 56 53,69 61 61 06 65, 66 66 68 71 73 73 73 74 75 76 76 76 77 78 40»7a 79 80 79 79 80 81 81 83 83 83 9S 93 93 93 93 94 9ft 96 96 97 97 98 9ft 99 100 lot 101 101 101 Appeelel Betchewi Cleaiwat Mingan Mingan 1 BlverSt Manitou Point St Moisic I Carousel Seven Point St Cawee Egg W Trinity Point dc Point d POSITIONS OF PLACES. xin Pages. J6 »6,fi7 \6 »S,59 II 1 LATITUDE N. Appedetat Bay ; East point BetchewuD Harbour ; low isle ■ Clearwater Point ; S.W. exirenaity • • Mingan Harbour ; Sandy Poiot • • • ' Mingan Island ; summit* ••-••••••••< Ri?er St, John ; S.£. point Manitou Point; extremity !•••' Point St. Charles; S. extremity > Moisic River) S.W. point ••••< Carousel Islaiid ; Southern extremity • ' Seven Isianda' Bay ; storahoase oo E. Point St. Margarei4 oUremiW Cawee Istaodt ; Utile Isle, W. point Egg Islands ; North I. West point • < Trinity Bav ; S.W. point* ..*... ^ • . PointdeMoDts; Lighthouse (jMdlt.ai tOO ft.) Point de Moots i aoutberb extreioity aide. BRETON ISLAND, the If Aeiutsv Islu, and Antkosti. Louisboarg Lighthouse j Ligkt P. • • • • Scatari Island { Lighthouse ; Ligkl r«v. at 90/}. Flat Point, Sydney Harbour; L^^ht F. «* 160// Cape North on Breton Island r • • • • Island of St. Paul \ NcHrthem extremity [14] • • • i'S\oo Lightti N.Jucidt S. revoking, at 140 ft.) Magdacem Isi.a](Ds [16]. Entry Isle ; East point • • • • »' • Deadman Islet t West point ,...*..... Amherst Harlibur; entrance, N. side of Coffin's Island ; N*E> {Ktint < Northern Bird Islet ; centre < Bryon Islet; East point • • • < ANTICOSTI. West Coint ; S.W. extremity • • Cape U Bic Island, S.E. reef; N. E. extremity Bicquette Island, lAght at iSO ft. rev. 2 min. • • Razade Rocks; N.R rock Green Island ; Lighthouse ; Light F. at 70 feet Loop River ; N. point of entrance ••>•••.... Brandy Pots ; S. jpoint of South Rock Kamourasca ; N.E. point of Crow Island Stone Pillar ; Light rev. li min. Crane Island ; a station on the beach * • • Dauphin Island (Orleans I.) ; S.W. point • • • • NEW BRUNSWICK, Sec, Eastern Coast. Cape Rosier, (as above) ; extremity Cape Gasp^ ; extremity Gasp^ Basin ; Sandy point • • • Douglas, the town ; South side Bonaventure Isle ; Nb W. point Cape Despair • Point Paspebiac ; Southern ex.*n;mity Point Miscou Point Escuminac ; Light F. at 70 feet Richibucto ; entrance Cape Tormentin ; N.E. point Pictou Isle Pidtou Harbour; entrance, Light F. at 65 fit. > • Cape St. George Gut of Canso; Lighthouse at N. end. Light F. atUSfi. latitude n. PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND. East Point Nortli Cape Cape Traverse Point Prim ; Hillsborough Bay ; Ught F. • • • • Crari^tte Town ; church Bear Cape BRETON ISLAND, &c. Cape North (See page xiii) Siboux Isles, at the entrance of St. Anne's Bay Sprdney Harbour Lighthouse (See page xiii)> • • • Town of Sydney ; Barracks Scatari Isle ; Lighthouse (See page xiii) Louiftbouij^ ; Lighthouse (See page xiii) Albion Chff, on the South side of Isle Madame O / # 46 49 8 45 SO 34 48 49 49 49 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 4T 47 47 51 45 5 14 37 6 51 43 41 18 28 44 29 43 25 17 15 35 3 25 51 5 52 36 35 17 47 4 30 46 58 12 48 51 45 48 45 10 48 49 53 48 46 24 48 29 30 48 25 SO 48 67 48 1 37 47 5 4 46 40 46 7 38 45 47 52 45 41 44 45 51 22 45 43 46 27 47 4 46 12 46 14 45 59 47 3 46 24 20 46 18 15 46 9 46 1 30 45 54 SO 45 28 12 lomoituoe w. pages. o / « 71 13 123 73 31 47 123 64 11 48 109 64 22 52 110 65 43 35 110 66 45 19 110 67 31 29 113 68 1 39 114 68 12 55 114 68 32 2 114 68 48 30 115 115 69 8 9 115 69 25 14 115 69 33 49 117 69 40 47 117 69 5i 48 118 120 70 31 22 120 70 50 54 123 64 11 48 109 64 9 22 1S9 64 28 41 140 64 21 53 139 64 9 21 141 64 18 32 142 65 1 46 142 64 31 40 143 64 38 S3 144 64 37 144 63 37 43 144 62 33 25 146 62 38 10 146, 147 61 51 12 149 61 29 149 61 45 152 63 51 153 63 28 152 152 62 56 152 62 16 152 > 60 20 20 155 60 27 SO 156 " 60 8 30 157 60 15 30 154 59 40 158 59 55 30 158 61 2 158 POSITIONS OF PLACES. ,xv Eddy Point; entrance of the Gut of Canso Bear Head; the islet Ship Harbour, in the Gut of Canao NOVA SCOTIA, Sec, Southern Coasts. Sable Island j the N.E. end (17) • The Southernmost part • • • • • TheWestend LATITUDE N. The Main Land. Crow Harbour, in Chedabucto Bay ; Rook Isle Fox Isle, in Chedabucto Bay< • • Cranberry Island ; Lighthouse, IVw 2/<. vertical,F. Cape Canseau, or Canso ■ Canso Harbour; Northern entrance (18) • • • • Southern entrance Point Gell, near Raspberry Harbour Whitehead Island, on Whiteharen • Berry Head, on the western side of Tbrbay • • Green Island, Country; Harbour; South point Cape Mocodome, on the S.W. of Country Harbour White Point,on the W. side of Liscomb Harbour Marie et Joseph Cape Spry ♦ Tangier Island Jedore Head, on the W. side of Jedore Harbour Shut-in Island ; S.W. end > Halifax; Citadel Hill (19) • Sambro' Lighthouse, Light F. at 197 Jl. (20) •' Holderness Island, on the S.W. side of Mar- garet's Bay. Green Island, off Mabone Bay Cross Island, off Lunenburg Harbour ; Light- house, Two Itt. vertical ; lower F., upper ectip Cape Le Have Port Medway ; S.W . Head of CoflSn's Island, near Liverpool Harbour; Light- bouse, Light rev. two m. Mouton or Matoon Island Point Hebert . • .<, Shelburne, or Cape Rose way ; Lighthouse, Two lighlt vertical, F. Cape Negro • Cape Sable (31) ••••.« Brasil Rock Seal Island ; Lighthouse, Lt. F. at 170./}. (22) Cape Fourchu, near Yarmouth, Lt.rev. at 145j^. IJm. Cape St. Mary Bryer's Island ; Lighthouse, Lt. F. at 90 Ji. (23) Point Prim (Annapolis Basin) ; Lighthouse, Lt. F. at 76 Ji Cape Split, in the Mines Channel •• Cape Chignecto O > II 45 30 SO 45 32 20 45 36 24 43 59 43 56 43 57 NEW BRUNSWICK ; Western Coasts. Fort Cumberland « Cape Enragde ; Light F. at \20 ft. • • • 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 44 44 44 43 45 20 45 22 19 20 18 lO 21 20 13 30 10 15 10 57 4 55 5 20 59 2 56 40 48 25 44 28 40 36 35 39 28 SO 34 20 27 35 LONGITUDE W. 41 30 21 40 22 Oil' 61 15 20 61 17 30 61 21 25 59 47 60 60 15 61 16 61 6 60 57 60 58 61 1 60 58 61 4 61 9 61 20 61 34 61 42 62 62 3 62 34 62 41 63 5 63 17 63 33 63 33 23 15 10 5 57 51 40 30 32 24 21 30 22 54 47 30 5 14 30 45 49 45 36 20 30 20 10 30 45 20 10 40 10 30 45 10 30 50 40 SO pages. 63 57 63 58 30 64 5 10 64 17 64 29 64 35 64 42 64 51 20 65 13 35 65 17 65 35 SO 65 22 65 58 30 66 10 66 14 66 21 65 46 30 64 20 64 49 30 64 8 30 64 28 150 150 149 165-170 165-170 165-170 159 159 160 160 160 160 160 161 161 162 162 162 163 163 164 164 165 171 172 177 178 179 179 179 180 180 180 181 182 18S 183 185 186 186 186 188 188 188 189 189 XVI POSITIONS OF PLACES. Quako Head ; Lightbouae, Light ret. Quako Ledge ; centre. ........ ^ OapeSpenoer • • Cape Molkeck * * PartridBe Island ; Lighthouse; Lt. F. at liO/i. City of St. John (24) * ■".''" Fkbvkkictov, the Capital of New Brunswick- • Point Lepreau ; Lighthouse, Too Itt. vtrtieai F. Wolflslandj N.E. point Beaver Harbour; S.W. point Bliss Island, at the entrance of Etang St. Andfew's ; S.E. point of TIavjr Island Caropo Bello ; Head Harbour Lighthouse, Lt. F. at&}ft. • Grand Manad Island, &c. (25) Northern point • . • • • S.W. Head Whitehead Wand; N.E. point • • • • < Old Proprietor Rock Gannet Rock{ Lighthouse, DriUiant light inflaihea COAST OF the united STATES. Passamaquoddy; Lighthouse on the West Head, LUF.at wji. Macbias ; town of • Great Wass Island ; S.E. pwnt* • • • • Petit or Little Manan Island ; Lighthouse, Lt. F. 5'ift. • Scoodick or Scuttock Point Mount Desert Kock ; Lighthouse, Lt. F. at 50jt Isle Haute ; the S.W. point • • • • Wooden Ball Rock ; Two iantem lighta •*•••• Isleboro', or Long Island; South end (26) •• •• Castu(b; thetown • White Head; Lighthouse, Lt. F. at 58 Ji. • .• • tATITUDB N. o 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 44 45 45 45 44 44 44 44 44 44 44. 44 44 48 44 48 44 44 43 4 59 8 2 3 44 57 44 31 // 18 17 19 12 40 14 15 30 57 30 30 30 46 49 35 80 37 40 31 40 48 51 30 34 20 52 1 48 14 34 59 LONOITUOE W. o / // 65 37 65 10 65 53 30 65 58 45 66 1 15 66 1 66 89 66 25 66 41 66 45 15 66 51 30 67 5 30 66 66 66 48 66 54 66 42 66 34 66 49 30 67 46 67 57 C 68 3 30 68 80 68 45 68 48 68 40 68 58 PAGES' 66 57 O 67 33 67 30 189 189 189 190 190 19a 190 193 195 197 196 19A 196 19S 194 . I9S 194 194 1»5 199 300 300 300 190 301 301 aoi 303 203 . NOTES Referred to in the precedimo Table ; showing the Authorities, mtith Adpitiokal Remarks, imcludino the Variations or the Compass. 1. St. John's. — ^The longitudes of die SB. and south coasts of Newfoundland, as deduced from the Observations and Surveys of Capt. Jas. Cook, Lieut. M. Lane, Messrs. Caasini,; Verdun, Borda, Pingr^, and Owen, are generally from 8 to 3 miAQfes eaituiard of those gifen in the tabl«: Fort Amhent, on which is the lighthouse a( the entrance of St. John's Harbour (1' 40* east of St. John's Church) having been given as in lat 47*>d3' 30" N., long. 5V* 39' W., or 4' 37" ea$tward of the aseuitted position. On the other hand, Fort Townsend (3 minutes west of Fort Amherst) according to the dbsetvatiotis of Mr. J. JoBes,nalterofH.M.8. Hussar, in 1888, is inlat.47*' S3' 43" N.,and long. 53° 45' 39" W. or 6' aa" wtu of the p^iven longitude. Amid these conflicting statemetits, it was thought safer to repeat the position as given in the Atlantic Memoir, 1840, page 41. The magnetic variation at St. John's is about 37° west. Since the subsequent portion of this book has been printed, information has been received of the neariy entire destruction of the city of St. John by fire. On June 6(h, sol NOTES. XVll A'-' WITH td, as lessrs- ard of of St. 3' 30" hand, MhJ. 19" W. hought Bgnetic A been (le 6lh, 1846, it commenced, and did not terminate until the principal portion of it had been laid in ruins, and 20,000 persons rendered houseless — a calamity, the effects of which it will require much time to overcome. 2. Conception Bat, &c.— '* It is a fact worthy of notice, that the whole of the land iii and about the neighbourhood of Conception Bay, very probably the whole island, is rising out of the ocean at a rate which promises, at no very distant day, materially t^ a£fect» if not to render useless, many of the best harbours we have now on the coast. At Port de Grave (p. 23), a series of observations have been made, which nndeniably prove the rapid displacement of the sea-level in the vicinity. Several large flat rocks, over which schooners might pass some thirty or forty years ago with the greatest fiicility, are now ap'proachiiig the surface, the water being scarcely naviaable for a skiff. At a place called the Cash, at the head of Bay Roberts (p. 23), upwards of a mile from the sea-shore, and at several feet above its level, covered with five or six feet of vegetable mould, there is a perfect beach, the stones being rounded, of a moderate size, and in all respects similar to those now ftwind in the adjacent land-washes."— ^ew/ovnif/and rimes, 1846. 3. Bacalibu or Bacalao Islano.— This island is interesting, as being probably the first land of North America discovered by Sebastian Cabot, which he did at 5 a.m. of the 34th June, 1497, (St. John's day), and named it " Primavista." It was afterwards called by the French *' Baccalaos," a name applied to the whole of the island of Newfoundland ; and it was thus called, either from its being the resort of numberless Bacalieu birds, a species of mergus, which are preserved by the legislature as ibrming useful seantnarks, or else from the original Indian name of the ood.fish» bacalao. 4. Cape Bonatista.— The Admiralty surveyors, Messrs. Geoige Holbrook and Wm. Bullock, have placed this cape as represented in the table ; but since that, this and the coast to the northward of it have been stated as being 8' 50' farther westward : we have retained the former position. The variation is 29° west. 5. Cape Prebu. — In the valuable Survey of the coast northward of Cape Freels, by Lieutenant Fred. Bullock, 1823^, this cape is- placed 4' 10* south of the same, as given in the survey southward, by Messrs. Holbrook and William Bullock, in 1817: to connect this with the southern parts, we have given the latter authority. Variation 30** west. 6. FoGo Harbodr is verv secure, and has good anchorage. This, with otlwr harbours, has been surveyed by Mr. Thomas Smith, under the direction of Lieut. Bullock; and the particular plan is the best guide to the harbour. Variation 31° west. 7. Cape St. John. — On the coasts to the northward of this cape, the French have the right of the fishery. The directions for this coast, given hereafter, are taken from the work of Captain Cb. liavaud, of the French marine; which gives ample instructions for the navi- gation between Cape Bohavista and Cape Norinan. The variation is here about 31*' west. 8. Cape Norman is placed by Capt. Bayfield in lat. 51° 38' 5", and Ion. 55" 26' 2 1" W., or 8* 21" more to the west than in the table, which is the longitude assigned to it by Capt. Fred. Bullock. Captain Bayfield's position is probably dependent on that of Quebec ; but in the Atlantic Memoir, 1840, p. 50, it is sUUed that the assumed longitude of Quebec is perhaps 3 minutes west of the true position ; and the longitude of St. John's, as stated above, as observed by Mr. J. Jones, and recorded in Fort Townsend, is about 6' 33" west of its situation as taken by the Admiralty survevors. These discrepancies, of Quebec being 3 minutes too far we»t, and St. John's 6' SS'^^too much to the eatt, would reduce the difference between these statements to about one minute ; but, until they are reconciled more satisfactorily, the previous statement is adhered to. The variation at Gape Norman is 34* 20' west. 9. St. Pierre.— a survey of Port St. Pierre, by Lieut. Dupetit Thouars, places the government house, N.E. of tlie town, in latitude 46° 46' 30" N., and long. 56° 9' 35" W. The French astronomers, Messrs. Verdun, Borda, and Pingrd, in the voyage of La Fkm, 1771, gave the town of St. Pierre in 46«» 46' 30" N. and 56° 10' W. : and, in the charts of Captain Ch. F. Lavaud, 1836-8, this result is repeated ; thus confirming the determination of the fiurgeo Islands, by Capt. Cook, from a solar eclipse in August, 1766. {PkU. Ttmt. 1167.) The variation is 27" 18' west. ' to. Eclipse Island.— See note on page 68. 11. Cape Ray.— Captain Bayfield places this cape in lat. 47« 36' 56", Ion. 59° 20' 10", or 3 minutes west of the position in the table. See note 16. Variation 24*» west. 13. Bay of Islands.— The variation is about 38° west. i xviii NOTES. . 13. Cape St. Lewis was placed by Lieut. M. Lane, in 17&0, in latitude 52 25 30 , and lonailude 55° 20' W. This, and the whole of the north coast of the Strait of Belle Isle, have been excellently re-surveyed by Captain H. W. Bayfield, whow nautical directions have been followed in the ensuing work. The variation is about S5 west. U ST. PAUL'S ISLAND.— Tliis island, situated in the entrance to the Gulf of St Lawreoce, has been noted for the numerous wrecks upon its shores. It is rendered conspicuous by its two liglithouses, whicli will render the approach to it less dangerous and uncertain. Captain Bayfield says, "Vessels bound to Canada or any ports m the Gulf of St. Lawrence, should endeavour to make the Island of St. Paul, which being of considerable elevation, and bold all round, may, with care and a good look-out, be made even in fogs, if they are not very thick." In the night, the lights will assure a vessel of her situation. Variation 23** 45' W. 15. THE MAGDALEN ISLANDS.— In the AtlarHic Memoir, page 49, are the fol- lowing observations :— " Captain Bayfield places Cape Ray in longitude 59° 20' 10", or three minutes west of that assigned in the table ; and, in order to preserve the relative positions of the Magdalen Islands, &c., we are under the necessity of placing them three minutes to the east of that gentleman's positions. Therefore, by adding these three minutes, we gain the exact longitude assigned by Captain B.,and as likewise shown in the beautiful chart of the islands from the survey of Lieut. F. E. Coltins, R.N., 1833." Variation 23** W. 16. QUEBEC.—" The latitude of Quebec is 46° 47' 30" N., according to the observa- tions of M. le Marquis de Lotbini^re, M. Bedard, directory of the seminary of St. Louis, and Captain Holland. M. Mecbain computed the longitude to be Tl" 10\ by several eclipses of Jupiter's first satellite, observed by Messrs. Lotbini^re and Holland, and the passage of Venus that Captain Holland observed in 1769. All these observations, made at different times, have given very coherent results." Vide American Trans. Vol. I. &c. The above passage, from « Analysis of a General Chart," Sec, Paris, 1786, shows the position in which Quebec has hitherto been laid down on the charts ; and it agrees ^iih that given in the .Conn, det Temi. But Quebec has since been exhibited considerably more to the eastward. Mr. Smyth, in his map of Upper Canada, has it in 69° 52' : the error is here enormous. Mr. Wright, in his chart of 1807, 70° 27'. The Requisite Tablet of ISOS give lat. 46° 48' 38", Ion. 71° 5' 39". Colonel Bouchette, in his work on Canada, 1815, gives 46° 48' 49" N. and 71<' 11' W. In theyear8l819, 1830,and 1821, the officers of H.M.S. Newcastle, provided with four chronometers, made many observations in the river ; and these observations may be judged of by the longitude in which they placed Quebec, for three successive years, assuming Halifax as in 63° 33' 40"; July 16th, 1819, 71° 12' 48" ; June 19th, 1820, 71<» 13' 14"; July 5th, 1821, 71° 12' 24". The greatest difference is 49", and the mean of the whole is one second farther west than the longitude given in 1819. From these data, we judge that the longitude of Quebec does not exceed that given in the table, which is 3 minutes less than that of Captain Bayfield. Vabiatioms of the Compass in and about the St. Lawrence. It has been proved by numerous observations made by the American surveyors, Messrs. Jos. and B. Ellicott, that the westerly variation, in 1800, ceased at or very near the river Niagara, on the south side of Lake Ontario, or long. 79° W. See the particular plan of the Frontier of Niagara, given on the new map of Canada, &c., published by Mr. Laurie. The variation at Mont- real was 7° 45' W. in 1834. In and about the same year die variations were as follow : at Contrecour, 8° 45' : Lake St. Peter, lO": Trois Rivibres, 11°: Quebec, and Isle of Orleans, 15°: Isle aux Coudres, 16°: at Tadousac, on the raouth of the Saguenay, 17° : off the Isle Bic, 18° 40' : Port Neuf, 18«» 20': at Father Point, 19° 45': Point des Monts, 22°: Seven Isles, 20° 27' : West end of Anticosti, 24° 30' : East end, 25° 30' : Mingan Island, 26° : off Kegashka, 27° 45' : Little Mecatlina, 30° 30' : Bradore Harbour (Strait of Belle Isle), 34° 15' : Red Bay, 35° 30'. Off Cape de Monts, in the River St. Lawrence, there is a retnarkable aberration of the compass, which renders it necessary to steer different courses according to the direction of the vessel's head : see note on p. 127-8. Tlie variation at the east end of Prinoe Edward Island is 21°; Pictou Harbour, \^K In Sydney River, Breton Island, and at Cape Breton, 22° west. 17. Sable Islakd. — In the Colombian Navigator, vol. 1, pi^e xviii. ii given a note« which is repeated on page 165 of the present work. The latitude of Sable Island appears to have been given as five miles too far north ; and the west end, according to M. des 17) off H( isl ha q« ai at 44 r, \j»< NOTES. xix Barret, 15 minutes lo the westward of Uiat, at given by Mr. J. Jonea, Matter of U.MJ& Hussar, which is probably near the truth. This may have added to the real dangera of this formidable place. It may be observed that the west end It given in the table in lat. 43*> bV and Ion. 60** 15', or 8' east of that of Mr.. Jouea, in 1B29 ; but, as will be aeea hereafter' in the copious description of Sable Island, the rapid redaction in its length will cause as much difference as this. It may be here repeated, tliat every precaution ooght to be used on arriving near Sable Island. The variation, in 1837, was found to be 20° 27fJW. tude is only 3 minutes more to the east. Mr. Lockwood, on the contrary, makes tne latitude 2 minutes more north, and the longitude 2 minutes more west. 19. HALIFAX.— 'Id Mr. Rapir's valuable work, the longitude of Haiifitx it assumed as a secondary meridian, in 63° 37' 26"; but, as this position cannot be considered as finally determined, we have repeated the longitude as given in the Atlantic Memoir, p. 55, and die Colombian Navigator, vol i. p. 9 ; and, judging from the coherency o^ former results, the longitude above is probably nearly 4 minutat too far west, this is in some measure confirmed by the observations of Capt. W. F. W. Owen, in H.M.lSi. Oolunabia, in 1844, while on the Survey of the Bay of Fundy, &c. He gives the position o? the tablet in the Dockyard, in longitude 6Z*' 35' 28' W. Variation, 16° 46^ W. 20. SAMBRO' LIGHTHOUSE.— "In 1823, the officers of H.M.^; Niemn madt the longitude of Sambro' light 63° 30' 57'. In 1822 they had made it in 63*> 30' O'l and it was subsequently gained by them as 6d^ 30' 8". (Mean 63° SO' 2^'^) M. des Barres gave it at 63° 31^ We, therefore, reject a statement of 63° 35' 16'S lately published.''— Col Nw. vol. i. p. 20. Si. Oapb Sable.— Cape ^Sable and the points to the north-eastward, were formerly - given at represented by M. des Barres in 1776* whose longitude, as well as latitude appeared to be nearest to the truth ; but it may be observed, that M. de Chabert, tb« French Astronomer, in 1758, gave the latitude of the Cape, from his own observations, as only 43« 23' 45"; Mr. Jones, in 1829, gave it as 43° 23' 57' ; Mr. Lockwood. in 1818, gave it as 43° 27' 40" ; and a chart of the Bay of Fundy, dated 1st May, 1824, has it even so high as43<* 28' 10".— See the next note. 22. Seal Island.— M. des Barres places the louthernmost point of Seal Island in latitude 43° 25' 25', and longitude 66° 0' 35". Later charts have it in latitude 43** 26' 35". But, under the oiders of Rear- Admiral Sir Chas. Ogle, Mr. John Jona, of H.M.S. Hussar, in 1828, 1829, and 1830, made a series of observations upon the coasts of Newfoundland, Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, &c., some of which have been before adverted to. By these observations he places the south point of Seal Island in latitude 43° 23' 51", longitude 65° 59' 42", or 3 miles more to the southward than the above; and Lieut. Chat. Harcy R.N., made, in 1828, some observations, which places the latitude of the south point in 43° 22' 23", or four mila more to the touthward. This result, which may thus be depended on, will account for so many ships having been yearly cast away on coming out of the Bay of Fundy. On the supposition of these vessels being far enough to the southward to clear all danger, they may have stood away to the S.B., and thus have been lost. — See description and note on p. 183. VARIATIONS OF the COMPASS on the south coast of Nova Scotia.— In the year 1775 the variations were given by M. des Barres as follow :— North entrance qf the Gut ofCanso, 16°^ W.; Crow Harbour, Chedabucto Bay, 14° 50' W.; entrance of Liscorab Harbour, 14°; Sable Island, IS** 57'} Halifax lighthouse, 13° 35' ; entrance of Shelburne, 13° 30'; Cape Sable, 11° 15'. In 1798, Mr. Backhouse, of the navy, found the variation at Halifax to exceed 16 degrees. According to Colonel Bouchette, it was 17° 0' 10" at that place in 1830 ; at Sambro' lighthouse, in 1828, 16<» 45'; and at Cape Sable, 14°: so that since 1775 it has increased nearly 3h degrees; but whether it is still on the increase hereabout is questionable. 23. Bbyer's Island.— M. det Barres gives dryer's Island as in latitude 44° 22' 5", and 66° 21' W.; but we are constrained to f w up the correction of Grand Manan and Cape Sable, and thus give it more to the southward. Mr. Jones gives the latitude as 44° 13' 61". * d xt NOTES. Poi>T Prw is alio given by M. dea Barm as in 44" 45':30" N. (longitudtf 65^ 46'. 90" W.), four miles higher than the latitude given in the table. 24. CITY OF ST. JOHN.— M. des Barres gave the poailion of the Cape or Pbint Maspcok as 44° 18' 27", and 65' 57' 35" W. It will be seen, bjf reference to the lable» that It is now represented nearly 6 miles more to the south ; and this correction, of course, affects St. John's, and all the coast westward to Passamaijuoddy Bay. The vaHatioo at St. John's is about 10** W. 25. Grawd Mahan Island, &c.— Lieut. Charles Hare, in a voyage outward and homeward, in 1828, made observations for determining the latitude of the S.B. side of Grand Manan Island, which, he concluded, roust conffrm, beyond all doitbt, that (he whole body of that part of the island must be brought southerly, in order to be correct. At the time this information was received, we were doubtful of its accuracy, so far as these remarks affected Gfond Mamm, not suspecting that the charts, then recently pub- lished by authority, could possibly be incorrect. But Mr. Jones, before alluded to, made WMehud lik on the S.E. of Grand Manan, in latitude 44** 36' 59", while in the chart it appears in 44** 41' 0", or 4 miles more to the northward, thus confirming the observations of Lieut. Hare, who makes the difference here about 6 miles, 26. IsLEBORo', or LoKO Island. — ^Tbe position of this island was determined, in 17Q0, by Dr. Williams Dr. Winlhrop, and other American astronomers, from a total eclipse of the sun, Sept. 27th. NEWFOUNDLAND,— On the chart of Newfoundland, &c. accompanying this work, is shown a^l that is known of the interior of that singular country. It is princimdly derived from a map by Mr. Juke, the late geological surveyor of Newfoundland, which is com- posed from the explorations of Mr. Cormack, in his unsuccessful search for the aboriginal Red Indians, now probablv extinct (1822 — 27) ; of Mr. Peyton and Captain Buchan on the River of Exploits: from his personal observations in the River Hamoer and the Ctoand Piond, &e. ; from the reports of the native Micmac Indians, and other sourees. v • }# -.J lig^ wi an ■*>., ah Sep a I the tw t gJ ■ii • • •» he ire I of A. red )in- inat the nwA .■^i*i-> fl«M '♦»«>> 1 i •>.V>' THE PHARONOLOGY, :-.iV «B DESCRIPTION OF THE LIGHT-TOWERS, AMD QTUKR REMARKABLE OBJECTS FOR DISTINGUISHING HEADLANDS, ETC. NEWFQUNPLAND, AND GULF AND RIVER QF ST. LAWRENCE, Cape BONAVISTA.— a lighthouse on this cape has, since Sept. lOth. 1843| exhibited a revolving light, at 150 feet, showing a red and a wUte light alternately. The period of its revolution is two minutes. Page 80. CAPE SPEAR. — A lighthouse, exhibiting a powerful revolving light, at 275 feet above, the level of the sea, which shows a brilliant flash at regular intervab of one nunute; visible, iu clear weather, at eight leagues off. Page 19. ST> JpHN'S.r-Upon Fort Amherst, on the South Head, at the entrance of the harbour, a.brill|a|it an4 find light. See page 19. Here are, also, a small battery and signal-post. HARBOUR GRAGE.-.-00 an islet, one of a cluster of rocks at the mouth of the bar- bottity a liglMhoiiie, conaifting of a squart wooden house* with a sqiiaie dove-cote lodcing top for a Tantem, containing an effective and useful fixed light The islet is accessible in, moderately smooth weather only, by ladders up the face of its landward cliff. Page 22. PORT ST. PIERRE, on tlie island of that name.->A modem lighthouse, on Pointe au Canon, near the town, with fixed harbour light, from the 1st of May to the 15th of November, as described in page 60. ST. PIERRE. — In addition to the harbour light on Pointe au Canon, a fixed light on the hillick of Gtdantry Ueadt waa intended to be shown in the autumn of 1845 : this light will be visible 15 miles off. Page 60. SO ATARI. — An octagonal light-tower, built of wood, on the.N.E. extremity of Soatart, first lighted, with argand burners and reflectors, Dec. 1, 1839.'; painted white, with revolving light, about 90 feet above the sea ; visible one minute, and invisible half a minute, alter- nately. A boat to render assistance to vessels in distress; and a gun to answer signals, when required. Page 158. SYDNEY, BRETON ISLAND.— On Flat Point, upon the eastern side of the entrance, an octagonal tower, of wood, 90 feet high, and pairtted vertically red and white. It exhibits a brilliant fixed light at 160 feet above the level of the sea; seen, in clear weather, at five leagues off. Page 157. ST. PAUL*i ISLAND, off Cape North.— Two lighthouses, octagonal, and built of wood; one near its northern, and the other near its southern extremity ; of which one will- always be open, unless to a vessel near the central rocks. The northern light is. on a rock, separated from the main island by a passage 26 feet wide : it is painted white, and exbibita a fixed dioptric or refracted light, with concentric lamps and four burners, at 140 feet above the sea. The Southern Lighthouse is on the S.W. extremity of the island. It exhibits a lights similar to the northern one, but rcvo/viHg, at the same height. Page 86. GUT OF CANSO. — A lighthouse, on the western side of the northern entrance of the Gut of Canso, was established in 1842, in latitude 45° 42', and longitude 61** 27'. The tower, painted white, stands at 120 yards from the shore, and exhibits a fixed light at 115 feet above the level of the aea. It may be seen from the greater part of the Bay of St. George and Uie shores of Breton Island*, as far as Jestico or Port Hood. There is good anchorage under the lighthouse, with the wind off the land. Page 149i PICTOU.— An octagonal lighthouse, built of wood, on the western side of the entrance^ xxH THE PHARONOLOOY. It U painted red and white, in vertical ttripee, and exhibits a brilliant 6zed light at 65 feet above the sea. The light bearing W. ) N. leads into the harbour. Page 146. LOUISBOUKG.— A lighthouse on the eastern side of the entrance lo the harbour of Loalsbourg, 00 fathoms in-shore, lat. 44" 54' 30', long. 59» 55' 30". It stands on the site of the old French lighthouse, (which was succeeded by a beacon,) and shows a fixed light, visible at im from off Cape Portland to the soalh>easiem extremity of Cane Breton. The lighthouse, (which is a square building,) is painted white, with vertical bliick stripes on either side, in order to distinguish it from other lighthouses, and to render it conspicuous when the back land is coverMi with snow. See page 158. ANTICOSTL^On <*f S.W' ffht ^fAnlicoiti, a circular stono tpwfr, 75, M.kwh. The light, which is brilliant, revolves once in a minute, and can be seen from N.n.W., round by the west and south, to S.E. by E. The lantern is elevated 100 feet above high water, and the light may be seen at five leagues off. Lighted from the 25lh of Maroh to the last day of the year. Page 91. On Heatu Point, near the &£. txtrtmUv ^f thi$ iifandt is anotlier llghlhotise, of the same form, dimensions, and colour as the above, and lilso built of the island limestone. The light, however, has not yet been shown. Heath Point being lowt it dinppeair* below the honson at the distance of a ftw miles, and the lighthouse then appears like a sail off the island. Page 90. POINT PE MONTS, on the north side of the River of St. Lawrence, nearly opposite to Cape Chatte.-.-A tower with a fl:ted lioht, at about 100 fiwt above the level of the tea ; lying S. 53* W. flx>m the 6uter pkrt of Caribou Point ; over which, and to the eaitwArd of it, the land may be seen. From the lighthouse the western extremity of Point de Moq^ betra S, 64" W. about one mile; land when a ship is to the westward of the point, the lighthome will appear in one with the outermost rocks off the same. In the day-time it fiwms • tM>ld, distinct landmark, and Aom this line of beMihg, thips are io the ben Miway ibr aailing up or 4a>i»»4lM snrer. See ftirther, page 109. ^BICQUETTE ISLANO.^A lighthouse having been erected on the weet end ^f the Aaland of Bicquette, in the River St. Lawrence, » toMping light of the first claai was shown thereon for the first time, on the 9th August, 1844; and the light will oootiooe to be shown ^yen night (tqm "unset to funriap, from the 15th April to the I3th Oe$enb«r, in each year. The tower is 7P fe« high, and the light aland* 130 feet above the level ef the aea, the north-west rc^f bearing from i| du« West, U mile. Thi» lig'it wiJ> i«*oIVe at regulated intervals of two minutes. • A nine-pounder gun is placed near the lighthoiise, and will be find every hour duripti foggy weather and aoow. storms. Page 115. GREEN ISLAND, in the River.— On the north point of this ishmd ia a ligbutower, wuh4 fixed Ught, at aboqt 70 feet, from the 15th of ApiU to the 10th of December! Note (t) page tl5, and page 131. SOUTH PILLAR.--A rtvolving light will be shown from the tower lately erected on the South or Stone Pillar, on and after the night of the 28th September, 1843, during the season of the navigation. This light will revolve at regulated intervals of 21 minlites. Page JSQ, ° ^5 TRAVERSE^ near Cape St. Roque.— A floating ligM in the South Traverse, on the edge Of the Bank of St. Roque ; five miles above a chequered buoy, and thice-Mlarieta of amile^elowablackbuoyontliesame. Page 119. Hi-ii^^uM LAKE ST. PIERRE, or St. PKTsk, above Quebec— At about 47 mifef <)iloW Mdnt- Zt LT!*"t'^ *"1" ''"^y indicate the entrance lo the south channel, at tlie wiaterti-ehd oC Lake St Pierre. P«ge 130. ■ ■-i.^,^^i,;M.AM' .i^Ur •♦■ wil PJ t«'; THK PliAEONOLOOY* XXu' '" NOVA SCOTIA ; Southern and Westerji Coasts. OaANBEftUY ISLANP, nmr Oapb Canm.— Ad miUgonal towtr, built of vood, 89 fMt io Mght, painted horiiootally red end white, which exbibiii two ligbu, oue nhQve the other, with Mfand larope and reflecton. Png? ^00. NoU^-thu llghtbouiM of Nova Sootii and New BruMwkk are new painted with bhvk or red Mripea. to diallnguiih the towen iVoon the land i u, aAer the enow la gone off th« land, the Meuniu- latlou agahMt the fiincee, which eencrally run at right angles to the coacti and wbiob continua for wme time after it h«i diMppeareafiront the (lelda themieWct, hare exactly the appearance of a while tower, and flrequenllj mitlead even thoM acquainted with the eoattt. SABLE ISI«ANO, Sioitau. — TheiiginaU used to communicate with the establiehment on Sable Island, by iny veisel tifiting it or passing the island, ar« as follow ;— (For de- scription, see page 165.) A flag at main topasaat or foregallaat onast-head, duuu$ All well en board. aaaia-eaaet head, Are there anj wreoka t main gaff,... , Can a boat get off? osain gaff, half hoiated, Howmanjperaonaon ahorel mainng^ng, , Veaael in diatreaa. foretopnast head Veaael eomiag to the island. fore rigging,... ...«• Areyouin wantofproviaiooaf the maatthead iu the island, That a boat will be off immediately. the mast'head, if kept flying,., AU well on shore. the £e8t ya*d-arm, ..»...•••• Are yon coming to the ialand 1 thaaame,hairhoi8ted, A boat oannot getoff. . the Weat yfrd>arm, , .«..* Not in want of provision. the aame, naif hoisted, ^'.,.*.. In wAnt of proTision. One ball or more, Eaat yard-arm, Ten persons for each ball. '^■''i' Weetyerd*arm, .......... '- Onewreofcermore^ A' iaf w ader ••• ball or mora, Weet yard-arm, One or more of H*M. ahipa. A pendant onder one ball or more, Weat yard arm,*.. ..^, •*.«...,.. One of H.M. packets. The Flag used on th« Island is red, white, and blue, horizontally^ A Union Jack, or any other nag, ia used by the vessel. Any of the above ligtsals, when made, should remain up ten or fifteen, minutes, or until answered. A gnn firM, particalarly in hazy weather, will draw the attention of the inha- bitants. All oiber flaga- nost- be fcqpt doern when aaakiog signals. {Ap-U, 1837.) WEDOE ISLAND, off the entrance of St. Mary's River, to die eastward of Halifiut, is distinguished by a beacon of wood, rising to 140 feet above the sea, covered at the top, and painted while. It may be seen from 6 to 8 miles off. Page 162. DEVIL ISLAND, dn the^ eastern side of the entrance to HtdUiu Haiboor^ a( beacon of vood, painted white, and 50 feet in height. Page 172. SAMBKO' ISLAND, west of Halifax Harbour, an octagonal tower, 197 feet high, #ilh 9 brlUiaot fixed light. Attached is a small party «»f artillery, widi two 24>pouaiders for sigitaK&c. Laulu^e 44« SS' 30", longitude 69^ 82* 30^. Pages 171, 172. hAlIFAX UKKBOVR.-^ I^erbrook Tourer, on Maugher's Qeacb, a circotar tower, with a fixed light, at 58 feet above the level of the sea» as a leading light for the harbour. Pages 171, 172, 173. LURIENBURO.— Upon the S.E. poin^ of Cross Island, sit the entrance of LiinenTiurg Bay, tat 44*' 23^, long. 64* 6' 10", ah octagonal tevrer, paibted red, witb two lights' placed vertioaUy* and 30 feet apart. The lowcrlight is fixed, and the upper so eidlipsed as to show a flash at intervals of a minute, abruptly changing from dark tO' light. First lighted, Dec. 1 , 1889. The island is low and thidcly wooded. See page- 179. LIVERPOQL.-^A UghthomiB, 90 feet high, on Coffin's Island, at the entrance of Liver- pool Harbour ; of octagon shape^ painted red and white horizontally, and exhibiting |j^.]^l- liant light, revolving ODC^ in every two minutes. See paG;e 180. vc CAPE B0S£WAY.r-8helburne Tower, on Cape RosewavK«f an ootmon shape, painted black and white vertically, and exhibits, vertically, two brilliant fixed Tighta; the upper and. larger being at 150 feet itbove the level of the sea, the lover light 36>. feetbflow it. Page 180,,, . :, ^ ■fwiiMvjtftV'jy :»i M^.^fpiJlS'; fvitiB^^hflH-iitfiH svte''* CAPE SABLE, Seal I^la^ip.— A ljghllM»Wi« on the Mg^MI pitrt of the SotttfawraiSeal XXIV fHE PHAHOlHOLOOT, Island, latitod« about 439 24V loDjiitude 65^ 58|. It is of an octagon shape, and 170 feet high, painted white, with a brflliant fixed light. This is the fifst light seen in apptoaching the Bay of Fundy. The very dangerous trA, ' called the Blonde^ Iws about two miles S.S.W. (,magn.) from the lighthouse. Between the rock and island ai» some dangers : the ground is rodcy throughout, and lai^ vessels, there- Ibie, ought not to attempt passing between. Page 185. CAPE VOURCHU, on the western side Of the entrance to Yarmouth, in lat. 43** 47}V long. 66° lO', a lighthouse, which, since the lAth of January, 1840, exhibits a brilliant re- volving light, visible one minute and a quarter, and invisible half a minute. The buildin^^ is painted red and white, vertically, and is elevated 145 feet above the level of the sea. the' beat lights on this ooist : indeed there is no part or the poblie service that bae been betteS attended to than the ligbtboas«s, their lanterns, lamps, and refleetors ; and, aa far aa lighting with oil is concerned, will vie in brilliancy with tboaa of any. similar apparatus in any part of the world. The lanlema, improved lamps, and refleotoni, are highly creditable to the artiaaoa who made them, (at St. John^) and the laudable exertions and perseverance of the lighthouse commissioners are beyond all praise." Note. — All the British lighthouses in the Bay of Fundy are of wood ; and, with the excep- tion of that on PartHdge Island, have all been establiahed since 18t8. The Shape of each, that of Cape ]Jnrag£e excepted, is octagonal ; the last mentioned is square. The hmitems are of iron, with large plate glass, and the lamps argand, with reflectora. The diameters of the towers, at the base, are from 85 to S5 feet, tapering upward to the lanterns. BRYEtl'S ISLAND; Latitude 44<> 14|'.— A lighthouse/painted white, with brilliant fixed light, (in lieu of the old and disgraceful ' fighlhous^,) elevated 90 feet above the lev«( of the sea, and about half a mile N.E. from the N.W. fioint of the island. Page 186. ANNAPOLIS. — A lighthouse on Point Prim, on tlie western side of the entranoe,^wi(b y!j-ed light, at 76 feet above the sea. > r^ The coast heresbout is very bold, and not indented ; the light is therefore intend^ «ihiedy '^ as a guide into Digbv Basin. Renovated, with reflectors, &c., in 188dw Page 167. CAPE ENRAGBE, on the north side of CaiOKECTO Bay.~^A square lighthouse, exh».' biting a brilliant fixed light. The bouse is painted white, and is dtvaled about 120 feet above high water* ■• •; * -^wrt 'ii'-];*ii^'..'«'i-i.jiK»-.>iTo;v 'k •?r»':**<-"f5t!i i -^ "il/.'-'i/^.K '.\k:'i^'^1: QUAKO HEAD, on th«iiOMh side of the Biy of FnndV.— A 1ightho6S6 bn a smaH'' rock near this head, with a brilliant retolving light, established in 1835. ' Ligli full and dark twice in a minute. The lighthouse is painted white and red, in horizontal stripes. Page 189. .■■'■/. : ./S»; ..e^" ■ l:t:: ST. JOHN'S HARBOUR.-^A lighthottlelMiFirtrldgr Island, exhibiting a brifliii^l! ' fixed light, at 110 feet above the levetof the sea, and having a bell, which is tolled in ihitk' weather, l^hc Hothouse is painted red and white, in vertical stripes, page 189. ''^ Beacon I%A<.— Within Partridge island, and upon a spit or bar which eylertds abobt half a mile S.S.E. off Sand Point,and which dries at two-thirdS ebb, stands a beacon tower. This tower shows a fixed light, which is eminently useful to the coasting trade of St. John, and to all other vessels having pilou on board, as it enables them to enter the harbour at all hours of the niffht. The house is painted white and black, in stripes vertically. Tb« light is about 35 feet from high-water mark. , , For the Siomau displayed on the approach of vessels to the harbour, see page 192. <-*^'' POINT LEPREAU, on the nouh sMe of the Bay of Fundy.— A lighthouse, erected in 1831, exhibits On the outer Wooden-Ml Rock, two lantern lights, one at each end of a dwdling-hoiise, 82 feet above the sea, and which, iwhen in one, bear N.N.W. Lat. 43° 8', long. 68° 45'. Page 801. \^j., OWL'S HEAD, on the western side of the Penobscot.— lighthouse, with brilliant fixed ligliu, at 160 feet above the fevel of the sea, the feirway course to which is N.W. by N. It stands at seven miles above White Head. Page 201. PENOBSCOT Harbour Liohts. — One on Broum*t He&d, the western side of the Fox Island Pasfage, with fixed light at 80 feet above high water. Another on Dice's Island, upon the eastern side of the river, at the entrance of Castine Harbour, with fixed light at 116 feet. Page 201. *,* For a continuation of the lAgMi on the coasts of the United States^ the reader in referred to the first volume of the ** Colombian Navigator,'* which contains a Ascription (i\mttd sailing directions for,"^ alt the coa$t westward of the Penobscot, ^c. !0 ADVERTISEMENT. SAILING DIRECTORIES, &c. 1843. The fpUowiog^ Mbmoirb and ]!>ibectories, t|ie productions of the late Mr. John Purut, were proposed by him to form a eomplete seriesy aiKl to be bound in volnmes as described. The dates of thd last editions are iubjotnfid. These now comprise the navigation of all the co&sts from the Arctic Seas to Cape Horn, the Cape of Good Hope, and the Southern Coast of Africa; including the Cattbgat, Baltic, Mbditerranbait, Evxinb, and other inland seas. VotoME I.— 1. Memoir, De^pCive snd Explanatbrr, to accompany the OttieHil Chart of the Northern Ocean, Davis' Strait, and Baffin's Bay j fncladirtg ib«t NavigfttiOrt firom Great Britaia and Ireland to Spitzbergin and the White Sea^ iDclaiiva^ 1830. S. Sailing Directory for the Novra Sea, iaelndtng the Battam Coasts of England, Sootland» &c., 7th Edition, 184S. 3. Sailing Diiectorv for the Catt^at^ Sounds and Belts, 18#3. 4. For the BalUc, 1849. 5. Gulf of Finland, '1843. VoKUME IT.— 1. Saflhg Directory for the English Channel, dlh edition, 1842. i. tot St. Oeoige^ Channel and all the Coasts of freland, 4th edition, 1842. Voiuifs m.— 1. Sailinc Directoty ibv the B«v of Biscay, 1839. 2. Fior Spaia and Portu^ 1839. 8. For the Strait of Gibraltar and Western Division of the Mediterranean Ses, with Additions, 1840. 4. For the Gulf of Venice, and Eastern or LevantiBA Division of the Mediterranean Sea, together vrith the Sea of Marmara, and the Euxineor Bkudc Sm, 1834. ^Additions as above. YotviiE IV.-^Memoir, Deseripfive' aod EVphtnatoiy, to accompany the Chafte of the Atlantic Ocean, and comprisiag Instructions, General and Paiticolar, for the Navigatiotk of thai Sea, with an Appendix, 6tc. 9lh editioa, t84A. ' Volume V. — 1. "The BfiTisa AicaaicAM Navmator,| of &iiliagf Direotoiy for New- foundland, the Gulf aod River of 8t. Lawrence, Nova Sootia, &c., 1846. 2. The Colom- bian Navigator, or Sailing Directory for the American Coasts^aod the West Indies : Vol. i. Nova'Scotiii to Florida and Mexican S^, inclusive; Vol. ft. The Creat AntiTlas, Wind- ward Passages, and Navigation of the Gulf Stream, 1839. ^ VoLVMB VI.r-Tbe CoMMaiAV NAVfcAma, Vokima tho dtind: for theCaribbee Islesy Guyana, Colombia, Mosquitia, the Bay and Gulf of HoMWai, lee., 1880. ViatvUt Vfl.— The New SAtLtBtf DratCTOttT for the Ethiopiie or StoUtNem Atlantic Oeeaiir; eompreh«ndin|[ the Cossu of BratiT, Ice, fittm M^Mnbam to Cape Horn; the Coasla of Otrfnea, Sec. firom Bkttsi Leone to and beydnd the' Cirp4 of Good Hope, and including the Islands between the two Coasts. 1845. shj gel wil hel \ NEWFOUNDLAND, ETC. ie-'M Isl«s» %* TOROUCHOUTTHIS WORK, THE GIVEN LoMOITUDE IS THE LoNOITUDE PROM GreEK- wicH. The Bearings and Courses are those by Compass, unless where OTHERWISE expressed: BUT THOSE GIVEN THUS [E.iV.E,] SIONIFT THE TRUE; AND THE GIVEN DIRECTION OF WiND, TiDE, AND CURRENT, IS TO BE CONSIDERED AS THS TRUE., ThE GIVEN DEPTHS ARE THOSE AT LOW WATER, SPRING TIDE. Variations op the Compass— The Magnetic Variation in the Environs of St. John's is from 26 to 27 degrees West : in Bonavista Bay, from 28 to 29 degrees. In the years 1833-4, near Cape Ray it was 24 degrees West: at the Isle of St. Paulj 23° 45': Magdalen Islands, 23° : Eastern point of Prince Edward Island, 21*^ : Pictou Harbour, 19°: Sydney Harbour, Breton Island, and Cape Breton, 22". Coa$t of Labrador. — Bradore Harbour, 84*' 15' W. : Red Bay, 35«* 30* : Little Meca- tina, 30«» 30' : off Kegashka, 2f* 45' : Mingan Island, 26° : East end of Anticosti,25''30': West end of the same, 24° 30'. River St. lawrence.— Seven Isles, 24° : Cape de Monts, 22° : Father Point, 19» 15' : Port Neuf, IS^ 20' : off the Isle Bic, 18° 40' : atTadousac, on the mouth of the Saguenay, 17°: Isle aux Coudres, 16°: Quebec and Isle of Orleans, 15°: Trois Rivieres, 11°: Lake St. Peter, 10° : Contrecour, 8° 45' : Montreal, 7° 45'. Nova Scotia, &c. — At Halifax it is 17} degrees W. : off Mahone Bay, 17 degrees : near Liverpool Bay, 16 degrees: Cape Sable, Seal Isles, 14 degrees: at St. John's, New Brunswick, 16 degrees: and Penobscot Bay, 12 degrees, W. I.— Of the winds, CURRENTS, ICES, and PASSAGES TO NEWFOUNDLAND, NOVA SCOTIA, and NEW BRUNSWICK, ETC. !• OF TBB WINDS* — The Variable Winds which prevail over all the regions hereafter described, are too generally known and understood to require a particular descrip- tion. The 8upe<-6cial currents are actuated accordinBly, and they vary with winds which ma^ probably be prevalent at a remote distance, and produce that swell of the ocean by which they are commonly preceded. We have heretofore had occasion to notice that, to the southward of Newfoundland, shifts of wind are very common ; and it has frequently happened that, after blowing a gale upon one point of the compass, the wind suddenly shifts to the opposite point, and blows equally strong. It has been known that, while one vessel has been lying-to, in a heavy gale of wind, another, not more than 30 leagues distant, has, at the very same time, been in another gale, eoualiy heavy, and lying-to, with the wind in quite an opposite direction. This, upon Mr. Redfield's theory, is to be understood as applicable to two vessels falling under the two opposite sides or portions of the same storm. In the year 1782, at the time the Vitle de Paritf Cetitaur, Ramilliet, and several other ships of war, either foundered, or were rendered unserviceable, on or near the Banks, to- gether with a whole fleet of West-Indiamen, (excepting five or six,) they were all lying-to, with a hurricane from E.S.E. ; the wind shifted in suddenly to N.N.W.,and blew equally heavy, and every ship lying-to, under a square course, foundered. The winds within the Gulf of St. Lawrence are not so liable to sudden shifts as on the ouUide, or to the eastward, of Breton Island. The weather to the southward of the Magdalen hlandt, between them and Prince Edward Island, is generally much clearer than on the North. Meeting of the two Seas.— The brig Recovery, Captain T. Hamlin, on her return B 2 GENERAL REMARKS AND DIRECTIONS. from New Orleans toward Greenock, 21st April, 1822, was proceeding E.N.E. on the parallel of 40° toward the Grand Bank. In llie first part of the twenty-four hours the weather was moderate, a breeze sprung up at west, and the vessel made all sail. In the middle part strong gales succeeded, still at west, and sail was reduced. At one o.ot. black and gloomy, with rain. At 5, a strong gale from the tastward took the ship aback, and drove her astern against the old sea ; it struck the boat, and broke the larboard davit, and a new sea rising with the shift of wind, the two seas met in dreadful confusion. With a scend forward ihe brig dipped the jib-boom under, and broke it off in the cap; and, with the scend aft again, stove in the cabin window. While all hands were employed, trymg to secure the boat, repeated seas struck her, and at length raised her above the stern, and unshipt the other davit. They then held on the tackle-fall that was fast to her, and dropped her astern, with the hope that a favourable opportunity might occur for taking her in, but she filled and broke adrift. From 5 to 8 the wind continued to blow a gale ; sometimes at East, then at West, and back again repeatedly ; while the vessel was quite unmanage- able, and lying exposed to the contending elements. At 8 a.m. the easterly wind prevailed, and the vessel was then laid-to under close-reefed main topsail, &c. Lat. at noon by ace. 43° 25', long. 53° 0'. At one p.m. of the 22nd it became calm ; the vessel then drifted with the sea, going round and ronnd ; but on the next day the wind was fair at S. W., and the brig proceeded eastward. At one a.Mi. on the 23rd, a* sensible change in the atmosphere and sea was experienced : from which it was concluded that the Recovery had entered on the Grand Bank. At day- light the colour of the water was found to be altered, and a numerous quantity of ice-birds and murrS'Were upon it. On the 31st of October and 1st of November, 1822, the Eeeovery, on her return from New Orleans to London, at 3) degrees more to the southward, and nearly on the same meridians, met with heavy squalls, a strong gale from the N. W., and a high cross sea, which continued for nearly twenty-four hours and to longitude 48°. Hereabout, therefore, all the seaman'9 spirit, vigilance, and skill, are required. Between the meridians of 52° and 47° W., 28ih to 31st July, 1823, Captain Hamlin, in the ship George IV., from the S.W., crossed the parallel of 40° N., all moderate and pleasant weather, with N.W. and westerly winds. Ship George IV., 3d April, 1824, homeward. "Squally and unsettled, with lightning. At noon, lat. 40° 14', long. 50° 33'. Next day, variable, with heavy showers. On the 5lh. heavy showers of hail, succeeded by a smart breeze from the North. Lat. at noon, 40° 28', long. 46i°." PHENOMENA westward of Newfoundland, as described by Captain Bayfield. — Among the difficulties of the navigation in the Gulf of St. Lawrence are the fogs and ices. In spring the entrance and eastern parts of the Gulf are frequently coveted with ice, and vessels are sometimes beset for many days. Being unfitted for contending with this danger, they often suffer from it, and are occasionally lost ; but all danger from ice is far less than that which arises from the prevalence of fogs. These may occur at any time during the open or navigable season, but are most frequent in the early part of summer ; they are rare, and never of long continuance, during westerly winds, but seldom fail to accompany an easterly wind of any strength or duration. This observation is, however, subject to restric- tion, according to locality or season. Thus, winds between the south and west, which are usually clear weather winds above Aniicosti, are frequently accompanied with fog in the eastern parts of the Gulf. Winds between the south and east are almost always accom- panied with rain and fog in every part. E.N.E. winds above Point de Monts, at the mouth of the river, are often E.S.E. or S.E. winds in the Gulf, being changed in direction by the high lands of the south coast, and have, therefore, in general, the same foggy character. Tills is said of winds of considerable strength and duration, and which may extend over great distances. Moderate and partial fine weather winds may occur without fog at any season, and in any locality. In the early part of the navigable season, especially in the months of April and May, with clear weather, N.B. winds are of frequent occurrence, and they sometimes occur at other seasons, in every part of the Gulf and river. The fogs sometimes last several days in succession, and to a vessel either running up or beating down, during their continuance, there is no safe guide but the constant use of the deep sea lead, with a chart containing correct soundings. Thtfogt which accompany ea$terly gales extend high up into the atmosphere, and cannot be looked over from any part of the rigging of a ship. They however are not so thick as GENERAL REMARKS AND DIRECTIONS. 3 those whicli occur in calms after a strong wind, and which are frequently so dense as to i-onceul a vessel within hail ; whilst the former often, but nut always, admit the land or other objects to be distinguished at the distance of half a luile, or more, in the day-time. The dense Jogs which occur in calms, and even in very light winds, often extend only to small elevations above the sea ; so that it sometimes happens, when objects are hidden at the distance of 50 yards from the deck, they can be plainly seen by a person 50 or €0 feet up the rigging. In the months of October and November the fogs and rain, that accompany easterly gales, are replaced by thick snow, which causes equal embarrassment to the navigator. During the navigable season, the prevailing winds are either directly up or directly down the estuary of St. Lawrence, following the course of the chains of high lands on either side of the great valley of the river. Thus a S.E. wind in the Gulf becomes E.S.E. between Anticosti and the south coast, E.N.B. above Point de Monts, and N.E. above Green Island. The westerly winds do not appear to be so much guided in direction by the high lands, excepting along the south coast, where a W.S.W. wind at the Isle Bic Iws been seen to become West, W.N.W. and N.W. on running down along the high and curved south coast, until it became a N.N.W. wind at Cape Gasp^. These winds frequently blow strong for three or four days in succesnion ; the westerly winds being almost always ac- companied with fine dry, clear and sunny weather; the easterly winds as frequently with the contrary, cold, wet, and foggy. In the spring the easterly winds prevail most ; frequently blowing for several weeks in succession. As the summer advances the westerly winds become more frequent, and the S.W. wind may be said to be the prevailing wind in summer in all parts of the river and gulf. Liglit south winds take place occasionally; but north winds are not common in summer, although they sometimes occur. Steady north winds do not blow frequently before September, excepting for a few hours at a time, when they generally succeed easterly winds which have died away to a calm, forming the com- mencement of strong winds, and usually veering to the S.W. The N.W. wind is dry, with bright clear sky, flying clouds, and showers. After the autumnal equinox, winds to the northward of west become more common, and are theu often strong steady winds of considerable duration. In the months of October and November the N.W. wind frequently blows with great violence, in heavy squalls, with passing showers of hail and snow, and attended with sharp frost. Thunderstorms are not uncommon in July and August; they seldom last above an hour or two; but the wind proceeding from them is, in general, violent and sudden, particularly when near the mountainous part of the coast; sail should, therefore, be fully and quickly reduced on their approach. Strong winds seldom veer from one quarter of the compass to another directly, or nearly contrary : in general they die away by degrees to a calm, and are succeeded by a wind in the opposite direction, ft is not here meant that they may not veer to the amount of several points. N.W. winds seldom or never veer round by north and N.E. to east and S.E. ; but they do frequently, by degrees, to the S.W., after becoming moderate. S.W. winds seldom veer by the N.W. and north to the eastward, but sometimes by the south to S.E. and east. Easterly winds generady decrease to a calm, and are succeeded by a wind from the opposite diien ri 4 GENERAL REMARKS AND DIRECTIONS. follow each other in quick succession, and from opposite quarters. The marine barometer, which is at all times of great use to the navigator, becomes particularly so in such seasons." 2. Atlantic ^ &c.— It has been shown in our volume on the Navigation of the Ocean, how the Currents generally set, from Hudson's Strait, «c., to the Eastern Coast of Newfoundland, and through the Strait of BelUIsle into the Gulf of St Lawrence. Hence it may be seen, that they also affect the western navigation of the island ; and, with the vast ebb cf the River of St. Lawrence, which constantly sets down, with great strength, into the G.ilf, they produce an accumulation of water, which can escape by the southward only. In the early part of the year, when the snows and ices are in a melting state, the outset must be considerably increased ; it may, therefore, be pre- stumed, that there is, in this season, a considerable eiBux or stream of water from the Guif, setting to the south, S.W., and south-eastward. Captain Fornton, a commander who has long sailed in the Newfoundland trade, states that a branch of current, which appears to come from Hudson's Bay, always sets to the south-westward, off the eastern coast of Newfoundland : sometimes with a velocity of two miles an hour. Its strength, however, varies with the direction and force of the wind. Passing down the eastern coast of Newfoundland, it turns round Cape Race, and sets thence, along the south side of the island, until it meets with the current from the St. Lawrence, a little to the westward of St. Pierre and Miquelon Islands. The combined action of these two currents, with that of the Stream to the southward, may, perhaps, produce that counter current which has been found along the inner edge of the Gulf Stream : but, be this as it may, it is very probable, that it is owing to the influence of the Hudson's Bay current that so'many shipwrecks happen on the south coast of Newfound- land, about Cape Pine, &c. For ships coming from the St. Lawrence and thence along the coast of Newfoundland, meet this current ; and, if it happen that they have calms, or light or head winds, it sets them imperceptibly to the westward of their reckoning ; and when, supposing that thev are to the eastward of Cape Race, they alter their course more to the nortnward ; should the weather, sn it often is, be foggy, they get on shore at a time when they consider themselves clear of the land.* At times, it seems, the westerly current may extend farther than the limit above described. In a letter from a captain of the Royal Navy, dated Breton Uland, 13th May, 1822, we have the following expressions : — " It frequently happens that a ship bound from England to Quebec, strikes soundings on the Banks of Newfoundland, and shapes her course thence to pass between Cape North, on Breton Island, and Cape Ray, on Newfoundland, into the Gulf of St. Lawrence, without seeing the land, which is hid in fog ; and;, unable to make a proper allowance for a current that sometimes runs at the rate of Jour mites an Aour, is swept away to the westward, and runs, with a leading wind, on our iron-bound shores, when her commander fancies he is steering directly into the gulf; a misfortune that is too often announced by the bodies of the unhappy mariners, and the fragments of their vessels with which our shores are strewed .f • Substance of a communication to and from the late Mr. Wm. Heron, of Greenock. f This reflemng current has usually been considered as an eddv caussd by the Gulf Stream, but '«> several circumstances are incompadble with that supposition, it has attracted some enquiry as to its source; and although we are not aware of any actual experiments that have been made, which would set the question at rest, yet the cone irrence of many unsencmena will point toleraltly clearly to the direction we are to look for its origin. Mr. W. C. Redneld drew up a summary of remarks and sug- gestions for the observers of the United States' Exploring Expedition in 1838; from that paper we will make a few extracts : — " . . . . From what source is that south-westerly current derived, which commonly prevails along the coast of the United States, in the direction which is opposite to the Gulf Stream ? •< I am aware that it is usually considered by seamen as an eddy current, derived from the Gulf Stream ; but from this view I am compelled to dissent, for, in the first place, this current never assumes the gyrating form of an eddy ; but continues its course, when unototructed by gales, in a direction which is generally parallel to the coast. But, secondly, in case this current be derived from the Gulf Stream, it must necessarily partake of the same elevated temperature ; whereas, the reduc- tion of temperature which occurs on crossing the north-western limit of the Gulf Stream is most remarkable, and is almost without a parallel in the Atlantic, except in the immediate vicinity of ice. •< It appears vain to allege the proximity of soundings or shallows as explaining this extraordinary change of temperature, for this cannot avail if the waters of the counter-current be derived from the Gulf Stream, to say nothing of the erroneous character of the position here nodced. < I, a vessei ber, 1835. lich carried ited by the )n on deck, lercy of the re need not i fatal rocks sels, it may the north- 1 to occupy, tied for onSy nd operating wn that the to that here, iperintendent en*, in shoal t reaches the treum, which [une. I have 30', running to westward, ressels lost on when, in fact, , may still, it m" says Mr. )wing for them to be the only e had the wind lund that, from ig !8 W. 4" S. ; >ti», it is about ect course more )t checked during winds, both here it very variable — TO XOUTII AMEKICA. 9 tedious and difficult than n circuitous route ; and the best passages have been made by pursuing a high norlherly course. It seems probable, from nil that we have said on the Winds and Currents, that, on prosecuting a north-westerly course, from the Bank of Channel Soundings, the winds and currents, respectively, may counteract and balance each other; that, on a farther prosecution of the same course, the winds will be found less westerly, and therefore more favourable, than in the more southerly parallels : and that, in advancing toward the mouth of Davis's Strait, the advantages both of wind and current may be combined. Caution must be taken not to advance too near the Eastern coast of Newfoundland, if bound to New Brunswick or the Southern ports; nor to the Eastern coast of Breton Island, as here the vessel may be swept round by the strong westerly currents, which have been described, and which, when understood, instead of producing mischief, may prove highly advantageous in facilitating the ship's course. The propriety of these arguments has been confirmed by experience, in one hundred and four passages made to and from New Brunswick, &c., by Lieutenant Chas. Hare, of the Royal Nnvy, of which the last was in the year 1842. Annexed is a copy of that gen- tleman's communication. " Ships from Scotland, in the spring of the year, and bound to New Brunswick, have always arrived sooner than those from the English Channel, which is attributed to their being more to the northward ou leaving the land. ** Ships from Liverpool generally arrive before those which sail from the English Chan- nel, the cause being the same. '* In the Spring of the year, I would never go to the southward of latitude 46*^ or 47° until I reached longitude 37° or thereabout ; then edge to the southward as far as latitude 43° in order to avoid the ice-bergs, keeping a very strict look out ; this parallel (43°) I should endeavour to preserve, or nearly so, but nothing to the southward, until up to Cape Sable, Nova Scotia ; for it carries you to a safe and proper distance from Sable Island, a place that cannot be too much dreaded. In this track you will be without the northern edge of the Gulf-stream, and assisted by a south-westerly current from the banks until past that island. " In the Fall of the year, my track is far more to the northward than in the spring. On leaving the land as late as the middle of October, or thereabout, I generally steer to the north-westward until I get as far north as 56°, and until I enter the longitude 30°, then edge to the southward, to enter the Banks in latitude 46°, shaping again a course to pass about sixty miles to the southward of Sable Island, as above. If bound to Hali- fax, and very sure of my latitude, I might be tempted to pass to the northward of Sable Island ; but, at all events, it would be at a great risk ; and I should not, under any cir- cumstances, recommend a stranger to attempt it ; as the weather is mostly foggy, and the set of the currents unaccountable. The soundings on Banquereau are incorrectly laid down in every chart that 1 have yet seen ; being, in fact, within one hour's sail of the N.E.Bar of Sable Island ;. from which cause I once very narrowly escaped shipwreck. Numerous gannets are always hovering about this island, and are a very excellent indica- tion' of your near approach to it, particularly on the Soutli side. *' By crossing the Banks thus far North, you will find the advantage as vou approach the longitudes of Newfoundland and Nova-Scotia : the strong N.W. and North gales having then commenced, you will frequently be compelled to lie-to for two or three days : and should then insure sufficient drift, before you are blown into the strong influence of the Gulf-stream ; which would be the case at a few degrees to the southward, and inevi- tably io a S.S.E. direction, at an inconceivable rate. Last November (1824) the case occurred : the vessel being hove-to, under main topsail and storm trysail, to the westward of the Banks, in latitude 45°, and was, in four days, swept into latitude 39i°, conse- quently into the Gulf-stream ; when the longitude became also considerably affected, and I took the first opportunity of making a N.N.W. course, to get out of it as soon as possible. " To prove the advantages of a northern track, late in the full of the year^ I may notice that I have, in one or two instances, read, in the American newspapers, the accounts of very long passages experienced by ships which met heavy gales in the latitudes of 35° and 38°, when several vessels were disabled, and others suffered loss of sails; ypt, on the C 10 PASSAGES FROM ENGLAND) ETC. tame %, in latitude Si*', I had moderate weather from the N.N.R. with top-gallant studding sails set} which strongly encourages me to believe that the blowing weather, incident to approaching winter, commences southerly, and inclines northerly as the season advances, and not the reverse ; an hypothesis generally formed by English ship-masters, but, in my opinion, certainly erroneous. " I am farther of opinion that the influence of the Oulf-stream, in the parallels from latitude 35° to 42^, whether from the warmness of the water or other natural causes, has a strong tendency to attract the wind from a western direction ; as I have invariably found the wind more alterative in the northern latitudes before- mentioned than the southern ones; and it unquestionably roust be allowed, by all mariners of any observa- tion, that gales experienced in the Gulf-stream, or its vicinity, blow with much greater violence than they do in that part of the northern Atlantic not under its influence : be- sides, the squalls from the southward or S.W. are much more aadden and heavy, and near the Banks they are attended with dangerous lightning. The thermometer (an in- strument easily understood) is of the greatest importance for ascertaining your approach to it; and, if bound to the West, I would, for my own part, endeavour tc ivold its effects as cautiously as I would a lee-shore : for it may be depended on, that no ship, however well she may sail, will effect westing in the Gulf-stream with a wind from that quarter ; and it is to be remembered that its velocity is accelerated according to the strength of those winds ; and its extent in breadth, at a few degrees to the westward of the Azores, is many more degrees than is commonly supposed. " These observations, I hope, may be useful to my brother mariners engaged in these voyages ; and permit me to say, that they are grounded on the experience of at least one hundred times crossing the Atlantic, in his Majesty's and the merchant service, and in the command of vessels in both ; atone time, in one of nearly four hundred tons burthen, the fFaterloo, owned in St. John's, New Brunswick ; and, as the Custom Books at Liverpool can testify, landed four full cargoes in thirteen following months ; which, including the time required to discharge the same, then loaded outward to St. John's, there discharge and load home again, leaves but very little time for the ship to cross the Atlantic eight times in fourteen months, which, in fact, was done. " Still further, in corroboration of my approved northern track, allow me to observe that, in the fall of 1823, by keeping in a high latitude, the brig Ward, myself master, also owned in New Brunswick, performed a voyage out and home in seventy-two days. The same vessel likewise, on the 3rd of October, 1824, left the English Channel, and arrived again in the Downs on the 3rd of January following. " I must add, that a strong well-found and well-manned vessel alone can perform these voyages ; for they must be maintained with unremitting attention and perseverance. " The necessity and propriety of the above remarks was particularly exemplified by the IFard, w'nich, on her passing through the Downs, in 1824, left ships there which were bound to the westward, weather>bound, and found them there on her return, having been driven back by adverse winds ; while she, getting out of the Channel, performed with ease a pio perous voyage to St. John's, New Brunswick, and back, exactly in three months, assisted by chronometer, thermometer, &c. " In the month of June and beginning of July, and sometimes later, the ices from the Arctic Seas are frequently coming down from the northward in dangerous masses. lu the same season the fishing vessels are very numerous upon the Bank, on and about the parallel of 45° N. ; consequently, vessels bound to the eastward, from Nova Scotia, &c., will avoid both, and most safely cross the Grand Bank at this time of the year, by keeping in, or not proceeding to the northward of, latitude 44**." The preceding remark, by Captain Hare, has been enforced by the pen of an intelligent writer,* who has said, " Although the voyage to and from North America, between tiie parallels of 60° and 40<*, has always been attended with a degree of peril, from masses of ice which drift to the southward, during the summer months from the polar regions, yet many an unwary mariner makes his run across the Atlantic without any apprehension of meeting these floating dangers, or without sufficiently exercising a proper discretion and vigilance to i^uard against coming in collision with them. This is not mere conjecture, but the in- ormation of persons who annually perform the voyage, beside the result of my own ob- • *Atlanticar Nautical Magazine, June, 1833. gallant ealher, season laateri, s riom causes, rariably lan tlie jbserva- greater ce : be- ivy, and (an in- pproacli Is effects however quarter ; of those is many I in these least one nd in the rthen, the Liverpool uding the discharge ntic eight erve that, aster, also ys. The id arrived rortn these :e. ied by the hich were ving been 1 with ease e months, >s from the lasses. In I about the cotia, &c., by iceeping I intelligent of 60° and lich drift to an unwary teting these ngilance to but the in- my own ob- ICE-UERGS AND ICES. H servation, in accidents which have repeatedly occurred to vessels between Newfoundland and England, and in the number of missing ships on this route. Commanders of ships should therefore bear in mind the imperative necessity there is for using their utmost vigilance and attention when crossing the above-namedf parallels, espeGialiy between the meridians of 30° and 60° West, to guard against coming m contact with these formidable dangers of the ocean. « The New York packet ihip$, well supplied with every essential equipment, and elegantly fitted for the accommodation of passengers, when making their winter voyage from Liverpool, keep in high latitudes until nearing Newfoundland. This they do ror the two-fold object of avoiding the tempestuous weather so nnerally experienced to the southward, and of obtaining fairer winds ; and thus, bv slipping within the mighty stream from the Florida Channel, they evade its retarding influence. The voyage by this route is shortened ; and, although bad weather must be expected, it is not so violent as farther south ; besides which, the eastern current is avoided. I believe it is an unusual thing to meet with ice in this part of the Atlantic in the winter ; but we have the following recent instance to the contrary, so that a look-out should be kept in that season, as well as in th« summer, by vessels making the voyage. " It appears that the Emulout packet, on the 26th of February, 1833, met with much field-ice on the coast of Nova-Scotia; and in the latitude of 43° N. and long. 49" W., those on board were much surprised by falling in with a large quantity of strongly packed icCf which reduced the vessel's way to 6^ and 7 knots, from sailing at the rate of 9 knots, under ci'ose-reefed main-topsail and reefed foresail. On the 4th of March, she fell in with three bergs, of large dimensions, in a run of 95 miles ; and at nine the same evening; she was obliged to pass between the two easternmost of these before heaving-to for the night; after which, by keeping a more northerly course, no more of these dangerous floating masses were seen. '* From all accounts it seems that the greatest danger is to be apprehended in the vicinity of the Banks of Newfoundland ; and this, as every navigator knows, is increased by a dense fog which generally pervades the atmosphere in that quarter, and, of cou^'se, shortens the distance of vision to a very circumscribed limit." The following note has been lately introduced in our Charts of the Atlantic Ocean. " ICE-BEROS and Ices.— In the season between March and July, those vast masses of ice and tremendous ice-bergs, which descend with the current from the north-western regions, are found upon and to the eastward of the Newfoundland Bank, sometimes even to the parallel of 40° North. "The indications of an ice-berg are, — 1. A natural effulgence, which frequently renders them visible, at some distance, even in the darkest night. At a short distance this efful- gence may appear like a white cloud, extending over, or nearly over, the vessel's masts. " 2. A considerable decrease in the temperature of the water, as shown by the thermo- meter, in comparison with the heat of the adjacent sea and with the air above. '* The roaring of the sea at the base of a berjj, which, excepting in a steamer, with its paddles in action, may be heard, by an attentive listener, when afar off. "To fast sailing vessels, and steamers in particular, these monitions maybe useful. Such will, therefore, in the season, avoid the higher parallels of latitude, as prudence may dictate." A lengthened course, on a toutherly parallel, between the meridians of 42° and 56° may insure safely. The Ice-blink, or effulgence of light emanating from, and seen over, congregated ices,— the formation of ice-bergs, — and the general phenomena of the Northern Ocean,— are copiously described in our * Memoir * and Nautical Instructions for that Ocean, pages 43 to 61. The season of 1842 was peculiarly distinguished by the e£9ux of the Northern ices, and brief notices of the following facts are subjoined as additional cautions to future navigators. The HARVEST HOME and Lady of the Lake, wrecked in 1833.— On the 11th of May, 1833, the Lima, Captain Mardon, sailed from Newfoundland. On the morning of the 13th of May, in lat. 46° 20', long. 45° 50', when about 400 miles from Newfoundland, being completely surrounded with ice, their attention was aroused by hearing a gun fired, shortly after which they descried a boat at some distance. Thid Captain instantly hove-to, till the latter came alongside, when he took the individuals in her on board. They reported themselves to be the second mate and twelve of the crew of the Harvest Home, Captain IS ICE-BERGS AND ICES. v,r=» I Hall, of Newcastle, from London, for Miramichi. They informed Captain Mardon, that, on the 9lh of May, the Harvest Home was slnick by a piece of ice, winch stove in her bows. All hands were immediately put to the pumps, by which means lliey succeeded in keeping the vessel afloat for two days, at the expiration of which time the second mate and twelve of the crew quitted her in the long-boat, the captain and first mate having come to a determination of remaining on board. After they had been out one night, being loih to leave the latter in such a perilous situation, they returned to the vessel and requested the captain and mate to leave her, but they persisted in their determination, saying, "That they would stick to her white a timber remained afloat." They had, however, got the jolly-boat ready in case the danger should become imminent. The crew having again pushed off, they became bewildered amongst the masses of ice by which they were surrounded, and totally uncertain what course to steer. On the next day they again fell in with their own vessel, which they had mistaken for another sail. This time they found that the captain and m'ate had left her. Two of the crew new went on board ; and while they were busy, endeavouring to get more water and provisions, they were surprised at the sight of a boat, containing about thirty individuals, approaching in an opposite direction ; they immedi- ately boarded the vessel, having, as subsequently appeared, done so in the hope of succour. They proved to be the captain and crew, and part of the passengers (including two females) of the Iflrfy of the Lake, of Aberdeen, bound from Belfast for Quebec, with upward of two hundred passengers on board. Those who had boarded the wreck of the ITarvest Home, when they saw the state she was in, with her hold full of water, made a simulta- neous rush to return to the boat, which was at that moment pushed off, and several of them were precipitated into the water. One of them, however, was fortunate enough to make good his leap into the boat which contained the crew of the Harvest Home, and he arrived in Liverpool, in the Lima. He states that the Lady of the Lake struck upon the ice, and immediately filled, when the captain and crew took to the boat, leaving the sinking vessel crowded with the remainder of the despairing and shrieking passengers, to the number of one hundred and sixty or one hundred and seventy. The crew of the Harvest Home state, that after they left their vessel the last time, they saw nothing more of the other boat. Several of the individuals who had fallen into the sea when the latter was pushed off were drowning, but it was impossible to render them any assistance. The PRESIDENT, 1841.— The celebrated and unfortunate Preaidettt, steamer, sailed from New York, March llth, 1841, with 120 persons, and has not since been heard of, nor the least vestige of her discovered. It has since been conjectured, either that she parted a-midships from want of strength beneath the great weight of her machinery, or, more probably, from a sudden and impetuous collision with an ice-berg, by which, stem foremost, she instantly foundered, with all on board. The first opinion is, however, the most £;enerally prevalent. The WILLIAM BROWN, 1841.— The William Brmon, from Lirerpool to Philadel- phia, struck on an iceberg and foundered in April, 1841. On striking, tne passengers and crew instantly took to the boats; thirty-three passengers, tlie mate, and eight of the crew, to the long-boat ; the captain, three of the crew, and eleven passengers, to the jolly-boat ; all the rest sunk with the vessel. The boats parted in the night ; and some days alter, the mate and crew determined to throw seventeen of the passengers overboard, in order to lighten the boat, which they ^;;complished in a most horrid and revolting manner. One hour after this catastrophe the ship Crescent fell in with them, and saved the survivors. Of the jolly-boat no more is known 1 The GREAT WESTERN, April, 1841.— The <• Great Western,** steam ship. Captain James Hosken, on Sunday the 8th of April, 1841, at 6 p. m. steering west, saw an ice-berg on the starboard bow ; at 7 h. 30 m. passed it ; at that time four or five otliers were in sight; at Q h. 15 m. passed several small pieces of ice. In a few minutes after, the ship was surrounded with light field ice, and went on slowly, with the hope of getting through, but it became mudi thicker, and closely packed : but, at 10 h. 15 m. she succeeded in get- ting her head to the eastward, and by 11 was entirely clear. From that time went slowly, passing several ice-bergs : the night at times very clear : the aurora borealis very bright. At 3 h. 30 m. of the text morning, again embayed in the ice ; stopped, hauled short round on the keel, and steered out E. by S., coasting the ice for five or six miles; at 4h. 20 m. kept her to the westward, running through innumerable ice-bergs, until 8 h. 30 m. when she passed the last ice-berg and point of the field ice. When the sun rose the ice was visible as far as the eye could reach, in an unbroken line .'li^;;S§, ICE-BERGS AND ICES. 13 from N.E. by E. by the northward to N.VV. by \V. : at the same time, ice-bergs innumerable and magnificent were seen in every direction. Tliese ices were to the S.S.E. of the Grand Bank of Newfoundland ; the first seen was in latitude 43°, longitude 48i°,and the last in lat. 42" 20', long. 50°. There appeared to be an unbroken field of that extent, and it seems to have extended to lat. 40^°, where it was seen on the morning of the 18th by Captain Bailly, in the American packet ship * United States.' Captain Hosken, in his report, adds, "Several other ships fell in with it in the same longitude, and were entirely stopped, giving them an opportunity of killing seals, which were on it in great numbers." Some of the ice>bergs were estimated by Captain Hosken as little, if at all, less than a mile long, and from 150 to 200 feet high. This field of ice was in large masses, some of them not less than 20 feet square by six feet thick, or more. The temperature of the water, when within two miles of the ice-berg first seen, fell sud- denly from 50 to 36 degrees ; air, 40 to 36 degrees. When in the ice the water was 25**, air 28°. During the remainder of the night and the following morning the water was ;iot higher than 30°, nor the air higher than 32°. Imme- diately afler passing the last ice the water became 36 and the air 42 degrees. The LONDON, arrived at Liverpool, 3rd June, 1841, struck, on the 12th of May, against an ice-berg, near the S.E. side of the Grand Bank, in latitude 43°, long. 50}% stove in the larboard bow, and lost bowsprit, main-topmast, &c. In the same season, the Juliet, from Newfoundland, was a fortnight locked up in the ice, without seeing water. ORPHEUS, Pauline, and Isabella. — Captain Cole, of the Orpheui, who arrived at New York, in June, 1841, reported that, in latitude 47° 30', long. 49°, weather foggy, found the ship among ice-bergs, and continued sailing among ice for five days. Some were 100 feet high, and fields several miles long. Was obliged to steer south to get clear of it. The Bremenese ship Pauline fell in with several islands of ice on the 18th of May, one of them a berg 1 60 feet above the water and two miles long. The ship Isabella, Meredith, from London to Quebec, was struck by an ice-berg on the 9th of May, in lat. 42° 2', long. 43° 45'. The ice broke through the bows, and caused the ship to fill with water so fast, that the crew had barely time to take to the boats, without water, provisions, or cIothing4 The ship immediately went down, or disappeared in the fog. The crew continued in the boat, at the mercy of the waves, until the afternoon of the 11th, when they were picked up by the Kingaon^ of Hull, bound to Pictou, attd kindly treated. They arrived at Pictou, one man excepted, who died in the boat. The ACADIA, in 1842.— On the 16th of May, 1842, Captain Alex. Ryrie, in the Acadia, off the eastern side of the Grand Bank, in latitude 46°, longitude 47°, saw nearly a bundled ice-bergs, some of them of large size, and one bearing so strong a resemblance, in shape and apparent magnitude, to St. Paul's in London, that it was once named after that celebratea cathedral. The dome was perfect, and it required no extraordinary stretch of imagination to supply the turrets, pinnacles, and other [»rts of the building. On the homeward passage of the Acadia to Liverpool, .Tune 6th, the same object was seen, and the immediate exclaoaation on board was, ** Iliere is our old friend, St. Paul's." In the interim between the two views the ice-berg bad drifted about 70 miles. In our * Atlantic Memoir,' 1845, pages 446 to 448, we have given a detail of many other instances in which ships have been lost or materially damaged by the ices; and we particu< larly recommend to notice the important remarks of Lieut. Evans, R.N., given in pages 448 and 449 of that work. PRESERVATION of Life at Sea.— We shall conclude this part of our subject by noticing that, on the 20th of September, 1842, it was announced that a letter had been received at Lloyd's from Lieut. Edw. Jennings, R.N., suggesting the general adoption, in rougli weadier, of lifeJines bei>>g led fore and i^> both to wiadward and leeward, so Uiat the men may have something to lay hold of in passing from one end of the vessel to another. In addition to this, he advises ^at eaon man be famished with a belt, made gasket fashion, about a fathom and a half long. The utility of this is shown by the wearer when in an exposed situation, such as on the foNcastle, conning, steering, &c., taking two hay-hitches with it, to ciUtcr the life-line or any of the standing rigging, &c. He observes, f i 14 ISLAND AND BANKS OF NEWFOUNDLAND. that such a belt could not interrere with the wearer's duty aloft, as at such times the end might be wound round the body and tucked in, so as to avoid inconvenience to the wearer. This hint is worthy of serious notice, and is creditable \o its author. GULF of St. LAWRENCE, &c.— Those bound to the Gulf of Si. Lawrence, after passing to the southward of the Virgin Rocks, on the Grund Bank and the Island of St. Pierre, should keep a middle course between Newfoundland and Breton Island ; not for- getting what has been heretofore said on the Winds and Currents ; recollecting, also, that the harbours on the coast, westward of Fortune Bay, are impeded with dangers ; there are many rocks about the entrances, and most of the harbours are imperfectly known. The rocks are not to be seen in thick weather, and fogs very much prevail on the coast. Commanders bound to the GulfmM do well to observe that, off the South Coast of Newfoundland, between the meridians of 55° and 55° 35', and the parallels of 45o 10* and 46*^ 15', is a deep gully in the sea, extending in a N.N.E. and S.S.W. direction, and separating the Bank of St. Pierre from the Green Bank. The method adopted ht/ the French vetteh bound to St. Piene,for making that island, i$ atfoUowB : — From the longitude of 53*' W., in latitude 45°, they steer a N.W. course (by compass) which carrres them across the Green Bank, in about 43 and 44 fathoms of water ; and when on the meridian of 55° 15', in about 45° 47' N. they suddenly deepen their water, from 40 to 80 fathoms. A farther run on the same course, of about ten miles, carries them across this gully, when they shoalen their water again to 35 and 30 fathoms ; and, after a farther run of 23 miles, they steer about N.N.E. directly for the island, and seldom or never miss it. {See the Chart.) Those who have lost their reckonings, on finding this gully, which may be known by the water shoaling on the east and west sides of it, an experiment that is frequently made for ascertaining whether they are actually in it or not, may safely take it as a,/resh departure. Commanders, not being aware of it, when they have found their water deepen from the Green Bank to the westward, have imagined themselves entering the Gulf of St Lawrence ; and, by steering a course too far to the northward, have been lost to the eastward of Cape Ray, on the rocks of Newfoundland. The length of the gully is about sixty miles, in a N.N.E. and S.S.W. direction (by compass), and the middle of it is in latitude 45° 35', and longitude 55° 20'. — Communication of the French Commandant to Captain Sir Richard Grant, ILN., 1833, corrected by the new Chart. The little iilandofSt. Paul, which lies to the north-eastward of Cape North, now distin- guished by its lighlliouses, is bold-to, steep, and high ; and» with a good look-out in the day-time, cannot be considered as dangerous even in thick weather. The land of Breton Island is very high, and though fogs are about it frequently, it is seldom so much obscured as not to be seen in time. On entering the Gulf, the Magdalen and Bird Islands will be seen, as they lie in the direct course from Cape flotih to the River St. Lawrence. There is, in clear weather, a safe passage between the Bird Islands and the Magdalens ; but, in thick weather, it is advisable to keep either to the southward or northward of both, as the wind may permit. In Pleasant Bay, on the S.E. side of the Magdalen Islands, there is a clear and good anchorage, very near the shore ; and it is a very safe place for vessels to ride in, with a westerly wind, and infinitely preferable to beating aoout in the Gulf with a foul wind. There is a safe passage into it between Amherst Island and Entry Island, as fully explained hereafter. As the weather to the southward of these islands, between them and Prince Edwaid Island, is generally much clearer than on the North, the passage that way is preferable, particularly after the early part of the year, when S.W. winds mostly prevail. II. The island and BANKS of NEWFOUNDLAND. GENERAL REMARKS.— Nbwfoumdlaiid is, in general, a variegated and rugged country. The shores are indented by broad and deep bays entering from forty to fifty miles into the body of the island. The western coast is generally rugged and lofiy, but the eastern side of the island consists principally of low hills. The climate is humid, and ISLAND AND BANKS OF NEWFOUNDLAND. 15 especially disagreeable on the setting in and breaking up of winter, and when the fields of ice, which float from north to south during the months of April and May, are near the coast, and the wind is from seaward. The heat in summer is often very great. There are tracts of alluvial soil along the banks of the rivers, but, from the nature of the climate, agri- culture will always be a secondary branch of industry, as the fisheries on the coast are a more profitable pursuit than the cultivation of an inhospitable soil. In the solitary tracts of the island the most perfect silence prevails. At times the wind falls to a calm, and the sky appears cloudless. At such a time the Aurora by night appears occasionally in all its splendour, and its rays appear to proceed, not from any point in the north, but shooting upward at ri^ht angles to the surface of the earth. The efiect of this exhibition in the sky is reflected m the still waters with majestic brilliancy. The population is estimated to amount to 100,000 persons, of whom between 80,000 and 90,000 are of British and Irish descent, the remainder being composed of French residents and a hundred or two individuals of Indian blood. " It is generally supposed in England that Newfoundland is constantly enveloped in fog and wet mist ; nothing, however, can be farther from the truth. The summers are frequently so hot and dry, that from want of rain the grass perishes ; the summer of 1840 was one of these ;— and the nights are usually splendid ; whilst, in winter, fog is very rarely seen. " Winter may really be said to commence here toward the latter end of November only ; the fires are comfortable adjuncts during most of that month, and its severity begins after Christmas, runs through January and February, and becomes less and less stern until the middle of April, when it ceases altogether. In the winter of 1840, ploughing was going on after Christmas. The winter of 1841-2 was unusually changeable, and deluges of rain, storms of wind, and some share of snow, characterised it. March was also a very cold month, and characterised by an unusually furious snow storm. In 1836 the number of acres in cultivation was 11,062, and their produce 10,300 bushels of oats, above a million bushels of potatoes, and nearly 7,000 tons of hay. The number of horses was 1,551, of horned cattle 5,835, and of sheep 3,103. The inhabitants are for the most part dependent for provisions upon importation. In fact, if it were not for the fisheries, the island would not probably be settled at all ; and as it is, large num- bers resort to it only during the fishing season, and leave it during the winter. The settlements are all upon the coast, the grand occupation of the population being exclusively in the fisheries, and in those branches of industry connected therewith. The peninsula of Avalon, on the S.E., which is united to the main body of the island by a low isthmus little more than three miles wide, is the chief seat of the population, the settlements on the other coasts being few and far between, and of little indiviaual importance. In these latter settlements, from their little intercourse with each other, the character of each is singularly diversified, preserving traits of their origin as distinct as if they bad been formed yesterday. The original settlers were either from Jersey, England, Scotland, Ireland, or France, and their habits vary accordingly. The extent of the fisheries and oil trade is very great. In 1841 more than 1 ,000 sail of vessels entered, and more than 950 left the ports of the island, leaving out of the reckoning the numerous schooners vad small craft engaged in tlie actual fisheries, which amount during each season to somewhere about 4,500. In the British fishery each year are engaged never less than 30,000 seamen, with 10,000 boatmen and curers; and 140,000 tons of produce are annually exported, Britain and her colonies receiving the largest share, while continental Europe and the United States also take great quantities. Cod, mackarel, herrings, capelin, cods* tongues and sounds, salmon, train-oil, seal-oil, seal-skins, some little poultry, with staves, constitute the chief items of export. The largest portion of the exported cod-fish is caught near the island, the banks being now chiefly occupied by French and Spanish fishermen. The export trade in 1840 was 915,795 quintals of dry cod-fish, (each quintal or 100 pounds of dry fish made from three hundred weight of fresh or ** green" fish,) 3,206,586 gallons of train and seal oils, 631,385 seat-skins, 3,396 tierces of salmon, and 14,686 barrels of herrings, which with minor articles were valued at £983,961, bein^ an increase on the previous year of £82,596. The importations consist of salted provisions from Ireland and Germany ; bi-fcuit from Germaiiy ; flour from the United States and the North of Europe; Indian corn meal from the United States, &c. The total value of the imports for 1840 was £784,045, an increase on the preceding year of upwards of £73,488. 16 ISLAND AND BANKS OF NEWFOUNDLAND. The CiTr of St. John is the principal settlement, and the only considerable town in the island: it is the seat of government, and the bishopric, and chief harbour for the British vessels. Explicit directions for entering are given hereafter, but the following Remarks in addition may be acceptable. -The entrance to St. John's Harbour is through the « Narrows," a strait running in a N.W. by W. direction about half a mile long, and 220 yards across in the narrowest part, with rocky precipitous heights of 500 feet on each side. There are from 9 to 12 fathoms of water in the middle of the channel, with tolerably good anchorage ground. The harbour then opens by a turn at right angles, and runs in a S.W. direction for a mile and a quarter, and m front the city of St. John appeac climbing up a hill, from Fort William to Fort Townsend, between which are seen the government house and St. Thomas's Church ; the former a plain pile of dark stone-work, the latter a singular wooden edifice with a curious steeple. The ridge of hills on the S.£. side of the harbour is 750 feet high, and on the opposite side of the Narrows is a continuation of the same ridge, called Signal Hill, 510 feet high, on which is the citadel, to which place all vessels are telegraphed from Cape Spear on their first appearance off that place. On Fort Amherst on the South Head,] at the entrance of the Narrows, is a brilliant fixed light. At two-thirds the distance from the entrance to the harbour itself, is a rock, on the north side, called the Chain Rock, which with Pancake Island on the opposite shore, contract the entrance at this par. ; and between them a chain can be stretched when required, to prevent the entrance of any hostile fleet. In addition to this, the fortifications before mentioned, other batteries which command the entrance, and the Crow's Nest, a small battery perched on the top of a pyramidal mount on the N. of the entrance of the harbour, render the place perfectly secure against any sudden attack. The Entrance to St. John's Harbour. The city coosJsto of long, irregular, and in some places very narrow, streets, tli« iirin- cipal one bemg called Water street, which has been much improved of late years. Duck- worth street, the next great parallel to Water street, is also improving; and there are several lateral streeto. but St. John's has not yet arrived at much archiieciural embellishment. Jt stretches for about two miles along the harbour, and the ground rising about 120 feet from the sea, causes many of the side streets to be inconveniently steep. The principal feature of the city » its multitude of wharfs and fishing stages which line the shore, which ISLAND AND BANKS OF NEWFOUNDLAND. 17 with its unpainted wooden houses give it a sombre and dismal appearance. The city contains 15,000 inhabitants.* Conception Bav, to the northwestward of St. John'?, is the richest and most populous country district in the island, containing, altogether, about 30,000 inhabitants, who are distributed in a number of villages or fishing and agricultural hamlets. Upon the small island, named Bell Isk, in this bay, wheat flourishes and ripens well ; as do potatoes, oats, hay, and vegetables. This spot is, therefore, considered as a nursery garden for the neighbourhood. Toulinguet or TwilUngate, in the Archipelago of Exploita, is the most northerly British settlement in the Island. The Banks, whicli have been, in their fisheries, the source of all the opulence in the island, are vast submarine elevations, of various depths and very unequal figures, as shown by the Chart. The depths on the Great Bank vary from 15 to 80 fathoms. The quality of the bottom varies considerably, but it generally consists of sand, or sand mixed with shells and gravel, rarely with stones. The eastern face of the Banks is a clear sand, white or whitish, and often sparkling. In the gullies and deeps which separate the banks, and more particularly in the Whale Deep or Trou de la Baleine, the bottom is found to consist of mud or oaze with a fetid smell, and abounds with different sorts of fish ; but more particularly with cod, which is inconceivably numerous ; for, although from 200 to 400 vessels have been annually freighted with this article of commerce for nearly two centuries, there appears to be no sensible decrease of the former plenty. A great swell and thick fog usually indicate the place of the bank. The cod are usually most abundant where the bottom is sandy ; and the least so where it is muddy. ^ The best depth for them is between 30 and 40 fathoms, or less water. In the months of February and April, the fish, which in the winter retire to the deepest water, come on the banks, and fatten quickly. The great fishery generally commences on the banks about the 10th of May, and continues until the end of September. Towards the middle or end of May the first shoal of herrings, called by the natives, spring-herrings, appear on the coasts. These are caught in nets and used as bait. In the middle of June, the capelin, a delicate species of salmon, come in, and last till the middle of July, and with them commences the height of the fishery. Towards the end of July and beginning of August the capelin leave the shores, and the young squids or cuttle-fish succeed them in myriads, and supply their place ; and when these are over, they are succeeded by the fall-herrings, or the autumnal herring shoals. This is in Sep- tember, and is the close of the fishery .f * The Order in Couiicil, 1829, which declared St. John (Newfoundland) a free warehousing port, completed the system which was meant to be established by a similar measure with regard to Quebec, Montreal, Halifax, St John (New Brunswick), Pictou, Charlotte-town (Prince Edward's Island), and St. Andrews. Under the operation of those ports, flour and bread ttatb were before imported and tionded for export with a certain duty, but they hadjiot the privileges of Bridsh colonial productions in the home-market. The necessary efifect was, however, to encourage British shipping, and to g^ve it a considerable portion of the American carrying trade. The new Customs Act provides for securing the American carrying trade much further. A clause permits masts and timber ^ne- rally to be imported /ree into the North American colonies from the United States, and allows it the privileges of British production into the English market. More of the British shipping is aeid to be employed in the timber than any other trade, and no doubt was entertained that the clause in question would have the effect of encouraging it. The prindpal advantage of the last change will, however, fall to the ports of the lower provinces. — Neuupaper, 1829. f In Mr. M'Gregor's work, entitied " British America," 2 Vol. 1832, is given a copious descrip- tion of the mode of fishing on the Banks, the method of curing, &c., as shown also, in the "Nautical Magazine," June, 1832, page 190.— See also Jukes's « Emursiotu in Neuffoundland," 1842, vol. i. page 228, and Bonnycastie's " Newfoundland in 1842," vol. ii. page 160. By the Treaty of Utrecht, 1713, the French retained the liberty of fishing off the coasts, and of drying their nets on the shores of Newfoundland, within certain limits ; and, by the treaty of 1763, they may also fish in the Gulf of St. Lawrence, but not within the distance of three leagues firom any of the coasts belonging to Great Britain. By the treaty of 1783, it was defined that, the subjects of France were to ei\joy, under the re- strictions of the previous treaties, the fisheries on the eastern, northern; and western, coasts of Newfoundland, from Cape St. John to Cape Ray ; and this concession was confirmed by the treaty of 1814. By convention with the United States, of the 20th of October, 1818, the people of the said States, renouncing previous claims, have, for ever, in common with British suljects, the liberty of taking fith on the southern coast, between Cape Ray and the Ramea Isles, and on the western and 18 VIRGIN ROCKS. There are, generally, in the spring, within 125 or 130 leagues of the land, and between the Outer and Grand Banks, numerous ice-bergs, or ice-islands, that float down with the current from the north-westward, and which, during the foggy weather, are very dan- gerous : even in the months of June, July and August, there are frequently a number of them : some of which may be seen aground, in 40 or 50 fathoms of water. In thick weathec, the place of these may commonly be distinguished by the iceMink, a brightness of the sky above nhem ; or by the, breaking of the sea against them, which may also be heard at a considerable distance j or by the decrease of the temperature of the water, as shown on page 11.* On approaching the banks, there will generally be found a number of sea-fowls, as malimauks, roaches, and divert. The last-mentioned are seldom found at mure than 30 leagues from the banks ; but malimauks, and several other kinds, are frequently seen during the whole passage; although not so numerously elsewhere as in the vicinity of the banks. VZBCIXM SOCKS*— In approaching toward Cape Race, (the S.E. point of Newfoundland,) be careful to avoid the Virgin Rockt, a dangerous reef, lying 29 leagues S.E. } E. ''E. 6y S.] from that cape. In gales of wind a heavy sea breaks over them ; and a stron*g current, which sets about them, often increases the danger. The existence of the Virgin Rocks having been questioned, it is proper to communicate the following extract of a letter, addressed by Arthur Kemp, master of the brig Indiana, of Dartmouth, to the publisher of the Newfoundland Gazette ;— '• On the 23rd of October, 1823, at noon, I left Cape Broyle, after a strong gale from S.E., with the wind at W.N.W. steering S.E. by S. The following morning, at 8 a. m., having run 84 miles, I was alarmed with the cry of ' breakers a-head,' and almost immediately saw them to such an alarming extent, as obliged me to alter the course from S.E. by S. to E. by N., it not being possible to clear them on the other tack. After giving the breakers a good berth, and leaving them to the southward, distant four miles, I hove the main top-sail to the mast, and lay by from 10 o'clock till noon, and observed in latitude 46** 35', longitude 50" 51'; the extent of breakers appeared to be about two miles, and were more tremen- dously alarming than I have ever experienced, during twenty-three years that I have (chiefly in this trade) commanded a vessel." The reef has since been surveyed by Mr. Rose, master of H. M. S. Tyne, who, with Captain Bishop, of H. M. brig Manly, has ascertained its situation. The following are the particulars. The bank in which the shoal is situated, extends E. by N. and W. by S. 4^ miles ; its broadest part is about 2} miles. The soundings are regular from 28 to 30 fathoms, until they deepen suddenly on the outer edge to 39 and 43. The rocks themselves ai« in 46o 26' 30' N., and 50° 51' 30' W. They extend in an irregular chain, [S.W. by W. and N.E. by £. 800 yards, varying from 200 to 300 yards in breadth. The least depth of water is on a white rock, in 4) fathoms, with 5 to 6} fathoms all round it; the bottom distinctly visible. Toward the extremities of the shoal are several detached rocks of from 7 to 9 fathoms, with deep water between, and with a current setting over them W.S.W. one mile an hour; and with also a very confused heavy swell. The vessels were anchored upon the rocks for the space of two days, during which the northern coasts, from Cape Ray to the Quirpon Isles ; also on the shores of the Magdalen Islands, and on the coasts, bays, harbours, and creeks, of Labrador, from Mount Joli through the Strait of Bell hie, and thence northward, indefinitely, along the coast, but without prejudice to the exclusive righu of the Hudson's Bay Company ; and the fishermen of the United States nave liberty, for ever, to dry and cure fish in any of the unsettled bays, harbours, or creeks, of the southern perts of New- foundland, above described, and of the coast of Labrador, but so long as unsettled only, without previous agreement with the inhabitants, &c.— See, farther, the large Map of the Canadas, Nova Scotia, Newfoundland, &c., published by the proprietor of this work. * August the 2nd, 1836, the ship Byrom, from Liverpool to New York, heavily laden, and having on board 119 to 120 persons, was suddenly struck in a dark night, by an immense iceberg, estimated at more than 100 feet high, near the edge of the Grand Bank, in lat. 44" 22', long. 48^ 40'. For some time, in a scene of terror, all was considered as lost. The bowsprit was carried away : and the stem pressed down by the overhanging column of ice ; but happily the hull was sound, and with day-light the vessel righted. On the next day three other mountains of ice were seen. The progress of thtM ices confirms the existence and direction of the Arctic or Drift current from the North, as shown in our Memoir f our longitude of Halifax be correct, 63° 33' 40", the lon$;itude will be only 50° 5 i' 34' ; and in the chart of the rocks it is stated as 50° 51' 30', although laid down in 50° 56}'.* The surrounding bank has been noted as a good fishery. Shoal near the Virgin Rocks. — In the Nautical Magazine for May, 1845, page 267, the following notice appeared. — " A shoal with only 21 feet water upon it, was discovered by Jesse Ryder, roaster of the fishing schooner Bethel (belonging to Province Town, Massachusetts,) on the Grand Bank of Newfoundland, in lat. 46° SO', having observed on the shoal, and saw distinctly, it being a rock of about 100 or 200 feet surface ; supposes it to be about 50 miles East of the Virgin Rocks. Shoal bears from the Nine FaUiom Bank S. by W. by compass about 1 ) mile : discovered it accidentally while searching for the Nine Fathom Bank, to fish on. Am certain it was not any part of the Virgins ; for I afterwards saw them, and from my experience of the different fishing grounds, know this shoal to exist.'' Ships bound to St. John's are, therefore, recommended to keep on the parallel of 46°, or a degree and a half to the southward of the parallel of that port, and until they approach the outer edge of the Great Bank ; and, when they obtain soundings, to steer directly to the north-westward for Cape Spear, the position of which is given as 47° 31' N. and 52«' 33J' W.t EASTERN AND NORTHERN COASTS OF NEWFOUNDLAND. I.— CAPE SPEAR AND ST. JOHN'S HARBOUR, TO CAPE ST. FRANCIS. Ltoht-house on Cape Spear. — Since the 1st of September, 1836, a light-house on Cape Spear has exhibited a powerful revolving light at 275 feet above the -level of the sea, which, in clear weather; may be seen at eight or nine, and in ordinary weather, at five or six leagues off. The light shows a brilliant flash at regular intervals of one minute. Upon Fort Amherst^ on the South head at the entrance to St. John's Harbour, there is shown a brilliant Jixed light, which may also, from its elevation, be seen at a considerable distance. The BAIIB01/& of ST> JOKN* which is the principal harbour of Newfound- land, is an excellent one, although the entrance is narrow, being only 160 fathoms in breadth; with high, hold, and precipitous land on each side.^ The entrance lies N.W. by W., and within will be found to narrow ; as, in the inner part, there is a rock on each side, but above water. Here the breadth of the channel is only 95 fathoms, and the depth 8. When past these rocks you may run on boldly, without any fear of danger, only avoiding a rock on the south side, called Proster's Rock, on which there are only 9 feet of water, and lying at about 30 fathoms from the shore, off a reef lying within the King's wharf. Within the harbour yon may anchor in any depth from 4 to 10 fathoms, land-locked from all winds, as the harbour within the Narrows lies W.S.W. It is, however, to be * From a comparison of the distances from Cape Race, given by different mercantile commanders, we, however, admit the latter as nearest to the truth. t We are aware that a recent chart of the S.E. and South coasts of Newfoundland places the whole about eight minutes more to the West, than we have given it. Former charts had it as much more to the Bast. The Admiralty Chart of Trinity and Conception Bays, 1835, places Cape Spear in longitude 52° 33|', and Fort Amiierst in 52° 37' ; longitudes which may safely be adopted. In a former work, the 'Colombian Navigator,' 1839, has been shown the probability of an erroneous assumption of longitude for Halifax Uock-yard, and the consequence of so assuming it as a first meridian. If the chronometric distances have been gained from such meridian, the conse- quence must be obvious, and the error much more extensive than was supposed. t An appearance of the entrance is given by Mr. Owen, on his particular chart of the harboun 20 ST. JOHN S HARBOUR. ■1 I 1 noticed, Uiat there is no possibility of sailing in, unless with the wind from S.W. by S. to East. The wind from S.W. to N.E. by N., blows out of the Narrows. Here ships must tlien anchor, and warp in, for which purpose there are rings in the rocks on both sides. The following Directions for St. Jobn's have been given by Mr. Owen. «< The entrance of St. John's Harbour, is readily known by the block-house on Signal- hill on the North Head, and Amherst Fort on the South Head.* There is a sunken rock, called the Vestal, 50 fathoms without South Head, with only 25 feet of water on it. This rock, is about 10 fathoms long and 7 broad ; the marks for it are, Fort William (which stands within the harbour on the north side) open of South Head, bearing N. S9° W.; and the outer Wash-bail Rock open with Cbckold's Head, bearing N. 47° £. The Wash- ball Rocks join the North Head ; they are all above water and steep-to, therefore not dangerous. The course in the Narrows is N.W. by W., distance 370 fathoms, to Chain Rock on the North, and the Pancake on the South, side. Both these rocks are above water, and steep-to. Sixty-five fathoms within the Pancake Rock, on the South shore, lies the Little Fancake, a rocky shoal, dry at low water ; and 80 fathoms within the latter lies a sunken rock, called Prosser's Rock, runnins; off 30 fathoms from a rock above water, in form of a saddle, with 18 feet of water in the hollow, and only 5 feet on the outside. It is steep-to, with 5 fathoms close to it. After you have passed Prosser's Rock, you may stand to either shore, as they are clear and steep-to. You may anchor in what water you please, from 8 to 4 fathoms, muddy bottom. <* The tide of St. John's sometimes rises 7 or 8 feet ; it is not regular, but greatly influ- enced by the wind." Be very cautious, if unacquainted with the coast, that you mistake not the place called Quidi Vidi, or Kitty Vitly, for the harbour of St. John's, as it shows an opening like a good harbour, but is fit only for boats, and not safe even for these at low water. Fort Amhertt, which stands on the South head of St. John's, appears white, and the flagstaffs on the hill, over the North head, will point to the harbour of St. John s : besides these, the course from Cape Spear is N.N.W., and the distance about 4 miles. The position of Fort Amherst, as lately given, is lat. 47° 33}', long. 52° 37'. Between the harbour of St. John and Cape Spear are three bays ; the first is from St. John's to Low Point, and is called Freshwater Bay ; the second, from Low Point to Black Head, is called Deadmanh Bay ; the t,iiird is from Black Head to Cape Spear, and is called Cape Bay. • ST. JOHN'S HARBOUR TO CONCEPTION BAY.—From St. John's to Torbay the course ir between N.E. by N. (being at a little distance without the harbour) and N.N.E. distance 7^ miles. Between St. John's and Torbay are several points, which have names ; viz. first Cuckold's Head, on the south side of the Gut of Quidi Vidi ; the next is Small Point, which lies 2} miles N.E. | N. from the entrance of St. John's; the third is Suear-Loaf Point, and it lies N. by £. J E. half a league from Small Point ; the fourth is Red-Head, lying N.N.E. from Sugar-Loaf, about S miles. Between the Sugar- Loaf and Red-Head is a bay, called Logic Bay. The fifth point is the South point of Torbay, which lies a mile and a half N. | E. from Red-Head. This point of Torbay is the lowest of these points. From the South point of Torbay to the ancboring-place, where ships usually ride, the course is N.W. by W. Here you may anchor in 14 fathoms, against Ureen Cove. Should you be open of the Bay, the couu ^ in is West ; for the bay is two miles in extent between the South and the North points. The latter is a low black point, with a flat rock off it, over which the sea breaks : in passing this, from the northwara, the course into Torbay is W.S.W. Torbay is a bad place for ships to ride in with the wind from seaward ; for, being open to the ocean, a great sea falls into it. From Flat Rock Point, or the North point of Torbay, the course and distance to Black- head, are N. | E. 3} miles. Flat Rock Point is a long, smooth, sloping pavement of red sandstone ; hence its name. * * At half a mile S.E. | S. from Fort Amherst is the centre of s narrow bank, having 14 fathoms over It, and which breaks in rough weather. It extends nearly a quarter of a mile N.E. and S.W., and has on it, near each end, a depth of 20 fathoms. It is high water in the harbour, on the full and change, at 7 h. 30 m. Spring ti s rise 5, neaps •jj fpet. Bd Vj lik bt foi ur Vd th{ abl ani CONCEPTION BAY. dl UK 14 fathoms FiioM Black-Uead to Cape St. Francis, the bearing and distance are N. by W. ) W. 3 miles ; Cape St. Francis is a whitish point, and low in comparison with the other land ; but, from sen, the high land over it marks a cove, called Shoe Cove, where boats used to come a tilting, (usiiig the fishermen's expression,) that is, to split and salt the Ash they catch, when blowing hard and in had weather, when they cannot gain the places they belong to in time. In this cove you may haul up a boat to save her, if the wind be out ; for with northerly ,'westerly, and southerly winds, you will lie safely. There is a good place off it for fishing. From Cape Stt Francis to the distance of a mile off, triangular-wise, lie sunken rocks, called the Bftmdy» ; the outermost, east from the cape, about a mile and three-quarters. There are also islets, or great rocks above water, the outermost of which lies about three- quarters of a mile E.S.E. from the cape ; and the innermost not half a mile off shore ; between these islets and the suukeu rocks, you may go with boats, and find fresh water ; but men are generally unwilling to venture. Shoe Cfove is protected by the rocks. There is another cove, to the northward of the point of the cape, for boats, when the wind is off the shore ; but, if otherwise, it is not safe. II.-CONCEPTION BAY, BETWEEN CAPE ST. FRANCIS AND BACALIEU, OR BACALAO ISLE. OOirOBPTIOM BAT.— From Cape St. Francis to BeU I$le the course is W.S.W., and S.W. by W. 4 leagues. This island, already mentioned, in page 17, is two miles from the shore, against the cove called Portugal Cove. Bell Island is l^unded by cliffs, at one point nearly 300 feet high ; about 5 miles long and 3 broad. Near the S.E. end is I^nce Cove, a small indentation of the cliff, which, with a beach, are the only landing-places. It is very fertile, thus difliering from the surrounding land. On the S.W. side is the Bell, a perpendicular rock 100 feet high, divided from the island by a passage of 20 yards, passable for boats in calm weather. The vessels that fish there lie in the little cove on the south side of the island, which will contain five or six ships, according to the rate. From Cape St. Francis to the Island Bacalieu, or Baealao, the bearing and distance are N.N.E. about 6 leagues. Bacalieu is an island 3 miles long, from north to south, and one mile and a half broad, and is almost inaccessible. Here boats were used to fish : abundance of sea-birds, of several sorts, breed here in the summer. Between this island and the main is a channel about 2 miles broad, having a sufficient depth for ships. The Bai/ Verde and the S.W. end of Bacalieu lie E. by N. and W. by S. from each other about a league and a half. ^ Bay Verde. — From Cape St. Francis to the Bay Verde Head, the bearing and distance are N. by E. about 5^ leagues ; and, from the head to the bay, or cove, where ships ride, to the westward of the head, is about three-quarters of a mile. The roadstead is not above a cable's length in extent between the points, which lie N.N.E. and S.S.W. from each other ; you lay your anchors in 10 fathoms, and your ship will lie in 5, with a cable out ; the stern will then be not above half a cable's length from the stages. The ships that ride here, are forced to seize their cables one to the other ; and there cannot be, at once, above seven or eight ships. It is a bad and hazardous place for ships, except in the summer time, but the great plenty of fish make it desirous, although it is a wild, desert place, very deficient iu wood, water, &c. Bay Verde, or Bay of Herbs, as it is here called, may be readily known by the Island Bacalieu, and also by another head within Bacalieu, called Split Point ; as well as by Bay Verde Head itself, which is the westernmost ; these three heads show very bluff, and very like each other, on coming from thesouthwaitl : there is no danger in going into Bay Verde but what may be seen. From Bay Verde Head to Flamborough Head the bearing and distance are W.S.W. | W. four miles. Flamborough-head is a black steep point, but no place of shelter for a boat, unless when the wind comes from rtie shore ; neither is there any safety between Bay Verde and Carboniere, (7 leagues S.W. ) W.,) excepting two places for boats, the one in the S.W. cove of the Green Bay, which is but an indifferent place, and lies S.W. } W. about 4 leagues from Bay Verde, and the other in Salmon Cove, which is about a league and a half northward of Carboniere. From Bay Verde Head to Green Bay is S.W. i W. about 4 leagues. This bay is about 22 CONCEPTION BAV. It.; I a le&Kue over, but has nolbing remarkable in it, excepting tlie S.W. cove above mentioned, and a place at the bottom of the bay, to which formerly the Ued Indians came every year, for the purpose of obtaining ochre. From the South point of , Green Bay to Black-head is S.W. J W. a league; and from Black-head to Salmon Cove, W.8.W. 4 miles. The latter is a place of shelter for boats, an bland lying in the middle; a river runs up from the cove, which abounds with salmon. CARBONIERE.— From Salmon Cove to Carboniere, the course is W.S.W. about 4 miles. The Island of Carboniere is at about a mile from the shore. Its south side is low. The harbour is very bold on both sides ; so is the island, between which and the main are rocks, just under water. This is a good place for ships to ride in, and for catching and curing of fish. Here are good pasturage and cattle, affording milk and butler during the summer. Caiboniere has declined, and therefore has, in parts, a forlorn and deserted air. There is very good anchorage, in clear ground, fair turnin'^ in or out, being more than half a mile broad, and 3 miles long ; the depth 6 to 8 fathoms, and deeper water. To the northward of the point of Carboniere are two coves, in which planters live, and keep boats ; the northernmost of these, called Clown Cove, is fit for boats only, and is about the other is called Crocker*$ Cove, and is close to the for fishing [ 2 miles above Carboniere Harbour ; entrance of Carboniere Bay. The proper channel in to Carboniere is on the North side of the island, which lies off its southern point ; the entrance here being more than a mile wide. Ships may, however, pass on the S.W. side of the isle; but they mult keep in mid-channel, because the ground is foul and shoal on each side, so as to form a narrow passage only. To the W.S.W. of Carboniere Island is a small cove, called MosoniTO Cove : in this cove ships may ride, but it is seldom used, as it is not convenient for fishing ships, although the ground is clean, and it has sufficient depth of water. HARBOUR GRACE.— The entrance uf Harbour Grace is a league to the southward of Carboniere Island. A rock, called the Salvage, stands nearly in the middle of the channel ; and there is another, called the Long Harry, near the North shore, having only a boat-passage between it and the main. Boili are of great height above the water. Har- bour Grace is a pretty-looking little town, consisting of one long, straggling street, along the north side of the harbour ; the houses being mostly painted white, and standing on a narrow flat, with a rocky ridge behind them. The population is about 3000.* Within the bay, a bar or ledge extends from the South side, more than half-way over, as shown in the particular plan of the Harbour. You may turn into Harbour Grace, all the bay over, from side to side. The Salvage may be passed on either side, as most convenient : and, having passed within this rock, you may turn from side to side, by the lead, till you draw toward the edge of the bank, then proceed by the North shore. You may know when you are near the bar, or ledge, by two white rocks on the land, by the waterside, in a bank on the North side, which show whiter than any other part: these are about a mile below, or to the eastward of the beach, which is proper to be known : by keeping near the North shore, you will find 3 fathoms and a half on the bar, and presently after 4, 5, 6, and 7 fathoms ; but if you stand over to the southward, till you have advanced within the bar, or ledge, you shall not have above 7, 8, or 9, feet of water : this sand trends S.E. from athwart the two white rocks above mentioned, and extends close up to the South shore. Having passed its outer extremity, you may turn * In the month of December, 1820, H.M. slov^p Favorite, Captain H. Robinson, vUited Harbour Grace, when Lieut. R. Pearc0, of that vessel, m^de an accurate survey of the port. The town was then considerable, and of respecUble appearance. Captain R. describes the harbour as good ; for, '< thoughfthe space between the end of the bar and the north shore is rather narrow, a large ship, well handled, may beat through, or back and fill, in and out, with the tide." Port Grace ia a remarkable basin, hollowed out in the cHA by the action of frost, or the more certain operation of time, in destroying the slate-clay of wlUch the rocks are composed. First an arch is entered, 20 feet wide by 20 high ; and beyond isMhe basin itself, which is about 300 feet in circumference, and surrounded by perpendicular rocks, 120 feet in height, with a border of dwarf spruce at top. At one comer a little aperture, among broken masses of rock, carries off the super- fluous water ; the depth near the centre of the cavity is about 14 feet. On the ISth of August, 1832, an awful and destructive fire broke out and destroyed 100 dwelling houses at this place, with the church, &c., when 600 persons, who in the morning were in comfort and opulence, were before night without shelter and food. For the particulan. see • Nautical Magaxtne,' Dec. 1832, pp. 605, 6. TRINITY BAY. gS from side to side till within the beach, on the North side, and ride land-locked in 4, 5, or 6, fathoms, or higher up in 7, 8, 9, or 10, fathoms, as you please. Three islets, called Harbour Grace Islands, lie off the South point of the entrance of Harbour Grace, in an East and West direction. On one of these is a lighthouse, perched on the brink of a precipice, consisting of a square wooden house, with a square dove-cot- looking top for a lantern. The island, a block of slate, is only accessible by ladders, and in smooth weather. No vessel should attempt a passage between them and the main, as the ground is foul and shoal, and there are rocks aoout the islets. From Harbour Grace to Cape St. Francis, the bearing and distance are E. i S. 6 leagues. Bryant Cove, to the southward of Harbour Grace, is not a place for ships: it is, however, a good place for fish. In the middle of the entrance is a rock above water. You may pass it on either side, and have 4 or 5 fathoms, and then anchor within it in clean ground. From Harbour Grace to Spaniard Bay, the distance is about two leagues. This bay is deep and large, and there is good anchoring all over it. It is divided from Bay Robert by a small neck of land only. Bay Robert is about half a league broad. There is very good turning into it, and no danger but what may be seen. You may borrow on either side, and go close to the island which lies on the stai'oard side of the entrance. The bay is, at least, three miles long. Being past the island, or to the westward of it, which is bold-to, you may run up about a mile, and lie land-locked in 9 or 10 fathoms within the island. From the point of Bay Robert to Port Grave, the distance is 3 miles. Port Grave is extensive, deep, and very bold, as the other bays are : there is a cove on the starboard side of the entrance, called Sheep Cove, where you may moor by head and stem, and ride in 4} and 5 fathoms ; but your anchor to the W.S.W. will be in 22 fathoms, at about a cable and a quarter's length from the ship. From Sheep Cove to Port Grave, the distance is a mile, or rather more ; but ships do not ride within the small islands which are by Port Grave, the water within them being shoal ; but they ride off without them. From Sheep Cove to Cupid Cove, on the South coast of Port Grave, the course is S.W. about a league. This is a good place for a ship or two to ride in, in 4, 5, or 6, fathoms, and not above a point open. The cove lies in a W.S.W. direction, and the South side of the bay to Burnt Head trends E. hy N. about two miles. From Burnt Head to Brigus is S.S.W. two miles. The South point of Biigus is a high rugged point : the bay of Brigus is not above half the breadth of Port Grave Bay ; you run up W. by S. and- West, about half a league, and anchor on the North side. Small vessels only use this place, it being so far up the Bay of Conception. It is a wild, rocky» little place, and a rather considerable settlement, with a population of about 2000. Collier Bay. — From Brigus to Collier Bay is S.S.W. two and a half or thre<> r^iles. And from Collier Bay to Salmon Cove or Pool, the distance is nearly two cailes anu a half. Harbour Main. — This is a good place foi iishing, but ships seldom go up so high in the bay. From Burnt Head, of Port Grave, or Harbour Main, the course and distance are S. by W. about three leagues ; and from Harbour Main to Holyrood S. by E. about two miles; then the land trends about to the eastward toward Bell Isle. Holyrood Harbour has 10 fathoms of water, and good ground. III.— TRINITY BAY, &c., between BACALIEU and CAPE BONAVISTA. TSZMZTY BAV. — This extensive Bay, between Bacalieu Island on the S.E. and Trinity Harbour on the N.W., is 7 leagues in breadth, and its depth, from the entrance, is 20 leagues. The south point of the entrance, westward of Bacalieu Island, i» called the Point of Grates. The next point within is Break-heart Point. Between these points is a small bay, in which boats may lie with a wind from the land of Break-heart Point : there is a ledge of rocks, but they are above'^water. From Break-heart Point to Sherwick Point, going into Old Perlicah, the coarse is S.W. by W. 5 i or 6 miles. To the southward of Break-heart Point is an islet, at some little distance off the shore, called Scurvy Island : between this Island and Sherwick Point, the coast falls in a pretty deep bay, and trends S.S.E. from Sherwick Point about three- quarters of a mile. 24 TRINITY BAY. ^ i OtD PERLiCAN.^Sherwick Point is bold; there is a rock off it, above water: this point is the north point of Old Perlican. They who are bound to Old Perlican, cannot ro In with a ship to the northward of the island ; that is, between the island and Sherwick Point; although it seems a fair passage, vet it is altoBeJher foul ground, and a shoal of rocks extends from the main to the island ; (which island is about a mile and a qun^ter round, and about half a mile in length ;) therefore, whoever intends for Old Perlican with a ship, must pass to the south of the island, between it and the main. Within it is an anchorage, in 4 or 5 fathoms. It is, however, to be observed, that there is a rock just even with the water, and some under water, about the middle of the bav, within the island, or rather nearest to the main. Old Perlican has but an indifferent road : and, if the winds come out from N.W., you are forced to buoy the cables, from the badness of grounJ. The boats go a great way to catch fish, (about five or six miles,) excepting in the very middle of summer. sale Cove, — From Old Perlican to 8ill6 Cove, the coast rounds to the Westward, S.W., and S.S.W., about six leagues. Sill^ Cove is but an indifferent place for ships, sucli as Bay Verde, already described. New Perlican. — From Sille Cove to New Perlican, the distance is a league. This is a very good harbour, where you may lie land-locked in 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10, fathoms. It is very bold and large going in, so that, if you can see the point before night, you may safely run in, there being nothing to hurt you but the shore itself. The easternmost point of the entrance, is called Smuttjf-nou Pointy and the jwesternmost Gorlob Point ; the entrance between is more than a inile broad, and has about 20 fathoms of water. On sailing in, it will be found narrower and shallower, lying in first west, and terminating in a bight, where you may lie land-locked, in a berth half a mile broad ; so that you may turn in or out, and anchor m what depth you please, from 12, 10, 8, 6, 5, or 4, fathoms, very good ground. S. by £. \ E. from New Perlican, distant 2} miles, is Heart's Content, a fine spacious harbour, nearly circular, and excellently sheltered from all winds ; it is a thriving place. The coast bears generally S. by E. from Heart's Content, and consists of a low shore of bright red and grey slate. Twenty miles distant from Heart's Content is JVieu> Harbour, \i shoa! place and difficult of entrance. Almost all this eastern side of Trinity Day is . inhabited. At the head of the bay is DUdo Harbour^ and 5 miles to the W. of this is Chappie Arm, a small settlement. Nine miles N. by E. \ £. is Tickle Harbour Point, the north extremity of a tongue of land, forming a deep bay on its western side, at the bottom of which is 'lickle Harbour ; it is a bad anchoring place. N. by E. from this, 9 miles, is the entrance of the Bay of BuU$, (Baie des Boules) an inlet runnine in the same direction for 6 miles, when it turns to the westward, and approaches Come by Chance Inlet, at the head of Placentia Bay. The isthmus formed by these two arms connects the peninsula of Avalon with the main part of the island. It is about 3 miles broad, and 150 or 200 feet high, sloping toward Trinity Bay. To the east of the isthmus is Centre Hilt, about 1000 or 1200 feet high. Random Western Head lies 6| leagues N.E. } E. from the entrance of the Bay of Bulls. It forms the eastern entrance to the South West Arm, an inlet running parallel with Random Sound, 4 leagues in length. From New Perlican, the distance over to Random Head, is 5 leagues. These places lie N. } W. and S. f E. from each other. In Randotn Sound are several arms and harbours. Random and Smith Sound uniting form Random Island, the channel being in the whole 13 leagues in length. At the conjunction of the two sounds is a bar, nearly dry at low water. Here it is not a mile broad. PORT BONAVENTURB.^From Bonaventure Hfear' to Bonaventure Harbour, the course is N.W. by N. a mile and a half; but, l^javing advanced a mile from the head, then the harbour lies N. by W. to the Admiral's Stage. Port Bonaventure lies within two small islands, between which is the proper channel, but you may go on either side, if you have a leading wind, there being no danger, and 4 or 5 fathoms of water, at least. Within the islands, you may anchor in that depth, in good ground. There is a very secure place for boats in bad weather, running in within a point, behind, or to the northward of, the Admiral's Suge, like a great pond. This place will contain above 100 boats in security. There are several islands without, off Bonaventure ; the middle one, called Green Idand, is nearly S.S.W. from the port, distant five miles. It is so high as to be seen, in fair weather, so soon as you come out of Trinity Harbour. TRINITY IIAllBOUn. 85 ^rom Ronavenlure Head to the point railed the Horsechopn, the l)earing and distance are East, eight miles. From Bonaventure Head to Trinity Harbour, is N.E. \ E. 4^ miles ; between are some bays, but not for ships to ride in, unless with (he wind off the shore. The Ilorsechops and Sherwick Point (being tlie East point of Trinity Harbour) lie N.W. by W. i W. and S.E. by E. i E. from each other, distant 4} miles. Between the Horsechops and Trinity Harbour is EttglUh Harbour, at tlie distance of 3 miles from the Horsechops. Within the outer point this harbour trends eastward ; it is a clean bay, and you ride in 4 ot 5 fathoms uf water. From English Harbour to Salmon Cove, the course is N. by W. about a mile ; it is a place for fishing, and there is a river which runs up about two miles to the northward. Without Salmon Cove is a headland, called Fox's Island, connected to the main by a neck of beach. To the northward of the headland, between it and Sherwick Point, is a bay, called Robin Hood's ; and in this bay, behind a pointy small ships ride and fish. TKXIIZTT BAXSOUS. — From the Horsechops to Trinity Haibour, the course and distance are W.N.W. 5 utiles. Trinity Harbout^is the best and largest har- bour in all the land, having several arms and coves, wherein several hundred ships may ride land-locked. A lofty rocky promontory lies in the centre of the harbour, on the lower part of which, the houses composing the town are irregularly scattered, containing, with the neighbourhood, about 3000 inhabitants. li k -i place which you may turn in or nut of, being bold-to on each side, and having no danger but what may be seen; excepting that, at the entrance of the S.W. arm, there is a shoal, called the Aluitel Bank, which shoots off from a point within the islet on the larboard side gaing in, and extends N.N.W, about a third of the breadth over that arm. Being within this bank, which will discover itself by the colour of the water, you may edge over close to the south shore, if you please, or keep your lead to avoid the Mussel Bank, giving it a little distance. YoU may anchor in 14, 12, or 10 fathoms, and approach so near to the stage on shore, as to make a stage with topmasts to your stage on shore, to lade or unlade your ship. This is a most excellent harbour, for after you are in the S.W\ arm, vou find another running up to the N.W. which is continued by another extending S.W., but there is a bar, or ledge, at the entrance of the latter. The N.W. arm is a large harbour, having good anchorage for 500 sail of ships. Besides the fore-mentioned arms, the main harbour turns up to the north. Ships, being within the harbour's mouth, may ride in a cove, lat^e tlnd good, on the starboard or east side, and land-locked in good ground off the town. Over against that cove, on the larboard or west 8ide» are two other coves ; the southernmost of them is called the Vice Admiral'$ Cove, convenient for curing fish ; and above, or to the north' ward of that, is a large cove, or arm, called Got Cove, where there is room enough to* 300 or 400 sail of ships to ride, all in clear ground, protected from winds^ sea, and tidft In tliis place ships lie unseen until it appears open. There are several other places in this excellent harbour, in^ good clean ground. The bottom, in all the arms and coves of Trinity, is of tough clay, with 4 and 5 fathoms of water, within two boats* length from the shore; and there are 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, and 14 fathoms, and some places more, in the middle of the arms and channels. You may turn in or out, as already noticed, observing your tide. Which rises about 4 feet, and sometimes more. From the Horsechops to the South Head of Catalina hay, a distance of 9 miles, the coast rounds to the N.Ei About two miles to the northward of the Horsechops is an indent, named Green Bay^ but it is no place for ships to ride or fish in. Bemg past Green Day, there is no place or cove for l>oats till you come to Rugged Harbour or td Catalina. From the South Head of Catalina 6ay to the North Head, the bearing and distance are N.W. by W. } W. ^N.W. by iV.l 5| miles: between the two heads is Rugged Harbour and Catalina Harbour. The South Head is in latitude 48" 27' 38*. RcQGED Harbour is so called from the niimerdus rugged and craggy rocks which l\i before and within it, above and under water. They who proceed for this harbour with H ship must pass to the northward of all the rocks or islets, and run to the northward till they brlAg the harbour open ; then sail in between a round island which lies close to the E 26 BONAVISTA BAY. main, and a great black rock, which lies off the north end of all the islets. There is a river of fresh water at the head of the harbour. CATALINA HARBOUR.--One mile and a half to the northward of Rugged Harbour is the Harbour of Catalina, which is very safe, with good ground, not above 8 fathonas, from 8 to 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 fathoms, as you please. You may, with a leading wind, soil between the small island, which is a little to the southward of the harbour, and have 4 or 5 &tboms at the least, in going through, but it is not above a cable's length broad } or you may go without that island, to the eastward of it, giving the island a small berth, and so sail in with the middle of the harbour ; for, at about half a mile distant from the south point of the harbour, io the east, is a reef, called the Brandyt, upon which, if there be ever so small a sea, it breaks ; but you may sail between the island and the reef, or you may go to the northward of it, between the reef and the north shore. A rock, having over it but 9 or 10 feet of water, lies off the north shore of Catalina Harbour, at one>tbird of a mile within the Brandys above mentioned ; but between the two is a depth of 10 fathoms, with a continued depth of 7 fathoms more than half a mile along the south shore. Within this, up the harbour, you may anchor in 6 fathoms, land-locked. You may likewise anchor in 3f fathoms, to the southward of the little green island, at the ehtrance of Little Catalina, or the N.C. arm of the Harbour; or you may run up toward the village or the river-head, whence fresh water runs down. A kind of bore rises in this place very often, that will cause the water to rise three fe3t presently, and then down again ; and you may find it so two or three times in three or four hours, at certain seasons. It is a very good harbour, and abundance of the herb Alexander grows on the small island. Salmon abound at the bead of the harbour. Near a small cove in the N.W. within the small island, is a fire-stone of a glittering colour, called Catalina stone, a species of iron pyrites ; excellent willocks grow on the rocks. From the North-head of Catalina Bay to Flmver Point, the coast, which is a high cliff, trends N.E. i N. 2| miles. Off the point is a reef of sunken rocks, called Flower Rocks i over which the sea breaks during a swell, and they discover themselves plainly. They lie about half a mile off shore, and extend a mile true East. You may go between Flower Point (which has some rocks lying about it) and the sunken rocks above described. A marii to go without them is, to keep the Gull Island, off Cape Bonavisia, open of ail the land to the southward : this will lead clear without them to the eastward. Bird hlands. — From Flower Point to the two islets called Bird Islands, the distance northward is two miles. Within the Bird Islands is a bay, with one arm within the south point of th* land, which runs up some distance to the west, where ships may ride : another arm, also, runs up within some rocks, which are above water. The bay extends to Cape Latjan, half a league farther north. The Bird Islands abound with willocks, gannets, pigeons, gulls, &c., which breed there in summer. From Flower Point to Cape Larjan, the bearing and distance are N.N.E. [iV. J W,] 3f miles; the extremity of Cape Larjan is but a low point, off which lies a great rock above water. From Cape Larjan to Spiller's Point is N. by E. half a league ; between this cape and Spiller's Point the land fails into a bay. Over the point between it And Cape Larjan, you will see the high land of Port Bonavista, from a considerable distance off at sea. Spiller's Point is moderately high, steep, and bold-to. IV.-BONAVISTA BAY BETWEEN CAPE BONAVISTA AND CAPE FREELS. From Spiller's Point to Cape Bonavista, the course is North 2 J miles ; between is a bay, apparently deep, which persons uoacquaiated with would suppose to be the harbour of Bonavista. Cape Bonavista is in latitude 48" 42' 10". The head of it appears at a distance of a sky-colouf. At about half a mile N.N.E. from the cape is a small islet called Gull Ii/and, easy to be known, being moderately high, but highest in the middle, and makes somewhat like the form of a Fieur-de-lit, or a hat with great brims ; you may see it 4 or 5 leagues off m clear weather ; near it there is from 4 to 5 fathoms of water. To the 8.S.W. about 310 yards off is a danger which does not show. LiOHTMoosE ON Cape Bon AVISTA.— A Hshthouse has been erected at Cape Bonavista, and has been in operation since September the 10th, 1843, from sunset to sunrise. This BONAVISTA BAY. 27 ere is a iarbour 'athoms, nd, sail 1(1 have broad } ill berth, rrom the if there \ or you Catalina reen the ilf a mile fethoms, (he little or you own. A hree fest t three or the herb ir. Near ir, called is a high id Flower '8 plainly. 9 between lescribed. ten of all c distance the south i: another Is to Cape I, gannets, [N. J W.] great rock i cape and pe Larjan, off at sea. FREELS. itween is a lie harbour distance of ailed Gull ind makes see it 4 or tbeS.S.W. t Bonavista, rise. This light revolvet at regulated intervals of two minutes, exhibiting alternately a red and a while light, and burns at an elevation of 150 feet above the level of the sea. At N.N.E. ) E. 3| miles from Gull Island lies a rock, which bears the name of Old Harry, and has only 13 feet of wa.er upon it. The sea breaks over this spot, unless when the water is very smooth. To the N.E. from the Old Harry, within an extent of nearly three miles, are several dangerous spots, with from 3 to 4 fathoms : the outer or northern edge of these is called Youtig Harry. Vessels when passing, in order to avoid these rocks, must be careful to keep Cape Bonavista open with the westernmost extremity of a high range of land to the southward, named the Green or Inner Ridge. These dangers, together with the long ledge called the Flower Rocki, near Flower Point, above- mentioned, render it very imprudent to attempt making Gape Bonavista in thick or bois- terous weather ; and, indeed, at any time, Baealieu I$lmd, between th« entrances of Conception and Trinity Bays, is the best and safest land-M for a stranger bound to any part or Bonavista Bay. There is a channel between Gull Island and Cape Bonavista ; it is nearly half a mile wide, with a good depth ; but it is to be observed, that, in rounding the cape, you may not stand in close, as there is a sunken rock about 300 yards S.S.W. from the Gull Island, and another, on the opposite side within the cape, upwards of 300 yard» to the N.E. of the land of Green Js/and, which will be ptesently noticed. Each has less than 3 fath(»ns of water. Green Itland is an isle half a mile in length, lying nearly parallel with the western side of Cape Bonavista. The passage between admits small vessels only, being narrow, and some spots have shoal rocks. At a mile and a quarter to]|the westward of Green Island is a small islet called Stone Itland, with a reef on its eastern side, but the general depths between are from 8 to 16 fathoms. At a mile to the southward of Green Island is a reef called the Red Aoc^, lying off lied Cove, which is terminated by Western Head. In succession after this, between it and the port of Bonavista, are Red Point, Moses Point, and Swerry Head ; the twa last, with their surrounding rocks, marking the north side of Bonavista Harbour. From Cape Bonavista to Port Bonavista, the courses are south-westward, about four miles. If you come from the southward, and intend for Bonavista, you must leave Green Island on your larboard side. You may sail between Green Island and Stone Island, with any ship, without danger, the channel being safe and bold ; or, you may go to the westward of Stone Island, and run to the southward till you open the harbour of Bona- vista, and are past Moses Point, and so to the southward of the rocks called the Swerryt, which are high rocks, having no passage to the northward of them. Here you may anchor, in from 1 1 to 5 fathoms, as you please, but must always have a good anchor in the S.W. and another fast in the Swerrys, or in the N.W., for westerly winds blow directly into the road. With small vessels you may go between Green Island and the main, and so to Redhead ; but the bay between the points (over against Green Island) and Redhead is ail foul ground. At a little distance, or about a cable's length from the shore, is a sunken rock, but boats may go between the shore and it. The sea breaks on it. Being past Western or Red-head, the course to Moses Point is W.S.W. ; between is a large bay or cove called Bay ley's Cove, where you may anchor on occasion, not advancing too far in, as all its shore is rocky and shoal. Capt. Bullock, one of the surveyors of Bonavista Bay, &c., has said of Bo2iAyisTA Har- BOUB, that it is an anchorage of little or no consideration, further than being a very eligible situation for carrying on the fishery ; being so very badly sheltered that, in N.W. gales, immediately following a continuance of heavy winds from seaward, the water breaks right athwart the harbour, and sometimes the whole of the fishing-boats founder at their anchors, and not unfrequentty many of their stages are destroyed : however, vessels during the summer months, moor under the Swerry Head, in 8 or 10 fathoms ; but, even there, as in every other part of the harbour, the ground is so rocky and uneven, that they are neces- sitated to buoy up their cables. Bonavista is a large and straggling, but pretty-looking Clace, with a good deal of cultivated ground about it, which is more fertile than the neigh- ourhood of St. John's, but the want of a good harbour prevents its becoming one of the most thriving places in the whole island. aOlTAVZfilTA BAY.— This extensive bay is limited by Caf>« BonavisU on the S8 BONAVISTA BAV. formed by Murphy Point and that of Kniglit's Cove. From Southern Head to Western Head the distance is four miles N.W. by W. } W. [IFifftt.] The cove between forms five coves, on the second of which, Keels, is a fishing village : but neither this nor any of the other coves is a fit place for vessels of burthen. Great Change Harbqub. — The entrance of Great Chance Harbour, which is an ex- cellent anchorage, lies 10 "niles W. | S. [S. W, \ WJ] from Western Head. The passage to it is clear, with the exception of a rock of 18 feet, the Bacon-bone, lying a mile and a quarter southwestward from Western Head. In sailing for this place the safest way is,* not to shi\t in Southern Head until the isle called Little Denier, bearing N. \ W., comes on with the outer Shag hland. Thus the Bacon-bone will be avoided, and you may steer for the harbour, S.W. by W. and West, without having any danger to encounter until yoi^ approach the entrance: but here, in the southern part, lies a sunken rock with only 6 feet of water. Within this rock, and in a line with it, are two islets, called the Mustard-bowls ^ in order to avoid ths rock, be careful not to shut in the western Mustard-bowl with the eastern ; but, having passed the latter, you may stand boldly in, approaching the shore on either side as you please, and you may anchor anywhere above the narrows in from 1 1 to 5 fathoms, perfectly l^nd-loc^ed and good holding-groynd. Wood and water may easily be procurea here. At ^wo m^les E. by N. from Chance Point, (the outer point of Chance Harbour,) is a spot of ground with 7 fathoms, over which the sea breaks in very heavy gales firom seat ward, but it is not dangerous in fine weather. To the N. by E. at one mile from Chance Point, is the rock of the same name : it is always visible, and has no other danger near it, Chance Point, as well as Cutler*s Head, is yerv steep. To the west of Chance or Gull Rock, is Deer Island, which is 1^ mile long and 300 yards broad : between it and the shore there is a good ^haunel with 9 fathoms water in it. Island to Connecting Point, is S.S.W. [S. W. by IT.l distance 7 is no danger. Connecting Point divides CA Chandler's Reac/^ Tne route fl-om Deer miles, and between these there into two arms, one named Clode Sound,~the other Goose Bay, Goose Bay.— From Connecting Point, Goose Bay runs S.W. by W. to the distance of 6i miles ; by keeping the middle of the channel, all dangers will be avoidod, as they lie pear the shore, and the depths w^l be from 46, 40., and S6 fathoms, until to the west o( LuMter's Hoi; when the depth will vary from 13, 12, 10, and 8 &thoms. After passing Goose Head, when a small island called Shag Island is seen, steer so as to keep the middle of the channel which divides it from Goose Head, and then anchor to the S.E. in, 4 J to 6 fathoms. This bay is very convenient for procuring wood and water. • See the Admiralty Chart of Bonavista Bay, &c., from the Survey of Mewn. Geo. Holbroofc, «tt(d Wm. Bullock, 1822. ' BONAVISTA BAV. gp Clode Sound. — When two miles from Connecting Point, a vessel can also proceed W. f N. to Clode Sound, where there are two good anchorages, Long Cove and Love Cove. The entrance of the first, 7^ miles from Connecting Point, is formed by Dividing Headg the anchorage here is in 4^ to 5^ fathoms. The second is 8 miles W. b^ S. from Dividing Head : it is not very deep, but a mile wide in the opening; the depth of water is 4} to 10 fathoms. Clode Sound is frequented for the timber which is found at the bead of it. tiONO Islands.— These islands are four in number ; the channels between them are narrow, and ought not to be tried without some knowledge of them. The easternmost of them is 6 miles from Goose Head, and its south point boars W. [S. W. by W. i W."] from it. The islands have some covered rocks on the north side, but the roost distant is not more than 600 yards from the land. Newman's Sound is an arm of the sea, 11 miles in length; Swale Itlandt which frrma the larboard entrance, is 24 miles from Cape Bonavista, in a W. by N. } N. [W^. ty 5.1 direction, and 10 miles from Western Head. This island divides the entrance into two passages, one to the south called Swale Tickle, the other Newman' t Sound} the fint very difficult, and therefore ought not to be used ; the second leads to jSoiu/y Cove, Great and Littie Happy Adventure, and lastl} North Broad Cove. Sandy Cove is situated to the N. by W. 1} mile from the N.E. point of Swale Island; it is a very f uvy " anchorage, and is very easily known by its sandy beach, the only one on this side ot the > "u.^; there is no danger in the route which leads to it, and the anchor- age is in 14 to \ I ms. To the east of the entrance of this port, at one mile distance, and to the nortl. '^'' -/ale Island, is the Half-way Rock, which is very steep, and at the foot of which is .3^ fathoms ; it forms, with the coast, a channel in which there is plenty of water, but being very narrow, it is but little frequented. Great and Little Happy Adventure, ^ a mile westward from Sandy Cove, are twa snug little coves, on the same side of the bay ; but, from the narrowness of their entrances, they are adapted only for the resort of small vessels : between these places lies a sunken rock about 80 yards from the shore, with only 4 feet of water upon it. The passage into Great Happy Adventure is to the N. of Sydney Island. North Broad Cove. — ^The entrance to this cove lies to the W.N.W. one mile from Harbour Head ; it is a very commodious harbour ; the anchorage is good, and is easily known by the direction which it takes to the West, and by Black Duck liland, which is to the South of the larboard side of the entrance, at the distance of half ^a mile. In coming from the east to this anchorage, after passing Harbour Head, steer for' Black Duck Island, for 1 \ mile, to avoid a sunken rock at 300 yards from the shore ; then proceed N. i W. or else N. by W. ^ W. in order to pass to the North or South of a danger which lies in the middle of North Broad Cove, and which does not show. The north shore is .:^lear, the south less so, but all danger is avoided by keeping 250 yards distant from it. When at the end, there is anchorage in less than 22 fathoms, muddy bottom. More to the West on the north shore, there are several dangerous rocks, the outermost twing half a mile from the land. Wood and water may be procured here. South Broad Cove. — There is another harbour on the south side of Newman's Sound called South Broad Cove, 3 miles distant from the North Cove, and lying S. W. by W. J W. [S. W. by S.] from Black Duck Island. There is at its entrance a small island, which is clear except on the western side, where there is a danger close to it. To enter it, steer sa as to leave the island to the larboard, and when in mid-channel between it and the west side of the entrance, bear away to the anchorage which is toward the end, and between 10 and 1 1 fathoms depth. To the West of South Broad Cove, and W.S.W. from Minchin*$ Point, is 3f i'ncAin'f Cove, to anchor in which, keep along shore flrom the point till you have from 9 to 6 fathoms. Barrow Harbour. — ^The island called the Little Denier, which lies off the entrance of Barrow Harbour, is situate in latitude 48° 41', and long. 53** 31'. The harbour, which lies south-westward of it, is safe and convenient : it is formed by three islands, Biehardp Goodwin, and Keat ; the entrance is about 500 yards wide, and not very difficult of access ; the harbour is a mile long ', the lower part is rocky, and not well sheltered ; but the upper part is completely land-locked, and has good holding-ground. The course to this place, from Bonavista' Gull Island, is N.W. by W. } W., 22 miles. On approaching Little Denier, you roust be careful to avoid the Outer Rock, lying thrQe-quarters of a mile £. | N. from that island. It has only i feet of water ou it ; but i SI ;» i 111 30 BON A VISTA BAV. as the tea constantly breaks, it is easily guarded against. Between Liitle Denier and Ricliaiti's Island, there is also a range of rocks, called the Branduhes, at distances from each ether, and extending nearly half-way over toward Little Denier, with from 14 to 17 feet upon them ; between are channels of 7 and 8 fathoms. These make the northern channel preferable for strangers without a pilot. To run clear of the Brandishes, you must keep fTedge Point, (the projection within the harbour,) a little open to the south- ward of Smoky Ridge, (a range of high land at the top of the harbour,) until you bring Broom Head N. by E. | E., on with the middle Shag Island : the passage is then with- out obstruction till vou near Wedge Point, off which, at 70 yards, lies a sunken rock, with 8 feet of water : you may then sail up abreast Pudner's Cove, until you are entirely shut in from the sea, and anchor in from 10 to 18 fathoms. There is a small fishing establish- ment here j good water in Pudner's Cove, and abundance of fire-wood.* The land about Barrow Harbour is higher than the neighbouring coast, and may be easily recognised by its projection. Cow Head, which lies S.W. by W. i W. ( WeU) from Cape Bonavista, forms the Eastern point of Salvage Bay, which is about 4 miles in length, and contains several fresh-water streams, but does not ofiisr any shelter. Damha Harbour, (vulgo Damnable.) The little island called Ship Island, lies in latitade 48<* 46 J', long. 53» 34', and at 8 leagues N.W. J W.^IT. | ^.] from Cape Bonavista; and Damna Harbour lies W. i S. six miles from Ship Island. The island may be known by a remarkable bald point like a sugar loaf. The harbour is well adapted for small vessels, but its very narrow entrance disqualifies it for ships of burthen : there is a cock o£f the soothein part of the entrance, and another oS the northern side of the island, which lies in the middle of the harbour ; there is good anchorage uW round the island, in 4 to 5 fathoms, sandy bottom : water may be easily procured, but « ery little wood. Morris Cove is a safe anchorage, situated on the North sido of the island bearing that name, which lies to the northward of Damna : in sailing for it keep Ship Island well on board ; as you will thus avoid the reef called the Ship Rocks, which lies to the northward. Having got inside Ship Island, avoid shutting in Lackington Rock with Varket Island, (knowii by its forming two remarkable hummocks,) as there are several clusters of rocks between Ship and the Horsechop Islands, on the South side: steer for the Varket until you get abreast of Lackington Rock, then keep Lackington Rock on the northern extremity of Ship Island until the \aiket bears North, to clear two sunken rocks ofi'the N.E. end of Morris Island : you may then sail directly for the Cove, which you can enter witliout fearing obstruction, and anchor in any part of it, in 25 to 5 fathoms, but the western side of the Cove is preferable. Wood plentiful } water scarce in the summer season. To the N. and N.E. of Morris Island, there is a great number of islands, surrounded by rocks ; the principal of which are Willis, Cottel, and Pit-Sound Islands, but they offer no andiorages, except some coves which ere only frequented by the boats which cruise in theseparts.f From Ship Island, at the distance of 9 miles in the direction of £. by N. I N. [N.E. ^ N."] is Malone's Ledge, and from the same point, E. by N. } N. [N.E. } N.l 10 miles, the rocks of the same name. These dangersauo lie N.N.W. ^ W. [JKT. 1^. by H'.J 20 miles from Cape Bonavista. On Malone's Ledge there is 4 fathoms water. The South Brown Rocks lie N.N.E. f E. [Nortk] 4 miles from Malone's Rock. Five miles N.N.E. iV. i H^.] from Malone's Rock, are South Brawn Rocks i Middle Rock liee N.N.E. TF.] 3 miles distant, and S.E. by E. i £. \^East] is a rock called Eastern Rock. * All the wood on the coast-tlde is very diminutive, but it k, generally, much larger inland. f Mr. Jukes, in his Excwrtions in Newfoundland, (London, 1842) voL ii. p. 91, describes the singular nature of some parts of this Archipelago. *' In the passage between Trinity, or Lewis's Island, (to the N.W. of Pit-Sound Island) and the Frying-pan, the bottom of the sea consisted of huge peaks and mounds of this white granite, rising from the deep and dark hollows. The extreme clearness of the water rendered these cliffs and peaks all visible as we approached them, though none reached to within three or four fathoms of the surface ; and the sensation experienced in saihng over them was most singular, and to me very uncomforuble. I could not look over the boat without extreme giddiness, as if suspended on some aSrial height, leaning over a tremendous gulf. The same sensation was described to me by a genUttman I afterwards met with, an experienced hunter and sailwt, as aaaailing bin upon his once, in smooth water, taking a boat within the space of some sunken rocks off the Wadham Islands, on which the waUr brake in bad weather. These rocks he described as three peaks, rising from an apparently unfiithomable depth; and the sensation, as his boat gently rose and fell between them, was so unpleasant, and indeed awfuL that he riadly got away as fast as he could/' m BON A VISTA BAY, ETC. SI These rocks are the outermost of those that extend from Ship Island to Offer or Outer Gooseberry Island. VA&ZATZON«— It may not be unworthy of remark, that the polarity of the Needle is subject to several localities in different parts of Bonavista Bay, becoming gradually less as you get embayed ; and this derangement is supposed to arise from the land's being impregnated with a mineral substance. At the Capes, which form the Bay, the variation of the compass was 30<' 28' ; at Barrow Harbour 1!8<* 30' ; and at Great Happy Adventure not more than 28°, in the year 1819. GOOSEBERRY ISLES, &c.— The Gooseberry Islands are a cluster of islets, near the middle of Boiftvista Bay. The Offer or Outer Gooseberry is in latitude 48° 58f , longitude 53° 27'. From Cape Bonavista, to sail clear of the Eastern Rocky which lies at a mile and a half to the E.S.E. of the Offer Gooseberry Island, the course is N. by W. ^ W. and from thence to Copper Island, (at the mouth of Greenspond Tickle) N. | E. Here it is possible to obtain pilots for this and the adjacent anchorages, which are North- west-Arh, New Harbour, and XDat Cove; there is also good holding ground between Greenspond Island and the main ; but the water is so deep, that a vessel is liable to drift on shore in the act of weighing, nor is there sufficient room to veer to a lengthened cable in heavy gales from the S.W., to which quarter it is much exposed.* Ships coming in from the Eastward, to round Cape Freels, have to avoid the Charge Rock, which lies S.E. | S. 2| miles from Cape Freels' Gull Island ; the rock has only 6 feet of water upon it, and is circumscribed by a large spot of rough fishing-ground, having from 8 to 30 fathoms ; from the Gull Island you may run immediately southward for the Stinking Islands, taking care not to open Cape Freels to the eastward of the Gull ; this will carry you inside the danger ; keeping a good look for the Mid>rocks, which are just above water, ,and lie two miles to the N.E. by £. | E. of the Stinking Islands; but a vessel, not bound up the bay, is enjoined to keep well outside; for should the weather become suddenly thick and foggy (which is not unfrequent with an easterly wind) she runs a great risk of getting bewildered among the innumerable rocks for which this part of the coast is remarkable, and from which neither chart nor compass can direct the stranger. At three-quarters of a mile N.W. from this Gull Island is a rock with 3 fathoms of water upon it. In the winter months, when the north-easterly gales are very heavy and continuous, the sea breaks exceedingly high over several spots of the Stinking Banks, which lie E.N.E. i E. from the Stinking Islands : in two places there is as little as 7 fathoms : in such weather, although a vessel would not strike, she would be in very great danger of foundering in the tremendous sea which would be apt to break over her ; but in fine weather, no danger of them is to be apprehended. Having rounded the Stinking Islands, and wishing to sail into New Harbour or Cat Cove, steer directly for the Offer Gooseberry Island, 8.W. by W^ ^ W. until you bring Pouch and Flower's Islantfs to touch each other : you will be then two miles outside the Three Rocks, which lie at a mile and a half to the southward of Flower's Islands. The outer of the Three Rocks has on it 3 fathoms of water, the middle 14 feet, and the inner only 1 1 feet. Now alter the course to W. ;^ S., keeping the white face of Chalky Hills, in Locker Reach, a little on the starboard bow, which will carry you clear of Copper Island dangers lying without Shoe Cove Point : should the roughness of the weather prevent your getting a pilot on board thereabout, continue on this course until you bring Shoe Cove Point (which may be distinguished from its bearing a semblance to white marble) to bear N.W. i W. : then shape your course for Indian Bay W.N.W. NEW HARBOUR is two miles to the westward of Shoe Cove Point. With easterly winds it is quite inaccessible, from its narrow entrance : in which case ^ou must continue onward for Cot Cove, lying four miles farther up the bay on the same side. The Cove is formed i^y Cat Island, and may be easily recognised, it being the only part in the vicinity that is covered with live woods, the surrounding forests having been destroyed by conflagration ; on sailing in, keep the island open on your starboard bow. Off the upper part of Cat Island lie two high green rocks, which' you must round, the passage formed by them being too shoal to pass between : you may then run till you get some distance inside the upper point of the island, and then anchor in from 5 to 13 fathoms, with the hawse * The course to Barrow Harbour, from the eastern Gooseberry Rock, is S.W. | W. 18 miles ; steering from the latter place to Barrow Harbour you have to avoid Mccone's Ledge, a shoal lying S. I W. one mile from the rock (above water) which bears the same name ; it has never less than 4 fathoms, so that, in fine weather, no danger is to be apprehended. I i i t I' iif 11 '>}'. If 11. 38 CAPE FREELS TO CAPE ST. JOliU. open to N.W., the winds from that quarter being in geneml most hea»y and squally, tn working in, you may stand close to either shore, except off the point of the island, as there is a sunken rock within 100 yards of it, with not more than 10 feet water. NORTHWEST ARM (lat. 49" 6' 30") is the best anchorage near Cape Freels; but its access is not without difficulty, from the multiplicity of islands that lie in the neighbour- hood, and which are almost undistinguishable from their great semblance of each other : the greatest danger you have to encounter, in making this place from the southward, is the Northern RocA, which lies N.E. IJ mile from Copper Island, (known by its height and without wood); it has never less than. 22 feet of water upon it ; so that, m fine weather, vessels which generally frequent this coast, may pass over it in perfect safAy; but, in hard fales, the sea breaks over it incredibly high : to avoid it, be careful not to open Fool's SLAMD, at the entrance of N.W. Arm (which is somewhat higher and more prominent than the rest, and which is covered with trees, except the crown), to the westward of the fFetlern Pond Rock, until you bring Butterfiy Island to touch the inner point of Flower's Island, or until Puffin and Copper Islands touch each other; then leaving the Pond Rocks on the starboard hand, steer in for Fool's Island ; which island it is advisable to keep well on board, as there is a sunken rock lying exactly in mid-channel, between it and Partridge Island Rocks, with 18 feet upon it{ to clear which, it is impossible to give a Descriptive Mark. The course then into the arm is N.W. | W., and as soon as you get inside Odd Island, you may anchor in muddy ground with from 7 to 9 fathoms, FooPs Island Hill bearing S.E. to S.E. by S. During the dry summer months, vessels are compelled to send to Loo Cove for water, nor is wood to be procured on this part of the coast within the distance of twelve miles. Greenspono Tickle.* — This is a small haibour in latitude 49® 4' on the eastern side of Greenspond Island, formed by several smaller ones which lie off it, and is of very little importance, not bein^ capable of receiving vessels whose draught of water exceeds 14 feet; its dangers are m the Northern, the Cookroom, Puffin, and Harbour Rock*, but it is impossible to get in with a foul wind ; or with a fair oiie without a pilot. Ships sometimes anchor between the island and the main ; but the place is contracted, and the water is very deep, and to which it is much exposed to S.W. winds, so that it cannot be recommended as a place of safety : to sail into it, you must pass to the westward of Copper Island, in cfoing which you muiit cautiously avoid the Midsummer Rock^ which lies one mile off south-westward from that island, and has only 6 feet of water on it : when you shut in Silver Hair Island, with Shoe Co.e Point, you are inside the danger. Greens- pond is a straggling place, and has several good houses and a church ; but the inhabitants sometimes are in want of fresh water, being obliged to fetch it from the mainland, three miles off. From Copper Island, in the direction of N.E. | N. [N. by E."] wh'-*- '• 'he bearing of Cape Freels, the coast is strewed with dangers, the outermost of „aL Sear about E. i N. from Copper Island; among these, are the Three Rocks, 1} mile iwui Flower Islands, bearine S. by E. from them, and on which there is but from II to 1 feet water ; Mid Rock, N. oy E. } E. 2 miles, from Stinking Islands; two banks off , e Stinking Islands, the first E. by S. 2i miles, and the other E. by N. 3 miles, from the n; there is 7 faUioms water on each of them; the Charge Rock, 4} miles N.N.E. from in Stinking Islands, and 2} miles S.E. } S. from the middle of Gull Inland, off Cape Freeh ; on this rock there is but 6 feet water. v.— THE N.E. COAST FROM CAPE FREELS TO CAPE ST. JOHN, INCLUD- ING THE BAY OF NOTRE DAME AND ARCHIPELAGO OF EXPLOITS. CAPE FREELS is formed of three points, South Bill, Cape Freeh or Middle Bill, and North Bill ; it is lined with very dangerous rocks and shoals, and therefore, it is neces- sary to give it a wide berth. To the W. of the point of Cape Freels is a tolerably high hill called the Cape Ridge; ito position is lat. 49** 15' 30" fi, and long. 53° 26' 8" W. Gull Island lies S.E. \ S. 2^ miles from Cape Freels: it is clear, although at nearly a mile N. by W. from its western point there is a rock called Gtdl Island Rock. Funk Island lies N.E. by E. 31 miles from Cape Freels; it is a low and sterile rock, 100 fathoms long from E. to W., and cannot be seen more than 10 miles off, but is easily • The word TieUe is a local name, in common use at Newfoundland, and signifies a passage between islands or rocks. lot ca it CAPE FHEELS TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 33 known from the great quantity of sea-birds constantly hovering over it. It is in latitude 49° 44' 15", and longitude 53° 7'. At GO fathoms to tic northward of it, is a sunken rock of 10 feet, on which the sea generally breaks, and mure to the westward are two islets, called the Inland Rock», with a clear passage between them, 70 fathoms in breadth. Brenton Rock, between Funk Isle and the Wadham Isles; a dangerous rock was discovered on the 2Sth of September, 1836, during a gale and a very heavy sea, by Capt. P>an Percy, in the brig St. John, on the auluronal circuit with the Hon. Judge Brenton. Heavy breakers were distinctly seen upon a rock bearing W. J S. a .u.. ^uiherly, about 7 miles from Funk Island. The bearing was taken in a fine clear evL....f the arbour, until the point called Fogo Head is on with the heighu in N. by W. ^ W., in order to avoid the reefs off this point, which extend easterly, as far as the Harbour Rock, which lies in the middle of the passage and shows but seldom, except sometimes at low water of spring tides ; after this, run S. W. by 8. and close in to the W. by S. or W. by N. to anchor in 44 or 5^ fathoms, good holding ground and well sheltered. Tliis harbour is very small, and it merits the attention of those who enter in here. To the South of Fogo Harbour, there is another, called Hare Bay, which runs to the South. The entrance by closing in with the larboard side, is not difficult, and there will be found a deptli of 10, 17, 11, 7, and 4 fathoms. The other harbours have such narrow entrances, and otherwise so embarrassed with dangers, that it would be imprudent to attempt them without a pilot. There is no danger in coming from the East in making Cape Fogo, after seeing Funk Island or the Wadham Islands, and waiting for a pilot between the Cape and Burnt Pointy which lies 64 miles W. I N. [W.S.fF.] from it. By not proceeding more to the West than Burnt Point, and keeping a mile or perhaps half a mile from the shore, there is nothing to fear, the only danger being near Burnt Point, and extending to the W. by S. BAY OF NOTRE DAME. S4 Shoau to the North of Fooo.— TotheN.E. of Fogo, there areseferal re^fs, the outer> inoDt of which are as follows : to the N.E. J E. [JV. ^ £. ) £.] 8 miles from the ex- tremity of Cape Fogo, is the Impector Rock, which breaks in bad weather. From the same point, 8^ miles N.N.E. | £. [North] aie the Barrack Rocki, extending above a mile ill a S.S.E. and N.N.W. direction. To the N.N.E. ^N. \ W.] at the distance of 114 miles, lies Ireland Rock, which sometimes breaks. This shoal is the northernmost of those that surround FofT' ^nplace for boats, but ships should not come here, for there is but little depth of water, and the bottom is uneven and rocky. These two harbours are of little importance to the fishery, lying too deep in Confusion Bay for the cod-fish to enter. On the whole of the coast between La Scie harbour and Harbour Round there is not less than ten fathoms water close in-shore. On leaving Harbour Round for Paequel Harbour, do nut approach the left-hand shore too nearly, as there is a rock about midway between the entrance of the harbonr and the point which forms the entrance of the lower part of Confusion Bay ; it is close in-shore. This last bay is not frequented, as it is open to the winds from the N.E. Pacquet HaRdoi;u.— From Harbour Round toPacquet Harbour, first steer E.N.E. for 2 miles, then N.W. by N. [N.W. by IT. i W.] si miles, taking care to avoid the rocks which lie three-quarters of a mile from the Gros Morne. Pacquet Harbour mav be known at its entrance by the high lands which lie to the S. ; it is very safe, and can be used by all vessels. The position of the Gros Morne is in lat. 49° 58' N. and long. 55*^ 45' 8" W. At the starboard point, which is low, are three small rocks and a shoal. The depth of water in the entrance is 23, 21, and 19 fathoms; the harbour then separates into two arms ; the one to the N. W., where the fishing establishments are, is commonly called Pacquet, and the other, to the S.W., is called by the French the Bale de Paris. In the north-western arm, and a little on the left-hand on entering, is a shoal, on which there is but little water; it is uncovered sometimes. Vessels anchor more to the N., mooring both forward and astern ; the depth is from 11) to 14 fathoms, and diminishes in approaching the end. The anchors will lie in 5^ fathoms; a vessel which only anchors in passing ought to lie in 11| to 13 fathoms. In the Bale de Paris the depth is 20, 18, 13, 11, 9, and 6 fathoms, and when this last depth is attained, you ought to anchor; it is good holding ground, and moor in the direc- tion of the coast. The entrance to Pacquet Harbour ought never to be attempted with a strong breeze from between the N.W. to the S.W., as the land-squalls here are very strong and changeable, and it would be daneerous to miss stays in a place so narrow as this ; it would be belter to lie-to outside till the wind dropped, or if baa weather should be feared, (o make for Harbour Round before night. St. Barbe or Horsb Islands.— At 14 miles N.E. by E. [N.N.E. \ EJ] from the en- trance of Pacquet Harbour, is the S.E. point of Great St. Barbe Itland; the smaller island is N.N.E. [ N. i W.'\ from the same, at the distance of 13 miles. Between these two islands is a clear and good passage, with a depth of 36 to 44 fathoms, with black mud. To the S. of these islands there is the same quality of ground at 96 and 76 fathoms; but in the middle of the channel which separates them from Newfoundland, no bottom was found at 70 fathoms. Between them and Ming's Bight (Bale des Pins) the depth is generally great. The rocks which border these islands are too near the shore for a vessel to fear them, with the exception of those which are at the eastern point of the larger island, some of which are half a mile distant from it. To the N.E. of the centre of this island, at nearly 1^ mile distant, there is also a rock, around which is from 13 to 18 fethoms; there is Mtween it and the coast a passage, with a depth of 43 fathoms in the middle of it. On the south side of Great St. Barbe is a small shut-in bay, where boats can find shelter in bad weather. At one mile to the S.E. of this bay is a shoal, about one-third of a mile from the shore, and near which there is 4) fathoms. Hardy Harbour.— Wood Island lies N. i E. [N.N. W. i fF.] 3 miles from Pacquet Harbour, forming Hardy Harbour ; it is a good fishing-place, but inconvenient during strong winds at sea, on account of the di£ficulty that boats find in entering. The ships anchor at Pacquet Harbour, and from thence the fishing utensils and other necessaries are sent during the season. The N. shore of Wood Island must not be approached too near, on account of tlie rocks, which extend from 300 to 400 yards from it. Ming's Bioiit. — At 4 miles N.W. by W. of Wood Island, is the entrance of Ming's Bight, or Baie des Pins, at the end of which there is an anchorage; but, besides that, thi board in going out. To the west of these Islands is Green Bay, which is about ten miles deep, and three in its greatest width. Its depth is very unequal, and varies from 90 to 18 fathoms, but is very irregular, except at the end, where it lessens from 22 to 5\ and 3| fathoms. At the entrance of this bay, in the direction of N. } W. [N.W. \ iV.] and at a distance of 1} mile from Ming's Islands, is a low rock, called The Shten, around which the sea almost continually breaks ; and to the N. by W. ^ W. from this, at half a mile distance, is a shoal, on which there is but three feet water. These are dangerous shoals. From Isle of Pines to Pigeon Itland, which forms the southern entrance of Fleur-de-Lig Harbour, the route is N. ^ W. [Af. (C. f JV.1 and the distance 5f miles. On the aorth side of this island, but close to it, is a small rock. FtEuii-DE>Lis Habboub is difficult to distinguish when near the shore, although when at a sufficient distance, its position is indicated by a mountain over it, which has the form of the head of a fleur-de-lis, and from which it deiives its name. There is no danger to be feared in approaching the entrance ; but when in the harbour, it will be necessary to keep close on the right-hand shore, to avoid a rock, on which there is but 5 or 6 feet water, and which lies nearly two cables' length east of the south point of the harbour islet. When within the islet, you can anchor in 3i to 4} fathoms, sheltered from all winds. Vessels should not attempt to beat into this harbour ; it is better to anchor to the N.E. of the isle, and then haul further in. There is more water to the west of the islet than there is in its channel ; also a ship drawing more than 16 feet, should not endeavour to pass it, but ought) on the contrary, to anchor to the S.E. or to the S. of the islet, where will be found from 10| to 5^ fathoms water. WHITE BAY. — At 2} miles N.W. from the point which forms tlie starboard entrance of Fleur-de-lis Harbour, is Partridge Point, situate in lat. .50** 9' 15', and long. b6° 3' 8' W. It forms the south point of the entrance of White Bay. The western point of Little St. Barbe Island bears E.S.E. [£. by N.] 10 miles from it. The soundings between these two places are 64, 72, 106, 66, and laitly 26 fathoms near to Little St. Barbe Island, with a bottom of black mud. The depth of White Bay is more than 46 miles, and above 16 in breadth ; it is very safe in its whole extent. Generally, at two miles from the south shore, there is no bottom at 90 fathoms ; nor on the north shore at 70 fathoms ; and this continues proceed- ing into the bay until within a mile of the River Head, or nearly at the end, close to a small isle called Miiler Itland; then it is 32, 27, 6, and 10 at the mouth of the river; but it is seldom that the bay is penetrated so far as this, as it has good harbours on either shore, and of easy access. In the middle of the bay there is no bottom at 1 19 fathoms. The current runs out of this bay on the south side, bears S.E. \ E. to the heights of Cape Partridge, and enters the bay on the north side. Lobater Harbour lies W.S.W. i W. [S.W. ^ S.] at a distance of 12 miles from Point Partridge ; it is a small port of a circular form, having a very narrow entrance, and in which there is but 7 or 8 feet water, although there is found a depth of 10} and 1 !) fathoms when inside. Vessels of a slight draught of water can enter at the proper state of the tide ; but it is as well to remark that the tide rises but 4 feet at neap and 6 feet at spring tides, and which is the case in the whole of the bay. It is high water, full and change, at 6t hours. It is necessary, in entering Lobster Harbour, to keep on the larboard shore till to the west of the south point of the entrance, on the north of which there is a small rock near the land. At 4 miles S.W. by W. | W. from Lobster Harbour, is the Southern Arm, the first indenta- tion met with in proceeding along the coast from Partridge Point ; it is a large and safe harbour for a man-of-war ; the anchorage is in 1 5 to 17 fathoms. When the larboard point is shut in by that of the starboard, a second point will be seen in a S.E. direction, which leaves, between it and the coast, a very small passage, entirely closed by a mussel-bank, which dries at low water. Beyond this, there is again a depth of 16 fathoms. Between Gape Partridge and this harbour there is, close in-shote, a depth of at least 9 fathoms, and at M mile distant, 35, 39, and 49 fathoms. FA Jacki a go(| Prf come Bay{ nearU Grec ofthj small KROM CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE XOUMAX. S» To the S.W. by W. ^ W. of the W. point of the South Arm, and 1^ mile distant, is the Middle Arm ; at the entrance is a small rocky isle, from whence runs a bank, on which there is but from 5 to 10 feet water. On the eastern side there is another shoal, which runs out from the coast as far as the preceding, so that the entrance may be said to be shut in by them, though there is a very narrow channel, which is nearer the isle than the eastern side. Within this shoal the harbour ehlari(es, and has u depth of 9 to Q5 fathoms water. This port cannot be used but by very small vessels. Hauling Point bears W. | S. [S.ir. i l^]6i miles from the point of the Middle Arm { it forms the entrance of the Wettern Arm, This part of the coast is n' t so riear as the parts just described, but by keeping at a distance of one mile, the rocks b.i;d shoals may b« avoided, and of which, those farthest out are near the Pigeon Ittandt, and the two poitits we have just mentioned. The Western Arm extends for 2 miles to the S.E., and ve? *\% can enter in safety in 14 and 15 fathoms water; at the entrance, to the N.E., is Bear Covtt where small vessels can mour, sheltered from the wind in 10} fathoms. Ttiere is a j.;.ond called Wild Cove, exposed to winds from the N.W., and with a rocky bottom. This part of White Bay is much narrower, it not beini; more than 6} miles. Thfi N. point of Sop Itland bears W.N.W. } W. IW.S.W. ^ W.] from Hauling Point, 8 miles distant; and that of Cony Arm Head, N. i W. ^N.W. by N. i If'.] at a distance of 9 miles. Proceediii;; to the S.W., towards the bottom of the bay, at 6 miles from Haulir t; Pc "t, there is a small inlet called Piirbeck Cove, where vessels can safely anchor in lu and 11 fathoms. This is the last anchorage on the S.E. side of White Bay, and its approach is without danger. To the W. by N. [ W. by S. } S.] of the entrance of Purbeck Cove, at the distance of 1 i mile, lies the North point of Grandhj/'t htand, called also Middle Itland ; it has no shelter or cove for boats ; at about 400 yards from the S.E. shore is a shoal, wl^S 8 feet water on it; Grandby's Island is distant 11 miles from Miller hland, which is within one mile of the end of White Bay ; continuing the coast, there is found to the N.W. of Miller Island, Gold Cove, where the river divides into several branches, the streams from which determine the currents. Proceeding thence toward the N.E., and then to the northward, we arrive at Spear Point, which is directly W. (true)- of Grandby's Island, which is 15^ miles from the river at the end. The whole of the coast between Spear Point and the end of the bay, is very safe, and there is not less than from 19 to 59 .iJthoms water close to the shore. Sop hland, to the N. of Cape Spear, bears W. } S. [S. W. ^ W.j S3 miles from Par- tridge Point ; it is about 3) miles long from W. to E., and 1) broad from S. to N.; near its South side is a small island called Goati Itland; they forni together, a long passage called Sop^t Arm ; a vessel can anchor just within the north'.cn extremity of Sop Island, where from 20 to S8 fathoms water wilt be found. Tr ;;:.oceed more to the S.W., it is necessary to keep close to Sop Island, because the coast of the continent h not so safe ; there is a rock at half-way between it and the island, at nearly 3 cables' length from the uncovered rock in mid»cnannel ; but having passed this rock, there is anchorage either between Sop and Goat Islands, or between the latter and the continent, in a depth of 4} or 8 fathoms. There is a cove on Sop Island which bears its name, and to the North of Goat Island, on the continent, two other bays, called Deer Coves. At the distance of 3) miles N.E. fN. by £.] from the North point of Sop's Island, is the entrance of Jackion Arm, in which tnere is a depth of 23 to 25 fathoms, except in a small bay called Godfather Cove, lying on the right-hand in entering, and in which a vessel can moor fore and aA. This port produces the best timber of all those in White Bay. FrenchmarCt Cove is 2^ miles N.E. by E. \ E. \N.N.E. } £.] from the entrance of Jackson Arm, after doubling a low point which advances a little to the S. by E. ; it offers a good and safe anchorage in 9 or 11 fathoms. Proceeding from the entrance of Frenchman's Cove N.E. ) N. [^. fry JE.] 4 miles, we come to Cony Arm Head, which is the most remarkable land on the western side of White Bay ; it lies W. ( N. [S. W.hy W.\ W^ 25} miles from Partridge Point, and advances, nearly in a straight line, in the form of a peninsula, leaving between it and the continent, Great Cony Arm, which atfoids no shelter to the fishing vessels ; but in the smaller arm of the same name, lying to the west of Cony Arm Head, there is a very good anchorage for small vessels ; its entrance is not sufficiently deep for vessels of a large draught. 40 THE EASTERN COAST, Three and a half miles north of Little Cony Arm, is Devil's Cove, which is very narrow, and open to winds from the S.E. ; its depth is about 4) fathoms. To the N.W. by W. f W. [W. i S.] 18i miles from Partridge Pomt, and also N.E. by E. {N.N.E. i £.] lOJ miles from Cony Arm Head, is Great Cat Arm, and 2^ miles farther in the same direction, Little Cat Arm. In Great Cat Arm the depth of water is from 37, 35, 29, 27, 24, 20, to 15 fathoms, at the end of the arm, where it is quite safe, and sheltered by the land. At the end of the north point lie some rocks, which are above water; to avoid them, keep quite close to the south shore ; but in going into Little Cat Arm, it is better to keep on the north side, as there is a rock near the land on the opposite side. The entrance to this arm is narrow, and there will be found in it a depth of 22, 9, and 3} fathoms; the least depth of water will be found on the south side of the harbour, within the points. To the N.W. ^ N. \W. by N. i N."] 15 miles from Partridge Point, and N.E. by £. | E. 6 miles from Little Cat Arm, is lAtlfe Harbour Deep, much exposed to winds from the eastern quarter, and by no means good as a harbour ; off the north point of its entrance, there are some uncovered rocks, about half a mile from the shore, and inside of them there is a passage, the depth being 13 fathoms; but the height of the land frequently causes sudden and strong gusts of wind, when it blows from between the S.W. and N.W., and it is therefore advisable, if it is not necessary to clo8« in with the land, to go outside of them. There is no great depth of water in any part of the bay, and the extremity of the bay, from about midway from its entrance, is shoal water; this will be found by the lead, as toward the entrance there is about 90 fathoms, which suddenly shoalens to 5 fathoms on the edge. The north point of Little Harbour Deep, is that of the peninsula which separates it from Union or Grande* Vachct Cove, of which it consequently forms the southern point. This harbour has no more shelter than the former, and is but little, if at all frequented. The north point of its entrance appears like an island, and lies N.W. } W. {N.W. by W. | W.] at a distance of 15 miles from Partridge Point. From the north point of Grandes Vaches, running 7 miles N.E. by E. ^ E., we meet with Orange Bay or Great Harbour Deep, which is easily recognised by the low lands at its entrance, which are less elevated than any of the coasts north of White Bay ; it is distant 16 miles N. by W. [N.W. ^ N.^ (torn Partridge Point ; this bay is spacious, and has on the north side of tlie entrance a small cove, that is frequented by the fishing vessels. At 2i miles from the points of the entrance, Orange Bay divides into two arms, one to the north-west, and the other to the west ; these two arms have no anchorage, on account of the great depth of water, unless it is at the end of the first arm. FouECuAHARBOt;R.— In proceeding along the coast to the north-east, the next is Fourcb^ Harbour, at a distance of loj miles from the entrance of Orange Bay. This harbour runs to the west for 2 miles from its south point, then to the north, forming a small bay, and then continues to the west. It is in this northern bay, which is very narrow, short, and surrounded by very high land, that vessels anchor in sixteen fathoms water, mooring fore and tSi ; but it can only receive small vessels ; if ships are necessitated to enter Fourcb^, they are obliged to proceed to the end, nearly 3^ miles, to anchor in 18 fathoms. The soundings met with from the entrance are, on the north side, 43, 57, 45, 19, 20 ; on the south side, 46, S3, 31, 15, 20; and at the end there are 18 and 14 fathoms. HoopiNQ or Sans-Fond Harbour, lies N.E. } E., 5 miles from the North entrance of Fourch^ Harbour; it separates into two bays, one to the North, the other to the West. You can anchor in the northern bay in 6 fathoms ; it is, in reality, exposed to winds from the south, but there is no danger, if the vessel is properly moored ; in the western ba- Jt is more sheltered, but the depth there is not less tnan 20 or 16 fathomi. The anchorage in the north bay, is that also recommended by Captain Bullock, having been occupied by his ship, while surveying this coast. The entrance of Hooping Harbour lies N.N.E. | £. [N. i W."] at a distance of 27 miles from Partridge Point, and the western end of the smaller Horse, or St. Barbe Island, bears S. ( W. [^S.S.E. i K] 28]| miles distant. « Canada or Canary Bat — Canada Head, on the South side of the entrance of the bay ci the same name, is very high land, and may be distinguished at a great distance, in coming from the north or from the south, but from the high lands of the interior at its back, is diflkult to be recognised in coming directly from the east. It is situated 5 miles N.E. by £. i E. [N.N.E. t £.] from Hooping Harbour. The entrance of Canada Bay is nearly 2 miles broad ; formed, on the south by Canada Head, and on the north by Point AiguHlette$ ; the bay is upwards of 12 miles long ; is peni FROM CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE NORMAN. 41 divided into several ttfins, which are very safe, and consequently can give shelter to vessels that are obliged to make for thetn, from strong winds at sea. Among these anchorages are Bkhe's Arm and the Gouffre. If a vessel is obliged to seek shelter io Canada Bay on account of bad weather, with the wind between south and east, it can anchor in Biche's Arm, on the north-east of EngUe Idand, between it and the coast eastward of it, or at the end of Biche's Arm. To make for the first of these anchorages, on entering Canada Bay, a berth roust be given to Point Aiguillettes, so as to pass it at 5 cables' lengths, pro- ceeding till the most westerly part of the cape is to the north ; then steer along Engine Island, which is only divided from the contment by a few islets, keeping close, so as to anchor on its north-east side, between it and the land ; the depth is great, but the holding ground is good, and there never is a heavy sea. In this passage, there is no other danger but the rock which lies off Point Aiguillettes, about 700 or 800 yards distant. To proceed into Biche's Arm, bear to the North, afler passing Engine Island, taking care to keep nearer to the eastern shore than to the western, and anchor when 18, 16, or 14 fathoms are attained. There is no danger in this arm, after having avoided those of Point Blanche, which lies to the N.N.E. of IBngl^e Island, and which is bordered with daneers, particularly on its west and north sides. The rock which is farthest off from it, is W. by S. 4 S. \S. W. i S."] nearly one mile distant, and N. by W. \ W., one mile from the south point of^Englde Island. This rock is never uncovered. Within the southern extremity of Engine Island there is an anchorage for small vessels ; and boats can, at half tide, pass between the island and the continent^ from this to the anchorage on the north-east side before-mentioned. The best anchorage in Canada Bay is, without doubt, that of the Gouffre, which is to the west 3| miles from the north point of the bay. To make for this harbour, afler leaving the north point of the bay. steer towards it, until a white point which trends a little to the north is seen ahead, and which must be passed at a little distance ; as soon as this is doubled, bear towards a small rocky islet, which often appears part of the land, and when this is recognised, stand to larboard and enter the harbour, dropping the first anchor a little within the islet, ai^d mooring N. W. and S.E. The depth in tnis anchorage is from 14> to 15 fathoms, good holding ground, and sheltered from the wind and sea. By attending to the lead a small vessel can tack into this small harbour, there being a great depth of water close to the shore. Coming from the South, the direction of the White point of the entrance of the Gouffre des Canaries is N.W., and the distance to run IJ mile. Canada Harbour^ which is the first on the larboard hand on entering the bay from which it derives its name, is exposed to winds from the N.B., the anchorage is very bad, and the bottom rocky ; it would be imprudent to anchor here, as a vessel would be exposed to great damage if the wind should blow stronely from between north and east ; it is not frequented except by the fishiug-boats, the ships belonging to the fishery anchoring in the Gouffre. The Ashing establishments of Canada Bay are in Canada Harbour. There are other anchorages In the North or Chmney Arm, such as Beaver Cove, but they are too distant, unless a vessel finds itself obliged to put into them ; should this be the case, and being near the S. point of Engine Island, run N.N.W. ) W. for two miles, when the Point of Biche's Arm will bear E. by N. ^ N. ; then bear N.E. by N. until to the west of an islet which lies across a small bay, called HeWt Mouth ; thence keep close to the eastern shore of the Arm, in order to avoid a shoal, the eastern extremity of which is E.N.E. from the islet ; and lastly, when two points are seen, which approach each other and contract the Arm at this part, which is li mile from the islet, the small harbour of Beaver Cove will lie on the left hand, and is beneath Chuds HilU; the anchorage in this harbour is in 7 fathoms, mooring S.E. and N.W. Spars and timber can be obtained in the North Arm. Hillier's or Boutitou IlAaBOua. by N. for -Proceeding; from Canada Bay to the E. 4 1 miles from Point Aiguillettes, we arrive «t Ilillier's or Boutitou Harbour, which is a !;ood fishing-place, but too small for more than three vessels to lie in safety : it is separated nto two small bays by a high point ; it is in the first of these bays to the starboard in entering, that the anchorage is; the depth at the entrance is from 16 to 18 fathoms, and vessels moor fore and aft, hauling as much as possible into the bay. Half-way between Point Aiguillettes and the north point of Hillier's Harbour, is a reef running about 600 yards from the shore ; all the rest of the coast is without danger. At the distance of 6| miles E. by N. [N.£. | £.] from Hillier's Harbour, lies Fox Cape, the south point of a peninsula, forming, with the coast, the entrance of Conche Harbour ; at the foot of Fox G 1% 42 THE EASTERN COAST, Cape, which is high and perpendicular, is a slioal, which extends nearly 600 yards in d south direction. CoNCHE Harbour is open to winds from the S.S.W. and S.E., which send a very heavy sea into it, notwithstanding which, vessels anchor before the fishing establishments, mooring fore and aft. There is also anchorage at the end of the harbour, near the isthmus of Cape Rouge Harbour, in 5 fathoms. There is no danger in the harbour, and at an equal distance from either shore, there is, proceeding from Fox Cape, 50, 43, 39, 25, to 5 fathoms. Cape Rovoe. — Cape Rouge Harbour is one of the largest on the coast of Newfound- land ; its entrance is two-thirds of a mile broad, and a vessel can easily beat into it ; wood and water are also obtained here. From Fox Cape, the distance hither is rather more than three miles, in a N.E.by £. i £. direction, to the S. point of the entrance, which is called Point Frauderesse, in lat. 50" 54' 30" N. and long. 55° 46' 2" W. The Frauderesse is a shoal, near the point, which projects nearly 400 yards to the N.E. From this shoal to the S. W. end of the harbour, the coast is lined with flat rocks, which render it necessary not to approach too near : the Champ- Paga is a rocky bank, of which the S.W. extremity lies exactly W., true, of the Frauderesse, and the N.E. p&rt W.N.W. of the cape forming the northern side of the entrance of the harbour ; its centre, on which there is but 6 or 7 feet of water, is in the direction of the Frauderesse, on with the most southern point of Groais or Groix Isle ; it lies at an equal distance from each side of the S.W. part of the harbour, so that it may be avoided by keeping two-thirds of the breadth of ttie channel from either coast, after passing Point Frauderesse. On the east of it there is 5 fathoms, on the west, 8, and to the south, 18 fathoms. Many vessels anchor here, as the fishing estab- lishments are to the S.W., but the bottom is not very good holding ground. It is better to anchor in the northern Arm, and all large ships or men-of-war ought to anchor here ; the entrance is easy, and there is nothing to fear at a cable's length from the shore ; proceed up the Arm till abreast of a strong stream, which falls from the mountains to the west, and anchor here in 19 to 24 fathoms ; the bottom is good, and the sea is never heavy. There is another anchorage to the N.W. of Point Frauderesse at the foot of a hill, of which a part is of loose stones, and the rest wooded ; the depth here is 12 or 14 fathoms; this anchor- age is called PrUsfs Cove : although in the opening of the harbour the wind is not felt here, it is better that not more than one vessel should anchor at Cape Rouge, and not to stay more than 24 or SO hours ; if there is any appearance of bad weather abroad, this harbour should not be made for. To the 8.E. of Point Frauderesse, at the distance of 2} miles, is a small islet called Rouge Itlandt which is quite safe all around ; the soundings between it and Cape Rouge Harbour are 18, 32, 31, and 14 fathoms. Un leaving Cape Rouge Harbour the land runs to the N.E. to the Gonde tnountain, which is peaked and joined to the laud by a low isthmus, and appears as if separated from it. BELLE ISLE SOUTH.— The N.E. poini of this island is in lat 50° 48', and long. 55" 22' 52'; it is 9 miles long from N.B. to S.W., and 6 broad from N.W. to S.E. It is safe all around except on the south, where there are several rocks, both above and beneath the water, some of which are more than two miles from the land. The most distant is nearly half a mile to the W. of a rocky islet lying S. of the Belle Isle, named South BxKk: it is S.E. i E. [£. 6y 5.] at a distance of 19 miles from Point Aiguilleties. The harbour of Belle Isle is on its S.W. side ; it is very incommodious, and can receive but one or two vessels at most. They are obliged to anchor outside, and to haul aft into a small channel between the island and the shore, using four anchors besides the first, which ought to be a bower-anchor and chain-cable. In this position the South Rock will bear, on with an island nearer the land, to the S. } W. Between the reefs on the S.W. side of the island and the South Rock, the passage is more than a mile broad ; the depth of water varies from 7, 12, 17, to 24 fathoms, the depth increasing nearer the Rock, and diminishing toward the reefs. On the south part of the west side of Belle Isle is Green hland, which is small and about a third of a mile from the shore ; about 600 yards to the N.W. of this is a shoal, near which is 16 fathoms. Between Belle Isle and the coast of Newfoundland there is no bottom at 60 or 65 fathoms, excepting near the land ; but in mid-channel between it and Canada Bay the depth is 82 fathoms, black mud. The sound- ings to the E. of Belle Isle, 11 or 12 miles off, are 87 fathoms, black mud; at 7 miles E. of the N. eiid of the island, 86 fathoms, mud and shells; and 4 miles from the N.E. point to the E. 82 fathoms, brown mud. Groais or Groix Island.— The channel between Groais and Belle Isle is 5) mile.<< broad, the depth on the N. is 43 fathoms, to the S. 39, and in the middle 54 to 58 fathoms, weal afteif conij warj and] 2 od P' of; atted and I isfrl FROM CAPE SI. JOHN TO CAPE NORMAN. 43 and generally the bottom here is of brown mud mixed with rotten shells. There is no sho-di or danger in this passage. Groais Island is very high, and its surface is even ; its most northerly point is in lat. 5G^ 59' 15% and long. 55° 27' 28". h is nearly 7 milei.< long from N. to S. and 3| miles in its greatest breadth. It is very safe on its E., S., and W. sides ; but to the N.W. there are several rocks above and beneath water, which extend to the North. To avoid these rocks, keep the north point of the island always to the S. of S.E. I E. At the N.E. point are three small islands called the Sutert, but they ought not to be passed too closely. In fine weather Groais Island may be seen at a distance of 15 or 18 leagues. To the E. of the island there is no bottom at 60 fathoms, 3 miles off; but to the N.N.E. at 2 miles the soundings are 67 fathoms, and between the island and the coast, 47, 66, 70, 62, and lastly, 33 fathoms, at less than a mile from the shore. The channel between Groais and Newfoundland is rather above 7 miles broad. From Gonde Mount, at the north extremity of Cape Rouge, the coast runs to the W.N.W. for nearly a mile and a half, and then again to the E. by N. for 6 miles, as far as Cope Ventf forming; a large bay, which comprehends within it two smaller ones, separated from each other by a large cape called Eagle Cape. The first or southern bay is called Pillar Btttf, and is a good fishing-place, but scarcely affords security to the boats. The second to theNo' h, named Millions Bay, has not more shelter than the former, and is also an excellent fishing-place. The coftst of this bay is very high, and may be distinguished from that to the south of it, because It is not wooded in the interior, as well as by being barren near the sea. Millions Bay is on a line which joins the south point of Groais Island, and the N.E. point of Belle Isle. If the mountains on the coast should be covered with the fog on approaching the land, Cape Vent or Cape Rouge may be easily found, according as it is from the north or south that they are sought. Croc Harbotjh.— -The entrance of this harbour is formed on the S. by Cape Vent, which is in lat. 51° 2' 26", and long. 55° 41' 32", and on the N. by Grouts Point. At the foot of the cape there are two black, rocky islets, which leave between them a passage for boats, when the sea is calm; a ship can pass quite close to the outer one. The entrance of Croc Harbour is two-thirds of a mile wide ; (he S. shore runs first W. by N. and then to the W. by S. forming the S.W. bay, which offers no shelter from N. or N.E. winds; and consequently is never used. A small vessel drawing 9 or 10 feet water, can, however, run to the end of the bay, and lie between the S.W. islet and the fishing establishment called Petit' Maitre, opposite the fishing stage of this place, but it will be necessary to moor fore and aft. A little within the S.W. bay, there is an uncovered rock on which the sea always breaks ; it is known by the name of the Folle^ although the fishers generally call it the Whale Rock. In going to the S.W. it must be left to the starboard, and as soon as it is passed, bear towards a small bay called Btere Cove, to avoid a breaker which lies in the direction of the islet ; after this, steer between the islet and Petit-Maitre. From the entrance of the S.W. bay, the harbour runs N. by W. and at 1^ mile divides into two arms, one to the N. the other to the S.W. ; the first is called the Fond, and the other Epine-Cadoret. There is anchorage in any part of Croc Harbour, the depth not being more than from 22, 19, 18, 16, 10, and 9 fathoms, though all parts of the bay are not equally good ; a vessel is well moored (N, and S.) when Cape Vent is sKut in by Point Genilte ; the depth then is 18 or 19 fathoms, and the bottom of hard mud of a slate colour. There is also anchorage in Epine-Cadoret, but it is not necessary to proceed so far into the bay. The winds which are strongest in Croc Harbour are those between S.W. and N.W., which generally are in squalls. North-easterly winds are also felt in bad weather, but they never cause a very hoavv sea in the harbour. In Epine-Cadoret, just after passing by a narrow creek, which dries almost entirely at low water, there is a convenient place, on the rocks, for heaving a vessel down to careen ; the French ships of war, Oiiviere and PhiUmlle, were hove down here, and the rocks prepared for the rigging and a capstan. At the end of the arm, toward the W. there is a small river which runs 2 or 3 leagues into the country, and leads into a part of the forest where spars may be procured. Croc Harbour is the central point of the French station, and is easy to enter and get out of; wood and water are also readily procured. A frigate can tack into it, but great attention must be paid to veer abcwt in good time, as under the land the wind is uncertain, and fi^uently takes ab.\ck at th» flnoaaent of tacking about, particularly when the wind is from the N.W. and in squalls. Ciqic \''ent is not easily recognised by strangers, particu. 44 THE EASTERN COAST, larly in making the land directly from the E.; it lies N.W. 4 N. [JT. by N. | JV.] 9 mile* from the north pqint of Groais Island. In leaving Croc Harbour to proceed to the north, after passing Point Grouts, two black rocks are seen, called by the fishers the Ravent. The land hence to Irish Island, runs E. by N. i N. nearly 3 miles; from thence to the N.E. to the S.W. point of St. Jutien Island, which extends a mile to the easi. Jrith or Black Island is half a mile from that of St. Julien : it is a barren rock, beaten by the sea, and very abrupt. St. Julien Island to the N. and 8 miles from the N.E. point of Groais, forms the entrance of the large harbour of the same name : there are two shoals, one at the south point a little to the E., the other on the N.W. side, but they do not extend above 300 yards from the land. All around and close in-shore there is 12, 14, 20, and 23 fathoms. The passage between this island and the continent should not be attempted. St. Julien Harboub.— The harbour of Great St. Julien lies to the S.W. of the northern part of St. Julien Island ; to enter it, pass to the N.E. of the Island, and then steer so as to keep one-third or half a mile off, until the channel which separates it from the coast is seen ; then keep on the larboard shore to clear a shoal which extends from the western shore over nearly a third of the breadth of the harbour. When at the rise of some very low land between two mountains, or nearer the end of the harbour than the establishments, you can anchor in 7 or 3 i fathoms, mooring fore and Sft. To enter Little St. Julien Harbour, proceed as if for Great St. Julien, to avoid a rocky shoal which projects from Grandes Oies Island, and terminates in a tolerably large bank ; thence as soon as abreast the entrance of Grandes Oies, steer for Little St. Julien, and anchor then in 4^ or 3^ fathoms. Like the foregoing harbour, it is necessary to moor fore and aft. The Harbour of Grandes Oies, shut in by the island of the same name, is not fit for the reception of ships, but is very convenient for fishing-boats. From this harbour the coast runs 1^ mile to the E. by N., then for the same distance to the N. by E. | E., and then to the N.N. W. for one mile, to Grandes Ilettes harbour. The route hither is quite clear, and there is from 10 to 14 fathoms near the coast. Although open to S.E. winds, Grandes Ilettes Harbour being situated at the foot of high mountains, the wind is seldom strong, being checked by them : vessels lie safely in it in 5| fathoms water. Tbe Ilettes. — The Petites Ilettes form a harbour, which lies E. i S. from Grandes Ilettes ; the entrance is exposed to the N.E., and can only receive vessels of a less draught of water than 11 feel. The entrance is narrow, and vessels must moor fore and aft. At high water, boats can find a passage to the W. communicating with Grandes Ilettes. Half a mile to the S. of Petites Ilettes, and from thence bearing to the N.W. by N. towards Grandes Ilettes, there are several rocky islets and some shoals ; and on account of this, a vessel proceeding to Grandes Ilettes ought to leave to starboard all rocks and isles that may be in sight. Those who go to Petites Ilettes, if coming from the S. of Fishot Islands, should steer so as to pass these islands at not less than half a mile off, in order to clear the shoals of Monk's lalaud. The depth of 10 fathoms when to the S. of these islets, will be a guide when to bear to the starboard, and which may be done at one or two cables' length from the shoal, if it is judged expedient, steering N.N.E. in order to pass between Fishot Island and the shoal which separates into equal parts the channel formed by it,channel between it and the Cormorandier, 'lere is a rock which is rather dangerous. The Cormo- randiers themselves are surrounded with shoals, and there is a bank at a quarter of a mile E. from the largest. Between the Cormorandiers and Le Four in the direction of W. by S. } S. there are several shoals, and an uncovered rock, which is rather more to the west; but in all the eastern part between the bank of Great Cormorandier and the S. of Fishot Islands, there is no danger at a distance of a quarter of a mite from the shore. Hare Bay. — Fishot Isles on the south and Goose Cape on the north form the entrance of Hare Bay, which extends to the west for 17 or 18 miles, and is about 6 miles broad. This large bay contains several harbours, which are not frequented on account of their being so deeply seated in the bay. The whole of the south side of this bay is bordered with rocks, but these may be all avoided by keeping to the north of a line between Cormorandier Island and Springs Island, and also thence to Brents Islands. The soundings between Cormorandier and Springs Island are in 28, 30, 36, and 14 fathoms; between the last and Brents Islands, 11, 17, 15, 12 fathoms, close on the shoals which are W. | S. from Springs Island. Thus the route to the anchorage in Southern 4rm is as follows : from Great Cormorandier run toward Springs Island, and it is better to pass to the N. of it, although there is a channel of nearly a mile broad to the south of it, and in which there is not less than 12 fathoms (but it should be passed in mid-channel) ; proceed thence toward the middle of Brents Island, or toward the North Island, according as the passage is to the N. or S. of Springs Island ; proceed thus till the western point of the entrance of the Southern Arm is open ; it lies to the west of a small island, and then bear up : the depth now will be 1 5 fathoms, and it is less than half a mile from Brents Islands. Continue towards the last-named point, and the entrance to the Arm will be seen ; on entering it the course is to the S.W. by W. that is, in mid-channel; the depth will be 17, 19, 10, 1 2, and then 10 and 1 1 fathoms when arrived in the broadest part, where the anchorage is. Vessels can also anchor to the W. } N. of the most southerly of the Breats Islands, m 4| and 5 fathoms. The north side of the bay is quite clear and safe in its whole extent, and there is a much better harbour here called How's Harbour. Its entrance is precisely N. (true) of the eastern side of Brents Islands, and N.W. J W. T W. by NJ]il^ miles from Goose Cape. The hills around it are barren, but small stunted wood may be found in the valleys. This harbour is two miles deep by two-thirds of a mile broad ; it is open to the S.W. and turns to the N.N.W. by which it is shut in like a basin. The depth of water is 10 fathoms. It is easy and safe of access, because on all the north side of Hare Bay from Goose Cape to Hare Island, which is 4 miles to the west of this harbour, there is not the smallest rock ; and there does not exist a single shoal north of the line which joins Brents Islands, Springs Island, and the Great Cormorandier. Between Brents Islands and How Harbour, the soundings give 18, 22, 23, 24, and 15 ftithoms at the entrance of (he harbour; bcrtween Springs Island and the north coast the depths are 18, 27, 34, 45, if 46 THE EASTERN COAST, 40, 38, S4, and 35 fathoms; between Cormorandier Island and Goose Cape, 27, 32, 31, 25 fathoms; and along the middle of the bay from its entrance to tlie end, passing to the northward of Brents Islands, there is 32, 35, 39, 46, 41, 25, 27, 21, 17, 12 and 9 fathoms. Spars and other timber can be procured in Hare Day. Goose Cape is one of the most remarkable points on the coast of Newfoundland ; it is to be seen from a great distance, and projecting into the sea with a gentle declivity, it has the appearance of a tongue of low k nd, which in certain positions seems like an island, and separated from the land. It may be also remarked, that Hare Bay being deep and the shores low, Goose Cape will appear entirely detached from the coast to the S., which runs northerly. lu latitude is 5l<' 17' 20", long. 55° 32' 32"; it is 18 miles N.N.E. {N. i W.] from the north point of Groais Island. A little to the N. of Goose Cape arid nearly over it, there are three very distinct mountains that are near the coast, and more in the interior, to the N. of Hare Bay, the Capillaire Mountains, which are very high. Tlie soundings to the E. of Goose Cape, at the distance of 9 to 12 miles, are about 83 fathoms ; the bottom of fine grey sand, and the same depth is found before Crdmaill^re Harbour. Goose Harbour is to the north, and under the cape of the same name, after doubling it ; it is open to the W. by N. At its entrance is an islet, on which iron rings are fixed, on which tow ropes may be affixed, by which vessels can haul into the harbour with con- trary winds. The passage is to the N. of the islet, at a short distance to the N., as there is a small covered rock near it. In the middle of the harbour is a rock called the BaleinCf or Whak, but it is never covered. Vessels must moor fore and aft in Goose Harbour. Three Mountains. — The harbour of Three Mountains is to the W. of Point Enrag^e of Goose Cape, and at the back of Notre Dame Island ; the entrance is on either side of this island. If the south passage is used, keep closer to the island than to th% southern side, because there is a rock to the £. of Cape Enragee at two cables' length from it ; the depth in mid-channel is 20 fathoms, then 10, when off the islet, which is about mid-way between Notre Dame Island and the land. If the northern passage is used, it is also neces- sary to keep close to the island, because of a shoal which is about half a mile to the north* ward; after which run into the harbour, leaving, in preference, the islet on the starboard. Vessels, anchoring fore and aft, lie here in perfect safety. Crimailiere Harbour is one of the finest on the coast of Newfoundland, and is an excel- lent port for men-of-war to put into. It has excellent water and abundance of fire-wood. Its entrance is about half a mile broad, formed, on the South, by Cape Haut-et-BaSf be- neath which is a cave, washed by the sea, called Whale-Hole ; and on the North by a low, rocky, sea-worn point, called Anchor Point. In coming from the South to Crdmaill^re Harbour, there is a shoal to the north of Notre Dame Island, which care must be taken to avoid ; to do this, keep outside of a line joining the larboard point of the entrance and the N.E. point of the island, and when Anchor Point bears to the £. by N. run to the N. by £. to clear a point on the left hand, from which runs a shoal for a cable's length from it ; then bear towards the end of the harbour, at an equal distance from either shore, and anchor in 12, 10, or 9 fathoms. In coming from the East or the North, run along shore a cable's length distant from Point SauvageSf a steep, rocky point, sea-worn, and on the starboard side on entering Crimailiere, running to the East from Anchor Point, and then steer N. by W. to enter the anchorage. The bottom is good, and is better in front of the establishment called Banc a POurs than in any other part. From Anchor Point, and in a N. by E. direction, there is a reef of rocks, on which there is but 10 or 12 feet water ; thus it would not be prudent to approach this point too nearly, in case the wind should fail. In tacking into Cremaill^re Harbour, bear round as soon as 4) fathoms are attained ; and care ought to be taken on account of the land-squalls and flaws which are met with under Cape Haut-et- Bas. Between Crimailiere and Fox Cape the coast is quite clear and safe. At the distance of 4i miles E.by N. i N. from Point Enragee is Cape St. Anthony; and in the same direction, 1^ mile farther, is French Point, which is often mistaken for the Cape, although it is to the East of it. This point is in lat. 51" 22', and long. 55° 23' 42". St. Anthony. —Cape St. Anthony, with Fox Point, form the opening of St. Mein Baif, in which, on the left-hand side behind Fox Point, is the entrance of St. Anthony Harbour. St. Mein Bay is open to winds between S. and £. ; the depth of water in it is 36, 35, 34, and 23 fathoms ; it affords no shelter, and the bottom is of coral. Fox Point lies to the N.W. by W. i W. of Cape St. Anthony, at the distance of one mile and two-thirds ; it is very safe, and may be approached as well as either side of the harbour. Vessels may anchor in any part, from the Horse's Back to the end of the harbour ; and also in Margaret PROM CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE NOltMAN. 47 it is Bay, which lies on the right-hand side of the harbour ; tiie depth at the entrance is 24 fathoms, abreast of the Horse's Back 10 fathoms, and nearer the end 8, 7, 5, and 4^ fathoms, good bottom. Vessels moor E. and W. To anchor in Margaret Bay, keep toward the starboard point, because ou the opposite side the depth for about two-thirds across is not more than 5 to 11 feet. N.W. by W. from the most southern point of the starboard side of the entrance of St. Anthony, and off the first bay that is met with on the same side, there are some rocks beneath the surface of the water ; they can be avoided, if the South point before mentioned does not bear to the north of S.E. by £. before passing to the VV. of the afore- said bay. Brehats, or Braha. — In proceeding N.E. by N. for three miles from French Point, we arrive at the south point of Bre/iala Bay. This bay is nearly a mile broad, and is bounded on the north by a point of rocky islets, called the Epees de Brehat. To the east- ward of the south part of this point, and a mile and a ' if off, is Brehat Shoal, on which there is but 12 feet water; although it is of small extent, the sea, in bad weather, breaks over it with great fury. It is the most dangerous shoal on all this coast. Between it and Brehat Bay there is a very good passage, the depth near the Ep^es being 22 fathoms ; more to the south 46 and 57; near the shoal there is 17, 20, and 21 ; at IJ mile to the east, 41 ; to the S.E. two or three miles, 34 and 53, sandy bottom ; and IJ mile to the north, 45 fathoms water, bottom of brown sand. There are fishing establishments, both in Great and Little Brehat, but ships anchor in Great Brehat; the entrance of it is narrow and difficult, and with strong winds at sea, the sea breaks in such a way that itisdifHcuIt to find out the harbour. St. LuNAiRE Bay.— From the Ep^es de Brehat to St. Lunaire Bay, the coast runs to the N.N.E. i E. ; at the south part of the entrance of the bay there are two islands, called Granchain Islandf, which have between them a narrow, rocky passage, which is sometimes used, it is said, by boats ; the passage for ships and other vessels is to the north of these islands, and is about one-third of a mile broad. When between the two points of the entrance, there will be seen ahead Haule-et- Plate Island, Satut Island, and the Plate Islands ; the passages between them are not practicable but for schooners, being connected by a chain of rocks ; on account of this, it is necessary to keep to the North of them all. On the north side of the bay is Amelia Harbour, in which, within Rouge Island, there is an anchorage. This little bay is shcltere'd by some islands, of which the largest is called High Island. It is a safe and commodious roadstead, and wood and water can be obtained. To the north o" High Island there is a small sandy port, with some islets in front of it, but the depth ut the entrance is not above three fathoms. To the west of the North- West bay the two shores are elevated, and the passage free from all danger; the depth there is 16, 11, 7, and 4) fathoms; then, in approaching nearer, the depth quickly diminishes. There is also 'another small passage to the North- West bay, at the back of a large, high island, which forms its southern limit ; it is called Hautf-Terre Island; but this passage is rocky, and practicable only for schooners. Between this island and the two islands at the entrance of St. Lunaire there is a large space, in which is found 14, 18, or 20 fathoms, and vessels are here secure from winds that come from between the south and east. In going into this, there is a rock which must be avoided, and over which there is but 10 feet water ; it is to the W.N.W. of the low point of Haute-et-PIate Island, at 500 yards distance, and 550 yards from the east point of Haute-Terre Island, which forms the southern limit of the entrance to the N.W. bay. There is another bay to the south-west ; its entrance is very narrow, and the shores rocky ; the depth of water in it is from 9, 5, to 3^ fathoms. If obliged to do so, the passage to the south of the most northern of the Plate Islands can be tried by a vessel of not greater draught than 8 or 9 feet ; but great care must be taken to keep the channel and not touch, and for this reason it should not be tried unless there is absolute necessity. St. Lunaire bay offers very good anchorage to men-of-war. White Cape and Griguet Harbours.— From St. Lunaii^ Bay the coast runs N.E. i N. rather more than a mile, to White Cape : it is high, and has a remarkable whitish ap- pearance, and, with the most southern of the Griguet Islands, forms the entrance of White Cape Harbour. The entrance is narrow, and to enter the anchorage keep close to the Cape, and then shut it in with the south point of the island ; the depth is 3} to 4i fathoms. The Griguet Islands are four in number, including Camel Island, forming between them several channels and small harbours, where fishing vessels can lie in security. They are entered by leaving Camel Island on the starboard, and the smallest of the Griguefd on the larboard hand. There is also a passage between the centre island and that on the North, but it is difficult. Camel Island, the most north and west of these islands, is very high in its :l\\ I'] 48 THE EASTERN COAST. centre, and difficult to distinguish from the continent, from which it is only separated by a small channel, in which there is not always a passage even for the smallest boat ; this com- municates with the end of the South- IFeit bay, formed by the continent and the island. There is anchorage in this bay, which is long and narrow, and has from 10 to 4| fathoms depth in it. To enter it, keep well off Camel Island, then close in with the West point of the islet in the middle of the entrance, and steer to the West till the South-West bav is seen, and then take the middle of it. To enter the North- West bay, steer toward the VVest point of the North bay, leaving the islet on the right ; double the starboard point at a little dis. tance off, and then proceed to anchor in 15, 16, 10, and then 8 fathoms. North Bay. — To enter this bay, in rounding the point of the entrance, steer towards the islet lying in the harbour, and pass on either side of it, proceeding toward the end, and anchor in 7 or 5 fathoms. The bottom ot 'bis anchorage is not good, and winds from the south and east quarters cause a heavy sea. Ships of war 'ought to prefer the N.W. bay. Storm Cope, which is to the north of the North Bay of the Griguets, lies N.N.E. and S.S.W. [JV. and S."] with Cape Partridge, at the entrance of Kirpon, or Quirpon, distant two miles. A little to the south of Storm Cape there is an islet, between which and the land boats can pass ; near to Cane Partridge, also to the south of it, there is a second, larger than the former, but equally clear. Between these two islets the coast forms several small coves ; there is also, near the land, and nearer Cape Partridge than Storm Cape, a shoal called the Madeleine, on which the sea breaks in bad weather ; to avoid this, whether coming from or going to the North, keep the highest part of Row-Galley Head outside of the islet on the S.E. of Cape Partridge. The soundings on this route will be 20 to 24 fathoms. The White Islands, to the £. f N. of Storm Cape, are clear ; the outer island has some rocks on the S. and S.E., but they are close to it. To the W. by S. of the largest, half a mile off, there are several rocks on a shelf which breaks and extends a mile from N.W. to S.E. There is a passage between this reef and the White Islands, but it ought not to be tried, except under necessity. To the West of the breakers the passage is above a mile in width, and the depth is 40 fathoms. The White Islands are small and Tow, in lat. 51° 35' N. and long. 55° 15' 28" W. Little Kibpon, or Quirpon, is thus called, because it is only separated from Great Kirpon Harbour by a very nanow channel, in the middle ot which there is a rock ; the tide runs sometimes very strong in this channel. I'he entrance of Little Kirpon is formed by Point Partridge and Point Grandt-Galets of Kirpon Island. To enter it, keep the middle of the channel, to keep clear of the Whale shoal on the right hand, on which there is but little water, and occupying one-third of the entrance ; as soon as this is passed, keep on the starboard side, and steer toward Point Noble, and anchor in the centre of the harbour, in 6 or 7 fathoms. Degrat, or Row-Galley Head, is the easternmost hill on Kirpon Island; its exire-* mity forms the entrance of Degrat Harbour, before which are some islets and rocks, which shelter the vessels anchoring here. It is only proper for small vessels. Pigeon Cove is rather more to the north than Degrat Harbour, but it is unfit for the anchorage of vessels. Cape Bauld, which is the north extremity of Kirpon Island, is in lat. 51° 38' 15', and lon^. bb** 20' 33" W. ; it is steep and rocky, and may be approached with safety. After passuig the Cape, a point will be seen in the W.S.W. showing Kirpon Harbour: along all the coast, and close to it, the depth is not less than 15 fathoms. Kirpon, or Quirpon Harbour,— The entrance of this harbour is formed by Kirpon Island and Jacques Cartier Island; it is the most northern harbour of Newfoundland: to arrive at this harbour, keep the Black Head of Kirpon Island clear of all the land until Point Raven is hidden by Point Noddy ; then proceed towards the entrance of the harbour in the direction of the islets, taking care to keep at least half a cable's length from Jacques Cartier Point ; as soon as this is passed, proceed to the anchorage between this island and Green Island; this is Jacques Cartier Road, and has good holding ground, with a depth of 7 fathoms. The passage within either side of Green Island is good for small vessels ; the depth in three fathoms, but beyond the island it is perfectly secure in 6 fathoms. Wood is scarce in Kirpon, but can be readily procured in Ha-Ha or Pistolet Bays. Noddy Harbour is situated a little to the west of that of Kirpon, and between Point Noddy and Cape Raven : there is no danger in entering ; and a veas«l ought to keep to the larboard of the island, which is nearly a mile beyond the entrance, and anchor behind it in 4i fathoms. The Gull Rock lies W. by N. \ N. from Cape Bauld, and N. by E. rather more than 2 miles from Cape Raven ; this rock is always uQcovered. Maria Ledge foun 51° IV. ST. JOHN S HAllBOUU TO CAPE RACE. 49 is N.N.E. i E. [N. i W.] five-sixths of a mile from Cape Raven, and E. by N. | N. [iV.fJ. I i'.l two-thirds of a mile from the starboard point of Maria Bay. It is nearly i^' mile N.E. [AT. by E. ) £.] from the Gull Rock. This reef extends 1200 yards nearly from E. to W. and 600 yards from N. to S.; between it and Gull Rook there is from 21 to 27 fathoms. In coming from the north, whether for Kirpon or Noddy Harbour, these two dangers need not be feared, as they are always visible ; the passage between them is half a league broad ; althouKh safe, it is nevertheless, prudent to pass near the Gull Rock on account of the North- Weit Ledge, which does not show but in bad weather ; it is situated West [S. W. by W. i If.] li mile from Gull Rock, and is about 600 yards long and 400 broad. A ship is outside its eastern extremity when the North points of the two Sacred Itland* are in one. But all dangers will be avoided by keeping the South point of the large, in one with the North point of the smaller island. Between Gull Island and the North-west Ledge there is }4 and 18 fathoms. The passage between the continent and the North-west Ledge, ought not to be tried when it can be avoided. Sacred Islands. — Farther to the West are the Sacred Islands: the North point of the largest lies N.W. by W. i W. IWesf] 5 miles from Cape Bauld, and E.S.E. [fi. fi JV.] 12 miles from Cape Norman. Little Sacred Island is nearly one mile S.E. ^ E. [£. by S. I SJl from Great Sacred Island : the passage between them is very good, and has a depth of 15 to 19 fathoms. These islands are clear, high, and steep. Within them to the S.W. by W. is Sacred Bay, tolerably large, and containing a large number of islets and rocks. The coasts are covered with wood, and it is frequented by the fishers. Cape Onion forms the north point of Sacred Bay, and is high and steep ; near it is a remarkable rock, the Meivstone, called so from its resemblance to that rock at the entrance of Ply. mouth. To the south of the Mewstoue is a small cove where a vessel can, on occasion, find refuge. From Cape Onion to Burnt Cape, the direction is W. J N. [ W.S. W.'\ rather above 4^ miles ; Burnt Cape appears of a whitish colour. On the eastern side of the cape is Ha- Ha i , which extends 2 miles toward the South ; it is exposed to northerly winds, and can be anchored in when within the cape in 5 or 6 fathoms. This bay, like Sacred Bay, is furnished with wood. Bay of Pistolet is situated between Burnt Cape and the reefs of Cape Norman; it is 4 miles deep by as much in breadth. The depth is generally from 4) to 3 fathoms in the part south of a line W.S.W. and E.S.E. of the Wood Islands, and from 13 to 8 at its entrance. The best anchorage is at the western part, a little within the islands, in 4| fathoms. North-west winds beat full into it. Cape Norman and Burnt Cape bear from each other S.E. by S. and N.W. by N. {S.E. by E. i £.j and \N.W. by W. i W.] 4 miles apart. At the entrance of the bay, to the E.N.E. from a point called North Point, there is a reef which is not more than a mile from it ; it lies also to the North of Goelette or Schooner hland, forming the western side of the entrance. To avoid this danger, keep Cape Norman to the south of W.N.W. till the eastern extremity of Goelette Island bears a little to the S.W. by S. Cape Norman. — This cape Is, next to Kirpon Island, the most northern port of New- foundland ; it is level land, moderately high and of a barren appearance. Its latitude is 51° 37' 10'. The coast of Newfoundland from this cape trends to the West [S.W. by IV. i W.] THE SOUTHERN COASTS OF NEWFOUNDLAND. I— THE S.E. COAST FROM ST. JOHN'S HARBOUR TO CAPE RACE. Having already described, on pages 15 and 19, the environs of St. John's Harbour, we now resume the coast to the southward, commencing with Cape Spear. From Cape Spear to the north point of Petty Harbour Bay, the course and distance are S.W. 2i miles; and thence to the south point, S.W. by S. 2i miles. Petty Harbour lies two miles inward from the heads, and is a small cove, capable of containing only two or three vessels. The settlement, a cluster of white houses, surrounds a small creek in a narrow ravine between dark precipices. From the South point of Petty Harbour Bay to the Bay of Bulls, the course is S.W., and the distance eight miles. About midway between, is Shoal Bay, the coasts here being composed of lofly precipices of hard red sandstone. In this bay is a place called tha < M Uk 50 CAPE UKOYLb TO AQUAFOItT. Spout, which is very remarkable in rough weather ; it is a cavern into which the sea runs ; and, having a vent on the top of the land, it spouts up the water to a great height, so that it may be seen a great way off. BAY of " I LLS From the South head of the Bay of Bulk to the North head, called Bull lead, the bearing and distance are N.K. by B. 1^ mile; between these heads the bay runs in N.W. by W. for two miles, and then N.W. by N. to the river-head. In this bay is good riding, in from SO fathoms, at the Arst entrance between the heads, to 18, 16, &c., after you are within Bread and Cheeie Point, which is about half-way up the bay, on the North side, where there is a cove. Off this point, nearly half a cable a length, lies a sunken rock, which must be avoided ; every other part of the bay is bold-to and free from danger. Being past the point, run up and anchor (or turn up) against John Ctaj^i Hill, bringing it to bear N.E. by N., and anchor in 12 or 14 fathoms of water; merchantmen run farther in, and anchor in from 10 to 7 fitthoms, and lie not above a point open. From the Bay of Bulk to Cape Broyle the course and distance are S.W. f S. fourteen miles. WITLESS BAY lies about 1) mile to the southward of the Bay of Bulls; it is in some degree sheltered by Green hland, and Gull Island, which lie before it, but is not safe for ships. To the southward of Witless Bay Point is Momable Bay, quite exposed to sea-winds. About two miles southward from Momable Bay is Toad Cove, near which lies Fox Island. About two miles to the southward of Fox Island is Baleine Head ; between them lie Spear Island and Goose Island. From Baleine Head to Cape Neddiek the bearing and distance are S.W. by W. about half a lea^e ; and, from Cape Neddiek to Brigua Head, S.W. by S. 2} miles. Brigus Harbour lies to the northwara of Brigus Head, and it is fit for small vessels only. OAPB BXOVZiBf dbO* — From Brigus Head to Cape Broyle is about two miles South. Cape Broyle Harbour lies in about N.W. by W. ^ W. about two miles; but it is exposed to the sea winds. Cape Broyle is the most remarkable land on all the South coast of Newfoundland ; it is a fine bold headland, 400 or 500 feet high ; coming either from '.he southward or northward, it appears like a saddle. The coast to the southward gradually diminishes in height, from Cape Broyle to Cr.pe Ballard. S.E. by E. from the northern point of Cape Broyle, about half or three-qua.ters of a mile, lies a sunken rock, called old Harry, on which is but 18 feet of water: the sea breaks upon it in bad weather; but, betwC'^a it and the shore, there is 12 or 13 fathoms of water. In very bad weather, the sea breaks home almost to the shore from Old Harry, by reason of the current, which generally sets strong to the southward. From Cape Broyle Head to Ferryland Point, the bearing and distance are S.S.W. about 2| miles ; between are three islands, which lie before CapeUn Bay, and ships may sail b nween them to that place : of these the northernmost is called Stone Idand ; the middlemost, Goote Island, which is the second in size; and the southernmost, Isle au Bote, which is the greatest. There is room for ships to turn between these islands, except- ing between Stone Island and Cape Broyle, where there is a great rock. Capelim Bay is large and good, and runs in a considerable way within the islands above mentioned, where a number of ships may ride in good ground, in from 10 to 20 fathoms of water. From the North part of Ferryland Head to Ferryland, the bearing and distance are W.N.W. more than a mile. It is a picturesque and pleasant place, and has several large and good houses. To go into Ferryland Hm-bour, you must sail between the North part of Ferryland Head and Isle au Bois ; it is not wide, but there is water enough, and clean ground : when within the Isle au Bois, you may run in and anchor where you please, it being of a good breadth. The Pool is a place on the larboard side going in, within a point of beach, where you lie in 12 feet at low water. From Isk au Bois almost into tlie land to the westward, are small islands and rocks, which make Ferryland Harbour, and divide it from Capelin Bay ; there is a passage for boats between the said rocks in some places. Springtides rise from 3 to 4 feet. A^VAFOST*— From the South ,>oint of Ferryland Head to Aquafort, the course and distance are W. by N., about 3 miles. Crow Island lies about a mile E. by N. from the mouth of Aquafort ; and from the S.E. end of Crow Island lies a shoal, about a cable's kiigth. Aquafort Harbour lies in W.N.W. It is a long inlet, the cliffs rising to a height CAPE RACE TO PLACENTIA BAY. 51 of 200 feet. On (he North side there is a cascade over the cliffs, which gives the name to this place. There is a great rock above water on the South side of the entrance, which is hold-to ; you run up about 2 miles within the harbour's mouth, and anchor on the North side, quite land-locked. From Aquafort Point to Black Head, (lie bearing and distance are S.E. one mile ; from Olack Head to Bald Head S. by W., about a mile; and therce, about a mile southward, iii the North point of Ftrmovoet. FERMOWES is a very good harbour, and bold going in; no danger but the shore itself; it lies in N.W. by N. and N.W. Being past the entrance, there are several coves on each side, in the harbour, where ships may ride. The first, on the North side going in, is Clear't Cove ; the next within it at a litde distance, on the same side, is AdmiraVa Cove, where you may lie land-locked from all winds, in 7 or 8 fathoms of water, good ground. (Jn (he South side is Vice Admiral's Cove, farther westerly, where several ships may lie ; and farther westward, is another cove, equally good. There are 20 fathoms of water in the entrance of the harbour, and within from 14 to 4 fathoms. FERMOWES to CAPE RACE.— From Fermowbs to Renowes, the bearing and distance are S.W. by S., about 1) league. Between these places is a cove called Bear Cove. Off the South point of Renowes Harbour, at a small distance from the shore, is an island ; and, S.E. from the same point, about half a league, high above water, is Renowts Rock, which may be seen 3 leagues off. Renowes is but a bad harbour, being full of rocks, with shallow water. From Renowes to Cape Ballard, the course and distance are S.S.W. I W. 2) leaeues; between are Burnt Head, Freshwater B<^, and Small Point. From Cape Ballard to Cape Race, the bearing and distance are S.W. by W. 2i leagues; between which, and near Cape Ballard, is Chain Cove, with several rocks lying before it, but no harbour, and about half-way is Clam Cove, which is fit for boats only. The land about Cape Race is comparatively low, and bare of wood, with a steep cliff of about 50 feet in height. II.— The COAST of AVALON, prom CAPE RACE to PLACENTIA BAY, iNCLUDiKo TREPASSEY, ST. MARY'S BAY, and PLACENTIA HARBOUR. From Cape Race the land trends away to the westward, and W. by S. one mile and a half: then W. ( N. one league, to Mistaken Point t and from Mistaken Point to French Mistaken Point, about N.W. by W. 2 milies. From French Mistaken Point to the PowUt, it is N.W. 8 miles. The Powles is the east point of the entrance into Tiepassey Harbour : from the Powles to Cape Mutton, it is E.S.E. { E., 2 miles. Between these points lies Mution Bay, which is about 2 miles deep, with 12 to 3 ftithoms of water, rocky bottom. The N.W. part of the head of this bay is separated from Trepassey Harbour by a low, narrow, sandy, stony beach, over which the vessels in the harbour may be seen. From Mistaken Point to Cape Pine, the course and distance are W.N.W. 4^ leagues. TREPASSEY HARBOUR.— The entrance of Trepassey Harbour lies nearly 5 miles N.E. from Cape Pine ; it is about three-quarters of a mile wide, and runs nearly of the same breadth for 2) miles, where it narrows to one quarter of a mile, but again increases to three-ojuarters of a mile, where tlie ships ride. The land slopes gently on all sides towards the harbour, and is compaiatively Dare of wood. The daneers of filing into this harbour are, a small rock on the e&dt shore, about a mile within the Powle Head, and about one-third of a cable's length from the shore ; and, on the west shore in the harbour, off a stony beach, a shoal, which runs along shore up the harbour to a low green point. Baker's Point on with a low rocky point on the entrance of the harbour, will carry you clear of this shoal. When you are nearly up with the low green point, you may steer more to the westward, and anchor either in the N.W. or N.E. arm, in 5 or 6 fathoms. From Cape Pine to Cape Freels, the course and distance are west \\ mile. The land about Cape Pine is moderately high, and barren. From Cape Freels the land trends about W.N.W. one mile, to Blackhead, then N.W. \ W. one mile, to the eastern reef and head of St. Shot's Bay. From the eastern head of St. Shot's to the western head, the bearing is N. by W. J W., distance 2 miles : St, Shot's Bay is about a mile deep, and entirely open to the sea.* * On the rocks extending firom the eastern side of the bay, the Comus, Harpooner, and other vessels were wrecked, as already shown on pages 6 to 8. 52 CAPE RACE TO PLACENTIA BAV. ST. MA&V*8 BAV.— From the eastern head of St. Shot's to Point Ijince, the bearing and distance are N.W. } N. 20 miles. Tliese points form the entrance of St. Mart/^t Bm,V. which runs up 9 leafl[ues to the E.N.E. with several good harbours in it, the land on each side being moderately high. The current frequently sets with great force on the eastern shore of the bay, which is the cause of many accidents here. The land from Point Lance lies E. by N. 21 leagues to a Ai^A bluff cape, from which the land along the west side of the bay trends E.N.E. 7 leagues, up (o the head of the bayt From the afore-mentioned bluff cape to Cape Eng/ith, on the east shore, the bearing and distance are S.E. f S. 10 miles. From the western head of Si. Shol^t to Gull Island, the bearing and distance are N. { E. 3} miles; thu island is small, and close to the main land. From Gull hland to Cape Englith, the bearing and distance are N. by E. i E. .5 miles. This cape is high table land, terminating in a low rocky point, forming a bay about a mile deep, to the southward of it ; iit the bottom of which is a low stony beach, within which is Holyrood Pond, extending to the E.N.E. about 8 leagues: being situated within the cape, it makes Cape English appear like an island. From Cape Englith to Fatte Cape, the course is N.E. ^ N. one mile distant. From Cape Englith to Point la Hat/e, the bearing and distance are N.E. by E. 2| leagues. Tnis is a low point, from which a ledge of rocks extends a quarter of a mile into the sea, and above a mile along the shore, on which the sea breaks in bad weather. It is the only danger in all St. Mary s Bay that will take a ship up. ST. MARY'S HARBOUR.— From Point lu Haye to the south point of St. Mary'a Harbour^ called Double Koad Point, the course and distance are E.N.E. 1 J mile; the land between is low and barren. From Point la Haye to Ellit Point, which is the low point on the starboard side going into St. Mary't Harbour, it is two miles. The entrance of this harbour is above a mile wide, and bears from Point Lanee E. ^ S. *20 miles. Within the points that form the entrance, it divides into two branches, one to the S.E., the other to the E.N.E. When you are within Ellis Point, haul in to the southward, and anchor abreast of the houses and stages, upon a flat, in 4 or 5 fathoms, where you will lie land-locked. This flat runs ofi* about half a mile from the above ; and without it is from 15 to 40 fathoms of water over to the other side ; but the best anchorage is about two miles above the town, where it is above half a mile wide, opposite BrownU Pond, which may be seen over the low beach on the starboard side; here you will lie land-locked in 12 fathoms of water, and excellent ground all the way up to the head of the bay. The E.N.E. arm lies open to the sea, and is not resorted to by ships. Holyrood Pond, which once was an arm of the sea, is now separated from it by a bank of pel>bles, 2 miles long, having at times a narrow channel ; but during the autumn, the currents which sweep up the bay along this shore, completely close up the entrance, which is opened by the inhabitants in June: a fishery is thus kept in it all the year round. Mal Bay lies to the westward of the north>east point of St. Mary's Harbour : it is about a mile wide, and about two miles deep : but tnere is no good anchorage, a heavy swell generally setting into it ; hence the name. . Shoal Bay Point lies one mile distant from the east end of Great Colinet Island. Above St. Mary's Harbour lie two itlands, the largest of which is about one league long, and is called Great Colinet Island, the south end of which bears from Cape Englith N.N.E., distant S leagues. On either side of this island is a safe passage up the bay, taking care to give Shoal Bay Point a berth of a quarter of a mile, to avoid some rocks which lie ofi* that point. On the north side of Great Colinet hland is a stony beach, off which lies a bank for about a quarter of a mile, on which is from 7 to 17 fathoms of water, rocky bottom. Little Colinet hland lies two miles N.E. by N. from Great Colinet Island} it is above one mile long, and half a mile in breadth. GREAT SALMON RIVER.— The entrance into Great Salmon Rivek lies E.by N. 5 miles from the north part of Little Colinet Island ; it is about three-quarters of a mile wide, and runs from the E.N.E. 7 or 8 miles. There is very good anchorage in it; but the best is about three miles from the entrance on the north side, in a sandy cove, in 5 or 6 fathoms of water. North Harbour lies N.N.E. three-quarters of a mile from the north part of LUtle \ PLACENTIA BAY, 53 5 or PIiAOBNTXA BAT.— From Cape St. Mary to Cape Chapeau Rouge, the bearing and distance are N.W. by W. i W. 16^ leagues. These capes form the entrance of Placentia Bay. Cape Chapeau Rouge is the highest and most remarkable land on that part of the coast, appearing above the rest like the crown of a hat, and may be seen in clear weather 12 leagues oif. From Cape St. Mary to Point Breme, the course is N. by E. ^ E., distance 8 miles ; and from Point Breme to the Virgin Rocks, N.E. i E. 12 miles. These rocks lie about two miles from the main, and show above water. From the Virgin Rockt to Point Verde, or Green Point, the bearing and distance are N.E. by E. J E. 5\ miles. There is no shelter for ships or vessels between Cape St. Mary and Point Verde ; the land between is of a moderate, and appears nearly of an equal, height all the way ; but over Placentia, and to the northward of it, the land is very high and uneven, with many peaked hills. PLACENTIA HARBOUR.— Point Verde is low and level, and forms the south side of the entrance of Placentia Road and Harbour, which is situated on the east side of the great Bay of Placentia. Great Placentia was once a very considerable place, being the French capital, when they held possessions on the island, and even under the English was formerly much more important than it is now. If you are coming -from the south- ward, and going into the road, you should keep a league from the shore to avoid the Gibraltar Rock, which lies W. by N. from Point Verde, till you bring the Castle Hill open to the Colinet hland ; it is about a mile wide at the entrance, and extends to the northward about three miles : in it is very good anchorage, in about or 7 fathoms of water, about two miles within the entrance, where it is not above half a mile wide; or you may run farther up, taking care to keep the starboard shore close on board, and anchor within the point of the narrows. Colinet Bay lies N.E. by E. 5^ miles from the north point of Little Colinet Inland t ,l in it is very good anchorage, in from S to 1 2 fathoms of water. CAPE ST. MARY. — From Point Lance to Cape St. Mary, the bearing and distance ore N.W.Ti miles : Cape St. Mary is a pretty high bluff cape, and the land along shore from it, for a considerable distance, appears even, and nearly of equal height with the cape itself. From Voint Lance W.N.W. 3 miles, lie the Bull and Cow Rockt ; they are two flat rocks, and very near together, with several small rocks around them, all above water, and may be seen four leagues off, when open from the land. They bear S.E. by S. from Cape St. Mary, 5\ miles, and one mile from the nearest part of the main land ; at about two-thirds of the distance from them to the main, is a small rock, which appears above water at half-tide ; there are 10 fathoms of water between it and the main, and 1 5 fathoms between it and the Bull and Coxo. St. Mary'* Kay$ or Rockt lie W. by S. from Point Lance, W.S.W.I W. from the Bull and Cow, and S.W. by S. 74 miles from Cape St. Mary. These are two rocks that appear just above water, and the sea always breaks very high upon them. They lie S.S.E. and N.N.VV. from each other, about three cables' length ; and there are 15 fathoms at a small cable's length all around them, excepting to the S.S.E., where there are but 6 fathoms at two cables' length. Between them and Cape St. Mary is a depth of 26 and 30 fathoms. 11 ] nM 1 ■■*.! i'^ 54 DIRECTIONS FOR PLACENTIA HARBOUR. northward of that Point. The Castle Hill is on the north side of the road on which stand the ruins of a fort, called the castle, and is distinguishable far out at sea. Oibraltar Rock has only 8 fSset of water over it, at low water, spring tides, and lies 2| miles from Point Verde. When you have the Castle Hill on with the Point, it will lead you a quarter of a mile to the northward of it ; run in with the mark on, keeping your lead going, as there are regular soundings on both sides, and giving the Point a berth of nea? two cables' length, passing it in 4 fathoms of water, you may proceed to the anchorage under the Castle Hill, at three-quarters of the distance over from that side, where you lie in 6 or 7 fathoms of water, good ground. At the bottom of the road is a long beach, which terminates to the north in a point, on which stand the houses and a fort ; between which and the Castle Hill is the entrance into Placentia Harbour i this entrance is very narrow, with 3) fathoms of water ; but within the narrows it widens to one-third of a mile, with 6 or 7 fathoms of water, where ships may lie in perfect security. In going in, keep nearest to the starboard side. The inner harbour divides into two arms; one called the North-East Arm, about 9 miles long, and nearly straight, with bold clifi^ and hills rising to the height of 400 or 500 feet ; and the other the South-Eatt Arm, with a very winding course of about 5 miles. The South-East Arm nearly surrounds a steep rocky piece of ground which was once an island, but is now connected by a long pebble beach, with the main land on the south side of the harbour, blocking up what about 60 years ago was the entrance of the South- East Arm. The following Directions have been given on the Chart of I the Road and Harbour of Placentia, by Mr. F. Owen. " Th"; Road and Harbour of Great Placentia are on the east side of the Bay of Placentia. The southern entrance of this road is Point Verde, which bears from Cape St. Mary N.B, distance 25 miles; from the Outer Virgin Rock N.E. by E. } E., and from the south side of Red Island S.S.E. distance 14 miles. ** Pbibt Verde is a low level point, with a pebble beach on the east side, nearly half a mile lon^, with several fishing-stages just within the point. At the end of this beach is a high rocky cliiF, that extends to the S.E. corner of the bay, where it again terminates in a pebble beach. This beach runs E.N.E. one mile, to the old fort, or south entrance of the harbour: on the inside of this beach stands the town of Placentia, which faces the S.E. arm of the harbour. A little to the southward of the town is a high hill, with a remarkable cliff on the middle of the beach. '* The outer point on the north side is level, with a clay cliff on the outer part. It bears from t^Oiht Verde N.E. by N. nearly, distant one mile and a half: from this point the land forms a small bay, with a stony beach round it, to the corner of the cliff under Signal Hill, which ' > the first hill on the north side of the road from this point. The cliff continues to Freshwater Bay, which is formed in a small valley between Signal Hill on the west, and Castle Hill on the east, with a pebble beach round it. A small rivulet runs down this valley, where ships can water. On the east side of this bay is Castle Hill, with an old fortification on its top ; within this hill is a nanow beach, which forms the north entrance into the harbour. At low water, the entrance of the harbour is not more than 60 fiithoms across, and the tide into it runs more than four knots an hour. "The only dangers near Placentia are, the Virgin Rocks and Gibraltar Rocks, on the south, and Moll Rock on the north. The outer Virgin Rock bears from Point Verde S.W. by W. I W. distant 5^ miles, and from Point Breme N.E. i E. distant 13 miles. These rocks are all above water, with 10 and 12 fathoms round them. The Gibraltar Rock bears from Point Verde, west rather southerly, distant 2} miles, and is near two miles flt}m the shore. <'The Moll Rock bears from Point Verde N. by E. i E. distant two miles, and from Moll Point nearly S.W. three-quarters of a mile. There are only 12 feet of water on this rock, with 10 fiitnoms around it. '. Magnetic Bearings and Distances of Places on the East Side OF Placentia Bay, as taken in 1800. Miles. From Cape St. Mary to Point Breme N. H^E. or N. by E. ^ E. . . 8 the south side of Red Island N. 22 E. or N.N.E. 34 From Point Breme to the Virgin Rocks N. 48 £. or N.E. i £ 12 the south side of Red Island N. 14 E. or N. by E. ^ E. •• 28 From the Virgin Rocks to Point Verde > N. 61 E. or N.E. by £. } E.* • 5& PointLatina N.46E.orN.E 12 the south side of Red Island N. 1 E. or North 46 From Point Verde to Point Latina N. 29 E. or N.N.E. ^ E 6 the south side of Red Island N. 21 W. or N.N.W. 14 From Point Latina to the south side of Red Island N. 43 W. or N.W. ^ N. •••• 11 III.— THE NORTHERN PORTION OF THE BAY OF PLACENTIA, AND COAST THENCE TO CAPE CHAPEAU ROUGE. Point Latina lies about 5 miles to the northward of Placentia Road ; between which are several sunken rocks lying along the shore, about half a mile off. A large mile to the eastward of Point Latina lies Point Roche, off which a shoal stretches nearly one>third of a mile. From Point Roche 1| mile S. by E. | E., is the entrance of Little Placentia Har- BOUB, which extends W. by S. above 1^ mile, and is near half a mile broad. Little Pla- cetUioy as well as Great Placentia, stands on what was once an island, being connected to the main by a beach c'f large pebbles. It is a straggling place, on the low side of au inlet, with bold rocky hills or> the opposite side. Here is good anchorage in a cove on the north shore, which may be known by the west point being woody : off tl)e east point of the cove lies a shoal nearly one*third of the distance across ; in the ccveare 7 or 8 fathoms of water. From Point Latina to Ship Harbotjr the course is E. 5) mites: this harbour extends N.N.E. 2} miles, and is a quarter of a mile wide. The anchovage is in a cove on the west side, in 10 fathoms, about a mile from the entrance. Fox Island is small and round, and lies N.E. | N. 3 miles from Point Latina, and N.W. by W. a league from SUp Harbour Point, which is a low stony point, lying about 1 i mile to the westward of Ship Harbour. Fox Island and this point are connected by a range of rocks, which sometimes break quite across. N.N.W. l^ mile from Fox Island is a steep rock above water, called Fishing Rock ; and N.N.E. i) mile from Fishing Rock lies a sunken rock, which almost always breaks. 56 PLACENTIA BAY AND ITS HAKBOUllS. RED ISLAND is high barren land, about 4 miles long, and 2\ miles broad, composed of red granite. The S.£. point bears N.N.W. 11 miles from Flucentia Road ; and nearly east 12 leagues from Mortier Mead, wliich is on the west side of ihe bay. The RAM ISLANDS are a clutter of high islands lying N.E. ^ £. of Fox Island about 2i miles. East i miles from the south point of llam Islands is the entrance into Long Harbour ; there is no danger n going in ; the best anchorage is on the north side, to the eastward of Harbour Island, between it and the main, where you will lie secure from all winds, n 7 or 8 fathoms of water. From Ram Islands to Little Harbovr it is N.N.E. J E. about d leagues ; there are several low islands and rocks along shore between these places ; but not the least shelter, even for boats along the coast. Little Harbour has bad ground, and lies quite exposed tu S.W. winds. LONG ISLAND. — From Point Latina to the south point of Long Island, the course is N. } E. 4 leagues; this island is 8 miles long, high land, the south point being of remarkably steep rocks. On the east side of it, about a league from the south point, lies Harbour Buffet, which is tolerably good; the entrance to it is narrow, but has 13 fathoms of water in it. This harbour has two arms, one extending westward, the other northward ; the best anchorage is in the north arm, in 15 fathoms of water. This harbour may be known by the islands which lie in its mouth, and to the southward of it, and by Harbour Buffet Island, which lies £. ^ S. one mile from the entrance. To sail into it you must pass to the northward of all these islands. About 4 miles from the south point of Long Island, on the west side, lies Mussel Har- bour, the entrance to which is between Long Island and Barren Island, and opposite the north end of the latter; the depth is from 10 to 22 fathoms, rocky bottom. SOUTH HARBOURS.— I,i«fe South Harbour lies one mile to the westward of Little Harbour ; and it has several rocky islands before its mouth, which, in going in, must be left on your starboard side, excepting one, on either side of which is a safe passage of 1 5 fathoms of water. On the east shore, within the islands, is a sunken rock, about a cable's length from the shore, which generally breaks. Nearly opposite on the west shore, are some rocks, about half a cable's length from the shore, that show at one-third ebb. This harbour is about 1^ mile long, near half a mile wide, with 7 fathoms, good bottom. Great South Harbour is about a mile to the northward of Little South Harbour: there is no danger in sailing into it, and near the head is very good anchorage in 6 or 7 fathoms of water. One mile to the westward of Great South Harbour is Isle au Bordeatir ; a high round island near the main. COME-BY-CHANCE The entrance into Come-bj/- Chance Harbour lies N.N.E. 4 miles from the Isle au Bordeaux; it extends N.E. by E. 3 miles, and has from 20 to 3 fathoms of water, sandy bottom, but is quite exposed. The hepd of the harbour is about 3 miles from the Bay of Bulls in Trinity Bay, the isthmus here connecting the peninsula of Avalon to the main portion of Newfoundland. NoRTu Harbour is N.N.W. 2 miles from Come-by-Chance, and S.R. by S. 2i miles from Piper't Hole ; about two miles from the entrance ia good anchorage in 7 fathoms of water, and no danger in sailing in. From Pipers Hole to Barren Island, the distance in a S.W. direction, is nearly 3 leagues; between is a series of islands, about hali^a mile from the west shore, having from 4 to 17 fathoms of water within, good anchorage all the way. Barren Island is about 3^ miles long, and one mile broad ; it lies about half a mile from the main, and more than a league from the north end of Merasheen Island. Sakdv Haruours.— Nearly four miles W. J S. from the south end of Barren Island is G'-ent Sandy Harbour, the entrance to wliich is narrow, but within there are 6 or 7 fathoms of water. Little Sandy Harbour lies a quarter of a mile to the southward of Great Sandj/ Harbour, and is tolerably good, having 6 or 7 fathoms of water, good bottom. In going in, you pass to the northward of a low rock above water, which lies in the mouth of it. This'harbour may be known by Bell Isle, which lies S.E. ^ E. li mile from the mouth of it ; and N.E. ^ N. 13 miles from the west point of Merasheen Island: off the south point of the island, IS a remarkable rock, resembling a bell with the bottom upward, PLACENTIA BAY AND ITS HARBOURS. 57 Nearly 3 leagues 8.W. from Bell Isle, is the north end of Great Valen ItUrnd, which is about 2 miles in length. On the main, to the westward of it, is Clatise Harbour, the entrance into which is half a mile wide ; in it are 40 or 50 fathoms of water. The best anchorage is in the west cove, which is one mile long, but not a quarter of a mile wide, in from 17 to 20 fathoms of water, good bottom. Grandmire*$ Rocks are just above water, and 1} mile northeastward from the north end of Great Valen htand. The Little Falen Island lies near the south end of Great Valen Island, and about a quarter of a mile from the main ; it is high and round. W.S.W. I W. 3} miles from UttJe Valen Island lies Preague, within which there is very deep water, but no safe passage; there being a number of rocks lying before the entrance. MERASHEEN ISLAND.— E.S.E. 4 miles from Presque, and S. i W. from Little Valen Itlandt lies the west point of Mebasheen Island ; this island is high, and trends to the N.E. by E. more than 6 leagues ; it is very narrow, the broadest part not being more than two miles. At the south part of the island, near to its west end, is a very good harbour, but small, with from 6 to 10 fathoms water. To go into it, keep the starboard shore on board, in order to avoid a sunken rock, that lies a cable's length off a rugged rocky point on the larboard side when going in. Indian Harbour lies on the east side of Meraskeen Island, at about S leagues from the south point. S.W. i W. two miles from Presque is a sunken rock : a quarter of a mile without this rock is a rock above water, called the Black Rock, which lies East two miles from Marticot Island. The harbour of Little Paradise lies one mile to the northward of the east point of Marticot Island ; the only safe anchon^e is in a cove, at the head, on the larboard side. One mile to the eastward of Little Paradise lies La Perche, in which there is no safe anchorage. The harbour of Great Paradise lies to the westward of Liule Paradise, and is fit for boats only. From Marticot Island to Corbin Head, the course is V/.S.W. [ V. i ' \ leagues : this course will lead just without the rock called the Saddle Bficl, w^'..!r;: is 9\ n.iles from Marticot Island. Between Marticot and the main is an islet called i'^yy bland : between these islands is a safe passage, with not less thati 9 fathoms of wa'cr j but nov: letween Fox Island and the main. PARADISE SOUND.— To the westward of Fox Island k<< > r:^ entrance ot Piradise Sound, which extends N.E. by E. 4) leagues, and is about a biiie l7'>av% with very de>.\p water, and no safe anchorage till you get near the head of it. One mile to the westward of Paradise Sound lies Petit. Fort Harbour: a very good harbour, having in it from 14 to 7 fathoms of water, good bottom. The entrance is more than a quarter of a mile wide, and lies N.E. 5 miles from the south pod^t of Long Island, and N. by £. 2^ ^d S.E. by E. 3 miles from Iron Island, and S.W. | W. 5 leagues from Cape Judas, lies the Mortier Bank, the shoal part of which is about one league over, and on which there are only four fathoms. The sea breaks heavily on it in blowing weather. Iron Island is a small high land; and S.W. h W. one league from it, is the S.E. point of Great Burin Island; and W.N.W. IJ mile from it is the north part of Pardy's Island. On the main, within these islands, lie the harbours of Cheat and Little Burin. Vessels bound for Burin may pass on either side of Iron Island ; the only danger in passing to 'he northward is tiie ledge called the B-andys, which almost always break ; they lie near a quarter of a mile to the southward of a low rock, above water, close under the land of Mortier West Head. By keeping Mortier West Head open to the westward of Iron Island, you will avoid Gregory's Rock, on which is only 2 falhoms of water, and which almost /. I PLACENTIA BAY AND ITS HAllBOURS. 69 u always breaks. Vessels may pass with safety between thi| rock and Iron Island, by giving the latter a berth of above a cable's length. Oil the main, within Pardy's Island, are two renmrkable white marks in the rocks ; the northernmost of these brought on with the North part of Pardy's Island and Iron Island N.E. i N. will lead on the Galloping Andrews, a shoal with 5 fathoms of water on it. The While Horx is a shoal with 8 fathoms of water on it, which bears S.S.E. one mile from Iron Island. The Doddiftg Rock lies about a quarter of a mil« from the easternmost part of Great Burin Island. Greet Burin Island is about 2) miles in length N.N.B. and S.S.W. ; and near its South end is Cat Island, high and round, lying E.N.E. i\\ miles from Corbin Head. From Corbin Head to Shallovoay Point, the bearing and distance are N.E. ^ N. 4) miles. Between them, and nearly in the same direction, lie Corbin and Little Burin Islands, both high and round, a>id not more than a cable's length from the shore. Skalloway Island lies N.N.W. \ W. one mile from Cat Island, and N.E: by E. a quarter of a mile from Little Burin Island; the passage into Bitrin Harbours, from the south- ward, is to the westward of Shalloway Island. In sailing in, take care to give Foot Island a berth on your larboard hand ; and, when within Shalloway Island, you may anchor in safety between it and Great Burin Island, in from 12 to 18 fathoms. The best anchorage in Great Burin Harbour is in Ship Cove. The course up to it, after you are within Neck Point, which is to the westward of the Shalloway Island, is N.N.E. about 1| mile. It is about a quarter of a mile wide : in sailing up, keep the West shore on board, in order to avoid a sunken rock on the Eest sliore, at about half-way up, and about a cable's length from the shore. Another roc|^, with 2^ fathoms on it, lies above a cable's length to the S.W. of Harbour Point, which is round and green, and of moderate height, joined to Great Burin Island by a low, narrow, sandy neck. Burin Bay is about one mile N.N.E. of Little T.mia Island : it is clear, and about a mile wide every way : here ships may occasionally anchor, and lie almost land-locked. In this bay are two islands, one called Poor Island, low and barren ; the other lies to the northward, before the er.':>;rtace of Burin Inlet, and is high and woody. Burin Inlet may be entered on either side of the island ; it extends up 5 miles : a little within the entrance on the East side, half a cable's length from the shore, is a rock covered at three-quarters flood ; and 1| mile from the entrance, near the middle, is another rock, to the westward of which is good room, and good anchorage, in from 7 to 12 fathoms. There arc 15 fathoms in the entrance ; and, in the middle, two miles up, 15 to 23 fathoms; and thence up to the head are from 10 to 5 fathoms. The East passage in is between Pardy's Island and Iron Island : but is not safe without a commanding gale, and that between the N.N.E. and S.E. Corbin Harbour is about a mile i > the northward of Corbin Head, and is a cood harbour for small v«ssels. A quarter of a mile eastward from this harbour, and 2 coles' length from the sh'^ e, is a sunken rock, of 5 or 6 feet of water, on which the sea breaks in bad weather. Vessels bound for this harbour must also avoid a shoal of 2 fathoms of water, which lies E.S.E. from the South point of the entrance about half a mile. The best an- chorage is in the North arm, about half a mile within the entrance, opposite a cove on the starboard side.; From Corbin Head to Small Point the course and distance are W.S.W. 2| miles ; and from Small Point to Sauker Head W. i^ 8. 2 milen: there are many head-lands between, which form coves, but afford no shelter. The ccast is clear of rocks ; and there are 30 fathoms of water close to the shore. From Sauker Head to Cape Chc.peau Rouge, the bearing and distance are W. by N. 3 miles ; between lie the harbours of Great and Little St. Lawrence. The harbour of Little St. Lawrence is the first to the westward of Sauker Head. To sail in, you must keep the West shore on board, to avoid a sunken rock, which lies a little without the point of the peninsula, which stretches oif from the east side of the harbour. The anchorage is above the peninsula, (which shelters it from the sea^winds,) in 3 or 4 fathoms of water, a fine sandy bottom. Ships may anchor without the ptnintula in 12 fathoms, good ground, but this place is open to S.S.E. winds. 60 THE COAST WESTWARD The harbour of Great St. Lawrenci, which is the westernmost, is close to the east- ward of Cape Chapeau Rouge. To sail in, you should be careful with westerly, parti- cularly with S.W. winds, not to approach too near the Chapeau Rouge, or Red-Hat Mountain, in order to avoid the flaws and eddy winds under the high land. There is no danger but what is very near the shore. The course in is first N.N.W. till you open the upper part of the harbour, then N. i W. The best anchorage for large ships is before a cove, on the east side of the harbour, in 13 fathoms of water. This harbour has 200 inhabitants. A little above Blue Bene Point, which is the first on the West side, you may lie only two points open : you may ac . or anywhere between this point and the point of I..0W Beach, on the same side, near the hcid of the harbour, observing that, close to the West shore, the ground is not so good ns 0;) tlie other side. Garden D'-ik .»liereon ^ e from 7 to 16 fathoms of water, lies about half a mi!e off Little St. Ll ci)j w'vh Blue Beach Point on with the east point of Great St. Lawrence. IV.— THE COiST W^'^TWARD OF CAPE CHAPEAU ROUGE, WITH THE ISLAN] ' OF ST. PIERRE AND MIQUELON. FERRYLAND BEAD iies W.S.W. one mile from Cape Chapeau Rouge; it is a high rocky island, just separated from the main. W.N.W., 5 miles from Ferryland Head, lies the Bay of Laun, in the bottom of which are two small inlets, called Great and Little Laum Little Laun is the easternmost, lies open to the S.W. winds, and therefore is no place to anchor in. Great Laun lies in about N.E. by N. 2 miles ; is near half a mile wide, and has from 14 to 3 fathoms of water. In sailing in, be careful to avoid a sunken rock, which lies about a quarter of a mile off the east point. The best anchorage is on the east side, about half a mile from the he leagues : there i ve 14 fathoms close to the off-side of it. From Point Aux Gaul Shag Rock to the Lamelin Islands, the bearing and distance are N.W. by W. one league; between is the Bay of Lamelin, which lies behind two islets, with a flat marshy shore on the other side ; it is used by the tishing-boats. There is a con- siderable number of houses here, but from the want of wood the inhabitants mostly leave it in the winter. Near the south point of the westernmost Lamelin Island is a rock pretty high above water, called Jjtmelin Shag Rock, From Lamelin Sh^'g Rock to Point May, the distance is 8 miles; between lie the Lamelin Ledges, which are very dangerous, some of them being 3 miles from the land. To avoid them in the day-time, you should not bring the Lamelin Islands to the southward of E.S.F. until Point May bsars N.E. by N. from you : you may then steer northward between Point May and Green Island with safety. By night, approach no nearer than in 30 Ibthoms of Witter. ST. PZBmZ^B, or ST. PETER'S ISLAND.— The island of St. Pierre lies U Jeagufes W. by N. from Cape Chapeau Rouge; it is about 4 leagues in circuit, v /» js barren in the extreme ; it is a mass of rocky hummocks rising to a height of 400 or 500 teei directly from the water, and destitute of any trees. On coming from the west>vard, Gahinirv Head, which is the S.B. point of the island, makes in a round hummock, like a small island, sfiparnteJ from St. Pierre, on which is a fixed light, visible 15 miles off. The port is on >.he easwrn side of the island, at only a mile to the northwestward of Point Cfonkr, the eisternmost point ; and it is bounded on the East by Chien or D<^ Island, OF CAPE CHAPf^AU ROUGE. 6t u is 500 ard, Le a off. oint md, eastward of which are several islets and rocks. The passage in, between Chien Island and St. Pierre, is very narrow, and bordered with rocks, but in mid.channel are 6, 4, 3), 5, and 6 fathoms. Upon Canon Point, on the north side of the entrance to the inner harbour, in latitude 46° 46' 52", long. 56° 8' 44', is a modem light-house, with fixed harbour-light, about a quarter of a mile eastward of the town, which is kept up from the 1st of May to the 15th of November. With this light-house bearing W. by N. or W. } N. about 2 cables' length, there is anchorage in 5| and 6 fathoms of water. The Harbour of St. Pierre is small, and well sheltered from all winds. It has three entrances, all of which can be taken with a little attention. It has from 20 to 12 feet of water. The only danger that cannot be seen is a small rock (I' Enfant Perdu), lying about one mile East, true, from the hie aux Bon-'t, the Vainqueur of the late charts. The road lies on the N.W. side of Chien or Dog Island, and will admit ships of any burthen in 8, 10, or 12 fathoms of water. The best anchorage is on the north side : but in general it is rocky, and exposed to the N.E. winds. The Colombier, so called from its similarity to a dove-cote, from the great flocks of puffins which breed here, and are always flying about it in great flocks, lies very near to the N.E. point of St. Pierre, and is pretty high; between is a passage of one-third of a mile wide, with 12 fathoms of water, but there is a reef on the south side. On the north side of the island is a rock called Little Colombier, and about one-quarter of a mile E.N.E. from it is a sunken rock, with 2 fathoms on it. Greek Island is about three-quarters of a mile in circuit, and low : it lies E.N.E. about 5 miles from St. Pierre, and nearly in the middle of the channel between it and Newfoundland ; on its south side are several rocks above and under water, extending \\ mile to the W.S.W. or LITTLE MIQUELON.—This island lies to the N.W. of St. Pierre, with a passage of about 2( miles wide between, free from danger. It is about 8 leagues in circuit, of a moderate and pretty equal height, excepting the north end, which is low, with sand-hills; off which, on both sides, it is flat a little way ; but every other part of the island is bold-to. It is a much more pleasant place than St. Pierre, and has a settlement in the N.E. bay. There is anchorage on the N.E. side of the island in 5 or 6 fathoms, a little to the southward of the Sand-hills, on a fine sandy bottom. nCXQUBXiOir was formerly distinct from Langley, and on all old charts a channel of 2 fathoms is marked as running between them. This, however, is now entirely filled up, and a long, narrow line of sand-hills, with a beach on each side, occupies its place. Instances have been known, even of late years, of vessels in stress of weather making for this channel, and being wrecked on the sands. Miquelon is 4 leagues in leueth from north to south, and is about 5 miles in breadth at the widest part : the middle of the island is high laud, called the High Lands of Dunn ; but down by the shore it is low, excepting Cape Miquelon, which is a lofty promontory at the northern extremity of the island. Miquelon Hood, which is large and spacious, lies at the north end, and on the east side of the island, between Cape Miquelon and Cbapeau; the latter is a very remarkable round mountain near the shore, off which are some sunken rocks, at t'le distance of about a quarter of a mile ; but everywhere else it is clear of danger. The best anchorage is in 6 or 7 fathoms, near the bottom of the road, on fine sandy bottom ; but you lie exposed to easterly winds. Miquelon Rocks stretch off from the eastern point of the island, under the high land, 1 \ mile to the eastward : some are above, and some under water ; the outermost are above water, and there are 12 fathoms of water close to them, nd 18 or 20 a mile off. N.K. by E. i E. about 4 miles from these rocks lies Miquelon Bank, on which are 6 fatiionis of wafer. The St-al Rocks, two in number, are nbove water, and lie about 5 miles off from the middle of the wetit side of Miquelon ; f^-' passage between them and the island is very safe; and there asc 14 or 15 fathoms of lei within a cable's length, all around them.* * The IslnrMl^ of " (tition that no forts !>' -w be kept there, and tiusf f During the late i<-'>H":0!!J been taken possesuoxi! i to France, on (b orivt!' crre, L injrlfy, and Miquelon, were ceded to France 'y England, on oon- ■ Je built on either; that no more than fifty men of regular troops should i! , y h\ »ald have no military stores, or cannon, capable of making a defence. '«v these isles virere annexed to the Go.ernment of Newfoundland, having hy the British forces, 14th May, 1793 ; but they were ultimately restored ;f conditions, by the treaty of 1814. 6s FORTUNE BAT AND ITS HARBOURS. v.— FORTUNE BAY AND THE COAST WESTWARD TO THE BUROBO ISLBS. VOUTVIfB BAT, &c.— From Point May^ on the south, to Pass Island, on the north, the bearing and distance are N. by E. 12 leagues: between is the entrance to FORTUNE BAY, >wbich is about 22 or 23 leagues deep : and in which are several bays, harbours, and islands. The Island Brunei lies pretty nearly in the middle of the entrance into Fortune Bay ; it is about 5 miles in length : on its N.E. side is a bay, wherein there is tolerably good anchorage Tor ships, in 14 or 16 fethoms of water, sheltered from southerly and westerly winds. In the bottom of the bay, at about a quarter of a mile from the shore, are some rocks, which must be avoided. Opposite to this bay, on the south side of the island, is a small cove, with 6 fathoms of water. The islands lying off the west end of Brunet, to the southward, are called the Little Bruntis, which, with Brunet, may be approached within a quarter of a mile all round. The PLte Iilandt are three rocky islets, of a moderate height, the nearest of which lies W.S.W. one league from the west end of Great Brunet. The southernmost is about 2 miles farther off, and bears from Cape Miguelon E. i S. 1 1 miles ; and, in a direct line between Point May and Pass Island, 17 miles from the former, and 19 miles from the latter, E.S.E. a quarter of a mile from the Great Plate (which is the northernmost) is a sunken rock, whereon the sea breaks, which is the only danger about them. There are several strong and irregular settings of the tides or currents about the Plate and Brunet Islands, which seem to have no dependency on the moon and the course of the tides on the coast. Sagona Island^ which lies N.E. 2 leagues from the east end of Brunet, is about a mile across each way, of a moderate height, and boldto all round. ft "i\ 64 HARBOUR BRITON, ETC. Between Dog Island and lord and Lady Js/anc/, which lies off the south point of Corben Bay, something nearer to the latter is a sunken rock, with deep water all round it; and, about a quarter of a mile to the northward of Lord and Lady Island, is a rock, which appears at low water. Bande de L'AniER Bay lies on the west point of Belle Bay, and N. i W. 3 leagues from Point Enrag^e ; it may be known by a very high mountain over the bay, which rises almost perpendicular from the sea, called Iron Head. Chapel liland, which forms the east side or the bay, is high land also ; the harbour lies on the west side of the bay, just within the point formed by a narrow low beach, and is a snug place : between the harbour and Iron Head there is tolerably good anchorage in 18 or 80 fathoms. Bande de VArkr Bank has 7 fathoms of water on it, and lies with the beach of Bande de I'Arier Harbour just open of the west point of the bay, and Boxy Point on wiih the north end of St. Jacques Island. Two miles to the westward of Bande de I'Arier is the harbour of St. Jacguet, which may be readily known by the island before it being high at each end, and low in the middle. The passage into the harbour is on the west side of the island, free from danger, as is the harbour, where you may anchor in from 17 to 4 fathoms. About U mile wratward of St. Jacques, is the harbour of Blue Pinion ; a little to the westward of which is English Gove. Boxy Point lies W. | S. 8 miles from St. Jacques Island, and E.N.E. i E. 12) miles from the east end of Brunet Island ; it is of a moderate height, and the most advanced to the southward of anjr land on the coast. Br^y Harbour lies N.E. S miles from Boxy Point, in which there is anchorage in 4 or 5 fathoms of water, fine sandy ground. W.N.W. one mile from Boxy Point is i!)e Island of St. John, and N.N.W. half a league from St. John's Island is St. John's Head, high, steep, and craggy. Between St. John's Head and Boxy Point is St. John's Bay, quite exposed. Or - 41 2nd of which there are several sunken rocks. '^'•' -^EAT Bay de l'Eav is about 1 ^ league to the northward of St. John*t Head. In t.. J there is good anchorage in various depths, sheltered from all winds. The passage in is on the east side of the island, which lies in its entrance. To the westward of Bay de I'Eau, about 3 miles north from St. John's Head, is Little Barrytway or Barachoitf on Uie west side of which there is good anchorage for large ships in 7, 8, or 10 fetboms. HARBOUR BRITON lies to the westward of Little Barrysw^, N.N.E. li league from the Island of Sagona^ and N.E. by N. from the east end of Brunet. The beads which form the entrance are pretty high, and lie from each other S.E. and N.W., distant about 2 miles. Near the east head is a rock above water. The only danger in going in is a ledge of rocks, which stretch 2 cables* length from Uie south point of the S. W. arm, which is more than a mile within the west bead. The only place tor large ships to anchor in is above this ledge, before the entrance of the S.W. arm, in 16 or 18 fathoms, mooring nearly east and west ; the bottom is very good, and plenty of wood and water is to be obtained here. Opposite to the S.W. aim is the N.E. arm, or JerteymanU Harbour^ which is capable of holdmg a great number of ships, secure from all winds, in 6, 7, and 8 fathoms of water : it has a bar at the entrance, on which there are 3 fethoms. The mark to sail over the bar is, the point of Thomp$on''$ Beach, which is the south point, at the entrance into the S.W. arm, open of Jerseyman's Head, which is high and bluff, on the north side of the entrance into Jerseyman's Harbour ; so soon as you open the harbour, haul -up to the northward, and anchor. From the West End of Harbour Briton to Connaigre Head, the bearing distance are W. | N. 5| miles ; between are Gull Itland and Deadman*s Boy, off vt i-Ai ihere is a bank stretching from the shore between 2 and 3 miles, whereon the (jepths vary from 34 to 4 fathoms. CONNAIGRE BAY. — From Connaigre Head, which is high and craggy, to Basseterre Point, the bearing and distance are N.W. | W. 7 miles; Mtween is Connaigre Bay, which extends about 4 leagues inland. In the mouth of the bay lie the Connaigre Rocks, above water, which may be approached very near, there being no danger but what shows I end HERMITAGE BAY TO BAY OF DESPAIR. 65 tterre Bay, ocks, hows itself: tho channel between them and Connaigre Head is the safeet, as a ledge of rocks extends a mile from (he north shore, which renders the other channel radier dangerous. Connaigre Harbour is near 5 miles above the head, within a point on the south side of the^ bay ; it is ver» small, and the depth of water is 7 fathoms ; the passage in is on tlie S.F.. side of the island, which lies before it. Abreast of this harbour, nearly in the middle of the bay, are two islands ; and on the soutk side of the westernmost, are some rocks above water. Dawson's Cove is on (he N.W. side of the bay, and bears N.f bout 4 miles fi-om tho head, and W.N.W. i miles from the west end of the westemmo J the greatest) island: the anchorage is in or 5 fathoms, quite exposed to southerly wtnds. From Basseterre Point, which is clear of wood, to Pass Island^ the bearing and distance are N.W. by N. one league. This island forms the N.W. extremity of Fortune Bay { it lies very near the shore, and is above a mile long. On its S.W. side are several rocks above water, which extend a mile off; and on the N.W. side is a sunken rock, at a quarter of a mile from the island. In the night-time, or in fogsy weather, too great dependence slrauld not be placed on the soundings in Fortune Bay { for there is more water in many parts near the shore, and in several of its contained bays and harbours, than in the middle of the bay itself. B8RIIIITACIB SAVa — From Pass Island to the west end of Long Island, tiM bearing and distance are, N.E. eight miles: between is the eotrance of Hermitage Bay, which extends 7) leagues east from Pass Island, with very deep water in most parts of it. Hermitage Cove is on the south side of the bay, about 3| leagues above' Pass Island, opposite which, and nearly in the middle of the bay, lie the two Fox Islands : to so into the cove, keep between the islands and the south shore, where there is not the least danger. In the cove there is good anchorage in 8 or 10 fathoms. LoMO Island, which separates the Bagf of Despmir from Hermitage Bay, is of a trian- ^lar form, about 8 leagues in 'circuit. The west entrance into the Bay of Despair from Hermitage Bay is by the west end of Long Island. About half a mile from its S.W. point are two rocks above water, with deep water all round them. The east passage is also very good, and is between the east end of Long .Island and the main, called \he Passage of Long Island. There are four harbours on the south side of Long Island, the easternmost dt which is called Galtaut : the latter is but small, and lies near the east point of the island : the best channel into the harbour is on the west aide of several rocky islands, which lie at the entrance, wherein are four fathoms, but in the harbour are from 15 to 24 fathoms. The next is PicarrCf which lies N. by E. half a league from the easternmost Fox Island ; ID going in here, keep near the west point, in order to avoid some sunken rocks off the other : me anchorage is in the first cove on the east side, in 9 or 10 fathoms, sheltered from all winds. The next harbour, called Round Harbour^ is fit only for small vessels. Long hiand Harbour is the fourth, and it lies about 2^ miles from the west end of Long Island. This harbour has two arms, one lying in to the north, the other eastward : they are both very narrow, and have from 40 to 7 fathoms of water } the eastern arih is the deepest, and affords the best anchorage. The passage in is on either side of an island which lies off the entrance, and has several rocks above water about it, but they aw both narrow^ BAT OF DSSPAXX* — ^Tbe errtrance of the Bay of Despair lies between the west «nd of Long Island and Great Jerms Jiland (which lies in the mouth of the harbour of that name) 4 the distance between is one mile and a quarter, and midway no bottom is found with a line of 280 fatiioms. The Bay of Despair forms two capacious arms, one extending to the norib-eastward, the other northward : in the north arm there is very deep water, and no anchorage excepting in the small bays and coves which lie on each side of it. In the N.E. arm are several Arms and islands, and tolerably good anchorage in several places. GncAT Jervis Haabouh is situated at the west entrance into the Bay of Despair; it is a safe harbour, with good anchorage on every part of it, in from 16 to 20 fathoms, secure from aU winds, and plenty of wood and water. The passage in is on either side of Great Jervis K 1 ■IS.tl, i' IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 I.I in Ui |22 us, 12.0 lU i 111.25 III 1.4 1.6 ^ 6" - > HiotDgraphic Sciences Corporation 23 WIST MAIN STRUT WnSTM.N.Y. 145S0 (716)S72-4S03 66 CAPE AND BAY OF LA HUNE. Island ; but the toutheniinott channel is the aafest, thete being no danger in it but the shore itself. In the northern channel are several sunken rocks. BONNE BAY lies about a league to the westward of Great Jervis Head, and N.N.E. 7 miles from Pass IsUnd ; it has several islands in its mouth, the westernmost of which is the largest and highest. The best passage in is to the eastward of the largest island, between it and the two easternmost islands. The bay lies in north 4 miles, and there is no danger but what shows itself; you may go on either side of Drake Island, which is small, and nearly iii the middle of the bay ; between which, and two small islaiids on the west side of the My, within Great Island, there is anchorage in 30 or 30 fathoms ; but the best place for large ships is near the head of the bay, in 12 or 14 iathoros, clea^r ground, and convenient for wood and water. On the N.W. side of Great Island, within the two small islands, is very good anchorage in from 16 to 94 ftthoms, secure from all winds ; the entrance to this from the bay is to the northward of the two small islands. In sailing in or out of the bay, approach not too near the south point of Great Island, as there are some sunken rocks lying at one-quarter of a mile from shore.' W.N.W. 4 miles from Bonne Boy, is the entrance to the Bays of Facbbuz and Dra- GOH : this entrance being very conspicuous at sea, the coast may here be readily known. Facheux, which is the easternmost branch, lies in N.N.E. S leagues, and is one-third of a mile wide at the entrance, with deep water in most parts of it. On the west side of the bay are three coves, where ships may anchor in from 10 to 80 fathoms, ibragon Bay lies in N.W. one lekgue, and is near half a mile wide, with 60 or 70 fathoms of water, and no anchorage excepting near the head. One league to the westward of Facheux is Richard $ Harbour^ a place fit onl^ for small vessels. N.W. by W. one league from Richard's Harbour is Hare Both which runs in N.N.E. about 5 miles, and is about one'third of a mile wide, with deep water close home to both shores on all parts of it, except about oiie league up on the west side, where there is good anchorage, in from 8 to 15 fathoms, with plenty of wood and water ; and a small cove about oti6 mile up on the east side, where there are 20 fathoms, with gradual sound- ings to the shoie^ fi^^f! i; N.W. by W. 4i miles from Hare Bay, and one league N.E. from Hore*t Bart Point, is DeviCt Bejf,n narrow inlet, extending a league to the northward, with deep water, and no anchorage until you come close to the head. Th^ Bey ofitenetNilfe lies to the nortkhward of Hare's Ears Point, and, runs in N.W. by W. 2 leaguM ; it his deep water in most parts c^ it, and is near half a mile wide at the mrrbwest part. The anchorage is in 30 athoms, above a low woody point on the south shore, quite lahd4ocked. • Bare** Ear$ Point is pretty large, with a raned rock upoA it, which, fVoro some points of view, looks like the ears of a hare. It divides the Bays of Rencontre and Ohaleor, and ties N.W. i W. 6 leagues from Pass Island. W.N.W. 9 miles from Hare's Pars Point is the Bay of Chaleur ;' which runs in aboiit 2 leagues N.N.W. It is very narrow, and has deep water in most parts. West, oeajr half a league firom the Bay of Chaleur, is the Bay Franfois, a small inlet ; and west, ,4: miles from ttie Bay Francois, on the east side of Cape la Hune, lies Oar Bty ; off the east point of the entrance of the latter is a tow rocky islet : and, ir the entrance of the bay is another with a 'passage on each side of it. The bay runs in northward abcttt 5 miles, and H bne-third or a mile wide, with deep water close to both sitorea tXt the way up ; at the head is a harbour for small vessels. CIjMPIB. 3bJL VUVft is-the southemMott point of hitid on this part of the coast, laL 470 31' 55"^ io„g. jgo ^^^ 23", N.W. by W. } W. 8| leagues from Pau Jilsiuf, and N. by W. I W. 10} leagues from Cape Miquelon; its foure much resembles a sugar- loaf: this cape may also be kbown by the high land of Cape La Hone, which lies one league to the westward of it, appears pnitt flat at the top, tad may be aitB from a distance of 16 leagues. • , ' ■ .':'^ f< " 'iwiL:... The Pemouin Islands lie S.W.'by V»^: J W. 11 miles from Cajpi la Hone, and N.W. i N. 10 leagues from Cape Mk|ueIon; they are ati assemblage of barren rocks tying near to each other, and altogether about two leagues in circuity and may be ap- proached ita the day-time to the distance of h»lf a league all round. E.S.E. ) E. 7 miles from the Penguin Islands, and S. by W. 8 leagues from Cape La wati whi BURGEO ISLES. €f Hune, lies the Whale Roc/r, on vrhich the sea generally breaks ; it is about 100 fathoms in circuitrwith 10, 12, and 14 fathoms of water close-to all round. From this rock a narrow bank extends, one league to the westward, and half a league to the eastward, with from 24 to 58 fathoms of water on it, rocky and gravelly bottom. In the channel between the shore and this rock, and also between the shore and the Penguin Islands, are 120 and 130 fathoms of water, muddy bottom, and there are the same bottom and depth of water at one league without them. La Hume Bay lies close to the westward of Cape La Hune : it is about 2 leagues deep, and one*third of a mile wide, with deep water in most parts of it; but there is a sunken rack which lies ofT the west point of the entrance, nearly one>third of the channel over. La Hun£ Habbour lies half a league to the westward of Cape La Hune; it has an island before its entrance, and is fit for small vessels only. Four leagues N.W. } W. from Cape La Hune, is the entrance of lAttle JRtver, which is about 100 fathoms wide at the entrance, and 10 Aithoms deep ; a little way up there is aDchorage in 10, 8, and 7 fathoms of water, good ground. Between Cape La Hune and Little River, the land is tolerably high, and forms a bay, where there are several small islands and rocks above water, the outermost of whieh lie N.N.E. | £. S leagues from the Penguin Islands, and are called the Magnetic Rocks. S. by W. I W. 7 miles from the entrance of Little River, and N. by W. } W. from the Pengum Islands, lie the Littie River Roch, which are just above water, with very deep water all round them. . . RAMEA. — ^The Isles of Ramea, which are of various extent, both in height and cir. cuit, lie N.W. | N. 5| leagues from the Penguin Islands, and one league from the main: they extend east and west 5 miles, and north and south. 2 miles, and have several rocks andf breakera about them ; but more' on the south side than on the north. The easiern- most island is the largest, and is very high and hilly : the westernmost, called ColmibCf is a remarkably high round island, of small circuit, with some rocky islands and sunken rocks near it. There is a harbour for small vessels, formed by the islands which lie near Great Ramea and the Coiumbe, called Ramea Harhourf where they may lie sheltered from ail winds. The Ramea Rocks are two in number, close to each other; they lie about south 4 miles from the east end of Great Ramea : W.S.W. one league from these rocks is a small bank with only 6 fiithoms of water on it ; and, nearly in the middle, between Ramea and the Penguin Islands, is a bank with firom 14 to 50 fethoros of water. : Four miles to the westward of Little River is Old Afan's Bay, which lies in N.N.E. about 7 miles, and u about a mile wide ; the water throughout the bay is very deep ; the best anchorage is at the head, in 14 or 16 fathoms. ' Mosquito Harboob lies about half a league to the westward of Old Man's Bay; it is a snug and safe harbour, but the entrance is so narrow, being only 48 ikthoms in breadth, that it is difficult to get in or out. Fox leland Harbour is formed by an island of the same name : it lies about half a league to the westward of Mosquito Harbour: between are several rocky islands and sunken rocks. This is a commodious harbour for small vessels, which may anchor in 8, 9, and 10 fiithoms of water. You may go in on either side of the island, and there is no danger but what shows itself. WHITE BEAR BAY lies about two miles to the westward of Fox Island Harbour, and N.N.E. one league from Great Ramea Island ; it has several islands in its mouth; It lies in N.E. \ N. aMut 4 leagues, is near half a mile wide in the narrowest part, and has deep water close to both shores in most parts, to the distance of 8 miles up; then the ground rises at once to 9 fathoms, whence it shoalens gradually to the head with good anchorage. The best passage into the bay is to the eastward of all the islands. On the S.W. side of Awr Mind, which is the easternmost and largest in the mouth of the bay, is a small harbour, lying in east half a mile, with from- 10 to 22 fiithoms of water; but there an several sunken rocks befora its mouth, which render it difficult of access. Six miles to the westward of White Bear Bay, and N. \ E. from Ramea Coiumbe, ara two small harbours, called Rtd hiani ffiir6otirs, formed by Red liland, which lies close under the land. The westernmost is the largest and best, and has from 6 to 8 fothoms of water, good anchorage. In goioff in, keep the island close on board, the outer part of which composed of steep red cfiift. 68 BURGEO- ISLES, JitC. VI.— THE SOUTH COAST FROM THE BUROEO ISIANDS* TO CAPE RAY. The SUSOBO KSZiSS are a cluster of islands extending about A miles along shore, and forming several snug and cotninbdious harbours. They lie about 3 leagues N W. by N. from Rainea Colurabe. To sail into Burseo from the eastward, the best pas- sage is on the N.E. side of hour Inland, which is the northernmost, and lies N.N.VV. from Ramea Columbe. S.E. by S. from this island half a league, is a rock uncovered at low water, on which the sea generally breaks; you may go on any side of this rock, the water being deeo all round it : so soon as ;irou are to the N.W. of it, keep the north side of Boar Island on ooard, and steer W. J N. for Grai^U Com, the north point of which is tiie first low point on your starboard bow ; haul round that point, and anchor in the cov* in 14 fathoms, and n^oor with a fiist on shore. The best place for large ships to anchor in is, betwixt Grandy's Cove and a small island, lying near the west point of Boar Island, in 20 or 24 &thoms, good ground, and sheltered from all winds. To sail into Grandy's Cove from the westward is dangerois, unless well acquainted : there are several safe passages in from the southward and eastward, between the islands, and good anchorage ; and in bad weather all the sunken rocks discover themselves, and you may run in without any fear. WoLV Bat extends inward N.E. by E. one league; the entrance is E.N.E. 2 miles from Boar Island, and two miles to the westward of Eled Island Harbour; the east point of the entrance is composed of low rugged rocks, off which is a sunken rock, at the di»- tance of a quarter of a mile. Near the head of the bay is tolerably good anchorage, and plenty of wood and water. King's Harbour lies round the west point of Wolf Ray, and lies in N.E. by E. three- quarters of a mile; before its mouth is a cluster of little islands. To sail in, keep the east point of the islands on board, and steer N. by W. and North from the entrance of the harbour, and anchor under the east sitore in 9 »thoms. Ha-Ha. — On the south side of the islands before King's Harbour, and north one mile from Boar Ishind, is the entrance into the Ha-Ha, which lies in W.N.W. one mile, and is about a quarter of a mile broad, with from 20 to 10 fathooM of water, and good ground all over. Over the south point of the entrance into this harbonr is a high green hill; and a cable's length and a half from the point is a sunken rock that always mows itself. Over the head of the Ua*Ha, is RiehtuNF$ Hea4, mentioned as a mark for running upon Ramea Shoal. About 4 miles to the westward of the Bia^eo Idet^ is the Gkbat Barbysway Point, which is low, white, and rocky ; and N.E. by E. half a league ftom this point is the west entrance into the Great Bnrrysvnqr* wherein are room and depth of water for small vesseb. Between the Buigeo Isles acid the Great Barryaway Point, are seveial sunken rocks, some of which are half a league from the shore. CoMRoiBE Bay.—N.W. I N. 4 leagues from the Bnrgeo Isles, is the east point of the Bay cf Cohvoirb: this point is so far remarkable that it rises with an easy ascent to a moderate height, and much higher than the land within it : the west point of the bav is low and flat, and to the westward of this are several small islands, liie bay lies in N.E. by N. about a league from the east point to the middle head, which lies between the two arms, and is half a league wide, with 14i 12, 10, and 8 fathoms, dose to both shores, good anchorage, and clear |[round, but open to S.W. whids. The N.E. arm affords shelter for small vessels from all winds. To sail in, keep nearest the staiboard shove, and anchor before a small cove on tliat side, near the head of the arm, in 3i fathoms. Tlie Bay op Cutteau lies about two leagues to the westward of Odnnoire t its deptli will admit small vessels only. Round the west point of Gutteau is Ong Serff wherein are a number of islands, which form several small snug harbours. Rieht oiff Cinq Serf, about half a league from the shore, is a low rocky island, westward of which is the safest passage into the largest harbour. Four miles to the westward of the locliy island of Cinq Serf, is the harbour of Orand Bruit, which is small and commodious ; and m^ be known bv a verv high remarkable mountain over it, half a Ici^e inland, which is the highest land on all the coast : down this mounuin runs a considerable brook, which empties itself in a cascade into the har- * The pMiti9o of the Burgeo Tales was ^ven by Captain Cook, horn a sidar eclipse, in Aunst, 17M. as 47» 86' 20« M, and S7* 86' 30" W., as shown ih the Phihwophieai TrmsscUoMof 17677Tbe same spot, £««;»« hltmd, as eommwiicatcd by the kte surveyors, is Ut. 47* 36' 6" N. and long, 57*" 36' WW. sho roc the the XA POILE BAT. 0$^ bour. Before the mouth of the harbour are several little iilands, the largest of which i$ of middling height, with three green hillocks on it. A little without this island is a round rock, pretty high above water, called the Columbeof Great Bruit; and a quarter of a mile to the southward of this rock, is a low rock : in the direct line bietween the low rock and the rocky isles of Cinq Serf, half a league from the former, is a sunken rock, whereon the sea does not break in fine weather. The safest passage into Grand Bruit is to the N.E. of this rock, and of the islands lying before the harlwur, between them and the three islands (which are low, and lie under the shore) : and aAer you are to the northward of the sunken rock above mentioned, there is no danger but what ahowt itself. The harbour extends N.N.E. half a mile, and is but a quarter of a mile wide in the broadest part; but it is bold'to on both sides, and has a depth of from 4 to 7 fathoms. To the toettward of Orand Bruit, between it and La Poile Bay, lies the Bay ofRotte, wherein are a great many islands and sunken recks. The southernmost is a remarkable high round rock, called the Columbe of Rotle, which lies N.W. by W. 8| leagues from the southernmost of the Burgeos. ^tween this island and Grand Bruit is a reef of rocks, some above, and some under water, but they do not lie to the southward of the direct line between the islands. Within the islands of Rotte there is shelter for shipping. is large and spacious, aud has several commodious harbours. It is also the seat of a rising population, and there are now inhabitants in almost every cove in this part of the coast. It may be known hy the high land of Grand Bruiti which is only five miles to the eastward of it; and likewise by the land on the east side of the bay, which rises in remarkably high craggy hills, rising from a table laod of 300 or 300 feet high. About 1^ mile S.W. from the east point lies Little Ireland^ a small low island, environed with sunken rocks, some of which are one-third of a mile off: north, about half a mile from Little Ireland, is a sunken rock that shows itself at low water, which is the only danger in going into the bay, excepting such as lie very near the shore. Two miles within the west point of the bay, and N. | W. 3 miles from Little Ireland, i» Ttoeeds or Oreat Harhwr s its south pomt is low, and it extends inward W.N.W. one mile : it is about 1i cable's length wide in the narrowest part; and the anchorage is near the head of the harbour, in 18 or SO fathoms, clear ground, and sheltered from all winds. Half a mile to the northward of Great Harbour, is Little Harbour, the north point of which, called Tboth Head, is the first high bluff head on the west side of the nay : the harbour extends inward W.N.W. about a mile. In sailing in, give the south peiint a small berth. You may anchor about half-way up the harbour, in lOfa'homsof water. Gally Boy Harbour lies on the east side of the bay, opposite Tooth Head j it is imall, snug, and convenient for ship9 bound to the westward. The north point is high and steep, with a white spot in the cliff. To sail in or out, keep the north side on boa^. You must anchor so soon as you are within the inner south point, in 9 or 10 fothoms, good ground, and sheltered from all winds. One mile to the nordiward of Gally Boy Harbour, between two sandy coves on the east side of the bay, and nearly two cables' length from the shore, is a sunken rock, that just uncovers at low water. Broad Cove is about two miles to tlie northward of Tooth Head, on the same side of the bay. In this there is good anchorage in 12 or 14 fathoms. About two leagues up the bey, on the eastern side, is the N.E. Arm, which is a spacious, safe, and commodious harbonr. In jailing in, give the low sandy point on the S.E. side a smaJl berth, and anchor above it where convenient, in 10 fiuhoms of water, good holding ground, sheltered flrom all winds, and very coiivenient for wood and water. Indian Harbour and Ve Plate lie just within the outer west point of La Poile Bay ; but Uiey are not fit for shipping. Little Ireland bears from the southernmost of the Burgeos N.W. by W. ^ W. 9} leagues ; and lies nearly 12 leagues to the eastward of Cape nay. From Little Ireland to Harbour la Coue, and £^ Afowe .6qy, the course is W.N.W. | W. 1 1 miles ; between lies the bay of Carta, and several small coves, fit only for small vessels; before these there are several small islands, and sunken rocks lying along the shore, but none of them lie without the above course. In bad weather, all the sunken rocks discover themselves. The bay of Oaria affords plenty of timber, large enough for the building of shipping. A ridge here runs into the country with three high bluffs on it, the high range of Cape Ray being visible over the intermediate country. 70 PORT AUX BASQUE. The S.W. point of the entrance into Harbour la Ooue, called Rote Blanche Pointy (near to which are rocks above water,) it tolerably high, and the land near the shore over Harbour la Coue and La Moine Bay is much higher than any other land in the vicinity : by this they may be known. La Moine Bay extends inward N.E. | £. about 4 miles, and is one>quarter of a mile broad in the narrowest part. Off the east point are some small islands and rocks above water. In sailing in, keep the west point on board, until you have entered the bay ; then edge over to the east shore, and run up to the head of the bay, where you may anchor in 10 or 1 1 fiithoms, good ground : here is plenty of wood and water. To sail into Harbour la Coue, which lies at the west entrance into la Moine Bay, steer in N.N.W. between a rock above water, in the mouth of the harbour, and the west shore ; so soon as you are within the rock, haul to the westward into the harbour, and anchor in 6 or 8 fathoms of water, and moor with a hawser oo shore ; or you may steer into the arm, which lies N.E. by E. from the harbour, and anchor in 20 fathoms, sheltered from all winds. To the westward of Rose Blanche Point, is the harbour of the same name; it is small and snug, and the anchorage is in fiuhoms of water. Mull Face is a small cove two miles to the westward of Rose BlanAe Point, wherein is anchorage for small vessels in 4 fathoms. Off the west point of the cove are two small islands, and several sunken rocks. Seven miles to the westward of Rose Blanche Point are the Burnt Itlmd$f which lie close under the shore, and are not to be distinguished from it ; behind these is shelter for small vessels. On these islands are sunken rocks, some of which are half a mile from shore. Ten mites to the westward of Rose Blanche Point, are Coney Bajf and Otter Boy, both of which are rendered difficult of access by several sunken rocks without the passage. W.N.W. i W. 4 leagues ftom Rose Blanche Point, are the It/ei aux Morle, or Dead lelandt^ which lie close under the shore ; in the passage between them and the main is good anchorage for shipping in 6 or 8 fathoms, sheltered from all winds ; but it is very dangerous of access to strangers, as there are several sunken rocks in both the east and west entrances. PORT AUX BASQUE.— -From the Isles aux Morte to Port aux Basaue, the course and distance are W.N.W. about 4 miles ; between lie several small islands close under the shore, and there are sunken rocks, some of which are half a mile from the shore. Port ttux Ba$que is a small coinmbdious harbour, which lies about 2| leagues to the eastward of Cape Ray. To fall in with it, bring the Sugar Loaf over Cape Kay to bear N.N.W. i W., or the West end of the Table Mountun N.N.W. Steer in for the land with either of these marks, and you will fall directly in with the harbour : the S.W. point, called Point Blanche, is of a moderate height, and white; but the N.E. point is low and fial| and has, close to it; a black rock above water. In order to avoid the outer shoal, on which are three fadioms, and which lies B.S.E. three-qualrters of a mile from Point Blanche, keep the said point on board, and bring the flag-staff which is on the hill over the west side of the head of the harbour, on with the S.W. point of Road Itland / that direction will lead you in the middle of the channel, between the east and west rocks, the former of which always show themselves, and which you leave on your star- board hand : continue this course up to Road Islanid, and keep the west point on board, in order to avoid the Frying-pan Roekt which strobes out from a cove on the west shore, opposite the island ; and, so soon as you are above the island, haul to the E.N.E. and anchor between it and Harbour Island, where vou please, in 9 or 10 fathoms, good ground, and sheltered from all winds : this is called the Road or Outer Harbour^ and is the only anchoring-place for men-of-wart but small ships always lie up in the Inner Harbor. To sail into it, run in between the west shore and the S.W. end of Harbour Island, and anchor behind the said. island in 3 or 4 ftthoms. In some parts of this harbour ships can lay their broadside so near to the shore as to reach it with a plank. This place has been frequented by fishermen for many years.* • The Lathi Sherbrook, Gambles, master, sailed fh>m Londonderry, Ireland, In June, 1831, with upwards of 300 persons on board. After pasring the Banks of Newfeandland, nothing but thick fogs were met with until July 19, when they cleared off about midnight, and breakers were seen ahead. The ship was Imnediately hove in stays, but it was of no use; for, on wearing round, she struck on Morte fshmd, near Pert aux Baique. The passengers all crowded on deck ; the scene was most distressing ; shrieks and cries rent the air. In less than an hoiur the vessel was AiU of water. CAPE RAY. 71 with Grand Bay lies about two mile* to the wettwaid of Port aux Baaqut ; there are several small islands and rocks in and before it, the outermost of which are not above a quarter of a mile from the shore, on which the sea generally bmJcs : it is fit for small vessels only. From Port aux Basque to Point Enn^^e, the bearing and distance are W.N.W. about a league, and thence to Cape Ray N.N.W. nearly 1| league. Off Point Enrag^e, which is lowj, and to the eastward of it, are some sunken rocks a mile from the shore, on which the sea breaks. is the S.W. extremity of Newfoundland, situated in lat. 47*» 37', and long. A9° 17' : the land of the cape is very remarkable ; near the shore it is low, but three miles inland is a very high Table Mountain, which rises almost perpendicular from the low land, and appears to be quite flat at the top, excepting a small hillock on the S.W. point of it. This land may be seen, in clear weather, from the distance of 10 or 18 leagues. Close to the foot of the Table Mountain, betweeii it and the point of the cape, is a high round hill, resembling a sugar-loaf, (called the Svgar.Lon/o/ Cape ^oy.) whose summit is a little lower than the Table Mountain ; and to the northward of^his hill, under the Table Mountain^ are two other hills, resembling 8U|;ar-loaves, which are not so high as the former; one or other of these sugar-loaf hills is, from &!1 points of view, seen detached from the Table Mountain. Copt Jngtdlb. Cape Roffi on eniering the CM/. There is a $andy bov between Cape Ray and Point Enrag^e, wherein ships may anchor with the winds from N.N.W. to East, but they must be cautious that they be not surprised with the S.W. winds, which blow directly in, and cause a great s^a. The ground is not the best for holding, being fine sand. Towaid the east side of this bay is a small ledge of rocks, one mile' froni shore^ on which the sea does not break in fine weather. The best place for large' ships to anchor in is, to bring th^ point of the cape N.W., and the high while sand-hill in the bottom of the bay N.E., in 10 mthoms of waiter. Small vessels may liii fkrther in. Be carefnl not to run So tat to the eastward, as to bring the end of the Table Mountain on with the sand-hill in the bottom of the bay, by which means the ledge of rocks before mentioned will be avoided. N.W. I W., nearly one mile from the point of the cape, is a small ledge of rocks whereon the sea always breaks; andj onte mile to the northward of the cape, tlose niifer the land, is a low rocky island ; there is a channel between the ledge and the cape, alao between it and the island, with 14 or 15 fathoms of Water; but the tides, which run here with great rapidity, render it ansafo to shipping. The soundings under 100 fathoms do not extend above a leaeae from the land to the southward and eastwaird of the cape, nor to the westward and normwaid of it, except on a bank which lies off Port aux Basque, between' 2 and 3 leagues from the land, whereon are firbm 70 to 1 00 fkthoiias, good fishing ground. S.E. fS. 8 leagiito h6m Ftort iux Basque, in the latitude of 47<* 1(4', isa bknk, Whereon are 70 nthoms. THE TIDES.— Between Cape Chapeau Rouge and Cape Ray, in all the bays, &c., the ti^e generally flows till 9 o'clock, on full and change, and its perpendicular rise is about 7 or 8 f^t on springs : but it must be observed, that the tides are every where greatly influ- enced by the winds and weather. On the coast, between Cape Chapeau Rouge and St. Pierre, thie stream sete generally to the S.W. On the south side of Fortune Bay it sets to the (NiSttKrard, and on the north side to the ^westward. Between Cape L« Bene and Cape Ray, the flood sets to the westward in the offing, veiy irregularly, but generally S or 3 hours after ft is high water by the shore. The tide or current is inconsiderable, excepting . M, ^ l U l I I . 1 . ■ — ■ I ■ ■— ■»! ^.--I ■ II 11 ll»l|i r Bill I ■ I Wl«»ll ll-l-l ^ II III ■■■ l " II MM M. II. I I '^ '■ The unhappy result was, that of the whole none were saved excepting the captun, mate, three men, one woman, and one cUhl, who « « picked up from tlM sea, and carried to Sydney in Breton Island. We give this as another nriouscaatioB to those^ppraaeUng. 7fi WESTERN COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND, n«ar Cape Ray, where it it utrong, and at timts sets quite contiarjr to what might be* expected from the common course of the tides , and much atronffer at one time than at another : these irregularities seem to depend chiefly on the winds.~iSM tke Bemorki on CiirmUs, &c., pages 1 to 8. THE WESTERN COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND, FROM CAPE RAY TO CAPE NORMAN. Frtm Cape Hay to Cave AnguUie, the course and distance are N. i E. neurly 6 leagues. Cape Anguille is the northernmost point of land you can see, aAer passing to the westward of Cape Ray ; it is b^h table land, oorered with wood, in the country over it Between iAV*yO&V*— The land between Red Island and the entrance into Port- au-Port is rather low, with sandy beaches, except one remarkable high hillock, called Round Head, close to tite shore, about S leagues to the E.N.E. of Red Island : but, up in the country, over Port-au-Port, are hfeh lands ^ and, if you are d or 4 leagues off at sea, you cannot discern the Long Point of land which forms the bay, and which is covered with wood ; this bay is capacious, being above 5 miles broad at the entrance, and 4 leagues detip, lying-in to the south and south-west, with good anchorage in most parts of it. Long Point is the west point of the bav ; it is low and rocky, and a ledge of rocks extends from it E.N.E. nearly a mile. S.E. by E. | E. 4 miles from Long Point, and half a league from the east shore, lies Fox htand, which is small, but of middling height ; (rom the north end of this a shoal stretches nearly 2 miles to N.N.E., called Fox Tail ; and, nearly in the middle of the bay, between Fox Island and the west shore, lies the Middle Ground, on one place of which, near the S.W. end, there are not above 3 or 4 feet of water. From the head ot the bay, projecting out into the middle of it, is a low point, called Middle Point, off which, extending 2 miles N.E. by N., is a shoal spit, part of which dries at low water : this middle point divides the b^ into two parts, called East and West Bays. From the h&itd of the East Bay, over to the Bay of St. George, the distance is a large quarter of a mile : this isthmus is very low, and on the east side of it is a tolerably high mountain, rising directly from the isthmus, acd flat at top ; on the north side of this, and about 5 miles from the isthmus, is a conspicuous valley, or hollow, hereafter ^o bis used kt a mark. N^E. by E. \ E. above two leagues from Long Point, and half - :'igue from the shore, lies 5/m?^ hland, which appears at a distance like a high rock, and j easily to be distin- guished from the main : and W.N.W. about a league fVom it, lies the middle of Long Ledge, which is a narrow ledge of rocks stretching E.N.E. and W.8.W. about 4 miles; the eastern part of them is above water, and the ohannel into the bay of Port-au-Port, be- tween the west end of this ledge and the reef which stretches off from the west point of the bay, ii a league wide. In eailing in, if coming from the S.W., advance no nearer to the Long Point of th6 bay than 1 1 mile, until you have brought the valley, in the side of the mountain before men- tioned, (on the east side of the isthmus,) ov6r the east end of Fox Island, or to the eastward of it, which will then bear south, a little easterly ; you will then be clear of the Long Point Reef, and may haul into the bay with safety; bat, if coming from the N.E. without the Long Ledge, or turning into the bay, in order to keep clear of the S.W. end of I/>ng Ledge, bnng the isftmu8» or the foot of the mounuin, (which is on the east side of the isthmus,) open to the westward of Fox Island, nearly twice the breadth of the island, and it will lead you into the bay clear of Long Ledge : and when Shag Island is brought on with the foot of the bi(^ land on the south side of Coal Rmr, bearing then £. ( 8. you will be within the Long Ledge ; there is also a safe passage into the bay, between the Long Ledge and the main, on either side of Shag Island, Uking care to avoid a small shoal, of 2| fiithoms, which lies W. by N. one mile from the island. To eail up into the Wett Bay and Head Harbour, keep the western shore on board : this shore is bold-to. In turning between it and the Middle Ground, stand no neiurer to the Middle than into 8 fathoms : but you may stand to the spit of the Middle Point into 6 or 6 fethoms. The anchorage in West Bay is in about 8 feihoms, and in Head Harbour, in about 5 fathoms. The We$t Road lies before a high stone beach, about 2 miles soudi- westward from Long Point, where you may lie very secure from westerly and N.W. winds, io 10 or 12 fathoms of water. The Ea$t Road lies between Fox Island and the east shore : to sail up to it, you should keep the h^b bluff head, which is about a league to the E.N.E. of the island, bearing to the southward of S.E. by E. i E. until the isthmus is brought to Uie eastward 74 BAY OF ISLANDS. or Fox hland ; you \iill th«n be within tht ihoal called the Fox'f Tail, and may haul to iha fouthward, and anchor any where between the inland and the main, in from 10 to 18 fiithomi. To tail up tk* Eut Bey, pan between the island and the east shore, and after you are above the island, come no nearer to the main than half a mile, until you are abreast of a bluff point above the island, called Road Point, just above which is the best anchorage with N.E. winds, in about 12 fathoms of water; and to sail up the EastBav, between the Middle Ground and the Fox Tail, bring the said bluff point on with the 8.W. point of Fox Island ; this mark will lead you up in the Airway between the two shoals; give the island a berth, and anclior as before, in from 8 to 12 fathoms of water. BAT of IS&AMOS.— From the Long Point at the entrance of Port>aum the shore ; there is no other anchorage in lesa than SO or 40 fiithoms, excepting at the head of the arm, where there are from 25 to 20 fiuhoms of water. In sailing into the Etut Arm, keep the starboard shore on board ; and, short round a point at the entrance, will be found a small cove, with good anchorage in 17 or SO fiuhoms, but you must moor to the shore. There is a snug cove also within the North Point, with anchorage in or 7 fathoms of water. In sailina in or out of Bonne Bay, with S. W. winds, come not near the weather shore, lest you should happen to be becalmed, or should meet with heavy gusts of wind, as the depth of water is too great to admit of your anchoring. Ten miles to the northward of Bonne Bay is Martin Point, pretty high and white, off which, about tbree-^uarters of a mile, is a small ledge of rocks, whereon the sea breaks. Broom Point is low and white, and lies about a league to the northward of Martin Point ; about half a mile W.S.W. from it, lies a sunken rock that seldom shows itself: on the north side of Broom Point lies the Bay of St. Paul, wherein vessels may anchor with off-shore ^inds, bat it is quite exposed to toe sea>winds. Cow Hbao lies about one league to the northward of the Bay of St. Paul : this is a promontory, which has the appearance of an island, it being joined to the main only by a veiy low and narrow neck or land : about threeH)uarters of a mile off this head lies Steering humd, which is low and rocky, and is the only island on the coast between the Bay of Islands and Point Rich. It is considered as one of the best stations on the coast for the fishery, and the environs are vei^ fertile and productive. Cow Cove lies on the sooth side of Cow Head, and shins may lie there in from 7 to 10 ftithoms, sheltered from northerly and easterly winds. ShaUow Bajf lies on the north side of Cow Head, and has water sufficient for small vessels ; at the N.E. side of the entrance is a cluster of rocky islands, extending E.N.E. and W.8.W., and at the S.W. side are two sunken rocks close to each other, which generally show themselves ; they lie a cable's length from the shore, and there is a channel into the bay on either side of them. Steering Uiand lies right before this bay, which you may pass on either .side, but come not too near its N.E. end, as there are some sunken rocks extending firom it. nr^OmMAOHOn: miiT.->From Cow Head to Point Rich is 174 leagues in an E.N.B. i £. T^.E.] direction. Point Kiek is the northern point of the Bay oflngor- fMcAour. From Shallow Bay to the southern point of Ingomachoix Bay the coast is jiearly in a straight line, there being all the way neither creek nor cove, where a vessel can find shelter from the sea winds, although there are a few places where they might anchor occa- sionally with land winds. About 6 leagues from Steering Island there is a hill, standing hidf a mile inland, which is commonly called Portland HiU, probably because it resembles Portland BiU in the English Channel, and alters not its appearance in whatever point of view it i^ taken. ^jp Port Samkkre and Hamkee Harhour are situated within, and to the eastward of Ingor- nachoix Bay ; at the entrance lies Ktppel ItUmd, which, at a distance, will not easily be distinguisbMl from the main land ; there is a passage on both sides of the island. To sail into Port Savmobrs there is no impediment or dan^ ; you will leave Keppel iakmd on your starboard side, and when you get about half a mile within the entrance, you can andior in 12 or 14 fathoms water ; but if yon are intending to run up to the head of the harbour, you must keep the laiboaid shore on board, in order to avoid a ledge of rocks which lies near the mid-channel ; this is considered to be the best harbour for vessels that are bound to the southward. Hawkxs HARBOtiB.— -To enter this harbour, vessels commonly go to the southward of Ktppd Iiland t the starboard shore is shoal, and has a sand«bank, which stretches along the umd, and runs out two-thirds of the passage over, greatpart of which dries at low water ; your course in will be E.S.E., keeping neater to Keppel Ulimd than to the main, until the eastern end of the island, which is a low stony beach, beats N.E. by N. or N.N.E.; then 76 BAY OF 8T. JOHN. steer S.S.E. ( E. for a small island you will see, situated further up the harbour; keeping the larboard shore well on board, tun direct for this isUnd, and when vou have brought the point at the south entrance of the harbour to bear N.N.E. | N., and are at the S.S.E. point of a bay on the starboard side of tlie harbour, you will then be beyond the shoal pround, and may anchor in 12 fathoms water ; >)r else run within half a mile of the small island, and anchor there, which will be more convenient for both wood and water. This is the best harbour for ships bound to the northward. The land round about these harbours is generally low, and covered with wood : you may occasionally anchor outside, in the B«ry ^ hgornachoix, acoording as you And the prevailing winds. POINT RICH is in latitude 50* 41' 47' N., and longitude ST^ 84' 14' W. ; it is the soutlKwestem point of a peninsula, whieh is almost surrounded by the sea, being every where of moderate height, and prcjeoting ibrther to seaward than any otlier land on tbia side of Newfoundland^ the coast from thence, each way, taking an inwara direction. Port au Choix. — Rounding Point B4eh, on its northern side, you will meet with Port au Choix, small, but yet capable of admitting a ship of bunhen, mooring head and stern; to sail in you should keep the starboard shore on board, and anchor just above a small island lying in the middle of the harbour. In this place, and also in Boat Covet which lies a little to the north-eastward, there are several stages and places for drying fish. Old Port av Choix lies to the eastward of Boat Cove ; it is a small but safe harbour, having at its entrance an island called Harbour Itland, and on its western side some rocks, both above and under water : there is also another island lying E.N.E. ) N., distant nearly a mile from Harbour Island, about which are several rocks, some of which stretch out towards Harbour Island, and render die passage very narrow between them ; there are 4, S, 6, and 7 fethoms water between Sanage Iiumd and tlie main, and 4 and 5 ibthoms between Savage ItUmd Bodu and Harbour Island ; and nearly the same depth between Harbour Islam! and the western shore. To sail into Old Port au Choix, on the western side of Harbour Island, you must keep the island close on board; but to go in on the easlem side of the island, give the north-eastern point of the island a berth, and having well entered, you tnav anchor any where on the larboard side of the harbour, only avoiding the starboard side, for a shoal of sand and mud runs all along it. B4klr of 0T* JOW.<-Tbis is an open and extensive bay, bounded by Point Ridi to the southward, and PoiiU FeroUe to tlie northward, having several islands within it, and some sunken rocks : the largest of these islands Ik St. John\ about 3| miles in length, and 1} broad : this lies E.N.E. distant 81 miles from Point Rich ; on its souili- westem side is a small harbour, well calculated for the cod fishery, but too much exposed for shipping, as south»westerly winds commonly drive in a heavy sea. On the south- eastern, or iimer side of the island, and between it and One Head Itiand, vessels may lie much more secure, in 14 or 16 flidtoms water, and sheltered from most winds; and this is considered to be the only safe anchorage in the whole bay. West from St. John's Island one large mile, is Flat I$land, having a rock above water at its southern end ; the channel between St. John's and Flat Island has from 13 to 25 fothoros in it, and they are both bold'to: the TVin lilan^ lie N.E. by N. from Fist Island, distant one league, and have no danger about them. To the westward of the Twins are several scattered rock* above water, named the Bay Jilandt : they have deep water around them, but np anchorage. Tl^ land at the bottom of the bay is verv high, and there is the little river of Ca$lort, the entrance to which is dangerous and 'snallow, therefore seldom frequented. From the northern point of this bay a rocky shoal extends all the way to f^iat Feiolle, etrelehing out 2| miles from the shore. Point Fxrollc lies N.E. by E. from Point Rich, distant 32 mile*; it is of moderate height, and joined to the main by a neck of land, which divides the Bay of St. Jokn*§ from Ifew FeroUe Bm/^ making it appear like an island when seen from a die tanoe ; its northern rtore is bold.to, and this part of die coast will easily be known by the adjacent ftible land of St. John's, the west end of which mountain lies frana the aaidole of rerolte Point S. by W., and its eastern end S.B. | ft. New Ferolle Bay is a small cove lying to the eastward of the point, and is quite flat all over, there being not more tiian 9 and 3 fothoaM at any part ; it ii quite open to the northerly winds, has a stage on each side of it, with plenty of room for others. St. Margaret's Bay is large, and has several islands within it, also various inlets or ^oyes, affording good anchorage, particularly on its western side, which is the beat situation ibr BAYS OF 8T. OKNEVIEVK AND ST. BARBE. 77 tbipi, being motl elmr of danger, and cODTwitiit for wooding and watering; an iu banki are spruce and flr treee in plenty, and many rivulets of freth water. Dog Jilamt is to the eastward of Point Ferolle full three nilee, and only divided from th« main at high water ; it ii higher than any land near it, which gives it tho appearance, when seen from tiie east* ward, of an island situated at some distance from the main. Old Fbkolli.— To the eastward of Dog Island abool five miles is F^rotU l$lmuk This island lies parallel to the shore, and forms the harbour of Old Ferolle, which is very good and safe t the best entrance to it is at the S.W. end of the island, passing to the southward of a small island in the entrance, which is bold4o: as soon as you are within it, haul up B.N.E. and anchor under the S.W. end of Ferolle Island, in 8 or fothoms, good grouni^ quite land-locked. There is also good anchorage any where along the inside of the island, and a good channel up to the N.E. end thereof. There are some little Islands lying at the N. E. end of Ferolle Island, and on the outside are some ledges of rocks a small distance off. BAY ov ST. GENEVIEVE.— From the north end of F«roUt hland to St. Gengoieve Head the course is E. N.E. 4f miles, and thence to the west end of Cwrant Uland it is north-eastward about three miles. There are several small islands lying in and before this bay, only two of which are of any considerable extent. Currant hland is the northern- most of the two, and the largest ; it is of a moderate height, and when you are to the E.N.E. of it, the western point will appear bluff, but not high ; and when you are to the westwerd of it, it appears flat and white. The other, called Goos^eny lUand, lies nearly a mile to the southward of it, and its west point bears from the west pomt of Currant Island S.S.W. I W. nearly a mile. Gooseberry Island has a cross on its S.W. end, from which point stretches out a ledge of rocks, nearly half a mile to the southward ; there is also a shoal about half a mile to the W.S.W. from the S.W. point of Currant Island. The best channel into this bay is to the southward of theee islands, between the rocks which stretch off them and a small island lying S.S.W. from them, (which island lies near the south shore ;) in this channel, which is very narrow, there are not less than 5 fathoms at low water, and the course in is £. by 8. sootherly, until you come the length of the afore- mentioned island, passing which you should haul to the southward, and bring St. Genevieve Head between the small island and the main, in order to avoid the raidcne bank. You ma\ either anchor behind the small island in fl or 6 fathoms water, or proceed farther, with thtt'said mark on, until the S.W. arm is open, and anchor in the middle of the bay, in 7 or 8 lathoms water. Here are wood and water to be had. There is tolerably good anchoring in most parts of the bav ; but the snuggest place is the S.W. arm ; the entrance to it is narrow, and has only 4 ntlioms at low water. In coming into the bay, if yon get out of the channel on either side, you will shoalen your water immediately to S or 2 fiithoms. BAY OP ST. BARBE From the west end of Currant Island to St. Barbe Point it is E. by N. 81 miles, and from St. Barbe Point to ilncAor Pot'ia, it is N.N.E. nearly l^ mile. Between them lies the Bay of St. Barbe; it runs in S. by E. about two miles fh>m Anchor Point. To sail in, give Anchor Point, and all the east side of the bay, a good berth, to avoid the sunken rocks which lie along that ahore : you must be well in before you can discover the entrance into the harbour, which is but narrow ; then steer south, keeping in tiie middle of (he channel, and anchor as soon as you are within the two points, in a small cove, on the west side, in 6 fathoms water, on sand and mod, quite land-locked. Near this place bnnch out two arms or rivers, one called the South, arid the other the East River; the latter baa 8 fathoms a good way up, but the former is shoal. Between the S.W. point of the bay and west point of the harbour is a oove, wherein are sunken rocks, which lie a little wiiliout the line of the two points t in the open bav are 7, 8, or 9 fiuhoms ; but the N.W. winds cause a heavy sea to fidl in here, which readers it unsafe. From Anchor Point to the extremity of the Seal hlandtt the course is N.E. } E. one league; off Anchor Point a ledge stretches itself W. by S. about one-third of a mile; there are no other daqgeni between it and the Seal Islands but what lie very near the shore. The Sail Itlandt are white and rocky, and must not be approached but with care on their northern and western sides, because there are some sunken rocks near them. Firom the N.W. Seal Island to the N.W, extremity of Flower Ledge^ it is N,N.E. near two miles; pert of this ledge appears at low water, and there are 10 fathoms close on its off-ude. Mistaken Cove.— From the north part of Flower Ledge to Grenville Ledg9 it is about 1 \ mile E. by S., and Grenville Ledge lies about two-thirds of a mile W. by N. from the 78 STRAIT OP BELLE ISLE. eastern point of Mistaken Cove, between which and Seal Islands lie also Nameleu Com and Ftower Cove, neither of which is fit for ^ips. ' Savage Cove. — Close to the eastward of Mistaken Cove is Savage Cove, which has a little island in its entrance, and is only fit for small vessels and boats. Sandu fioy lies two miles eastward from Savage Cove, vvbere small vessels may ride in 3 or 4 mthoms water, with the winds from E. to S.W. About E.N.E. 5 large miles from Sandv Bay is Grem Ithnd ; between them, at three miles distance, W. | S. from Green Island, is die north extremity of Double Ledge, which extends nearly two-thirds of a mile from the shore, and has only 8 or 9 feet water on it. Oreen Itland lies about three-fourths of a mile from the main, is two-thirds of a mile in length, very low and narrow, and agreeable in colour to the name it bears : from the east end of it a Mge of rocks extends three-fourths of a mile to the eastward, on which the sea breaks in bad weather. There are 4 or 5 ftthoms water in the channel between the island and the main, where ships may anchor if necessary. To go in from the westward, keep the island close on board for the deepest water, which is 4 fathoms; and going in from the eastward, keep the main on board. Between Oreen Island and Ferolle, there are some dangerous ledges, which rende* it desirable to avoid this side of the Strait of Belle Isle at night or in thick weather ; the opposite side is much more free from danger, and has several good roadstead^ From Green Island to BoatU Head it is E. | N. 8 leagues; between there is no shelt^sr on the coast, but to the south-eastward of Boat's Head is a cove, called Boat Harbour, where small vessels and boats may lie very secure, except with N.E. winds. From Green hland to Cape Nobman the direction is E. i S. [iV.£. bjf E. | £.1 29 miles. The coast between them is straight and low, consisting of limestone, partially Wooded with spruce trees. II.->TKE STRAIT OF BELLE ISLE AND THE COAST OF LABRADOR BETWEEN CAPE ST. LEWIS AND FORTEAU POINT. GENERAL REMARKS.— The Strait of Belle Isle divides Newfoundland from the American continent, and is about 60 miles long. The eastern entrance, between Cape Bauld and Fork Point, is about 86 miles wide; the western, about 18 miles. The narrowest part, between Point Amour and Newfoundland, is 0| miles. The depth of water in the Strait is usually greatest on the north side ; it varies between 70 and 20 fathoms, but is very irregular; the quality of the bottom is equally various, so as to afford very little assistance to a vessel passing through in foggy weather. Winds from the south and east invariably bring the fogs which are so prevalent here, and whidi are also frequently brought with winds from the south-west ; clear weather is only certain in north and west winds. The climate here is very severe, much more so than the coasts more to the north, the mean temperature of the year being below the freexing point. A branch of the current which passes southward, through Davis Straits. down the coast of Labrador, enters the Strait of Belle Isle, bringing with it the numerous icebergs with which the strait frequently abounds, and which are carried into the Gulf of St. Lawrence, sometimes as ht as Anticosti. The strength of this current is very much incresoed by a prevalence of N.E. winds, after which it sometimes runs, at a rate of 2 miles per hour, through the strait, and spreading outward into the gulf, gradually diminishes in force ttfker a course of 30 or 40 miles, while at other times it is inappreciable. This prevailing current comes along the Labrador shore, between it and Belle Isle, and is very often at a freezing temperature ; as before said, it is sometimes as strong as 2 knots per hour, but it is usually much weaker, and sometimes, with a prevalence of S.W. winds, entirely ceases, and a current is even known to run in a contrary direction, to the N.E. This N.E. stream sets along the Newfoundland shore; and at times, while the current from the Atlantic is running westerly along the north side of the ctrait, there is a stream of the warmer water of the gulf passing along tlie southern shore ; and at others, this southern current runs obliqnely across the western entrance of the gulf.* There is usually a regular alteration of flood and ebb near the shores, in fine weather^ but it is not constant. The flood comes from the northward. * See " Atlantic Memoir," 9th Edition, p. 229. eathef) tU>< ST. LEWIS SOUND. 79 The navigation of the strait, it is evident, from all these causes, is diflicult, and should not be attempted at night, or during foggy weather; for a vessel cannot, under these circumstances, be sure of its position or course; therefore, to avoid the drifting icebergs, which are frequently aground, and generally exist in large numbers iu the strait, as well as other dangers, it would be better to come to some anchorage. During calms or light winds, as well as in foggy weather, or the night, it would be better to anchor in one of the bavs on the north side, than drift about ; if this be not practicable, it would be advisable to brmg-to with a stream anchor, keeping a lookk. Charles Har- bour is on the east side of the Cape, and is formed by three islands ; the depth in it is from 5 to 12fkthoms. Fiehflake Island is the south*eastemmoet BliukhiU Island, which is high, black, aund precipitous, is the next, and &Mre leltmd is the innermost. The channel out of the harbour to the N.W. of Spare Islaud, is intricate, and only fit for boats. The entrance into the harbour is between Fishflake and Blackhill Islands, and is quite clear. The S.£. extreme of Fishflake Island appears like the extremity of the Cape, and bears E. by S. Ik mile from St. Charles Hill. St. Charles Channel is between the Caribou, Size, and Muddle Islands ; it is de^p water, and has no detached shoals. The course Up the centre of this fine channel to the nanows, is N.W. } N. 3} miles. A run of ha a mile north, through the narrows, leads into the channel, between Muddle Island and the main, which is deep, and free from all dangers. The course through this channel to the mouth of St. Charles River is N.N.W. !( mile ; and a vessel may either run up that bay to the westward, or through Muddle Channel eastward, into St. Lewis Sound. St. Charles River runs east, and is nearly a mite broad ; about 2 miles up, it becomes narrow and intricate. Wood and water may be had in plenty up this inlet. NIGER 80UND.--The entrance is between Cape St. Charln and the Omp Islands, the S.E. extreme of the latter bearing S.W. i W. S) miles from the S.E. extreme of Fish- flake Island. Niger Island lies Si miles within this entrance, nearer tiie north than the south side of the Sound. 300 fkthoms south of this is Smooth Island, much smaller and lower } the channel between these ishinds is unsafe, but north and south of them the chan- nels are quite hee. There is good anchorage in Horn Boy, at the head of the Sound ; and in Islet Bay, north of Niger Island. Camp Islands.— The Inner Camp Island, about 300 feci high, and three-quarters of a mile diameter, lies off the S.W. point of Niger Sound, leaving a boat-channel between. The Outer Camp Islands, 1^ mile long, and three-quarters of a mile broad, are not quite so high, and are also of pure granite ; they are separated from the former by a clear channel. There is a small cove on their west side, 200 fathoms wide, where small fishing vessels moor to the rocks ; but the shelter is very indifferent in S.W. winds. CHATEAU BAT. m Tabh Head is a remarkable isolated mass of basaltic columns upon sandstone, flat at top, and precipitous all round. It lies S.W. by W. | W. 5 miles irom Camp Islands. St. Peter Boy is open to the S.E., but the force of the sea is broken by the islets and reeft. It lies within the St. Peter Ii&iiub, which are small and low, with many rocks above and under water ; the easternmost of them lies S.W. by W. 6 miles from the Camp Islands. St. Peter Bay is 2 miles deep, in a N.N.W. direction, and there is anchorage three-quarters of a mile from its head, in 13 to SO fathoms. The entrance between Point Peter and the innermost islet is thiee^uarters of a mile wide, and 6 or 7 &thoms deep : it has a 2-fathom shoal in it to the West of the islet, and a reef off Point Peter, the passage between them being about 400 fathoms wide, and must be approached from the south, passing to the west of all the St. Peter Islands, not less than one-quarter of a mile. The anchorage in this bay is but indifferent, and wood and water can be procured. Caitle hland lies W. \ S. 6| miles from the S.W. St. Peter Island, and about midway between them are Sandwich Head and Covtf the latter only useful to boats. Off the East end of Castle Island, at the distance of 150 fathoms, is a 3-fathoms ledge. Between Sandwich Head and Castle Island in Bad Boy, which is rocky and dangerous, and affords no shelter. CHATEAU BAY is easily recc^ised from the offing, by its position with reference to the remarkable Table Head and the St Peter Islands, by the high land in the rear of it, and by there being a straight, unbroken coast free from islands to the West of it ; and also by the two hills on Castle and Henley Islands, which are perpendicular and flat-topped, and 200 fieet high. This bay has within it, Henley, Antelope, and Pitt's Harbours. The grincipal entrance to Chateau Bay is between Chateau and York Point$. the latter boating om the former W.N.W. f W. li mile. Temple Bay runs 4| miles in* a N. by W. direction, deen water, and no good anchorage. The mouth of the bay is closed by Wnale Itlandt at the bead of Chateau Bav. Tempk Pau is on the south of Whale Island ; it is only 80 frithoms wide, and 4 fathoms deep, and bears 1} mile N.N.E. i E. ftom York Point On the north side of Whale Island, is a passage ir^to the Bay called ff^ak Outp the navigable channel of which is 100 yards wide and 4 fiithoms deep. Henl^ Harbour is only fit for small vessels; the only navigable entrance faces the south, in which direction are tbebasalt columns of Castle Island. Antelope Harbour is on the east side of the bay, to the north of Henley Island, and between it and Barrier Point, which, with its reef, separatei it from Pitt's Harbour to the northward. The passage leading into^both these harboun is between Stage and Henley Islands to the eastward, and Whale and Flat Islands to the westward. There are three dangerous ledges which must be avoided in coming into this harbour; the outermost with 2 fauons, lies in the line from the extremibr of Chateau Point and the eastern extreme of Whale Island, and the south extreme of Seal Islands, seen through the narrow channel between Castle and Henley Islands, bearing E. | N. ; the second with 3 fathoms least water, in the line, i fathoms from the east side of Flat Island ; and the third with only 9 feet water, between the eastern extreme of Whale Island and Black Pomt, the N.W. point of Henley Island. Pitfe Harbour is very superior to Antelope Harbour; it is a mile long, and three, quarters of a mile wide, and has a depth of 4 fathoms close to the shores, deepening to 18 rathoms in the centre. You may anchor in any part, as it is perfectly sheltered. Water and wood are plentiful. To enter these harbours, and being oetween Chateau and York Points, bring Grenville Point on the north side of Antelope Harbour and Black Point, both of steep, black rock, in one, bearing N.N.E. i E., and run in on this course, which leaves the first ledge to the right, till you arrive between Fiat and Stage Islands, leaving the second ledge on the left ; bear a little to the north, just to clear to westward of the Black Rockf off Black Point, and then round it to eastward and enter Antelope Harbour. To enter Pitt's Harbour, as soon as the Black Rock bears east, change course to N.W. by N., and run on till the east end of Whale Island and the western extreme of Chateau Point on Castle Island are in one, bearing S. | W. ; then proceed N. } £., and enter the harbour, which course will clear the shoal water off Pitt's Point. York Poimt is quite bold, and so is Chateau Point, to the west, but has shoal water 50 fethoros off it, to the S.E. It may be considered as the north point of the east entrance of the Strait of Belle Isle ; to the N.W. of it is a high ridge, called the High Beacon, 959 feet above the sea. M 8t BLACK AND FORTEAU BAYS. The cout runs westward, straight and bold to Wreck Bay, which is W. ^ S. 101 miles from Yoric Point. It affords no shelter. Two miles and a half S.W. of its east point is a rocky patch, with 5 fathoms. Barge Bay is W, } S. 16} miles from YorIc Point, and afibras no anchorage. GreenUk Bay is about 51 miles W. by N. from Barge Bay, and is open to the S.E. ; the holding-ground is not good, but it is sometimes used by small vessels. Between this and Red Bay is the Sunk Ledge ; the rocks are awash, bearing S.E. } S., half a mile from Tvm hlandt close to the east point of Red Bay. Red Bat is a beautiful little harbour, perfectly sheltered from every wind. It is formed b^ Saddle Island, lying oif the entrance of a bay ; it has a hill at each end, about 100 feet high. To the west of this is West Bay, exposed to easterly winds, but with tolerable anehorage in 10 or 12 fathoms in westerly winds. The outer harbour of Red Bay is between Saddle and Harbour Islands, at the entrance of the inner harbour, with a depth of 6 to 9 fathoms. Immediately to the N.E. of this is the entrance to the inner harbour: it is 100 fathoms wide, but shoal. on each side, the depth in the middle being 7 fiithoms ; within is a capacious basin, where any number <^ vessels might safely winter. It is easily entered with a leading wind, but the entrance is too nanow for a large vessel to beat into. Carrol Cove is 3} miles W. by S. of Red Bay ; it is very small, and used by a few fishing vessels. Off the eastern point of Black Bay, there are two small islands, a mile apart, called the Little St. Modest Islands. They have a dangerous rock off shore, half a mile S.E. by S. from the W. extreme of the western isle ; this must be carefully avoided. St. Modest Isle is on the opposite or west side of Black Bay ; it is bare, and within it, fishing vessels moor to the rocks on either side. Black Bay is 11 miles west of Red Bay ; it is 3 miles wide, and about 2 miles deep. It is open to S.E. winds, which send in a heavy swell, but there is tolerable anchorage m 10 fathoms off a fine sandy beach, to the west of a river at the head of the bay. There is a rocky shoal of 3 fathoms, one mile N.W. of St. Modest Island. From St. Modest Island, 1} mile S.W., is Gape Diable, and to the west of this is Diahle Bm, which wiUi Xotip Bay, S miles further, may be readily known b^ the magnificent cliffs of red sandstone, 300 or 400 feet high, which extend two or three miles between them. Schooner Cote is on the S.W. side of Loup Bay ; it is open to the eastward, but fishing vessels use it in the summer months. There are a fishing establishment and several houses in this cove. The anchorage in Loup Bay is extremely good ; it is best in the N.E. comer of it ; alUiough open to the south, vessels ride here all the summer. FoRTEAU Bay is 4 miles west of Loup Bay ; it is 4 miles broad between Point Amour, the S.E. point, and Point Forfeau, the S.W. point, and which bears E. i S. from the other; it is about 2} miles deep, and runs to the norUiward. At the head of the bav is a large and rapid river, abounding in salmon, and a fine sandy beach. There is a fine rail of water 1} mile within the bay, from Point Forteau, which, with a remarkable high rock off the S.W. of Point Amour, will serve to point out the bay to strangers. It is the best roadstead in the Strait of Belle Isle, and the Jersev vessels employed in the fishery lie moored all the summer ; they have large fishing establishments on the west side of the bay. The best anchorage is on the N.W. side, opposite the fishing establishments. From Point Amour, across the entrance of the Strait of Belle Isle, to the N.W. extremity of New- foundland, the distance is 9| miles. PART 11. THE GULF AND RIVER OF ST. LAWRENCE.* The entrance of the Gulf of St. Lawrence lies between Cape North, the N.E. point of Breton Island, and Cape Ray, the S.W. point of Newfoundland. The distance between these Capes is 18( leagues: and the bearing from the former to the latter E.N.E. i £. At the distance of four leagues E.N.B. ) E. from Cape Nortli, lies the little island of St. Paul, which has a light>house at each end of it, and deep water all round. From Gape Ray, tlie bearing and distance to this island are WJ3.W. \ W. 14 leagues. (See p^e 71.) COM PASiS BEARINGS AND DISTANCES. Cape Ray to the Bird Islands, N.W. i W. 32 leagues. Cape Ray to the east point of Anticosti, N.N.W. \ W. 43 leagues. Cape North to the N.E. end of the Magdalen Islands, N. by W. f W. 16 leagues. Cape North to the Bird Islands, North 18| leagues. N.E. end of the Magdalen Islands to the Bird Islands, N.E. by E. i E. 17 miles. N.W. end of St. Paul's Island to the east side of the Biid Islands, N. by W. i W. 53 miles. , I. GENERAL PHENOMENA.— WINDS, WEATHER, CURRENTS, ICES, ««!. -The prevalent wind, in the summer, in all parts of the River and Gulf of St. Lawrence, is from the S.W. Westerly winds are almost always accompanied with fine, dry, sunny weather; easterly winds as frequently the contrary. Steady N.W. winds do not blow frequently before September, except for a few hours at a time, when they gene- rally succeed easterly winds that have died away to a calm, and usually veer round to the S.W. In the spring, easterly winds are the prevailing winds, sometimes blowing for several weeks in succession. Strong winds seldom veer auickly round from one point of the com- pass to another directly contrary; in general they die away to a calm, and are succeeded by a wind in the opposite direction. The direction of the winds in the river is senerally directly up or down its course, following the direction of the high lands on either shore. Thus a S.E. wind in the Gulf becomes E.S.E. between Anticosti and the S. coast; E.N.E. above Point de Monts; and N.E. above Green Island. FOOSa— The prevalence of fog is one of the greatest sources of danger in the navigation of these parts, and during their prevalence there is no sure guide for the mariner but the constant use of the lead. These fogs prevail when the wind is in the eastern quarter. They sometimes come with westerly winds, but they are rare, and never of long continuance. Winds between south and east bring rain and fog in almost every part ; and E.N.E. winds in the River, above Point de Monts, becoming S.E. winds in the Gulf, have the same foggy character. These fogs are probably occasioned by the unequal temperature of the water brought down by the river and that of the gulf, which is colder, from the influx of the northern stream through the Strait of Belle Isle, and between these and the air. The eddy flood * A description of the harbours, &c. on the wntern and wuthern sides «f the Gu)f of St. Lawrence below Cape Rosier, is reserved for the next Part. "■'r}] U ^4 GULF AND RIVER OF ST. LAWRENCE. mixinff mih the waters of the River, besides occasioning the dense and low fogs, are also probably the occasion of the phenomenon of Mirage, which sometimes occurs, and which is caused by terrestrial refraction from unequal temperatures in the different strata of the air and water.* Amongst other phenomena met with in tlie Gulf and River of St. Lawrence, is Xhejloeal attraction or deviation of the compau, but this has probablv been over-rated; this subject is noticed in the directions for sailing up the River, given hereafter. Capt. Bayfield says, *'Tlie magnetic oxide of iron does exist abundantly, and attracts the needle vf/y power- fully at some points, particularly along the coast from the Bay of Seven Islands eastward. Among the Minran Islands we found the variation to vary from this cause from 19** to 31° west. At Port Neuf, and on Manicougan Point, the needle was also disturbed ; but these eiSTects were only noticed when the instrument was placed on the shore. In two instances only, when saibng within two miles of the shore, have we observed any effect of the kind upon Uie compasses on board the Otdnartf and then only to the amount of a few degrees." CmMMMTB* — The current which prevails through the Strait of Belle Isle passes along the north shore of the Gulf, at a short distance ftom it, leaving a space between it and the land, in which the alterations of tide are tolerably regular, when not otherwise affected by the wimls. Pursuing this S.W. direction towards Cape Whittle, and gradually losing its force as it advances, it takes the direction given it by the trending of the coast at this part, and meeting with the current which comes from the west, from the river on the north side of Anticosti, and which perhaps is deflected by the projection of the land at Natashquan * A remarkable instance oS3iirag$, or terrestrial refiraction in the atmosphere, was seen by Capt. Bayfield, June 19, 1832, in Uie surveying vessel Gulnare, then off Point de Monts, whidi Iwre N. 61° £., seven miles distant. The temperature of the idr at the time HOA. 30m. a.m.) was 49° ; of the sea, at the surface, and Uie dew point of the air, 44°. At the time or making the otMcrvations, there was a very light breeie firom the westward, with partially cloudy weather. To the southwara were 12 or 14 tail of merdwnt vessels, at the estimated distance of 6 or 7 miles, and beyond them the south coast near Cape Chat. This land is bold and high, with mountains which attain an elevation of several thousand feet at a few miles bom the sea. It was not in the least disturbed by Mirage, except for a short time in the lower part of the coast to the eastward. The vesseb were all afneted by Mirage, in the most distinct manner, piesenting triple images. First there was the vessel herself, with her huU occasionally raised, so as to show it distinetiy above the horison, although the height of the eye on board was not over eleven feet. Her saib apptand elongated laterally, but were perhaps only shortened vertically, which made tiiem appear ■o elongated. Over the vessel appeared her inverted image, the upper sdls Joining. This inverted image was, at times, po parfecuy distinct that we could distinguish the colour of the paint on the vessers sides more plunly by it than by the vessel herself. It was perftetly Uke the appearance of a vessel seen through an invertiag telescope, excepting that it was distorted like the vessel herself, being short- ened Tettically. Above the inverted image, but touching it, was a well-defined white line, which showed plainly, In conseanenee of the dark land beyond. TUs line was eridentiy the reflected horison, for the inverted Image of the vessel appeared as if hani^ng firom it. Above the inverted image was another of the vessel, in her natural nosition, distinct ; but, like the others, much shortened vertically. This third image and the inverted cne appeared placed keel to keel, or more correctiy speaking, as if each had been cut off at the water une, and then the Teasels placed together, the white line farming the only separation between them. As the white une rose or fell, which it ^d continually, so the inverted image rose and fell also ; and the vessel herself became elongated or shortened vertically in the same proportion, the con- nection between their upper sidls being always continued, sometimes nearly touching and others overlapping. Flying showers of rain soon after occurred, in various directions ; and the relative temperatures of the tax, dew point, and surface water, were found to be changeable during the day. Thus at Sh. 30m. p.m. the ^r was 49°, the dew pdnt 45°, and the surface water 42° of Fanrenheitf Upon tliis subject Mr. Edw. Sabben, in H.M.S. Niemen, August, 1823, near Cape Chat, said, " On our passage downward the houses along shore were fiiequentiy seen conriderably depressed or elevated, and sometimes inverted by refraction. '* Varying results of observations taken in Oasp6 Day also evinced extraordinary refiraction. The insulated rock close to Cape Qami, and distant firom the ship about six miles, appeared on the morning of the 25th very higli ana out of the water, seeming an object of equal sise to a schooner, then passing near it. On the 26th, at tiie time of observation, it was scarcely perceptible." Here we may add that, in the summer nights, in weather calm and fine, with bright aurora and heavy dew, such drcumstances are usually indicative of an easterly wind in the succeeding morning, with tliick weather, its constant accompaniment. t Extract firom the description by Capt. H. W. Bayfield, Nautical Magasine, Feb. 1835, pp. 91,92,93. CURRENTS. S5 Point, it gradually takes a S.S.E. coane, acrou the Oolf» and then meeting with the main current of the St. Lawrence, coming to the south of Anticosti, between it and the Mag- dalen Islands, the whole of the waters take a S.E. course, through the principal entrance of the Gulf, between Cape Ray on Newfoundland and the Island of St. Faul. These currents are modified hy various causes, and their strength and direction are diffi- cult to estimate, altliough it is of great importance that a proper allowance should be maide for them, as, from their southern tendency, many vessels are lost, from want of due precau- tion, on the coasts of Gasp^ and its neighbourhood, on the Magdalen Islands, &c. '* This current," says Capt. Bayfield, " is checked by easterly winds, and may sometimes run in a contrary direction from the same cause." Northerly winds may also cause it to set to Uie southward, towards Breton Island. In corroboration of this is the following communica- tion from Mr. James Jeffery, M.R.N. :— « St. Pierre to the Guff of St. Lawrenee.-'We sailed from St. Pierre with a fresh easterly wind and clear weather; but when about ten miles off the land it came on thick, with small rain. Toward the evenin|[ it cleared up, and we gained sight of the land about eight, near Cape Blanche. On steering to pass between St. Paul's Island and Cape Ray the wind increased, and at midnight it blew fresh with clear weather ; at daylight it blew a gale, with a heavy sea and thick weather. The vessel was hove-to, with her bead to the northward, under close-reefed foresail. At 5 h. SO m. it cleared up a little, and we again bore up, in hope of making St. Paul's Island. At 5 h. 40 m. the land was seen ahead, making high, like an island, and as it agreed with our reckoning, no doubt was entertained as to our exact position. We kept away to pass to leeward of it, and could just keep it in sight, as it came on thick immediately dfter we discovered the land. At 7 a.m. a low point was seen right ahead, and breakers about a mile or a mile and a half off the starboard now. There being no low point on St. Paul's Island, it was evident that the land seen must be about Cape North on Breton Island, and thaty since 8 p,tn. the preceding evening, we had been set m a S.W. direction at two miles an hour. We now had the disi^;reealMe task of beating off a lee-shore, blowing a gale, with a heavy sea and an iron-bound coast to lee- ward ; and it will appear evident that, had the weather but partially cleared up, to have given a sight of the land, and if we had continued hove-to, we must have been set down on St. Paul's Island, having escaped the set on Cape North. Sail being made, we stood S.E. by S. and succeeded in berthing the point at about a mile and a h^f. " At 9 h. 10 ro. a.m. having gained an offing of about 4 or 5 miles, with a very heavy sea, our bowsprit went short off at the stem ; the fore-mast and main-mast followed it instantly, and all the wreck fell overboard : thus totally dismasted, on a dead lee-shore, without any anchorage, by setting a sail on the stump of the fore-mast we managed to keep the bead off. Once toward evening the wind and sea abated, but very thick weather still continued. During the whole day there was heavy rain and sleet. On the next morning the weather cleared up, and at 7 we saw the land near Scatari Island, and succeeded in anchoring in Miray Bay at night." The flood-tide entering the River St. Lawrence, proceeds upwards in the wide and deep channel of the estuary, till it is obstructed by the contracted breadth of the river near Red Island, and the sudden shallowing of it near this part ; from this cause it is prevented firom continuing in its upward course, and in consequence of the quantity of water here collected not finding a sufficient outlet, it is reverted, and forms an eddy-flood. The stream of flood, therefore, runs in opposite directions, on either side of the river. This stream coming from the eastward, as it approaches the northern part of Red Island Bank runs very strong, sometimes at a rate of 4 knots, bearing round at this part, and proceeding in a different direction towards the Razade Islands, with a velocity of from 2 to 3 miles per hour, and then proceeds onward witii a constant current downwards, thus adding to tne current ot water from the river itself, and increasing its strength. It is strongest in-shore, and extends about half-way over, diminishing in strength towards the middle ; and from this difference in its velocity, and the unequal depth of the river, occasioning those violent whirls and ripples which occur in its strongest parts. On the south coasts of the part of the River between Cape Gasp^ and Green Island, there is no upward current from the tides that is available for navigation : during the floods at sprine-tides, there is a westeriy current felt close in-shore, the line between the two streams being mariced by strong rippling. Off Point de Monts there is very little or no stream of flood, excepting close in-shore, and the downward current is constant off that point. The point diverts the current to the i" $6 ISLAND OF ST. PAUL. S.S.E., which runs at a rate of from one to two miles an hour, so that it is difficult for a vessel to bcAt round it with a westerly wind. During the ebb tide, the stream runs down on both sides, strongest on the south, and weakest in the middle of the estuary. On the N. shore, it is turned to the southward bv the projecting points at the Bay de Aflille Vaches, Port Bersimis, the Peninsula of ManU cougan, and E^)int de Monts ; this foct is important, and ought to be attended to, as this southern tendency is increased at these points, by the water brought down by the large rivers between them. On the south side, the stream of the ebb tide is also increased, by the efflux of water from the Saguenay River, which, setting with gieat velocity across the uil of the Red Island Bank, adds to the downward course of the stream. The tides in the River above this part are described hereafter. I.— On the approach of winter the navieation of the Gulf is greatly impeded by floating ices, and the nver is at length choked mth broken fields of ice, exhibiting the roost varied and fantastic appearances ; the whole country on each side is then covered with snow, and all the trees, excepting the stem fir-tribes, are denuded of their foliage. In crossing the Gulf, even during the summer months, islands of ice have frequently been met with. The ice that drifts out of the rivers all disappean by the latter end of May, but these masses make no part of it. The conjecture is, that they are not formed on any of the neighbouring coasts, but descend from the more northerly regions of Davis's Strait, &c., where, it is presumed, they are severed by the violence of storms, from the vast accumuhtions of the arctic winter ; and passing near the coast of Labrador, are drawn by the in-draught of the current into the Strait of Belle Isle. They often are a hundred feet in height, with a circumference of many thousands ; the indications of their presence in the niglit, or during fogs, have been described on page 11. By day, from the dazzling reflec- tion of the sun's rays, also by moonlight, at a safe distance, their appearance is brilliant and agreeable. II.— THE ISLAND OF ST. PAUL, MAGDALEN ISLES, AND ANTICOSTI. TlM XSbJLirB of ST. FAV& lies N. 57° E. true, ten miles from Cape North, on Breton Island. The northern extremity of the island is in lat. 47** 14' N., and long. 60** 8' 17' W. It is nearly three miles long and one mile broad. The margin is rocky and precipitous almost all round, indented by coves, in which ships may obtain shelter during the prevalence of certain winds. On this island are two lighthouses, one near the northern, the other near the southern extremity; of which one will always be open, unless to a vessel near the central rocks. The northern light, brilliant andjixed^ is about 140 feet above the level of the sea; it can be seen to the soumward on any bearing between N. by E. and E. by N. (by compass), when it is obscured by the hills to the southward of it. The southern light may be seen from the northward on any bearing except between S.S.E. and West, when it is obscured by the hills to the northward of it. These lights are visible at_a distance, from eaoh tower, of six leagues. In Trimhf Cove, at the north point of it, is a provision post. This cove is a mile from the S. point on the W. side ; on the opposite side of the island is Atlantic tJove, and a landing may be eflected in either of these. The cove on the N. W. afibrds a small and bold beach, about 150 feet long, where a landing may be efiiected, but generally with difficulty, by reason of the continual swell of the sea. The interior of the island rises into three hills, the highest being nearly in the centre, and terminating in a square summit of about 50 feet on each side, and nearly oerpendicular, which is estimated to be about 500 feet above the level of the sea. The surface of the island is, in general, rocky, with some spots of marsh or bog, which probably supply the. fresh water found iuuing from the rock. Stunted fir and white birch trees are the only products of the isle, but some drift wood may be picked up. There is anchorage all round Uie island, and close io-shore, which circumstance enables vessels to lie there with any winds, by shifting their stations as the wind and weaUier i«quira ;--a mode practised by the pnvateera of the United States during the late war. There are tolerably regular soundings off the north side, at the distance of half or three quarters of a mile ; on the N.E. side a bank lies off about three-quarters of a mile, with nom 7 to 8 fathoms of water. The general depth of the soundings around the island, at half a mile from the shore, is from 20 to 40, but the water soon deepens to 100, fethoms. There is a plentiful fishery of cod and mackerel around the coast, and also an abundance of seals. MAGDALEN ISLANDS. ^7 Thii island has been noted for the great number of wrecks which have been found on its shores, arising from the frequent fogs and tempestuous weather, the uncertain currents, and abrupt nature of its coast, &c. } which, it is hoped, will be obviated, by the two light- houses, established in 1840. Four wrecks occurred in the first, week of May^l8S4 : three were the Jane of Working- ton, Crooks, roaster ; the Moon of Sunderland, Phillips ; Isabella of Workington, Morrison, from Drogheda, with ISO passengers, (seven drowned,) and a bark, name unknown. The Jane sailed from Workington on the 10th of April, had a fair run to near St. Paul's, when, on the 7th of Mav, in a very dark and sleety night, the vessel struck on the N.B. end of the island, at about 12 o'clock, with a tremendous crash, on the rocks, although steering wide of the island, after a good observation. Though immediately under high cliffs, the land could not be seen. The vessel filled with water immediately, and the boats floating on deck, the crew and passengers embarked in one, from which, after suffering in a raging sea and snow storm, during four hours, they landed, and climbing up the rocks for three hours, at length reached the station-house, where they were kindly received by a Mr. Perry, who supplied them with clothing and provisions, nothing having been saved. The Moon was wrecked about 60 feet from the Jane, and nearly at the same time, but all lives were saved ; also the, Isabella, with 130 passengers, seven of whom were drowned. The fourth vessel, supposed a bark, name not ascertained, was also wrecked near the same place, and it was supposed that all the crew were lost. The Jane was wre<.ked at the N.E. end of the island. tk. ZS&ANOSs— The Magdalen Islands, within the entrance of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, is a group of irregular isles, between the parallels of 47° 13' and 47° S7' North. They are named respectively Entry Island, Amherst, Orindstone, Alright, WofftSf Orosse, and Coffin hlandi f exclusive of Bryon or Cross Island, and the Bird Itlets, which lie more to the north. These isles, although so near to the coast of Newfound- land, are included in the government of Canada, being annexed to the district and county of Gasp^. They contain a population of nearly 1100 souls, chiefly French Acadians and Catholics. A few English and Irish families are settled among them, all of whom derive their principal subsistence from the fisheries. Beyond the cultivation of potato gardens, agriculture seems wholly unknown on the islands ; but natural meadows and pasturing grounds are common, and afford wholesome sustenance to a tolerable proportion of live stock. The inhabitants are, in general, remarkably hale and healthy, light in complexion, with flaxen hair. They are cheerful in character, and the females remarkably moaest and ingenuous. The highest range of Fahrenheit's thermometer has been darked 76". It has been also observed, that the islands are devoid of reptiles of any description ; and that, besides the fox, rabbits are to be found. There are two churches on the isltods, and a parsonage house for the resident missionary. Gypsum and ore abound on the Ma^alens : there appears to be no large timber on Ihero, and only stunted spruce. The mhabitants are, therefore, not well furnished with fuel ; but the deficiency is commonly but too well supplied by wreck timber. Smalt quan- tities of grain are produced ; for barley and oats, potatoes, and other vegetables, are occa- sionally destroyed by early fifost, or will not ripen in cold seasons ; in consequence, both man and beast suffer severely in the winter months. Fish, seal-skins and seal-oil, feathers, and gypsum, are, it appears, their only exports. Amheret is the most southern and principal island, connected with Grindstone Island by a double line of sand-bars, enclosing an extensive lagoon, five or six miles long, and from one to three wide, the southern part of which is called Basque Harbour : it has three out- lets into Pleasant Bay ; Uie southernmost is the deepest, but has but 3 feet at low water. Pleasant Bt^, to tlie E. of this, and N.E. of the island, deserves the name. It is the best harbour in the Magdalens, and the only one that vessels can venture to ride in with all winds. The best anchorage is in 4 fathoms, the rocky point of the entrance of Amherst Harbour bearing S.W. ) W. two-thirds of a mile. Amherst Harbour is in the S.W. comer of Pleasant Bay ; its entrance is very narrow and crooked, and over the bar is 7 feet least water. The Demoiselle, a remarkable hill of Amherst Island, on the S. side of Pleasant Bay, is about 280 feet high above the sea. It often happens, firom the prevalence of w( -1y gales in the fall of the year, that ships bound to Queoec, after entering the Gulf, have been driven out again, or they have con- 88 MAGDALEN ISLANDS. tended antU their crawl wera worn oat, and haf e gone to the low ports for ougoet, when, by taking an anchorage, they would ha?e eecnred their passage. These islands may be approached, generally, by the lead, to seven fiithoms of water. To the west an islet or rock, called Deadman Itktf stands alone in the sea, at 7} miles pyramid, „ .. - inaccessible, and siiarp at the top. The waves foam arowid its base, and dash their white spray hx np its sides, bMutifully contrasting with the remarkable colours of the rock, which appears of a dark reddish brown at each end, and bluish green in the centre, the colours passing into each other. A reef extends from it, for one-third of a mile, toward Amherst island. The White Hone, a very dangerous reef, lies N. 00** E. 7 miles from Deadman Islet, and W.N.W. 5| miles from Gull Island, on the coast of Orindstone Island. It is small, and has 10 feet water over pointed rocks, on which the sea often breaks. The Pierre de Oro$ Cap is another dangerous reef, on the west of Grindstone Island ; it has 18 feet least water, and lies N.E. by £. } £. 6 miles from the White Horse ; N.W. by W. from Hospital Cape, and 3i miles from Cape la Trou, the nearest point of Grind- stone Island. Entry Itlandis the highest of the Magdalene, and 580 feet hlsh above the sea. It may be seen, in clear weather, from 8 to 9 leagues off. The eastern -iue is bold close-to. There are high and magnificent cliffs of trap, porphyry, new red sand 'lone, and red marl around it, exceptingthe N.W. point, which has a long sandy spit off it: on the N. point is the remarkable Tower Rock. The cli£b of Amherst Island are also red of different shades ; these contrasted with the green pasture of the hill-sides, the darker neen of the spruce trees, and the bright yellow of the sand-bars and beaches, produce an meet extremely imposing in a brilliant sunny day, which sometimes occurs. Fine weather, even in June, is not generally of long continuance t and dark cloudy weather is commonly indicated by a heavy swell rolling m from the eastward. Winds are frequently strong from W.N.W., but S. W. ere the prevalent winds during the summer months. The Pearl Ruf lies E. by N. 4| miles from the N.E. point of Entry Island, and S.E. i^ S. Si miles.from Cape Alright ; it is small and dangerous, having 9 feet least water. To the north of Amherst Island is Grinditone Iiland, the second in size of the group t it is 550 feet high ; and to the N.E. of this, AW^[ht Island, lu S. point is Cape Alright, which is remarkable ; the cliflb of a greyish-white colour, vrith occasional brick-red Tow down, are 400 feet high. The S. extremity of the cape is low, with a small rock close off it. Alright Reef lies £. by S. 3i miles from Cape Alright; there is 6 feet water over it. From Grindstone Island the W. coast is a continuance of sand-beaches and sand-hills, for 9 to 10 miles, to Wolfe I$land, which is of low sandstone cliffs, three-quarters of a mile long; after which the sand-beaches recommence, and continue with hi^h sand-hills occasionally 9 or 10 miles further to the North Capet or Groue Iibnct, a precipice of con- siderable height. Off this are the North Cape Roche, 600 fisthoms off shore. The Eatt Point of the Magdalens is of low sand, vrith several sand-hills, which extend W. to the N.E. Cape. Off the East Point is the long ^iV, a ridge of sand, with from S to 3 fiithoms of water, extending 1| mile S.E. | S. from the point; and for 1} mile further the depth is from 4 to 6 fiithoms. To clear this spit in 5 or 6 fathoms, take care not to bring Old Harry Head to bear to the southward of west It is extremely dangerous, and there is a heavy breaking sea on it. Doyle Reef lies S.E. i £. 6| miles fbra the East Point. The least water on it is 3 fiithoms on one spot, and 12 to 13 fathoms all round it. It seldom shows, but is one of the worst dangers of the Magdalens. The only mark to clear it is the North Cape of the Magdalens open two-thirds of its breadth to the N.E. of the North-Eatt Cape, which is a remarkable hill, 230 feet high, on Eut liland, which sUnds at the head of Grand Entry Harbour, and can be seen over all the sand-hills. S.W. of East Point is Coffin Itland^ the N.E. point of which is Old Harry Head, lying W.8.W. 4} miles from it. From this head 2} miles S.S.W. i W. lies the outermost of ISLAND OF ANTICOSTI. a9 lh« Columbine SAooi*, a patch of rocks with 3 fathoms water. Between this and Coffin Island are numerous small shoal patches, some of which have not more than 3 feet water This is a dangerous part, and should not be approached at night, or during fogs. At the S.W. end of Coffin Island is the entrance of Grand Entty Harbour, which is extremely narrow, and ought not to be attempted without a pilot. The depth in this entrance is not more than 10 feet leaiit water, and the harbour iuelf is extensive and well sheltered. Brjfon or Crou Iilond.— The north side has steep cliffs of red sand-stone, from which reefs extend two or three miles. Approach no nearer than in 8 fathoms. On the south side there is good shelter, with north and west winds, in 6 fathoms, sandy bottom, the east end of the island bearint^ E. by S.,and the reef to the westward bearing west. In this road is a strong underset, which makes a ship at her anchors roll heavily. The BIRD ISLETS are small, and not far asunder: in the passage between them is a rocky ledge. They are of moderate heisht, flat and white at top. One appears like a high lump, and abounds with gannets. The southernmost is the largest ; from the east end extends a small ledge of rocks. Between these islands and Bryon Isle is a rocky ledge, with a depth of from 4 to 7 fathoms. It is generally recommended to pass to the eastward of the Bird Islets, unless a special advantage may be gained by passing between them and Bryon. In sailing from these islands, toward Cape Rosier, you will have a depth of from 30 to 60 fathoms, to the distance of 18 leagues from the islands, and then lose soundings until you approach the cape. ■■„, The Bird IsleU, S.S. W.\W.i milet. Tbe ZSXiJLIIll of AWTIOOSTI.— This island is 41 leagues in length, between the meridians of 61** 40' and 64° S2'; and, with one exception, has no bay nor harbour capable of affording shelter to shipping. It is, generally, very high, and may be seen, in clear weather, at 8 or 9 leagues ; but the haze is so great, in the summer season, that it can seldom be distinguished at more than 5 leagues. The island is uncultivated, and covered with immense forests, to which Indians repair, from the neighbouring continent, for the purpose of shooting bears, which are numerous. The powerful stream setting constantly from the River of St. Lawrence, and the heavy snow-storms in the fall of tbe year, have unquestionably been the cause of many shipwrecks on Anticosti. But, in order to relieve such as may be cast ashore here, government agents have been appointed to reside at two different stations, all the year, who are furnished with provisions for tbe use of those who have the misfortune to need them. Boards are ?lacea in different parts, describing the distance and direction to these friendly spots, 'hese establishments were made in tne year 1809 ; the humane intention of which will be honoured wherever it is made known, because the crews of vessels driven on shore here have, sometimes, at the utmost peril of their livM, forsaken them to make their escape to Gasp^.— Bo»cAeM'« Canada, 1815. <* One of these provision-posts is at two leagues to the S.E. from the west end of the island, in Mlit Cove, or Grand Bay : the other is in SkaUop Creek, three leagues to the W.N.W. from the south point of the island, and at the two light-houses." The government agent lives' on shore at the houses, and has, or should have, possession of a sufficient quantity of provisions for the supply of shipwrecked persons, which are to be issued, when required, in regular quantities to each man : the captain, &c. giving receipts for .the expenditure. Early in 1829, a shipwreck was discovered to have taken place on the south shore of the island ; and it was then found that the establishment for saving lives, &c. had been abandoned, in consequence of which, it appeared that 16 or 18 persons had perished from hunger on the island, and no one was left to tell tbe melancholy tale. Circumstance^ however, afforded sufficient evidence to prove that the sufferers were the crew and passen- N 90 ISLAND OF ANTIC08TI. Cof th« ahip OrmkuSf which mlltd flrom QtrabM ou the 3(Hh of October, IMS. The I of these uofortunate penoni would, in M probability, have been preeerred, had not the houM which they niooeeded in reaching been abandoned and destitute of previsions. Several other vessels, which sailed ttora Quebec nearly at the sanne time as the Oranicus, have not since been heard of.* We give these partlculai* as a caution. The lighuhouse on the S.W. point hw since been establiriied, and there can be no doubt that it will be eminently useAil. Prom the light-house, Ellis Gove bears N.W. by N. (magnetic) eleven leagues. On Healk Pointy the S.E. extremity of Anticosti, is a new Tight-tower, but whkh has not yet been illuminated. East Caps is in lat. 490 8' 25', long. 6i^ 39' 59'. It U a perpendicular cliff, 100 feet high, and at the extremity of the low land to the southward is Heatn Point, on which stands the above mentioned tower ; at a little distance it appears like a sail, and is useful in marking the extent of the low land to vessels either to the B. or W. of N. Between Fom Bi^f to the north and East Gape the coast is bold and clear ; there is anchorage in westerly winds between Cope Sand 'Ibp and East Cape, at the distance of a mile from the shore. Reef Point is the south point of Fox Bay, ana from it runs a danger- ous reef for 1 1 mile, with only a few feet water, and 10 fetboms close to the end of it A house and store are at the N.W. side of the head of the bay, and are the scenes of the sufferings of the crew of the GraniaUf mentioned above. Table Head is remarkable by the hill, from which it derives its name ; and from hence to Cape Robert, 19 miles north-westward, the coast is broken into small bays, which afford no anchorage. From Cape Robert to Bear Head the bearing and distance are N.N.W. } W. 6 miles. Between them is Bear Boy, which is the best anchorase no the north of Anticosti, and this is in 13 Auboms water ; C^pe Robert bearing S.E. | S. and Bear Head N. by W. } W. From Bear Head to Cape Obiervation, a bold, high, and remarkable headland, is 12| miles north-westward ; the coast between them is bold, with high, greyish white cliffs, and smsdl bays between. Eleven miles north-westward from Cape Observation is CorMon Point, under which vesseb may anchor in fine weather, and can procure wood and water. Farther on is fFhite North Clifft which appears like a white patch on the land, and can be seen at a distance of 6 or 7 i«^pies. From Carleton Point to within four miles of White North Cliff Uiere ara low cliA. From White North Cliff to High Cliff" u 26 miles } between them the coast is low in front, with high ridges a short distance in the country. This part of the coast is very dangerous, as the reefii extend for two miles outward, commencing at White North Cliff, where th^ are half a. mile broad, widening to about 12 miles from High Cliff, and terminating about 7 miles E. of it. High Cl\ff Cape is easily recognised, as it is the only cliff on the north coast to which the sea does not come quite up to the base. From High Cliff to North Caae is 13 miles ; it is wooded, and of very moderate height. The coast here trends round to West Point, between which are flat reeb, extending a mile off shore. It is in lyt 49*" 52* 20% and long. 64° 32' 8'. Between W«t Point and Cape Hemy the reeft extend a mile and a quarter off shores and ought to be approached wiui caution. ELLIS BAY is the only good anchorage in the island of Anticosti. It runs inland between Cape Henry and Cape Eagle. Off these two capes run flat limestone reeik ; that from Cape nenry is nearly a mile out to the south, and the other extends three-quarters of a mile west of Cape Eagle. The entrance between them is 800 fitthoms wide, between the depths of three fltthoms. In approaching the bay with westerly winds, run down the neh off Cape Henry in ten ftthoms, until the west side of the frhUe Cliff, on the E. side of the Day, is on with * A complste l|st of the wrecks which have occurred on Anticosti would be a'^mehmcfaidy docu- ment : but the instances already given are tuflBdent to show with how much caution Uie itboid should l>e approached. In tUck and foggy weather, the barque Flora was stranded here and lost on the S2nd et August, 188S, at about 1ft miles flrom the Ught-house, when the latter could not be 1 See NmaiealMa§uan$f Fek lUS, p. 81, NORTHER ^' SHORE OP THE GULF. gi the E. lidt of the wcttarnmoit of two hilli at a diitanet, which lit nebi' tbo north ootst between the north and west points ; then haul up with these marks on, which will lead into smooth water, doae under Cape Henry Reef, in 3| fathoms, until Oamache House bears N. by £., and then bear up for it. and anchor in 3 fathoms, muddy bottom, about half a mile ftom the flats at the head of the bay, and 300 fethoms from Uiose on either side. Bee$ei$ River is a Teiy small stream at the head of a small eo?e, affording shelter for boats, and is 13 miles 8.E. from Ellis Coye{ and seren miles ftirther, in the same direc- tion, are St. Mary Cliffi, which are 21 miles from South- West Point. Oburvation River is 5| miles northward of this point, and is the largest stream on the island : on Uie north of this river are some conspicuous sandy cliffs. Between South- West Point and Ellis Cova there is no anchorage, and off the shore there are reefs of flat limestone, extending iully a mile, and often 10 or 12 &thoms water close to them. Stmtk-Weet Point is a Icm projecting mound of limestone, having a small cove on its north side, which forms it into a peninsula ; on the western extremity of the point stands the UriiUhouse, a conical tower, 75 feet h^b, and the lantern eUrated 100 net above the sea. It shows a brilliant light, which revowea once in a minute, nid is lighted every year from the 25th of March to the last day in December. To the light>hoiue is attached a provision*post, which forms a very conspicuous land«mark. Salt Lake Bm has fine sandv beaches, enclosing lagoons, into which the tide flows. It is 11 miles south-eastward of the S.W. point, andoff it, in the centre of the bay, with its N.W. point bearing N.E. | E. 1) mile distant, there is verv indifferent anchorage in seven llithoms. Thirtv-two miles from South-West Point is FavUioH River s in this distance the coast is the boldest on the south of the island, and should be approached with cauUon. Shaliop Creek lies 13 miles N.W. of the South Point, and the houses of the provision- post are here : between this and the souUi point the coast is very low, and may be ap- proached safely by using the lead. South Point is a cliff of sandy clay, about 60 feet high ; a reef extends south of it for nearly 1| mile. The tower on Heath Point and Cormorant Point bearing E. by S. in one clears this. Cormorant Point bears E.N.E. 16^ miles from South Point, and W. by N. 6 miles from Heath Point. Off Heath Point there is one of the best open anchorages on the island. The best berth is in 10 fethoms, sand and mud, with the tower bearing E. by N. and Cormorant Point nothing to the west of W.N.W. The vessel will then be two miles off shore, and sheltered from all winds between W.N.W. to E. by N. round by north. At Anticosti the tide flows, on the full and changei at 1 h. 48 m. ; it runs tide and quarter. Springs rise 10, and neaps 4 feet. III^^THE NORTHERN SHORE OF THE GULF, FROM FORTEAU POINT TO CAPE WHlTrLE. The Coast of Labrador, which is described in this section, is exceedingly dangerous, and, till the recent surveys, was very imperfectly known ; there are, however, several good harbours which can be entered by large vessels, and which are used by the fishers that frequent this coast. The whole of the land consists of granitic rocks, without trees, except in the heads of the bays, wb«re small spruce and birch trees are sometimes found. It is broken into numberless islets and bays, and fringed with islands and rocks, forming in some parts so intricate a labyrinth, that no ships of any size can find their way. The dangers of the coast are much increased by the fogs which accompany the prevalent southerly winds. There are very few permanent inhabitanU, but the coast is much frequanted during the aeason by cod, seal, and salmon fishers. Cod is abundant, especially to the east of Mia- tanoque, and several vessels also visit the coast to prpcure the egss of the sea-fowl, which are taken prinqpally to Halifex. The permanent fnr.trading and seal and salmon fisliing establishments are at Bradore, Esquimaux Bay, St. Augustine Harbour, LittleFish Har- bour, and Etamamu ; there are but few other isJiabitants than at these places. The ooaata of the Strait of Belle Isle, &c., to For teau Point, at its western entrance, were described on page 78; we here resume the description, proceeding westward. d2 NORTHERN SHORE OF THE GULF'. Four miles W.N.W. from Forteau Point is St. Clair Bay. There are a reef and a low islet, off its eastern point, to the S.W. ; this bay affords no shelter. Blanc Sablok Bay.— Three miles west from St. Glair Bay is Blanc Sablon Ban ; it is exposed to westerly winds, but is sheltered by Wood Island and Greenly Islana to the S.W. It is an unsafe anchorage, particularly in the fall of the year, and during winds from the west, which send into it a very heavy sea. It is a mile deep, and 1} mile wide ; and on a projecting point at the head of the bay, are the buildings of the fishing establishment of the bay. Wood IUand\m off Blanc Sablon Bay; it is low and barren, and about 14 mile long, and has some fishing establishments on its east side. Green tY Island lies 1j mile 'v?est of Wood Island, and between them is a clear channel ; and off the south point of Greenly Island, at the distance of about 200 fathoms, is a rocky shoal. On its east side is a cove sometimes used by the fishers, but this anchor- age, as well as that under Wood Island, is not good. One mile and a half westward of Blanc Sablon Bay is Gulch Cove, a small inlet of the main ; there are some rocks off its mouth which shelter it ; it is so narrow, that there is not room for the smallest schooner to turn about in it ; hence the vessels which frequent it are warped out stern foremost. From Blanc Sablon Bay to Grand Point is 2) miles. Off it is a dangerous reef of rocks, 350 fathoms to the south and west ; and eastward of it, for 1^ mile, there are rocks above and under water, extending off the shore for a quarter of a mile in some places. From Greenly Island to Southmakers Ledge the course is W. | S. [5. W. by IT.j and the distance 128 miles; but the course between them on this bearing is not safe, as u will take a vessel too near the Murr Rocks, and would pass just within the St. Mary Rocks. The best course would be W. by S. 128 miles, until past the Southmakers Ledge. Perroquet Island lies N. by W. J W. 1} mile from Grand Point. It is high, and is frequented by vast flocks of puffins. It is nearly half a mile from the land, but there is no channel between. One mile and a half in the same direction from Grand Point, is the edge of the shoals on the south of Ledges Island. Opposite to the centre of this island, on the main, to the east, is an establishment which is about 1} mile N.N.E. from the west lide of Perroquet Island. BRADORE HARBOUR is on the north-east side of Ledges Island : the passage to it is'from the south, between a chain of islands off the island, which are quite bold-to, forming the. western side of the channel, and the coast of the main, on which is the before-mentioned establishment, the eastern side. There is no passage to this harbour to the north or west of Ledges Island, as the space is crowded with rocks and dangers, although there is a narrow and very deep channel for small vessels close on the island. To enter Bradore Harbour, coming from the east, give Grand Point a berth of half a mile, to avoid the reefs lying off it, or taking care that the west extreme of Perroquet Island does not bear to the west of north ; Perroquet Island may be passed as near as a quarter of a mile ; having passed this, haul towards the entrance till the west extreme of Greenly Island is half a point open of the west extreme of Perroquet Island, or bearing S. ^ W., which will clear the Gull Rock and Ledge, which bear S.W. by W., and are distant 280 and 490 fathoms respectively from Point Jones, on which the houses stand. The rock just covers at high water, and therefore can always be seen ; and the ledge has 2 fathoms least water, and therefore is extremely dangerous. On the west side of this ledge, the west ends of Perroquet and Greenly Island are in one, and they may therefore be avoided by the course above mentioned. Proceed on this course N. ^ E., till Jones's house bears E.N.E. and the northern islet on the east appears like the north extreme of Ledges Island, N.E. by N. ; then steer for the latter, leaving the Gull Rock to the east, and looking out for a small rock lying off an island on the opposite side, afler passing which, the channel is clear, keeping nearer the islets than the main. A run of about 700 fathoms from the houses, will bring you opposite the entrance of the harbour, when you roust haul sharp round to the westward, between the islets into the harbour; this entrance is 80 fathoms wide and 8 finthoms deep. The harbour is perfectly landlocked, but will accommodate but a small number of vessels i the depth being from 4 to 17 fathoms, muddy bottom. In approaching Bradore Harbour from the west, beware of the reefs, which extend three- quarters of a mile to the south-west of Ledges Island. BRADORE BAY TO BONNE ESPERANCE HARBOUR. ds At the back of Bradore Bay, 4 or 5 miles from the north-east end of it, are the hradore UilU, the highest land on this coast, that to the north-west being 1264 feet above the sea. BRADORE BAY is 5i miles wide from the south of Ledges Island to Point Belles Amours, bearing N.W. by W. [ West"] from it. This bay is very dangerous, from the heavy sea sent into it by southerly winds, but on its western side is a beautiful little harbour, Bellet Amonrt Harbouvt in which a great number of vessels can lie perfectly landlocked. Water can be procured here, but firewood is very scarce on this coast. The channels to this harbour are formed by Point Belles Amours on the south-west ; it is a mound of bare granite, 60 or 70 feet high ; Stony Point, low and green, bearing E.N.E. I E., 1| mile distant from it ; and the Flat liocka, lying 1^ mile S. by E. from Stony Point, and 1) mile E.S.E. ^ E. from Point Belles Amours : these form the east and west passages to the harbour. To enter it from the east, steer N. by W. } W., leaving the Flat Rocks a quarter of a mile to the west, until you approach the east side of Harbour Point, a bare granite bill, 150 feet high, with several beacons of stones on it, within 100 fathoms, taking care not to approach Stony Point within a cable's length ; then steer north till you are abreast of the rock above water off the sandy part of the point ; then bear a little to the westward, so as to bring the east side of Harbour Point and Pond Point in one ; Pond Point is nearly opposite Stony Point. Keep them in one to clear the north extreme of the Flat, until Mark Point, the extreme on the north side of the harbour, comes on with Peak Point, a remark- able rocky point in Middle Bay, bearing W. { S. When this mark comes on, haul sharp ronnd to the westward, keeping at less than a cable's length from the high north shore, until you are well within the sandy spit, when you may anchor any where to the south- ward, in from 5 to 7 fathoms, muddy bottom. Between Point Belles Amours and the Flat Rocks, there is a rocky patch of 13 feet water ; there are other patches of 3) fathoms between this and the point. To enter the harbour by this western passage, which is preferable in westerly winds, take care not to shut in Stony Point behind Point Belles Amours, for fear of the Middle Ledges, which lie off Middle Point, the outermost 600 fathoms off shore. Pass Point Belles Amours at the distance of 200 fathoms, and keep at that distance from the shore till past Pond Point'; then bear >way to Harbour Point, and proceed as before directed. Middlt Point lies !& mileW. i N. from Point Belles Amours, and 1} mile E.S.E. from Five Leagues Point ; between which and Middle Point is Middle Bay, a fine open roadstead, free from all danger. It runs N.N.E. for 2 miles, and is above a mile wide ; the depth is between 4 and 13 fathoms, sandy bottom. ?' live Leagues Point is the south-west extremity of a peninsula, which is remarkable from an isolated and precipitous hill, 200 feet high, threC'quarters of a mile north-east from its extremity ; and from the point the two Barrier Reefs extend for 1§ mile to the westward, but are not joined to it ; there is also a reef, partly uncovered, running for a quarter of a mile to the south-west of the point. These are cleared by keeping the south extremes of Ledge and Belles Amours Points in one, bearing E. } S. Five Leagues Harbour is to the west of the point of the same name, but is quite unfit for any vessel of moderate size. Salmon Islet lies W. by N. 3| miles from Five Leagues Point; it is nearly joined by a spit of sand to Caribou Island^ off which the shoals extend nearly 400 fethoms to the S.E. Between this island and the main, to the east of it, is the eastern entrance to Salmon Bay, which has but 6 feet depth at low water ; the other entrance to the bay is from Bonne Esperance round to the north of Caribou Island, in which is plenty of water, and is well sheltered. BONNE ESPERANCE HARBOUR is the best harbour on the coast, and lies on the west of Caribou Island. Whale Island lies N.W. by W. i W. [PT. J S.] I84 miles from Greenly Island, at the entrance of the Strait of Belle Isle, and all vessels bound to Bonne Esperance endeavour to make this island, which is the south-easternmost of the Esquimaux Islands. It has a roundish hill near its centre, on which is a pile of stones, as there is also on almost every summit of these islands. Whale Island bears W.S.W. i W. [5. W. 4 5.] 4i miles from Salmon Islet before mentioned. Between them lie the islands which form the harbour. They are very steep, and of bare granite. Goddard Island lies to the south- west of Caribon Island, and joined to it and another islet by shoal water ; it has a small rock off it, 130 fathoms to the south-west, and 350 fathoms to the south of it is Goddard Rock, which dries at low water. On the other side of this channel, opposite to these rocks. 94 NORTHERN SHORE OF THE OULF. are the Watch, a small uncovered rock, and Breaking Let^e, vvhioh just corert at high water. The entrance to the harbour between these, is 460 fathoms wide, and 17 fathoms deep. Beacon lilet lies W.S.W . \ W. one mile from Goddard Islet ; it is rather low, and a pile of stones on it. Three-quarters of a mile west of it is Red Head, an island bearing E.N.E. [£. ^ 5.1 900 fathoms from Whale Island. Fitk Islet lies between them. To the north-east of Red Head Island is Chain Island, formed of two peninsulas, and bevond it Bomte Etperance Island, three>quarters of a mile long. lAon Island lies a quarter of a mile east of Bonne Esperance Island, and between them is a low ialet, leaving a narrow and difficult channel between it and Bonne Esperance Island. Off the east side of Lion Island is the Whelp Rock, which is always uncovered, and 50 fathoms from the island. Between this rock on the west, and Goddard and Caribou Islands on the east, may be termed the inner entrance from the main channel. To enter the Bonne Esperance Harbour, being to the eastward, and the wind from the east, stand toward Caribou Island, and when off the south side, and half a mile from it, the south sides of Beacon and Red Head Isles, and the north side of Fish Islet, will be in one, bearing W. ^ N. Bear up on this mark, or else steer west, keeping the lead going, and a sharp look-out for Goddara Rock. You will have about 9 fathoms at low water, until past this, when it will deepen suddenly to 15 or 19 fathoms, and then you will be in the channel. Bear immediately N. by E., and Whelp Rock will be right ahead in one with the west side of House Island, lying close under the main land, about a mile from Lion Island ; it has a house on it. Keep on this bearing till past the Bold Rock, off the south-west point of Goddard Island, oearing a little eastward to clear Lion Bank and Whelp at a cable's length, and then run up W.N.W. close along the inner sides of Lion and Bonne Esperance Islands into the harbour, anchoring where you please, in 12 to 16 frithoms, over a muddy bottom. The whole bay may be considered as a harbour} wood and water may be had in abundance from the main land. In coming from the west with a leading wind, keep half a mile from the south point oT Whale Island, and steer £. by N., to avoid two 4-frithom dangers ; one the Whale Patch, lying half a mile E. by S. from the centre of Whale Island, the other two-thirds of a mile south of Beacon Island, called the Middle Patch. These may be avoided by not coming within a less depth than 1 fothoms, or by keeping southward of the track above mentioned. Keep on this bearing till Whelp Rock and House Island are in one, bearing N. by E. ; then haul in upon that bearing, and proceed as before. There are several other entrances into Bonne Esperance Harbour, between the surrounding islands. ESQUIMAUX BAY and RIVER lie to the north ofBonne Esperance Harbour. Esgui, tnaux Island lies in the middle of the bay, and forms, with the main to the east, a very narrow channel, which runs i\ mile E.N.E., and then opens into a wide space with two islets in it. The mouth of the River and the trading post may be reached by keeping along the eest coast. The trading post is on a sandy point, backed by spruce trees, 2 miles above Esquimaux Island. The river abounds with salmon. The approach to this river from the westMrard is so intricate, from the number of islands, that no directions can be given. ESQUIMAUX ISLANDS.— These islands commence at Caribou Island, and extend for 14 miles to the westward. They are generally^bare of trees, and are of all sizes and heights under 200 feet. They norm an endless number of channels, which it would be impossible to describe ; and off them are several small rocks and shoals, some of which are fully 4 miles firom the main land. Proceeding westward from Whale Island, 4| miles W. by N. IW.S.W.] we come to the Fort Rocks, which are low, and extend 650 fathoms to tlie south-west of Old Fort Island, which is of moderate height, and \\ mile in diameter. The onlv channel through the islands, between Whale 9nd Old Fort Island, is Uie Whah Channel, between Whale and T&it Islands. Mermot Islet is If mile W.N.W. of the outer Fort Rock; it is low, and has a ledge off it a quarter of a mile to the south-west. Midway between Fort Rooks and Mermot Islet, the course in through Old Fort Channel will be N.E. | N., with very deep water the whole way tp Old Fort Bay, which runs toward the north-east for 4 miles, with deep water to its head. The Dog Islmds lie to the west of the Fort Rocks ; they are very numerous, and are surrounded with innumerable rocks and shoals, although there is anchorage between the northern of them and the main, which can be got at easily with a westerly wind from CUMBERLAND HARBOUR. QS Shecatioa, by ninning under the main land, in the channel between it and the ledges lyinir offit. The Eider hlanit lie to the north of the Mermot Islands, and east of the Dog Islands. From the Outer Dog Rocks the Porpoiie Rocks lie W.N. W. \ W. 3| milesi and are three- ?uarter8 of a mile offshore ; the BouUt hlet lies Sf miles further on in the same direction, t is a small round-backed islet, green at the top, and about 70 feet high. Together with the opening to Lobster Bay, 1| mile E.N.E. from it, it serves to point out to a vessel its position off the coast Lobster Bay is a narrow inlet running 4 miles to the north-east, and towards its upper end there is anchorage. The Peril Rock is the outermost danger on this pan of the coast. It lies \\ mile from S.S.W. from the Boulet, and dries at half tide. Rochf Bay runs 1| mile inland to the N.E. by E., and is one mile east of Lobster Bay. There is a small cove and fish stage, which is well sheltered, one mile up it, on the S.E. side. To the west of Lobster Bay is Napetepee Bay, which is very similar to it, and runs N.E. for 4^ miles. Being open to the sea, tnere is no shelter with a southerly wind ; and is, as well as those to the east of it, too narrow to beat out of, with a contrary wind. Shtcatka Itland lies W.N.W. 31 miles from Boulet Island, and contiguous to it on the west is Mittanoque Island, and lying close to the main. Mittanoaue Bay lies directly behind the island of the same name, and runs inland 2 miles to the N.E. ; towards Uie bead tibe depth decreases, so as to be convenient for anchoring. Opposite the mouth of the bay, on the north side of the island, is Mittanoque Harbour^ with a depth of 15 to 20 fathoms. Vessels may anchor in less water a little to the east, between the east point of the bay and the island. Enter Itlet lies nearly half a mile to the west of Mistanoque, and Diver hlet lies off its western side ; and to the south of which, a reef of rocks runs out 130 fiithoms. These islets are low, and 400 fathoms to the N.W. of them is a group of small islands, forming with the others, the western channel to the har- bour, whicn is quite clear. There is nothing immediately outside Shecatica, Mistanoque, Enter, or Diver Islands ; so that no other directions seem necessary, than to run through the centre of either channel which may be preferred. Shog hlet bears W. } S. 7} miles from Mistanoque. It is the best guide for making the latter m>m the west, as the Boulet, &c., is fiom the east. It is small and high, with a round peaked hill, looking green in the middle, and is very remarkable. To the S.E. by E. from it there are many rocks ; Shag Rock, the outermost, is 2 miles from it. When three- quarters of a mile south of the Shag Rock, the south point of Shecatica will bear E.N.E. 8 miles off, and this course will take a mile to the south of the I^ree Rocks lying midway between them. • CUMBERLAND HARBOUR bears N. by E. | E. 3 miles from the outer Shag Rock. It is an excellent harbour, the best and easiest of access on this coast. It may be known by a remarkable high hill on the main land, 3i leagues north from the entrance of the harbour ; it is the highest in the neighbourhood, and resembles a castle at the top. The harbour should be approached between the Shag Rock and the Three Rocks, which bear E.N.E. 2} miles from the other. The islands forming the harbour are of moderate height, the easternmost making in two round hills. In sailing in there is no danger but what shows, except a small rock, which lies S. by W. rather more than half a mile from the west point tk the entrance. As soon as you arrive within its outer points, haul over to tbe west side, bear N. by W. | W. three-quarters of a mile to the inner point on the west, and then haul to the eastward and anchor where you please. Water can oe procured here. The coast at this part, lying between Mistanoque and Cape Mecattina, is broken into immense bays and inlets, the islands being very large, of moderate height, and partially covered with moss. The outer coast is lined with small islets and rocks, which are veiy difficult to pass through, while within them, there is a great depth of water in the intricate channels and bays between the islands and the main. Samdy Harbour lies N.N.W. i W. 2} miles from Shag Island, in the lai^ island of the same name. To sail into it, pass to the east of the Egg Rocks, lying If mile N.W. by W. from Shag Island, and keep tne starboard point of the bay, bearing N.E. more than half a mile from Egg Island, on board in going in. You will then see a small uncovered rock to the north, lying toward the east side off the entrance to the harbour, and which may be passed on either side, and then steer N.N.E. ^ £. for the harbour; and when within the entrance, haul to the N.W. and anchor in 5 or 6 fathoms. 96 NORTHERN SHORE OF THE GULF. Port Auguttine is very small, with a narrow and intricate entrance. There is a seaU fishing and trading post here. The entrance to it is to the west of Auguttine Chain, a chain of small islets, the outer one a smooth round rock ; the south extremity of the chain bearing W. ) S. 7 miles from Shag Island. Eagle Harbour t on Long Island, is not fit for anything but small vessels, the entrances being narrow and intricate ; and this part of the coast is very dangerous, on account of the numerous islets and rocks off it. ^oodf Itland, so called from its being covered with wood, lies off the entrance of Fith Harbour, N. ^ W.4) miles from the Bottle, on the north of Great Mecattina Island. The entrance to Fish Harbour is on either side of Wood Island, the northern being the best, there being a ledge to the south of the island which always shows ; and a rock of 2 feet one-third of a mile S.S.E. ft E. from the east point of the island. Wood and water may be obtained, and there is a trading establishment here. Ha-Ha Bay is at the western end of the islands which hide the mainland from between It and Mistanoque. It runs N.B. by N. for eight miles, and has several good anchorages, but is out of the way of vessels. Seal Point, the western side of the entrance, is a mile N.E. of Wood Island. GREAT MECATTINA ISLAND is to the South of Ha-Ha Bay, and is 2 miles S.E. from Red Point, the nearest part of the main. It is 3| miles long, north and south, 3 miles wide, and about 500 feet high in the centre ; it is granitic, and the position of the island, with relation to the high land inside of Cape Mecattina, 4 or 5 miles W.N.W., distinguishes it from any other island in the Gulf. Nearly joined to its north point, is the Bottle, a high round islet, with a small rock close off it ; to the N.W. bv N., and half a mile in the same direction, is a rocky shoal of 4 fiithoms. Bluff Heaaia the high N.E. point of the island ; and between it and the Bottle is a cove, one mile deep, call^ Itland Harbour, sheltered from the east by a cluster of small islets and rocks, leaving a passage on either side of them. The anchorage is near the head of the cove, in from 14 to 20 fathoms. Treble HUl Itland lies E. by S. about 3 miles from the centre of the island. Flat Itland lies S.S.E. | E. 3 miles from tlie south point, and the Murr Itlett lie S.W. about 4 miles from Uie same point, and a quarter of a mile N.E. by E. from the easternmost of them, is a ledge on which the sea generally breaks. These islands are quite bold-to, and swarm with sea^fowl. Mecattina Harbour is small and safe, lying between Mecattina Island and the main, land, Si miles N.W. by W. { W. from Round Head, a high peninsula on the west side of Great Mecattina Island, and 2^ miles N.E. from Cape Mecattina. The eastern entrance is rendered difficult, from a reef of rocks running across it to the northward, and should not be attempted but in fine weather, as the slightest mistake would place the vessel on shore. The western entrance is in the small bay between Mutton and Mecattina Islands, but there is no anchorage in it; and to enter the harbour it is only necessary to keep in the middle, there being no danger, to pass safely through the narrow western entrance. The depth within is 6 or 7 fathoms, but 3 fathoms can only be carried through the entrance. Wood and water can be procured, and it is much frequented by whale fishers. To the west of Mecattina Harbour is Portage Bay, lying 2 miles N. by E. from the •onth point of Cape Mecattina. It runs in about 1^ mile to the northward, and affords some shelter. In the mouth of the bay is a small islet, towards the east side, which forms a small harbour, the western entrance to which is the best. In the approach to this harbour there are two 15-feet ledges to be avoided, one 400 fathoms S. j W. from the west end^of Mutton Island, and the other half a mile N.E. by E. from the Southern Seal Rock, which is three-quarters of a mile N. E. bv N. from the south point of Cape Mecattina. Inside the bay, just within the entrance, there is also a snug cove on the east side for small vessels. Great Mecattina Point.— The S.E. extremity is in lat. 50° 44' 10' north, and long. 58** 59' 55' west. It is a long and very remarkable promontory of the mainland, and of moderate height for some distance to the northward ot its extremity ; but about 3 miles to the north, it rises to the height of 685 feet above the sea, and the high land of Mecattina, at the back of the Mecattina harbour, is the highest land upon this coast. From the point there are some islands and rocks, extending for 2) miles nearly in a line S.S.E. \ E. from the southern extreme of the promontory. Little Mecattina Island.— The eastern point of this island lies W.S.W. } W. [S.fF."] HARE HARBOUR. 97 [S.fF.'] 15 miles from Great Mecattiiia Point, and between them is an extensive bay, filled with innumerable islands and rocks, among which no vessel could find her way, and all description is therefore useless. Little Mecattina Island is nearly divided into two parts by the Bay de Salaberty, on its western side ; the northern portion is very low, composed of sand, covered with moss, and connected to the southern part by a very narrow isthmus. The south part is remarkable land, the highest part of which is 800 feet above the sea, and is visible from a great distance, while the islands and coast around it, being lower, cannot be discerned so far. To the N.N.W. of the island is the Little Mecattina River, which is large, and falls 30 feet over granite, 2i miles above the island. There is no channel for vessels between the island and the main. HARE HARBOUR is on the east of the island, and has several rocks and ledges in it ; it is open to the south, but the swell there is not large enough to affect a vessel. In coming from the east to this harbour, the outermost danger in the space between it and Cape Mecattina is the Fin Rocks, lying W.S.W. { W. 10 miles from Cape Mecattina, and E. i N. 5) miles from Point Antrobus, the S.E. extreme of Little Mecattina Island, and between which is a large open bay, called the Bat/ of Rocks. With an easterly wind, these Fin Rocks ought to be passed at the distance of half a mile. After passing them, 2^ miles westward, the Scale Rock will be 400 fathoms to the right, and the Tail Racks three- quarters of a mile distant ; and one mile further on the same course, the Single Rock, just above water, will be three-quarters of a mile to the right, and which should not be approached nearer than a quarter of a mile, on account of three sunken rocks around it, 150 fathoms distant. When abreast of this, bear north-westward by degrees, till half a mile west of it, when the entrance to the harbour will be quite clear, and to the W.N.W. It lies between Daly and Price Islands ; and within the entrance, about 1 70 fathoms, on the east side, is the Wose '.^, them, and bear up to the westward between them and the steep rocky pomt; this is the safest passage, but a good look-out ought to be kept. To enter the harbour by the western entrance with a westerly wind, run down between the Southmakers Ledge and the Cormorant Rocks, which lie to the south of Lake Island, bearing to the north to pass the S. E. Cormorc t Rocky at the distance of half a mile. This rock will be readily known from the Nest Rack, covered with birds and whitened by them; and 120 fathoms to the west of it, four hundred fathoms to the N.E. of the S.E. Cormorant, is a 2-frkthom ledge, which must be left on the left. Then haul to westward a little, so as to leave the Slime Roek or N.E. Cormorant, not less than 300 fathoms on your left, to avoid another 2*fathom ledge, bearing N.E. i N. one-quarter of a mile from that rock. Passing close to the east of this, steer for the islet in the ctiaunel, which you will see between the west extreme of the outer Wapitagun Islands and Cormorant Point ; but to pau to the eastward of Long Ledge, lying midway between Slime Rock and Cormorant Point, the course must not be above N.N.W. } W., or the west end of the before-men- tioned islet, on with the high point, which is the east end of Lake Island, lying northward of the islet. When within 2 cables' length of the islet, the harbour will begin to open to the eastward, when you must bear up quickly for it, leaving the islet to the northward, keeping 200 fathoms of? the west point of the outer Wapitaguns, to clear a ledge lying off CAPE WHITTLE. 99 , it, nnd when it bears to the west of north, proceed into the harbour and anchor where you please. Cape Whittle, the S.W. point of Lake Island, is in lat. 54° 10' 44" N. and long. 60° 6' 46" W., and from this point the coast of Labrador trends to the west. There is water to be had on Lake Island, but wood is procured from the main-land. The flood from the east and the ebb from the west usually run past here at a rate varying between half a mile and one mile, but are much influenced by the winds. IV.— THE NORTHERN SHORE OF THE GULF BETWEEN CAPE WHITTLE AND CAPE DE MONTS, INCLUDING THE MINGAN ISLANDS. General Remarks. — From Cape Whittle to Kegashka, the coast, like that to the eastward of it, is of granite, and the islets and rocks literally not to be counted. The islets are bare of wood, and covered with peat, full of stagnant ponds of black water, where ducks and other water-fowl breed, and frequented by numerous flocks of the Labrador curlew in August and September. There are plenty of berries, but they do not always ripen. Altogether, it is a wild, dreary, and desolate region ; and, in a gale of wind on shore, the appearance is terrific ; it is onis line of foaming breakers. To the westward of Kegashka, fine sandy beaches, in front of sandy clifls, 70 or 80 feet high, and a country thickly wooded with spruce trees, commence and continue to Natash- quan Point, a distance of 13| miles. Parallel with this coast, and at distances varying from 6 to 1 1 miles, there are banks of sand, gravel, and broken shells, on which the depth of water is various, between 24 and 40 fathoms. There is more than 50 fathoms of water in some parts, between these banks and the shore. Cod-fish are often caught in abundance on these oanks, principally by American schooners. Seen from the distance of 4 or 5 leagues, the coast presents an outline so little diversified, that it is nearly impossible to distinguish one part from anotlier ; and it is only when a vessel approaches within 4 or 5 miles from the outer rocks, that its broken and dangerous nature becomes apparent ; and although there are few coasts more dangerous, either to a vessel unacquainted with its nature, or unaware of its proximity on a dark night, or thick fog, yet with the assistance of the chart, due caution, and a constant use of the deep-sea lead, it may be approached with safety ; and a vessel may even stand close in to the outer rocks and breakers on a clear sunny day, provided there be a trusty person aloft to look out for shallow water, for the bottom can be seen in 4 or 5 fathoms of water. The coast between Natashquan and the Mingan Islands is low near the sea, rising a short distance back into mounds and ridges, but nowhere exceeding 400 feet in height. It is composed of primary rocks, with the exception of a sandy track, 10 or 12 miles west of Natashquan. The sandy tracks are always thickly wooded with spruce trees, and the country generally is here less bare than it is further to the eastward. CAPE WHITTLE.— From Cape Whittle to Natashquan Point, the bearing and distance are N.W. by W. f W. [W. J S.] 63 miles. Off the Cape to the S. and W. are several small rocks, above and under water, the outermost of which, the Whittle Rocks, covered at half-tide, are 2J miles distant from it. Wolf Island is lai|^r and higher than the outer islands usually are, and is 6} miles N.W. by W. of Cape Whittle, and between them is Wolf Boy^ which is 6 or 7 miles deep. Between Wolf Island and the Cape, there are numerous rocks and ledges, with intricate and deep channels, rendering the approach to the bay very dangerous ; but there are no dangers that do not show. CoAcoACHo Bay, the next to the westward, is the only place affording anchorage to large vessels upon this part of the coast. It is not at all difficult of entrance, although the number of islets and rocks in every direction make it appear so. There is an excellent harbour called the Basin, in the head of the bay, and another formed by an arm running in to the E. by N. named Tertiartf Shell Bay, which is equally safe. Further out than these harbours, the bay is more than half a mile wide, and quite sufficiently sheltered from the sea, for the safety of any vessel with good anchors and cables. The entrance to the bay is formed on the east by Wolf Island, and Outer hM, lying one mile S.W. of Wolf Island, and on the west by Audubon Islets. Off the ent iuce, lying 2 miles W.N.W. j^ W. from Outer Islet, is the South Breaker, with 12 feet water; and 2^ miles N.W. by N., from this, and 2) miles west of Point 100 NORTHERHr SHORE OF THE GULF. Audubon, is the S. W. Breaker, with only 3 feet water ; the channel between them is clear and deep. To enter the bay, leave Outer Islet and the roclci to the north of it, 300 fathoms to the eastward, and when abreast of these rocks, a chain of low rocks, which project to the S.VV. of Emery Jiland, will be seen right ahead. Bring the point of this chain to bear N.E. i N., when it will appear on with the extreme point of the mainland, on the N.W. side, near the head of the bay, and run in on this mark, leaving some rocks, which lie 600 fathoms off the east side of Audubon Islets, to the larboard, and then haul to the northward a little, so as to leave the Emery Rockt on the starboard. Their outer point bears N.N.E. ^ E. 3 miles from Outer Islet, and when up to them, the bay is open before you, and clear of danger. The further in, the better the ground, and the less the swell with S.W. winds, which are the only winds that send any swell into the bay. Tertiary Shell Bay is quite clear, excepting a small rock, one quarter of a mile within the entrance, which you must leave on the starboard hand ; within it is perfectly land-locked, with from 5 to 1 1 fathoms, muddy bottom. The jBcMi'it, lying to the north of Tertiary Shell Bay, is entered by leaving the latter to the east, and continuing the course till within half a mile of the island, at the head of the bay. Then steer over to the eastward, towards that island, to avoid a shoal of boulder stones, extending 200 fathoms off the west side of the bay, leaving a deep channel between it and the island, 100 fathoms wide. Leave the island 50 fathoms to the eastward, and as you pass through, the water will deepen from 9 to 19 fathoms, as soon as you are past the inner end of the island, when you must haul to the N.W., into the mouth of a small bay, anchoring in 8 fathoms, over mud, and perfectly sheltered. On the east side of the entrance of the river, is a house occupied for fur-trading and salmon-fishing. Olomanosueebo River, called also by the Canadians, La Romaine, is a considerable river, but very shoal, and there is a trading-post on the east side, but which cannot be seen from the sea. It lies 4 leagues westward of Coacoacho, and the coast between is formed of innjimerable islets and rocks. '' Treble Met and the Loon Rocks lie to the westward, the latter always visible, and 3 miles from the main-land, and are the outermost danger on this part of the coast. ffath-thecooiai Bay is 10 miles west of Oiomanosheebo ; off its entrance are several small rocky ledges, that make it very difficult of entrance. Three miles from Cloudberry Point, the western point of the bay, the bay contracts to a very narrow inlet, with several rocks and islets in it; 8 miles above this is a trnding-post of the Hudson's Bay Company. MusQUARRO River, another post of the Hudson's Bay Company, is 4) miles westward of Cloudberry Point, and is situated 3 miles within the west point of a bay full of small islets and rocks, becoming narrow and rapid just within tlie entrance. It will be known by the houses which are on the east side of the entrance, and also by a remarkable red and precipitous ridge of granite, about 200 feet high, about 2 miles to the west of the river. KBOA8K&A SAY is a wild place, safe in fine weather only; the bottom is sandy, bad holding-ground. It lies 5^ miles westward of Musquarro Point, between Curlew Point, which must not be approached within half a mile, and Ktgashka Point, on the west, 3 miles from Curlew Point. Kegashka Point is an island nearly joined to a rocky peninsula, which is distinguished from all other islands on this coast, by being partly covered with spruce trees. A chain of small islets, wide apart from each other, afford very indifferent shelter from the prevailing southerly winds, and the heavy sea which they roll in upon the coast. The best berth is in the S.W. corner of the bay ; the vessel must be moored with an open hawse to the eastward, and have a third anchor on shore to the S.W. so as to be able to haul close in under the point, in the S.W. and southerly gales ; her bows will then be within 15 or 20 fathoms of the rocks, and the spray of the sea, breaking on the Point, will reach her bows. To enter the bay, the best channel is between a small and low black islet, lying between Gree/i Island (which is covered with grass, three-quarters of a mile eastward of Kegashka Point,) and Kegashka Point. This channel is 170 fathoms wide, and 8 deep, and is quite clear; the only direction necessary when coming from the westward, is to give the south extremity of Kegashka Point a l)erth of a quarter of a mile, or to go no nearer than 8 fathoms; then run along the east side of the point, which is quite bold, leaving all the islets on the starboard hand. Three-quarters of a mile on the N.E. } N. course, will bring you to the narrow channel before mentioned ; haul round the Point to the north-westwarc\ at the distance of half a cable, and when within it, anchor as before stated. In coming from the east, give Curlew Point a berth of half a mile, and run N.W. I N. 3^ miles, till Kegashka point bean north, and then proceed as before directed. The roar of the surf NATASHQUAN POINT. 101 and upon the rocks and reefs in every direction, afier a heavy southerly gale, and on a still night, is deafening. The white spray, glancing in the light of the moon, or of the Aurora Borealis, which is veiy brilliant upon this coast, is beautiful and grand. These sounds and sights, together with the rolling of the vessel, from the side-swells round the point, which tcike her on her beam, are quite sufficient to keep every one on the alert in such a place. Only one vessel can be secured in this harbour as above, — there is not room for more. Kegathka River, another fishing station of the Hudson's Bay Company, is 3 miles west of the bay, and only affords shelter for boats. NATASHQUAN POINT lies 16 miles westward from Kegashka River, the coast be- tween being a line of sandy beaches in front of sandy cliffs covered with spruce trees. Two miles east of the point is Mont Jolt,* which is merely a slight elevation of the ridge, rising to about 100 feet high. From Natashquan Point, the east point of Anticosti bears S.S.W. [5. ^ If^.] 57 miles, and 1) mile S.W. from Natashquan Point there is a small 4i-fathoms cod-bank, upon which, as upon other banks to the eastward of the point, which lie from 6 to 11 miles off shore, there are sometimes large quantities of cod taken. Natashquan River is on the west side of the point, and enters the sea at 3 miles north-westward from its south extremity. The mouth of the river, between low, sandy points, is fully a mile wide, but is filled by a low, sandy island, having narrow channels on each side ; the southern of which has a depth of from 6 feet to 9 or 1 1 feet, according to the tide, and there is the same depth within, where there is a Hudson's Bay Com- pany's Post. Little Nataahquan Harbour lies 3) miles N.N.E. of the river, and is only fit for small vessels; and from its convenience and proximity to the excellent fishing grounds, it is of great service to the fishing vessels. The entrance to it is between some islets on the east, which lie near the mouth of the Little Natashquan stream, the westernmost of which is much the largest, and on the western side is a rather high and round-backed islet of grey granite, with a wooden cross on it. Off this islet a reef extends S.W. by S. rather more than half a mile. Be- tween the two sides of the entrance, is a central reef, part of which always shows, and which is bold-to, on its east and south sides; the other sides must have a berth in passing them. To enter the harbour, having arrived in 12 fathoms at half a mile distant from the harbour, and made out the islets at the entrance, bring the west point of the longer island on the east side, to bear N.E. by N., and the islet with the cross on it will bear N. by £.}£.; and then steer for the latter, till abreast of the outer part of the reef to the westward, and then bear sufficiently to the eastward to pass on either side of the central reef, keeping clear of the shoal water on its north and north-east ends, and anchor in the centre of the harbour in 4 fathoms, with the rock of the central reef bearing S.S.W. \ W. 180 fathoms off, and the cross N.W. by W. ^ W. Wtishtawooka Bay is an intricate and dangerous place, with shelter for shallops and boats. It is 5 miles N.W. of Little Natashquan and 3| miles eastward of Jgwanus River, a large stream, the approach to which is very dangerous. Five miles north- westward Irom this is Nabesippi River, which is much smaller, and will only admit boats in fine weather. On the west bank, a short distance within the entrance, stands a house and store, a trading post of the Hudson's Bay Company. To the west of this, between it and the Mingan Islands, there are several rivers and small bays, which are so full of rocks and small islets, that no written directions for them would be of any avail. Watcheeihoo Hill is of granite and 127 feet high, bare of trees, 18 miles N.W. by W. of Nabesippi, and 14 miles E.S.E. of St. Genevieve Island ; and 6 miles inland, north * It is only remarkable as being the western limit of the American fishery ; for by convention with the United States, of 20th Oct. 1818, the inhabitants of the said States, renouncing previous claims, have, for ever, in common with British subjects, the liberty of taking fish on the southern coast of Newfoundland, between Cape Ray and the Kamea Isles, and on the western and northern coasts, from Cape Ray to the Quirpon Isles ; also on the shores of the Magdalen Islands, and on the coasts, bays, harbours, and creeks, of Labrador, from Mont Joli through the Strait of Belle-Isle, and thence nt>rthward, indefinitely, along the coast, but without prejudice to the exclusive rights of the Hudson's Bay Company : and, the fishermen of the United States have liberty, for ever, to dry and cure fish in any of the unsettled bays, harbours, and creeks, of the southern parts of Newfoundland, above described, and of the Coast of Labrador, but so long as unsettled only, without previous agree^ nient with the inhabitants, 8rc. ]()2 NORTHERN SHORE OF THE GULF. from it, is Saddle Hill, 374 feet high ; these are remarkable, and serve to point out the situation of a vessel at sea. There is a fishing post of the Hudson's Bay Company here in a cove to the westward of the rocks. Appeeletat Bay is 3 miles from the S.E. point of St. Genevieve Island, the easternmost of the Mingans. It is of no use to vessels, as it is crowded with ledges and shoals. MZNOAlf ISZJkNDS* — These are a chain of limestone islands, of moderate height, perhaps nowhere exceeding 300 feet above the sea. They are separated into twu divisions by Clearwater Point, the easternmost of which has been callea the Esquimaux Islands ; but besides that the island, properly so called, belongs to the other or western division, there is another group bearing the same name on the coast to the eastward. They will therefore be considered as all comprised within the title of the Mingan Islands. Their general character, in nautical language, is low. They are bold and frequently cliffy on their north, east, and west sides, low and shelving toward the south, in whicl. direction the reefs and dangers exist. They possess very little soil, but nevertheless ore thickly wooded with spruce, birch, and poplar, on the side toward the main-land ; though towards the sea barren tracts often occur. Supplies of wood and water can readily be obtained from the principal islands ; wild berries are abundant in their season, and so are diflferent kinds of wild fowl. Quadrupeds are scarce, but there are plenty of seals on the limestone reefii, and a few God-fi«h off the coast. . There are 29 islands in all, extending about 43 miles from St. Genevieve on the east, to the Perroquets on the west end of the chain. Of these. Large Island ii ihe largest, as its name implies. It is about 10 miles in circumference; Hunting Island i& nearly as large, and Esquimaux Island not much smaller. The northern points of these islands arc nowhere more than 3) miles from the main-land ; the southern points never more than 6| miles. The main-land is of low granite hills ; St. John's Mountain is the highest part of the chain in the neighbourhood, 1416 feet above the sea. Toward the eastern end of the islands, the main becomes very low, the coast of sand and clay, and thickly wooded, the hills being very far back in the country. The tides are not strong among the islands, perhaps never exceeding a knot, excepting in the very narrow channels ; it rises about 6 feet in spring tides. St. Genevieve Island is the easternmost of the group, and is about 5 miles in circum- ference. On the main-land, 2 miles N. \ E. from the bluff N.E. point of the island, is Mount St. Genevieve, an isolated table hill, 332 feet high, marking, with the N.E. point of the island, the position of the East Channel, between the island and the main. In approaching this island, there are two dangers to be avoided, the Saints, two low bare rocks, half a mile to the south of the island, leaving a foul channel of 5 fathoms between them and the island, and the Bovien Rocks, which lie two-thirds of a mile asunder; the North-western Rock of 3 feet, 1) mile E.S.E. J E. from the Eastern Saint; the South- east Bowen Rock, with 6 feet least water, two-thirds of a mile S.E. ^ S. from the N.W. rock, and S.E. by £. | E. 1§ mile from the East Saint, which will be just open to the north- ward of the Western Saint; the whole of this dangerous part should be avoided by vessels. ST. OSXSVZBVS BASBOmt is on the N.W. side of the island, between it and the main, and it may be entered either by the East Channel or by the Saints Channelf between St. Genevieve Island and Hunting Island, to the west. To enter by the East Channel, when at least 3 miles off the island, in order to clear the Bowen Rocks, bring the N.E. pofnt of St. Genevieve in one with Indian Point, which is a low wooded point of the main, forming the east point of Pillage Bay, bearing N.W. by N., and standing in on this course will leave the Bowen Rocks half a mile to westward, and when the S.E. point of St. Genevieve and the West Saint come in one, change your course a little to the northward, to clear a flat shoal extending 300 fathoms from the east side of the island. Give the N.E. Point a berth of a cable's length, and passing close to the shingly north point of the island, bring up in 10 fathoms, half-way between that point and Anchor Island, on the N.W. side of St. Genevieve. To enter by the Satnfs Channel. — Keep at least 5 miles off the coast of St. Genevieve, so as to be outside of the Collins Shoed of 15 feet; it is a small patch of rocks, lyinv 2f miles south from the S.E. point of Hunting Island. The marks on this dangerous shoal are the east point of St. Genevieve, just open to the eastward of the Western Saint, bearing N.W. ^ N., and the north point of Wood Island on with the south side of the Garde Rock. BETCHEWUN AND ESQUIMAUX HARBOUUS. 103 Being ouUide this shoal, bring the west points of St. Genevieve Island and Anchor Island in one, bearing north, and run in on this leading mark, until the north sides of the two Saints come in one, bearing E.S.E. ) E.; then steer upon this leading mark, to dear the reer extending 280 fathoms off the S. W. point of St. Genevieve, until the east side of Mount Genevieve, seen over the sandy S.E. point of Anchor Island, comes in one with the N.W. point of St. Genevieve Island, bearing N.N.E. i E. Then bear to the north, which will take through the centre of the channel between St. Genevieve Island and Hunting Island,' and then proceed to the harbour round Anchor Island. Wood and water may be obtained, and the whole space between the islands nnd the mu'.u is well sheltered, and will accommodate a great number of vessels of the largest class. BaTOBBWmr RAmBOVX Ues to the west of that of St. Genevieve, and between Hunting Island and Partridge Pointt the western point of Pillage Bay. One entrance to this harbour is through the East Channel, before described ; but if, instead of proceeding to St. Genevieve, this is made for, you must pass to the northward of Anchor Island, which is quite bold on that side, wlien the entrance will bear W. by N., between the north point of Hunting Island, a cliffy mound, and PariridMt Point, on the N.E. side of which is Mount Partridge, a wooded, steep-sided hill, which is easily recog- nised. You must pass close to the north point of Hunting Island, to avoid a shoal, extending one-fourth of a mile off Partridge Point ; and when within the entrance, steer for a low islet in the centre of the harbour, hearing W. by N., and anchor one-third of a mile from it. The Saints Channel, before described, is another entrance ; and when at its nortlierii part, bear along the N.E. side of Hunting Island, which is quite bold, instead of pro- ceeding east to St. Genevieve. On the west of Hunting Island is Puffin Bay ; and Charles hland, forming its western side, is 3 1 miles from Hunting Island. It is 3 miles long and IJ wide, and about 300 feet high. On its north side is Charles Harbour, which is narrow, but perfectly secure, with a depth of from 4 to 6$ fiithoms, with mud bottom. To enter Charles Harbour from Puffin Bay, bring the N.E. point of Charles Islaad, which is high and cliffy, to bear N.W., then steer for it, rounding it at a distance of 100 or 180 fathoms, bearing; to westward into the harbour. To enter from Trilobite Bay, to the N.W. of the island, and which affords excellent anchorage, sheltered from all but the south, give the N.W. point of the island a berth of from 60 to 140 fathoms, and bear round S.E. by E. into the harbour. CLEARWATER POINT is low, but the shoal water does not extend above one- quarter of a mile south of it. Its S.W. extreme is in lat. 50° 12' 35', and long. 63° 2T 4," ; and with Ammonite Point, 2 miles to the east, it forms a promontory, dividing the Mingan range. One mile and a half due west from Clearwater Point is a rocky 3-fathora shoal ; and there are three others with 2 fathoms, lying to the northward of the first, and in a line from the point towards Walrus Island : the outer and westernmost being rather more than 2 miles from the point. The leading mark for passing outside these shoals is, the south points of Gull and Fright Islands in one, bearing N.W. by W. Westward of this point are Walrus hland and Sea Cow hland, lying close together in a N.E. direction ; off the S.E. point of Sea Cow Island the reef extends three-quarters of a mile to the southward, and off Walrus Island for 200 fathoms. ESQUIMAUX ISLAND lies to the west of these, and is about 2} miles long, and 1} wide: off its S.E. point is Gull Island, half a mile distant, but no passage between; it is bold-to. On the S.W. side of Esquimaux Island there is a shoal extending towards Fright Island. SSQUXMAinB BARBOVS is on the north side of the island, between it and the main ; the depth is from 5 to 15 fothoras, sandy bottom, and it is nearly 1) mile long, in a N.W. | W. direction, between the N.E. and N.W. points of the island, which shelter it well, if vessels anchor well over toward the island. The best channels to it are between WalruB Island and Green hland, which lies one-third of a mile E.S.E. from Esquimaux Island, on the east, and between Fright and Quin Islands and Niapisca hland, on the west. The east pauage, the best with easterly winds, is three-quarters of a mile wide, and is clear and deep; and it is only necessary to keep the middle of it, bearing north towards the N.E. point of Esquimaux Island, which will bear in the centre of the channel, and haul round it, at a cable's length off, to the N.W., into the harbour. 104 NORTHERN SHORE OF THE GULF. Tlie west channel, between Niapiaca Island and Fright Island, is preferable to that between the latter and Esquimaux Island, leading north-eastward; having no leading marks, and reefs extending on either side, it is extremely dangerous, and should therefore not be attempted. In coming here with a westerly wind, the reefs off the south and east of Niapisca Island must be avoided ; to do this, do not open the N.W. point of Fright Island, clear of the south end of Quin Island, until Maniac bland, which is 9) miles N. i| E. of Niapisca Island, is in sight to the east of Niapisca, when you may bear round into the channel ; bearing N.N.E. i E. until Moutange hland, lying next west of Moniac Island, is open of the north point of Niapisca, when you will be clear of the reef on the east of that island ; then haul up, to clear the reef which projects half a mile W.N.W. from the north point of Quin Islana, until you open the N.E. point of Esquimaux, or the north point of Sea Cow Island, to the northward of Quin Islana; and then run in betwLon Quin island and Poinl aux Morti, towards the north point of Esquimaux Island, and haul round it south-east- ward into the harbour. Between Point aux Moris and Esquimaux Point there is shoal water, and to the west of the former there are some small islets, which vill be cleared by keeping the N. and N.E. points of Esquimaux Island in one, bearing S.E. \ E. ; if these are opened, before passing as far eastward as Quin Island, the vessel will be ashore. QuABRY Island is the next westward from Niapisca, and is about the same height ; it is divided from the latter by a channel with a small islet in it, but no safe passage for shipping. Off its south side there are some reefs extending one-third of a mile. On its north side is Quarry Cove, which is a small land-locked harbour, and easy of entrance ; the west side may be kepi close in entering, and anchor in the centre in or 10 fathoms. Laroe Island is divided from Quarry Island by a clear channel 400 fathoms wide, the water being shoal towards Large Island, and therefore in passing through it. Quarry Island, which is bold-to in its northern part, must be kept on board. The island is 4 miles long, and its highest part 200 feet above the sea : it is thickly wooded. The Birch Islands lie 2 miles to the west of Large Island. In a line with these two islands, and Harbour Island to the northward, is the Middle Reef, about a mile south of the Outer Birch Island, and within a line joining the south points of Large and Mingan Islands. A part of it always shows. To clear the eastern side of the shoal water around it, bring the eastern sides of the two Birch Islands in one. Between this reef and Large Island is Large Cuannel, which is the best channel to Mingan Harbour with an easterly wind ; and in passing through it, the only thing to be observed is, that the reefs extend to the westward, oif the shore of Large Island, from 3 to 3 cables' length, as far in as the Flower Pot Columns, a mile to the northward of its S.W. point, after which the island becomes bold. Further in, the Birch Islands form the western aide of the channel, at the distance of nearly 2 miles from Large Island. The easteri* side of the Outer Birch Island is quite bold, and the shoal water extends only 150 fathoms off the east end of the Inner Bircn Island. MINGAN ISLAND is 3^ miles westward of the (Inner Birch Island; the channel between, called Birch Channel, is all deep water, and is the best by which to proceed to Mingan Harbour with westerly winds. The island is nearly 2 miles long, and nearly 1 mile broad. It is about 100 feet high, and bare of trees. The shoal water does not extend above 300 fathoms off its south point, but to the S.W. and West, the reefs, including the islets, run out nearly 600 fothoms. The island is bold on its north and east sides. Mingan Patch lies S.W. } S., 3i miles, from the south point of Mingan Island, and with the south point of the Outer Birch Island on with the north point of Large Island ; it is a patch of rocky ground, with 9 fathoms least water, yet there is a very heavy swell on it at times. Perroquet Islands are four small islets, and are the westernmost of the Mingans. The easternmost of them are 2 miles distant N. by W. from the centre of Mingan Island, and have a reef of fiat limestone extending off them three-quarters of a mile to the S.S.W. The North-wettem islet has shoal water off it one-quarter of a mile, both to the east and west, but is clear at the distance of 200 fathoms to the northward. These islets are low and bare of trees, and are frequented by great numbers of puffins. MINOAN HAHBOUK. 105 __^^.__ i> between Harbour IiUnd, to ihe north of the Birch Islande, and the main, which ii low, and hat a fine landy beach. The harbour is about a mile long tod 270 fathoma wide, with plenty of water for the largest ships. Hakboue Island is two miles lonj(, and ils greatest breadth is not half a mile{ its shore is precipitous toward tiie harbour, about 100 feet high, and thickly wootled. Off the east and west ends of the island there ate reefs extending 240 fathoms from high-water mark. Northward of the east end of the island is the mouth of the Mingun River, off which there is a shoal, dry at low water, extending 700 fathoms from the entrance of the river, which protects the harbour from the effects of easterly winds. The river, turning towards the west, forms a peninsula, on the isthmus of which stand the houses of the Hudson's Bay £k>mpaDy's post, which is in charge of a "grand bourgeon,*' or chief factor, who preserves a strict monopoly of trade with the Indians. At the salmon fisheries here th« 6s|i are very fine, and in abundance. To enter this harbour from the eastward, bring the N. or inner side of Harbour Island to bear N.W., and the houses ousht then to appear fully open their own breadth to the north- ward of the island. Steer for the houses, thus open, leaving the east end of the island 150 ftthoma on your left, and taking care to keep the south side of the sandy point of the main, which fonna the western entrance of the harbour, shut in behind the north side of the island ; for when they are in one, you will be on shore on the sandy shoal of Mingan River. Pro* oied till you have arrived at th« centre of the harbour, keeping a cable's length off the north side of Uie island, and anchor any where in from 9 to 13 fathoms. In coming from the westward, run in towards the sandy beach of the maio>laud, at the distance of three-quarters of a mile to the W. of the island, until the sandy point, which forms the west end of the harbour, comes in one with the face of the clay cliffs to the £. of the Compimy's houses, bearing E* by S-, or in 1 1 fathoms water. Run in upon this bear- mg along the beach, and give the above sandy point a berth of half a cable, and anchor as 'oefore directed. Thie noLlhem sides of all the islands westward from NiapLsca Island are hold-to, so that the Mingan CAonne/, between them and the main, is clear and safe throughout ; on its north side is Mouiange hland, to the north of Quarry Island ; the shoals which extend between it and Moniac Island to the E.^ and which are nearly dry at low water, form the northern side of the channel, which it would be better not to approach nearer timn at a distance of 1 } mile from the opposite shore, or within 10 fathoms water. Alingan^ as well as EMuimaux Harbour, has this great advantage, that vessels can e^iler or leave them with eastJIy or westerly winds. The following obaervationa on thAs hacbow are by Mr. Jeffery, M.R.N. : — "The coast of Labrador, about Mingan, and eastward to the point called Mount Joli, is low, and nothing remarkable appears to point out, to any one unacquainted, the position of a ship. The small harbour of Ming \n 2^ well sheltered, with sufficient water for any vessel. Harbour Island, which forms the anchorage, is rather difficult to make out, being low, covered with trees, and very much jresembling the coast of the main. ** To a vessel bound for Mingan and coming round the west end of Anticosti, I should recommend steering for Mount St. John, which is the highest land on that part, and makes like a saddle. This witl lead you about 12 mites to the westward of the harbour^ and well clear of the Perroquets, or westernmost of the Mingan Islands. When within a mile and a half of tbe coast, nm along shore, by the lead, until you make out the harbour, ** Oq coming from the eastward, it may be advisable to run inside the islands, into .the Mingan Channel, as soon as possible after making the land ; any of the channels may be taken, with a little caution, ana the lead kept going. When you are through, you will see the houses of the Hudson Bay settlement: by keeping them their own leugth open, you will go in clear of the reef off the east end of Harbour Island. It is necessary to be very cautious in approaching the banks on the north side. The island is bold, and may !•» ^proached within 40 or 50 ftuhoms ; but you must open the west point on the iK>rth shore with the north point of the island, until you are well into the harbour. Hie anchorage is any where off tne houses. No supplies of any kind can be obtained, except wood and bad water. "The flood tide sets strongly through, between the islands and along the coast to the F ! I 106 NoirniERN shorr of the gulf. ■westward ; tlie ebb in the contrary direction. Lat. of Harbour Island r>0° 17' 30', long. 64" 2'." From Long Point, north of Mingan Island, a broad beach of fine sand reaches to the River St. John, the entrance to which lies nearly 6i miles N.N.W. | W. from the Per- roquet Islands ; and Mount St. John, an isolated saddle-backed hill, 1416 feet high, is 1 1 miles N.E. | N. from the entrance. It is frequented occasionally by fishing schooners, early in the season. At the entrance, between the clay cliffs on the west and a sandy point on the east side, the river is 130 fathoms wide ; it increases in breadth to neatly half a mile immediately within the entrance, and then gradually contracts. The tide ascends it about six miles, and the river then becomes too rapid to be navigated. There is good anchorage outside the bar, there being three fathoms at three-quarters of k mile from the mouth. The E. point of the entrance is in It divides the governments of Labrador and Canada, lat. 50° 17' 11', and long. 64° 23' 13".* From the River St. John to Magpie Point is W.N.W. 8 miles, and between them is Magpie Bay, in which there is good anchorage, in winds off the land. Three quarters of a mile west of the Magpie River, which is large and rapid, but of no use to boats, is a rocky shoal, a quarter of a mile offshore. Ridge Point is 3} miles W.N.W. H W. from Magpie Point, and from it there extends a long narrow ridge of rocky ground, with from 4 to 6 fathoms water, for 4 i miles to the westward, across a bay, and at times there fs a very heavy sea upon it. Satobill River is 23 miles westward of the River St. John ; it may be distinguished by the clay cliffs immediately within the entrance, and by the peculiar hills on either side of it. It will afford shelter to boats and very small craft, but it can only be entered in very fine weather. Shallop River is 7. J miles N.W. by W. from Sawbill River, and affords shelter only to boats. Off this and Sandy River, 2\ miles to the westward of it, there are some rocks, the outermost of which are half a mile off shore. The coast of this part is impregnated with iron, the black oxide of which is here found abundantly. It has a strong magnetic action on the compass on shore, causing it to vary from 14 to 29 degrees west; but at the distance of two or three miles, this error , does not exceed half a point, and at the distance of five or six miles it is insensible. Manitov River is the next to the westward, 4} miles N.W. |qr W. from Shallop River, it la Mie largest on the coast, excepting the rivers St. John and Moisic. It may be readily distinguished fVom a vessel several leagues off the coast, by two remarkable patches of clay cliff, one of which is close to the eastward, the other about one mile to the north- westward from it. The falls on this river, half a mile from the entrance, are of the most magnificent description. An immense sheet of water rushes over a precipice of porphyry, the height of which is 113 feet. There is good anchorage off this river, the entrance bearing N.E. ^ E. 1} mile distant, in 15 fathoms, over mud, and one mile from Manilou Point, the nearest point of the shore. Smaller vessels may anchor further in-shore, to the westward of the bar. The only danger is a small rocky shoal, bearing W. by N. 2^ miles from the enti^nce of the river, about three-quarters of a mile off shore. Baton River b lOf miles W.N.W. | W. from Manitou River, but is only fit for boatd or very small craft. Cope Cormorant lies 1^ mile west of it, and Blaskotvitz Point is 5 1 miles W.N.W. 4 W. from the latter, and between them are the Cormorant Itlett, off which is Cortnorant Reef, small and dangerous, lying 2^ miles W. } N. from the Cormorant Cape. To avoid this, vessels should keep Points Blaskowitz and St. Charles open of each oth^r, as when in one, bearing W.N.W., the mark is on the reef. PoiMT St. Charles is in lat. 50° 15' ^5', and long. 66° 48' 50". It is the eastern point of Moitic Bay, Point Moisic at the entrance of the Moisic River btiing the western, and 11 miles apart. .,(.■. * The coasts and islands of Labrador, from St. John's River to Hudson's Scrait, with the island of Anticosti, were rc>annexed to tlic iioverument of Newfoundland, in 1809, by Act of Parliament, 40 Geo. 111. c. 1^7. ofk SEVEN ISLANDS BAV. JO? Off the point is a dangerdus ree/, being so bold that there is no warning' by the lead : some of the rocks always show, but the outermost patches are always covered ; tliese last lie three-quarters of a mile off, to the S.S.W. from the south extreme of the point, and vessels should take care not to be becalmed to the westward of this reef| lest the heavy swell from the S.W., so frequent on this coast, should heave them toward the reef. Trout River is on the head of the bay, and is the termination of the rocky shores from the E. and the commencement of the bold sandy beach, which extends 6^ miles S.W. by W. to the River Moisic. The RIVER MOISIC is a larger river than the St. John, but is much obstructed by the sand-bars, which are formed by the great force with which the river descends ; there is usually not less than 9 feet least water on the bar. It is very bold-to off its mouth ; but from Point Moisic, the south point of the river, there is a shoal extends 2| miles W.S.W. ^ W. from the Point, to the Moiiic Rock, which is exceedingly dangerous. It is as bold as a wall to the S. and S.W., and can generally be seen in fine weather, from the change in the colour of the water, and from heavy breakers, when there is much sea running. There is no close leading mark for clearing this rock, but a vessel will be 1% mile from the edge of the shoal, when the N. side of the Manowin Island is on with the S. point of Great 3oule Island. SBVBN XS&AlfDS BAT*— The sandy point, which is the eastern point of the entrance of this magnificent bay, is 1 1 miles westward of Point Moisic. The Bay is completely sheltered by the Seven Islands lying off its entrance, which is 2i miles wide. A fine broad, bold, sandy beach extends for three miles northward from the east point of the Bay, to the entrance of the principal river, near which stands the Hudson's Bay Com-^ pany's trading post. The houses at this post cannot be seen from the outer parts of the Bay, but there is a wooden store on the beach, off which vessels usually anchor. Water can be obtained from this river at high tide. The SEV£N ISLANDS are high and steep, of primary rocks, very thinly wooded, and can be made out from a distance of 7 or 8 leagues, being unlike any thing else in the Gulf. The easternmost of these islands are the Great and Little Boule, the former of which is the highest of them all, its summit being 695 feet above the sea at high water; its south point bears west 9) miles from Point Moisic. The channel between these two islands is subject to bafHing winds, and the flood tide sets strongly to the west, and the elib to the eaS|, through it ; a circumstance that must be attended to in all the channels between the islands. The EaH Roekt, which are low and bare of trees, lie between Little Boule and the shoal to the N.£. ; they are out of the way of vessels, which ought not to go into this embayed place. The Little and Great Bafque hlands lie next to the Boules ; Great Basque, the inner island, is 500 feet high. ' Manowin and Carousel lie to the S.W. of the Basques : the former is 457 feet high; the latter much lower, and the southernmost of the islands ; its south extreme is in lat; 50° 5' 29", long. 66° 23' 35'. The ffeit Rocks lie between Manowin and ihe peninsula, which forms the west point of the Bay of the Seven Islands. They are too small and low to appear as the seventh island, but the peninsula has that appearance when seen at a distance from sea, being higher than any of the islands, and 737 feet above the sea at high water. There are three obvious channels into the bay, viz. the eastern, middle, and western channels : the eastern, between Great Basque and Sandy Point, is seldom used, having a rock in its centre, which is covered only in high tides. The principal and best is the middle channel, between the Basque Islands on the E. and Carousel, Manowin, and Point Chasii, the eastern point of the peninsula, and off which a reef runs out 120 fathoms from the shore. The course through it is due north, its breadth is 1| mile, and it is quite free from danger. ' - The west channel is also quite free from danger, and peiliaps, in N. or N.W. widds, is preferable, to save beating ; it is between the West Rocks and Point Croix, the south point of the peninsula. This point deflects the ebb tide towards the West Rocks, and this ought to be attended to. The peninsula is quite bold-to, and the mid-channel is nearer to it than the West Rocks: it is quite clear, and there arc no leading marks, nor are tliere any 106 NORTHEUN SHOIili: OF THfc GULF. II i > ! ; required for any of ihe channels. The ground is not fit for anchoring until well within the bay. Outside the islands the water ;« extremely deep, and their shores are quite bold.to. The stream of tides in the bay and in the principal channels seldom amounts to a knot ; but in the narrow channels it may amount to two knots in spring tides, when accelerated by strong winds. It is high water on the full and change days at 10 minutes past one ; spring tides rise 9 feet, neaps 8 feet. From the S.E. point of Carousel to Cape de Monts the bearing and distance are S.W. by W. } W. (S, W. I S."] 60 miles. The coast between is less bold in appearance than that to the eastward, and there are no detached rivers off it. St. Margaret River is 6 miles N.W. by VV. from Point Croix, nearly at the head of St. Margaret Bay ; it affords shelter to boats only. The Cawee Islands lie S.W. by W. ^ W. 16 miles from St. Margaret Point} they are two small hilly islands, nearly bare of trees. Great Cawee Island is the largest and eastern- most, and about 250 feet high. Little Cawee Island is a mile to the S.W. of it, and is composed of two islets. There is a bay on the inner or N.W. side of Great Cawee, in the mouth of which there is anchorage at a cable's length from the island. It is an intricate and dangerous place, but may be of great use as a place of refuge in case of distress. In making for it from the ea<{tward, steer N.W. past the N.E. side of Great Cawee Island, keeping half a mile off, to avoid the shoal off the mouth of the cove, until the point of the main land to the westward opens clear of the north side of the island. When you arrive between the rocks a' id the island, which you will come to by steering for the point of the main land, keeping it mid- way between the north side of the island and these rocks, which lie to the northward of it, haul into the mouth of the small bay, which is on the N.W. side of the latter, and anchor ' in 7 fathoms at low water. This anchorage may become at from the westward, by keeping in mid-channel between Little Cawee and the main ; but it would be better to pass between Great and Little Cawee Islands, hauling close round the west point of the latter into the anchorage. The tides run through between the island and the main at a rate seldom exoeeding 1 1 knot) and ^nerally much less. Lobster Bay is an excellent open roadstead, between Point Sproule, three-quarters of a mile north-westward of Little Cawee Island, and the Crooked lilands, three miles to the Westward of the point; the head of the bay is occupied by an extensive flat, but there is plenty of room for the largest ships. Pentecott Biaet is 1 ) mile to the westward of Crooked Island ; it would afferd shelter to small vessels, but is difficult of entrance. Engliih Point is 7 miles S.W. of Pentecost River, and has a shoal extending off it to the distance of ene-tbird of a mile. It is bold-to on the S.E. and east. Egg Island is 14 miles S.W. } W. from Great Cawee Island. It is low and narrow, without trees, at^d three-quarters of a mile long in a N.N.E. | E. direction ; off each end of the Mdttnd a reef of rocks extends, forming a natural breakwater, 1) mile long, the northerti end ef which is three-quarters of a mile off short, and the southern end nearly a mile. Opposite the N. end of the island, the breadth of the channel it contracted by a shoal extending from the main ; on the S.W. part of this narrow part is the best anchorage. The passage to this from the S. and W. is quite bold, and no directions are necessary ; but if it be intended to run through between the island and the main, stand in to the north- ward, to 8 or 9 fathoms, or until English Point is open half a point to the northward of die North Rocks; then steer for English Point, giving toe inner side of the North Rocks a berth of a cable's length, until you have passed them a foil quarter of a mile ; you may then haul out to sea, going nothing to the southward of S.E. by E. to avoid the N.E. reef. The tides running between the island and the main are generally from half to one knot, and part of both the stream of ebb and flood passes through the narrow and dangerous three-fitthom channel between the island and the North Rocks. Calumet River is 3^ miles W. by S. from the S.W. end of Egg Island. There are reefs to the S.W. of the entrance for a mile, and extending 600 fathoms from the shore. Ctiribou TRINITY BAY. " 109 PoM is 8) miUt S.W. by S. from £gg Island, and affords shelter for the pilot-boats, which often look out for vessels here. TRINITY BAY is five miles further south-westward, and affords excellent anchorage: it is a very valuable stopping-place, in westerly winds, for vessels bound up the St Law- rence, and at these times pilots are generally found waiting to take vessels upward ; but in easterly winds they take shelter in St. Augustin C!ove, 1 ^ mile westward of the Cape. On the N.E. point of the bay are two large rocks ; there is no passage between them, and the northern one dries to the main in spring ebbs. The southern rock lies nearly a quarter of a mile to the southward of the point The bay is 3 J miles round, from point to point. A river, which falls into it, will supply fresh water; and there is another stream at half a mile to the westward of the western point. Wood is abundant. To anchor, come>to at half a mile to the eastward of the west point, on which stands a cross, in from 9 to 5 fathoms, and with the point bearing W.S.W. or S.W. by W. Small vessels may anchor in S fathoms, at low water, just within the reef, the western point of the bay bearing S.W. At three-quarters of a mile S.W. from the point on which the cross is placed^ is a ledge of rocks, dry at low water, and which should not be approached nearer than to the depth of 4 fathoms. The coast between Cape de Monts and this bay is indented with small sandy coves, and in the interval are three large rocks, always above water, which will be avoided by not approaching nearer than in 8 fathoms. Tiie light-house on Point de Monts is 5 miles to the south-westward of Trinity Bay. It is a mile and a quarter N.E. by E. i E. from the extremitv of the cape, and bears S. 52" W. from the outer part of Caribou Point, over which, and eastward of it, the light may be seen. The light tower is of the usual form, nearly white, and the lantern is elevated at about 100 feet above the level of the sna, and exhibits a bright fixed light Ships from the eastward, approaching the light-house, on drawing towards Caribou Point, may bring it to bear W. by S., when they will be in a good fair-way, and may, if requisite, advance toward the land, by the lead. But after passing Caribou Point, on drawing toward the light-house, they should come no nearer than in 12 fathoms ; for thus they will avoid two ledges of rocks, one of which lies E.S.E. from the light-house, with only 12 feet over it ; the other lies S.W. from the light-house, and E.S.E. from the extremity of Cape de Monts, with 16 feet over it These rocks are aot mote than half a mile from shore at low water. When a ship is to the westward of the Cape de Monts, the light-house will appear in one with the outermost rocks of the same, and the cape will be in one, bearing N.E. by E. I B., and from this line of bearing vesselsare in the best fair-way for proceeding up or down the river. You may, if it be required, safely approach the north shore, until the light-house bears E. by N. ; but when it bears £. | N. it will be time to tack. When beftring east, it will be shut in vrith the high land, and cannot be seen to the southward of east, at only & mile firom the land. V.--THE SOUTH SHORE OF THE ENTRANCE TO THE RIVER, FROM CAPE ROSIER TO CAPE CHATTE, This coast is bold and high, quite dear from dangers, and affords no harbour, or scarcely any shelter for vessels. The water is deep all along, and will not give any warning in approadiing the coast by the lead ; it must tlierefore be guarded against during fogs, or in the nij^t, more especially as the downward current of the river sets over to the south side from Cape de Monts. The land generally rises from the water's edge into round high hills at the back, and the whole is covened with trees. Cape Rosier is about two leagues to the northward of Cape Gasp^. It is a rugged, rockv point, and the shore to Cape Gasp€ is very steep, yi'itii high perpendicular cliffs. To the S.W. of Cape Rosilr, about a quarter of a mile, is a fine sandy bay, with good anchoring ground, decreasing in depth from 14 to 7 fathoms toward the beach, and sheltered from S.W. to N.W. winds. There are several fishing establishments on it, and in the Tichaity. T 1 10 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE RIVER ST. LAWRENCE. Griffin's Cove is 6} miles W.N.W. from Cape Rosier. The north point of its. entrance is bluir, and it has several houses within it. It will aflford shelter to small vessels with a west wind, but it is open to the north. Five miles further is Great Fox River, off which a vessel might anchor in fine weather : it may be known by the extent of the settlement on its banks, particularly on the southern side. Great Pond River, or Ame de VEtang, 16 miles N.W. \ N. from Great Fox River, will afford shelter to shallops ; it may be known by a remarkable high, wooded, conical hill or the east side, and by a beach with a few huts and stages on the west. Some of the people of the parish of St. Thomas, on the Riviere du Sud, 33 miles below Quebec^ frequent this place during the cod-fishing season. The river issues from several lakes, one of which is only half a mile through the woods from the fish stages. Fishermen also frequent the Grande Vallee, or Great Valley River, the Magdalen River, Mont Louis River, St. Anne's and Cape Chatte, during summer ; but there appears to be no permanent settlers, those of .St. Anne excepted, until we reach Matane. Magdalen River is a considerable stream, and in the bay, at the mouth of it, a vessel can anchor in fine weather, and sometimes schooners warp into the river itself. It is 24 miles from Great Pond and 16 miles from Mont Louis River, which is a much smaller stream ; the small Hy, into which it falls, affords anchorage to vessels nearer the cast than the west side. Cape St. Anne is 26 miles further westward, in the rear of which are the St. Anne Mountains, the highest of which is 14 miles behind Cape Chatte, and is 3970 iieet above the sea ; it is the highest land in British North America. St. Ann River is 6 miles west of the cape, and can be entered by small schooners at high water. A few families are settled here, and also at Cape Cfiatte River, who willingly render assistance to such as require it. Cape Chatte is & remarkable hummock, like a short sugar loaf, on a point which is lower than the land about it. Its extremity is in lat. 49"* 6', and long. 66° 45' 19'. At about three miles to the S.E. of it is a small river of the same name. The land over Cape Chatte is very mountainous, and is much broken at the top ; hence it may be readily known, as there is ^no land presenting similar features in any other part of the river. VI.— GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE RIVER. "The River of St. Lawrence, and the whole country from the lowest parishes to Quebec, unfold scenery, the magnificence of which is considered to be unequalled in America, and probably in the world. "It is impossible to travel along the road, near the river, without observing most evident traces of higher levels of the river than the present one ; the rocks are actually worn as evidently as at the present high water mark ; and many of the sharp points of the lower ones show, to conviction, that they were once small rocks in the St. Lawrence or the ocean ; and that the now cultivated flat between the first ridge, being the river boundary, and the second ridge, formed, at no very remote period, a part of the St. Lawrence, or of the ocean. *' The southern shores are thickly settled by the descendants of the French, who, at different times, emigrated to Canada ; and the manners and customs of their ancestors are tenaciously preserved. The villages and parishes have a general similarity of appearance ; and although some of them are more extensive and much more populous than others, yet one description is sufficient for all. They assuredly seem to be the very abodes of simplicity, virtue, and happiness. In travelling, we pass along delighted through a beautiful rural country with clumps of wood interspersed, amidst cultivated farms, pastures, and herds ; decent parish churches, and neat white houses or cottages. The inhabitants are not only civil, but always polite and hospitable. Beggary and the squalid beings of other parts of the United Kingdom are here unknown." The first arrival at Quebec, in the season of 1833, was on the 9th of May ; but it was not till the end of the month that the harbour exhibited its spring appearance of a forest of masts, or that the wharfs and streets of the lower town displayed that scene of activity which characterises it as a great commercial port. In the vicinity o/ Gasps the spring is commonly from a fortnight to three weeks later ! thi tH thJ col ST. NICOLAS HAHB19UR. Ill than at Quebec : and this is attributed, not so murh to the increase of latitude, as to the proximity of the sea, with its ices. Here, on the 9th of June, 1833, the thermometer fell to the freezing point, with showers of snow and sleet, and a heavy gale from the north. Some remarkable instances have been given of ignorant commanders venturing up the river, in thick weather, without sufficient precaution or taking soundings; and one was discovered who, by his reckoning, supposed himself by Cape Chatte, when he was actually 130 miles out of his reckoning, westward, in a space of 360, after having, four days before, seen the west end of Anticosti."' , Anne above or of THE NORTH SHORE FROM CAPE DE MONTS TO THE SAGUENAY RIVER. The next projecting point, westward of Cape de Monts, is Point St. Nkolat, bearing W. by N. 17i miles. Three miles N.E. by E. from this headland is Havre St. Nicolas, or St. Nicolas' Harbour: between these| places, and 6^ miles eastward of St. Nicolas, is a little river, called Godbret or Goodboot River, where the Hudson's Bay Company have a trading post, and where, therefore, provisions may occasionally be obtained, but it affords no shelter. This place may be known by the fall of the land on the east, and clay cliffs on the west. , ST. mOOXiAS' BARBOV&i — At the entrance of this harbour vessels may occasionally find shelter from vvesterly windii. The land about it is mountainous ; and, if XI ship be to the westward of the harbour, and bearing up for it, the entrance may be distinguished from the circumstance of its having all the land on the west dry and barren, the wood being burnt from the mountains ; but, on the east side, the mountains are green and covered with trees. To enter, run boldly in, between the burnt cape and the green one, steering North, and the low point, which forms the west side of the entrance, will appear like an island : this point has a wooden cross on it, which will be «een on steering toward it. The eastern side of the entrance is limited by a reef, one- quarter of a mile long, which stretches S. W. from the green cape ; opposite to this reef, on the western side, is another; both dry at low water, but the largest is always to be seen. The anchorage is a little to the northward of the stream of the easternmost reef, in from 12 to 6 fathoms^ The distance between the points of the two reefs is about 1 mile; both are bold; 10 fathoms being close to the eastern, and 4 to the western, reef. Small vessels may haul alongside the rock, just within the entrance on the west side, in 10 feet at low water. At about 100 yards within the cross above mentioned, a bar commences, which extendi thence across the entrance, and has only 10 feet over it at low ebbs. This part is only two ships' length in breadth at low water, but the harbour widens inward to a large basin, where vessels can lie perfectly land>locked iti from 10 to 12 fathoms of water, good ground, and on the S.W. side the water is deep close up to the rocks: this place is, however, a bad outlet for ships bound to the westward, as an easterly wind blows directly in, and the land around being mountainous, there is no getting in or out, in a square-rigged vessel, with canvas set Those who proceed to the basin, must keep their canvas set, and borrow close round the point on which the cross is erected; then shoot in as far as they can, and down with the anchor. To warp in, keep the western side on board. The banlc to the southward of the eastern reef, and all along the shore, is very steep ; there is a depth of 50 fathoms at about 500 yards from it. Near the reef, in 20 fathonas^ cod-fish are generally abundant. At St. Nicolas' Harbour the tide flows, on the full and change days, at 1 h. 55 m; Spring-tides rise 12 feet; neaps 7 feet. The flood, of spring-tides, runs to the westward about two miles an hour, and thus along-shore up to the Saguenay River. EriglUh Baif is 11) miles W.N.W. from Cape St. Nicolas. It affords no anciior* age. On its western side is St, Giles* Point, opposite the north-eastern point of the Peninsula of Manicougan, and which is the termination of the bold ^nd rocky -coast to the eastward of it, while that to the west of it is low and wooded ; and this circumslai^ce • In the descripUon of the lower part of the river, with Gasp^ Bay, &c., we have been consi- derably assisted by the instructions published by Nath. Gould, Esq., chairman of the North American Colonial Association : to the 'same gentleman we are indebted for these remarks on the rlvci- In general. ^ 112 AfANICOUGAN BAY. I I will enable a vessel to ascertain tier position on the coast, whether to the east or west of this part, and of her approach to the dangerous Manicougan shoals. MAlR0OVIi4kSr BAT and SHOALS.— This dangenus bay is 11 miles W. by N. from Point St. Nicolas. The shore between is bold and rocky ; the land high, and the water deep. The flood-tide sets strongly into the bay, and the ebb strongly out. The land forming the western point of the hay is much lower than any other near it, and may be readily known by its yellowish sand and clay clifis, with a fine beach, and very flat for more than two miles ofl*. The east end of the great shoal of Manicougan lies 11^ miles West from Point St. Nicdas. This end is of rocks, terminating in a spit, and dries at low water. The S.W. point of the Bay, called Manicougan Point, is 17^ miles W. by S. from Point St. Nicolas. From Manicougan Point the land thence westward trends in a curve, 12 miles, to Outarde or Buttard Pointy at the mouth of the Outarde River, and the great shoal borders the whole, to the distance of 9^ miles from shore. The tide of ebb and flood sets along its ed^es, but is nrt perceptible at more than 5 or 6 miles off* sliore ; and on that part, off Manicougan Point, is a great ripple. On the shore, within the shoal, the tides ebb one mile from high- water mark, and heavy breakers are seen on its edges, with high reefs of rockc. To the westward of the Land of Manicougan are the River and Bay of OUTARDE. The latter is terminated by Point Beniantita or Bertimit, which is sandy and covered with trees, and the whole is lined with extensive and dangerous shoals. Ships, in rouudii^ Bersimis Point, should advance no nearer to it than two miles, as tlie shoal surrounding »l is steep-to. Ships being up to Bersimis Point with the wind at west, and flood-tide, may cross over thence to Famer Point, and engage a pilot for the river. Should the wind be at S.W. by W., keep the north land on board until sure of fetching the point. In Outarde Bay the ebb-tide is slack, and the flood strong. Ships may always get ground in the bay, but should stand in no nearer than two miles from shore. llie MmUcougan, and Outarde or Buttard, are very large rivers, but unfortunately tlieir navigation is much interrupted by falls at a short distance from the St. Lawrence. The water of the Outarde is entirely white, occasioned by lari;e quantities of impalpable sand and clay being held in suspension ; and the vessel, in sailing through it, by displacing the superfuual stratum of lighter and fresh water, fiill of these earthy particles, leaves in her wake a dark blue streak, which may be traced as far as the eye can reach. This sand and clay are the deposit of the rivers, which, in the course of ages, have formed the alluvial ?minsula of Manicougan, and also the dangerous and extensive shoals of the same name, he Bieer Bertimis is navigable for small vessels as far as ten miles from the entrance, and it can be ascended to the falls, nearly 40 miles, but it would be diflicult for a sailing vesseJ to reach as far. Jeremie Itland is 6 miles westward of Point Bersimis, the sandy coast extending between them. On the main, opposite the island, is a post of the Hudson's Bay C!ompany, the houses of which may be seen very plainly from within the distance of 6 miles. Cape Colombier is 5 miles westward of Jeremie, and off it is the Gulnare Shoal, dis- covered by Captain Bayfield in 1830. It is a narrow ridge of granite rock, nearly 2 miles long, parallel to the shore, and having from 2 to 3 &thoms over it at low water. Baie de Laval is 8 miles westward of Cape Colombier. Laval Island is in the mouth of the bay, and all within it is dry at low water. Vessels may approach this bay to within 6 fathoms depth, but to the eastward, between fFild Fowl Keefand the Gulnare Shoal, the coast ought not to be kept closer than in 30 fathoms. Port Neuf is another settlement of the Hudson's Bay Company, the buildings of which are readily seen. It may be known by a range of remarkable clay clifis, like chalk cliff's, between it and the Baie de Lav«d, the only land of this appearance in the river, and which, therefore, is a sure mark. Point Mille Vachet is 4 miles 8.W. from Port Neuf; it is low and sandy, and the shoals off it contract the navigable breadth of the river, between it and Bioquette, to 11| miles. The N.W. reef of fiicquette bears from the point S.S.E. } E. 12| miles. To the west of it is the Bate de Mille Vacha, which is filled with shoals of sand and rock, the western parts of which are deep and dangerous. The bay extends to the Et^fuewin hies, 1 2 miles S.W. f W. from the point. -„.^iii. THE SAGUENAY UIVEK. 113 west of sW.by and the jt. The md may y flat for Point St. fhe 8,W. Nicolas. I Outarde he whole, id^es, but inicougan rem high- TARDE. d covered I rouuding rounding *t cross over It S.W. by always get nately tlieir ence. The Ipable sand iplacing the aves io her lis sand and the alluvial same name, ntrance, and ailing vesseJ ling between ompany, the e Shodf dis- early 2 miles ir. th« motttfi of r to within 6 ire Sboal, the ingt of which ;e chalk cliffs, sr, and which, and the shoals ,(oll|n)les. of sand and >the Etqmmin ■■ The coast west of this is bold and free from danger, but has no shelter. TBB SAOUBMJLV RZVSa enters the St. Lawrence between Lark Point on the west, and Point Vaches on the east, opposite Red Island, 33 r les westward of the Esquemin Isles. This extraordinary rivei which was imperfectly known till the late surveys, is as remark- able for the great volume of water which it brings down to the St. Lawrence, as for the enormous depth of its bed, wliich is fully 100 fathoms lower than that of the St. Lawrence. It comes from the Lake St. John, and at Chicoutimi, a trading post of the Hudson's Bay Company, which is 65 miles above its mouth, it becomes navigable, and 6 miles above which, to the rapids, the tide ascends. To Point Roches, 57 miles from the St. Lawrence, and 8 miles below Chicoutimi, it is navigable for the largest ships ; and up to this part there is no danger in the river, the shores consisting of steep precipices, some of the head- lands rising more than 1000 feet in height. The current runs down with great force, the ebb-tide varying from 3 to 5 knots, according to the breadth of the river, which is from two-thirds of a mile to 2 miles. At the mouth of the river, this ebb-tide runs at the rate of 7 knots over Lark Islet Spit, and the S.W. extreme of Point Vaches. Tadousac, which is in the entrance of the river, was formerly the principal post of the French, fur trading with the Indians. It has declined, and now belongs to the Hudson's Bay Company. The harbour is off the settlement, a mile within Point Vaches, and is well sheltered ; but a heavy anchor should be cast close in-shore, on account of the eddies which sometimes set into it from the river. Across the mouth of the river there is 18 to 20 fathoms, but immediately within, the depth increases to above 100. The current setting strongly over this bar, meeting with the spring ebbs of the St. Lawrence, cause breaking and whirling eddies and ripplings; and these streams opposed to a heavy easterly gale, cause an exceedingly high, cross, and breaking sea, in which no boat could live. On the flood at such times, there is no more sea than in other parts of the river. To enter the Saguenay, have the beginning of the flood, and sufficient daylight to reach Tadousac. Winds from the S.W. southward to N.E., will take vessels into the river with the flood, but the N.E. is most to be depended on ; but whether you approach from the S.W. or N.E., bring the western points of the Brandy Pots and White Island in one, and open to the southward of Hare Island, bearing S.S. W. ^ W. Run upon this mark (and it will lead you well clear of the Vachet Patch and Lark Reefs, off the mouth of the river,) until La Boule Point comes in one with Point Hot, bearing N.W. by W. } W., which will clear the S.W. side of Point Vaches Reef; Point Hot being the rather low N.W. point of the Harbour of Tadousac, and La Boule, a high and round-backed hill, forming a steep headland, 4 miles above Tadousac, and the extreme point seen on the same side of the river. Haul in for the last-named leading mark, keeping the S.W. extreme of La Boulg just open, which will clear all dangers ; and when as far in as Point Rouge, bear towards the trading post, into the harbour, dropping your outer anchor in 16 fathoms, and the inner one close to, or within, low water mark. THE SOUTH SHORE BETWEEN CAPE CHATTE AND GREEN ISLAND. Between Cape Chatte and Matane, in a distance of 11 leagues, the shore is all bold and bound with rocks. In proceeding up the river, after passing Cape Chatte, the first place of remark is Matane River, distinguished by a large square white house, and a long barn level on the top. This place may be known from within the distance of 3 miles, by its houses and a bluff cliff, close to the entrance on the western side. Many pilots live here. The River of Matane admits small crafl only. The chief settlements occupy both banks, and extend about one mile from its mouth. The two remarkable mountains, called the Paps of Matane, stand inland to the westward of Matane River, and form the grand mark for this part of the coast. At 7i leagues to the westward of M:i;ane River, is the western point of Littli: Metis Bay, a spot surrounded by rocks, excepting the entrance, and in which small vessels may find shelter from westerly winds, in 3 fathoms at low water. The coast from Matane to Little Metis is entirely barren. Little Metis is situate on a long, low, flat, and rocky point* Q /T= 114 CAPE CHATTE TO GREEN ISLAND. with several white houses, extending about a cable's length to the N.E. This is noticed an a guide to the anchorage at Grattd Melit^ which is 5 miles farther westward. On opening the bay, (say close in-shore,) a square house will be first observed, near the water side ; a mile farther, in the S.W. corner, up the bay, in the same view, will be seen the upper part only of a house, which is the establishment of Orand Metii. A vessel may close in with Little Metis Point into 6 or 7 fathoms of water, and run for Grand Metis, by the lead, in from 5 to 8 fathoms. Should the vessel be turning up, on the north shore, or in mid-channel. Mount Camille, which will be seen, should be brought to bear S.W. by S., which will lead from sea to the bay.* The cove of Grand or Great Metis is nearly dry at low water. A small vessel may bring up here in 3 fathoms, with the wind from S.W., but with a west wind it affords no shelter. The points that form these coves are very low, and cannot be distinguished beyond the distance of 2 leagues. Great Metis has a large rock in the middle of the cove, Little Metis has none ; and the latter may be known from the former, by observing that a round bluff rock lies at its entrance, on the eastern side ; not far from which, on the east, is a small hill on the mountain, in the form of a sugar-loaf. Grand Metis has risen into notice from the erection of saw mills. The mills are on a fall of the river, about three miles up. The river is a small stream, greatly impeded by rapids when not swelled by freshes ; and it has been found necessary to dam it with wicker- work and mud for a considerable distance, to keep back water enough to float the logs down to the mill. From the mill the deals are floated down a dalt or trough to the basin, for shipment ; part of the distance being cut through soil and rocks 14 feet deep. The deals produced are spruce, and a very superior yellow pine. At about half a mile from the debouche of the river is a rocky islet, forming a secure and picturesque basin. Over the sand bar, at the entrance of this basin, is a depth of 14 or 15 feet at low water, and ample room for two vessels to lie stem and stern of each other. The passage in is buoyed. The tide here, on the full and change, flows at ten minutes past two o'clock, and rises from 12 to 14 feet. With a ship of great draught it is advisable to lie in 6 fathoms at low water, with the house at the east side of the River Metis open to the eastward of the islet in the bay, so that the river may be seen between them. 7%e high land of Bic will then be jutt clear of Cape Orignal ; some of the houses of Little Metis will be seen, and Mount Camille will bear S.S.W. ; in such a mooring the swell is broken before it comes in by the shore. The ground, being clay, is excellent for anchorage; and, with one anchor to the eastward, and another to the westward, the vessel will ride in perfect security. From hence, along the shore, will be observed, at great distances, the small white houses of the inhabitants, which are mostly occupied by pilots or fishermen, who ^ave cultivated small patches of land around them. Occasionally, when, from a wet summer, the harvest of the westward has failed, these small farmers reap a benefit by the greater backwardness of their seasons. Between Great Metis and the next inlet, named Cock Cove, will he seen the high land of Mount Camille. The bearing and distance between the Coves are W. by S. Si leagues ; and, from Cock Cove to the projecting land of Father Pointy W. | S., 4J miles. Here will be seen a number of houses ; this place being the regular rendezvous for the pilots. Barnaby Island presents .lothing remarkable. A reef extends from each end of it, under which small vessels may find shelter. Between the island and the main the bank is dry at low water, but there is a depth of 14 feet over it at high water of spring-tides. With neap-tides only 9 feet. At the little River Ottetf, 5 miles S.W. from Barnaby Island, fresh water may be obtained. At a distance of 3 miles to the westward of the Ottey, the coast forms the Harbour of Bic, which affords shelter to small vessels from westerly winds. Two round islets mark the eastern side of it, and it is one mile from them to the western side of the harbour. The anchorage is midway between these and the west side, in 3 fathoms, the western point bearing west. f * Mount Camille it 6| miles inland fVom ihe nearest shore. Its summit is 8<^ of the sea. feet above the level liced as pening Bide; a per part run for , on the >ught to ay bring » shelter, rond the le Metis ind bluff mall hill are on a peded by li wicker, t the logs he basin, ep. The >cure and 14 or 15 her. The and rises r, with the le bay, so i«( clear of amille will lore. The (ward, and liite houses cultivated the harvest :kwardness e high land . by S. Si .,4^ miles. ir the pilots. ;h end of it, the bank is ides. With island, fresh Harbour of 1 islets mark rbour. The restern point bove the level OREEN ISLAND. 115 Nearly 3 miles west from Biu Harbour, and at the same distance south from Die Island; is Cape On'gmil, or Arignolt. From this cape a reef extends one mile E. by N. The high land of Jiic lies S.W. by S., 21 miles from the N.W. extremity of the cape; it is very remarkable wlien seen up or down the river, as it consists of high and narrow ridges, parallel with the coast, tite summit being 1234 feet above the sea. The ISLE BIC is of moderate height, and covered with trees. This island is 3 miles in length, from east to west, and reefs extend from it to the east, west, and north. At three- quarters of a mile from the north side, is the islet called Bicquette, which is also woody. Bicquelte is quite bold on the north side, and there are 30 fathoms at a musket-shot from it ; but within the extent of a mile and a quarter to the west of it is a chain of reefs, which are dangerous. Between Bic and Bicquette there is a passage, but it is intricate ; there are no marks for it, and it will be best understood from the chart. A lighthouse has been erected on the west end of the island of Bicquette, in the River St. Lawrence, and a revolving light of the first class was shown thereon for the first time, on the 9th August, 1844 ; and the light will continue to be shown every night from sunset (o sunrise, from the 15th April to the 15th December, in each year. The tower is 70 feet high, and the light stands 130 feet above the level of the sea, the north-west reef bearing from it due West, 1 1 mile. This light will revolve at regulated intervals of two minutes. A nine-pounder gun is placed near the lighthouse, and will be fired every hour during foggy weather and snow storms. The S.E. Reef extends 1} mile E. by S. from the S.E. point of Bic Island, and the channels between the rocks and the bland should not be attempted. The N.K Reef, a small patch of black rocks, lies N. W. ^ W. above a mile from the former, and 400 fathoms N.E. by E. from the N.E. point of the island. The West Grounds of Bic are an extensive flat of slate, which partly dries at low water, the outer point of which is three-quarters of a mile W. } S. from the west point of the island. The Alcides Rock, on which the ship of that name struck in the year 1760, has only 4 feet over it, and bold-to. This rock lies at a mile and three-quarters from the shore, with the west end of the Isle Bic bearing N.E. d| miles, and Cape Orignal E. J N. 4| miles. Ten fathoms of water lead to the northward of it. At a mile and a half from shore, and 14 i miles S.W. by W. { W. from the west end of Bic, lies the N.E. of two islets called the Razaoes ; these are two large rocks always above water. They bear from each other nearly S.W. and N.E., one mile and a half distant. Ten fathoms of water lead to the northward of them. Basque Island, a small narrow isle, extending one mile and a quarter E.N.E. and W.S.W., bears W.S.W. 5 miles from the N.E. Razade, and S.W. by W. i W. 20 miles from the west end of Bic : it appears round ; is bluff, and covered with trees. There are no houses on it ; extending to the N.W. from its west end, is a ledge of rocks, dry at low water, and steep-to. Apple Isle, a narrow barren islet, with rocks, lies at 3 miles W.S.W. i W. from the west end of Basque, and 2} miles from shore. Between it and the land there is no passage. GREEN ISLAND.— This island, with the reefs that project from each end of it, is 2} leagues in extent from N.E. by E. to S.W. by W. Two families reside upon it. The most remarkable object on it, is a lighthouse which stands on its northern side, at about 1 J mile from the N.E. end, and which shows a fixed light at 60 feet above the level of low water mark.* The bearing and distance of Basque Island from the lighthouse, are E.N.E. ^JB. 8} miles: and from the lighthouse to the extremity of the S.W. reef of Green Island, S.W. by W. 5i miles. There is no other danger on the north side of the island than a dan- gerous reef, which extends from the lighthouse 1^ mile N.N.E. ) E. This ledge is a * This lighthouse, according to an official notice, dated 21st Sept., 1809, will exhibit a light, nightly, from sunset to sunrise, from the 15th day of April to the 10th day of December, inclusive. From the lighthouse the extremity of Green Island Reef liears N.E. by N. one mile and a quarter ; and the extremity of the shoal at the west end of the island, S.W. by W. 6| miles; Apple Isle, E.N.E. 5 miles; the islet called Red Isle, in the middle of the river, M.W. by W. I W. 51 miles ; and the Brandy Pots, near Hare Isle, S.W. by W. i W. 15 miles. lifT^ 116 DESCRIPTION OF THE RIVER. reef of rocks which are steep-to, and covered at high water of spring-tides. The other part is 8te«p-to aod rocky.* The ledge of Green Island, Basque Island, and the high land to the southward of Cape Orignal, in a line bear E.N.E. i E. To ships, on coming up and going down the river, the lighthouse appears like a ship, and very conspicuous. In llie nigiit the light may be distinctly seen at the distance of five leagues. The reef from the west end of Green Island dries to the distance of a mile from the island. The westernmost part is detached from the body of it, and the tide sets through the interval toward Cacona. This part is covered at a quarter flood. THE DESCRIPTION OF THE RIVE^ CONTINUED. Red Island lies in the middle of the estuary, off the mouth of the Saguenav River, and bears N.W. by W. ^ W. nearly 5) miles from the lighthouse on Green Islanijf. It has a low, flat islet, of a reddish colour, without trees, and partiaHv covered with grass. The reef, which extends 2} miles to the N.E. and is )| mile wide, is nearly dry in some parts at low water; the eastern extremity of this reef bears nearly N.W. by N. from the light- house. The depth decreases gradually on its eastern end, but the islet is bold-to on the S.W. ipbe eastern end of the reef is quite cleared by keeping the lighthouse and beacon on Green Island in one, bearing S.S.E. ^ E.f Lark Reef, on the north side of the River, lies opposite to the western point of Green Island, bearing N.W. 8 miles from it, contracting the navigation of the river to this breadth. It is at the S.E. extremity of a shoal, extending from Lark Point, the western point of the entrance of the Saguenay Riv<>r, as before described, and which bears N.-by W. 3 miles from it. The space between it and the shore dries at low water, nearly out to the point ; this can be avoided, as well as those to the N.E. of it, lying off the mouth of the river, by keeping the western sides of the Brandy Pots and White Island in one, and open to the southward of Hare Island, bearing S.S.W. J W.; but this mark is distant, and cannot always be seen. The NORTHERN SHORE of the River, from the Saguenay to Coudres Island, is bold and mountainous. The granitic hills in- most parts rise immediately from the river, forming steep precipitous headlands. Near the entrance of the Saguenay these hills are not above 1000 feet high, but those of the Eboulemens attain an elevation of 2547 feet above the tide- waters of the river. Cape Basque is the first mountainous headland S.W. of the Saguenay, bearing S.W. I S. 6i miles from Lark Point ; and about 1| mile northward of it is the Echafaud elu Basque, a small rocky islet in the mouth of a cove, and bearing 4| miles W. by S. from the S.E. extreme of Lark Reef, the shoal of which extends as far as this place. Basque Road is a well-sheltered anchorage lying off this, the best position being with the Echafaud bearing W.N.W. rather less than a mile distant, in 10 or 11 fathoms over clay bottom. Bay of Rockt is about 2} miles south-westward from Cape Basque, and affords shelter only to boats. Cape Does, 5^ miles S.W. } S. of Cape Basque, is quite bold and high ; and similar to it is Cape Snlmon, which is S.W. ^ S. 9} miles distant from* it. Further to the westward, about 1 J mile, is Port Salmon, which, like Port Parsley and Kettle Port, to the eastward, are only boat harbours. The settlements are nearly continuous on the banks from hence to Quebec. Cape E(^le is 5^ miles S.W. by W. } W. from Cape Salmon, and is of the same chfiracter. • The Jrehduke Charles, transport, from Queliec, having on board six companies of the Nova- Scotia militia, was wrecked on one of the reefs, and eight persons perished, Mt^, 1816. t The MinstrelMg, Capt Outerbridge, which sailed from Limerick, 21st April, 1841, with 141 passengers, emigrants to Canada, struck on Red Island Reef, May 18th, at 4 a. m. A heavy sea was then running, and more than a hundred passengers embarked in the boats, when the vessel heelied into deep water, and instantly went down stern roremost. All in the boau perished, with the brave and worthy captain, except four of the crew and four passengers. The survivors reached IVhite Island, whence they were taken off by Captain M'Intyre, of the Wellington, and conveyed to Orosse Island. HARE ISLAND, ETC. 117 ter part )f Cape a ship, B of five from the }ugh the iver, and It has a IS. The line parts the light- to on the d beacon of Green I breadth, point of V. 3 miles he point; I river, by pen to the id cannot Island, is the river. Us are not feet above f, bearing Echufaud by S. from being with horns over )rds shelter and high ; Further to etlle Port, ous on the if the same )f the Nova- 141, with 141 A heavy sea en the veuel bed, with the von reached ind conveyed MuRKAY Bay is 6 J miles W. by S. from Cape Eagle ; it is a beautiful place. The bay is 1 ^ mile wide, and nearly ns deep, and a rapid and unnavigable river falls into the head of it, on which are several grist and saw mills. The bay is nearly all dry at low water, except the shallow channels leading to the river. Vessels occasionally anchor oft' the bay, with Point Gage, its east point, bearing W. by N. about 400 fathoms, Point Pie$, its west point, S.W. i W., and Point Heu E.N.E. 1 E. The River at this part, between the Saguenay and Cape Eagle, is divided into two channels, by the Red Island and bank above described, ana the shoals and reefs extending in a line along the middle of the river, at each end of Hare Island, in a N.E. and S.W. direction. The NORTH CHANNEL, though not that which is generally used, is clear, deep, and broad, and might be used advantageously under proper circumstances, as in the case of scant and strong N.W. winds ; but with easterly winds and thick weather, or at night, it must not be attempted, as there would be no leading marks, and the depth is too great and irregular to afford any guidance, besides the want of shelter or anchorage on the north shore. White Island, od Mare Island North Reef, is covered with trees, and bears from Red Island S.W. | W. nearly 10 miles, and from the N.E. end of Hare Island N.E. ) N. 1} mile. A shoal of rocks extends from While Island N.E. \ E. 3 miles, and dries to the greatest part of that distance. Between the N.E. end of this shoal and Red Island, 6| miles distant, the channel is quite free from danger. HARE ISLAND, &c.— The east end of this island lies S.W. ) S. a mile and a half from White Island ; thence it extends 7( miles to the S.W., and is in no part one mile in breadth : in a great part not half a mile. It is 250 or 300 feet high, and thickly wooded. At S. by W. one mile and a half from the N.E. end of Hare Island, lie the three islets called the Brandy Pots and Nogoin. The northern Brandy Pot, high and covered with trees, is close to the southern one, and the .bottom between it is dry at low water. The southern is a whitish rock, almost barren, the wood being nearly burnt off. The Noggin, which lies to the N.E. of the northern Brandy Pot, is likewise covered with trees. At low water these islets are connected by a chain of rocks, leaving a passage for a boat only. Half-way between the Noggin anu the N.E. extremity of Hare Island, at half a mile from shore, there is also a reef, dry at low water ; but all these are out of the fair>way. The depth of 7 fathoms leads clear of them. To the south-westward of the Brandy Pots the south side of Hare Island has a flat of hard ground extending from it, three miles in length, and about one-quarter of a mile in breadth. The whole of this side of the island is bound witii rocks. HARE ISLAND BANK. — This is an extensive shoal lying above, and nearly in the direction of Hare Island. It commences at about a mile S.E. from the S.W. end of the island, and extends thence S.W. by W. and S.W. nine miles. There is good anchorageon its south side, in 7 fathoms. On its northern side is Hare Island Sout': Reef, the greatest portion of which is uncovered at low water, to an extent of 2} miles ; the part always uncovered ia clothed with grass and spruce-bushes, lying 2) miles to the S.W. of Hare Island. The western extremity of this reef bears from that of Pilgrims N.W. by N. 2\ miles ; and the eastern end is nearly north 4) miles from the same. Off the east end of the bank, about a quarter of a mile distant, is a small rocky 2-fathom Knoll, on which White Island will be just shut in behind the south side of Hare Island; and at two-thirds of a mile from the east end of the bank is a 3-fathom thoat, on which White Island will be midway between the Brandy Pots and Hare Island. The SOUTH CHANNEL, between these banks and the south shore of the river, is justly preferred for the common purposes of navigation. The tides are not so strong, nor the water so inconveniently deep, as in the channel on the north side of the river : it has good anchorage in every part, and a sufficient depth for any ships. The breadth of the channel, in its most contracted part, between Hare Island Bank and the Pilgrims, is two miles, and its greatest depths 7, 8, 10, to 13, 15, and 16, fethoms, mud, sand, and gravel. BARRETT LEDGE.— The reef thus called is composed principally of two detached rocks, on the south side of which is a black buoy. This buoy lies with the northern extremity of the main land within Green Island, in a line with the northernmost high land of Cape Orienal, bearing N.E. by E. } E. ; the summit of the southernmost mountain of the high land of Kamourasca in one with the south point of the Great Pilgrim Island, 118 KAMOUKASCA. . ! J. f I S.S.W. ^ W. ; tlie eastern side (if the trees on Hnre Island in one witli tlie west cape of the Uay of llocks, (on the north shore,) N.W. ; ond two houses noar the Uivi6re du lver it ; the S.W. has 12. Between them is a depth of 7 and 8 fathoms. At a mile S.W. from the S.W. side of Barrett Ledge, lies a small bank of 10 feet, called the Middle Shoaly with the Brandy Pots bearing N.W. ^ W. distant a mile and a half. Near it on the N.E. are from 6 to 8 fathoms of water. This shoAl appears to be the extremity of the remains of a narrow Middle Bank, extending thence two leagues S.W. by VV., and upon which there are still from 4 to Sj and 3 fathoms, on approaching to the Hare Island Bank. In the channel between the Middle Shoal and Brancly Pots are from 10 to 18 fathoms of water: but in that to the southward the general depths are 7 and 8 to 5 and 4 fathoms. On the South Shore of the River, the first point westward of Green Island, is the remarkable rocky peninsula of Cacona, lying S.S.W. from the S.W. end of Green Island. At a mile and n half south-westward of Cacona, and just to the northward of the stream of it, are the Percie Rocks, two clusters, occupying the extent of a mile and a half. They lie at about one mile from, and parallel with, the main, and are nearly covered at high water. On the south side of them there is a narrow 3}-fathom channel : the depth of 10 fathoms leads clear on the north; and Green Island and Cacona just touchmg, and bearing N.E. i £., will keep 3 fathoms depth on their north side.* The PILGRIMS. — Five islets, called the Pilgrims, lie at the distance of 14 miles above the peninsula of Cacona, at a mile and a half from the shore. They occupy an extent of 4^ miles N.E. bv E. and S.W. by W., and are based upon the Banc du Loup (or Wolf Bank), extending from shore above the river of the same name, and on the exterior f)art of which the depths are 2) and 3 fathoms. They are coitnected by reefs that dry at ow water. The easternmost is the highest, and is covered with trees ; the others are barren, and of a whitish colour. They are bold-to on the north side, but there is no passage for shipping between them and the shore. ' From the N.E. or Great Pilgrim the Brandy Pots bear N.N.E. 7^ miles, and the S.W. end of Hare Island N.W. by N. 4) miles. Hereabout the ebb runs downward at about 21 miles an hour. Without the edge of the Banc du Loup is a sand-bank, called the Pilgrim Shoal. It is narrow, but 4 miles in length, and its general depths 13 and 14 feet at low water. A depth of 7 and 8 fathoms clears it on the north side. KAMOURASCA ISLES.— This is agroup of narrow islets, lying at the distance of two leagues above the Pilgrims, on the same side of the river. The N.K. or Grand Isle bears from the Pilgrims S.W. by W. The bank between is steep-to. The island next to the Great Island is Burnt Island^ and the third of the larger isles is Crow Island. These isles are about three miles in extent, and one or two from the shore ; the bank within is dry at low water. Great Island and Burnt Island are very steep on the north side, but Crow Island is surrounded with shoal water. The settlement of Kamourasca is within the islands above described. Its church bears S.E. nearly a mile from Crow Island. From the latter, Cape Diable bears S.W. ^ W. about three miles, but a long reef extends from the cape towaiu the island, the easternmost part of which is covered at a quarter flood, and is little more thai; a mile from Crow Island. Two miles above Cape Diable is Point St. Denis ; and a small cove on the south of this point. From Point St. Denis to Point Oval (OuelleU the land trends irregularly six miles to the S.W.t * On the main land, within Basque Island, is the settlement of Trois Pistoles ; on the same side, within Cfreen Island, are the church and village of that name : and at five miles from the latter are the promontory and parish of Cacona : next above which, opposite to Hare Island, is the Riviire du Loup. " These settlements do not extend far beyond the river or front range, which exhibits neat farm- houses, large barns, and extensive enclosures, bearing evidence of a good soil and industrious cul- tivation." t The Parish of St. Andr4, or St. Andrew, with its church, are on the main-land above the Pilgrims. Hereabout the Land rises very near the river, in a steep ascent, to an elevation of from 150 to 200 feet. ISLE AUX COUDRES. llf) On th« extremity of a shallow bay, at six miles westward from St. Anne's, stand the village and church of St. Iloque. The country between is occupied with settlements, and an extensive mud*bank, with large scattered stones, uncovered at low water, extends in front of it. This mud-bank is included within the greater bank of sand called the Shoati of St. Anne and of St. .Roque, extending more than a third over the river, from the southern shore, and limiting the channel on the south side. Opposite to Point Ouelie, on the north side of the river, is Cape aux Oie$, or Goone Cape, which is bold and rocky, forming the western extremity of Mal Bay ; Point au Pieii, on the west of Murray Bay, 9| miles N.E. } N. from Goose Cape, being the eastern ex- tremity. Mal Bay is formed by a slight incurving of the coast; shoals extend a quarter of a mile off shore, and there is no good anchorage in it. Cape Martin is three miles W. by S. from Cape aux Oies ; between them is good anchorage, and about midway is a large stone called the Orotte Rock. Vessels anchor in 7 fathoms, the Grosse Rock, bearing N.W., being here sheltered from the tides, which run past Goose Cape with great rapidity, and occasion at times a strong rippling. ISLE AUX COUDRES is opposite to Point St. Roque on the south shore ; and at this part the navigation of the river upwaid becomes intticate, from th: numerous banks and islands which form the Traverses and numerous other channelj. The island is 6 miles long and 2} wide; it^- eastern end is 2^ miles S.W. from Cape Martin. The island, being cultivated, has a pleasing aspect; it has as many inhabitants as it can support, having been settled at an early period. Its south shore is lined with rocks and shoals, extending a mile out from it. Its north side is bold, and Prairie Bay affords excellent anchorage. There is a reef of rocks running off the N.VV. of the island, which are all covered at high water. The bearings from the end of the ledge are, St. Pierre Church in St. Paul's Bay iust open, bearing N.W. \ N.; Cape Corbeau, the east bluff of St. Paul's Bay, N.N.W. i W. ; the waterfall on the north shore, N.N.E. } E. ; the bluff point of the island, S.S.E.; and the N.E. bluif point of the same, ofl' which is a reef of rocks, E. 1 N. The North Channel to Quebec is to the north of Isle aux Coudres, and runs along the high northern shore of the river ; and on the south side of it is the line of shoals, which extend from the west side of Isle aux Coudres to Burnt Cape Ledge and the Bayfield Isles. The Middle Channel is to the south of the Isle aux Coudres, the entrance being between it and the Middle Ground, whence it runs westwaid along the shoals between it and the Senl Islands, and to the north of Goose and Canoe Islands, into the South Traverse. The South Traveuse, that which is generally used by vessels at present, is along the south side of the river. SOUTH TRAVERSE.— The entrance of the South Traverte lies between a buoy, chequered black and white, on the edge of St. Anne's Bank, on one side, and the bank called the Middle Ground on the other. The narrowest pait of the channel is indicated by Hence to Kamourasca, a distance of about nine miles, the country is diversified by abrupt and insulated hills, whose craggy and almost barren faces are generally contrasted with well-cultivated fields. Kamourasca is a populous vill^e, celebrated for the remarkable salubrity of its atmosphere, and is now the chief watering-place of Lower Canada ; as such, it is the resort of numerous visitors, of the first rank and respectability, during the summer months. Here are a few shops, and several good taverns. The next respectable village is a beautiful one on the River Quelle, which likewise has its church and very neat dwelling-houses, &c. The church of 8t Anne stands at about a mile inland, 3| miles south fh>m the mouth of the Quelle. Insulated clifiii characterise the scenery about Kamourasca, They are composed of granite, and generally rise in abrupt slopes, presenting nigged faces, thinly clad with dwarf trees. The highest of these hills is the Montagne Ste. Anne, which peers above a fine country at its base. To the west is the settlement of St. Roque des Aunais ; and to the southward trends a bold but not very high ridge skirting the most luxuriant fields. At the eastern base of the mountain, very agreeably situated upon an eminence, are the small village of St. Anne, the parish church, the parsonage house, and a large stone college, three stories high, on an elevated and salubrious spot. J 20 GOOSE ISLAND. : 1 i a light-vessel, stationed at nearly 5 miles W.S.W. from the chequered buoy of St. Anne's, and which is to be left, on sailing upward, on the larboard or south side. At nearly a mile W. by S. above the light-vessel is a white buoy on the Middle Ground, to be left on the starboard side; and, at the same distance S.W. by S. is a black buoy on the larboard side. The passage between these buoys is only half a mile broad, and this is the most intricate part of the navigation in the river. The courses up, from these buoys, to abreast of a red buoy, on the edge of the southern bank, that of St. Jean, are S.W. \ S. 4 miles, and S.W. by S. 2 miles, whence you enter the South Traverse, distinguished on the north side by a rocky islet, named the Stume Pillar, or Pt/ier de Pierre, which is always above water, and a quarter of a mile in length, at 2| miles from the south shore.* A revolving light has been shown from the tower lately erected on South or Stone Pillar, since Uie 28th September, 1843, during the season of the navigation. This light will revolve at regulated intervals of 1 1 minute. About 2} miles north-westward of the Stone Pillar is a 3-fathom shoal, called the Channel Patch, lying in the mid-channel, and below it are several other patches, with from 2^ to 3 fathoms. The marks for the Channel Patch, which may be passed on either side, are the north sides of the Goose Island Reef and of the Stone Pillar in one, bearing S.W. i W.,the latter being distant 2} miles ; the north side of Goose Island (including the islands close off it) and the south side of the Wood Pillar in one, bearing S.W. by W . j^ W. ; and lastly, St. Jean Church S.E. i S. 2J miles. The Avignon, a half-tide rock, round on the top, and dry at three-quarters ebb, lies at the distance of two cables' length S.E. from the body of the South Pillar, with a depth of 7 fathoms close to it. The PiLiER Bois£, or Woody Pillar, a high round rock, with trees on the western part of it, lies at a mile and a quarter to the west of the Stone Pillar. At half a mile to the east of it is a rock, called the Middle Rock, dry at half-ebb. To the northward of the Piliers or Pillars are the Seal Reefs, composed of sand and shingle on slate, and having an extent of nearly four miles N.E. by E. and S.W. by W. To a considerable extent the rocks which form these reefs are dry at low water. The bank on which they lie is extensive on the N.E. toward Coudre Island. * At a mile and a quarter S.W. from the Pilier Bois6 lies the extremity of a reef extending thence to Goose. Island; and at a mile and a quarter S.W. ^ W. from the Stone Pillar is the commencement of a ledge of high rocks, called the Goose Island Reef, extending thence 2} miles S.W. } W., the western part of which is composed of rocks always above water, and steep>to on their south side. GOOSE ISLAND.— We have now advanced to Goose Island, connected by low meadow land to Crane Island, the whole of which occupies an extent of ten miles in a direction N.E. I E. and S.W. J W. The South Traverse continues on the south side of this island ; but is impeded by several shoals of 12 and 15 feet water, which require great precaution. A farm-house may be seen on Goose Island, to the eastward of which, and close to low- water mark, is a large rock called the Hospital Rock. Two miles and a half to the west- ward of this rock is a long reef, dry at low water, but it is out of the fair-way, and close along the island. The north side of Crane Island is in a good state of cultivation. On drawing toward it you will see a farm-house (Macpherson's) on the east end. To the S.E. at half a mile from this house, is the edge of the Beaujeu Bank, a narrow shoal which extends two miles thence to N.E. i E., and having, on its shoalest part, only 12 feet at low water. Two new buoys have been placed 4o mark the channel between Beaujeu's Bank and Crane Island, viz. — A white buoy on the shoal off the south side of Crane Island, in 3i fathoms low water spring tides, Mr. Macpherson's house bearing North half East, distant one-third of a mile, and the south side of Crane Island bearing South-west by West ; this buoy bears West half North from the black buoy on the south-west end of Beaujeu's Bank. * Captain Bayfield says that the four buoys of the Traverse are laid down in every spring, and taken away in every autumn, at the close of the navigation. They are never laid down two years following in exactly the same place, from not being placed by angles, but they are always sufficiently near it tu ilnswer the purpose required. by low BAYFIELD ISLES. 12] Another white buoy on the tooth edge of Goose Island shoal, in 4 fathoms low water spring-tides, about 9 miles below Mr. Macpherson's house, Onion Island, bearing North> west, and the south side of Crane Island bearing South- west \ West Whereby a clear channel will be left of nearly ^ mile, between the black buoy and the above white buoys, carrying 4| fathoms, and which will allow ships, at dead low water spring-tides, to pass up or down without having occasion to anchor to wait for water over tne flats to the southward of Beaujeu's Bank. — (May, 1844.) On the south shore, opposite to the N.E. end of Goose Island, are the settlement and church of L'liktt and at seven miles higher are the cape and village of St. Ignaee t between are numerous settlements, and a shoal bank extends along shore, which is a mile and a half in breadth, thus narrowing the channel-way to the breadth of a mile* BAYFIELD ISLES.— To the west of Crane Island is a group which may, with strict propriety, be called the Bmffield Ittei, in compliment to the gentleman by whom they have been so excellently surveyed. Exclusive of a number of smaller islets and rocks, the prin- cipal isles are, Canoe I$kt on the north side of Crane Island, Marguerite or Margaret to the west, Groue Itk^ and Ide aux ReauXt otherwise Rat Island, and the lile Madame, The whole, between Crane Island and the Island of Orleans, occupies an extent of 14 miles. There are several passages between the isles, but they are too intricate to be understood without reference to the chart. From the west end of Crane Island a reef of rocks extends to the W.S.W. about half a mile, and a spit of sand, of 9 to 12 feet water, f mile and a quarter thence, in the same dire<m which it is i.W. from the y shoal water. lie banks form This must be t on board on est end of the • nt of Orleans I, the Eattem NarrowB of the North Traverset which is only 250 fathoms wide, and 4 fathoms can be carried through within this breadth. The Traverse Spit, and the Horte Shoe Bank to the N.W. of it, as well as the Brul^ Banks, dry, for the most part, soon after half-ebb, and thereby greatly lessen the difficulty of the passage. The mark for leadins into the Traverse through the Eastern Narrows is, the S.W. point of Reaux Island and Pofnt Su Vallier in one, bearing S.S.W. f W. From the Eastern Narrows the channel runs S.W. by W. close along the southern edge of the Traverse Spit, leaving all other shoals to the southward. At the distance of 2| miles we come to the Wettem Narrowtp which are also 250 fathoms wide and 4) fathoms deep. The We$iem Narrows are between the Traverse Spit and the West Sandf which is ll mile long and has 7 feet least water. The mark for leading through the Western Narrows, after having arrived ls far as the east end of the West Sand (which will be when Berthier Church is just shut in behind the S.W. point of Reaux Island, bearing S. jl W.,) is Point St, John and Point Daupt^, on the south side of Orleans Island, in oue, bearing S.W. \ W. Having cleared the Western Narrows, there is a fine clear passage between Orleans Island and the banks of Madame Island, not less than two-thirds of a mile wide, and with good anchorage all the way to the South Channel at Point St. John, a distance of nearly 7 roil "3. The ^*: to the northward of the Island of Orleans has water enough for the largest ships, V 10 narrow and intricate for general use. Tbe M^&AND of OAXiBANS is distinguished for its fertility. The shores, in general, slant gradually to the beach ; in some places are a few rocky clifis, but not of great extent or elevation : from the foot of the slopes are large spaces of low meadow-land, sometimes intersected by patches of excellent arable. Bordering the north channel the beach is flat and muddy, with reefs of rocks running along it ; but, on the southern side, it is a fine sand, with only a few pointed rocks sticking up here and there. The highest part of the island is by the church of St. Pierre, about 3) miles from the western extremity, and almost fronting the magnificent Falls of Montmorenci ; and also just above Patrick's Hole, on the south side, nearly abreast of St. Pierre, on which is placed the second telegraph of a chain between Quebec and the quarantine establishment at Grosse Island. The central part is thickly wooded. The churches of St. Lawrence and St. John are situated close down on the southern shore ; the distance between them is nearly six miles, and this extent presents excellent cultivated lands, richly diversified with orchards and gardens, and houses at short intervals from each other. St. Patrick's Hole, a little to the westward of St. Lawrence, is a safe and well -sheltered cove, where vessels outward bounu usually come to an anchor, to await their final instructions for sailing. On the west point of it is a group of very neat houses ; at several of which the mhabitants Hirnish accom- modations to the numerous persons who visit the island, from amusement, or from curiosity, both in summer and winter. Large quantities of grain, and most sorts of provisions, are continually sent from this island for the consumption of Quebec : among the fruits, apples and plums attain a much greater degree of perfection here, than in any other place of the lower district of Canada. Off St. Patrick's Hole, above mentioned, ships ride in 10, 12, or 14 fathoms, abreast of the inlet. The telegraph. No. 2, is just to the eastward of this cove, on the high part of the island. The ground is not good, but it is well sheltered from easterly winds. Here the river is about one mile and a quarter wide, and bold on both sides. At about half-way between St. Patrick's Hole and the west end of Orleans, is a shelf called Mobandam's Rocks. They extend a cable's length from the island, and have only 10 feet over Uiem. On the S.W. part of the west end of Orleans is another reef: this is dry at low water, lies close in, and should not be approached nearer than in 10 fathoms. On the opposite shore, a little to the eastward of Point Levy, is another reef, which should be passed at the same depth. Northward of Point Levy is a small reef, but close in, and out of the fair-way. BASIN OF QUEBEC— The appearance of the lands forming the Basin of Quebec is given hereafter, in the description of the river, from Montreal downward. We, therefore, only add here that it is one mile across between the high-water marks, with a great depth of water. The Harbour of Qubbzc, properly so called, commences at St. Patrick's 1S4 TIDES IN THE RIVER ST. LAWRENCE. If ^ Hole, and extends thence to Cape Rouge River, which is nearly three leagues above Quebec. The Pobt of Quebec comprehends all the space between Barnaby Island and the first rapid above Montreal. The situation of Quebec, the capital of Lower Canada, is unusually grand and majestic, in form of an amphitheatre. The city is seated on the N.W. side of the St. Lawrence, upon a promontory, formed by that river and the St. Charles. The extremity 'of this headland is called Cape Diamond, of which the highest point rises 345 feet above the level of the water. It is composed of a rock of grey graniie, mixed with quartz crystals, (from which it obtains its name,) and a species of dark coloured slate. In many places it is quite perpendicular and bare ; in others, where the acclivity is less abrupt, there are patches of brownish earth, or rather a decomposition of the softer parts of the stone, on which a few stunted pines and creeping shniDS are here and there seen ; but tlie general aspect of it is rugged and barren. —{Bouehette, Vol. i., 24 1.) Population in 1759, about 9000. — Now about 28,000. The latitude of Quebec is 46** 4B' 9', and its longitude we assume as 71° 13', from the reasons assigned in the * Memoir on the Atlantic Ocean.' MoNTftEAL.— The communication between Quebec and Montreal, when not impeded by the ices, is chiefly bv means of steam-vessels, which are, in general, gracefully moulded and finely finished. The cabins are fitted up with much elegance and taste ; the tables are liberally provided with excellent fare ; and the dessert displays the most delicious fruits of the country. Steamers start almost every day from both cities, and perform the voyage up the river in from 36 to 40 hours, but they are several hours less in accomplishing the trip downward, from the advantage of having a current setting in this direction as far as the Richelieu, where they meet with the tide. — (BoticAe<<«, Vol. i., 270.) For the improved navigation recently established, see hereafter. Population of the city and suburbs, in 1825, 22,357 ; now not less than 25,000. The rata of pilotage for the river, and the towing rates of steamers between Quebec and Montreal, succeed the sailing directions in the following pages. The laws of the Trinity House are particularly strict, with respect to shipping in the Port and Harbour of Quebec ; and every attention must be paia to them, as well as to those respecting Quarantine. Of the latter, the pilots are bound to inform all masters, as soon as they board them below. A copy of the Harbour Laws is delivered to each master, on his arrival, by the harbour-master ; and those respecting shipping may always be seen at the harbour-roaster's office. TIDES IN THE RIVER ST. LAWRENCE. On the days of full and change, the tide flows in the river as follows : — Near Cape de Moots, on the north side, at f b. 55 m. In Manicougan Bay, at 2 h. ; here spring-tides rise 12, and neaps 8, feet. At Bersimis Point, 2 h. On the south coast, near Cape Chatte, the time is 1| h. Here spring-tides rise from 12 to 14, and neaps 8, feet. OS" the River MaUne the time is 2 h. ro. ; springs rise 12, and neaps 6, feet. At Grand Metis Bay, the time is 2 h. 10 m.; springs rise 13, and neaps 8, feet. OiF shore hereabout, the current on the surface always runs downward, from 1 i to 2} knots. The time of high water at Green Island, is 3 h. ; spring-tides rise 16, and neaps 10, fieet. In the middle of the river, off the eastern part of this island, .the flood from the north shore turns to the southward and seU thence eastward off the south shore ; and thus below the Isle Bic, the stream sets constantly downward, at the rate of 1| to 2i knots as above mentioned. At Gieen Island, the time is 2 h. 45 m. ; at Kamourasca, 4 h. ; at the Brandy Pots, 3 b. ; in the Traverse, 4 h. SO m. Off Point St. Roch or Roque, 4 h. 50 m. Here it ebbs 6} hoors, and flows 5^. At the Isle Bic the stream never bends to the westward until an hour's flood by the shore. The neap-floods are here very weak ; and, with westerly winds, none are per- ceptible. A sprmg-flood is, however, always found, within four miles of the shore, between Father Point and Bic. TIDES IN THE KIVER ST. LAWRENCE. 125 The ebb-strcaiD from Um River Saguenajriettwith great force soath*east ward toward Red Island Bank. Off Green Island, on the opposite side, there is little or no flood, but a great ripple. All the way hence to Quebec, the tide, when regular, flows tide and quarter-tide : but it is influenced greatly by the wind, and by no means to be depended on, as to its running, any where below Hare Island, where there is a regular stream of ebb and flood. Between Barnaby and Bic the stream of flood sets in from the N.E. at the rate of about two knots ; then fair through the channel until last quarter flood, when it sets to the N.W. by the west end of Bic, and then gradually to the N.E. as the flood slacks. The whole of the ebb, both to the eastward and westward of the island, sets strongly to the N.£. The current between Bicquette and the north coast is generally very strong to the N.E., without any regular change. In the summer and autumn, as well as in spring-tides, this current slacks, and, near Bicquette, ruus to the westward, during flood ; but, until the upland waters have all run down, and the great rivers have discharged the freshes, caused by the thawing of the snows in the spring of the year, this current always runs downward. From Bic to Green Island, on the southern side, the stream of flood is no where perceptible at a mile and a half from the islands. The ebb, or rather current, comes strongly from the N.W., out of the River Saguenay, and through the channel to the northward of Red Island, and joining the eddy-flom, before explained, increases the constantly downward course of the stream. Here it alv/ays runs in a S.E. direction, two miles an hour, with a westerly wind \ but only so to the southward and eastward of Red Island. Between Red Island and Green Island, the ebb runs from 4 to 6) knots. In crossing over to the north shore, this easterly current will be found to diminish ; for, on the ncrth side, the flood is pretty regular, and the ebb much weaker. Eastward of the Razade Rocks, and near Bic, the eddy-flood assumes a N.E. direction, and sets strongly between Bic and Bicquette. To the southward of Bic, spring-floods run at the rate of a knot and a half; neaps are not perceptible. Ships that come to the southward of Bic, with a scant wind from the northward, must steer W. by N., to check the S.E. current, until they come into 18 fiithoms of water, or up to Basque, whence they proceed for Green Island. The first of the' flood, spring-tides, sets from the N.E. along the north side of Green Island, and strongly toward the west end of it; then S.S.W. over the reef towani Cacoha. In the middle of the channel no flood is perceptible. During spring-ebbs, the meeting of the N.E. and S.E. tides, near the middle of Oreen Island, causes very strong ripplings : and, to the eastward of Green Island, the S.E. ebb comes strongly about the east end of Red Island ; here meeting, the N.E. tide causes a high rippling, much like broken water in strong easterly winds : but, in neap-tides, the floods are very weak, and in the spring of the year there are none. This renders the part of the river now under notice more tedious in its navigation than any other, unless with a free wind. From the west end of Green Island a regular stream of flood and ebb commences, which runs five hours upward and seven downward. At the Brandy Pots it flows tide and quarter-tide : and, above the Perc^e Rocks, on the south shore, it sets regularly up and down, N.E. by £. and S.W. by W. From the Brandy Pots, the stream of flood sets toward Hare Island ; and, near the west and N.W. with great strength, through the passage between the island and bank. Above Hare Island, the flood sets regularly up the river. The ebbs contrarywise. From the Pilgrims up to Cape Diable, the flood is very weak, but it thence increases up to the buoys of the Traverse, where it runs at the rate of 6 knots. The first of the ebb sets toward the English Bank and Hare Island Shoal, when abreast of the greater island of Kamourasca, and the ebb contrary. In La Prturie Bay, on the north side of the Jtle aux Coudres, the time of high water is 4 h. 25 m., and here it flows six houn : the ebb-stream continiies an hour and a quarter aAer low water, and the flood three-quarters of an hour after high water. The tides in the North Channel being half an hour earlier than in the Southern. Channels, the first of the flood sets strongly on the St Roque and St. Anne's Banks; and the first of the ebb sets strongly across the shoals in the middle of the river. In the Traverse, springrtides rise 18, and neaps 11, feet. In the SouTu Traverse, on the full and change, the tide on-shore flows at half-past 1S6 SAILING DIRECTIONS ■ il fear, but it continues to ran to the westward vntil six o'clock, when regular in the channel. With westerly winds there is a deviation, but it is certain that the tide on-diore rises three ftet before the stream bends to the westward: and this allowance must always be made in every part of the river. In the Traverse, the first of the flood sets from the N.N.E. ; at the buoys, at a quarter flood, !it takes a S.W. direction, and, when the shoals are covered at half-flood, at the Seal Ree6, it sets until high water S.W. by W. The ebbs, in a contrary direction, run with great strength ; frequently, in the spring of the year, at the rate of 6 or 7 knots. Between the Piliers or Pillars, it is high water at 5 h. m. The ebb here rans 6 hours and 50 minutes ; tfie flood, 5 hours and 35 minutes. Both streams continue to ran an hour after high and low water by the shore. From Crane Island the flood sets fair up the river, but the first of the ebb off L'IsIet sets to the northward for half an hour, then ftir down the river, and at the rate of not more than 3) knots in spring-tide. At the Isle aux Reaux, or Rat Isle, below Orleans Island, it is high water at 5 h. 32 m. It ebbs by the shore seven hours, and flows five and a half. The streams run an hour later. Off the S.W. end of Madame Island, it is high water at 5 h. 40 m.; springs rise 17, and neaps 13, feel. At Quebec the time of high water is 6 h. 37 m. Here it ebbs by the shore seven hours and 40 minutes, and flows four hours and 45 minutes. Both streams ran an hour after high and low water by the shore. Springs rise 18, and neaps 13, feet. n.n. i N. course by i river and five miles DIRECTIONS FOR SAILING UP THE RIVER, FROM ANTICOSTI TO QUEBEC. '* In working up the St. Lawrence, the south shore mav be approached within a mile, if the land can be seen ; but it must be remembered that the lead is of little use until you are past Matane River. On the north shore you have nothing to fear, while below Point de M onts, if the weather will allow you to see two or three miles off. After passing Point de Monts the intricate navigation of the river begins, and particular attention must be paid to the current, while makin^r the board to the nordiward. In thick weather the lead will be the best guide between Matane and Bamaby on the south shore ; but, on standing to the northward, we found the current setting strong to the north-westward, particularly in the vicinity of the Manicougan and Bersimis shoals ; and in one instance, with an ebb tide, found a strong westerly set off Point de Monts." A similar instance occurred to H.M S. Race-horse, in the night of the 6th of ' ' 1838. At 6 p. ro. Aimouski Church bore S.W. 6 or 7 miles : at 10, while in the act tacking, she strack on a mud bank off the entrance of Bersimis River, having made i compass 24 miles, and ought to have been 10 miles £. by S. from i firom the nearest danger : the weather at the time very thick. The fogs are generally low, and you may sometimes see the high ^nd over them ; at others they will clear off partially, for a few minutes, and come on at lun. In the latter case a bearing on Mount Camilla and judging your distance off sb>re, will give you your position near enough to know how far you are up the river. When Mount Camille bears due south by compass, you are a little above Metis ; and, if the weather is pretty clear, the high land about Cape Arisnole, near Bic, will be seen. It makes like a bold headland, and can be seen at a considerable distance. I make no doubt that the current down the St. Lawrence is much influenced by the heavy rains, from the number of rivers that empty themselves into it ; aiid if the most E articular attention be not given to the soundings, as well as the look-out that should be ept in thick weather, a ship will be set on the south coast before the land can possibly be seen. H.M.S. Race-horse, on the 7th of July, 1838, ascertained her position at 4 p. m. by bearing of the lighthouse on Point de Monts and chronometer sights, both agreeing, the weather dear and an E.S.E. wind blowing, which soon brought thick weather, and fell very light. At 1 1 h. 50 m. on the following morning the north shore was dis- tinctly seen, and for 6 or 7 miles all round to the southward no laud could be seen : it came on thick immediately, and a sight for latitude could not be obtained. The ship was on the larboard tack, lying S.B. and going at the rate of two knots ; the water very smooth. I FROM ANTICOBTI TO QUEBEC. 1S7 but the surface appeared much agitated by a current, the wt of which could not be ascertained. At 12 h. 30 m. the rocks were seen within a cable's length of the bows, and had more the appearance of a field of ice than of land ; the helm was put down, and the ship fortunately came round in 2^ fathoms of water. Had there been a moderate wind, and the least swell, the ship would, in all probability, have been a wreck ; the high land could not be seen. We had 2| fathoms under the stern, and in two casts of the hand lead, going at the rate of two knots, had 17 fathoms, and at a cable and a half off shore no bottom at 50 fathoms. The weather suddenly cleared or ' <^ we saw the high land apparently over the mastpheads. Sent a boat on shore, U, .v. tain our position, and found we were off Cape Chatte. The bottom was black sand mixfed with the rock. On the weather clearing up, the barometer sunk a tenth; by 4 p. m. it had sunk three-tenths, the weather very clear and a light air from the eastward : at 7 it gathered up to the northward, and we had a very heavy squall, which reduced the ship to close- reefed topsail and reefed courses ; it lasted only about half an hour ; the barometer imme- diately rose a tenth ; the wind then became moderate, and gradually hauled to the south- ward, with rain. We were always unable to make any allowance for the current, excepting the outset of the river ; but as to the setting on and off the shores, at any particular time, no allowance could possibly be made. The safety of a ship much depends on the lead and a good look-out. The lowest range of the barometer on this occasion was 29.50.* Between the S.W. Point of Anticosti and the coast of the district of Oasp^, the current from the river sets continually down to the south-eastward. In the spring of the year it is strongest ; this is supposed to be owing to the vast quantity of snow which thaws at that time. In the summer, when the smaller rivers have lost their freshes, this current is estimated at the general rate of two miles an hour ; but in the spring, its rate has amounted to three and a half; which, of course, varies according to the quantity of snow, &c. Mr. Lambly savs that there is a difference of two and three feet in the level of the River St. Lawrence, between the months of May and August ; which he imputes to the quantity of ice and snow melted in the spring. Those advancing toward the river, in the fairway between the S.W. point of Anticosti and Cape Rosier, with the wind from the North or N. by £., if ignorant of the current, may thmk that they are making a reach up, when really approaching the south shore. This is to be guarded against; particularly during a long night, or in dark and thick weather. It is always best to tack in time, and get out of ilhe strength of the current, which will be found to diminish toward the north coast. In coming up, with contraby winds, and being far enough to the westward to weatfier Anticosti, stand to the northward, and keep within three or four leagues of the land up to the extremity of the Cape de Monts. Here the lighthouse, descril^d on page 90, will be found extremely useful. The land is all bold, and the tide along it favourable. After getting up to Trinity Cove, or the coast to the N.E. of the cape, the flood will be found setting along the north shore. Should circumstances render it necessary, you may proceed to, and take shelter at, the entrance of the Harbour of St. Nicolas, already described, which lies W. by N. 5 leagues from Cape de Monts. Abreast of Manicodgah Shoals, at about two-thirds of the channel over from the southward, a strong rippling has frequently been found ; at about two miles fiirther north, another ; and at two miles more a similar one : these are visible only in fine weather, and are supposed to be caused by the slack of the eastern current, which runs down on the south shore, and the regular flood on the north. In this part no bottom is to be found. Toward the Points of Bertimii and MUle FiacAei* the same appearances may occasionally be found, but there is no danger ; it being merely the conflict of the two streams. In proceeding upward, with contrary vnnds, a ship should continue to keep over toward the north shore, but taking especial caie to avoid the Manicougan and Bersimis shoals. Thus she will avoid the current setting strongly down the middle of the river, and have the assistance of the flood-tide, which is not felt hereabout on the south shore. The current is sometimes strong to the N.E. between Bicquette and Mille Vaches. • Communicated by Mr. Jelfcry, lf.K.N. 1S8 SAILING DIRECTIONS Ifa ship has advanced up, on the north tide, to Deriimis Point, with the wind at weit, and a flood-tide, she may cross over to Father Point, and obtain a pilot. Sl.uuld the wind change to S.W. by W., keep the north land on board, until t -; oi fetching the point. With a FAIR wiMD, and under favourable oircurostances, a ship proceeding upward, on the SOUTH SIDE of the river, may find soundings, but very irregular, along the coast to Matane ; the shore is, in general, steep. No anchoring in any part : the depth 20, 30, and 60, fathoms, at one mile from the rock, and all hard ground ; in from 50 to 80 fathoms, the bottom is of dean sand.* From Caps Cbatte to Matane, the course and distance are W. | S. 10) leagues. When at 4 miles to the north-eastward of Matane, you will see the Paps hearing S. W. .^ W. : tbejr stand inland to the westward of the river, as already noticed, and this is the best bearing on which they can be seen. Mount Camiile will now come in sight to the W.8.W., and may be seen iii'this direction 13 leagues off. It hence appears to the northward of all the land on the south side, and in the form of a circular island. Twenty-three miles W. \ S. of Matane River is Little Metis Cove, described on . page 113. If requisite to anchor here, give the east end of the reef a berth of 100 yards, or cros; it in three fiithoms: then haul up into the middle of the cove, and let go. Gband Metis, described on page 114, is 6| miles W. | S. from Little Metis. The bank of soundings extends farther to the northward of these coves than off Matane, and^35 fathoms, with sand, may be found at four miles from shore ; but, beyond this, the depths speedily increase to 60 and 70 fathoms. The edge of the bank continues steep as high up as Green Island. Along.shore, within 10 fathoms, the ground is hard, and it is diflScuIt for a boat to * In the year 1817, Mr. Wm. Bain, a master in the Royal Navy, publiihed an interesting volume, entitled, " An Es^y way, and you may anchor in that deptli all the way up to the island. When beating in, to the southward of Bic, from the eastward, stand to the southward into 7 fathoms while to the eastward of the island, but approach no n arer to the S.E. reef than 9 fathoms. In the middle are 12 fathoms. In standing to the northward, toward Bic, tack in 10 fathoms all along the island, and when it bears N.E. anchor as above.f THE GENERAL COURSES, ETC. BETWEEN CAPE CHATTE AND ISLE BIC, ARE AS FOLLOW: A ship bound upward, and having arrived within three leagues to the N.E. of Cape Chatte, should steer W. by S. or according to the wind, allowing for current to S.E., as already shown. Running thus, for 24 leagues, will bring you to Father Point. Should the weather be thick, you may haul to the southward ; and if, after gaining soundings in from 30 to 25 fathoms, the water should suddenly shoalen to 20 and 15, you will not be « • The pilots repair to their rendezvous in April. On tlieir boate and sails are their respective numbers. The proper rendezvous is at Father Point; but they are often met with at Matane and Gape Chatte, ana somedmes lower down. , . .u ^ .^ t A femily (that of Madame PelU) is settled at S.S.W. from Bic, m a small cove at the bottom ol a hill 1236 feet in hei^t. Here, and on Bic Island, water may be had. The next parish, west- ward, is Trois Pistoles, and at this, place provisions miy be obtained. Between these places are no hotises or setdemento. but firom the latter to Quebec are rMular stages. Passengers wishing to quit the ship at Bic, in order to proceed by land, by going to Madame Petit s house, may find a guide tft take them through die wood to Wois Pistoles, or may take a bpat up to the latter. (1818.) S ¥ ISO SAILING DIRECTIONS FOR I up to tlia point, but may Mhly run four or Ave milet higher : with Mundings, and the water gradually shoaiing from 30 to 25, 18, &c. in three or four milen, you will be up with the point, and may make signal for a pilot, approaching no nearer than in 12 fathoms. Here yoii will be about one mile and a half from shore ; and will, if the weather be clear, see the houses. The shore is bold-to, iinil may be approached with safety. From Tather Point to tlie Isle Bic, the bearing and distance are W. J S. 16 miles. While advancing from the eastward toward Father Point, and being off Liuie Metis, tiic high land to the southward of Cape Arignole, or Orignal, may be seen before the cape itaelf or Isle Die come in sight. From off Mount Camitie, in clear weather, Bic may be clearly seen. To avoid mislakint; Darnaby Isle for that of Bic, observe that, in thick weather, a ship cannot approach the land, near Father Point, without gradually shoaling the water ; consequently if, while k(>eping the lead going, you come into 9 fathoms, and make an island suddenly, it must be Barnaby ; or, if falling in with p.n island on any bearing to tlie westward of W.S.W., one cast of the lead will be sufficient to ascertain which it is } for, with Barnaby from W.S.W. to west, you will have from 7 to 5 fathonts only { but with Bic on the same bearings are from 15 to 12 fathoms. If, with the lead kept going, and no soundings be found, vou suddenly fall in with an island to the southward, it must be Bicquette. With this island S.W. half a mile, there are 16 fathoms of water. At two miles east from it are 10 fathoms, and a ship advancing into this depth, from the deeper water, may either haul off to the northward, and wait for clear weather, or proceed, by sounding around the reef from the east end of Bic ; steer thence west two miles, and come to an anchor, within the island, in 12 or 11 fathoms. At 4 miles north of Bicquette are 50 fathoms of water. With an easterly wind, if requisite to anchor on the south side of Bic, to proceed irom windward, run boldly to the southward, and look out for the reef extending from the east end of the island ; the latter may lie seen, being always above water. Give the reef a berth of a quarter of a mile, and run alonsr, in mid-channel, until Cape Orignal bears S.S.E., the body of the island then hearing N.N.W. In 10 or 11 fathoms is a large ship's berth, the ground clear and good. Small vessels may run up, until the island bears N.E. in 9 fathoms, at about a quarter of a mile from the island ; but here the ground is not so clear as in the deeper water. Fresh water is obtainable in the cove just to the westward of the east end of the island. If, during a westerly wind, a ship should be to the windward of the island, and it be required to bear up, in order to anchor, stand to the southward, into 1 1 fathoms ; then run down and anchor, as above directed; but particularly noticing that, with little wind, 10 fathoms is the proper depth of the fair-way, and that the hut quarter-flood, and all the eM>, sets strongly between Bicquette and Bic. Should you, with the wind easterly, be too far to the westward to fetch round the east end of Bic, in order to gain the anchorage, give Bicquette a berth of half a mile, then run up until the west end of Bic bears S.E., when Cape Orignal will be open of it. The latter mark leads to the westward of a reef that covers at a quarter tide, and extends W.S.W. one mile from Bicquette. Another reef, always in sighti lies between the former and Bicquette. By hauling round to the southward, with Cape Orignal open, you will pass athwart the opening between Bic and Bicquette, in from 16 to 12, 10, and 9 fathoms; the water thence shoalens into 6 fathoms, on the spit of mud and sand lying S.W. by W. from Bic, one mile. After crossing this spit, you will deepen into 9 and 10 fathoms, when the passage will be open, and you may come to an anchor. The N. W. ledge of Bic, the west end of that isle, and Cape Orignal, are nearly in a line when bearing S.R. When beating into Bic, from the westward, while standing to the southward, do not shut Mount Camille with Cape Orignal ; in standing to the northward, do not shut Mount Camille with the Isle Bic. Bank or Soonoimos. — In Uie offing, between Barnaby and Bic, are regular soundings, decreasing from 85 to 30 fathoms, generally of clean ground. Ships may, therefore, anchor in anv depth, but no nearer than a mile and a half, with Bic bearing from W.S.W. to S.W., as otherwise, the channel on the south of that island wilt not be open ; and, with a sudden shift of wind, you may not be able to quit the island. At N.W. from the eastern extremity of the S.E. reef of Bic, and just to the southarard of the stream of Bicquette, is the N.E. reef, a dangerous ledge, seen at low-water, apiiog- tides only. To avoid it, give Bic the berth of a mile. Westward of Bic the edge of liw THE RIVER OP ST. LAWRENCK, UPWARD. 131 Bank of Soandings trends to the S.W..ward up to Basque Isle, and ships may therefore atand safely to the southward by the lead, 12 fathoms being the fair-way. ISLE BIC TO GREEN ISLAND. — From the Isle Bic, Oreen Island bears 8.W. by W.| W. 9i leagues: and the course will therefore be from W.S.W. to S.W. according to the distance northward from Bic, &c. In this course and distance, you pass the Alcides Rock, the Razades, Basque, and Apple Island, which have been described in page 115. From the rocks of Apple Island to the eaatem reef of Green Island, the bearing and distance ara W. by S. 3 miles. This reef extends nearly a mile from the trees on the east end of Green Island, and is always uncovered. The small channel on the soutli side of Green Island is nearly dry at low water. The edge of the bank is sleep to the northward of the Razades, &c. ; hut from 35 fathoms, inward, there arc gradual soundings. Between Bic and Green Island there is anchorage all the way in 14 fathoms ; and for small vessels, in fine weather, in 9 fatltoms.' If np to the east end of Green Island, and the tide be done, you may anchor in 10 fathoms, off the reef, and in the stream of the ledge extending N.E. by N. from the lighthouse point, at the distance of a mile from the extremity of that shoal. Between Bic and Basque the ground is all clean i but thence to Green Iskind it is foul. A smalt venet mav find shelter under the east end of Basque, in 2) fathoms at low water, giving the east end of the reef extending from that island the berth of a quarter of a mile. The anchorage is with the island bearing W. by S. * The LIGHTHOUSE and reefs about Green Island have been already described in page 115. The lighthoHse bearing S.W. by W. leads safely up to Green Island. The high land to the southward of Cape Oiignal kept open to the northward of Basque Island, leads clear of the lighthouse ledge. With the lighthouse bearing S.W. by S.| this ledge will be exactly between toe ship^and lighthouse. Between the lighthouse and the west end of Green Island, in fine weather, yoa may stop tide in 20 or 25 fathoms, close to the north side of the island : but, if the wind be fresh, the ground will be found to be bad for holding, and too near the shore. During N.£b winds, small vessels may anchor between the S.W. reef and Cacona, in 4 fathoms; but it will be better to bear up for the Brandy Pots> lest they be caught by adverse weather, &c. Red Island bears from the lighthouse of Green Island N.W. by W. ^ W. nearly 5} miles. The eastern extremity of its extensive reef bears from tlie liglithouse ne^vrly N.W. by N., and is cleared by the lighthouse and beacon on Green Island in one, bearing S.S.E. i E. When coming up in the night, the light should not, therefore, be brought to the eastward of S. by E., until you are certainly within five miles of it. If, with the light bearing S. by E. you cannot make free to enter the Narrows, wait for daylight ; and, should the wind be scant from N.W., you may then borrow on the south side of Red Island, but so as to have White Island open twice its own breadth from the north side of Hare Island. On drawing to the westward, you may approach the shoal of White Island by the lead, remembering that the ebb-tide sets strongly down between White Island Shoal and Hed Island, and the flood in the contrary direction. A vessel may anchor, in fine weather, on the south side of Red Island R«ef, in 1 2 fathoms, at the distance of about three- quarters of a mile. The tide hereabout, as already shown, sets in alt directions. The souvoiMOS between Green Island and Red Islaitd are very irregular. At a mite from each are nearly 30 fathoms of water. The water of this channel, during ebb-tide, with an easterly wind, appears broken, but there is no danger. The NORTH COAST.— The Pttint de Mille Vachet bears from Bicquette N. by W. 4^ leagues. The extensive shoal, which surrounds this point, commences off the river of Port Neuf, on the east. The southern extremity of the shoal is a mile from shore, atul is very 8tee(>-to. The greater part of the shoal is dry at low water. Above the point ,the land forms the Bay of Milk Vachet^ which is shoal, and full of rocks. At 11 miles S.W. by W. from Point Mille Vaches, are two islets, called the Eggucmin hks. in' the Bay, at 4 miles west from the point, is a small river, called SauU au Mouton, having a handsome fall of 80 feel, uear the mouth of it, which may be always seen when passing. Bftween the Esquemin Isies and Saguenay River, a distance of 7^ leagues, S.W. by W., are three small rocky islets, named Bondesir and Let Bergeronnes, which afford shelter to fishing-boats. In proceeding for tlie Saguenay River, should the weather be thick, it would be advisable to drop anchor at the Brandy Pots, until the weather becomes favourable, when ff i I 132 SAILING DIKECTIONS FOR the entrance can be easily effected with a leading wind. The leading marks are good, and the entrance a mile wide between the shoals. The Bull is a round mountain on Uie north side of the Saguenay, about 3 miles up, and by keeping the Bull open from the points, there is no danger in running in ; and when abreast of the port or houses at Tadousac, they may run up on whatever side^tliey think they have most advantage, but with ebb*tide there is less current on the north-east side of the river. Other directions have been given in the description of the river on p. 113, and it may be added here that there are good anchorages at the Anse St. Etienne, 10 miles above Tadousao, at St. Louis Island, 15 miles from Tadousac, at the Anse St. Jean, 22 miles, and at the Baie de Tfiteroit^, 28 miles above Tadousac, at all of which vessels might li« well to load ; in other parts of the river the depth is far too great to anchor. Ships working op on the north side, ' tween the Esquemin Isles and Red Island, should keep within two leagues of the nt .h land: the shore is clear and bold, and the flood pretty regular. Should a ihip, to the northward of Red Island, be caught by a sudden shift of easterly wind, so that she cannot fetch round the east end of Red Island Reef, she may safely bear up and run to the westward, giving Red Island, White Island, and Hare Island, on (he larboard side, a berth of two miles in passing. At three leagues above Hare Island, haul to the southward, and enter the South Channel toward Karoourasca ; whence proceed as hereafter direcAd. CREEN ISLAND to the BRANDY POTS.— The Perc^e Rocks, Barrett Ledge, White Island, and the Brandy Pots, have already been described. (See page 117.) From Green Island to the Brandy Pots, the course and distance are from S. W. } W. to S.W. by W. 4 leagues. To sail to the northward of Barrett Ledge, bring the southernmost mountain of Kamourasca in a line with the saddle of the Great Pilgrim, or an islet lying off the N.£. side of Green Island, touching the high land of Cape Arignole. Either of these marks will clear the Ledge. In advancing toward the White Island Reef, you may trust to the lead : seven fiithoms is near enough to tack or anchor in, and this depth is in the fair-way to the Brandy Pots. The Brandy Pots are steep on the south side, 10 fathoms being near to them. There is good anchorage to the eastward of the Brandy Pols, in from 9 to 7 ftthoms, aiid good anchon^e above them, in from 9 to 14 fathoms. This is the best roadstead of any part of the river, during easterly winds, excepting that of Crane Island, and is the usual rendezvous for vessels bound down the St. I^wrence, and waiting for a wind. There is a good passage to the southward of Barrett Ledge up to the Pilgrims, leaving the Middle Shoalf which is above Barrett Ledge, on the starboard hand. The north passage is, however, the best, and most used. BRANDY POTS to the SOUTH TRAVERSE and GOOSE L^AND.— For the flat on the south side of Hare Island, above the Brandy Pots, see page 1 17. This flat is bold-to, there being 7 fathoms close to it, nearly up to the west end ; bod the whole of this side of the island is bound by rocks. The lower end of the Middle Bank, as already noticed, (page 118,) be.\rs S.E. ^ £. about a mile and a half from the Brandy Pots. Between the Middle Grouh'l and Hare Island are 10 and 16 to 20 fathoms of water. On the south side of the Middl i Ground, there are 8 and 9 fathoms ; at half tide, in this part of the river, a large ship may safely beat up or down. In proceeding to the westward from the Brandy Pots, there is a 3*ikthom rocky patch, and the knoll, at the west end of Hare Island Bank, to be avoided, the rocky patch being two-thirds of a mile eastward of the knoll, which is to the S.£. of the western end of Hare Island ; between them there are S) and 4 fathoms. The marks and bearings of these have been described, (page 117.) The Middle Bank, which extends between the Middle Shoal and Hare Island Bank, has 3} and 4 fothoms on it, and consequently this draught may be carried over it, but if a greater Mepth than 3 or S| fathoms is wanted. White Island roust be brought open to the eastward of the Brandy Pots. When White Island is brought to the westward of the Brandy Pots, or midway l>etween them and Hare Island, the mark is directly on the 3*fathom patch, before described. In standing to the southward from Hare Island, above the Brandy Pots, you will find 18 and SO fathoms of water. On the north side of the Middle Bank, 4 fathoms; but there are 8 and 9 fathoms on the south side of this bank, with gradual soundings to tlie THE HIVEK OF ST. LAWUKNCE, UPWAIID. 133 south shore. Five fathomi ii a good depth to tack in. Abreast of the middle of Hare Island the depths are nearly the same. The direct course from the Pilgrims to the Chequered Buoy on the south side of tht? Traverse is S.W. by W., the distance about 7) leagues. The South Traverse and coast between have been fully described. (Seepage 119.) The bank between the Pilgrim* and Kamourasca Isles is sleep-to. The mark for lacking here is not to shut the S.W. land with the great Island of Kamourasca— in standing to the northward, you wfU gain the depth of 'iO fathoms. KAMOURASv.A. — From the west end of Crow Island, th' third sf the Kamt.uraKa Islet, as described on page 1 18, the church bears S.E. nearly a mile. Betwe a is a place on which ships may safely be run on shore. To get in, bring the church to boar E.S.E., or some distance to the westward of Crow Island, and run for it. In passing in, you will carry 14 feet in common spring-tides, and 10 feet with neaps. T!'.e bottoir 'i of sofk m\6. Cape Oiable bears from Crow Island S.W. ^ W. about three miles, and a reef e\. ve. With easterly winds, the large cove on the S.E. of Cape Diable is ■■■■ tine place for A vessel to run into, should she have lost her anchors. To enter, bring the jhurch and Crow Island in the line of direction given above. Having arrived within the reefs, run up to the westward, leaving an islet that lies above the church on the l«ft side ; then put the ship on shore in the S.W. part of the cove, and she will be safe. Should the winu be westerly, put her on shore a little to the eastward of the church. SOUTH TRAVERSE.— From Cape Diable to the South Traverse, ihe course, if at three miles from the cape, will be S.W. by W. In proceeding, keep the northernmost part of the high land of Kamourasca in a line with the low point of St. Denis : this mark will lead to the Light-vessel and the black buoy off the point of St. Roque, and the white buoy upon the Middle Ground on the opposite side. When St. Roque church bean S.E. by S., the roadway beyond the church will be in a line with it, and you will be up to the buoys. From this spot run one half or quarter of a mile above the buoys on a S.W. course. From the spot last mentioned, the direct course upwa;.? a'.^/ig the edge of St. Roque's Bank will be S.W. i S. 4 miles, and S.W. by S. 2 miles, but considerable 'allowance must be made for tide, whether ebb or flood. These courses lead up to abreast of the i«d buoy, lying on the bank at 4i miles W.S.W. \ W. from the Point of St. Roque. The depths on the courses prescribed are 8, 7, and Q, fatlioms, varying to 11, and again to 5) and 6 fathoms. On proceeding hence upward, with the lighthouse on the Stone Pillar in sight, bearing S.W., you will keep in the best water, but south-westward of the red buoy are several detached 2^ antl 3-falhom shoals, on«r of which, the Channel Patch, is in the fair-way : the bearings and marks are described on page 120. It may be passed to the northward or southward, until you have the Stone Pillar at the distance of two miles, where the depths ul low water are 5 and 6 fathoms : from this place you bear up, on a south course, into the southern part of the Traverse ; and thence, not forgetting the Avignon or South JRocA, the course will be S.W. i W. until past the Stone Pillar and Goose Island Reef, which you keep on board upon the starboara side. If running from off Cape Diable for the Traverse, during the night or in a fog, strike the bank off that cape in 7 or 8 fathoms, and steer about W.S.W. By keeping the water, it will lead to the light-vessel. On passing the point of St. Roque Sand, the water will suddenly be found to deepen, whence you must haul to the southward, keeping the south side on board, and proceeding as above. If entering the Traverse with Uttle wind, be careful to allow for the first of the flood, as it sets strongly toward the point of St. Roque Bank. On going through, if more thaii half-flood, allow for a set to S.W. by W., and be sure always to keep the south bank on board. Above the Piliers, or Pillars, the tide sets fair up the river. In beating into and through this passage, be careful and tack from each side on th^ 'first shoal-cast of the lead : but most so to the northward, on the edge of the Middle Ground. Ten fathoms is near enough to the bank : and it is to be remembered, that the ship will always go farther over toward the Middle Bank than to the point of St. Roque Shoal. Anchorage. — Between th« Brandjjr Pots and Traverse, there is anchorage all alon^^ ti 134 SAILING DIRECTIONS FOR I t ! Uie English Bank, and upon the edge of the flat on the south side, between the Pilt^rims and the greater Kamourasca Isle, in 9 fathoms: under the Pilgrims in 3 fatlioms; off Ca|>e Diabiti, in 10 fathoms ; and thence, along the flat, up to the buoys. Should the flood be done, when a ship is in the Narrows, or between the buoys, or if any occurrence render it necessary to anchor thereabout, instead of coming-to in the channel, run below sither buoy, and come-to there, in 7 fathoms, on either side. The tides will be found much easier after half-ebb below tiie buoys than between them. In the deep water the tides here run very strong. Should the wind be inclinable to the southward, anchor to the southward of the stream of the black buoy, in 7 fathoms. Should a ship be a mile above the buoys, under similar circumstances, she should anchor on the edge of the South Bank, in 7 fathoms, with a good scope of cable before the tide comes strong ; for, if the anchor once starts, you may have to cut from it, as it seldom takes hold again, the grounds hereabout being foul and unfit for holding. Near the Pillars the tides are much easi''.r than below; at and above them, setting at the rate of not more than Si miles an hour. Ships bound down, with easterly winds, may anchor at two miles to the north-eastward of the South Pillar, in 7 fathoms ; or, to the southward of it, iu the same depth, with good ground. STONE PILLAR, or Pilieh de Pierkb, to Cbamb Island. — From abreast of the' Stone Pillar, or of the Avignon Rock, the direct course and distance to Crane Island, are S.W. } W. 4 leagues. On tliis course you pass Goose Island, and arrive at the Beaujeu Bank, the channel to the south of which is that generally used ; the depth in it is irregular, varying from 5 to 3 fathoms ; and there are two rocky patches of 2^ fethoms in the .way, and difSoult to avoid. The marks for passing the southern edge of the Beaujeu Batiic, along the eastern half of its length, are, the Stoue Pillar, its own breadth open to the south- ward of Goose Island Reef; and for the western part of the bank, which turns up slightly to the northward towards Crane Island, Point St. Vallier in one with the south side of Crane Island. The south side of the channel is a muddy flat, of 3 and 2 fathoms, with regular soundings toward it. There is good anchorage all the way op to Crane Island. Btund rK> nearer toward Goose Island Reef than 10 fathoms ; but above it you may stand toward the island |0 7 fathoms. (See page 120.) When up to the body of Crane Isbind, you may approach safely, as it is bold and clear, with 7 fathoms close to the rocks. Akchoraoe. — From off the Pillars to Crane Island, there is all the way good and clean ground. There is, also, a good road off the body of Crane Island, in 8 fathoms. The best road in the river, during easterly winds, is at a mile to the westward of Crane Island : and ships bound downward, if at the Pillars, and caught by strong easterly winds, had better run back to this place, than ride below, and risk the loss of anchors. CRANE ISLAND to POINT ST. VALLIER.— The direct course and distance from Crane Island to Point St. Vallier, are from W. by S. to W.S.W. four leagues. Between are the mud bank of St. Thomas, the Wye Rocks, the Belle-Chasse Islets, and the bank of Orosse Island. For degcription, tee page 121. The Bank of St. Thomas is above two miles broad, and is dry at low water, nearly to iis northern edge, which is very steep, and the marks for clearing it are Belle-Chasse Island and Point St. Vallier touching. When St. Thomas's Church IXars S.E. J| E. you will be abreast the point of the bank called Margaret's Tail, having a red buoy, and may thence steer directiv up, W.S.W. The mark for the southern erlge of Margaret's I'ail Bank is, the S. side of Ilaysuck Island anu Crane Island Church in one, bearing E.N.E. To avoid the Wye Rocks, never stand to the southward of six fathoms in tlte r^ight : and by day, observe that the long mark is to keep Belle-Chasse Islets just open to the auuthward of Point St. Vallier. They are out of the way of vessels, with a fair wind, and the cross mark for them is the Seroinaire on the north shore in one with the E. point of lleaux Island, and Crow Island just open to the westward of Middle Island. To the west of Margaret's Tail is a narrow rocky shoal called Crosse Patch, with 7 feet least water; between this shoal and Margaret's Tail is a channel 270 fathoms wide, and 5 fathoms deep, leading to the Quarantine Establishment on the soutliern sideof Grosse Island. For the suidaoce of the numerous vessels which stop there, a red buoy has been placed en the S. W. end of Margaret's Tail, as before mentioned, and also a white buoy on THE RIVER OF ST- LAWRENCE, UPWARD. 135 okl and clear, Chasse Xslaucl the N.E. of Grosse Patch; but in the absence of buoys, the east points of Grosse Island and the Brothers in one, bearing N. by E., will lead through. There is a passage to the west of Grosse Patch, between it and the island, but care must be ta! en to avoid a small rock, with 7 feet least water, lying 180 fathoms off Grosse Island, and on which a black buoy has been placed. When above Mantaret Island, stand no farther to the northward than into 6 fathoms. Reaux or Rat Island and Madame are flat to the southward ; 7 fathoms will be near enouerh to both. The south side of the channel, up to Belle-Chasse, is all bold ; 8 fathoms are close to it, with 7, 8, 9, and 5, fathoms, quite across. There is good clean anchoring- ground, and easy tides, all the way. When up to I3elle>Chasse, stand no nearer to these islets than 8 fathoms, and to Madame than 6 fathoms. The shoal extending from Madame has already been noticed, p. 121. The mark for clearing the southern side of Madame Bank, as well as the Grosse Island Tail and Patch, is. Race Island kept just open to the southward of Margaret Island. The mark for the S.VV. extreme, which is the puint of the entrance of the North Traverse, is, the north side uf Reanx Tsland just open to the northward of Madame Island, bearing N.E. I E., and St. Vallicr Church bearing S. iE. The cross mark for clearing it to the S.W. is, B«rtliier Church and the west end of Belta-Chasse Island in one. The North Channel and Traverse and the Middle.Traversb are bat seldom used, and the description of them will be found on p. 122. ST. VALLIER to QUEBEC—From the Point of St. Vallier to that of St. Laurent, or St. Lawrence, in Orleans, the course and distance are from W.S.W. to S.W, by W. nj miles. Both sides are bold ; 10 fathoms in the fair-way from Orleans, and 8 fathoms from the south shore. Ships may anchor toward the island, in from 16 to 10 fathoms. The Shoal of Beavmont, described in page 122, is steep- to. Make short boards until you are above Point St. Lawrence, when you will be above it, and may safely stand to the southward into 10 fathoms. From Point St. Lawrence to Point Levy, the course and distance are W. by N. two leagues. At a mile and a half westward from St. Lawrence's church is St. Patrick's Hole. {Seepage. ilo on the east, and there can be no trusting to the lead. The entrance is formed by Cape Gaspi on the north, and Point Peter, or Flat Point, on the south. In the Bay, at the distance of 1 1 miles from the entrance, within a point on the southern side, near its head, is an excellent anchorage, in from 9 to 12 fathoms of water, sheltered from all winds. There is, also, good anchorage with westerly winds, off Louisa Cove, on the western side of the bay, at about 6 miles N.W. by W. from Cape Gasp^, in 9 or 10 fathoms. Throughout the bay there is deep water ; nearly 50 to 40 fathoms in the middle, and 20 very near the shore on the eastern side : on the western side it shoalens more gradually towar ^ the coast. The tide flows until 2 h. 30 m. on the full and change. The shores of Gasp^ Bay are elevated, and the settlers upon them nearly all fishermen. Douglat Town is at the entrance of the River St. John, on the south side of the bay. The entrance of the Basin of Gasp£, whether viewed from without or within, is most beautiful ; wooded undulating hills rise to tlie height of 500 feet on either side. Their sides display the bright green fields of a humid climate, composing the farms of the princi- pal families at Gaspe. On proceeding to Gaspi to report or clear, it is not necessary to go farther up the Bay than the town of Douglas, which is about six miles below Gasp^, there to anchor in 8 or 9 fathoms, and thence go up in the boat. Here, in the summer, are almost regular sea and land breezes. The sea-breeze sets in about ten o'clock in the morning, and continues till about sunset ; it then falls, and the land-breeze springs up about ten at oight. At Grande Gr^ve, 3f miles within Cape Gaspe, the ridge of land narrows and dips, so that there is a portage across it, leading to the settlements at Cape Rosier. The Seal Rocki, with 4 feet least water, are 6| miles within Cape Gaspe, one mile S.E. by S. from Cape Brule, and half a mile off shore. They are the only detached danger in the bay and when on their outer edge. Cape Brul^ is in one with the next cliffy point up the bay ; and this only mark issuflScient for the safely of vessels beating, for the rocks are out of the way with fair winds. * At the distance of about 5 miles S.S.E. from Cape Gasip^ is a snnll Hshing bank, with 15&tboms over it, by some called the Norwich Bank, around which there is, at a short diiitauce, a depth of 5S and €0 fathoms. 140 WESTERN COASTS OF THE GULF. (' i i Further up ths bav, on the north side, is the Penituuta, which is a low sand, covered with spruce-trees, and it has several whale-sheds near its west point. About a mile south- ward of it is Sandy-heaeh Point, a very low and nanow point of sand, extending from the N.E. side of Cape Haldimand on the south<-west side or the bay, and which completely shelters the Harbour, which is within it. On the inner side of Sandy-beach Point, and near to its junction with Uie main land, stands a wooden windmill. The Harbour is d' 'ided into the N.W. and S. W. arms. The deep-water entrance of the S.W. arm is called the Batin of Gatpe, and it will hold a large numoer of vessels in perfect security. The collector of customs, and the principal families, reside on the shores of the Basin, the inhabitants of which, generally, are farmers. " Gasp^ Bay* is deep, and open to the S.B., but, from the fishermen's account, it scarce blows home from that quarter. There is good anchorage off Douglas Town, with Cape Haldimand bearing N. by W., in 7 fathoms water, about a mile and a half from the town. " The Basin of CNwp^ is a most secure place, but the entrance is rather narrow and difficult. From CafiB Haldimand a long sandy point stretches nearly across to the N.W. On the north shore, a little above Sandy-beach Point, is another sandy point, on which there are some wooden whale-sheds. By bringing the end of the trees over the Whale-shed Point on with the next point to the northward, which is covered with trees, it will lead you past Sandy-beach Point in 11 fathoms. This is a very good and plain mark; but, in coming into the harbour, it is requisite to run well to the northward to bring it on. When Douglas Town shuts in with Cape Haldimand, get the marks on as soon as possible, and you will be quite safe. " In working, the leading marks should only be brought on when standing toward Sandjr- beach. On standing to the northward you may go by the lead, but to the southward it is of little use. "The Seal Rocks are about three miles from the Sandy Point, and about half a mile from the north shore. When you bring Douglas Town on with Cape Haldimand, you will be well to the westward of them, and may bring the leadiL j mark on. On the southern extremity of the Sandy Beach stands a small wooden windmill ; when you bring this on with the west side of the point, you may haul up from the Basin. "Directions fob Entering the Basin. — From the fair-way between Whale Shed and Sandy-beach Point, a course W. ) S. will lead you to the entrance. Give a berth to the south shore till you get abreast the bluff on the north side, off which, at three-quarters of a cable, you will have 5 fathoms. The shoal water extends a cable and a half off shore, from abreast the first house on the north side, which is built of stone, and is the only stone house in the place. Run in a line up to the north point of the entrance, by keeping in 5 fiithoms on the north shore, and giving a small berth to the north point. You may nm in without any diflBculty, but must uways beware of the south point at the entrance, off which the shoal water extends to some distance. " From abreast the bluff on the north side, you will have three fathoms on the south side at three-quarters of a cable from the beach, until'you get about two cables' length from the small red house that stands on the south beach at the entrance, when it becomes necessary to haul right over for the nortli shore, in order to avoid the south point ; but large vessels should always keep on the north side, and never shoalen their water under 5 fathoms. "Directions for leaving the Harbour. — ^The high land at the back of the Basin forms a saddle, which is very distinct and easily seen. By bringing the houses on the south point at the entrance on with the saddle, Maring W. ^ S., it will lead you between Sandy Beach and Whale-shed Point in 12 fathoms, until the end of the trees on Whale-shed Point comes on with the next point to the northward, which is the leading mark past the shoal. When these two marks are on, the windmill on Sandy Beach will be in one with the west point of the beach, which is the mark for hauling up for the Basin, when coming in, but is a bad mark on going out. "Working into the Harbour. — In standing to the northward you can go by the lead, as the water shoalens gradually ; but in standing toward Sandy Beach, tack when the leading mark comes on ; that is, tack when the end of the trees on Whale-shed Point comes * The following observstioiu and directions are communicated by Mr. JetCety, M.R.N. GASP£ BAY. 14) on with the next point noithward of it, until the saddle comes on with the houses at the 8. entrance of the Basin, and vice-versft. ** The shoal water extends about 600 yards from Sandy Beach ; and from the high-water mark on Sandy-beach Point to the entrance of the Basin is N. 78" W. 2) miles. Whale- shed Point is quite bold ; you may approach it to half a cable. *' You may anchor anywhere in the harbour in from 5 to 1 1 fathoms, muddy bottom : but remember, in running up for the Basin, approach no nearer the south shore than in 5 fathoms with a large ship, until you get abreast the bluff on the north side ; then the south side is bold ; when you are within half a mile within Sandy-beach Point the leading marks are of no use ; then go by the lead." Directions for Gasp£ by Mr. Dunstervil'^ .. — In proceeding up to Gasp^ Harbour, keep the starboard shore on board, and you will soon raise a long low tongue of shingly beach on the larboard bow, which is about a mile in extent from the western shore : tnis forms a most excellent and secure basin of several miles in extent. In rounding the point of beach, give it a berth of a quarter of a mile, in order to avoid a shallow spit which extends from it. On proceeding upward you will open the harbour. The entrance of this is very nanow, with depths of 7 to 5 fathoms ; but unless you have a fair wind, you must anchor at the entrance and work in,'when you will be sheltered from all winds. Off the south point stretches a long spit of gravel, with from 3 to 8 feet over it, extending nearly two-thirds of the channel across. In' 1831 there was a beacon on its extremity. High Mrater, on the full and change, at 3 h. Rise, 3 feet. The winds, in fine weather, land and sea breezes ; but when heavy dew falls, with west or northerly winds, the pilots say * we shall have a southerly wind in a few hours.' I have firequently noticed it. MAL BAY. — From Point Peter^ the south point of Gasp^ Bay, off which there is a little islet, called Flat Island, the bearing and distance to Banaventure Island are S. by W. I W. six miles. Between, lies the bay called Mai Bay or Cod Bay, which is nearly five miles in width. Mai Bay has a clean sandy bottom, and there is good riding in ten fathoms, with the wind offshore. Should a ship be caught here with wind from the eastward, she can either run up off Gasp^ Bay, (if not able to clear the land,) or run to the southward between Bona- venture and Perc^ Islets, toward Chaleur Bay ; only taking care to avoid the Leander "Hock, which lies off Cape Despair. From Perc^, along Mai Bay, to Point Peter, there is an excellent beach for fishing, part of which is named La Belle Anse, otherwise Lobster Beach : close to this place is the house of the late governor Coxe. The town of PERci, situate on the southern side of Mai Bay, between the Perc^ Rock and White Head, is inhabited principally by fishermen, and has a gaol and court-house. In front of it the beach is convenient for the curing of fish, and off it are some of the best banks for catching them. At Perc^ the scenery is most beautiful. The Perci Mountain is 1235 feet in height, above the sea, from which it rises abruptly on the north side, where the precipices of red sandstone and limestone, 670 feet high, are washed by the waves. The remarkable shapes of this mountain, the Perc^ Rock, and Bonaventure Island, with its red cliffs, the fields, houses, and fishing establishments, form altogether a beautiful picture. There is much diversity and beauty in the features of the country about Gaspe and Perc^. Mountains of the height of from 1000 to 2000 feet, with great variety of form, are seen in the head of Gasp^ Bay, dividing it into arms, and forming fertile valleys, in which are farms requiring cultivation only, to amply repay the labour of the farmer. These mountains are of secondary rocks, sandstones, and shells, and are wooded to their summits. Bonaventure Island, which lies at a mile and a quarter to the eastward of the point of Perc^, is very high, particularly the eastern point, which is nearly perpendicular. This is little better than a barren rock, but yet a few persons are hardy enough to winter on it, for the sake of retaining possession of the fishing places they have occupied during the summer. Near the point stands the Perei Islet or Rock, a most remarkable barren white rock, which at a distance resembles a citadel. From the main to this rock extends a bank, which is nearly dry at low water; but between the rock and Bonaventure Isle is a good deep channel with anchorage. The Perci Rock is precipitous, nearly inaccessible, 288 feet high, and about 1200 feet 142 WESTERN COASTS OF THE GULF. :1 in length. The sea has formed through it three natural arches ; the central sufficiently large to admit a boat under sail to pass through it. In the spring the inhabitants ascend this rock for eggs, and in the autumn for the fine natural grass which grows on its summit ; although the ascent, by means of ropes and poles, is both difficult and dangerous. Nearly 2 miles S.S.E. from Cape Despair lies the sunken rock, called the Leonder Skodf over which there is a depth of 16 feet of water in one spot As this rock lies in the fair- way of ships coming from the northward, with northerly winds^ for Cbaleur Bay, it should be avoided by giving the cape a berth of S miles. The leading marks for it are as follow : the line of the White Head in one with the inner or N.W. end of Percd (lock, just passes outside of the shoal, in 7 fathoms ; therefore the whole of Perc6 Uock well open to the eastward of the outside o.' White Head, will lead clear outside of all. From half to the whole of the Perc6 Rock shut in behind the White Head, will lead clear between it and Cape Despair. The bearing and distance from Cape Despair to Point Maquerean are W.S.W. | W. 19 miles. Between these points lie the two coves called Fabot and Petite Pabot^ or Pabou and Little Pabou, as shown on the Chart On the western side of the entrance of Pabou Harbour is a small village ; and, on the opposite side, on a projecting point, stand the summer habitations of the fishermen, as they •re usually termed. Several streams descend into^this harbour from a numerous chain of small lakes to the north-westward. Next to the westward of Pabou is the township and inlet of Port Danibl, where vessels may find convenient shelter during westerly and N.W. winds. Port Da *el is open to winds from East to S.S.W. H.M. sloop Ranger, in 1831, anchored in 7 fathoms, with the west point of the entrance (to which a berth must be given) S.W. i W., about a mile and a half. The starboard shore is quite bold. A few descend- ants of French peasantry, who cannot speak English, reside here : they exist by cod-fishing, though a few salmon are occasionally caught. The fish, when cured, are disposed of at Paspebiac, or New Carlisle, to the S.W., where there is a store belonging to Guernsey ' merchants, who barter, at a great profit, with all the poor and industrious fishermen through- out Chaleur Bay, and round to Bonaventure Island. The time of high water here, on the full and change, is 2 h. m. The tide rises 4 feet. Paspebiac— At Paspebiac above mentioned, six leagues to the south-westward of Port Daniel, is a good anchorage, sheltered from the N.W. round by the eastward to S.£. by the main land, aud a long spit of beach, off which, to the westward, nearly a mile, extends a spit of hard ground, having from IJ to 2 fathoms over it. In order to avoid the latter, on coming from the eastward, do not haul in for the anchorage till the Protestant church, which is the westernmost, is brought to bear N.N.E. } £. ; then anchor, according to the draught of the vessel, in 6 to 4 fathoms, stiff clay, with the south point of the beach from E.S.E. to S.E. ; the Protestant church N.E. J N. ; off shore a quarter of a mile or less. Watering is . excellent, from half-tide, by filling in the boats by your own hoses. The water comes from a rock, is considered very good for keeping, and is gained without expense. It is situated nearly off the centre of the anchorage. The winds were light, from the southward and east- ward, during the stay of the Ranger, in fine weather. The land on this side of Chaleur Bay is high ; it is the same hence to Perce and Bonaventure Island. At the latter places, the winds, in the summer season, differ as much as eight points from those in Chaleur Bay. — (Mr. DunttervUle.) GBAXhBUa BAY.— Point Maquereau and Miscou Island form the entrance of Chaleur Bay, and bear from each other S. f E. and N. f W. distant 4^ leagues. From the entrance of Chaleur Bay to that of Ristigouclie Harbour, which is at its head, the dis- tance, on a West and N.W. by W. course, is 22 leagues. The bay is of moderate depth jiear the shore on both sides, and has, toward the middle, from 45 to 20 fathoms of water. The town of New Carlisle, on the harbour of Paspebiac, is the principal town of Chaleur Bay ; it is situate in Coxe Township, on the north shoie, as shown in the Chart ; «nd is so laid out as to become hereafter a compact and regular little place. The number of houses is about fifty, all of wood : it has a court-house and gaol. The situation is very healthy, and the surrounding lands some of the most fertile in the district In front is an excellent beach, as above described, where the fish is cured and dried. In the adjoining township of Hamilton, on the west, is the village of Bonaventure, con- »1 IRA MICH I. 143 It is entirely dependent taining about twenty-five houses and a church, on level ground, on the fishery. From Bonaventure the land turns to N.W. by N. towards Coicapediae Bmf, on the wost side of which is Mount Carlelon, 1830 feet higli ; the shore is irun-bound, and has sc^fial rivulets of fresh water. Within the bay in anchorage in 4, 5, and 6 fathoms water. The head of the bay is shoal, into which the River Caacapediac empties itself. In RiSTiGODCHE Harbour, at the head of Chaleur Bay, there is good anchorage in from 8 to 12 fathoms, land-locked from all winds ; but it is so difficult of access, that it should not be attempted without a pilot.* The tide flows here, on full and change, until 3 o'clock, and its vertical rise is 6^ or 7 feet. Vessels bound into Chaleur Bay should make for Miscou Island, which they can round by the lead, for it shoalens gradually from 20 to 3 fathoms, the latter depth being near Miscou Point ; should it be foggy, which in summer time is frequently the case, it will be advisable to steer from thence toward the northern shore, bearing about W.M.W., when you most probably fall in with Nouvelle Harboitr. Here stands a church, upon some rising ground to the northward of the town or village, which is built along the beach, and lies low. Proceeding westward up Chaleur Bay from hence, you will pass round the low point of Paspebiac, above mentioned, and reach New Carlisle. Having got abreast of this, if you are bound to Nipisighit Bay, or St. Peter's, then by keeping on the northern shore as thus directed, you will readily know how far you have proceeded up the bay, and may then haul across with greater certainty for the land, between Caraquette Point and Cape Idas, which you may approach to, by the lead, without the least danger. The land on the northern shores of Chaleur Bay is in a high state of cultivation, when compared with the southern shores ; and this, perhaps, is the principal cause why the fogs To the southward of Cape Tormentin, at the distance of 4} leagues, is the entrance of the River PhUipf a bar-harbour, having only 10 feet at the entrance. In advancing toward this place, when in the depth of 5 fathoms, another harbour will be seen on the eastern or larboard side, which is called Pogtoath. In the latter, ships drawing 17 feet load timber. This harbour is safe; but the entrance is so narrow as to require a Eilot. Ships commonly anchor in 5 fathoms, at 3 miles from shore, with the entrance earing to the S.E. From Cape Tormentin to Cliff" Cape, the bearing and distance are 8. by C. } E. 16 miles; from Cliff Cape to Shoal Point S.E. 3 miles; and from Shoal Point to Cape John S.E. by E. 1 1 miles. Between the latter lie the harbours of Ramsbeg and Tatma- goQche, which are good and well sheltered, but each requires a pilot. RAMSHEG HARBOUR.— The flats extending from each shore, at the entrance of this harbour, leave but a narrow channel, through which, at all times, excepting at slack water, the tide runs with great velocity, and renders the navigation into it very unsafe, although the depth up to the anchorage is sufficient for a frigate ; there being, in mid>channel, 3i fathoms at low water. In sailing in, steer south, westerly, toward Gravois Cliff, givi. % Shoal Point a berth of a mile, until the N.W. arm is well open; then steer for the latter, keeping your lead going, until the beach to the N.W. of Gravois Cliff bears S.W. by W. TATMAGOUCHE. — On the western side of Amet Isle, the passage is quite clear ; but, in sailing in from the eastward, between Cape John and the Isle, you should keep nearest to the cape, as a ledge extends from the isle to u considerable distance. Amet is a low island, without trees, and it will be most prudent to keep at least three-quarters of a mile from it. The best anchorage for ships is in Harbour or kiver John, on the east side, in 4 or 5 fathoms, muddy bottom. Small vessels may run up to Tatmagouche, and anchor off the town in 10 or 12 feet at low water. Here the tide rises 5 feet, on full and change, and flows till 7 o'clock. In coming from the eastward, when between Amet Island and Cape Johil, your course toward River John will be W. by S. In passing between the island and cape, you will have 4| fathoms, until you open the River John, on the larboard side. You will then have 7, 8, and 9 fathoms ; and, if nound for this river, or for Tatmagouche, may obtain a pilot, by making the usual signal. There is anchorage at 2 miles from shore. In Ramsheg, Tatmagouche, and John Harbours, ships of 15 feet draught load timber. The Ranger, in 1B31, anchored off Cape John in 9) fathoms, with Amet Island VV. by S. 3 to 4 miles. She passed over a ledge of rocky bottom, having over it 2} to 5 fathoms, at about two miles to the eastward of the island, and on which lobsters abounded. On any part of this coast you may anchor in the summer season. It is high water in the offing at 10 o'clock, and the rise is from 6 to 7 feet. The stream of flood sets to the N.W. as for as Cape Tormentin, expending its strength in the Bay Verte ; but from Miramichi and Cape Nonh, (Prince Edward Island,) the flood sets to the southward, about two knots an hour, (till o'clock,) to Cape Tormentin, whence it appears to run toward Hillsboro' Bay. The time of high water off Cape Elgmont, full and change, is 10 h. The stream runs two knots in the hour. Vertical rise, 4 feet : the flood sets to the southward. The tides meet at Cape Tormentin, off which the dangerous ledge above mentioned extends to the S.E., and over which the sea generally breaks. CARIBOU HARBOUR.— From Cape John to Caribou Point the course and distance are E.S.E. 6 leagues. Here the water gradually shoalens to the shore, from the depth of 8 or 9 fathoms, at two miles off. To strangers it may be dangerous to approach Caribou Harbour, as it has frequently been mistaken for Pictou, which lies to the south-westward, and 86me have lun on shore before the error has been discovered. For it is to be obaerred» that ships are seen riding, not in the entranee of the harbour, but within a sand-bank, stretching from side to side, with not more than 3 or 4 feet over it, and which appeairs like a good onannel. Small vessels load with timber here. Caribou may be known from Pictou by observing that the hollow land over it appears like a deep inlet; but the high lands of Pictou xeero to fold over each other, and blind the 146 PICTOU HAUROUR. •ntrance. The ledge* about Caribou extend more than a mile from aliore, and tome of them are dry at low water. Nearly in mid-channel, to the northward of Caribou Point, is a rocky ahoal of 10 feet, lying at shown on the Chart. It ii a quarter of a mile in circumference, and around it the depths are 4, 5, and 6 fathoms. The tide, both ebb and flood, sets rapidly over it. PIOTOU. — Pietou Harbour is the principal port of the north coast of Nova Seotii. It has a bar at its mouth, of 15 feet, inside of which is a capacious and beautiful basin, with 5, 6, and 9 fathoms, muddy bottom. The town is situated at about three miles from the entrance, and many houses are built of stone. It contains an episcopal, a Roman catholic, and two presbyterian chapels. There are, also, the academy, grammar.school, court' house, and a public library.* The population in 1828 was nearly 1500 souls, and it has since very ra|Mdly increased : it cannot now be less than between 2500 and SOOO. Pietou has beeu declared a free warehotaing port, and its trade is very coDsiderabie io lumber, cool, and the fishery. Coasters fron all parts of the Gulf of St. Lawrence rasoit to Pietou, and its exports have amounted to 100,000/. in a single year. One hundrad vessels have been loaded here with timber for Great Britain, and its exports to the West Indies were not less extensive and important.f — Bouchette, Vol. II. page 19. Within the bar and tlie beach, the water deepens to 5, 6, and 7 fathoms, muddy bottom. This depth continues up to the town, opposite to which a mud flat extends outward so far as to leave the channel midway between the two shores. Above the town the river divides into three branches, as shown in the Chart : of these, the eastern one is winding, but navigable to vessels diawing 15 feet, about four miles upward, at which distance the river is impeded by a bar, although above it the water increases. At 9 miles above the town of Pietou are the well-known coal-pits, the produce of which is brought down to the bar in large flat boats. The Middle and West Rivers are navigable upward to a considerable distancer The town of Walmsly, on the nortli side of this harbour, is the residence of the principal merchants who load timber in these parts. The light houte of Pietou is an octagonal wooden structure, painted red and white in ver- tical stripes,^ and exhibits a brilliant fixed light at 65 feet above the level of the sea. PICTOU ISLAND, which lies off the entrances of Pietou and Merigomish, is culti- vated, and contains about 3000 acres. Fine quarries of freestone have been opened here, and strong traces of coal are visible in several places about the cliffs. From the east end a spit of rocks extends about a mile; and, at the E.N.E. from it, one league and a half, is a snoal of 21 feet. Between the island and Merigomish the bottom b muddy, and the depth from 1 1 to 7 fathoms. H.M. sloop Ranger, in passing between Pietou Island and Cariboo Point, IBih of August, 1831, while in stavs, struck on a sunken rock, the circumference of which, on examination, was found to be 400 yards, and the tide set over it at the rate of 21 miles an hour, the flood setting to the N.N.W. making high water, on the full and change, at 9 h. 30 m. The position of the rock renders it extremely dangerous to ships leaving Pietou Harbour for the westward, as it lies immediately in the fairway. Tlie cbanael to * Coaches are now established ibr the communication between Tictou and Halifax, and a steamer between Fictou and Quebec. f In the Nautical Magazine of Jurfe, 1839, are some very interesting " Notes on the St. Lawrence Fiahertei)," by Capt R. Pair, R.N., and on Pietou are the foHowing remarks : — <• The trade of this port is rairfdiy increasing, and the town of New O/owau*, ia tbeneichhourhood of the ooai-minei, (disuat nearly 8 miles from Pietou,) promjass te be or ooasiderable hnportanee. Upwards of 30,000 tons of coal were exported from these mines in the year preceding our visit, most of which was for the United States, and in American bottoms. There is no fishing carried on in Pietou. The country around, being agricultucal, is rapidly improving i and the quick intercourse by steam with Prince Edward Island promises to be of great advantage." 1 A eircurostaoee, itUdi has often caused serious loss and damage to vessels navigating the cqasta of Neva Seoda and New Bnn*wiefc, in the spring mooths, should be attended to. The farms fronting the sea*coact are separated by worm fences, which in roost cases are at right angles to the coast line : and when their direction happens to be such that the prevalent snow-storms in winter cause a deposition, often several feet in heigbt, to leeward of them, which continues some wee1(S after the disappearance of the snow firom the fields themselves, they are exactly similar In appearance to the lighthouses on the coast, which latter are mostly built of wood, and aiere painted white; and so perfect is |,he resemblance, that the piasters of eeasters, and persons well acquainted with thejcowt, are themselves often misled.— Jtimf. Kendall, R.N. 1838. The lighthouses are now distinguisbable, from their being painted wirti black or '«d stripes, as described. PICTOU. 147 sting the cquts the Weatwird of Ihe ihoal it generally adopted, in whicli there is from 3) U> 4 faUiomi of water, with irregular soundings. The ehatutel between Pktou ItUmd and Caribou was shortly after sounded by Mr. DnnHertiUt^ the master or the Ranger, who found that the sunken rock, lying at about one.thir«l of the channel acrosa from the island, had about 13 feet ofer it, with the west end of PksioQ Island bearing E. ^ 8. At about two ships' length of it, eastward and westward, ate from 4 to ft fkthomt, and be< ween the rock and Picioa Island, in the centre, were 6^ fathoms at low water; but westward of the rock, from 3i io4| fathoms, hard ground: and, horn the irregularity of the soundings generally, it is recommended that no vessel of mote than 16 feet sliould ever attempt this passage. The long mark to clear the shoal to the westward is, a high hill inland, (ilie westernmost in light,) en with the highest part of tlie land at the south side of the entrance of the harbour* bearing about S. by W. | W. : and the mark to go over the rock is the top of the above-mentioned hill on with the rise of the northern point of the entrance to the narbour of Pictou, which has, or had, a clump of trees upon it. The Harbottr of Pictm is capable of containing ships of any burthen. The mark for running over the Bar, and clearing a spit of gravel, that extends from the northern point of the entrance of tbe bav that forms the harbour, is a stone on the south point uf the town, just within the spit of low gravelly beach on the southern side of the entrance into the narbour. The Ranger turned in, with the stone from end to end of the beach, and had from 3 to 4| fathoms. The beach to the northward of the narrows is very bold ; and as you approach the town, in beuting up, do not approach the southern shore into less than 4 fiuboms in a large ship, as a shoal bank extends nearly one-tbird of the channel across. With a fair wind you borrow on the north shore, where the water is the deepest, carrying from 6 to 8 fathoms, muddy bottom, and anchoring off a stake, near the south end of the town, in 7 fathoms. " PiCTOV * it a place of rising importance ; its timber trade has rather fallen off of late, b«t the coal-minet m the immediate neighbourhood have opened a very brisk trade in that article, which occupies tome hundreds of vessels, of all dimensions, in the coasting and foreign trade, many of which carry from AOO to 700 tons, chiefly trading to the United States. ** The be$t anchorage in Pietou Roads is in 7 fathoms, with the following bearings : — the li^hthoute west ; Point Garibou north ; and the Roaring Bull Point S.E. ; the latter it a bigh Muff, pointing to the touthward, and has a small white house on the slope. From lliit bhiff* a reef extends nortli three cables' length, and from Point Cariboo another, west, nearly half a mile. Here you are sheltered completely from the S.B. by the S., round to north, and, ill a great measure, as far aa N«B. by the island and reefs off it. In fact, the only winds that throw in My iea« are those from the S.E. by £. to N.E. by E. and they are fair for running into the harbour, which may be attempted, in almost any weather,, by ships drawing from 18 to 20 feet. " To run in, bring the small white house to tbe left of the lighthouse, and close to it, on with a long building appearing off the starboard point of the harbour, (it lies to the left of a small but remarkable gap in the N.W. land,) bearing W. 4 N. ; keep then on until Roaring Bull Point begins to be shut in with thie east land, by which time vou will be pretty dose to tbe low sandy beach on which the lighthouse stands : then haul over to the northward, toward a bushy tree, standing by itself on the north shore, until you are in mid- channel between it and the lighthouse point. You may then proceed up the harbour, west, in mid-channel, toward the point with the building, above mentioned, and, rounding it at a convenient distance, anchor at pleasure, off the town, in 7 or 8 fathoms. Or, if only taking the harbour for shelter, you may anchor anywhere within the lighthouse, in mid-ebonnel. Tbe holding ground is excellent, and you are here secure from all windt. *' On the inner bar, at high water, spring tides are from 22 to 23 feet of water; on the outer bar, 5 fathoms; between tbe bars, 7 and 8 fathomt. The tide, on full and change, flows at 10 b. and rises from 6 to 8 feet, according to the wind : neaps rise from 3 to 5 feet. The ^hthoute is painted red and white, in vertical stripes* and is very conspicuous for showing 9i fired light. *' Ib order to proceed in the night, with a vessel of easy draught, bring the light to bear * Rctou Roads and Harbour, as described by Mr. George Peacock, master of H.M.S. Andromache, 1839. 148 GITT OF CANSO 11 I VV. ^ N, and steer for it until within about 50 fathoms off it, and then haul round it gradu- ally, at about that distance, not going into less than 3 fathoms. " Pictou appears to me to be a harbour very easy of access, and very capacious. The roadstead is certainly one of the best in the world, the bottom of clay and mud. There is anchorage under Pictou Island, but it is by. no means to be recommended. This island may be seen from a ship's deck 4 or fi leagues off; a reef extends from its east end about a mile, and from its west end more than half channel over. The three-fathom bank, marked in some charts, it is said does not exist." — Nautical Magaxine, 1839, p. 146. In fine settled weather here are land and sea breezes. The tide runs at the rate of two knots. Every article of provision was found very cheap : butter, 7d. to Qd. the lb.; sheep, 15$. ; eggs, 5d. the dozen. Fish very scarce, but lobsters in abundance. MERIGOMISH, which is an e.Tcellent bar-harbour, lies 7 miles to the E.S.E. of the entrance of Pictou ; the merchants of which place have ponds here, for the reception of timber, with which a number of ships are anuually laden. To sail in for this place, bring the casi end of Pictou Island nearly north, and keep it so until off the harbour's mouth, where you may either obtain a pilot, or anchor in 4 fathoms. A Jtranger should not venture to enter the harbour without a pilot, as a ledge stretches off from either side. There is a depth of 14 feet on the bar at low water, and the vertical r 'je of tide is about 8 feet. The depth within is from 4 to 7 fathoms, soft mud. There is no harbour between Merigomith and Cape St. George ; but the coast is clear, high, and bold, and vessels may sail along it in safety, at the distance of a miie. As a place of refuge for small vessels in distress, there is a new pier on the coast, at 7 leagues to the eastward of Pictou, and at the indent formed by the rock called the Barn. There is good anchorage under Cape St. George, in from 10 to 7 fathoms, sheltered from west- erly winds. ANTIGONISH.— The entrance of the Harbour of Antigonish lies 10 miles to the S. by W. from Cape St. George. Here small vessels load timber and gypsum, or plaster, of which there is abundance in the neighbourhood ; but the harbour is so shoal that even these complete their cargoes without the bay, although the anchorage is not safe. The rivers which fall into this harbour run through many miles of fine land, and the population is considerable. At Pqmret Island, 6 miles eastward from Antigonish, ships of any size may load in safety. In sailing in, when from the northward, leave the island on the starboard side, keeping close to a rock, which appears 5 or 6 feet above water. This rock is steep-to, and lies off the east end of the island. Without it, at the distance of three-quarters of a mile, lie several sunken ledges, which are dangerous. AAer passing the rock, a bay will open on the starboard side, which you stand into, till you are shut in with the island, where there is anchorage in 3^ fathoms of water, at about half a mile from the island. AUBUSHEE, which lies between Cape Jack and the Gutof Canso, is a small harbour, occupied by an industrious and thriving people. Here a number of small vessels have been built, carrying from 15 to 50 tons. A rocky ledge extends without the harbour, in a north- westerly direction, as shown ou the Chart. Between Cape St. George and tite Gut of Canso, in fine weather, the winds draw from the southward and south-eastward ; and from the cape, which is high, to Pictou, from the S.W. ; but, in general, near the cape, the winds are ver^ variable. Off the cape, at about a quarter of a mile to the N.E. the pilots say that there is a ledge of sunken rocks, which extends to the northward. Westward of Cape St. George, and hence to Pictou Island, sheep and other stock are the same as at Pictou. Water cannot always be procured, as the springs dry up occasionally. THE GUT OF CANSO TO INHABITANT BAY. The OUT of OANSO forms the best passage for ships bound to and from Prince Edward Island and other places in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. It is shorter, and has the advantage of anchorage in case of contrary winds or bad weather. Its length is about four leagues, and breadth more than three-quarters of a mile. The east side is low, with beaches, but the west shore is mostly high and rockv ; and that part of it called Cape Porcupine is remarkably so. The deepest water i^ on the western shore ; but both shores are bold-to, and sound, excepting a sunken rock, which lies near a cable's length from the eastern shore> TO INHABITANT BAY. 149 and about midway between the southern entrance of tiie Gut and Ship Harbour, and two other rocks under-mentioned.* Mill Creek, Gypnm or Pltuter Cove, Venus' Creek, Ship Harbour, Holland Cove, or Pilot Harbour, and Eddy Cove, afford excellent anchorage, in a moderate depth, out of the stream of the tide, which generally sets in from the southward, but is very irregular, being influenced by the winds. After strong north-west winds, which happen daily during tlie fall of the year, the water in the Gulf of St. Lawrence is rendered low, which causes tha current to run northward through the Gut, at the rate of 4 or 5 knots, and the contrary happens after southerly winds. The time of high water in the Gut is 8 h. 30 m. ; but the tide in the middle runs strongly up and down, at least an hour after high and low water : again, in or after strong winds the currents appear as if not influenceid by the tide, but run sometimes at the rate of 3 to 4 knots. Gape St. George, which is a remarkable promontory, lies at the distance of 10^ leagues to the eastward of Pictou Harbour ; and a course of 6 leagues, thence to the south-eastward, will lead to the entrance of the Gut, whence you may run along the Breton shore. It is to be observed, that there is a ledge of rocks, in the offing, between Aubushee and the Gut, already noticed ; some of these are nearly dry at low water, and nearly in the direct course for the Gut; they must, of course, be carefully avoided. A lighthouie, on the western side of the northern end of the Gut, was established in 1842, in lat. 45° 42', and long. 6\^ 27'. The tower, painted white, stands at 120 yards from the shore, and exhibits a Jixed light, at 115 feet above the level of the sea. It may be seen from the greater part of the Bay of St George, and the shores of Breton Island, as far as Jestico or Port Hood. There is good anchorage under the lighthouse, with the wind off the land. Opposite Mill Creek, at the upper end of the Gut, on the Nova Scotia side, you may stop tide, or lie windbound, if it does not overblow. Keep the creek open, and come to anchor in 8 or 10 fothoms, within a cable's length of the steep rocks, on the south side of the creek. The best water is with the creek's mouth open. It will be necessary to carry a hawser on shore to the rocks, to steady the ship, as the tide here runs in eddies. You may obtain fresh water from the creek at low water. Upon entering the Gut, there will be seen on the larboard hand, a red house, on a point called Belle Ashe's Point, off which, at nearly a cable's length from shore, there is a sunken rock, which may be readily distinguished by the eddy of the tide. Within this point, on the S.E., is Gypsum or Plaster Cove, where shipping freq .ently anchor. When abreast of Gypsum or Plaster Cove, the remarkable headland on the western side, named Cape Porcupine, will bear nearly S.W. To sail into the cove, keep nearly in the middle ; and, when in 10 fathoms, let go your anchor. You will find sufficient room for swinging round, in 7 fathoms. SHIP HARBOUR, which lies half-way down the Gut, on the eastern side, is a good harbour for merchant-shipping. It is, however, more particularly useful to those sailing northward, being a good outlet. It is a very proper place for ships of 16 feet draught. If bound in, from the southward, give the starboard side a berth of a cable's length, (it being flat,) and run in until you shut the north entrance of the Gut, and come to anchor iq 4 or 5 fathoms, soft bottom ; where you may wood on the Breton side, and water on the opposite shore, at Venus' Creek ; the larboard side of the harbour is bolder.to than the starboani side, and deepest water. Without the harbour, one-third from the Breton side, you may anchor in <*, 10, to 13 fathoms, loose ground, in the strength of the tide. The Ranger anchored in 10 fathoms, with the church on the hill bearing £. by S., and the south point of the harbour south, about one mile offshore. Ships bound turoucu the Gut, from the norlAward, may proceed through it with safety, by keeping nearly in the mid-channel, there being no danger until they arrive off the south point called Eddy Point ; but, from this point extends a long spit of sand, * See the particular Chart of the Out of Canio. on the large Chart of the Gulf of St. Lawrence.— In this Chart we have inserted two rocks in the Out of Canso, which had not previously been laid down in any chart. They have been inserted on the authority of Captain Oeorge Dixon, of London. The first lies near the western side of Gypsum Cove, at the distance of about 60 fathoms from ^e shore; the other lies at about 100 fathoms without Bear Island, at the S.E. end of the Gut. On. each rock the depth of water is from 6 to 8 feet only. 150 INHABITANT BAY. with large round stones, which must be left on the stafboard side, at the distance of l»lf a mite from what may be seen above water. The race of the tide will serve to guide you from it. '- Ha vie; passed tlie spit of Eddy Point, yon vaty steer to th« S.S.E. until abreast of a A island which appears covered witfi green sproce-trees having red bark. Hence you proceed to sea, according to the Charts. Be 'cautious of running in the direction of a dangerous steep rock, called the Cerberus Hock, with only 10 feet of water ovei it, and on which the sea breaks with a wind. This rock lies with Verte or Green island in a line with Cape Hoagais, or Iron Cap&, on the Itl« of Madame, at the distancfe of about 4} miles from that island. At the entrance of the Out, within a mile of Eddy Point, there is a middle ground of 7 lo 12 fathoms, on which ships may stop a tide in moderate weather. To the westward of this ground there is a depth of 1 8 fathoms, and to the eastward of it 20 to 35 fathoms. With the wind inclining from the southward, steer in nearly west, snd keep the lead goings until you shoalen to 11 fathoms, when you may let go your anchor. Gypsum or Plaster Cove, is so called from its valuable quarry of gypsum, which appears to be exhaustless. The anchorage at the mouth of this cove has from 10 to 14 &thoms; bottom of soft mud. Cape Porcupine, opposite to this cove, is 562 feet in height, and this is the narrowest part of the strait. On the banks of the Gut, in general, the hills rise in easy acclivities, which present settlements, on the whole range of the shore. r, Sec.^Those who wish to anchor in Inhabitant Bay or Harbour, may bring the farm that is opposite to Bear Head * open, Bear Head bearing W.S.W. This mark will lead you clear, and to the southward, of the Long Ledge,t and in the mid>channel between it and the steep rocks on the east or opposite shore : at the same time, take your soundings from the Long Ledge,, or north shore, all the way till you arrive at Flat Point; then keep in mid>channel between Flat Point and the island opposite, from the N.E. side of which runs off a spit or ledge of rocks, at the distance of a cable and a half's length ; then port your helm, and run under Island Point, and come-to in 5 fathoms, muddy bottom. Up the river Trent are plenty of salmon, in the season, and there you may find wood and water. N.B. The leading mark to clear the steep rocks of Ste6p Point is, to bring the peninsula in a line over the point of Turbalton Head bearing S. or S. \ E. until you open the island to the northward of Island Point; then haul up for the outer harbour, and come-to in 10 or 12 fathoms, muddy bottom. Thote who are bound up the Gut of Cunso, and taken short by a N. or N.W. wind, at the south end of the Gut, and who are desirous of good and safe anchorage in 10 to 12 fkthoms of water, may come-to on the north side of &ar Island ; but should it blow hard, fo a gale of wind, down the Gut, this anchorage is not altogether so secure as a caveful master or pilot would wish. You must then leave the road of Bear Island, and sail round the south end of Bear Point, giving a berth to the spit that runs off it, of 3 cables' length, and haul round to the N.E. into Sea-Coal Bay, and come to anchor in 4, 5, or 6 fathoms, sandy and meddy bottom. Merits for anchoring, viz. bring Bear Head in a line over Flat Head, bearing W.S.W., or W. by S., and Cariton Cliffs to bear N. by E. or N. in 5 or 6 fathoms, and you will have a good berth, sheltered from the W.N.W. and N. winds. Here is sufiicieut room to moor leo or twelve sail of any ships of war, of the sixth to the third rate. Ships coming doum the Cut of Camo, which may have reached past Eddy Point, or as far as Cape Argos, and caught with a S.E. to a S.S.W. wind, and cannot bold their own by beating to windward, may bear up and come to anchor in Turbalton Bay, under Turbalton Head, where you may ride safely in from 5, 6, or 7 fathoms of water, muddy bottom. The marks for anchoring in Turbalton Bay are, to bring the peninsula point in a line over Turbalton Head, bearing S. or S. i W. ; or a point of land inland, a little up in the country, from Cw>e Argos shore, with pine4rees on it, open to the eastward of the lied Head ; or the said point of land with pine-trees on it, over the pitch or point of Turbalton Head ; you are then sheltered by the rooks, or spit that runs from Turbaltoik Head, in 4 to • Bear Head is the south-eastGrnmoat part of the Gut. ««t.l'«f^K Charuof Inhabitant Bay and Harbour, and of Breton Island, published by the Pro- prietor of the present work. »r ^ FHINC£ EDWARD ISLAND. 151 5 aod 6 fathoms of water, and will ride very safely on good holding groupd. But, should the wiod shift to tiie S.W. or N.W., you must take up your anchor, and beat out of the bay into Chedabucto Bay, and proceed on your passage to the southward. Should the wind over-blow« at S.W., so as to prevent your beating to windward into Chedabucto Bay, you may come to an anchor in Eddy Cove, bringing the low part of Eddy Point to bear S.S.E. or S. by E., in 5, 6, or 7 fathoms of water, taking care to give the ship sufficient cable, lest you drive off the bank into deep water, from 15 to 20 fathoms. TIDES ON THE SOUTH SIDE OF THE GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE. The tide rushes with g^t rapidity through the Gut of Canso : and, in the narrowest part of the Gut, or at Cape Porcupine, it seldom runs at a slower rate than 4 or 5 miles ia an hour. Here it flows, on the full and change, at 9^ h. Along shore, past Auburfwe and Antigonish, it sets toward Cape St. George; and, rounding that cape, pnieeeds thence in a north>'/vesterly direction. On the south shore of Northumberland Strait, the time of flowing, on the full and change, is from 7 to 8 h. The perpendicular rise is from 3 to 7 or 8 feet. Tlie tides here are very materially varied by the winds ; and it has been fou.id that, at times, the stream of the Gut of Canso has continued to run one way for many succes- sive days. cd by the Pro- II.— PRINCE EDWAKD ISLAND. This island is a distinct governnxent, though sobordinate to th«> British oomraander-in- chief in North America. It is well settled, and possesses a goon soil, fit for all general purposes. The island is exempted from fog, while the surrounding coasts of Nova Scotia, Breton Island, and New Brunswick, are frequently covered) \v!th it. Indeed it presents a striking contrast. The first appearance of the island is like that of a large forest Uoing from the sea, and its aspect on approaching nearer is beautiisi. T^c red clifls, which sur- round great part of the coast, then appear: these are uotr'gli TFu imds, excepting the farms, whicii are cleared, are covered with lofty trees; and b :- caiid-^i'.u. which border a considerable part uf the north side, are covered with ^ k'wh sisong gra >!^, i>'ixed with a kind of pea or vetch, which makes CRcellent hay. The cy.u\ia ks generally liealtby and tem- perate, and not subject to the sudden changes of v. either experienceu '.i'. England. The winter here sets in about the middle of December, and cua:mn*t unt3 of trees, which produce great quantities of excellent timber, &c. The greater part vi' b» inhabitants are employed in farming and fishing. Charlotte Town, situate between 'Y ork and Hillsborough Rivers, on the southern side of the island, is the seat of government. Although surrounded by Canada, Nova Scotia, Newfoimdland, &c., the cliraatts of this island is, by many degrees, more mild and favourable than that of either of those oolcoies. The winter is two months shorter in duration, and the frosts much less severe, with a con* siderably less fall of snow. Fevers and otlier diseases of the United States are unknown here. The population of the island, according to the census of 1827, was 30,000 ; in 1833, it was 32,349 ; and in 1841, 47,034. The coast forms numerous harbours, many of which are, however, fit for small vessels only. The principal loading ports are, on the es^^tern side, Cardigan Bay, or the Three hivert, and Murray Harbour ; on tkeS.E., Hilltborovgh Bay and River ; Bedeque Bat/ on the southern side; Richnmnd Bay and Holland Harbour on the north. CARDIGAN BAY, or the Three Rivers, lies between Broughton island and Panmure Island ; it is the common entrance to three rivers ; namely, Cardigan River, Hrudenell Eiv«r, aed Montague River. In the former there arc &om 7 to 3 fathoms of water, and in the others from 4 to 2 fathoms. George Town stands on a peninsula between the rivers f:': 152 PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND. IP I n Brudenell and Cardigan. In these places many large ships have loaded timber. There is anchorage without, in Cardigan Bay, in from 10 to 15 fathoms, where a pilot may be obtained. MURRAY HARBOUR lies close to the north-westward of Bear Cape; and the entrance is narrow and shoal, difficult of access, and not having more than 12 feet of water. But small ships have frequently loaded here. Vessels from the eastward, and bound to Three Rivers or Murray Harbour, must avoid coming too near the east point, from which a ridge of sunken rocks stretches off about a mile ; the ground of the eastern coast is clear between the east point and the Wood Islands, and there is a depth of 3 fathoms of water all the way, near the shore, and good anchorage. HILLSBOROUGH BAY is the finest bay in the island, and the River Hillsborough is a fine navigable river ; but timber here is not plentiful. Before Charlotte Town, in this river, there is good anchorage in from 6 to 9 fathoms. Lobsters and oysters are found in abundance in the bay. Vessels from the eastward, when bound to Hillsborough Bay, and passing Pictou Island, must cautiously avoid the rock of 10 feet, which lies to the northward of Caribou Point, (see page 146,) and 5 miles N.W. J N. from the west end of the Island : at the same time, also, they must equally avoid the Indian Rocks, which lie off the shore of Prince Edward Island : the latter are covered at high water, and are very dangerous in the night. At about three miles to the N.W. of the Indian Rocks is a shoal, on which H.M. sloop mjiemttn grounded, 23rd of June, 1826. The bearings taken at anchor in 7 fathoms, at 2^ or 3 cajoles' length S.S.W. from the spot on which the vessel grounded, were. Point Prim (on which is the lighthouse,) N.N.W. $ W. ; South Woody Island E.S.E. j^ R. ; a point (supposed Point Jenyns,) N. ^ W. ; a merchant brig on shore on the Indian Rocks, S.E. The least water found upon the shoal was S feet, at about half a cable's length to the northward ot wnere the Rifleman grounded. It appears to be a rocky shoal, of consider- able extent, two miles from the nearest shore, that of Belle Creek. PICTOU to CHARLOTTE TOWN.— From the harbour of Pictou, when bound to Charlotte Town, H.M. sloop Ranger passed between Pictou Island and Caribou Point, and had from SJ to 4 fethoms, hard bottom, in approaching Point Prim : the point is low, and forms the eastern side of the entrance of Hillsborough Bay ; a fixed light is exhibited on it. Give it a berth of nearly three miles before you haul to the northward for Ciiarlotte Town, or for Governor's Island on the N.E. From the S.W. side of Governor's Island, a long spit of hard ground extends two miles. The long mark for hauling to the M.N E. is a tower on the western part of Charlotte town, open to the westward of the blockhouse tower, on the larboard side of the entrance to the harbour, and on which signals are made to the town, signifying vessels in the offing. . In the channel up, the Ranger had from 5 to 7 fathoms ; and on approaching the block- house, 10 to 12 fathoms, clay bottom. From the starboard point of the entrance extends a sandy spit, the way to clear which is, to run to the northward till the signal-staff on the fort, (which is nt the west end of the town,) is on with the church-steeple; you will then have from 8 to 10 fathoms, to the anchorage. On steering for the town, keep rather near the larboard shore. The Ranger anchored in 10 fathoms, at about 50 fathom:; t'rom the town, with the flag- staff at the fort N. by W. i W., and the church- steeple N. .J E. Here it is high water, on the full and change, at tO h. Fine rise is about 8 feet. At Charlotte Town, on Saturdays, is an excellent market, where the .necessaries of life are exceedingly cheap. Wheat is shipped at 5», the bushel ; meat from 6d. to 3\d. per lb. ; butter 7d. to 8d. per lb.; sheep, 12f. to 15i. each ; eggs, 15(/. per dozen ; ail currency. Fish are very scarce, but oysters in abundance, and very good. BEDEQUE BAY, which lies between Cape Egmont and Carieton Point, has good anchoring eround in from 6 to 8 fathoms. The harbour will admit ships of 400 tons, b«tt the channel is narrow, crooked, and requires a pilot. It is the chief port for loading timber: but the v/vdet freezes much sooner than at Pictou, or the harbours on the Novn Scotian coast. Bktwken Cape Egmont and West Cape, in Halifax or Egmont Bay, there is good anchorage with northerly and easterly winds, in 6 or 8 fathoms. HARBOURS IN PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND. 153 VV EST CAPE.— About the Wesl Cape of the IslanJ a hard sand-bank, of 10 feet water, extends to the distance of three miles from the cape. If we take an extent of three miles with the compasses, and describe a circle from Cape West as a centre, this will give the shape and extent of the bank very nearly. There is a swash or channel within it for small vessels, close in shore. NORTH SIDE of the ISLAND.— At the east point there is a reef extending two miles from the land, and which should not be approached in the night nearer than to the depth of 17 or 18 fathoms. At a league to the southward of it, and parallel with the shore, is a shoal of two fathoms, named Wright's Bank. In the passage between it and the land, which is half a league broad, are 6 and 8 fathoms. Al! the Inlets on the north side of the island have bars at their entrance, with from I i to 3 fathoms over them, and are not to be attempted by strangers without a pilot. Those going through the Strait of Northumberland, if bound to Holland Harboijr, or any port ca the north side, must be careful to give the North Cape of the Island a good berth, as the sunken rocks stretch off full two miles. All the rest of the coast of the north side of the island is perfectly clear of foul ground, to within a quarter of a mile of the shore ; and there is good anchorage as near the shore, in 3 fathoms of water. The only harbours on the north side of the island, for ships of large burthen, are Holland Harbour and Richmond Bay ; and off these harbours the sand-banks, which form the bars, run off more than a mile from the shore. Ships from the Eastward, bound to harbours on the North Side, if the wind be favourable, should prefer sailing down by the north coast to going through the Strait of Northumberland ; not only on account of sea-room, but because the mo&l prevailing winds are from the S.W. They may run down the coast, till they approach Richmond Bay, to within a mile of the shore. St. PETER'S is the first harbour on the north nde, when coming from the eastward; it is fit for small vessels only. The bar runs out about a quarter of a mile. The next is Tracadie or Bedford Bay^ thib has about 8 or 10 feet of water on the bar, which extends outward half a mile. RASTICO or Harris Bay is very shallow oi;i the bar, and calculated to admit fishery schooners only, fhe bar stretches off nearly half a mile. New London or Grenville Bay has about 8 or 10 feet of water, but the bar is very diffi- cult. The latter extends off nearly half a mile. RICHMOND BAV, or Malpec, is a spacious harbour; has about 17 or 18 feet upon the bar. The sands which form the bar extend more than a mile off the harbour. The shoals on each side are generally discernible from the swell on them, and the course in and out is East and West. On a vessel's anchoring off the bar a pilot will come off. There are two entrances into the bay; between them is Fishery Island. The eastern is the only channel by which a vessel of burthen can enter, the western channel being very shallow and intricate. Vessels usuallv complete thinr lading at about a mile within Fishery Island, but a con- siderable current runs there; rafts of timber frequently break adrift in blowing weather; and, on the ebb-tide, are frequently carried to sea, when a great part is lost. The anchor- age is good, and vessels lie in perfect safety. HOLLAND HARBOUR, or Cascumpec, is the westernmost harbour on the north side. Heie the sands form a bar as at Richmond Bay, and run off about a mile and a half. The harbour is easily known by the' sand-hills which extend along the coast. At about half- way between the entrance of Richmond Bay and Holland Harbour, is one sand-hill, near Conway Inlet, much higher than the rest. Holland Bay may be known by its being at the west end of all the rango of sand-hills. There is good anchorage close to the bar in from 5 to 8 fathoms. There is a depth of 18 feet of water on the Bar, and it is not difficult for a alranger to run in with a snJp not drawing more than 12 feet of water. There being two leading marks, painted white, bearing ,W. by N. by compass, a "essel of this draft, by keeping the two marks in one, with a leading wind, may run in with perfect safety. But, as these marks will carry a vessel over the south tail of the northern sand, vessels drawing more than 12 feet should not venture without a pilot. There is a buoy on the end X ,1 if r I III IIWi 'P' i ■■i\ < '} !,i « H 154 DIIETON ISLAND, of the south sand ; between that and the tail of the north shoal there is 18 feet of water. Vessels entering the port, if drawing more than 12 feet of water, should not bring the marks in one till they are within the bay. The soundings of the harbour are regular, and the ground clear. Ships, on coming to anchor off the bar, will immediately be attended by a pilot. There is shoaler water between the outer and inner harbour, on which is about 14 feet of water in common tides. Vessels generally load to 13 feet in the inner harbour, and completi their cargoes in the outer one. In the former, they lie alongside a wharf at HillN 'i'owjj, in 4 fathoms of water, where they lie without any current, as in a dock. In the oiu : uarbour the spring-tide runs strongly, but the water is smooth, the sea being broken 'tixby the bar. HcLf./!ND Harbour is the most convenient port in the island for ioading timber, at which ij eru is a very large quantity ; also a saw-mill, for cuttiug plank and boa-d. "'he < 'TRRENTS around the island are very irregular, frequently running many days a'.ong the north coast, from east to west, and at other times from west to east. The ^> D£S, also, in the north-side ports, are {'regular, excepting spring-tides. These •omnlif nr keep flowing for forty-eight hours, and at other times not more than three. In commoa tides, the water seldom rises more than : wo feet; in jipiing-tides, (except in strong winds from the northward and eastward,) not more than five feet. III. BRETON ISLAND, WITH CHEDABUCTO BAY. ZSXiAVD, commonly called the Island of Cape Breton, lies be- tween the parallels of 45° 34' and 47° 3', and between the meridians of 59° 40' and 61° 35'. Its shire town and capital is Sydney, a free port on the N.E., situate on a harbour of the same name. The courts of justice and public offices are kept here, and here, also, the principal oflRcers of the island reside. It contains about sixty houses, besides a government house, stores, and barracks ; likewise episcopal, Roman catholit:!, and dissenting churches. The streets are regularly laid out, the houses tolerably good, and the grounds in the viciriity cultivated with some taste ; so that, on the whole, it presents a pleasing appearance. The population exceeds 500. The harbour is ^nc of the roost capacious and secure in the provinces; it is two miles wide at its entrance, four miles above which it diverges into two extensive arms, upon one of which, about seven miles from Un sea. the town is built on a peninsula, affording abundant suitable situations for wharts, dockyards, &c. The surrounding country is one of the finest agricultural tracts in the island : the adva ?ngfs for carrying on the fishery are excellent. The principal coal-worK.6 ure carried on in .he neighbourhood, where useful timber abounds. In the winter season, when the weather is mild, the S.E., N.E., and N.W. coasts of Breton Island abound with all sorts of fish. The climate of Breton Island is very similar to that of Nova Scotia, and is considered by the inhabitants to be quite as conducive to health and favourable to agricultural pursuits AS th.'it of any of the British American provinces : but it is allowed that it is somewhat colder in winter and hotter in summer, more irregular, and therefore less pleasant than the neigh- r juring peninsula. The natural productions are, in all respects, similar to Uta^e of Nova Scotia. The amount of population is about 20,000. Of the interior of the island, like Newfoundland, but little is known. Too much luaution cannot be exercised when approaching this island, from any direction. The cunents set alternately about Cape North according to the winds at sea, both from the westward and eastward, and their effects about the Isle of St. Paul have already been noticed. in the description of the Gut of Canso, already given, (page 148,) we have noticed the general appearance of its coasts. On proceeding toward this straii, it should be remarked that the Isles of Canso, on the Nova Scotian side, are surrounded with many low white rocks and breakers. The south shore of Chedabucto Bay is iron-bound and steep-to ; its north shore is of red cliffs and beaches. " Of the Gut of Canso, from the southern entrance northward, the western shore, through- out, ifl high, rocky, and steep ; the eastern shore low, with beaches. From the nort(it end WITH CHEDABUCTO BAY. 155 N.W. coasts of of the Gut, the eastern thove to Jettico, or Port Hood, is distinguished by high, rocky, red cliffs. The opposite shore has several remarkable cliffs of gypsum, or plaster, which appear extremely white. Cape St. George, the western extremity of St. George's Bay, in Nova Scotia, is iron-bound and very high, its summit being 420 feet above the level of the sea. JESTICO, or Port Hood, situate on the western side of Breton Island, is a safe harbour for frigates with any wind, but particularly from the S.W. to S.S.E. round by the north, ward ; the anchorage is in from 4 to 5 fathoms, mud and sandy bottom : here you may wood and water. The leading mark going in is, Cape Linzee on with the highest sand-hills that are on the N.N.E. side of the beach, bearing N. by E.or N.N.E. : these kept in a line will lead you clear of Spithead, in 4 to 6 fathoms. On the opposite shore is a long and broad flat, stretching from the shore three-quarters of a mile, called the Dean, to which come no nearer than in 4 fathoms. Cod-fish is dried on this beach ; and, in the season, June and July, is a good herring fishery. (See the Chart of the harbour, by Mr. Backhouse.) On the 31st July, 1831, H.M. Ship Ruttger anchored here; and Mr. Dunsterville describes the place as follows : " On the S.W. point of the entrance a bank of hard sand commences, and extends out to a spit off the first sandy cove from the outer point, nearly half a mile from the shore, and is very steep ; 4 and 5 fiihoms close-to. On the opposite shore, and half a mile within, a long tongue of sand stretches out, which is nearly dry. These spits completely shelter vessels from any winds from S.W. to S.S.E. The anchorage is in 5 fathoms, within the spits, muddy bottom. " From the south point of Just au Corp Island, with a fair wind, steer east, passing about half a mile to the southward of the S.W. point of the harbour ; and when it is perfectly open, steer about north, or N. by E. for a break in the land, which is a low gravelly beach ; and as you approach the harbour the shoals are generally s^en. In die fairway you will have from 7 to 7^ fathoms ; but, between the island and the main the soundings are uneven and unsafe to pass through, unless surveyed. A bank, the Houdic, with 10 feet thereon, extends about five miles from shore, at about two or three leagues to the southward of the harbour, and is in the fairway of ships bound for the Gut of Canso. H. W. full and change about ten o'clock. Tide not perceptible ; rise 4 to 6 feet. The winds, when from the southward through the Gut of Canso to Cape St. George, generally are from S.S.W. or S.W. In August, 1831, the Ranger, from hence, beat through the Gut of Canso ; anchored at the northern entrance, on the starboard shore, in 12 fathoms, to the eastward of Cape Jack, about a mile and a half off shore. When it has not blown strong from any quarter, the tides here are r^ular, running nearly three knots an hour: flood setting to the northward. H. W. full and change, at about 8 h. 30 m., rise 6 feet. From Jestico, the north-western coast of Breton Island bears nearly straight, in a N.E. by E. direction towards Cape North, in lat. 47° 3', long. 60' 20' 20', a distance of above 80 miles, off which cape is the island of St. Paul, with its two lighthouses, as described on page 86. On the N.W. c<»ast,all along from Cape North to Cape Linzee, the land of the country is very high, and in some places falls gradually to the shora. On this side of the island you may safely stand in to the distance of two leagues from short, until you arrive off Just au Corp or Henry Island, when you may stand within one mile of the shore. On this side of Breton Island are several salmon rivers. South-westward of Cape North is Ashpe Barbour, where vessels can find shelter ; and the water is deeper along the coast, close in shore, as far as Cape Ensum^, than it is further to the south. ST. ANNE'S HARBOUR, situate on the N.E. side of the island, was called by the French, when in their possession. Port Dauphin, in honour of the heir ta the crown, and is a very safe and spacious harbour. It has but a narrow entrance, and carries 4,ii fathoms at low water, until you join the bis^ch. When in mid-channel, you will have 9 to 10 fiitboms, and in the harbour from f< io fathoms, muddy bottom. On the north side the land i? very i!jr ^d a suip may be loaded in one day, from a cascade which runs from the top of the ic'.''; I'i*- Guernsey and Jersey men dry their fish on this beach, and it is a safe retr« *t itotr inQ sea.* • Sec the Survey of the Harbour, by Mr. Backhouse. '! ■J I n 1^6 GRAND BHAS d'oR ENTRANCE. 7^e more particular Direciiontfor St. Anne's Harbour, as given by Mr. Backhouse, are as follow : — After you have passed the Siboux or Hertford Isles, on the east side of the entrance, keep the south shore on board, if the wind be to the S.E.; and as you approach Passage Point, bring Cupe Knsum^, or C. Smoke, which lies to the northward, nearly on with Black Point : steer with these marks in one, until you are nearly abreast of Passage Point, off which lies a sunken rock of 6 feet of water, and opposite to which begins the spit of St. Anne's Flat, and the narrowest part of the channel. Now keep a small hummock up in the country, nearest to the shelving high land to the westward of it; which hummock is on the middle land from the water side, in a line over the fishing-hut, or fishing-stage, erected on the beach : this will lead in the best water, until you enter the elbow part of the beach. When advanced thus far in, keep the opening open, about the size of two gun- poris, which makes its appearance up the S.W. arm. This opening looks like two steep cliffs, with the sky appearing between them, and will lead you between the beach and the south shore, in mid-channel, through 9 and 10 fathoms, and past the beach point, off which a spit stretches to the S.W. about two cables' length. Having passed this spit, come to anchor in either side of the harbour in from 5 to 10 fathoms, muddy bottom, and sheltered from all winds. GRAND BRAS D'OR— The following Directions for the Navigation of the Great Channel of the Bras o'Or, between Sydney Harbour and Port St. Anne, hav^ been written by Mr. Thomas Kelly, a pilot of that place. They were obligingly communicavr that Aau of the Lake called St. Patrick's Channel, and up to Whookamagh. — From Red-Head you will steer well over for^the Duke oj Kent Island, to avoid a mad shoal which runs off from M' Kay's Point. When abreast of the western end of the Duke of Kent Island, steer for Wassabeck Head until abreast of Stony Island. Then steer for Cranberry Head, so as to clear a shoal lying off from Wassabeck Head ; when abreast of Cranberry Point, steer well for the Bell Rock, to avoid a shoal lying on the south side of the channel ; when abreast of the Bell Rock, steer for Green Beach, observing to keep Baddock River shut in until you are well up with Green Beach. You will then steer for a beach on the south shore, until you cross the opening of the Narrows ; you may then steer through the Narrows, keeping the middle until you come to the western end, when you must haul round the southern shore (beach), keeping the south shore until abreast of the Plaster Cliffs : you are then clear of all, and in the Whookamagh Lake." SYDNEY HARBOUR. 157 Of tue Amchoraoe throuoh the Bras d'Or. — <'The fitn anchorage is the Round Cove, where you may anchor in 7 or 8 fathoms. You may anchor in 5 or 6 fathoms, in the middle of the harbour, on a middle ground : the marks of which are, to bring the Table Island a handspike's length open of Black Rock Point, and Point Jane bearing N.W. On the north side of the harbour there is good anchorage as far up as the Lower Seal Islands, and to the eastward of the Upper Seal Islands in 5 fathoms, and to the westward of the same islands in 7 fathoms. Tnere is no other place of anchors^e from thi!i to the Big Harbour, where you may anchor in 7 or 8 fathoms ; from thence you may anchor at any time." Settino o/* the Tide in Grand Bras d' Or.—*' The first quarter flood sets from the northward, directly over the shoal ; last quarter W.S.W., being directly through the channel, and meeting with the tide coming over the shoal, sets toward the Black Point, which occa- sions it to shoot across the Gut, making a number of whirlpools and strong eddies on each side of the channel, which slacks two or three times during the tide. The first quarter ebb sets over the shoal to the northward ; last quarter directly through the channel. — N.B. The tide of ebb is the fairest setting tide. The tide runs in until half-ebb, and out until half-flood, in regular tides ; but the winds make a great alteration ; N.E. winds making high tides, and S.W. neaping them ; also tides running out with S.W. winds until high water, and in until low water with N.E. winds. Tides rise four feet, unless afiected by winds. High water ten minutes past eight o'clock, full and change. Bearings by compass." OBSERVATIONS ** Messrs. Duff'us's Store is a fishing establishment. Mr. Dufi'us's House is on Kent Island, formerly Mutton Island. The aforesaid Thomas Kelly piloted the ship Pitt, of St. Kitt's, burthen near 400 tons, laden with timber, and drawing about 18 feet of water, safely through the foregoing described channel from Kent Harbour.*' The N.E. Coast of Breton Island, between Scatari Island and Cape Dauphin, is, low ; but, from Cape Dauphin to Cape Ensume, or Cape Smoke, it is high. Between Scatari Island and the entrance of Port St. Anne, a vessel may stand in-shore, to 15, 10, and 5, fathoms, (clear water,) gradual soundings. lOURf formerly called Spanish River, the entrance of which lies 4 leagues to the S.E. of that of St. Anne, is another excellent harbour, having a safe and secure entrance, witb soundings regular from sea into 5 fathoms. This place abounds with excellent coal. In going in, give the two points of the entrance a berth of two or three cables' length, approaching no nearer tlian 6 or 5 fathoms. The soundings are regular to each shore to 5 and 4 fathoms. In the inner part of the entrance, Beach Point and Ledge, on the south side, are steep-to ; but Sydney Flats, on the opposite side, are regular to 4 fathoms. When past the Beach Point, you may run up the river Dartmouth to the S.W. and come to anchor in any depth you please, to 5 and 10 f jiern side of the entrance to the harbour of Louisbourg, 60 fathoms in-shore, lat. 43^ 54' 30", long. 59° 55' 30". It stands on the site of the old French lighthouse, (which was succeeded by a beacon,) and shows a fixed light, visible at sea, from off Cape Portland to the south-eastern extremity of Cape Breton. The lighthouse, (which is a square building,) is painted white, with vertical black stripes on either side, in order to distinguish it from other lighthouses, and to render it conspicuous when the back land is covered with snow. The following remarks may be of service to vessels bound to Louisbourg: — When coming from the eastward, they should bring the light to bear W.by N., or more northerly, before they run for it ; and from westward, N. by E. or more northerly, in order to clear Green Island and the Ledges, which lie three-quarters of a mile S. by W. 4 W. from the light. When in tbe entrance of the harbour, which is near ?ialf a mile wide, with the light bear- ing N.N.E. two or three cables* distance, steer W.N.W. for half a mile, to avoid the Nag's Head, a sunken rock on the starboard side, bearing W. by N. from the light. The N.£. arm of the harbour affords the safest anchorage. The light of Louisbourg bears about S.S.W. i W. from the revolving light on Scatari Island. From the entrance of Louisbourg to Guyon Isle, called also Portland Isle, the course is S.W. by W., and the distance more than 3 leagues. Between lies the bay called Gabarus Bay, which is spacious, and has a depth of from 20 to 7 fathoms. Off the south point of this bay, called Cape Portland, lie the Cormoranta, a number of islets and rocks, which are dangerous. Blakcuerotte Cliff, on the touth coait, is a remarkable cliff of whitish earth, in latitude 45^ 39)', and longitude 60° 20'. Four miles to the .westward of it is a small woody island, lying at the distance of two miles from shore, and off the little harbour called St. Esprit. Without this island, at the distance of a mile and a half, on the S.E., is a breaker with rocks, on which the lonct was wrecked in 1836. The land hence to the Isle of Madame is generally low ; it presents several banks of bright red earth, with beaches between them. Albion Cliff, or outh side of Madame, is rocky* remarkably high, and precipitous. On the S.W. sid lis island is the settle- ment called Arachat or Arocuettb. P, or AROCHETTE. — Aracbat, a beautiful harbour, has been, for many years past, the seat and centre of the fishing establishments of the Jersey merchants, who export their produce hence to the West Indies, the Mediterranean, and Brazil. It is acces- sible at all times. The town is situate on the harbour, and is fast increasing in size, appear- ance, and population. — Bouchette, Vol. ii. p. 79. It has been but indifferently surveyed. Ships bound to the south from the Gut of Canso, [ has no more CHEDABUCTO BAY. 159 if caught by a S.E. wind, may, in this bay, find shelter by coming to anchor in the bay on the south side, in 6 or 7 fathoms; and, by sounding with your lead, you may find the pas- sage over to the north shore, which is the safest anchorage. The harbour has two entrances. To sail into the easternmost, keep the surboard shore on board, in order to avoid Henley Ledge ; and approach the Seymour Isles no nearer than the depth of 6 fathoms ; as you will thus avoia the East-reef, and a small sunken rock, which lie about a cable's length N.E. by E. from it. In 1831, H.M. sloop Ranger beat into the harbour '' \Tachat, by the eastern channel, borrowing close on the starboard shore. *' In stand ward Seymour Island (larboard side) tack in 7 fathoms. The Ranger anchored u ..ithoms, with the eastern church E.N.E., and Fiddle Head S.E. by £. No poultry nor stock of anv kind could then be procured. The butter was exceedingly good. The water, abreast of the town, is def p close to the shore. The inhabitants are supported by the flsheries. If bound hence to tne Out of Caoso, run out, if the wind permits, by the western channel, keeping very close to the beach on the larboard side. The channel is very narrow, but deep; 13 fathoms close to the beach, on which you may spring when passing it." OKBSABVOTO SAT is wide and spacious ; it is bold-to on both shores ; on the north side you will see several red cliffs ; this shore is sandy, with regular soundings in the middle of the bay : the water is deep, from 25 to 35, &c. to 50 fathoms. Crow Harbour is situated on the south side of Ghedabucto Bay, and is capable of containing ships of war of the 6th and 5th rates, merchant-ships, &c. Many schooners and sloops resort here in the months of July and August, to take mackarel and herrings. The passage in is to the &.W. of the island that lies in the entrance. N.B. On the south side of the beach Mr. Backhouse erected a beacon to lead ships clear of the Corbyn Rocks, which are incorrectly represented in the old charts. Keep this beacon in a line with a remarkable tree upon the high laud, and it will lead you also clear of the Rook Island Rock, that lies 25 fathoms from the N.W. point of Rook Island. MILFORO HAVEN, or the Harbour of Guysborouoh, at the head of the bay, is impeded by a bar, but a sloop of war may pass over it. Within the bar vessels lie in per- fect security ; the tide, however, sets in and out with great rapidity. The town is, at present, though beautifully situated, a place of little trade : it is protected by a battery. Gut of Canso, f^. IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 1.1 IL25 i 1.4 us |2g 1.6 o> ^ ';-] ^> ^\^ ^ HiolDgr^hic Sciences Corporation 23 WIST MAIN STRUT WliSTIR.N.Y. 145M (716)872-4503 l\ V 4 ■s^ ^^^% ^^^' ^ PART IV, THE SOUTHERN COAST OF NOVA SCOTIA, THE BAY OF FUNDY, ETC. I, CHEDABUCTO BAY TO HAUFAX HARBOUR. Thb Eastern Tpatt of Nova Scotia is broken into the seveml islands and passives rtdrek seutcd on the Charts. Of the isles which are low and covered with stunted fir-trees, th^ nrtti on the N.W., is now called DureWt liland; the second, GtorgeU Iibmd; die Uiird, St.' Arub-ew't Inland; without the latter is the smaller one, railed Crmbeny hUndf which is now distinsuished by a lighthouse, an octagonal tower, bnilt of wood, 88 feet in height, painted red and white horiiontally,* and showing two fixed lights, one above the other.»f ^i Cape Camo or CafUMtt is the outer, or easternmost, point of St. Andrew's Island. FroM this cape, westward^ to Torbay, the coast makes in several white heads or points; here the country is much broken*, and near the S.E. extremity many white stone» appear fh>tn the offing like sheep in the woods. During a southerly gale the sea is dreadful here. From TorlMy to Liscombe Harbour there are banks of red earth and beaches; and from Liscombe Harbour to the Rugged Islands, (excepting the White Isles, which are white rocks,) the capes and outer islands are bound with black slaty rocks, generally stretching out in spits from east to west : and from the Rugged Islands to Devil's Island, at the entrance of the Harbour6fHalifiu(, are several remarkably steep red cli£fs, linked witli beach. The LiOHTHoxisx on CiiANBERaT Island is of great importance to the trade in this part ; and it has been saidj by Mr. Lockwood^ a gentleman well acquainted with the sub- jecti that " the Gut of Canso will, by its means, become the common gateway to the Gulf and River of St Lawrence, and will tend to mitigate the rigours of a late or eariy passage toQuebec^t .i. The fishermen of Aiaehat are acquainted with the^ehanneb and indents on this coast, and frequent them, more particularly in the spring and fall, to catch mackarel and herrings, of which large shoals are common here : but the rocks are so numerous, and the passage so devious, that no stranger should attempt them. Of the numerous rocks hereabout, the outer breaker, called the Bass, a rock of 3 feet water, lies more than two miles E. | S. [E. 13° ^.Vfrom the lighthouse on Cranberry Island. At seven-tenths of a mile S.E. nrom Cape Canso is a similar rock, called the Bull ; and, at one mile to Uie E.S.E. of the latter, there is said to be another, discovered by a fisherman of Canso, in 1813 ; but its existence seems to be questionable. The HARBOUR of CANSO, within OeorgeV Island, is well sheltered, with good ground, and sufficient depth for vessels of any burthen. In rough sea the dangers &ow themselves ; but, with smooth water, it is haurdous to enter tlie passages without a pilot. Mr. Backhouse says,^ " Canso Harbour has a passage through from the bay to the south ; but I would not recommend ships of war to attempt it, unless they answer their helms very quick, and even of those not such as draw more tnan 16 ftet" RASPBERRY HARBOUR, { on the south coast, at about three leagues westward from Cape Canso,, is small, and the shores within quite bold. At the entrance, on the eastern side, is an island, having a ledge close to it on the S.E. By rounding this ledge, you may steer' directly into the harbour, and come to an anchor under the island, which lies in the ' See note (%) on pi^e 146. iTo thMc who wbh for an accurate knowledge of this country, we recommend Mr. Lockwood's rl«r DoKrfption of Nova Seotis, with Plates of the Prine^ Harbours; Including a particular Account of the Island of Grand Manan." 4to. London, 1818. t The Poar HoWi oTM. Des Barres. « P twd for POPI 13 ads men •ta the sea «nc COUNTHV HAKBOUR. 161 .ihi middte of it, in the depth of 7 fathoma, where you {will lie safely. The countiy here is reeky and barren : a quarry of granite supplies milltstones. WHITE HAVEN, which is two leacues to the westward of Raspberry Harbour, 13 a place of hideous aspect. Of its rocky islets, the larger and outer one, called White Head, from the colour of lU sides, is 70 feet above the level of the sea. This islet appears round and smooth, and is a useful mark, as the passage in, on either ude, is in mid-channel. Off the Head are two breakers, one S.S.E. and the other E. by S., half a mile off. The most numerous visitors of this place are crows, eagles, &c., yet the neighbouring fishermen daring spring and lumroer, iind in it large quantities of mackarel, herring, gaspereaux, &c! TO RB AY.— The entrance of this bay is formed on the west by a bold headland, called Berry Head. The channel in is between this head and the islets to the eastward. At E.S.E. from the head, and south of one of these islets, named George's Island, are three veir dan- gerous rocks, which do not break when the sea ii smooth. Within the bsy, un&r the western peninsula, there is excellent anchorage in from 6 to 4 fathoms, muddy bottom, up to the eastern part of the bay. There is also anchorage on the western side of the bay, in from 7 to 3 frthoms, similar ground, where a vessel may lie in safety during any gale.* This bay i» settled, and hiul twfnty.K>ne families in it, in 1818: the lands are rocky, but a few salt-marshes enable the inhabitants to maintain some cattle. Vessels ate built here, of flrom 40 to 130 tons, which are employed in the fisheries. Mr. Dufutervilte says, on going into Torbay, give Berry Head, the S.W. point, which is very low, a small berth ot half a mile, as a shoal bank extends off it. To the S.E. by £. of it, about two miles distant, an some rocky heads, near which we sounded in from 7 to 9 fathoms. The Ranger beat in and anchored in 7 fathonis, within a slioal of 2 fathoma, hard b^tom. This Mnk lies directly in th^ fairway, in going toward the anchorage. It lie* about half a mile from the south shore. A large white roik on the shore lies abreast of it. In the fairway you will have from 7 to 9 rathoms. Lobsters abound here, near a sandy bay on the south shore. In two hours I speared ttom 60 to 80. Fish is abundant, and salmon are occasionally caught on the south shore, and sold at half a dollar each. From Torbay, westward, to Country Harbour, the country, in general, continues rocky and sterile, with deep water close in, but regular soundings without, and from 30 to <^0 ftthoms of water. Codplb's Harbooa, which is 3| leagues to the westward of Berry Head, affi>ids shelter to small vessels only; and these enter on the eastern side, to clear the breakers. The land about Country Harbour, ^nd from that to Cape Canso, makes like a number of islands: it is not high, and nothing very conspicuous can be seen. On an islet off Country Harbour is a akeletoa beacon, but you must be clear iu before you can make it oat ,,,i^l,,, ** We found it impoesible to approach the coast between Country Harbour and Louis- bonig, within 15 or 30 miles, in the month of May, beiiw impeded by the ice; and we observed several vajMcIi blodced up, in thick weather. When approaching the coast of Nova Scotia, this lead ii the only guide. When near the coast, ana vou have hard bottom, you are never more than nine or ten miles off, and on the bank; but soil blue mud will always insure safety. *< It appears that a current is always running, more or less, to the eastward from Cape Cano, doog the sooth eoaet, toward the island of St. Pierre. We experienced it more than onee, in July 1636; it set E. by N. 50 milei in 34 houn: and, in Januaiy 1838, in the Mttie tpiM wu m ttnilar set.^'-^'iHi'. .fe(^, Af.ttAT. PfOlftffffTKW IJUMftSQinik^This fine barbou; if navigable, tp'iKe largest ships, twelve miles .^om the entrance. , It is,, at preaent, but thiply setUed, yet there are reasons for believing that, as a consequence of local improvements in the neighbourhood, the population will increase. The shores are bold ; tbe anchorage soft mud, with a dearth of 13 to 5 fethotts. Mr. Loekwodd hu said that ** nd position in the provioo» is more •dvantageons for sOttlers than this harbour: at its mouth the islands afford shdter to flsh«i. men and srasU vessels, as well as the means of erecting their stages ; and the itehing grounds, at a short distance in the offing, abound in halibut, haddock, and cod ; and whai they term the bait fishery, that is, mackar«l, gaspereaux, smelt, &c. Salmon are plentifiil in their season ; and, out for the improvident use of this valuable addition to the mieans of subsist- «nce, would continue for ages." The ledges off the harbour generally break, and between them are deep passages. Qu 169 TOKBAr TO COUNTRY HARfiOUR. advancing from the eastward, there ate two rocks to be avoided, which He m ahovni on Ae Charts. On proceeding inwardj g^ve Green Island a small berth, and the daogen on that side will be avoided. The rocks on the west of the entrance, named Ctulor and PoUtu^ ate above water and bold-to. When above them, give Cape Mocodome a good berth, so as to avoid the BuU^ a dangerous sunken rock, that breaks in foagh weather, and lies about half a mile from the extremity of the Cape. f r '< The islands on the east side of the entrance. Green ItUmd, Gooie hhndf and Horftotir Idand, are low, and covered with scrubby trees.* Within Harbour Island is excellent ahchorage. Fisherman's Harbour, on the west of Country Harbour, is a favourite resort of fishing vessels, it having a shingly beach^ forming an elbow, and very convenient for drying fish. BicKERTON Harbour^ to the west of Flshermaih*i Harbour, ii fit fw smill vesMs only. At t#o miiies to the west of it lit HoiMii'i Harbour, a plfuce of shelter for coasters, aAd i breakers, extends to the dis- tance of three-quarters of a mile. Within and under the lee of the island is safi anchorl^[e in from 13 to 8 fathoms. On the N.E. of the island, a vessel cauglit in a S.'E. gale may be sheltered by Redman's Head, already deecribed, with the Head S.S.E. in 6 and 7 Athoms, bottom of clay. On thvwest side, the ground from Smith Point is shoal to the distance of nearly a mile ^S.E. ; and at 2| miles south from the point, is a rock, on which the ship fi^A Prince wu lost. It constantly breaks, and is partly unoovered. The island-aide is bold. The first diiiection of the harbour is nearly north, then W.N.W. Opposite to the first fish-stage, at half a inile from shore, is as good a berth at can be desiredf in 7 fitthonu. wat< be and] rest! E.SI * Goose and Harbour Island are the William and Augustus of M. des Barres, and are lo called inieveralChatti. CAFE SPRTw 1 63 ondM oatlMt ter «nd eBuU, om the laHkour xcellent «sort of ieut for %-)^» •Iter for ^fitafe be n«xt re a few, ■ m ,«•tiD«e »n the ci^t ni, muddy ibe best on It or White totbedif* I anchorlige ale maybe i 7 fttbomi, lairly a mile Imk Frinu Id. to the first 7 iathoms. IN M called i'^S^J^^J^I?**.*****®^' ^* "■^'>I*W« to thedietMce offonr miiea: it it, however, to be «MM«tirMj Mat there are two loaken rocks oo tha north side. « t?x^^ °' ISLANDS.— The coast between Liscomb and BeaTer Harbours, an extent of ,m 1ea|iJe^. rs d«homhnted the Bat of Isla«os. Widiin this space the islets, rocks, and tedges ixt inmimerable. They form passages in all directions, which have, in general, a good depth of water. At the eastern part of this labyrinth, near Liscomb, is MAara-ET- JosBPH, an excellent ht»rbour, the settlers on which keep large herds of cattle, &c. The White Islands, nearly half-way between the harbours of Beaver and Liscomb, ^ appear of a light stone colour, with green summits. The latter are above 60 feet above the level of the sea. The isles are bold on the south side; the passage between them safe ; I and there is good anchorage within them, in from 10 to 7 fathoms. ' BEAVER HARBOUR is too intricate to be recommended to a stranger: the islands off the entrance, however, may occasionally afford shelter from a southerly gale. Five ^PjIiI^ femiliea are settled hare, and appeaf to, be doing well in forming, fishing, ttc ^''> In Jdne 1831, H. M. ship Hoi^fer visiled Beaver Harbour, and found it much exposed '>Ur9;'SiE.^ winds; but it has a little cove, wdth 3^ fethoms therein, which affords shelter at ' til times to small craft. There are several sunken rocks in going in, which,, in a high sea, shp6w theroseltes. However, it is certainly not a place that can be recommended. Butter was, at this time, g^inst a sunken rock at its mouth, which, from the smoothness of the water, seldom shows its position: it lies 400 yards off Banbury Ulandb, and may be easily cleared, by keeping the Sheet Rock open of the island. SPRY or TAYLoa's HiRBot;a.— CapeSpry, or Taylor's Head, divides Mushabooa from Spry or Taylor's Harbour. On the west side of the latter are two large islands, now called Gerard's Islands. Cape Spry is destitute of trees ; and, being composed of large white rooks, is distinguishable abr off. FVom the point of the Cape, westward, is a low shingly beach, which is shoal to the distance outwardf of one>third of a mile. On the opposite side of the harbour is a sunken ledge and a large dnr rock : these may be passed on either side, whence you steer for the eastern point of Gerard's Island, and sail close dong it, as a sunken rock lies off it at the distance of 300 yards. The rest of the way is clear, up to the anchorage. This harbour is open to the S.E. and E.S.E. winds. At the distance of about three miles S.S.E. from Cape Spry is a dry rock, called by the fishermen Tov/or's Gocie. At about midway between it and the Beaver Islands lie the SiugLtdgei, (P9gam$* WingtfDt* BarresJ which are partly dry, and extend nearly a leagQc east and west. ' Within and about them the depths are from 20 to 7 fathoms. 164 SHIP HARBOUR. DEANE or Pope*» HARBOun, on the western tide of Gerard'* Itles above meatioMd, lia» a ledKe at iu entrance, foiming an obtuse anjjte at the two points, at 'i;bMe>foatths of m mile from each, and from which a shoal tails to the southward half a mile. It nay be passed on either side ;. but, on the west, care mvM be taken to avoid a shoal extending from the Outer Tangier Island. The beat slielter iS: und<;r the smaller island on the eastera side, where there are from 6 to 6 fothoms, with good clay ground. TANGIER HARBOUR, next to Deane or Pope's, is formed by crmy barren ialaads, which aeeure vessels from all winds. At about two miles from its moutb is a ledge thai dries at low water. The anchorage is under the eastern shore, 5 to 4 fathoms, aim mud. Here are some good tracts of pasture land, and the few inhabitants are occupied in the fishing and coasting trade. SHOAL ^ AY. —(Sataulen Hr, qf Dtt Barrt».)—1\i\% bay has a sood depth of water and excellent anchorage. The laMer ia to the northward of the island now called CharW Island, and vessels lie in it, land-locked, in 7 fathoms. Off the raoutb of the harbour is a rock, that always breaks ; but it is bold*to, and may be passed on either side. Some parts of the harbour will adroit large ships tc lie afloat, alongside the shore, over a bottom of black mud. Supplies of stock, &c. may be obtained from the inhabitants of this place. SdllP HAIIIbOUR— In tbis harbour, and oq the isles about il, are about twenty families, who keep small stocks of cattle, 8cc. The entrance, called by Dte fiarres Knowles' Harbour, is deep and bold ; it lies between two islands, of which the eastern is Brier'i Island. A white cliff, which may be seen from a considerable distanee in the offlog, is a good mark for the harbour: at first it resembles a ship under sail ; but on approtehing seems more like a schooner's topsail. There is good anchorage in e^wr]^ pibrt of the harbour, and, above the Narrows, a fleet of the largest ships may lie without toe smallest motion. Brkr't hUmd, above mentioned, is a low rugged island, and ledges, partly dry, extend from it three-fourths of a mile to the eastward : avoiding these, when entering this way, you may range along the western island and come to an anchor under its north point, in 6 or 7 fothoms, tl^ bottom of mud. OWL'S HEAD, or Keppel Harbour, which is next to the west of the harbour last described, although smaller than many other harbours on the coast, has sufficient space for a fleet. It may be known at a distance by Owl's Head, on the western side, which apnears round, is abrupt, and very remarkable. The neighbouring coast and islets are ruggea and barren, but the harbour has a few settlers. The entrance is of sufficient breadth to allow a targe ship to turn into it ; and, within thie Karttour, shipping lie land>locked, when in 6 and 7 fiithoms, bottom of mud. In taking a berth, you will bie guided by the direction of the wind ; as with a 8.W. gale the western uMhorage is to be preferred, and the eastern with a S.E. It is high waier here at 8 h. 30 m., and the tide rises from 5 to 7 feet. JEDORE harbour.— ("For/ Bgmmt qf Det Barrel.^— From the appearance of this harbour on theOharts, it might be presumed that it is spacious and commodious; but, on examination, it will be found that it is really different. The entrance is blind arid intri- cate; a shoal of only 11 feet lies at its month; the channel within narrow and winding; extensive mud-flsts, covered at high water, and uncovered with the ebb: hence a stranger can enter with safety only at low water, the channel being then clearly in sight, and we water sufficient fin- raree ships. The best anchorage is abreast of the sand-beach, two miles from the enlritice, in udm 9 to 6 fethoms, bottom of Stiff tnud. and they ^ _ unoc- cupied lands'aro'nnd thenu Without the entrance, on the eastern side, are two isles, called Rogtr and Barren Idantbf between and within which the passages are good^ and afford shelter in ease of necessity. The JSaioHocK, a very dangerous rock of 3 feet, ab'Cut the size of a firigate's long- boat, lies S.E. i E. from Jedore Head, and S.W. two miles from the isle called Laig Island. The weed on the top of it may firequently be seen at the surfece> The ntarkj for this rock are, a house and barn in Cliam Btij just open of the «EWt end of Long Mand, bearing. N. 5^ E., and thIe house on Jedore Head open to the N.E. of Jedore Rock, SADLE ISLAND. \(f5 At abom nin« miles touth from Jedore HMd is a r«ef, called the PottticK Si^oal'; its area is aboat onie acre, hai a depth of 94 feet over it ; and duriitg a swell, Uie s«>a breaks dii it with great violence. 1[''iiose advancing between the Brig Rock and Polluck Sjioal, should be cautious of approaching any of the Jeoo»e Ledges : they are laid down on the Charts, and said to extend from five to nine miles from the mouth of the harbour. It is high water at Jedore Head at 8 h. 20 m. ; th« tide rises from to 9 feet. Between Jedore and Haiifax, there are noharbonrs of any consideiation for shipping, but there are numerous settlements. The land in this extent is* in general, of roomrate height, rising gradually from the shore. Red and precipitous cliffs, the cinracteristic of the eastern coast, may be seen from seven to nine miles off. The best harbour is Aat called TnREE-FATHoMs Harbocr, which has occasionaRr received Ibrge vessels in distress. This harbour lies immediatelv to the east of an islet called Shut'iti itland; and, with the wind on shore, is difficult and dangerous ; So that it is to be attempted only in cases of resA dis- tress. The channel lies two-thirds over to the northward from Shttt»ia Island,- and t«m» short round the starboard point to the westward. ■ In beating to windward, ships may stand to within a mile and a half of the t^e, the soundings being tolerably regular, from 20 to 12 and 8 fathoms^ II.— SABLE ISLAND AND BANKS OF NOVA SOOTIA. .—The southernmost part of Sable Island, which was laid down in the survey of M. Des Barres, in latitude 44** (r, has latterly been represented in 43** 55'; and the west end, given on the same authority in longitude 60° 3*j', has been recently given in 60° 17'. Mr. John Jones, master of H.M, ship IJMiiar, who, in 1829, mad* Rod pub- lished numerous observatiops op this part of the yrgrld, give^ the east end of Uie island in latitude 43° 59' 16*. longitude 59° 48^ and tlie west end in latitude 43° 56' 4s", long. ()0o 17' 15". Totbe error Cor preitiine(< error) in positiooroapywreckji.Iyi^iQ.i>eeo attributed In approaching, therefore, all ca)|^ion is required. ; On the days of the new aad full moon, it is high water dong the sOath shore of the island at half an hour after 8 o'clock ; and it flows till half an hour past ia o'clock on the north side, and till near 11 o'clock in the pond. Common spring-tides rise seven f^t perpen^cular, and neap tides four. The flood sets in firom the S.S.W. at the rate of half a mikt an hour, but it alters its course, and increases its velocity, near the ends of the island. At half-flood it streams north, and south at half-ebb, with great swiftness, across the north-east and north-west bars ; it is Uierefore dangerous to approach withput a com- manding breeze. . .The north-east bar runs out E.N.E. about 4 leagues fifom the eastern extreo^f of the island, all which is very shoal, having in few places more than 2, 3« or 4 &thonw of water ; whence it continues E. and £. by S., deepening gradoally'to 19, 15, and 11 fiuhema, at the distance of eight or ten leagues, and smipes to ^e S. and S.E« sloping gMtt|y ta 60 and 70 fathoms. To the northwara and eastward it is verv steep, and in a ran or three miles the wates will deepen to ISO fathoms. Abreast the body of .fpe isle> the soandiDgsara more gradual. The shoal ground of the north-west bar shapes to the westwRnIk and deepen* gradually to 70 fathoms of wRter, at^the distance of 20 or 25 leagues from the isle; and winds easterly and southerly, until it meets the souadkigs of the north-east bar. Tlie Quality of the bottom, in general, is very fbc sand, with a fbw small transpaientstones; l» the notthward, and close to the north-east bar, the sand is mixed with many black spedtsj but, near the north-west bar, the sand has a greenish colour. The nortbi^Bst bar htpAn in bad weather, at the distance of 8 or 10 leagues from the island ; but, in moderate weatfiery a ship may cross it, at 5 leagues distance, with great safe^, in no less than 8 or 9 fathoms of water : and, if the weather be dew, the island caay be seen thence very distUKtly from a boat. The north-west bar breaks, in bad weather, at 7, and sometimes 8 mile* htm the island ; but when the sea is snwotb, ships, may croes it within the distance of 4 ssUes^ in 7 fathoms of water. [J%ete ban art deterAed m thev wen found iy M. Des Barres.1 But the changes in the form and extent of Sable Island, between 1811 and 1837, are thus de- saibed by the superintendent, Mr. Dsnby :— <* On the 30th of September, 181 1^ there was a severe gale qC wind from the 8,S.E. that WMhed away all the dry part of the N.W. bar, extendiiig 4$ miles N.W. from the high 166 lAULK ISLAieD. part of Um hliod, and half a ttit» broad. The greater part of U waa eoifend. vUbfiail; and on the outer part of it waa a hilU elevated about twenty-five or thirty Act above the level of the sea, on which the rigging; and saili of a brig, that was wrecked there thataaoi- raer, were placed for aafety ; but thaw were all loet whM it wMhcd away. There it neNft, over the aame extent of bar, four or five fitthoitas of water. The sea hu bee» redupMf the western end, both iince and before that time, at the rale of nearly one^ixth of * aniia annually. ''''''!'- ** Easterly, southerlv, and S.S.W. winds set a rapid enrrent al«ng-sh4re, Ht shuil #irfeV, to the W.^^W. and N.W. ; that is, along the shore of the western end of the ishMid, Mt not the eastern or middle, as there the current, with southerly and a,W. wiadst sets ta the eastward. The natural tendency of the flood-tide is towards the coast. When itstrikes the island^ it flows to the eastward over the ,nonh.ea8t bank, and to the westwacd over tj|i|e north'west bank, and passes the west end, in a north-west direction, sp rapidly that it carriiB the sand with it; and the hills of the west end being high and narrow* they are undenoioMl at their base bv U, and tumble down some thousands of tons of . sand at a time v thi».thp Gurrent'beneath catches and sweeps away ta the N.W. increasing the banb^ As soon j|s this current passes tlie extreme pomt of the dry bar, it tenda more acioes ^he bank to twe- N.E.; the motion of the sea contributing to keep ^he sand in motion^ the current cacr|e|,(|t to tlie N.B. and spreads to the N.W. Although, acrosf the bank ffoip the, isla^, to ilt^ distance of fifteen u twenty miles to the N.W., tliere is a flood and ebb-tide, thf jntQ^Wf* ting to the N.N. E. the ebb to the S.S.W.,tbe flood comes over a b;oad, ^at bottom, unUljt arrives at the highest ridge of thf bar, bringing tha saml irith ft so &r. It th^p Inds a 4e<;p water suddenly to the eastward of the bar, and its strenoih is as suodenly lost : the nfif^ pitfibiog«ver this baok.^sMtle gently in deap^tvater, andtha sand.,g(»|ng««titb.tha.cariai||t does the same, and kceps'thereaatem edga of th»'bac and the bank varj^ateep \,.)v^ to,)ttl» soiUhward and westward it i» flat and shallow. . M'7 *' The ebb-tide, setting gently to the south wtfrd and westvTard, meets the steep sideof th«- bankj and rising above it, passes^ver and increases in stndngth, merely levelling the sahd that had bMH broiiight up by the last flood. It does not cany it baek until the next flood comei, wfaitibbribg^ op a fresh supply firdra the washing bf Uilh land { 'ahd stf, i^ierttatel)', the sand changes vrith every flood and ebb*tidle. Thii obnsetlW same direction. Bat the distance of the outer breakers has not inoreaued more than- ab^ two miles; in 18S9, their whole Stance from flie Ihnd being fh>m ten^ to fourteeilreeeded. The surf beats continually ort the shore, and, in calm weather, is heard several ekgiies off. Lending on the island, with boati, is practicable on the north side, after a continuance of good weather only. The wholie island is composed of white sand, muck Coarser than any of the soundings about it, and intermixed with small transparent stones. !ts&ce is v^y broken, and hove up in little hills, knobs, and cliA, wildly heaped together, within which are hollows, and ponds of fresh water, the skirtt of which abound with cran- beirries th« whole year, and with blueberries, juniper, &e., in their season; as also with dttieks, snipes, and other birds. This sandy island aflbrds great plenty of bwch>grass, wild peas, and other herbage, for the support of the horses, cows, hogs, lite., which are running wild ujpbn it. It produces no trees ; btit abundance of wreck and drift wood may be picked up along shore for fuel. Strona northeriy winds shift the spits of sand, and often even choke up the entrance of the pond, which usually opens again by the next southern blast. In this pond were prodigious numbers of seals, and some flat uh, eels, &c. ; and, on the south-west side, lies a bed of remarkably large mussels and clams. The south shore is, between the cliffs, so low, that the sea bresks quite over in many places, when the wind blows on the island. The Ram'f HfAti is the highest hill on this island ; it has a steep cliff on the northowesi, and fidls gecb ta the south-east. The Naked Sand-hills are 146 feet in perpendicular height above tb^ io/sl of hig^> water mark, and always appear very white. iMount Knight is in the shape of a pyramid, situate in a hollow, between two steep diffii. Mount LHttreU is a remarkable hummock on the top of a large swelling in toe land. . jQrutia UUlu a knob at the top of a cliff, the height of which is 126 feet perpendicular m ill tw ►■/r^' hddence :— Discovert om 8Aai.E Islamo.— The Halifiix paDcrs of last week publish the followinfsfaigular discovery : — " The following fiicts have bttta made known to us by a gentleman of this city, who has had his information from the best authority, vis. Captain Darby, ten., governor (as he'ii caHed) of Sable Island. For the last 25 or 30 years there has been a laige mound or pyramid Of sauo, about too feet high, on the island, and net veir flur ftom the reddence of Capaan Iteby. The Winds Air some years have been gradually diminUhing its height} and after a severe Uew lorae weeks since it was completely blown away, and, tlnsular to say, a nuoiber of small houses, built of the timbers and planks of a vessel, were qtdte visible. On examination they were found to contain a number of articles of ftimiture and stores, put up in boxes, which were marked < 43rd Regiment ; ' die boxes or cases were perfectly rotten, and would not admit of their being removed. A. brass dog-collar was, however, discovered by Captain Darby, with the name of • Major Elliot, 43rd R^ment,' on it, and which Captain Darby brought to the dty, and presented to Major Tryori, who belongs to the 43rd r^ment."— JVa/(/m south to west. With these the north or leeward side is comparatively smooth, and, therefore, should be sought. There is a swashway on each bar, shown on the chart, and lives may be saved by passing through, and thus getting to leeward. There is no risk in moderate weather ; but if the surf should appear too dangerous, land as you can, or try to weather the bar altogether. Having omw got to the northward of the bar, haul up S.E. or W.S.W., as the case may be, for the land, and take the boat ashore as near the house as may be convenient. Tlie semi- circular form of the north side is fiivourable for boats, as under the wirldward curve a lee is afforded from east and west winds; but, with a fresh north wind, this form is against a boat getting off the land ; therefore, if ashore, on the north side, push the boat right before the sea. for the land, rather than risk getting to leeward by crossing either bar. If ashore on the south edge of either bar, with the wind north, land on the south side. If ashore on the N.E. bar, in tolerable weatlier, with the wind about west, you may land at the east end, without crossing the bar; and, vice vend, i! on the N.W. bar, and, o\iving to the tnil^r belt, the time of high water is the best for landing. AfUr landing, if, owing to a fog, you cannot judge of your situation so as to shape your course to one of the houses, seek the lake, and then proceed. The preceding description, excepting a little alteration, is from the observations of Mr. Jo$eph Darby, master of the schooner Two Brother*, and ten years in the service of the island. (Halifax. 8th April, 1824.) Mr. Darby has also given a list of $hips and ressels, wrecks upon the coast and bars, thirty.four in number, between 1802 and 1824; the greater part upon the southern shores.* • The Importance of the establishment on Sable Island cannot be better illustrated than by an extract from the Loo of the superintendent, Mr, Darby, which concludes thus :— '< Thus ends the year 1835, and with us it has been a year of great labour and fatigue ; our work has heaped upon us faster than we could clear it away. We have saved and »hipped to Halifax Z 170 HALIFAX HARBOUR. «h« irOVA BOOTUL BAXHJEI.— Tlie form nod eztcot of the Nova ScotiHii Bmki can be best understood by reference to the late oharti. The banks are generally of hard ground, teparated by intervaU, the bottom of which U of mud. Between these banks and the shore are several small inner banks, with deep water and muddy bottom. The water deepens regularly from Sable Island to the distance of 22 leagues, in SO fathoms, fine gravel ; thence proceeding westward, the gravel becomes coarser : continuing westward to the western extremity of the banks, the soundings are rocky, and shoalen to 18 and 15 fathoms of water: Cape Sable bearing N. by W. distant 15 leagues. It may be observed, generally, tliat the soundings all along the Nova Sootian coast, be- tween Cape Canso to the E.N.E. and Cape Sable to the W.S.W., are very irregular, from 25 to 40 and 50 fa'homs. In foggy weatiier, do not stand nearer in^shore than 35 fathoms, lest you fall upon some of the ledges. By no means make too bold with the shore in such weather, unless you are sure of the part of the coast you are on ; for you may, otherwise, when bound for Halifax, fall unexpectedly into Margaret's or Mahone Bay, and thus be caught with a S.E. wind. At the entrance of the harbours and riven on the coast, salmon is taken from April until August ; and, from one to two or three leagues out to sea, cod, halibut, polluck, haddock, rays, and mackarel. Herrings are taken in the bays and harbours, in the months of June and July, and tom-cod all the year round. The weather on the coast is frequently foggy in the spring and some part of the sum- mer; in particular at the distance of four or five leagues from the shore. On approaching nearer, the weather is found more clear; and, with the wind from the land, it is perfectly clear and pleasant. III.—HALIFAX HARBOUR, and the COAST THENCE, WESTWARD, TO CAPE SABLE. DESCRIPTION OF tbs Coast. &c.— The land about the harbour of Halifex, and a little |to the southward of it, is, in appearance, rugged and rocky, and has on it, in several places, scrubby withered wood. Although it seems bold, yet it il not high, being tP: be seen, from the qtiarter-deck of a 74-gun ship, at the distance of no more than 7 leagues ; excepting, however, the high lands of Xe Have and Aipotogotit westward of Haiifiix, which are to be seen 8 leagues ofi*. The first, which is 12 leagues W.S.W. from Cape Sambro*, appears over Cuw Le Have, and like little round hills of unequal height. Aspotogon, when bearing N.W. by N. appears directly over Maigaret's Bay, 54 leagues westward from Cape Sambro' : it is rather a long high land, nearly level at the top, and rising above the land near it. When bearing north, distant between 5 and 6 leagues, Sambra lighthouse will bear E.N.E. distant 7 leagues. The lighthouse on Sambro' Island is remarkable, it being a high tower on that islattd, which is small and rooky, lying 3| miles to the S.W. firom Chebncto Head, on the S.W. side of the entrance into Hali&x harbour.* Chebucto Head has a remarkably rocky and barren appearance. There are three other lighthouses on the coast, westward of that of Sainbro*; the first is on Cross Island, off Lunenburg; Harbour, with two lights placed vertically, and 30 feet apart; the lower light fixed, and the upper showing a flash at intervals of a minute ; the property to an immense amount The materials of five venels, and the cargoes of two, have been mostly landed on the island by the establishment. Several tons of property have been earted ever the iuand, some fourteen mOes, and all re-chipped ; and there is now on the island between two and three thousand pounds' worth of property ready for shipping, besides as much more that was saved oa the! island and taken to New York. One nundred and nine persons have been saved, atid fed, some of them sir weeks, and some of them three months andanalC — Some of us are sometimes rick ; we generally work nndl ten o'clock at liight ; we are aH desirous to make somethinf eatra> by shingle-making and bost-biulding, which if we can do, and not be thought unprofitable servants, I for one shall tbink myself fortunate." Such is the statement of a benevolent and excellent individual ; of a man whose meritorious con- duct is honourable, not only to himself, but to the human race. * The appearance of it is given on the Chart of Nova Scotia. Hghl tropi HALIFAX HAKBOUn. 171 Moond on Coffin's Island, at tiM cniranca of Livirpoel Bav t tha thiid it on Cap« Koac way, at the cnttanct of Shelburne Harbour. The lantern of Sambio' liahthouM, exhibitinc a iixed light, ia elevated 132 feet above the level of the tea; while Uie light on Coffln** Island is only 90 feet ; the latter is rtwhing^ and appears full at intervals of two minutes' the lighthouse on Cape Roseway exhibits two liKhls, there being a small fixed light at about one-third from the top of the building, which distinguishes it from that on Cross Island Cape Roseway is about 30 leagues to the W.S. W. from the lighthouse of Sambro'. XAUVAX BAXBOmi.— The harbour of Halifax is one of the finest in British America. A thousand vessels majr ride in it in safety. It is easy of approach, vaA acces> sible at all seasons. Its direction is nearly north and south, and its length twelve miles. Its upper part, called Bedfokd Basin, formed as shown in the chart, is a beautiful sheet of water, containing about eight square miles of good anchorage. On the eastern side of the entrance is the cultivated island now called Mac Nab^i, for. merly CornwatUi Itland, a name which, in propriety, it ought to have retairied. Above this, and nearly in the centre of the harbour, is a conical islet, called George liland. The latter, which has a tower on it, is fortified, and protects the city of Halifax. On a spit of gravel, called MaugherU Beaek, extending toward Point Sandwich from Mac Nab s Island, there is now a ligkthouiet called Sherbrook 2V>wer, intended for the express purpose of leading vessels ud the harbour, clear of the shoals hereafier described: This useful light appears of a red dolour, and is 58 feet hieh above tlie level of the sea. Originally it was obscured on the eastern side, but lately has been made visible from ev^ry point of the compass. Northward of Maugher's Beach, in the cove now called Mac Nab's Cove, is good an- chorage in' from 9 to 4 fathoms, mud. The best spot is in 7 fathoms, with the beach and Point Sandwich in a line, and the tower on deorge Island touching the N.W. part of Mae Nab's Island. The promontory called Cbebi;cto Head, bounds the entrance of the harbour on the west. At 3) miles abo^e this head, on the western side, is a singular indent, called Herring Cove, occupied by about forty Irish families, who subsist by fishing and piloting. Small vMsels here lie perfectly sheltered in shoal water.^ T|te f^^A Letween this and Chebucto Head is wholly of rock.* s , ■ ♦ HALIFAX, the third town of British Amerioa, is situate at the distance of eight miles Rbove Cbebucto Head, on the western side of the harbour, and upon the declivity of a hilif {Citadel Hill,) which rises 240 feet above the level of the sea, and has on itt summit three flagstaff's, serving as an excellent mark for the harbour. In its recently improved state, Halifitt has not less than 14.500 inhabitants. It is a flte warehousing port, and contains two episcopal churches, two presbyterian, and two baptist meeting-houses, with three chapels, one Roman Catholic, one methodist, and one Sandemanian. Its other publi6 straoturee are the government house and the provincial hidl ; the latter is a fine stracturei The naval yard is above the town : the commissioner's house and other buildings ai'e its ornaments. As a government establishment, it is, of course, in excellent order. To the northward of it is a naval hospitil, with its requisite appendages. On the hill above the hospital, is a square stone building, the residence of tne naval commander-in- chief. The Citadel Hill, over the town, commands a prospect of the harbour and sur- rounding country. The village of Oartmoutb, opposite to Halifax, is thinly settled ; but the lands behind it are in a very improving state, and there are some fine farms belonging to the descendants of the original German settler8.t The LiGHTBOosB of Sambro', already noticed, has seven lamps, and exhibits ^ fixed Nght. Its lantern is elevated 132 feet above the level of the sea. A small party of Rrtil ■ 'J ■ ■ " . • « Sept. 7, 1831, arrived at Halifkx^ On this coaat I have observed much dew &n. The wind generally hauls round to the southward about noon."— £(2w. DuntterviUe. f It isstated by a writer in die Mantical Magasine, 1838, p. 531, thatsnakes are found in this harbottr.«~-'* It is baown, from ocular proof, that in Haliftx Harbour, In Nova Scotia, snakes ate sonwdmes found, swinuning, or rather gliding through the water, daring the fervid heat of summer. m tropical, have we seen so many of the Ophidian race, as on the Dartmoiith side of that harbonr. 17S HALIFAX HAUBOUR. lery are alationed here, to attend to signals, with two twenty* foar pounders, as alarm-gtitis : by the attention of these men several shipwrecks, it is said, have already been prevented.* Within and about two miles from the lighthouse there are several dangers, generally known under the name of the Eastern and Westekk Lbdoes. Of these the westernmost is the Bull, a rock ahor? water, which lies about three*quarlers of a mile S.E. by E. from Pendant [V)int, with the i°($hthouse bearing E. 7** S., i{ miles. To the sooth-eastward of the Bull, at the distance of a mile, lies the ledge called the HoBSES, with the lighthouse bearing E. by N. one mile and three-quarters distant. The S.W. rock or ledge lies with the lighthouse N.E. 1) mile. The Henercy Rock, with 8 feet over it, lies with the lighthouse N.N.W. | W. 2 miles. To the E.N.E., at a mile from this, is another, the Loekwood, of 12 feet. Both are, of course, exceedingly dangerous to those approaching within a short distance. The SisT£tts, or Black Roclu, commonly called the Hoifern Le^e, lie to the E.S.E. three-quarters of a mile from the lighthouse. Chebucto Head N.N.E. will clear them to the eastward. The Owen Rock, discovered 21st May, 1844, by Capt. Owen, R.N., in H.M.S.V. Columbia, has 12 feet least watcfr on it; the Colua.bia touched on it, having U fathoms just before the vessel touched, 8 fathoms on the starboard and 18 ikihoms on the port paddle-box. The bearings at the moment afier were, Black Rock or Western Sisters, N. i E. half a mile by calculation, and Sambto' lighihouse one mile six tenths, bearing S.W. by compass. Besides the rocks above described, the Bell, a rock of 18 feet, lies at a quarter of a mile from shore, with the extremity of Chebucto Head N. by E. ) E. INortbi] three quarters of a mile. WiTBtN the line of Chebucto Head on the S.W., and OEvtL^s Island on the N.E., are several rocks and ledges but the situation of each is marked by a buoy, as shown on the Charts. Of these the first is Rock Headt which lies with Qhebucto Head S.W. 3| miles, and Devil's Island N.E. } E. 2^ miles. The second is the Thrum Cap, a reef which extends from the south end of Mac Nab*» Island, and wliich occasioned the melancholy loss of the Tribune fHgate, with 250 brave men, on proceeding from the harbour to the eastward. The thwart, mark to dear it is, the easternmost land kept in sight from the deck, a ship's length clear to the southwaHl of Devil's Island, and oearing about E.N.E. or £. bv N., when steering west or W. by S.^ according to the distance of the ship from the island. The Uehfield Rock, which lies toward the western aide, has only Id feet over it at low water. The marks for it are, George's Island just open to the eastward of Point Sandwich, and the passage between the DeviPs Island and main open, bearing £. by N. Above the Lichfield Rock, on the same side, at a mile above it, is the rock called Man* Rock. It lies with Point Sandwich bearing north, half a mile, and nearly in a line with it aud the west side of George Island. A reef, called the HorU'Shoe, extends from Maugher's Beach, on the west side of Mae Nab's Island. It is dangerous, and must be carefully avoided. Half-way between Maugher's Beach and George Island, on the opposite side, is a shoal, extending to the S.E. from Point Pleasant, nearly one-third of the channel over, but having a buoy on its extremity. The thwart-mark for the buoy is a little islet, (on the west shore, at the entrance of the N.W. arm,) witli a remarkable stone upon the bill, appearing like a coach-box, and bearing W.S.W. Between Maugher's Beach and Point Pleasant shoal, is a middle ground of 4| and 5 fathoms, distinguished by a buoy. This middle ground extends north and south a cable's length, aiid is about 30 fathoms broad : as you fall off to the eastward of it, there may be found from 7 to 13 fothoms, muddy bottom. On the west side are from 10 to 14 fathoms, coarse and rocky bottom. Rtuft Rock, having 12 feet over it, lies in-shore, about halfrway between Point Pleasant and the south part of Hali&x. The thwart-mark for it is, a fiirm-house in the wood over a black rock on the shore, bearing W. bv S. Opposite to Reid's Rock is a buoy on the spit, extending from the N.W. end of Mac Nab's Island. * See the particular Chart of the Harbour and Environs of Halifax. r HALIFAX HARBOUR. 175 DIRECTIONS FOR THE HARBOUR.— On approaching Umj Harbour of Halifax ftoin the westward, advance to the eastward, so as to pass the lighthouse at the distance of a league ; taking care not to approach too near to the Uenercjf or Lockvood Rocks, already described. When the lighthouse bears N.N.W. | W.you will be in a line with, the Uenercy Rock, and with it N.W. } W. in a line with theLockwood. With the lighthouse W.N.W. you will be clear to the northward of both, and may proceed N. by E. 4 roil«i; which brings you off Chebucto Head. Here you will bring the leading mark on, which is the flag-staffs on Citadel Hill open of Point Sandwich, and bearing N. by W. ; and, by keeping them thus open, you will pass clear of the Lichfield and Mars Rocks on the west, ds well as of the Rock Head and Thrum Cap on the east. When nearly dp to Sandwich Point, which is bold*to, keep Chebucto Head well in sight, without that point ; and this direction, kept on, will lead in the fairway up to George Island, leaving Point Pleasant Shoals on the lefl, and the Horse-Shoe, or Shoal of Mac Nab's Island, on the right. Or, when ahreait of Cheimeto Head, or when Sambro' Light bears W.S.W., the Ught on Maugher's Beach should never be brought to the westward of north. Keeping the light from nortli to N. by E. will lead clear of the Thrum Cap Shoal, from the buoy on which the lighthouse bears N. i W. Tl^u advancing from the weitward will see the light on Maugher's Beach, when they are as m. to the eastward as Chebucto Head, by keeping it open well on the starboard bow; it will then letid them ap to the beach. George Island may be passed on either side, and you may choose your anchorage at pleasure, in from 13 to 6 fathoms, muddy bottom. From George Island to the head of Bedford Basin there is no obstruction to shipping. Ships of war usually anchor off the Naval Yard, which may be distinguished at a dis- tance by the masting weers. Merchant-vessels discharge and take in their cargoes at the town wtiarfs. Small vessels, from the eastward, occasionally proceed to Halifax by the S.E. passage^ within Mac NaVs Island: On the shoalest part of the bar of sand, which obstructs this passage, there Is, however, but 8 feet at low water. Above the bar the depth increases to 5 and 10 fathoms, bottom of mud. On Entehino the Harbour from the Eastward, especially with an easterly wind, fMirticular caution must be taken to avoid the Thrum Cap and Rock Head. In proceeding this way, steer west, W.N.W., or N.W., according to the wind and your distance from the shoals, until George Island, up the Harbour, is open a sail's breadth to the westward of Mac Nab's Mand ; then haul up for Sandwich Point and York Redoubt, until vou see the steeple of St. Paul's Church, in Halifax, a ship's length open to the eastward of Judge Brenton's housie, a remarkable one, fronting the south. This mark, kept on, will lead clear of Point Pleasant Shoal, and in a fairway between Maugher's Beach and Sandy Point ; whence you may steer directly for George Island, and pass in on the east side, if the wind will permit. la turning to toindward, give the upper or inner part of Maugher's Beach a berth of one cable's lengui, ^ order to avoid the Horse-Shoe Spit, that runs from the north part of the beach to the distance of one cable and a halfs length. You may stand to the Sandwich Point side to within two ships lenttth, that beiqg bold.to ; but stand no farther over to the westward, to avoid Point Pleasant Shoals, than keeping St. Paul's Church open to the east- ward of Judge Brenton's house, on the south shore, as above mentioned. When arrived thus far, put in stays ; and, standing to the eastward, keep Little Thrum Cap Island, (noto CarroPt,) a red bluff, open of Mac Nab's Island : having this mark on, put in sUys again, and you will thus go clear of the N.W. spit of Mac Nab's Island.* • It has been formerly noticed, that the great difficulty of making Halifax from the eastward, particularly in the winter season, is in consequence of the winds being too frequently from the W.S. W. to N.W., and blowing so hard as to reduce a shin to very low canvas, If not to bare poles',- and should the wind come to the eastward, it is invariably attended with rach thick weather as to Krevent an observation, or seeing to any great distance t hence, under such circumstances, it would e imprudent to run for the shore, more partftulatly in winter, when the easterly winds are at- tended with sleet and snow, which lodge about the muts, sails, riggln», and every part of the ship, beceming a solid body of ice so soon as the wind shifts round to the N.W., which it doeS suddenly from the eastward. These are circumstances of real difficulty ; and it has been reoomroended, in such a cape, to run far to the south-westward, (avoiding the Gulf Stream,) and thence from theS.W. coast, to keep the shore on board, all the way to Halifax. . m 174 HALIFAX HARBOUIl. Mr. Jeffery says—" In making Uatifax Harbour, the land to the westward appears white, atnd to the eastward red. If from the westward, give Sambro' light a berth of a leagae, until it bears N.W. by W. ; then steer northerly, until the flt^rstaff on Citadel Hill comes just open of Sandwich Point, bearing about N. } W. After passing Sandwich Point, keep Ghebucto Head N. i E. " If flrom the eastward, keep Sambro* light in sight, in order to avoid the Rock Head, until the leading marks come on. " From George Island to Maugher's Beach Light u S. f W. 2^ miles : from Maugher's Beach to Chebacto Head, S. by W. 5 miles. '* Buoys.-oRock Head, white and black ; Lichfield, white; Mars, white; Thrum Cap, red ; Pomt Pleasant, white ; Reid's Rock, red. " In working here, shut in the Citadel flagstaff with Sandwich Point, in order to clear the Mars and Lichfield ; and to clear Rock Head and Thrum Cap, keep George's Island open of Mac Nab's Island. When Sambro' lighthouse is a ship's length open of Cbebucto Head, you are clear of Rock Head : the lighthouse just appearing is the mark for the rock." The little harbour, or cove, called Catch Harbour, which lies to the westward of Chebucto Head, has a bar across the entrance, having 9 feet over it at low water, with breakers when the wind blows on the shore. Within it are 3 and 3i fathoms. In 1817, twenty families were settled here, and supported, principally, by supplying the market of Halifox with fish. On proceeding toward Halifax, in H.M. sloop Ranger, in the month of May, 1831, Mr. DunttervUle writes thus: — *' In latitude 4S°, long. 64**, sounded in from 45 to 60 fathoms, coarse sand, pebble stones, and broken shells. In 45 fathoms [on Le Have Bank,] it was rooky bottom. In running to the northward, deepened the water to 120 fathoms, muddy bottom. Weather thick and foggy, with light winds from the southward. " In approaching the land of Nova Scotia, do not come into less than 50 fiithoms, for though there may be a dense fog in the offing, yet near and over the land it is frequently clear ; therefore, by sounding frequently, you may, even in a fog, approach the coast ; and if you suppose yourself near Sambro' lighthouse, by firing a sun it will be answered, and a pilot will very soon offer. The lighthouse is remarkable, and may be seen, from seaward, at 3 to 4 leagues off. The land aboct Halifax is of moderate height, and may be seen at about 6 leagues. Citadel Hill, oyer the town, may probably be seen much fiurther: this is where the signal is made for all vessels in the offing. The light on Maugher's Beach kept between N. by E. and north, will lead vou clear to the westward of Thrum Cap, which is a most dangerous shoaL Chebucto Head, which is barren and bold, bearing N.W., clean all the dangers lying to the 8.W. " It is worthy of observation, that, in approaching the land near Halifax, in thick weather, when it is just perceptible, the colour of the clifls eastward of the harbour is red, and to the westward white." The following remarks, on proceeding eaitvoard ' the Gut of Canso, are by Mr. H. Davy : — "H.M.S. Conit0a//i<, June 4, 1838.^ — Wind north, with fine weather ;' sailed for the Gut of Canso. Passed out between the Thrum Cap and Rock Head shoals, to within a cable's length of the Thrum Cap buoy, having 10 fathoms of water. This channel is quite safe. Being thus clear, E.S.R. 27 mites led us to the southward of the Jedore shoals ; then east for White Head, wind and weather looking favourable. *' Just to the eastward of Cold Harbour is a remarkably red cliff, making in a well* formed saddle ; the red is bright, and the eastern coast is easily recognised thereby ; while the coast to the westward of Halifiuc is known by its while eliffi. Strangers running from Jedoie to Canso, should not approach the coast nearer than 10 miles, until abreast of Torbay. This is a spacious bay, having Berry Head at its western point, and Cape Mar- tingo its eastern, five miles apart. White Head Island, immediately to the eastward of Torbay, is the most remarkable land on the coast, and is as a beacon to the pilot; it stands well out, and from the westward terminates the eastern view. Being ten miles south of it, steer N.E. by £. for Canso lishthouse, a tall white building, which makes well out to ka- ward on a small, low isle, called Cranberry lilandy and exhibits a good fixed light. The lighthouse must be brought to bear west, before keeping away; then steer N.N.W. until Georee Island bears west; then N.W. and N.N.W. for Cff/ie ^rgos, avoiding the Cerberu* Shoal, which is very dangerous, and directly in the track. Leave it on the larboard hand. COAST WESTWARD OF HALIFAX. 175 Cape Argos is the outermost S.E. point of the Gut of Canso ; it is bold to approach, and makes like a round island." — Naut. Mag. 3f(ty, 1839. Mr. Jeffery says, '• We left Halifox on the 15th July, 1836, with a 8.W. wind, moderate and clear weather OTer the land. At about 5 miles off, we ran into a thick fog, which con- tinned all night, and till near noon of the next day, when it was found that we luul been set thirty miles to the eastward in 24 hours. We had no sight of the land, as it was obscurM by the baxe, but sounding agreed vritb the chronometer. In thick weather a ship should never go into less than 60 fathoms, between Halifox and Canso; for, while in that depth, she will be always eight miles from any danger." GENERAL REMARKS ON THE COAST WESTWARD. From Halifax, westward, to Margaret's Bay, the couulry appears, from the oiBng, vety rocky and broken ; the shore is steep-to, and bounded wiUi white rocky cliffs. The high lands of Aspotogon, on the eastern side of Mahone Bay, are most remarkable ; the summit is very conspicuous; it is 438 fieet high, and may be seen at the distance of 7 or 8 leagues, Proowding westwaitl from Mahone Bay, the rocks which sunounded the shore are black, with some banks of red earth. Cape U Have i* an abrupt cliff, 107 feet high above the sea : it is bald on the top, with a red bank under it, facing the south-westward. Between this Cape and Port Medway, there are some hummocks within land, about which the country appears low and level from the sea ; and on the shore, white rocks and stony beaches, with several low bald points : hence to Shelbume Harbour the land is woody. About the entrance of Port Latour, and within land., are several barren spots, which, from the ofBng, are easily discerned; thence, to Cape Sable, ibe land appears level and low, and on die shore are some cliffs of exceedingly white sand, particularly in the entrance of Port Latour, and on Cape Sable, where they are very conspicuous from sea. BEARINGS AND DISTANCES OF PLACES BETWEEN HALIFAX AND CAPE SABLE, ETC. From Sambro* Lighthouse to Mametie. MUe$. True. ChebuotoHead N.E. — 3| •• N.N.E. | E. Three Fathoms Harbour RN.E. —15 •• N.E. } N. JedoreHead E.N.E. J E. —23 •• N.E.byE. Jedore Outer Ledge East. —251.. E.N.E.JE. CapeLeHave W. | S. —36 ..S.W.byW.}W. Liverpool Lighthouse W.byS. — 62 .. S.W.by W.JW. Liverpool Lighthouse to CapeLeHave E.N.E.iE. —16 •• N.E.|£. Pudding-pan Island E.N.E. i E. — 3J • . N. eo- E. Liverpool Western Head S.W. — 3 • • S.S.W. \ W. Liverpool Fort Point N.W.byW.jW. — 3| •• W.byN. IsleHope S.W. i S. —14 •• S.S.W. J W. Shelbume Lighthouse to Berry Point .•• • N.fi. | N. — 2^ " N.N.E. the South end of the Westernmost Rugged Island •• E.N.E. ^ E. — 71'. N.E,byE. Thomas* or Eastern Rugged Island £. i N. — 10| • • E.N.E. Shelbume lighthouse to the S.W. Breaker of Rugged Island E.S.F^ i E. — 7} • • E. ^ & i the Jig Rock (6 feet) S.byE.iE;. — i .. S.S.E. JE. Cape Negro S.W. i S. — 8 •• S.S.W. Cape Sable to BaccaroPoint •..-. E.N.B.fE. — 7} • • N.E. by E. i E. . the Bantam Rock East. — 7 •• E.N.E. | E. the Brasil Rock S.E. by E. -^ 8^ •• E.S.E.i£. the Blonde Rock 'y W. i N. —164.- W.byS. the South Reef of Seal Island ... . W. by N. — 16J . • W. J S. the North end of Seal Island .... W.N.W. —17 .. W. | N. 176 BETWEEN HALIFAX AND CAPE SABLE. - DESCRIPTION AND DIRECTIONS, ^ •, .■ Ifi ^ ,u!si ' SAMBRO* HARBOUR.—Tbe Harbour of Stnnbro', which has thirty ftinllNes biJi(4 borders, lies at one mile and three*quariers to the N.N.W. of the LighthdoSe Itffa^d.'* 'Off its eotMmoeis the Bull Rock* already noticed^ and there are two other rodwbetweoii (he .latter and Sambro* Island. The best channel into it is, therefore^ between Pendant PbiAf and the Bull 'Reck; but vessels from! the eastward nay run up between SambrO'* Islaihdiand the loiaer Rock. Within the entrance is an islet, called the Isle of Man, whichtis'lo^ left, when sailing inward, on the left, or larboard hand. The anchorage is above this^islM/ 10 3 fotboms, muiddy bottom. This is a place of safety for, and much resoKted toi,by» coasters, in bad weather. ^ i -a .'; PENDANT HARBOUR, (Port Ajfieek of Bet Jivrui) the next to the westward bf Sambro', has good anchoring ground. The islands on the west side of it are boldito, Kta& the ground is likewise good. The depths are btm 10 to A fiithoms^ > ; < u - TENANT BAY, (or BH$tbl Boy,) between Pttidant Harbour and Tetiaat Bsiiifij^ presents to the eye of the stranger the rudest feetut«s of natuM. It is obstructed by t^^fM rocks and islets, but, once gained, it is extensive and safe ; and in bad weather, (the onfr time vessels of consequence should enter it,) the dangers show themselves. The tide ^dWs' bere^ on Uie full and change days, at 7f h., and rises about 8 feet ' -> ' PROSPECT HARBOUR.— This Harbour is about three miles westward drt4it«&^ Bay, and is separated therefrohi by a large cluster of islets and broken land, xht oxAtt extremity 6f which is named Cape Ptotpect, or Minr^ Head. On ad Juicing, the appear- ance is rug^d; but the harbour is extensive and safe; and, in rough weather, the daneets in the vicimty show themselves. The inhabitants, about twelve families, are settfed on the left or western side, and subrist by the fishery. Two small islands on that side form a little cove, and on these are the stages. The eastern channel is between Prospect and Betsey's Islands ; and, to avoid all danger, you ought to keep more than half a mile from the land, and in 20 and 21 fathoms water^ off Cape Prospect, as there is a 17-feet rock about one*third of a mile south of the Cape,, ai^ vtithill which there is no good channel. > rv' i>'.'*^' 1ii« western entrance is betvreen an islet, called Hob$on*t Nottt on the S.E.,'Un|t'ti*rd8S^' named Dorman Rock, ou the N.W. There is a breaker, with 3 fathoms oiver it, atih^dlsr tance ef two cables' length to the east of the latter. Within ' the harbour their e ' is k gbod andiorage for the largest ships; and, for smaller vessels, in 4 fethbms, where iht bottom is of stiff blue clay. .iv;i:4fiC:: qjl > I^AG HARBOUR, ileitk Harbour of Di$ Bbrret,) is the next westward of Proseict iS^bom; it is the N.E. arm of an inlet, of which. thjB.N.Ny. arm is BUwi Bay, in botn of i«^ch ezcelleot anchorage may be found. In the common entrance without, i'o*« without tii§ Hogt a sunken rock, having only 6 feet of water over it. This rock bcwrs 8.E. | £(. iieai^ a mile and a half from Taylor's Island, (InckkeUh.) In rpugji weather,, with the wind onrsbore, the. sea breaks over it; ^o^, in fair ^ve^itber, it may be perceived, by the rippling of the tide. There is a good channel on (either sid«. That on the we^t side is most difficult, there, being a ledge.extendjng half a mile toward it, fitom theeaaterii •xiie^ imty of Tayloi^*? Island. t m >fi at the «ntrtnc« w high white rocks, and •teep.to. Oa the western eide is « narrow islet, called Soutkwnt or Holderntn hie, the south point of which, according to M. dos Barres, lies in latitude 44<> 34' 26', 9nd longitude 63*> 57'. This islet is a body ot rock, abont 50 feet in height, and bold-4o on all sides.* On the Eastern side of the Entrance, at 300 yards from Eut Fointt is a rock uncavend at low water ; and there is, at a mile and a half south from Southwest Island, a ledge called the Hane^oe, almost covered and surrounded with breakers, and which bears from the south pmnt of Taylor's Island, W. by N., 4| miles : the depths around it are and 8 fatbonit. On ike Ea$tem $ide of the Bay, at 2^ miles to the northward of East or May Point, is an irregular projection called Peggya Point. At a mile beyond this is an isle named SAttf-in hland, which is <^08 feet high, covered with wood, and hold-to ; but there are two ledges between it and the inner part of Peggy's Point, over which the depths are 8 an4 9 feet. In a southerly gale the water is smooth on the lee side of the island, and the bottom good. At a mile and a half N.E. | N. from Shut-in Island is a smaller isle, ' named Luke'B, forming a complete break to the sea, and used as a sheepfold. There is good anchon^e on the N.E. side of it, smooth in all seasons ; and this is, therefore, a useful place ojf shelter. Within two miles northward of Luke's Isle is a cluster of islets, the ^relitz Itle$ of Des Barre8,t but the principal of which are now called Joltimort^s I$U». A reef extends north-eastward from the latter, and the land within forms the harbour called Hertford Basin, wherein the depths are from 7 to 10 fathoms, and the anchorage is safe under the lee of Jollimore*s Isles. Head Harbour, (or Delaware River,) in the N.E. corner of the Bay, is an anchorage of the first class, and so perfect a place of safety that a fleet may be moored in it, side by side, and be unaffected even by a hurricane. The lands are high and broken. Ten families were settled in the neighbourhood in 1817. The island^, at tlie entrance, are used as sheepfolds. Hubbbrt's Govb, (Ft/sroy River,) in the N.W. corner of ihe bay, may be entered by a stranger, by keeping the western shore on board ; and a ship dismasted or in distress may here find perfect shelter. If without anchors, she may safely run aground, and will be assisted by the settlers. At the entrance of the cove, toward the eastern side, is a ridge of rocks called Ilubbert's Ledge (filocft Leo^e); this is about 100 fathoms in extent, and covered at high water. It may be passed on either side, keeping the land on board, the shores being bold. Between Hubbert's Ck>ve and Head Harbour are several indents, with projeciiog rngs^ed Kints. From these places small vessels take building. sand and limestone, the latter ing of a superior quality. Salmon abound here ; and, in the lakes above, are vast quantities of fine trout. LoHO CovB, {Egremont Cove,) 2 miles to the southward of Hubbert's Cove, on the western side of the bay, is a good anchorage with a westerly wind. An excellent stream, on which is a sawmill, falls into this place. Hence, southward, the coast is bold and nigged ; but there is no danger, excepting one small rock of six feet of water, close iursbore. At a mile to the northward of Southwest Isle, in the entrance of the Bay, is the little harbour called N.W, Uarboutf sheltered by an islet, (Hone hie,) and within which is tolerable anchorage for small craft : both the channels into it are good. Several families are settled here. Above this harbour the west shore is rugged and. Farther up, N.W. by W., 400 fathoms distant, from the west point of Tancook -Tslaikf, lies Rotky Shoal; within which and Tancook Islartd is deep water. The CoaeMiak\9Z blind ledge, a mile and a quarter north of Great Tftncook, and visible at low water only. At the head of Mahone Bay is the town of Chester, which was settled in 1760, and is surrounded by a country of fine appearance, and abounding in wood. The infia- bitants are industrious, and the adjacent islands covered with sheep. On approachins the bay from the eastward, the first land seen will be Green Island, which is round, bold, and moderately high. Hence, to Iron-bound and Flat Islands, the distance is about 3 miles ; passing these, which are bold-to, you proceed to and between the Tancook Islandsi which are inhabited : the passage is good, and there is anchorage, under the isles, in from 12 to 7 fathoms. On proceeding toward Chester, the only danger is the ledge called the Coachman, above mentioned. You will just clear the eastern side of this ledge, by keeping the east ends of Great Tancook and Flat Island in one; and the western side by keeping the west end of Iron-bound Island open with the west point of Little Tancook. The islands off the town render the harbour smooth and secure, the depth in which is from 5 to 3 fathoms. Chester church open, on the west of Great Tancook, leads clear to the westward of the Bull Rock, and down to Duck Island. In Margaret's and Mahone Bays it is high water on the full and change at 8 h., and the vertictti rise is from 7 to & feet. k, OB LUNENBURG HARBOUR.— This is a place of consider^ able trade, and its populafiori, in 1817, amounted to 4,300 persons. Vessels are «oa- stantly piving between Lunenburg and Halifiix, carrying to the latter cord-wood, lumber, hay, cattle, stock, and all kinds of vegetables. The harbour is easy of access, with anchorage to its head. To sail in, you may pass on either side of Cross Island,* on which stands the light* house, showing two lights placed vertically, the lower light ftxed, and the upper showing a flash at intervals of a minute ; the channel on the west side of the island is the best. In sailing through the northern channel, be careful to avoid the shoals which extend from the north side of the island, and from Colesworth Point on the opposite side. In sailing in, through the channel to the westward of the island, steer midway between it and Pobi/ JRofe ; and, pl« haf raised the town to respeoiability and opulenoe, and thiey trade to every part of the West Indies. The lumber trade and fishery are flourishing, mid tfji^ population exceeds 4A00 peraoni. m t- In Port Medway, and Liverpool B&y, it is high waiter, on the full and chaitge» at fiftf minutes past seven, and the vertical rise is from 5 to 8 feet. i " PORT MOUTON, or Matook, iOambitt Harbour of Da Barra,) is formed bylin island of the same name, which lies at the entrance, and therefore forms two diannels. Of the latter, that on the western side of the island is so impeded by islets and shbals, ai tV leave a small passage only for small vessels, and that close to the main. At a mile from the isl»nd« on the east, is « ridge called the Brazil Roek${ and, from the N.W. end of the- island, a shoal extends to the distance of more than a mile. Within Matoon Island, on' the W.N.W., are two islands called the Spectacles, or Saddle. M. dei Barres says, *'0n both sides of the Portsmouth [ Bfuit] Rocks, which are always above water, you havedeap, channels, and of a sufficient vfidth for ships to luni into the Iv^bour." With a .lfiadii^< wind you may steer up W.N.W. | W., vintil you bring the Saddle to bear S.W. i W^ and, haul up S.W. by W. to the anchoring ground, where there will be found from ,20 to i9. fathoms, muddy bottom, in security from all winds. At five miles S.S.W. i W. from the south end of Mouton Inland lies an islet, surrounded by a shoal, and named Littlb Hope Island. It is only 21 iieet higb.and 200 .^thorns in length, at 2i miles from the shore. A valuable ship was lost here, in 1815 ; and Mr. Lockwood has recommended the erection of an obelisk, or beacon, up^ the isle, which would be of great advantage to the coasters, and to all who approach the coast. . PQRT JO^IJB.— The next harbour, west of Little Hope Isle, is Port tohit., {Stftrmont liieer of pes Barres, and litt/e Port Jolljf of others,) which extends five miles inlai(d, but is ahogetjier very shoal, and has scarcely sufficient water for large boats.. 'Xin lands here are stony and barren, but elieven families are maintained by fishing. Between this harbour and Hope Isle are several ledges, which show themselves, and there. is a shoal spot nearly midway between the isle and the main. PORT ^EBERT, or Great Port Jolic, (Port Mantfieid of Des Barres,) may be distinguished by the steep head on the west. Its eastern point. Point Uehirtt lies in latitude 430 51', and longitude 64° 51' 20'. At half a league to the S.W., without the entrance, is an islet, called Green Island, which is remarkable, and destitute of wood. The onl^ anchorage here, for large vessels^ is in the mouth of the harbour. Above ate flats, with narrow winding channels through the mud. Fifteen families. are sett(fd in the port. •, ^[)ri> ,nf^ .biviifii Hi hi- ^■,ir„?gf»j'^ ^tLteiJyfl 'M . SABLE RIVER (Penton River pi Des Barres) is impeded by a bar which acUnilSpiu) vessels larger than small fishers. The country is sterile, but eleven families are settled here^ A',i^^iiu»' mr RH^dlslandt to the east of the harboar) afibrdsa good mark foir it | tfik island having high rocky dith on its eastern sid«. From its' soiithem point Siiiiken iocH extend to the S.W. nearly a mile, and within these is the Tiger, a rock of only 4 feet, tying soa^h, half a mile from Rug Point, the eastern point ofthe harbour. Having cleared these on the outside, haul up N.N.W. for the islands on the left or weelcrn side, and so as ip avoid a shoal which stretches half.way over from the opposite side. Pursiiing this direction you may proceed to the anchorage in the north arm ot the harbour. ., . or PORT ROSEWAY.i-Cape Roaeway, ttre S.E. poittjl of Roseneath or Maonotl^s Island, is a high cliff bf white reeks, the top of which is partly without wood. The west :skle 4>f the islaod b lomJ ' Oti'thie Gape s^nds y whi^ it is dist^ngqisM, at olgbt>^ jS^m the UghiorSambmVjor Ifolifax. The bppier light is about l«Oleet above the lemel of tht sea, and) the smaller ligM is a« fcet beloiy^K iMtf^. , SH£LBURt9£ HARBOUB. tsi Ml-I/ ■<;p'^ fhe 'The latUvd* of this lighthouse is 48«» 40' 80* } longiiade, 6!fi 12' 35'. "This Imrboar is, altogether, the best in Nova Scotia, but iu town has Ions been in ft state of decline, and some of its streets are overgrown with grass and Weeos. In 1784 in: population exceeded 12,000 ; in 1810, it had diminished to 874 persons : but. in 1828. it had 2697. r . » » ,>Tbe directions for this harbour, as given by Mr. Backhouse, are as follows. CSmAmCAivI. J When ooming in from the ocean, after vou have made the lighthouse, bring it to beat N)W., or N.W. by N., and steer directly for it. The dangers that lie on the east sid^L going in, are the Rugged Island Rooks, a long ledge that stretches out from the shor« or 7 miles, the Belt Rook, and the Sthiptub RoCk. On the west side is the Jig Rock; The Bell Rock is always visible and bold*to. > < ' 'When you have gotteri abreast of the lighthouse, steer up in mid>channeL Roseneall^ Island is pretty hold-to, all the way from the lighthouse to the N.W. end of the island. When ypu come up half-wav between George's Point and Sandy Point, be carefial of af^fk«h rock that runs off rrom that bight, on which are only 3 fothoms at low water; k^l^ thif west shore on board to avoid it: your depth of water will be from 4, 5, to $. fathoms. - ''^^^AvtY Point is pretty steep-to: run abpve this point about half a mile, and qome to anti|ior in 6 fathoms, inuddy bottom ; if you choose, you may sail up to the upper part of the harbour, and come to anchor in 5 fathoms, muddy bottom, about one mile and a half ftiotn the town, below the harbour flat. This harbour would contain all her Majesty's ships of the tbird*rate. In saHing in f^om the eastward, be careful to avoid tha Rugged Island Rocks, which sire ander water; do not haul up for the harbour till the lighthouse bears from you W. by N. i N.: by that means you will avoid every danger, and may proceed as taught above. , , In sailing into Shelburne from the westward, do not haul up for the lighthouse till it bears irom you N.W. bv W. ^ W. : you will thus avoid the Jig Rock^ on the west, which lies within one mile and a quarter S. k W. from the lighthouse, and is pretty steep-to. ' Should the wind take you a-hend, and constrain you to ply to the windward up the harbour, do not make too bold with the eastern shore ; for half-way between George's Point and Sandy Point, is a reef of sunken rocks. When you come abreast of them^ yO«i need not «tand above half-'channel over to avoid them : the Huuar frigate, in plying to windward down the harbour, had nearly touched on them. On the west shore, abreast of Sandy -Point, it is flat ; therefore do not make too bold in standing over. The ledee of rocks that his Majesty's ship Adamant struck upon, which lies abreast of Durfey's House, is to be carefully avoided : do not stand any farther over to the west* ward than 4} fiiithoms, lest you come bounce Upon the rock, as the Adamant did, and lay a whole tide before she floated, and that not without lightening the ship. The east shore has regular soundings, from Sandy Point upward, from 3 to 4, and 5 to 6, fiitboms, tb the upper part of the harbour, where' you may ride safely in Ave fathoms, good holding ground. Your course up from the lighthouse in a fairr/ay, is from' N.W. to N.W. by N. ; and when you round Sandy Point, the course is thence N. by W. and* North^ as you have the wind. The entrance of Shelburne Harbour affords a refuge to ships with the Wind dff- f|)f;re, (which the entrance of Haliittx does not,) and there is anchming ground at the oiliouth of Uie baibour, when it blows too strong to ply to windward. In Boiim^Jrwu the weitvtard for Shtlbume^ at night, you must not haul up foHhe harboiir until the light bears N. by E. ^ E., in order to avoid the Jig Rook; and, when sailing in, from the eattwairdf you must not haul up for the harbour till the light bears W^ Vy N.^ N., in order to: avoid the ledges that lie off the Rugged Islands, and bear from the lighdioaae £. } S. eight miles distant. You may stop a tide in the entrabce of ttM harhqtiuc^in^irpn?' .16 to 10fathoms» sand, and aoii!iApir«Kct«]^bOltaDK*idliX^ Ha SjbellMime liasafe harbour i^ainat any wind, except a violent storm froni the S.S.W. A\i^ toiVO, ^wind from St 1^ £. does no harm ; although, firom S. by W. to 8.W. by 8;> if|]|owiQg1iaidfof My.cpnsideeable time^ it is apt to set tbe soiall vessels adri^iat ttte wbaKftc;b«lyintfettstream»iiiidigoodcablte«nd«nch, block, 182 NEGltO HARBOUH. and tail makers, also. It affords pleniy of spars, and, generally, of provi»ions. Water is easily obtained, and of excellent quality. The port>charges for a vessel whicb puts in for supplies only, is fourpence per ton, light money, on foreign bottoms. If a vessel enters at the custom-house, the charges are high : but that is seldom requisite." iSkBOUK {Port Amhtrtt of Des Barres) takes its name from Cape Negro, on the island which lies before it, in latitude 43° 3«', and longitude %&" 17'. The island is very low about the middle, and appears like two islands. The Cape itself is remarkably high, dark, rocky, and barren, and bears S.W. j| S. 7| miles* from Cape Roseway, or Shelburne lighthouse. The best channel in is on the eastern side of the island ; but even this is impedAl by two ledges, called the Oruy Roeki and Budget ; the latter a blind rock, of only six feet, at a quarter of a mile from the island, on both sides of which there is deep water. The Gray Rocks lie at a quarter of a mile to the northeastward of the Budget, and serve as a mark ror the harbour. In the passage on the eastern side of the Budget, tlve depths are from 1 4 to 10 faihomi> With Shelburne light shut in, you will be within the rocks. There is excellent anchorage on the N.E. of Negro Island, in from 6 to 4 fathoms, bottom of stiff mud. The northern part of the island presents a low shingly beach, and from this a bar extends over to the eastern side of the harbour, on a part of which are only 15 feet of water. The river abpve is navigable to the distance of six miles, having from A to 3 fathoms, bottom of clay. The inhabitants of the harbour, in 1817, amounted to 463 persons, who subsist by farming and fishing. They now exceed 500. The passage on the western side of Negro island is very intricate, having numerous rocks, ^c. ; yet, as these may be seen, it may be attempted, under cautious decision, by a stranger, in case of distress.t PORT LATOUR {Port HaUimand of Des Barres) is separated from Negro Harbour by a narrow peninsula. The extreme points of the entrance are Jeffery Point on the east, and Baccaro Point on the west. Between, and within these, are several dusters of rock, which render the harbour fit for small craft only. * Baccaro Poimt is at the entrance of this port on the west side ; the Vulture, a danse^- ous breaker, lies S.W. by W. half a league rrom the point. The Bantam Rock, also half a league S. by W. ) W. from the point, has only 4 feet over it at low water. BARRINGTON bay.— With the exception of the rocks off Point Baccaro, the Bay of Barrington is clear ; but there are extensive flats toward the head of it, and the channel upward narrows so much, that it requires a leading win-* to wind through it to the anchoring-sround, where the depths are from 36 to 18 feet. The town of Babrimgton, seated at the head of the harbour, with its environs, contained, in 1817, a population of 987 persons, happily situated. The lands are stony, but afford excellent papturage, and cattle are, consequently, abundant here. During a S.W. gale, there is good shelter on the N.E. side of Sable Island, in 5 and 4 fathoms, sandy bottom. The Westers Passage, or that on the N.W. side of Sable Island, is intricate, and therefore used by small vessels only ; it is not safe without a commanding breeze, as the tide sets immediately upon tlie rocks, which lie scattered within it, and the ebb is forced tbroogh to the eastwara, by the bay-tide on the west, at the rate of from 3 to 5 knots. This passage is, however, much used by the coasters. • Not Jffleeu miles, as stated by Mr. Lockwood. t The rodu in the irfcinity of Cape Negro are not the only evils to be dreaded here. In the month of December, 1818, the Jfary, brig, of Cumberland, New Brunswick, on her way to Paasa- maquoddy, struck on the Uaif-Moon Roclu, near Cape Negro. The vessel filled with water, and ten of the passengers perished in less than ten minutes. Seventeen got into the boat ; but, it being dark, and the sea running high, the boat was not manageable, and struck on a rock, near the larger one, called BAMefte /«/«<, which was covered With snow. Here, a lady, Mrs. Soden, and her seven children, with ofixer persons, were drowned. During this time the inhabitants of Port Latour werie plundering the wreck of such clothes and baggage, belonging to the suffibrers, as had eitcaped the seas« The vessel was sold by public Suction, and bought by some inhabitants, on condition that the properties of the psssengers should be dven i^ to them, including what had been stolen from the vessel; an agreement which was evaded. Seavch-warrants ware granted, but incflbctualiy, as the accused were apprised of the intended visit, by some officers of Jutnce, who were sharers in the spoin After some weeks spentin this way, the surviving passengers were obliged to leave all with the robbers, some of whom were of high standing in Port Latour and Barrington. {Obttrver, Nov. 7, 18 19. ) • coast ran norti vesM day I bytl Cape be a THE BAY OF FUNDY. 183 OAVB SABUL— Sable Islam o is tinder tillnge, and hnd foHjr-sfren femilin on it, comfortably situated, in 1817. Gape Sable is the cliff of a landy islet, diitlnel from the former ; it is white, broken, evidently diminishing;, and may be seen at the distance of 5 leagues. F.rom this islet ledges extend outward, both to the east and west; the eastern ledge, called the Horu-shoe, extends 2) miles S.B. by S. : the WHtcrn, or Cape Ledge, extends three miles to the S.W. The tide, both ebb and flood, sets directly across these ledges, the flood westward. The ebb, setting with rapidity to the N.E., causes a strung break to a considerable distance from shore. The position of tlie southern point of Cape Sable has been eiven in latitude 43° 24', and longitude 65" Si' 30" ; but in the note on the Table of Positions, it has been shown that the position of Seal Island has .probably been given too far to the northward, and this, consequently, has been the cause of the loss of so many ships in coming out of the Bay of Fundy.* Therefore this coast should not be approaehea without a commanding breeze and clear weather. Of the stream, kc, M. des Barres says, " Here the tide runs at the rate of three, aihd sometimes four, knots ( and, when the wind blows fresh, a riopling extends from the breakers southerly to the distance of nearly three leagues, and sbihs its direction with the tide ; with the flood it is more westerly, and inclines to the eastward with the ebb. This ripple may be dangerous to pass through in a gale, as it has all the appearance of high breakers, although tf.sre is no less than 8, 10, 13, and 20,fatlioms of water, rocky ground. At the Cape, the tide, on full and change, flows at 8 h., and rises 9 feet." BRASIL ROCK. — This rock has been variously described, but we have no doubt that the following is correct. It is a flat rock, covering an area of about ten yards, and having 8 feet over it, at tow water, in calm weather; within a hundred yards from its base, are from 6 to r fathoms of water : to the southward, at about a mile from the rock, the depths are from 30 to 35 fathoms: but, toward the shore, the soundings are regular, 15 and 19 to 20 and 24 fathoms, sandy bottom. The tide, by running strongly over the shoal ground, causes a great ripple, and makes the rock appear larger than it really is. From Cape Negro the tearing and distance to the rock are S.S. W,, true, or S. W. | S. by compass, 10 miles ; and, from the rock. Cape Sable bears W, by N. \ N, true^ or N.W. by W. i W. by compass, 8i miles. Its given position is, latitude 43° 21' 30", or according to M. des Barres, 43° 24' 15'; longitude 65° 22'. IV.— The bay of FUNDY, and the COASTS between CAPE SABLE and PASSAMAQUODDY BAY. OAVnONS.— An inspection of the Chart of the S.W. coast of Nova Scotia, and a consideration of the relative situation of that coast, as exposed to the ocean, with the consequent and variable set of the tides about it, as well as about the Island Manan, &c., will naturally lead the mariner to consider that its navigation, in- volving extraordinary difficulties, requires extraordinary attention. Previous events, the ffreat number of ships lost hereabout, even within a/ewjfear*, will justify the supposition. It is, indeed, a coast beset with peril ; but the peril* may be avoided, in a great degree, by the exercise of skill and prudence. To the want of both are to be attributed many of th« losses which have occurred here.f In touching on this suhject, Mr. Lockwood says that, the necessity of frequently sounding with the deep-sea lead, and the expediency of having anchors and cables ready for immediate use, cannot be too often urged, nor too often repeated. Vessels well equipped mdptrfeet in gear, with anchors stowed, as in the middle of the Atlantic Oceani^ • The weentloss of the CUhtmhia steam-vessel is an example of the dangerous nature of this coast. She was proceeding ftom Boston towards Halifax, and on the 2nd of July, 1843, at 1 p.m., ran ashore on the Devil's Limb, a rock a mile and a quarter from the land, and one and a lialf northward from the Ughthous* on Seal Island, this disaster caused the total destruction of the vessel, but the>crew and piassengers were fortunately saved. A brig went a«how on the foUowinff day near the same wot. It was caused by an unusually strong mset into the Bay (tf Fundy, and by the dense fog wUcb prevailed at the time ; but this, and the unceiiUdnty of the po^ti6n of the Cape, ought to have occasioned greater precauUon in sounding and looking out. This, we hope, will be a warning to all vessels to beep weU to the southward of Cape Sable. t See preceding note. 184 THE BAY OF FUNDY. have been wracked in moderate weather, and to franuently, that luoh groaa idleiieM cannot be too much raprobated ; and, we may add, too J'ullif espoud.* \» — Aa the tidea ara most particularly to be attended to, we ahall attempt a deacription of them in the flrat inatancCi^ before we proceed to- that of the coaat and tne consequent tailing directions. The Tide about Caps Sable has been explained in the preceding section. From Cape Sable toward the Seal, Mud, and Tusket lales, the flood seta to the northwestward, at the rate of from two to tlire« miles in an hour ; in the channels of these islets its rate increasea to four or five miles. At the Seal and Mud Islands the ebb runs E. bv S., S. E., and South ; varying, however, with the flgure of the lands and the direction of the wind. From tite Tutket hle$ the tide flowa to the northward, taking (he direction of the shore, DMt Cape St. Marv ; thence N.N.W. toward Brier's Island. The flood, therefora, seta but slowly up i^i. Mary's Bay, yet with increnaing strength up the Bay of Fundy ; aiill greater, as the bay narrows upward; so that the Basin of Mines and Chignecto Bay are filled with vast rapidity, ana here the water soroetimea rises to the extraordinary height of 7A feet. These tides are, however, regular ; and, although the wind, in an opposite direction, chauKes the direction of the rippling, and sometimes makes it dangerous, it has little or no eSirat on their general couraes. The Dangers about Oramd Maman have been distinguished by wrecks as much as the S.W. coast of Nova Scotia ; and the best passage is, therefore^ on the west of that island. Hera the tides course regularly and strongly ; but among the rocka and ledges on the S.E. they are devious, embarrassing, and run with great rapidity. At the Bay of Passamaquoddy, from the S.E. land to tlie White Islanda, the flood strikes across with great strength, and in I^ht winds must be particularly guarded against The Tide of St. John's Harboi;r, New Brunswick, will be noticed hereafter, as will that of Aunapolia. Through the Out of the latter it rushes with great force and rapidity. Strtmgera bound up the Bay of Fundy^ to St. John'a or Annapolis, should have a pilot ; as the tides in this Bay are very rapid, and there is no anchoring ground until you reach the Bay of PassaroaQuoddv, or Meogenea Ba)r. In the Bay the weather is frequently venr foggy, and the S.E. gates blow with great violence for twelve or fourteen hours ; then shift to Uie N.W., and as suddenly blow as violently from the opposite quarter.f " The spring tidet in the Bay of Ftindy rise to 30 feet perpendicular, and neap tides rise from 20 to 22 feet ; they flow on full ard change, at St. John's, Meogenes Bay, Annapolis, Harbour Delute, L'Etang, and Grand Manan Island, at 12 o'clock. The tide sets nearly along shore." '* In Chignecto Bay the tide flows with fpreat rapidity, as before mentioned, and at th« equinoxes rises from 60 to 70 feet perpendicular. By means of these high tides, the Basin of Mines, and several fine riven, which dischaige themselves about the head of the Bav of Fundy, art rendered navigable. It is worthy of remark, that, at the same time, the tiulf of St Lawrence tide, in Bay Ferte, on the N.E. side of the isthmus, rises only 8 feet" VIm OOASTSf XSLAWDS* 4bO*--The southernmost point of Seal Island, wbkh bean from that of the ledge of Cape Sable nearly W.N.W. i W. 5| leagues, lies in or about latitude 43° 22 1', and longitude 65" 59'. This island ia more than two miles in length, north and south. The southern part, covered with scrubby trees, is elevated 30 feet above the sea. A dangerous reef extends to one mile south, from the south end of the island. Seal Island Light.— Since the 1st of November, 1831, a lighthouse on the S.W. part of the island has exhibited a conspicuous ybred lightf now 170 feet above high water mark, which may be seen, on approaching, from every point of the compass. At about two miles S.S.W. from the lighthouse on Seal Island lies the Blonde, a rock • Initaiue$.—h valuable coppered ship, with light airs of wind, drifted on the rocks, although the fishing lines were in use at the time, the breaken heard and the depth knOwn. In the last extremity, a kcdge-anchor was let go. The ship bilged, and the paiaengers were landed. On a point, firom which soundings gradually deepen to nearly 40 miles, a Urge coppered ship ran ; and, having landed her passengers, was sold, as usual, for the iei^Mt if the unatnonten. These are but two out of many. Some appear almost incredible ; but the authority places the facts Iwyond doubt. f This was said by M. Dcs Barrcs ; but see, fiirther, the General DirecUoru, ke„ hereafter. S oft bui WESTERN COAST OF NOVA ICOTIA. 1%S Gulf . »» aneovertd •! low w«ier, en which »H« ftttpti* of ihai imom wmImI in 1717. CIom wottod it are from 7 to 10 fathomi. Within « mile wettwRtd from th« Blondo, an heavy Mid daa* «!WM overfclli, which present an alarming aapeot. At 4} miles north from tbfM i| A bed of ihotl ground, of 16 Act, causing a violent ripple. "T ^ Off the west side of Seal Island is the rocky islet culled the XJeviTi £tm* .• whkb may at all times be seen. ' MVDJSJLES, sometimes called the ffoOTM Ssau, consist of Ave low rugged islands. The southernmost is situate at S4 miles from the N.E. j»rt of Seal Ishnd. Between U a pastate flt for any ship, but there are ovcrfiills of 18 feet at the distance of a short mile timti the southern Mud Island. In the channel are from 10 to 15 fathoms. This channel lies with Gape Sable, bearing S.E. by E. | E. [£. f 5.] distant 5 leagues. nWild fowl, as well as fish, abound here ; and, on one of the isles,, vast quaniitiea of petrels, or Mothef Carey's chickeos, annually breed. They burrow underground, diagonally* a, or 4 feet deep, where they sit on one egg, and nay be seen flitting about the ground in aatoniahing numbers, searching for food. The course and distance to pass from Cape Sable to between the Seal and Mud Islands are N.W. by W. | W. six leagues. In this track may be found several overfalls, of from 10 to 7 fathoms, bottom of gravel, which break violently in spring tides. The north end of Seal Island is bold-to one cable's length, 10 to 7 nlhoms. The opposite side has a shoal bank, on which a ship of war struck in 1796. The TUSK ET ISLES, or Tvskits, is the group or cluster lying to the northward of the Mud Isles, and to the S.W. of the entrance of Tusket River. Some of them are of considerable size, and there are many shoals and ledees among them. On the west of these isleiareGaBev IsLANoand the Gammbt Rqck ; the latter, whitened with birda' duog» is 36 feet above the sea at high water. At about half a league from it, on the S.W.,^ is a ledge that appears at half ebb, and on which the O/wuum, brig, struck in 1816. Other vessels have been injured by this danger, which has been heretofore repreeented to lie; at /fitr miles W. by N* from the Gannet. .jhAt half a mile to the N.W. of the north-western Mud Isle is a dangerous ledge, bare at half-ebb, called the Solditrt^ which is more than half a mile in length from N.N.E. to SJ9.W. At a mile and a quarter N. k ^- from this is another, the Actaon^ which thence extends N. by W. two.tbirds of a mile. Half a mile farther, in the same direction, is a shoal of similar size, having over its centre a depth of only 2 fathoms. The navigation hfins^bout is, therefore, to be avoided by strangers. ,\ JPUBNICO. — ^This harbour, little known, is a very good one ; it is easy of access, and conveniently situated for vessels bound to the Bay of Fundy, which, in distress, may here find supplies as well as shelter. From the south end of Seal Island Reef, already described, to the eotraitce of Pubnico, the bearing and distance are N.E. i E. 15 miles. The depths between vary from 20 to 16 frithoms, and thence to 12 and 6 fithoms, up to the beach, the prq)er anchorage A>r a stranger. On the western side, above the beach, is a ledge, partly dry at low water. The total population of Pubnico, in 1817, was 285 persons, childfeti included. i - ,,, 1 , do wiling toward Pubnico, you pass on tHe west of Joftn** Itilo»tf, wWidi%s 9|-iiiles io the southward of the harbour^ and the north side of which affbtds gdod shelter duribf * d,£. gale. Small vessels lie along the beach forming the eastern part of thik island. ' '^< ' ; IPrpm the entrance of Pubnico, a course W. by N., 4 leagues, leads clear to the southward nf the tusket Isles. On this course you will pass at a mile to the southward of the s6utb- Smmoet .Tusket, or Bald Isle. A course W. \ S., 12 miles, will lead between and clear of le Apt«eon Mid Soldiers' ledges, whence 'you may proceed either tof the N.W. ^»r SiW. according to your destination., OAFS rOVXOBVt or the Fork £0 Cape, which lies in about latitude 43° 47' 80', longitude 66<* 10', is Very remirkabte, being rocky, barren, and higbi The lAOJktu^n on the island of CaM Fot^rchu exhibits a brilliant revolving light, at 145 fiset above the level oftheste; itisvisWe for one minute arid a quarter, and invisible half a minute. The building is painted red and white, in vertical stripes. The island itself hae two narrow prongs running out i thet southward, from which it derives its name ; the inlet formed by them must not be mi»iaken for the entrance to Yarmouth, which, of, oouijBe»IffMfo the irveslwaid of both of them. " * See the note on page 183. «B 196 CAPE FOURCHU. Within this Cape is the liarbour of Yabmouth, which is small, but safe. Off {he en- trance, at 2* miles S.S.W. J W., lies the Bagthot, a blind rock, which is dry at low water, and runs shoal one quarter of a mile to the southward. In sailing into the harbour, you may pass on either side of it. There are other rocks in the entrance, and the fairway in is on the eastern shore, till opposite the point or isthmus on that side. At the top of tlie latter stands the battery ; and under its lee, or -to the northward, is the anchorage, with good ground, in 6 or 5 fathoms. Above the anchorage is the town of Yarmouth, a respectable one, which contained, with its environs, 4345 persons in 1828. It has beenrecenttv a place of increasing conse- quence, and appears like a rising village of New England. *' The little red-coloured Acadian cotiages are succeeded by large frame houses, neatly coloured white ; and the occasional appearance of square-rigged vessels and smaller craft in the harbour, indicates the rising efforts of a spirit of enterprise.*' At a league and a half S. by E. firom Cape Fourchu is Point Jegogan {Cope Jebogue of Des Barres) ; the land between is low. Within the point is tlie little harbour of Jeboouc, which is shoal, and frequented only b^ the coasters. There are several shoals in the vicinity. The lands hereabout are good, of moderate height, and well settled. From Cape Fourchu to Cape St. Maby. the bearing and distance are N. } £. 6 leagues t and from Cape St. Mary to tlie S.W. end of Bryer's Island, N.N. W. i W. 1S| miles. With Cape Fourchu bearing S.E. by E. ) E. 14 miles distant, lies the Lurcher, a sunken ledge of 12 feet at low water, covering an area of about three acres. From the OannetRock to this ledge, the bearing and distance are N.N.W. | W. 19| ruiles; and, from the Lurcher to Cape St. Mary, N.E. } E. 18 miles. The Trinitt Ledge, another reef, lies S.W. | W. 6 miles from Cape St. Mary, and N. by W. 14 miles from Cape Fourchu. This danger covers a space of more than half aa acre, and three small rocks upon it are seen at low tides. The stream sets rapidly over it. The depth, to a mile around, is from 12 to 15 fathoms. BSTBA'8 IS&AND, above mentioned, is an island only Si miles in extent from N.E. to S.W., on the western side of the entrance of St. Mary s Bay. It contained, in 1816, 147 persons. On its S.W. side is a lighthouse, the light of which is about 92 ftet above the level of the sea. A rocky spit extends two miles S.W. from the S.E. poi it of the island, and has a rock near its extremity, called the Black Roek. At a mile farthei-, in the same direction;, is a small shoal of 3 fathoms.* A new Liobthouse, lantern, and lamps, have been completed on the site of the old lighthouse on Bryer's Island. '< The complaints against the bad keeping of the old light were universal, and when the old lighthouse came to betaken down, it was then discovered that eight large posts, which snpported the roof, passing up by the lantern, had intercepted the light about 25 per cent. ; and, by acting as so many screens, made the light appear, as a vessel altered her position, like a bad or blinking light." f The lighthouse stands about half a mile N.E. from the N.W. point of the island, is painted white, and shows a brilliant flxed light at 90 feet elevation. LONG ISLAND.— The next island to Bryer's, forming the west side of St. Mary's Bay, is Long Island; it is 10 miles long (Vom N.E. to S.W., and half a league in breadth. It is inhabited, and its inhabitants, in IR 16, amounted to 135 persons. Long Island is divided from Bryer's Island, on the S.W., by a strait, called Orand Pauagct * On Bryer's Island the ship Trafalgar, of Hull, was lost, 25th July, 1817, at about half-past eight in the evening. Tlie ship, Iwund for St. John's, had been running up all the day : the wea- ther Iwing thick, could not see any thing ; " At seven p.m. hove the ship to, with her head to the westward, thinking we were well over to the westward, sounding in 40 fathoms ; the tide ran with great strength ; uid, before we could see the land, we heard the surf against the rocks ; got sail upon the ship ; but, being so close, the strong tide set us upon the rocks. It being high water when we got on, mn out a kedge to heave her oCT, but all to no purpose. At low water the ship wu dry all round, amongst the rugged rocks, which went through tier in different parts ; the ship tiavlng as much water witmn as there was on the outside at high water." The passengers were uiely landed, and a part of the stores saved, which were taken to St John's to be sold, there being no purchasers on the island. t We are indebted for this and much other valuable informadon to Mtr. Wm. EeunMt, Cluurt and Bookseller, of St John's, New Brunswick, whose laudable seal flw the diflbsiun of nich knowledge is entitled to the most respectful acknowledgment By this gentleman we have been informed that <' Ail the lighthouses in the Bay of Fundy have the best constructed iron lanterns, with copper Iamp4, and the improved reflectors : consequently are fuUy to be depended on." BAY OF FUNDV. !B7 III and on the N.E. from the Peninsula of St. Mary, by another, called Petit Pauage. In the Grand Passage tlie water is deep, but the chnnnel crooked ; and it should not be uU tetnpted by a stranger, unless under very favourable circumstances. The Petit Passage is about 280 fathoms wide in its narrowest part, and hat from 20 to 30 fathoms of waters its shores are bold-to. On its western side, near the northern entrance, lies Eddy Cove, a convenient place for vessels to anchor in, out of the stream of the tide, which runs so rapidly, that without a fresh leading wind, no ship can stem it. The south end of Grand Passage is lli^ miles N. by W. from Gape St. Mary. That of the Petit Passage is three leagues to the north-east from Grand Passage. BAY of St. MAUY. — From Cape St. Mary, upward, into this bay, the south shore is low, and runs out in sandy flats. The north shore presents high steep clifls, with deep water close under them. Mid-channel, and above two-thirds up the bay, lies a rocky bank, with 4 and 4i fathoms of water, and on each side of which are channels of 12 and 15 fathoms, muddy bottom. The entrance of the River Sissibou, on the south side of the bay, is shoal, and within has a narrow channel of 2 fathoms of water. Op* posite to Sissibou lies the Sandy Gove, where small vessels, when it blows hard, may ground safely on mud, and be sheltered from all winds. BAT of rmrOT GONTINUED.— We now proceed with the particular de. Bcription of the Goasis of the Bay of Fundy, commencing with Bryer's Island, the light. liouse on which has been described. Off the N.W. side of Bryer's Island are several dangers, which must be cautiously avoided. Of these, the outer are called the Northvoeit Ledge, and Betson't Ledge : they. lie at the distance of 2^ to 4 miles northwestward of the island, and between them and (he shore are two other ledges, with deep channels between them ; but the situations of the latter are not exactly known. The N.W. Ledge is 4 miles N. \ E. from the lighthouse. Its slioal part is of the extent of an acre of ground, and the whole extent of the shoal about three-quarters of a mile. In the parallel of 44° 15', at 8 miles westward of Bryer's Island, strong tipples of tide tnay be found, which may easily be mistaken for shoals and breakers ; though the jiound. ings here vary from 45 to 33, and again to 45 fathoms. At 2i miles more to the south are 56 fathoms ; and at 2 miles from Bryer's Island are 40 fathoms. At 5 miles to the northwestward of this Island no bottom is to be found with a line of 90 fathoms. The coast from the south part of Long Island to the Gut of Annapolis, is nearly straight, and trends N.E. by E. 11 leagues. The shore is bound with high rocky cliffs, above which is a range of hills, that rise to a considerable height; their tops appear smooth and unbroken, except near the Grand Passage, Petit Passage, Sandy Cove, and Gulliver's Hole, where those hills sink in valleys. ANNJLPOXilS.— The entrance of the Gut of Annapolis, or Digby Cut, Una in latitude 440 42', and longitude 65** 46i'. The shore, on both sides, without the Gut, h iron-bound for several leagues. From Petit Passage, there is a range of hills rising gradually to a considerable height, to the entrance of the Gut, where it terminates by a steep fall. Here you have from 25 to 30 and 40 fathoms of water, which, as you draw into the basin, shoalens quickly to 10, 8, and 6 fathoms, muddy bottom. The stream of ebb and flood sets through the Gut at the rate of five knots, and causes several whirlpools and eddies. The truest tide is on the eastern shore, which is so bold-to, that a ship might rub her bowsprit against the cliffs, and be in 10 fathoms of water. Point Prim, on the western side of ihe entrance, runs off shoal about 30 fathoms. Ships may anchor on the eastern side of the basin, or run up eastward, 4 miles, toward Goat Island ; observing, when within the distance of a mile and a half from it, to stretch two-thirds of the way over to the north shore, until past the island, which is shoal all round ; and thence to keep mid- channel up to the town : the depths, 4 and 5 fathoms. There it a ligklhm$e on Point Prim, the light of which, exhibited as improved in 1835, is Jistd, and 76 feet above the sea. Caution is requisite on approaching the Gut, as Gulliver's Hole, 2| leagues to the westward, presents nearly similar features, and a mistake might be dangerous. The light-tower is, however, a suflicient distinction, if attended to. There is no diflBcully in goina through Annapolis Gut, if you have a commanding breese, although the tide is very rapid, and the eddies strong. At about one-third through lies Jlfan ojf War Rock, about a cable's length from the south shore t by keeping m mid* cjiiinnel you will clear it. 188 ANNAPOLIS. — BASIN OP MINES. Of Annapohs, Mr. Lockwood says, '* The abrupt precipices of the high landi form the gut, and cause flurries of wind that course in all directions, and rush Tiolently from the luromiis of the hills. The tide hurries through the gut with great force. There is no anchorage, except very close in-shore, near the outer western point. In some places the depth is 40 to no fothoms. In entering Annapolis Basin, the scenery is inexpressibly beautiful. The farms are becoming valuable and extensive. The herring fishery is a source of great profit; the fish are so well cured, that the merchants of Halifax and St. John's give them a decided preference for foreign markets." Between this and St. John's a weekly packet is established, as noticed hereafter. ANNAPOLIS to the BASIN of MINES.— From the Out of Annapolis up the bay to Cape Split, the coast continues straight, and nearly in the same direction, with a fewkocky cliffs near the gut, and many banks of red earth under high lands, which appear very even. In the gut, leading into the Basin of Mines, from Cape Split to Cape Blowmedown, and from Cape D'Or, on the north side, to Partridge Island, the land rises almost perpendi- cular from the shore, to a very great height. Between Cape Blowmedown and Partridge Island, there is a great depth of water ; and the stream of the current, even at the time of neap-tides, does not run less than at the rate of 5 or 6 fathoms. Cape D'Or and Cape Ckignecto are high lands, with very steep cliSk of rocks and red earth, and deep water close under them. You have nearly the same kind of shore to the head of Chignecto Bay, where very extensive flats of mud and quicksand are left dry at low water. The tides come in a bore, and rush in with great rapidity; they are known lo JUno, at the equinose*,from 60 to 75 feet perpendicular. The Isle Haute is remarkable for the great height and steepness of the rocky cliffs, which seem to overhang on the west side. There is a good landing-place at its eastern end, and anchorage at half a mile off, in 18 fathoms, with the low point about N.E. by N„ where, also, is a stream of water running into the sea. The east end of this isle bears from Cape Chignecto S.W. i S., 4 miles, and from Cape D'Or W. || N. 9 miles. BASXSf of MIITBS*— Tttere are whirlpools off Cape Split, which are dangerous with spring-tides, and run at about 9 knots. Having passea this place, you may come to an anchor in a bay of the north shore, between Partridge Isle, to the east, and Cape Sharp, on the west. From this spot, if bound to Windsor River, it will be necessary to get under way two hours before low water, in order to get into the stream of the Windsor tide on the southern shore; otherwise, unless with a commanding breeze, a vessel is likely to be carried up with the Cobequid or Eastern tide, which is the main stream, and runs very strongly, both ebb and flood. The Windsor tide turns off round Cape Blowmedown, down to the southward, and then again is divided ; one part con- tinuing its course up to Windsor, and the other forms the Cornwailis tide, running up the river of that name. In running into Windsor Itiver, ahouse on Hornton Bluff (viilh'in the river on the west) should be kept in a soutli bearing, and the gap in the land formed by Partborough River, North ; this will take you through the channel between the Flats, which cannot be passed allow water, by a vessel drawing 15 feet, much before half-tide. Off Hornton Bluff the ground is loose and slaty, and a ship will be likely to drag her anchors with a strong breeze, particularly at full and change : perhaps it may be best for men-of-war to moor across the stream, and full one-third from the bluff. The Banks and Flats appear to be composed of soft crumbling sandstone, which is washed down from the surrounding country in great quantities during the spring ; and, by accumulating on them, are constantly increasing their height. It is High Water, on the full and change, at Cape Chignecto and Cape O'Or at 1 1 li., and spring-tides, in general, rise from 30 to 40 feet. Off Cape Split, at 10| h., rise 40 feet : South side of the Basin of Mines, 11) h., rise 38 feet. The Basin of Mines and Chignecto Bay are now surrounded with flourishing settlements, and abound in coal, plaster, limestone, and other minerals. Chigmectd Bay runs up E.N.E., and may be considered as the north-eastern branch of the Bay of Fundy. It is divided from the Mines Channel by the peninsula of which Cape Chignecto is the western extremity : Oqte Enragie lies about 12 or IS miles within it, on the north side. The lighthouH on this cape is a square building painted white, and showing a brilliant fixed light at 130 feet above the water. Eleven miles above this, the bay divides into two branches, the one leading to Cumbtr" NOUTH COAST OF THE BAY OF FUNDV. 189 land Datin and the Uiver Missiquasli, which runs across the isthmus, and is the boundaiy between Nova Scotia and New Brunswick : the other branch runs northerly to the Pti- eudiae Kiver. These parts, like the Basin of Mines, are fast rising into consequence, and becoming the seat of numerous settlements. The Cumberland branch is navigable to within 13 miles of Verte Bay, in the Gulf of St. Lawrence ;* and it is remarkable that, when the rise of tide in the latter is only eight feet, it rises to above 60 feet in Cumberland Basin. WIOMTM COAST op the BAY of FUNDY, commencing eastward.— The town- ship of St. Martin's, on the north shore, to the N.W. bv N. of Cape Chignecto, is thinly inhabited ; the land in the neighbouirhood is moderately good, but is much broken, with steep declivities, &c. The weather here is commonly humid, the wind changeable and blustering, with limited and short intervals of sunshine. From Quako, at about 19 miles westward of St. Martin's, to the harbour of St. John's, the land, as already descrSed, is high : the interior hills rise in easy inequalities ; but the ravines of the cliffs apptar deep and gloomy. The indents have beaches; and Black River, at 5 leagues west of Quako, although dry from half-tide, is a safe inlet for a small vessel. A Lighthouse has been erected on a small rock, lying off Quako Head, which was first lighted on the 10th of September, 1835. It is painted white and red, in horizontal stripes : the light is brilliant and revolving ; twice completely full and dark in every minute. QUAKO LEDGE is a dangerous shoal, lying in the middle of the Bay of Fundy, and off Cape Chignecto. It consists of gravel, and many ships have grounded on it ; and is about half a mile broad by 3^ miles in length from N.W. by N. to S.E. by S. It lies about 12 miles S.E. | E. from Quako, and 11 miles W. by N. from Isle Haute. There are several irregular patches of rocks lying off its N.E. side. It shows at half-tide, and dries for about 100 yards, having but 12 feet of water over it with common tides : half a mile to the N.E., the eddies with the flood-tides are strong and numerous, the ship's head going nearly round the compass in the space of half. an hour; the ebb is a true tide, and sets in a W.S.W. direction towards the ledge. The soundings are from 7 to 14 fathoms, at about two cables' lengths all the way round ; but they shoal more gradually from the N.£. The mark to go clear to the southward of the Quako Ledge, is Cape d'Or, at the entrance of the Mines Channel, on with the south side of the Isle Haute. Tbe BAmBOVm of St. JOBN.— The entrance of this harbour lies N. i W., 1 1 leagues from the entrance of Annapolis, and may be distin|;uished by a lighthouse on FartrUge liland, at a mile within the exterior points, Cape Matpeck on the east, and Meogenn hie on the west. Partridge Island is about two miles southward from the city. It equally protects the harbour, and guides the mariner tu his destination. The lighthouse on Partridge Island has been rebuilt, and is painted red and white in vertical stripes: it exhibits a Jixed lights at 120 feet above the level of the sea, and Is furnished with a bell, to be invariably tolled in thick or foggy weathert Southward of Partridge Island, the bottom for several miles is muddy, and the depth gradual, from 7 to 20 fathoms, excellent for anchoring;. Un the bar, west of the island, the least depth is 10 feet ; but, eastward of it, 16 feet. The anchoring depth, opposite to the city, is from 22 to 7 fathoms. The city of St. John stands on an irregular descent, with a southern aspect ; and, on entering the river, presents a picturesque appearance. The river's mouth is narrow and intricate: many accidents have happened to those who have attempted the navigation without a pilot. A breakwater has been erected at the eastern side of the entrance, below the town, for the purpose of reducing the inset of the sea into the harbour, especially during a southerly * See note on page 144. t M. Des Barres gives the Cane or Point Maspeck In lat 45" 18' 87", long. fi«° 67' 86": but tbe late chart, edited at the Admiralty, gives the latitude aa only 46° 13', longitude 66° 69'. i 1 Besides the lighthouse on Partridge Island, there is now a beacod-tower light erected enWt Spit, within the harbour. ThU light is very benefldal to the port, as ships may now enter it at all hours of the nlf^t. lU situation is on the extremity of a spit or bar on the wcrtern or left side of the entrance to the harbour, which uncovers at two-thirds ebb. '. IPO II ARDOUR OF ST. JOHN. gale. Within the port, every possible Facility and convenience is given to ships requirinsr repair: they lie upon blocks, and undergo a thorough examination, without incurring the expense, injury, and loss of time occasioned by heaving down, so strangely persisted in at Halifax. St. John's contains about 900 houses and 6000 inhabitants. Within the harbour is a valuable fishery, in which are annually taken from 10 to 15,000 barrels of herrings, from 2000 to 3000 barrels of salmon, and from 1000 to 2000 barrels of shad. In the most severe winter it is free from the incumbrance of ice. The country on the banks of therivcr abounds in excellent timber, coal, limestone, and other minerals.* The entrance into the river, two miles above the city, is over the Falls, a niirrow channel of 80 yards in breadth, and about 400 long. This passage is straight, and a ridge of rocks so extends across it as to retain the fresh water of the river. The common tides flowing here about 20 feet, at low water the waters of the river are about 12 feet higher than the water of the sea ; and, at high water, the water of the sea is from 5 to Q feet higher than the water of the river ; so that, in every tide, there are two falls ; one outward and one inward. The only time of passing this place is when the water of the river is level with the water of the sea, which is twice in a tide ; and this opportunity of passing continues not above ten minutes : at all other times it is impassable, or extremely dangerous. AAer you have entered through this place, called the FatUt you enter into a gullet, which is about a quarter of a mile wide, and a mile long, winding in several courses, and having about 16 fathoms in the channel. Having passed this gullet, you enter a fine large basin, about one mile and a half Mride, and seven miles in letigth, entering into the main river of St. John, f The River of St. John has sufficient depth of water for large ships to the Falls, whence it continues navigable 60 miles up, to Fredericton, the seat of government, for vessels of SO tons. At times of great freshes, which generally happen between the begitining of April And the middle of May, from the melting of the snow, the Falls are absolutely impassable to vessels bound up the river, as the tide does not rise to their level. DIRECTIONS FOR ST. JOHN'S HARBOUR AND M£OGENES BAV» BY MR. BACKHOUSE. *' Wben you have made Lleogenes Island, or Partridge Isle,{ so as to be distinguished frotn the lighthouse on the latter, then make a signal for a pilot, and the intelligence from Partridge Island will be imiAediately communicated to the city of St. John, whence a pilot will join you. Should the wind be contrary, or any other obstruction meet you, to Srevect your obtaining the harbour that tide, you may sail in between the S.W. end of leogenes Island and the main, or between the N.E. end and the main, and come to anchor in 4 or 5 fathoms at low water, mud and sandy bottom. The mark for the best anchoring ground here, is, to bring the Uirce hills in the country to the N.E. in a line within Rocky Point l8land,§ and the house on Meogenes Island to bear S.E. by S. " Should the tide of ebb have taken place at the beacon, you must not, by any means, attempt to gain the liarbour that tide, but wait the next half-flood, to go over the bar, as both sides of the entrance of this harbour are nothing but sharp rocks, dry at low water; and the tide of ebb is so rapid in the spring, when the ice and snow are dissolved, that all the anchors on board will not hold the ship from driving, " On the Nova Scotian tide of the Bay of Fundy, your soundings will be from 50 to 60, 70t 80, to 95 fathoms ; stones like beans, and coarse sand ; and as you draw to {he north- ward, the quality of the ground will alter to a fine sand, and some small shells widi black * The ooasting trade of the port of St. John haa, (ta some time past, been greatly increasing with all the nwthern porti of the American Union, particularly from the Chesapeake to Eastport; and a steam-boat runs once a week to Boston. (1841.) f On Sunday, Aug. 31, 1832, the brig CaroUiie, Capt Henry, of 155 tons, passed over the Falls to Indka Town, with a cargo of eoals for the itean-vessels which |riy from that place to Fredericton. This, we have Iwan informed, is the first instance o< a loaded vessel gdtig mrough ; the attempt having previously been coftddered as a matter of fearful enterprise. X These dhreedona slMuld be compared with the Chart of the Harbour. . ^ Thto is aa islet, lying at a cable's length fVom the point, and mere ptroperiy called the Shag AoOT. It is summnded by sunken rodtsi . -. ; ; DIRECTIONS FOR ST. JOHN S HARBOUR. 191 specks. Approach no nearer to the south shore than in 50 fathoms ; and, as you edge off to the N.W. and W.N.W., you wilt fall off the bank, and have no soundings." FARTHER DIRECTIONS FOR SAILING INTO THE HARBOUR, BY THE SAME. ** Wiien you have passed Meogenes Island, edge in.shore toward Rocky Point, [or the Shag Rock,] until Meogenes Point [^Negro Head] is in a line over the N.W. corner of Meogenes Island ; sailing in between Kockv Point and Partridge Island, with these marks in one, will lead you in the best water over the bar, (15 feet,) until you open Point Maspeck to the northward of the low point on Partridge Island ; then starboard your helm, and edge toward Thompson's Point, until the red store, at the south end of St. John's, is in a line over the beacon ; keep them in one until you pass the beacon at a distance of a ship's breadth; then haul up N.N.W. up the harbour, keeping the blockhouse, at the upper part of the harbour, open to the westward of the king's store, situate close to the water side, which will lead you, in mid-channel, up to (he wharfs, where you may lie aground dry, at half>tide, and clean your ship's bottom, or lie afloat in the stream at single anchor, with a hnwser fast to the posts of the wharfs on shore.— N. B. The tide of flood here is weak, but the ebb runs very rapidly all the way down past Meogenes Island." fug with and a Falls to lericton. •ttemj^ Ithefilkw REMARKS ON ST. JOHN'S, ETC., BY MR. LOCKWOOD AND CAPT. NAPIER. TttE tides of the river, at full and change, flow till half-past eleven. The vertical rise is 18 feet. Equinoctial spring-tides rise 24 to 28 feet. After the first quarter flood, the tide below the surface runs into the harbour. During summer, and the depth of winter, the tide generally flows in at half-flood. In autumn the river is swoln by rains, and between the beginning of April and the middle of May, by the melting of the ice, and the great quantity of snow that accumulates on the lands of this vast navigable river. From these causes, the water streams out to seaward continually, therefore vessels at that time seldom enter the harbour, without a fresh leading wind. The falls are then impassable, as the tide does not rise to their level. The body of the river is 17i feet above low water-mark. Consequently, af\er the tide has risen to that height, the water descends, or literally falls into the river. When the tide, has flowed twelve feet, the falls are smooth and passable for twenty minutes. " Above the falls the tide rises four feet; and at Majorfield, 60 miles in the interior, it rises one foot and a half. After passing the falls, you enter a gullet, which is a quarter of a mile wide, and two miles long, winding in different courses, and having 16 fathoms in the channel. Next to this gullet is a fine large basin, a mile and a half wide, and eight miles long, entering the main river. There is water sufiicient, except in dry seasons, for vessels of 50 tons, as high as Fredericton, and in all the branches of the lakes. In the middle of May, or earlier in favourable seasons, the snow and ice in the country, melting, make a general overflow in the river, which, in some years, rises so high as to inundate all the low lands. The overflowings were measured, in 1765, by the marks set up at Major- field ; the water was found to have flowed 17 feet above the common height of the water in summer."— (Remarks by Cbas. Morris, Esq.) Of the Tide, Captain Napier, R.N., when commanding H.M. sloop Jateur, has said, ** The great volume of fresh water which constantly runs down the Harbour of St. John, in April and May, causes a continual ftream outuHird during that period, sometimes to the depth of nearly 5 fathoms, under which the flood and ebb flow regularly : the maximum of its velocity we found to be 4| knots, and the minimum 2 knots ; but, as the log floated very dt^ep in tbe fresh water, and ultimately sunk in the salt water running underneath, ifc would not be too much to estimate the maximum at 5 knots, and the minimum at 2|. The fact of the under tide beginning at the depth of nearly 5 fathoms, was ascertaieed by sink- ing a lead down to tlmt depth, when it was carried the same way as the curreDt on the surfeca < but, when lowered below that, it was carried in a contraiy direction." ! 1S>S - ' PORT OF ST. JOHN. PORT OF ST. JOHN.—SioNAts displayed at Partridge Island, on the approach of vessels to the Harbour :— '< v'^ i^4^''^ One ball close for one square-rigged vessel. ' '^ One ball half hoisted, for two square-rigged vessels. ■*'' Two balls close, for three ditto. ' "* Two balls separated, for four ditto. ''^ A pendant of any colour, for five ditto. |, A ditto under a ball, for six ditto. > A ditto over a ball half hoisted, for seven ditto. . , ^ A ditto under two balls dote, for eight ditto. ,.,^ A ditto under two balls separate, for nine ditto. 'l ,, A flag of any colour, for ten or more ditto. . The above are displayed at the east or west yard-arm, according to the direction in wbiob the vessels are at first observed ; and as soon as their rio can be distinguished, descriptivo colours will be hoisted at the ttast-head, in the following order :— A union jack, with a white pendant over, for a small armed vessel. A blue pendant, for a merchant ship. A red ditto, for a merchant brig. i^g^ A white and blue ditto, for a foreign vessel. ,» A white ditto (without a ball), for a topsail schooner or sloop. "'^ ^^ A red flag pierced white, for a' steam -boat from Saint Andrews and Eastport. A ball at the mast-head, vessel is on shore or in distress. Should immediate aid be necessary, guns to be firefl. In foggy weather, a gun will be fired from Partridge Island, in return for each heard at sea. Should a vessel require a pilot, her descriptive pendant will be displayed at a ysu-d- aroi, in the place of a ball. Rate$ qf Wharfage^ eitabtuhed by Act 54 Geo. III., cap. 9. For every decked vessel, or vessel of the description called wood boats, not exceed^ ing 50 tons • Is. 6(/. per day. Above 50 tons, and not excseding 100 tons 2s. 6 • At five miles N.W. from Point Lepreau is Red Head. The irregular indent between is Mace's Bay, a deep and dangerous biglit, in which several vessels have been embayed and wrecked. On each side are several clusters of islets and rocks, but (here is a good place of shelter, Poklogan, at the head of it; and there is good anchorage in the centre, in 3 or 4 fathoms, which will be obtained by entering near the western shore. r.— This island, 1 1 miles in length, from N.N.E. lo S.S. W,, by 4 or 5 in breadth, is included in Charlotte County, in the Province of New Brunswick. The nearest distance from the opposite coast of the State of Maine is two leagues. The western side is very high ; its cliffs being nearly perpendicular, and about 600 feet high above the level of the sea. On this side is but one little inlet, Dark Covet which affords shelter for boats only. The northern head {BUhop) is equally abrupt and bold ; but to the south-eastward of it is WhaU Cove, having anchoring ground, with 35 to 15 fathoms, in which ships may atop for a tide, during a southerly gale, but it is exposed to the north. The eastern coasts of Manan abound in fish, and the interior is in a rapid state of im- provement. The soil is in general good, and it produces all the species of nr, beech, birch, and maple, in size and quality adequate to all purposes for whicn they are generally used. To the S.E. of Whale Cove, on the same side of the island, is Long ttland Bay, so called from the island on the S.E. side of it. The N.E. point of this bay, called, from its shape, the Swallow's Tail, is high, bold, rugged, and barren. The bay is open, but possesses all the advantages of a harbour : tlie bottom is wholly of niud, excepting a ridge of rocks and gravel that shows itself within the Swallow's Tail, and the north end of Long Island ; there is also a small cluster of sunken rocks, of 5 feet at low water, at half a mile from Long Island Point. Under Long Island, and opposite to the beach, ships may anchor, even locking in tlie north end of Long Island with the Swallow's Tail, on a strong muddy bottom, entirely sheltered from the wind and sea. In the northern part of the bay, bottom of stiff clay, vessels h^ve frequently been protected during a severe gale. Half-way down off the eastern coast of Great Manan, at a mile from shore, is Great Duck Island, under which there is good ground ; but here a pilot will be reauired, as there are hidden dangers in the vicinity. To the south-westward and southwara of Duck Island, lie Ross, Cheney, and White Head Islands ; the latter occupied by a skilful and intelligent pilot : from these the rocks and foul ground extend 6| miles to the S.S.E. Oil the southern bank of Great Utanan, the most dangerous ledge is that called the Old Proprietor, which lies two leagues S.S.E. from White (lead Island, and covers the space of half an acre at low water : it is dry at half-ebb. When covered, the tide sets directly over it, at the rate of four miles an hour. The S.W. head of Manan open of all the islets off the south side of that island, will lead clear to the southward of it. The north-eastern- most high land, open of the islets on the east, leads clear to the eastward of all the dangers. During an easterly wind, the tide-rips are impassable. The Three Islands, (Kent's,) the southernmost of the Manan Islets, are low and ledgy. The eastern side of the largest is bold to the rocks, which are at all times visible. Off the N.W. of these rocks is a ledge called the Constable, dry at low water. These isles, with Green Islets to the northward of them, afford occasional anchorage, in from 14 to 7 fathoms. Wood Island, on the south side of Manan, with the S.W. Head of the latter, form a bay containing excellent ground. The upper part and head of it. in a eale of wind, are places of security ; and here supplies, if requisite, may be obtained from the inhabitants. Between Wood Island, on the S.W., and Ross Island, on the N.E., is the passage to Grand Harbour, a shallow muddy basin, into which you may enter by passing near the Green IsUts. It is a convenient place for vessels without anchor or cable, as they may lie in the mud, in perfect security. At the entrance, which is narrow, the depths are from 6 to 3 fathoms, bottom of clay. The GANNET, a small rock, 40 feet high, and having many sunken rocks and ledges about it, stands at the distance of 3^ miles S.S.W. from the Three Islands. Mr. Urk- wood, many years ago, observed that this would be a fine situation for a lighthouse, which would b« the means of saving many ships. The ledges and sunken rocks in the vicinity always break. \ 2C 194 GRAND ilANAN. The liglitbouM hn been srccted, and wai lighted for th« flrit tioM on tha Itt of D«oeni« ber, 18S1. The lantern was originally Atted with red ghM, as its charaoteristio distinction { but the coloured glass was found to be too obscure in so foggy an atmosphere. It has since been changed to a brilliant flashing light ; the light appearing for 40 seconds, and sue> ceeded by 20 seconds of darkness. The l^hthouse is paiotM in stripes, vertical* black and white.* The three low islets, called MAoniAS Seal Islks, lie 10 miles to the W. by N. of the Gannet, with the S.W. head of Grand Manan hearing £.N.£. about 3 leagues distant. The bearings of the Gannet Rock Lighthouse from the dangers in the vicinity, as given by authority, are as follow : — From the Old Pnmrietor, which dries tat thr«M|u«rterr «bb (very dangerous), W. by S. ^S., seven miles; Black Rock (always above water, 36 feet); off White Head, S.W. ^ W. ; South-west Head of Grand Manan, S.£. i S. ) Northern, most of the Murr Ledges (dry at two-tbiids ebb), S. E. by E. ^ E. ; Southernmost of dittty called Saint Marv's Ledge (always out of water), N.E. by E. ^ B. ; Macbiaa Seal Islewb Lights (distant about thirteen niles), E. by S. i S. > >*) «;_ Between the northernmost and southernmost of the Murr Ledges, there is a range of dangerous rocks and shoals, msnv of them always above water, and which extend west* ward from the lighthouse about four miles ; from this range, farther westeriy about eight miles lies a dangerous breaker, called the KoarUtg BmU t this may be avoided by keeping three remarkable headlands near the S«W. end of Grand Manan open. Lights on Macoias Seal Isles. — On the southernmost of these isles are two light- houses, first lighted in September, 1832; b^ which circumstance of two lighthouses at the same station, tney will be immediately distinguished from all other lights upon the coast, British or American. Both the buildinge are painted white : they stand at 200 feet apart, exhibit brilliant fired lights, horizontally, about 45 feet above high water, and bear rrom each other, when in a line, E.8.E. and W.N.W. with the keeper's house between them : these lighu bear W.N.W. } W. 13 miler, from that on the Gannet Rock. When in a line bearing W.N.W., they lead clear of the ledges lying to the eastward. If approaching to the latter, a vessel must, of course, tack or stand off to the southward, into deep water. The following are the bearings of the lighthouse, viz. — From the southernmost Murr Ledge (St. Mary's), W.N.W. westerly ; Gannet Rock Light, W. by N. i N. 13 miles ; Southern Head of Grand Manan, W. by S. i S. ; Northern Head of Grand Manan, S.W. li W.; Northeast Rock, distant two miles, S.W. by S.; Little River Head, S. by E.; Libby Island Lighthouse (American), S.E. by E. Vessels standing in to the northward, between these lights and the .Gannet Rock, should tack or haul off the moment they bring these lights into one, as they will not then be more than three-fourths of a mile from the Murr Ledges, if more than five miles to the east of the lights. At 3^ miles West from the Seal Island Lighthouse, is a rock, not generally known, an^ on which several vessels have struck. It was seen by Captain Johnstone, of the ship Liverpool, trading to St. John's, in 1834, and is acknowledged to exist by the regular traders and pilots. '' •'' ■ ■ P- R { - . • ' It] • The Comviunomert of Lighthouies, in their spedfication of the lighthouse, an|U(xe«ltherito,|)M following remarks, dated St. John, 4th Oct. 1831 :— , ;^ fy^^/iav^ This light, from its j^roximity to several very dangerous ledges and shoals, oiwht not to be run for ; it Is intended to give timely warning to vessels which are, by the rapid tides about these ledges, frequently drawn into danser, and too often wrecked. The dancerous shoal calwd the Old Proprietor, which dries at three.quarters ebb, bears from this l^hthouse £. I S. about 7) miles. St. Mary's Ledge, dry at all tfmes, SW. by W. \ W. 1| qpile. Northerly ears N.B. | E. about 8 miles. Vessels, except In cases of extremity, ought not to attempt running between this rock and the Old Proprietor, as tnere are some dangers in the way, the ground rocky, and the tides very rapid. The S.W. point of the MaoMoi SeiJ hUmdt beaif from this lighthouse W. \ S. 12 miles, and the N.E. rock DflTthese Islands W.N.W, about the same disunce. . .,~^, 11 b (< ai fj a o P e: ei r< is a B ai SI is at th ei ui b< N n< H tri th sa tri th ch PASSAMAQDODUY BAV 195 'in • The CnANMEL between Grand Manam and the coitst of the State of Maink it from to 6 miles wide; both ihores bold, the depths quickly increasing on each side, from 13 to 70 and 75 fathoms; the greatest depths near Manun, where you haul quickly, from 10 to 75. This is the best passage up the Bay of Fundy, because the safest, and most advantageous with the prevalent winds, which are from the westward. The Wolf Islands, which lie eight miles to the N.E. by N. from Grand Manan, are from 60 to 100 feet in height, steep and bold. The passages between them are deep, and thev afford temporary shelter, in the depth of from 20 to 12 fathoms. Between Manan and these Isles, the depths vary from 70 to 40 iathoms, bottom of oaze and mud. r flPASSAMAaVOBDV BAT.->The Bay of Passamaquoddy, with the Chape, mticook River, or ftiver of St. Cwix, divide the British American territory firom that of the United States.* The south-western side of the bay is distinguislied by a lighthouse, on Qaoddy Head, which was erected by order of Congress, in the year 1808. l^is structure exhibiu ti fixed light, which, in clear weather, may be seen seven leagues off. lu lantern is 90 feet above the sea. Near the lighthouse is an alarm-bell, which during foggy weather will strike ten times in a minute : its sound, in calm weather, may be heard five miles off. From the north head of Grand Manan the lighthouse bears W.N.W. ^ W. 7 miles ; and froin the Machias Seal Islands N.N.E. } E., 17 miles. >S0al UmAv.-^M about one-quarter of a mile without Quoddy Head lie two remarkable rocks, called the Seal Roektt which, at a distance, resemble a ship. To the eastward of these] there is a whirlpool. In passing here it is therefore requisite to give these objeciis a ))§ rth of half or three-quarters ot a mile before you haul ia. Thtre are mvtral poiaagei into Passamaquoddy Bay; but particularly the southero, (commonly called the Weitem,) the SAip Channel or Middle Pauag* i and the Northern (commonly called the Eastern) Fanage. The first is that between the Isle of Campobello and the main land to the 8. W. The Ship Channel is that between Campobello and Deer Island : the Northern Passage is that along the New Brunswick shore. At 2} miles N.E. } E. from the northern extremity of Campobello is the While Hor$e, appearing at a distance like a white rock ; but it is really a small islet, barren and destitute of trees, while the isles about are covered with them ; it therefore serves as a beacon. At the N.E. end of Campobello is Head Harbour^ a place of euy access, small, but perfectly safe, with 6, 7, and 8 fathoms, muddy bottom^ A good fixed light was first exhibiteo on the extreme point of this harbour, 1st Nov. 1829, which enables vessels to enter at all times. The light is elevated about 6.0 feet, and the building is white, with a red croa on it. The fine harbour, called Harbour Delute^ lies on the we|t side of the island; and at its S.W. end is Sniig Covet another good harbour, where there is a British custom-house. Moo$e Itlandt on the opposite side, belongs to the United Sjiates, and British ships are not allowed to ride there above six hours at any one time. In a fine cove at the south end of this island a ship of 500 tons may lie, moored head and stem, safe from all winds, but the anchors are very much exposed with wind from the east. ., QUODDY HEAD, on whiob stands the ligbtbouse above-mentioned, forms the south side of the Southern Passage, the entrance of which, between CampoheUo and the Head, is a mile ia breadth; but the passage gradually narrows to the W.N.W. and N.N.W., and at two miles up a rocky bar stretches across, which is dry at low water. At rather more than a'mile witnin the entrance, you may come to anchor, in 4 or 5 fathoms, w^l shcMered, either by day or night. Here a pilot may be obtained, on firing a gun and making the usual signal, who will take the ship to Snug Cove or Moose Island, whence another may be obtained for St. Andrew's, the Kiver Scoodic, or St. Croix, &c. liARdt Ships for PASSAVAQoefDor Bay, pass to the eastward at Carapobeilo, steering N.E. by E. and N.E. toward the Wolf Isles, which lie about 6} miles eastward from the northern part of Campobello. So soon as the passage between Campobello and the White Hone bears W.N.W., steer for it, leaving the White Horse at a distance on the north or • In November, 18*7, the commUsieners appoihted i>y the reipectiw .jiovernioents, undw the treaty of Ghent, (the hut treaty of peace,) decided 4bat Moose, Dudley, and Fredenc Islands, in the Bay of Passamaquoddy, do belonffto the United States ; and that all the other islands in the same bay, with Osand Manan, in thelSay of Fundy, do belong to Great Britain, by virtue of tlie treaty of peace of 1783. The ctdsens of the United Sutes continue to enjoy the right of navigaUng through Mie Ship Channel, between Deer Island and f^ampobello j and, of course, through tlie cheiinel between Moose and Deer Islsnds. I.Ofi ST. Andrew's. ■tarboard side, and keeping Campobello nearest on board. You will now, proceeding louth-westwnrd, leave a group of islands on your starboard side, and will next see Harbour Delute, above-mentioned. Between the Wolves and the north end of Campoliello, there is a depth of from 60 to 100 fathoms. With the latler bearing S.S.E. or S.E. there is a depth of 19 and 30 fathoms, where ships may anchor securely from all winds. The courses thence to Moose Island are S.W. by W. i W. and S.W. 5 miles. If bound from Moote Island up the River Scoodic, as you pass "Bald Head, opposite D«er Island, give it a berth of half a mile, as a ledge of rocks lies off it. Having passed this point, the course and distance to Oak Point, or Devil's Head, will be N. by W. 4 leagues. The latler may be seen from the distance of 10 or 12 miles. ST. AMBXBWS.— rA« Town and Port of St. Andrew lie on the eastern side'of the entrance of the Scoodic. A small island, Navy htanA^ forms the harbour. This island is bold'to on its S.W. side, but eastward of it is a shoal bauk, stretching nearly half a league from St. Andrew's Point. The town is a pleasant little plHce ; and the harbour being ^^, many ships load timber here, which is generally much longer than that of Nova Scotia. The merchants of this town load timber also at other places, viz. at Oak Bay, on the Scoodic, and at Rusbabec, Didiquash, and Magadavick, on the N.E. side of Passama* quoddy Bay, all being excellent and very convenient harbours. In the bay, in general, are from 17 to 25 fkthoms of water. ETANG HARBOUR, which lies to the eastward of the North Panage of Passama- quoddy Bay, is recommended to the ma.\' North Passage N. J W. .K. Etang Harbour N.E. by N. Beaver Harbour E.N.E. i E. Point Lepreau Lighthouse E. 4 S. the Northern Wolf E.S.E i E *' the Southern Wolf aE? ■"^^ the N. Head of Grand Manan S. by E. ^■West Entrance of Etang Harbour to Head Harbour S.W. by S. ^^ North end of Grand Manan 8. J E. «* Etang Harbour, South Point, to the Northern Wolf S. E. ^ B. 't^ the Southern Wolf S.S.E. ) E. 'jHorthern Wolf to a Vigia or Shoal E. J N. "': Point Lepreau Lighthouse £. ) N. '^'■. Beaver Harbour N.JE. ^'Point Lepreau to the Gut of Annapolis S.E. ^ S. ^'' Petit Passage South. **' Grand Passage S. by W. ^' Bryer's Island Lighthouse S. by W. North end of Grand Manan S.W. by W. i W. Beaver Harbour Head W.N.W. a W- Etang Harbour, South Point W. 4 N. 197 Ditlanee, mui. •' 8ft .. Jo .. 18 .. 30 .. 10 • 16 .. 12 .. •• 11 •• 18 •• 2J .. 9 .. 8 .. 13 .. 2| '. 3ft •• Ift .. 8 .. 20 .. 7| .. 7 •t 13 •• 4 .• 15 .. 6 •• 7 .. 7 .. 12 •• 6 .. 37 •• 40 .. 46 .. 49 .. 28 .. 12 .. 16 GENERAL REMARKS ON, AND DIRECTIONS FOR, THE BAY OF FUNDY. <^' Ships navigating the Bat of Fundy have to encounter an atmosphere almost constantly lehveloped in thick fogs, tides setting with great rapidity over the rocks and shoals with S^ibh it abounds, and a difficulty of obtaining anchorage, on account of the depth of water : >t> that^ tfnder these circumstances, the most unremitting attention is requisite, in order to prevent the disastrous consequences which must necessarily attend a WAntbf ktiowtedge and caution. When off Cape Sable, with a westerly wind, and destined for the Bay, it is best to make the C09st of the United States about the Skuttock Hills and Little Manan lighjihouse, described heretifter ; as you can pass with greater safety to tte westward of Grand 'Mat^n than to the eastward, and can have shelter, if reqifired, in the several harbours of that coast. Add to this, that PesuU boun4 up the Baj/y to St. John's, &c., should make the coast of Maine, on the west, rather tKan the eastern coast, because it is bold, and the preyalent winds from the westward may secure the passage; also that, during the summer months, the sky and horizon are generally quite clear on the United States* cqast, while the shores of Nova Scotia and greater part of the Bay of Fundy are enveloped io fog. . On proceeding to the westward of the Machias Seal Isles, be cautious in avoiding the CQjck lying 3^ miles to the west of the lighthouse on these isles, as shown in page 194. \9S THK COASTS OF THE UNITKD STATE*. • » Between Grand Mnnan and the coaitt of Maine, the pauage it free from dungf r ; veueU beating through, generally stand from aide to tide, particularly in fugs, the ae|iih fafcing from 13 to 73 fathoms, with a bold shore on eacli side, and the tide through regular and strong. The Wolf Islands may be passed on either side, having deep water close.to : but afford no sheltered anchorage, except for small fishing vessels in summer time : they art, as already noticed, from 60 to 100 feet high. With light winds, a lee ti^le, or thick weather, yoti may let go on anchor anywhere between the Wolf Islands and Beaver Hartioui', in good holding ground, in a depth of 20 or 25 feithomi. Point Lepreau is bold-to, but was formerly dangerous in dark weather, as it projecti so hx into the sea. lis lighthouse, with double lights, as described on page 192, is now an excellent guide. Hence to St. John's the course is free from danger. When steering between Grand Manan and Ikyer't Itland, the utmost caution is requi- site during thick weather, aa vessels are frequently drawn amongst the islands and ledges to the southward of Manan, bv the flood's aetting directly on them : the most danj^erous of theae is the Old Proprielor, which at low water is uncovered for the space of half an acre. When the wind, therefore, veers at all to the southward, make the best of your way to S(. John's Harbour, or you may secure an anchorage in Grand Passage, or St. Mary's Bay, as it seldom blows in that direction above eighteen hours without bringing on a fog. The Prevailimo WiKoahere, and on all the coasts of Nova Scotia, are from W.S.W. to S.W., nearly as steady as trade winds ; excepting that, duriag the summer months, they arv rather more southerly, accompanied with but little intermiaaion by fog, which requires a north-westerly wind to disperse it. It is therefore rfcommended, not to leave an anchor- age without making arrangements for reaching another before dark, or the appearance of a fog coming on, which, with a S.W. wind, is so sudden, that you are unaworee enveloped iu it; nor to keep at sea during tlie night, if.it can be avoided. Whenever the wind blows directly off the land, the fog is soon dispersed. TAe Tides are very rapid, but regular; and, although the wind against them alters the direction of the rippling, and sometimes makes it dangerous, it has little or no effect upon their courses. The flood sets from Cape SaMe to the north-westward through the Seal Islands and Tuskets, at two or three knots in the hour ; after which its rate increases tq four or five knots ; thence taking the direction of the shore, it flows past Cape St. Maiy, ahd then N.N.W. toward Biyer's Island ; it sets but slowly up the extensive Bay of St. Maiy, which adds to its strength along the eastern shore ; then, increasing its rapidity as the Bay contracts, it rashes in a bore into the Bnsin of Mines, and up Ohignecto Bay. Between Bryer'e Itland and the oppoiite northern coasts and for some distance up the Bay to the eastward, the first of the flood sets strongly to the northward (nearly north) ; so thai it will be extremely dangerous for a vessel to run in the night, or thick weather, from any part of the southern to the northern coast, without making a large allowance for the set of the tide, and keeping the lead constantly going. H.M. sloop Jaseur was nearly ashore, having been set by this tide in a fog 8^ miles in 3 hours and 10 minutes. v.— The coasts of the UNITED STATES, pkoM Passamaquoddy to the pENosecoT River. . The most remarkable elevations of land between the Bay of Passamaquoddy and Cape Elizabeth are, the Skuttock HilU, Mount Desert Hillt, and Hilts of Penobscot. The Skuttock Hills are five in number, and, at a distance, appear round; they stand to the northward of the Port of Gouldsborough, and are readily distinguishable from any hills to the eastward. Hie Moont Desert Hills may, in clear weather, be seen from a distance of 15 to 20 leagues. The Penobscot Hills may be seen to the N.W. and N.N.W. over the Fox Islands. When within 4 or S leagues of the Mount Desert Hills, the Skuttock Hills will bear about N.N.E. In sadlitig toward this coast, the lighthouse on Mount Desert Rock will be seen : this rock lies 7 i leagues to the southwora of Mount Desert Island, in latitude 43° S2', and longitude 68" 3^ : observe here to make proper allowaace for the tide, &c. At Mount Desert BLocV the stream of flood divides to run westward and eastward. With the Skuttock Hills about N.N.E., and within 4 or 5 leagues of those of Mount Desert, the tide of flood sets E.N.B., and the ebb W.S.Wi ; butiat the distance of 9 or 10 leagues from the land, the cunent, in general, sets to the S.W., and more westward. From the Mount Desert in UACIilAS DAY 199 Hock to the Fox ItUnds the flood-ttrMin mU W.S.W. along ah«r« ; but it still rtins up to ih* northward into Blue Hill Sound, Isle Hauie Bay, fcc. The LiouTHOusc on Mount Dcibkt Rock is coniplcuout ; and it exhibiu a Jised litht, tinged red, at 50 feet above the tea, which commenced on the night of the 30th or August, 1830. MA0XIA8 BAT.— The entrance of tlie Bav or Poax of Macbias, in the itate of Maine,* bears N.W. IN. 60° If.] 14 leagues iVom Bryer'a Island Lighthouse: N.W. by W. 1 W. [ W. b]f N.] «2 miles from the lighthouse on the Gannet Rock ; and N.W. | N. 9 miles from the lighiliouses of the Machias Seal Isles. The last-mentioned point and Gannet Ilock are nearly true east and west from each other, at the distance of 14 miles, and between them lie several dangerous ledges. Uf these ledges, the southernmost, called St. MatyU, is a mile and three-quarters W.S.W. from the Gannet. Directly fronting the Entrance of Machias, within the distance of a league, ai« two little isles, called the LiUee or Liby Js/«s, on tbe^ southernmost of which is a modern lighthotue, exhibiting a ftMd light, in or near latitude 4V 3i', ami elevated 60 feet above the level of the sea. At a league N.£. i N. from this lighthouse is the S.W. end of Crou Isbnd, which forms the eastern side of the entrance to the Bay. On advancing toward Machias Bay from the Seal Isles, and steering N.\A'. A W., you will gain sight of the Libbee hkt Lighthouu, which is to be left on the larbourd side ; rounding these isles, you thence proceed north into the Bay. On this course you will leave a large white rock, called the Channel Rock, on your larboard side : and unleu bound upward into Machias Harbonr, may haul to the westward. When you have advanced half a mile above this rock, bring a high round island, which is covered with trees, to bear north, when you may anchor in 4 or A fathoms, muddy bottom. If you mean to go up to the town of Machias, keep on a north course, until you have advanced above a high round island on vour larboard band, when you may steer W.N.W. or N.W. by W. for a point covered with birch-trees, and having a house on it. On the starboard hand there are flats and shoals. You may keep on the larboard after you pass this house, until the river opens to the nordi- ward, when you may run up to Cross River, and anchor in 4 fathoms. Machias is the chief town of Washington County, in the state of Maine. Its presetkt population is 1351 persons. Little River Harbour is about a league and a half E.N.E. from Cross Island. It may afford occasional shelter. The entrance bears N.W. by W. | W., 10 miles from the S.W. Head of Grand Manan, and north, 8} miles, from the western Seal Island. It cannot be seen until you approach the northern shore ; and the pilots say you should not ran for it before it bears N.W. or N.N.W. There is a bluff point of rocki, on the starboard hand, going in, and an island in the middle of the harbour. On going in, leave the island on your larboard side, and when you have passed it half a mile you may anchor in 4 or 5 fathoms, muddy bottom, and be protected from all winds. The land between this harbour and Quo^^dy Head trends N.E. by E. 4 leagues. MACHIAS to GOULDSBORO'.— In proceeding from Machias towards Goutdsbero', y6u will pass numerous islands on the starboard hand, with many inlets and good har- bours, but generally too itHricate for strangers to attempt with safety. On Quitting Machias Bay, you first pass the Libbee ItlotuU, thence Head Harbour Itland, the Trosi Ii/ondt, &c. Tiie cotine and distance from off the Libbee Islands to a berth off the Great Wass Island, are S.W. by W. 10 miles ; and firom the latter to the Little Manan Isle W. by S. 18 miles. * The 8TATB, formerly District of Maine, containing, aocording to the census of 184C, 501,798 inhabitants, is bonndtd on the east by New Brunswick, as already nodoed, and oa the west by New Harapshire. The fiice of the country is generally hilly, but not mountainous ; the coast Indented with bays, and alMunding with excellent harbours. The soil, on the sea-coast, is stony and barren, but more ferdle in the interior, producing gndn, grass, &c. The minerals are iron, cotaeias^ sulphur, and'oehres. The summer here is short, but agreeable; the autnaon dear and healthy ; winter long and severe ; spring, as in Canada, very short. The Penobscot, Kennebec, Androscoggio, and Saoo, are its principal rivers. This state is >iot jret thickly peopled, but slavery is here unknown. Pordand, the seat of the provincial government, is dtuate on a eood harbonr in the S.W., as described hereafter. The ports of entry for foreign ships are Machias, Frenchmak's Bay, Castine or Penobscot, Wiscasset, Batlh Portmi, Fahimthy Saco, and PeppereUwro'. The names printed in Italics arc those of ports to which vessels from oi' beyond the Cape of Good Hope are restricted. 200 MACHIAS TO PENOBSCOT BAY. IVIoosPECK Head Liout.-i-Od Mistake Isle, three leagues S.W. i W.froin the Uhb«« Island light, is a tower, with revohing light, at &4 feet above the sea, and which is eQlipsed. twice in every four minutes. It is, therefore, readily distinguished from that of the I entrance is an islet covered with trees on the eastern, and two on the western side. Wilhlri the entrance, the harbour is a mile wide, and you may anchor in f\t6m 4 to 18 fkthoms, where yov please. The course in is M.N. W., then N. j^ W. 4 miles ; and thence W; by 191'' to Gouldsboro'. \.''-; The Skuttock HUh, already mentioned, form a g|ood mark for GouldsboroV aS^^iejr ite|! to the northward of the harbour. Hence, by bringing them in that direction,- and istej^riiig ' on that course, you will, on approaching tne harbour, see the Little Manan Li^hthVU^, which is to be left on the larboavd hand.* The latter stands at about a league t0 4N(> southward of the point between Over's Bt^ and Pigeon Hitt Bay : it is connect^ witlrllM'' land bya rocky ledge or bar, whicn is partly uncovered with the ebb. ' •;' ''^ DYER'S BAY. — Immediately to the eastward of the entrance to Gouldsboro' i» I>j^i^'« Bay, which you may enter by giving Little Manan a berth of half a mile, leaving it on the starboard hand. If you bring the light to bear N.E., at three quarters of a mile^ a' N. by W. course will carry you into the mouth of the bay, leaving a large dry ledge on the larbtjavd-' hand : when abreast of this ledge, which is boUI-to, give it a berth of 15 or 16 fathoms^ ' then steer N. } E. about 4 miles, where you may anchor, safe from all winds, in 4 br 5 fathoms, muddy bottom. ,-(*»«'«.>( PLEASANT BAY, or the Mouth of Pleatant River, is two leagues td tliif IWiK'^ of Little Manan Lighthouse. Here you pass the islet called Petit-manan, and seyetil^ dangerous ledges. For this place, therefore, iu in all the other harbours of this coasf, ^ ^ pilot is indispensable. ■■:-^in From Little Manan Lighthouse to a berth off the Great Wass Island, already ndtieM. the course and distance are E^. by N. 13i miles; and from the latter to the Libbee lighti^ house, off Machias Bay, N.E. by E. 10 mites. ii GOULDSBOROUGH to Blue Hill Bat.— At two leagues without the harbciur'bt^ Gouldsborough.lo the S.W. is Scoodic Point, with its three islets, formhtg the west^e'^ of the entrance of FaEKCHitAN's Bay, or tlie N.E. harbour of Mount Desert. Next follW the. C'raaterr;^!*/^!, to the S.E. of the same island. .^''sfV Baksb's Ulamo, which is the outermost of the Cranberry Isles, is now distinguished bjff, a lighthouse, exhibiting a brilliant fixed light, at 70 feet above the sea, which ,]^j|rs if|n;>,i^' . that on the Little Manan W.S.W. 5 leagues. , "."'',''"'' To the S.S.W. of the Cranberry Isles wre the Duck Itknds, off the eptranoe of Blu&ffill,, Bay, or the S.W. harbour of Mount Desert. Tq enter this harbour, leave the two tfuc^j Islands on the starboard side, and Long Island with a cluster of other islands on, thfi^, larboard. It is not safe for a stranger to run in during the night, as there is a great ledge, which is uncovered at half>tide, about one mile from the harbour. This is to be left bn^the starboard hand. There is also a long ledge on the larboard side, whicli extends half a htile^ off: there is, however, a good turning channel between. The S.W. passage is not fit for' large vessels at low water ; but, at high water, any one may enter, by keeping nearest' to the starboard shore when sailing in. With the harbour open, vou may steer Ni.Wi4>e^ W.N.W., and anchor, when well up, in 5 or 6 fathoms,. muddy bottom; where, with any wind, you will lie safely. Here, however, as in every other part hereabout, a pilot i»,, required. ^ T rSHOSSOOT MAM amd RIVEIL—This extensive bay is included bctweeirl Point Naskeag and Sedgwick Point on the N.E., and White Head on the S.W. : the distance between these points is 10 leagues ; and it therefore includes the Isle HVute^B^er NJ mJ * The pilots say that a ledge, called SiouUm't Ltdge, and dry at low tides, lies W. by N. 4 biilcs from the lighthouse : a sunken ledge, with 7 ftet of water on it, S.E. by E. 5 miles fimn the aaiife ; another of 12 fret, S.8. W. 4 miles. t Md PENOBSCOT BAY AND KIVEIl. 201 ■<■:)■< j.a bfliwetir' .W. : the uie.Oeer N. itnUti iheiBBMi Isltnd, the Fox Islands, lateborough or Long Tslnnd, and a multitude of small isles, rocks, and ledge*. Through the bay, to tite month of the river of its name, the westerly channel is by the headland oh the ivest, called OipI*$ Head r thence, by Isleboroiigh on the west, and Gape Rbrier dn the east, to Bagaduce Point or Castine River. < The Eastern Entrance is between Isle Haute on the west, and the smaller isles on the east, through a channel called Long Reach, formed by the shore of Sedgwick on one side, and Deer Island on the other, until it unites with the main channel between Gape Rotner and laleborough or Long Island. Above this, on the east, stands Fort Castine, near to which is the town of Castime, opposite to Penobscot, which was incorporated in 1796^ CniSttde ia thie port of entry. ^tl^ noble riv^? which empties its water into the bay, and which is now decorated with nt^^uf tow.qships, is the most considerable, in the state of Maine, and has its sources about 130 miles above the itilet of Castine. The head of tide and navigation is, however, at 9angpr, ahout ,30 mites from the same : but vessels of thirty tons inay approach withlu a'imite of this placed At the entrance of the river is a depth of 10 fothoms. ifj^v. ,,-.:, «^:,,.,. ,..,, , r , , ^ 'From McwMT Dissert Rock and Lighthouie, (noticed on pp. 198,9,) to White HsAOt hairing also a LicttTUOUSE with sl faced light, tlie bearing and distance are W.N.NV. 13 leagnea..* While Head Island has been so called from the numerous white rocks about it. The light is brilliant and fised, at 58 feet above the level of the seii ; and though of a secQi^dary class, is iropoiitant to all vessels entering from, the westward W,MP t^.^f- bbuF, by Bag^duce Point, so soon as the entrance bean £}.N.E., ruu^ m tlyat dlr^iiQUt keeping the middle of the channel on your starboard side until you pass the first isla|id« givine that island a berth of half a mile; then haul to the snuthwerd, until the i^uuid bears^.S.W., when you may anchor in 8 or 10 fathoms, muddy bottom, and lie tN»!^\ from all wind*. The ti^e here rises, on the full and change, 10 or 11 feet, wd flow* at lOh. 45 ro. i • To ElVTER PENOBSCOT BAY, from the S. W.'-Oh aoprqaehing W^U^ Hiwtf^drHs lighthouse, be careful not to haul in for it until it bean Hi.E,, as yon wUl thus avoid t^e iMget of recks tying without the head. Witfrin these ledges, at about a pist6f-i)i6t frbm, shore, there is a safe passage. In passing the head, to the eastward, you'wHl /Ke a good hartxtuf, on the larboard hand, called Seal Hdrlnntr, and in which a vessel may liesareTjf with any wind. Iq going into this harbour, give the larboard shore a berth, in pi;der to avoid a sunken ledge, extending about two'tbirds over, fnd which breaks with any sea, excepting at high water. Vessels of 60 or 70 tons may double close around the head of the li|ht, and anbhor ti^ht abreast of the liver in the harboulr. Those taken wi:h ealni and ebb-tide may aitchb^' any- where off the light in f>om 12 to 20 fitthoros. If the wind takes yod at fl.B. and ebb-tid^, so that you cannot get into 5ea/ l/ar6oHr, you may run into Tennant HarhoWf which bears W. by S. from White Head, about 4 miles distant. .u>;i>v!WM-i •ti r.iitSV The dvscriplion of the Coc^sts of the United Statest S^c, S, W^ of ihe Peaobneoif is eontiaued in the Colombian Navigator ^ Vol* /., published by Mr. ILaUftev' j-.i*. •a; h'- «^ ■H fa . .... - uMitf; v.! ■■,iii. rt9flW \hml^ INDEX. t'Hl. .isttiRtil- ir.i. Abattis, !!{!{ AoUeon h^ge, 18ii Admiral's Cove* 61 Admirul's S^{«8, 24 A*tWlaai Afr«r, 101 ' '* iall««iUettM, Point, 40 Airsv, Cape, 9^ Albion Cliff, t5B AJcW«|B4ck,116 AurigM Ulawl and B«f, Ijll Ain«i>a HafbTow, 4^ *« » Amet IslaodK 1,^ A#ent HarKfljar. 8T AiiftWltIiI^Dd.xxi,87 AmBKriaUiB Pdirit, 103 AttioVie P^nat, 82 Anobor island, XOS Aocbof ( PAiaj^ , Cr^iDaUlcre , Harbour. 4$ i^liGlto^ Point, St. Bub«ifi«7, tr Aadt6, St., 118 Augtiillb, Cape, tl, 72 Annapolia, xxir, 18^ Anne, St.. Cap* and Moua- tains, 110 Anne's, St,Harbo^r, 155^ 156 Aium's, 8t.,^bcial8,, lid AlWii^£a^*,^5,, ^ . Ansa de I'Etanf. or Great Pond Rtver, 110 Antelope Harbour, 81 Anthony, St., Harbour, 46 Anticosti, Island of, zxii, 89—91 Antigonish, 148 Antrobus, Point, 97 AppeeletatBay, 10% Apple Isle, 115 AquaFort, 50 Aracbat, or Ardcbotte, 158 Archduke Charles, Wreck of, 116 L'Argent Bay, 6t Arpos, Cape, 150 Angnole,or OHgnalCape, 1 15 Aroobette, or Aracbat, 158 Asbp6 Barbour^ 155 Atpdtogon, Highlands of, 170, 175 Atlantic Cove, 86 Aubushse, 148 Audieme Island, 57, 58 Audubon islets, 99 Augusiin Cbaio, 96 Augustin, St., Cove, 109 Augustine, Port, 96 Anx Oies, Cape, 119 Avalon, PeninsMa of, 51 Avigntfb Rock, tiO Aylmer Sound, 9tr Bacalien, or Baoalaji Island, xvii, 21, 26 Bscalieu Island, Notre pane Bay, XTii.SS Baccaro Point, 18S Bacon-bone Rock. 28 Bagsduce Point, 20l Ba|:sbot Rock, 186 Boiede Laval, 112 Baiede Paris, 37 Bale dea Pins, 37 Baker's Island and Light* house, 200 Baker's Point, 51 Baldl)ead^5l Bald or Tu^et Island, 185 Bald Point, or Western Head, 179 Baleine Head, 50 Baleine, or Whale Eiver, 46 Ballard Cape, 51 Banc a rOurs, 46 Bancdu Lroup. or Wplif $ank, 118 Bande de I'Arier Bay, 64 Bangor, 20 1 Banks of Newfouodlaml, 17 —19 Bantam Rock, 182 .y ' Barbe, St., B V o<; T?" *;^o^ Barbe, St,,or Horse Island8^7 Barge Bay, 82 Barnaby Island, 114 Barrack Rocks, 35 Barren Island, 56 Barren Island, 164 Barrett Ledge, 117 Barrier Point, 81 Barrington Bay, 182 Burrow Harbour, V9 Barrysway, Great, Point, 68 Barrysway, or Barachois, 64 Basin of Wines, lB8 Bason River, 106 Basque Island, 115 Basque Cape and Road, 116 Basque Harbour, 87 Basqiie Islands, Great and Little, 107 Basque, Port aux, 70 Bass Rock, 160 Basseterre Point, 64, 65 Bsttery Point, 178 Battle Harbour. 80 Battle Islands, 80 Bauld, Cape, 48 Bay Islands, T6 Bay of islands, 74 Baydel'Eau, 63 Bay Robert, 23 Bay Veirdeor Bay of II«rbs,2l Bayfield Isles, 121 Bnyley's Cove, 27 Beacon Islet, 94 . ■• Bear Cove, White Bay, 3!^ , , Bear Co ve.neair CapeRace^,iy^ Bear Head, 1^ ^ Bear Head aiid Baj, 90 Bear Island, 67 Beaubois Hsrbour, 5d Beaujeu Bank, 120 ** Beaumont Reef, 122 Beaver Cove, 41 . . ,. ,,[ Beaver Harbour, South 0>a|* Nova Scotia, 163 Beavejr. Harbour^ Bw ]^ Funily, 196 Becscie River, 91 Bedeque Bay, 152 Bedford or Tracadte Bay^ 153 BeU Island, Fortune Bay, 63 Bell Isle, Conception Bay, ill Bell isle, Liltlle, Sandy H^T" hour, 56 Bell I^k, Halifax |i«tboiir, 172 Bell Rock, Shelburne Hv^ hour, 181 Belle Bay, 63 Belle Harbour, 63 Belle Isle, 79 Belle Isle, South, 42 Belle Isle, Straits of, 78 Belie Ashe's Point, 149 Belle Chasse Islete, 121 Belles Amours Harbour, 93 Bergeronnes Islets, 131 Berry Head, 161 , Berry's Ground, ^ Bersimis or Bersiamites River and Point, 112 Bertbier, 121 Betcliewun Harbour, 103 Betson's Ledge, 187 Bio Harbour, 114 Bio Isle, 115 Biohe's Arm, 41 Bickerton Harbour, 162 Bioquette Isle and Light- house, xxii, 115 Bi^'re Cove, 43 Birch Islands, 104 Bird Islands, 26 Bird isl«t8,MagdalenIsles,89 Bishop Head, tOU Bishop's Rooks, Ho Black or Irish Island, 44 Black or Le Have ^clr, 179 Black Bay, 82 Black Duck Islsnd, 29 Black Fly Islsiid,79 Black Head, &£. Coast, Neir'> foundland, 21, 29 304 BXwk, Ledge, Hubberl's Core, 177 Black Reef, St. Lewis Sound, 79 Black Reef, N. CoMt,Ouir of St. LawreaoAt 97 Pl«w)k RQ«k, Pla««ntift BajT, Black Rock,-^yfy'» Island, 186, V iiK." ,M Blackbetd Bay. 28 .9 Ilarbenri, 9^94,; ,: :,.a156 ! BrasflRock,il98 .pBnsil o^ P^snoutb Roeksj 180 ' Bresd and^ CJiMwe Point, 50 Break-bear^ P^ij^t, tS Br^akinf Le4v«> 94 Btidlif ts or. BnOia Bay, 4T BrMi«>'Poiht,5S,54 INDEX. Brent, Cape, S6 . ati'iociii Brent Core, 37 Brenton Rock, 33 . Breton Island, 154—159 Brewer's Hole^ 63 Brier's Island, 164 Brig Boek. 164 firignSfflS Brigus Head, ff ' Broad Cov^ 68. Broad Cove, or Paluerston Bay, 179 . Broom Point, 75 Broirn'aPand.58 Broyle, Cape, 50 Brudenell Bivar, 151 Brul« Banksaod Cape, 192 Brunet Islasid, 69 Bryant Gove, 93 Bryer's liland and Light- house, ziz, xziy, 186 Bryoo, or Cross Idand, 89 Buchtuch Harbour, 144 Budget Ladga, 189 Bull Rock, 160 Bull Rock, 169 Bull Rodt. HaUfex, 179 Bull aad Cow Reeka, 53 Bulls, Bay of, 24 Bulls, Bay of^ 50 Burj^eo Isles, 68 ' Burin Bay and Inlet, 59 Burin Harbour, Giaat "Od Littl»,58,59 Burnt Cape, 49 Burnt Capa Ladge, 199 Burnt Head, 93 Burnt Head, 51 Burnt Islands, 70 Burnt Islani, 118 I Burnt Point, 34i Bustard, or Outarda River, :: . 119^. Butterfly Island, 39 Cacona Peninsala, 118 Calumet, River, 109 Camel Island, 47 t Camilla Mount, tli t&-t?i Canplshmda^ao ^•■Tnt:'^? | Campobello Isle, 195 0^: ] Canada Harboar^ 41 tms^f | Gaaada H«Mi, 40 '^ - Canada, or Canary Bay, 40 Canoe Isle,, iSi Canon Point and U^t, dl Canso or CaaseSu Gqw' abdl Harbmr^ xi«, 160 ) " ! Canso, Out of, zxi, tmr Cap data Bide^l«f t ' ^ Cape Bayy.'IO ^ Cape Bratoir Idand, 154i>— j 159. ■■; . 'f - ^ ■■,-■■'1 ■ Cape Freels, 39 Cap* RittiI ^jta^dt) C^ii.iu<}Md'J Car^gan Bty^. '4n > 'ffhisatf Riyera, 151 . • ''■--'* tiyiil--^ Caribou HarlM>ui','145)a^;id') Caribou Uaad; 98 t'mim30 Caribou Point, 1«» M pui') Cariton CliA,,«M !x'>» p»iO Carleton Mdbpti^l^H Moiy Carleton Pointy 90 .mlTi Carleton Point, 159 > tA > Carrol Coye,:89 .>n Carousd Island. 107 / :>n Cascapediae.Ban 143> '^<>>I'Ji Casoumpee, or HoUalMt)ildli bour^ 153< ;■• ■' /»i'>dl)«ol"^ Castina, 901; 90t J ^har.r^ CasdaHill,5« , )oW> Castle Island, 8^; > ' i < > Castor and PpUttic ilooka^t Castors, Riyotbf, 76'. I > Cat Ana,, Ovaai iodl jittltf, 40 ■;■■ . ■'.'•.' Cat.Coya,.31 Cat Islaiid,>nair Ctkpe Fraala, Cat Island, Plaaantia^Bky, 59 ',;: vn.'-' .!3in>C?-'.» Cat, or Soulpin Rotk, IfB" Catalina Bayi 95 Caulina Harbour, 96 Cawae Islands^ 108 Centra Hill, 94 Cerberus Robk, 150 Chsint3«v«, ffl Cbai* Island, 94 Chaleur, Bajr of, 66 Che^sur BUy, 149 ; Cbanp Fkga Bank, 49 'mo' i Cbaoc»Hirb4wr.S5 "^ Chance Point, 98 Chandlar^a Reach, 98 Channel Patch, 190 > > Channel Rook, Mnehiaa Bay, 199 > Chapeau RougAi Capa, 53 > Chapel Island, 64 i}<;-j Cbappla ^nm* 94 •"?>'* Charge Roak; ai -k:ul.?> Cbarlea, 8t«» Capa, Slaaittor BallaIalajSO> . m n Charlea lal«nd»i Shod' Biy. 164 ' ■ ,!;i<'! rtnf. -;r'! Charles Island and BatbMIr, North Bfaon, ChilC of St. LaifTenea, lOS ' .^:^'\f^'j Charles, St., Harbdur^AO^' Charles. St^Pnht; 106 Charles, St.. Rivari 80< Cbarlotta l^own, 1!59 ? Cbass^ Pointy lOT: ,tiatht(MnBa»ill Chatham, Town of, I4S Chatty CfpeVllOi Cbedabucttt B«Jrt 159 Cbedabueto H«fcd^ 170^ 171 c (ihcney Island j 19&< KtUii».i^ Chester, M«Los*iBaV) 178 Qbiooutimi.TrAding Poat, 1 13 GUai, orDog'Island, tit Cbigneoto Bay, 188. : Chignaeto Cap*. ItB Cbinnev, or Ncwtb AnB> 41. j Cinqlda«,«8. ' * CinqS«rfjB»y«A u...! Clair, St.rBi4^'9i >k. f Clam Cov«f 51 Clatiae Hatboar, 57 Cleara Cove, 51 Clearwater Point* 103 Cleopatra Sboil, 93 GbklciAotindt t9 , , .< via Cloudberrj Point, 100 t! Clouds HilbvAl Clown Core, W Coachman Slioal,^17fi Oiimamabt Bay, 99 Coal RiVSc, 73 ^GbengaKiHartMur, 144 Cock Core, 114 Cod Ro7,BiTer*and Broad,72 Goddle'aHkrbour^ltil Coffin Island, 88 CofeMTOftit Point, 178 Colinet Bay, 53 CoUn«t^IaMnd,5S Collier Ba]^ S3 Collins Shoal, lOS Colombiar Capa^llt Colombier Rock. 61 Colamb«IdaHdvd7 Columbeof Rotte,ti9 Columbia ^ Staam < V«ia«l, Wreck of, 183 j^f.-iO ■ Colnmbin* Bboila; 89 - Cpme>b7-GJttiie« Iiar|>our,56 Comus, Wradcof the, 0i Conceptioil Bav^ x*ii. 17 Ill I DiraeMoiM, SI Conche Harbour, 4S CoteyBi^YO Confusion Bay, 35 ConnaigM Bay, 64 Connaigra Harbour, 65 Connecting Podn^tt , , Connoire Bay, 68 ^7 -t;}'),'..;. iCOMlibU^ge, 19S' w . i Conte, La, Hiirboar,6S>U i <€ foundland, 75 Cranberry labnd and Light, xxiit,:l60 , ' Cranberry Isles, xmTr.900 Crane Island, 190 \ . < ^ <•! CremailUre Harbour, 46 > Croc Harbour, 43 Crocker's Covoii is ' Croix Point, 107 Cronier Point, 60 Crooked Islands, 108 Croat Island and Lighthouse, 173 Cross or Bryon Island, 89 Crow Harbour. 169 Crow Island, Aquafort, 50 Crow Island, ' Kamourasca Island, 118 Cuckold's Head, SO Cumberland Basin, 189 Cumberland Harbour, 95 Cupid Cove, S3 Curlew Point, 100 Currant Island, 77 . Current, reflowing current in« side the Gulf Stream, note (t). 4 '— on the Great Bank, &c., 4 from the Gulf of St. Lawrence, 8 off Sable Island, 169 - Gulf of St. Lawrence, 84,85 Straiu of Belle Isle,78 Cutler's Head, S8 Cutteau, Bay of, 68 Cutter Harbour, 80 Cotwell Harbour, 35 Daly laland, 97 Damna (Damnable) Harbour, 30 Daniel, Port, 14S Dantxick Coree^ Great and Little, 6S Dark Core, 193 Dartmouth, 171 Dawson's Core, 65 De Monts, Point and light, 100 ■ i, ■' * .• ,s;A«^i*.J J De Plate Harbour, -69 Deadman lalet,' 88 Daadman's Bay, SO' > Deadman's Bay, Fortune Bay, 64 Deadman's or Ttdpasse's Bar, 33 •; Dean l^wal) 155 ., ^05 Deane or Pope's Harbour, 164 Dean's Rock, 34 Deer Corea, 39 Deer Island, S8 Deer Harbour, 79 Degrat Harbour, 48 Degrat or RowGalley Uead,48 Delaware Hirer, or Head Harbour, 177 Delute, Harbour, 195 Demoiselle Hill> 87 ^ Denier, Great and lij^ Islands, 35 •> Denis, St., Point, 118 ' Despair, Bay of, 65 Deril'sBay,66. Deril's Core; 40 Deril's Head, or Oak Point, 196 Deril's Limb, 185 Diable Bay, 8S Diablo Cape, 118 ' Diamond Cape, 124 Dice's Island andLigbe^SOl Didiquash, 196 Dildo Harbour, S4 Dipper Inlets, 19S Direr Islet, 95 Diriding Head, 29 Doddiog Rock, 59* Dog Island, near Old FeroUe, Dog Island, N. Shore, Gulf of St. Lawrence; 94 Dog Island, Fortune Bay, 63 Dogs, Cape, 116- D'Or, Cape, 188 Dorman Rook, 176 Doub'" Ledge, 78 Doul Road Point. 5S Dougua Town, 139 Dorer Fort, 176 Doyle Islanda, 97 Doyle Rm{, 88 Dragon Bay, 66 Drake, HM,S., Wreck of, 7 Drake Island, 66 Duck Island, 33 Docklale, 178 Duck Illands, SOO Dunn, High Lands of, 61 Durell's Island, 1^0 , Durell's L«dge, or Snsp Rirer, 33 Dyer's Bay, SOO Eagle, Cape, Newfoundland N.E. Coast, 4S Eagle, Cape, ADtieoatilalaiid, 90 Eagle, Cape, Rirer St. Law- rence, 116 Eagle Harbour. 96 Eagle Island, 74, East Ca{HB, Autibosli l8land«90 East Isinnd, Migdalen i»> lands, 88 Eebafiuid d* Bfiqa*. 1 14 Eclipse laland. xtii»^ Eddj Cot*, i9t Eddj Point, 160 Egg Island. 108 Egg RockSt 96 EgiBOBt> Port) or J«det« Hsr* b«tir,164 Egramont, or Long Covs, 177 Eidsr Islands, 95 EUis Bar, 90 EUis Point, 5f Emery Island and Itottks, 100 Enfant PtaMttllAck, 61 Engine Island, 4i English Baj, 111 English, Cape, 58 Eoglifeb HaibMir, Yriaicy Baj, its English Harboar, Fortune Bar, 65 English Point, N»8bor*,Gnir cf St. LaiitreMe» 108 Entragfte, Cape, M Enrag^e, Cape, and Light* house, xitir, 188 Earag6e, Foiat»fV>rtuMBay) Enrag^. Poi*v itear Cap* Ray, 71 Easoa^ or Smoke Cape, 156 Enter Islet, 95 Entry Isbutd, 88 Eptes de Br^b«t» 47 Epia* CadM^ Ar*, 49 Eseuminao PniAt and Li^t» 143,144 ■;.., ..!.•• • Esprit, 8t<, Harbour, 168 Esquemin Isles, lit Esquilaaak Bay, Rirer and lalandsyO* Esqaimaox Haiibear, 103 Eaquimaaz Islandi^ Mingao Is., 1Q3: . ••^'>f"' ■ ■- '' ■' Etamamu Rirer, 98 Etaiig Hatboor, 196 Exploits, Aiobipelago of, 85 Ftioheux Bay, 46 Father Poibtr or PoHkt MDl Peres,114» 189 -Ts^iH Feimowea, f 1 .. ■'■'^'. Fefolle Maiid»7r Ferolle, Old, 77 FeroUe, Ne#, 76< < Ferolle Point, 76 ..i.)^H FeFiiyli«d,50' ii.!' Ferryland Head, 60 Fen^kMl^Poteli SO Fiddle Head. 159 Fin Roefcs« 97<' < . Fiah Harbour, 96 Fiab Islet, 94 ^ > Fisherman's Harbear, I48>f PkUmf I«lMd,'l69' < \ nrMi Fisblak* l9lMid,80 Fishiqg Rock. 55' rnbM Harbour, 45 Fishot Isles, 45 Fiiaro-* Riter, or Uiibbert's Core, 177 Fire Leagues Point and Har. hour, ^ Flamboreugb Head, tl FIM Mated. B«yof8t.Jobti, 76 Fiat Island, Labrador, 96 Flat Island, OaspA Hey, 141 Flat or Peter Peittt, 139 Flat Point and Light, 157 Flat Rooks. BradoM Bay, 9i Flat Rock Point, to FleurHl».Lie Hatbontr» SB Flint Isles. l57 Flower Ledgi, 7^ Flower Point and Rofrkfe, 16, : 87 ■ Flower Pot, or Old WmMo Rbek^l39 Flower Pot Columns, 104 Foam Rook, 80 ' FogoGapef84 Fogo Harbour, xrii,d4 FogoIaland,M Fon, to the Baaka of New^ foundlend, 5 , Gulf of %U Lawr«nee, 2,83 FoUe or Whale RMk, 43 FondArm>43 Fool's IslHAd. 38 Foit Rocks, 94 FMtoau Biy sad Ff Newfoondhmdf 00 Fox Island, Plaeentia Bay, 55 Fox Island, «stf^ Partdiie -Sound, SV"'"'' - Fox Island, Port-au.Port/ 73 Fox Island HarbMri 67 • F ' *' > Frenchmanli Ovr^ F^ine Bay, 69'^ >«if'.'f.!f«>r^ !?i!M Frenehman's Otw, Bty 6f Islands, 74 Fi«ah>wat»r Bay, near St'. John's^ Ne«^fb«rtidland; 90 Freehwater Bay, n«ar C*p« Race, M ' Fi4day'« Btff, 35 '*• " Fright Island, 103 f^ - Fromy Island, 45 "^ f ***^ Frying Pan Ro*k,'70 '"'^J* Full Harbour, 60 ' ^*»^' Fundy, Bay of, 183^196 ' ' Bearinga tc Di«tati6«^ in,l96, 19» '^^ GeD«rai RefiatttiU'tlM Directions, !9t*,*l9« ' '« ," * Oenritil Caiitibttii lagt Funk Island. 39 ' ' ' GabarusBar.lSB "^ Galantry Htad aild 1.1; boose, xxi, 60 Galloping AMttitr\Sh St., Bay, 7f "'^^i* Generiere, Stu lelaqki, fMF,^ GeniUe P6liit,43 ^'f Geoive, St, Cape, W^ClMfet^ Ne^rfbtftidfand, 79 George, Bt., €ai>^, NbVa^ Scotia, 148, 149, 15» ' ":^, George Isl«H M-'^i*"^ George To# *'""»^ George's lilidd, l%lt^i'l«t^, George'*l>oWt, iO"! »^^ '»*<:?^ Gerard^ Mmil6^ ' ^"'»''^ Gibraltar »6ck,9*;»5^ ***'»' Giltt^s, St.-, Pdftf, lit ■ Godbret or Goddbottt Rlytfr, 111 '■' ■'■■ '-'f ^"^^ Godfather Cor«, 39^'^ ' J''**'^ Goodwin Island, 99 '\ Oooae'-Bay.W ''•■'"■■■ "-'^^J Goose Caps, B. Coast Ne^t^ • ■ttundttbdj'vie ' '-o^*: "s^^'«* Goose Cape; lUfer Bl fiiWt. rence/lil?'^^ >. T«*^n> of :..v,» ten i.'sn*-* id') iB»nO Goq^e llmrboar, E. Coast Newfound)an(), 46 GooB*, Ulaml, S.E. CoMt Qoose Island, RirerSt. Lciw- rence, 130 Goose Island, C.ouQtry H9r* bour, 163 Gooseberry Ii^land, 77 Gooaeberry lalea, 31 Gurlob Point, 24 Got Cove, 95 Gouffre, The, 41 ,„-. Goaldaborougb, iOC^^^^ j-..,u Gv.Ternor's Islaod, 74 Granbv'a laUod. 39 Granobain lalauda, 47 Grand Bank, Cape of, 68 Grand Bay, 71 Grand Harbour, 193 Grand Bruit Harbour, 68 Grand Bruit CoiuiQbeRo«k»69 Graiid Entry H«rbo«r, 89 Grand Jerrey, 6% Grand Mwia4J|;8lspd,zx,199 Grand Passage, 186 Gr^Pier>4,6a Grand Point, 9% Grande Valine, 110 Grande Gr%7e..l39 Grandm^re's QMb*, 9?^ Grandee Ilette* Harboui;, 44 Grandee Oiet HurbQiir, 44 Grandee Oi«a lelendi, 44 Grande* Vecbis Cove, 40 Grande Galets, Point, 48 Grandy's Cpve, 68 Granious, Wreck of, 9Q Grates, Pmat of, S3 GratiR Hill, 167 Gravois Clifi; 14£^ Gn^RQeks.l8f Great Island, Boispe, 9ay,.66 Greet Barryewey Point, 68 Great Bay 4»V£«u, 64 Great Caribou I«Un4, 80 Great Cbanee llwcbour, ^ Great Colinet Isl^ud, 52 Greet Coajr Ann* 39 er«Bt Pvck IalfM> 110 Great St. Leifi9a««,H9rboiur, Great Salmon lUvei^ 9$, Great Triton Ie|a«4,35> Greeo Bay, Ce«o Green Core,3a is (d sAi ; Green Island, Bonavlat* Biy, Green Island, neer St. Pierre, 61 Green laland and Ligbtbooae, xxii, 115 Green Jalsnd» W> CoMt Newfottodland, 78 Green lalwad, Belle lele, Sontb, 49 Green Ialand» Country Har* bour, 16t Greev Islaad, Kegasbk* Bay, 100 Green Island, MalMUM Bay, 177 Green Island, Mingan Is* lands, lOS Green Island, Plaeentiu Bay, 5T Green Island, Trinity Bay, 24 Green Island, Tusket Islands, 185 Green Island, WiUes«Bay,fiO Green or Inner Ridge, 27 Gr6i:>iiab Bay, 82 Greenly IslsM, 99 Greenspond Tickle, 32 Gregory. St,, Cspe, 74 Gregory's Rock, 58 Grenville or New London Bay, 163 GronTilio Lodge, 77 Gribanne, Cape, 122 Griffin's Cove, 110 Griguet lelanda, 47 Grindatono Island, 88i Groaia or Gioiz laland* 41- Groe Mome, 37 Grosse Island, Magdalen Islands, 88 Grosse Isle, 121 Grosso Roo]|> 119 Grouts Point. 43 Guernsey Island, 74 Guleb Goto, 9t Gulf of St. Lawrenoft, 8S-> ,.;10ft--n Oenwal Phenomena. 83; WindH Fogs, 83| Cnr- re«ts, 84; Icee, 86; Islands in the GnU; 86 —91 i Eastern Sboro of the Gulf, 72^78} North Shore, 91-^109 Western Coa^, 139^155 Gull Ialattd,^eap«iBonnTista, 9fi GnU Island, G«p»StJohn, 36 GMl limit N«tre. Dame • Pay, 36 Gnll lalandi Fortuite Bitf, 63 GnUIsI««d,f^WSt Gull Island, WiUesn Bif , 50 Gull Rock, 48 Gulliver's Holey 187 Qulnare Shoal, lit Gunning Point, 162 Gut of Canso, 148 Guyon lale, 158 nnywboroagb Harbonr^ or Milfora Haven, 159 Ha-Ha, The, 68 Ha-Ha Bay, NewfonndlaBd E. Coast, 49 Ha-Ha Bar, Labrador, 96 Haldimand, Cap«, 140' Haldimaod, or Latonr Wtl, 182 Halfway Rook, 29 «>>'• Halifax, Deecription of, tnd Directiona for, nil, IM'— 175 Hall's Bay, 36 Hamilton, 142 Happy Adventure, Great and Little, 29 Harbour Graoe, zxi, 22 Harbour Grace Light, 23 Harbour Iskod, Country Harbour, 162 Harbour laland, Mingaa Islanda, 106 i Harbour Briton, 64 Harbour Buffet, 56 Harbour Delute, 195 Harbour Femme, 63 Harbour La Conte^ 63 Harbour La Cone, 69 Harbour Main, 29 Harbour Round, 36 Harbour MiUb, 6t Hardy Harbour, ST- Hare Bay, Fogo laland, 34 Hare Bay, NewAwndland E^ Coast, 4S Hare Bay, Newfoundland S. Coast, 66 Hare Harbour, Fortune Bay, 63 Hare Harbour, Gulf of St. Lawrence, 97 Hare laland, 117 Hare's Ears Point, 66 Uarpooner, Wreck of the^ 6 Harrington lalands, 97 Harris or Raadeo Bay, 153 Hauling Point, 39 Haut-et-Baa Gape, 46 Haute, Isle, Bay of Fnndy^ 188, 189 Haute-et-Phte lafand; ■» H*Htn>tiBn« laland, 47 Hawke's HarbounTS. Head Harbour> 73 Head Harbour, or Delaware Rivnr,<177' Head Harbour and Lijght*. bouse, Passtnui^neddy Bay, xxiv, 195 S08 INDEX. I'l H6«d Harbour lalnnd, 199 Huart'i ConMat, 84 Heath Point and Tower, xiir, 90 Hebert Port, or Great Port Jolie, or Port llanafield, 180 Hell'i Moatb, 41 Heneroy Rock, 17t Honloj Harbour, 81 Honlej Ledge, 169 Henry, Cape, 90 Henaitage Bay, 65 Hermitage Cove, 66 Herring Core, Hali£u( Har- boar, 171 Herring Core, Lirerpool Bar, 179 Herring Neck, 36 Hertford Baaio, 177 Hen Point, 117 High Beacon Hille, 81 High Cliff Cape. 90 High laland, 47 Hillier'a, or Boutitoa Har- bour, 41 Hill's Town, 164 Hillaborongb Bay, 16t Hoagaia, or ItonCape, 160 HobaoQ'a Nose, 176 Ho« Rock, 176 HoulemeM, or Soath>waat Iale,177 Holland Harbour, 16S Hollin'a Harbour, 16t Holyrood,SS Holyiood Pond, 6t Hood, Port, or Jeetioo, 166 Hooping, or Sana- Fond Hnr* boM-,40 Ho)M, Wreck of, 168 Hon Bay, 80 Homton Bluff, 188 Hone lale, 177 Horae, or St. Barbe lalands, 37 Horae Cb<^,S5 Horae Shoe Bank, Rirer Si* Lawrence, ItS Horse Shoe. Ledge, Ma»> garet'a Bay, 177 Horae Shoo L«dg«, Capo Sable^l83':'n-u i^ ..■■./' -. ' ^ ' Ice-berg* and leis^ tl<*4l4 Ice, Indieationa of, 1 1 * ' — >GalfofStLawrence,»6 Ilettea, The^ 44 Hot, Point, lis Indian Bar, 167 Indian tiarbour, Placentia Bay, 67 Indian Harbour, Newfound- land 8^ Coaat, 69 Indian Harbour, Nora Scotia, 16t Indian lale, 179 Indian Point, 10« Indian Rocka, 169 Ingbmachoix Bay, 75 InhabiUnt Bay, 160 Inapeetor Rock, 35 Ireland Rock, 35 Irish, or Black Idand, 44 Iron Head. 64 Iron laland, 68 Iron, or Hoagaia Cape, 160 Iron>boand laland, 178 Isabella, Wreck of the, 87 laland Harbour, 96 lalands. Bay of, Newfound- land Weot Coast, 74 lalanda, Bay of, NovaSeotia, 163 lale an Boia, 60 Islet Bay, 80 Jack, Cape, 148 Jackaon Ana. 39 Jaoqnea Cartier Iriend, 40 Jacques, St., Hsrbourr64 Jane, Wreck of the, 87 Jean, St, Bank of, 180 Jebogue, or Jogogaa, Cape, 186 Jedore Harboar, or Port Egaaont, 164 Jedore Ledges, 166 Jeffery Point, 188 Jegogan Harbour, 16t Jegogan Point, or Cape Jebogue, 186 Jeremie Island. 118 Jerseyman'a Harbour, 64 Jeatieo, or Port Hood, 155 Jig Rock, iftl Joe Balt*a PoiMi 34 John the B«y, 68 John, St., B^ of, 76 John, St., Cape, zni)8a John, St., laland off 64 John, St., Rirer, Gulf rojl^ St* ';I/rwrenoe,,106ij!.M"»'r t. ■.<>■.*■.■ John Clara HUl, 50 Jobn'a Islandtl86 John's, St, Near Bruoiwielt, ■ tB9^19* < - Description of the eitgrt &c.,zx|189^190| Dif«ft- tiona byllr. Lotkwoed^' 190, 191; lUaMTka >f Mr. Lockwood, «i4 Capttlil- Napier, '191; Siffnal^ IMj ]U|te8^.«f Whar.(|,'e, &e.,11>8 John's, St., Newfoundltipd, Description of, zri, 16 John's, St., Newfoaadland.. Directionafor the Harboari xii,19 *» Joli, Mont, 101 . Labrador. O oaslo f, g w i>it H y,tln > J Lachedaia^ Polii^ Se* -''" Mti^ i LackingtaABiacbt'80|')M MuA Lake laland, 98 i h . hiimi Lally Cov*j 63 "> '>'*<< -n-.tA. »Uji i Lally Baek Oai^,-<6S«»'>>^i^ <^}>^> < Lamelin laland8,'60,f«v:^-! -u-.' ' Laaielili''&adg*s>'6ff "^'^^'tH «i<,:.a LamaUa Sbig Rodi^«60 ta^hti 1 Lance Core, 81 ^i Lance, Point. 68 ^^l ,fi'-<-^ >•• ' ■■•^»<*.> 1 Large Lrta»dlilid GKaMo^i 1041 :/Uijni,4!ajpto,i /Lark Core and Ialaad-,>79^<^f^ Lark Harbouiii^74 ' '''!.■•»{ '<<»t»^o.ii Lark lalet Spit, >i! ^ft^tboi Laric Point.aiiiriRs«P,%ir ""'it^xl Latins Point, 55 <>t ■ -r-''.f? '3;,a*J Latour,or HaldimandPorf,! a«<' Li Li Li u Mnfi mont [009, iddle >5 - Head »4 , , .(. ' ■■■* "fk'l.i ,' ■• ^'- ■ ■ -r.«.i ■ -'rjU nii , if. fnUiii 05, /jsH'aj^^f'^ I Luun; Bnj nf, 60 Laun Island*, 60 Laril ItlMd and Bay, lis LaifrMAw, St., Harbours, Great and Little, 59, €0 Lawrence, St., River of, 1 tO*— 1S8!— General Description, 110; North Shore, 111- -115; South Shore, 113—116; the River above Green laland to Quebec. 116, 117; Directions for Sail- ing op the River from Anticoati to Quebec, 126; fVoin Quebec to Montreal, 135, 136 ; Sail. angDirections,lt9-^lS5 ; Pilotage Bates, &e.,137, 138 Le Four Harbour, 44 La Have, Cape, 179 Le Have, iJigblandsof, 170, 175 Leander Rook. 141, 14* Ledges Island. 9t Leitb or Sha|^ Harbour, 176 Lepreau Point and Light- house, xxiv, 192 Lea Eboulemena, 132 Lewis, St., Cape, Tvii, 79 Lewis, St., Sound, 79 Libbee, or Liby Isles and Lighthouse, xxt, 199 Lichfield Rock, 17S Linzee, Cane, 155 Lion Island, 94 Lisoomb Harbour, 16S L'Islet. 121 Little Harbour, 69 Little Catalina, 26 Little Colinet laland, 52, 5S Little Denier Isle, 28, 29 Little Harbour Deep, 40 Little Hope laland, 180 Little Ireland Island, 69 Little Meeattina Idand, 96, 97 Little Meeattina River, 97 Little Miquelob, or Langley Island, 6 1 Little Moriier Bar. 58 Little Plaeealiaiiarboar, 65 Little River, 67 Little River Harbour, 199 Little St. Lawrence Harbour, 59 Liverpool, 144 Liverpool BttT^xdii, 179 Lobater Bay, Gulf of 9t. Lawrence, North Shore, 95 Lobater Bay, near Cape de 'Monta, 108 > Lobster Harbour. S8 Locker Reach, SI Loekwood Rook, 172 Logie Bay, 20 Long Cove, W IN'DKX. Long Harbour, Pliicentii) Day, 56 LongHarbour,FcrtuneBav,6S Long Island. Bay of ^fotre Dame, 95 Longlslsnd, Plaoeutiafiay,57 Longlsland, Hermitage Bay ,65 Longlslsnd, Buy of Fundy,l86 Long Island, Penobscot Bay, 200 Long Islands, Bonavista Bay, 29 Long Island Bay, 193 Long Island Harbour, 65 Long Ledge, Wapittigun Harbour, 98 Long Ledge, Inhabitant Bay, 150 Long Point, Port-aU'Port, 73 Long Point, Labrador, S. Coast, 106 Long Spit, 88 Long or Egremont Cove, 177 Long Harry Rock, 22 Loo Cove, 32 Loon Rocks, 100 Lord and Lady Island, 64 Lou Road, 97 Louisa Cove, 139 Louiia Harbour, 97 Lonisbourg H8rbour,zxii,l58 Loup Bay, 82 Loup or Wolf Bank, 118 Love Cove, 29 Low Beaoh, 60 Lubber's Hole, 28 Luke's Island, 177 Lunaire, St., Bay, 47 Lunenburg or Miilnguash Harbour, zxiii, 178 Lurcher Rock, 186 Luttrell, Mount, 167 Mac Nab's or Cornwullis Island, 171 Mace's Bay, 193 Machias Bay, 199 Machias Seal Isles and Lights, XXV, 194 Mackinnon, Cape, 97 Macnott's or Roseneath Island, 180 Madame, Isle, River St. Law> renee, 121 Madame Island, Cape Breton Island, 158 Madeleine Shoal, 48 Magadaviek; 196 Magdalen Islands, xviii, 87 —89 Magdal«n River, 1 10 Magnetic Rocks, 67 Magpie Pointy Bay, and River, 106 Mahooe Bay, 177 MBi]lard,C«tpe, 1S2 Main Tickle, 35 2 E AI nine. State of, 199 Marie-et-Joaepb Hflrbour,16.1 Major Reef, 97 Mai Bay, St. Mary's Bav, 52 Mai Bay, River St. Law- rence, 119 Rial Uay. Gulf of St. Law- rence, 141 Mul Bay, Fortune Bay, 63 Malaguash, or Lunenburg Harbour, 178 Malone's Ledge, 30, 31 Malpeo or Richmond Bay, 153 Man, Isle of, 178 Man-of-war Rock, 187 Manan. Grand, Island, xi, 193 Manan, Little, Isle and Lighthouse, xxv, 200 Manicougan Bay, River, and Shoals, 112 Manitou River, 106 Manowin Island, 107 Klansfield or Heberf, Port, 180 Margaret Bay, 46 Margaret,St.^RiverandPoint, loa Margaret's, St., Bay, 76 Margaret'a Bay, 176, 178 Marguerite 'or Margaret Island, 121 Maria Ledge, 49 Mark, St., Islands, 97 Mark Point, 93 Marnham Island, 79 Mar's Beck, 172 Marsh Bay, 202 Marshal Macdonald, Wreck of the, 8 Marshal Wellington, Wreck of, 168 Marshall's Point and Light, 201 Martioot Island, 57 Martin, Cape, 119 Martin, Point, 75 Mary, St., Bay of, 187 Mary, St., Cape, Placentis Bay, 53 Mary,8t.,Cape, Bay of Fundy, 186 Mary,St., Reefs, 98 Mary, Wreck of the, 182 Mary's, St., Bav, 62 Mary's, St., Cliffs, 91 Mary's, St., Harbour, 52 Marv'8,St.,Kays or Hoeksj 53 Mary's, St., Ledge, 199 Mary's, St., River, 162 Maspeck Island, 189 Matnne, Paps of, 113 Matane Rivera IIS^ Matoon or Mouton, Port, IRO Maugber's Beaoh and Light, 171 May, Point, 60, 61 » May or E«st Po^ntj 177 210 INDEX. M«otttina Hnbour, 96 Meeattina, Great, laland, 96 Maoattina, Great, Point, 96 Meeattina, Little, laland, 96, 9r Medwav, or Admiraltr Head, 179 Medwaj or Metway, Port, 179 MeetiDg of the Two Seaa, Bank of Newfoundland, 1 Main, St., Bay, 46 Meogenea laland, 189 Meraabeen laland, 56, 57 Merigomiab, 148 l^ennot lalet, 94 MetiB, Qrand, 114 Metia, Little, 113 Mewatone Roek, 49 MiddleGround,Port-aa-Port, 73 Middle Point and Ledgea, 93 Middle Sboal and Bank, River St. Lawrence, 1 18 Midaummer Rook, 32 Mill Creek, 149 iMilford Haven, or Guys- boroagh Harbour, 159 Mille, Cape, 63 Mili« Harbour, 62 Mille Vaobea Point and Bay, 112 Miller laland, 38, 39 Millions Bay, 43 Milla, Port, or Rugged laland Harbour, 180 Mincbin'a Core, 29 Minea, Baain of, 186 Mingan Harbour, 105 Mingin lalanda. The, 102 Mingan laland, 104 Mingan Patob, 104 Mingan River, 106 Ming'a Bigbt, 37 Ming'a lalanda, 38 Minatrel, Wreck of the, 116 Miquelon laland, 61 Miquelon, Little^ or Dbngley, 61 Mirage, River St. Lawrence, 84 Miramiebi Bay and River, 143 MiaoDu Point and laland, 148 Mi8.>iqoaab River, 189 Miatbaaini Rook, 98 Miatake lale and Lightbouae, 200 Miataken CoVe, 77 Miataken Pointi 51 Miatanoque Island and Bay, 95 Mocodome, Capo, 162 Modclt, St., Mand, 82 Moiaic, River and Itoclr, t07 Moll Rook, 54 MomaMe Bay, 50 Moniac Island, 104 Mont Joli, 101 Mont Louis River, llO Montague River, 151 Montmorenei, Falla of, 123 Montreal, Island and City, 124, 136 Moon, Wreck, 87 Mooae laland, 195 Mooapeek Head Light, xxv, 200 Morahdan's Rocks, 123 Morgan'a Cove, 63 Morria Cure, 30 Mort, Islea auz, or Dead lalanda. 70 Mortier Bank, 58 Mortier Bay, 58 Mortier Island, 58 Morton's Harbour, 35 Mortea, Point auz, 104 Mosea Poiut, 27 Mosquito Cove, 22 Mosquito Harbour, 67 MouUon'a Ledge, 200 Mount Desert Hills, 198 Mount Deaert Rook Light- bouae, xzr, 199 Montange Island, 104, 105 Mouton or Matoon, Port, or Gambler Harbour, 180 Mud or North Seal Isles, 185 Muddle Harbour, 80 Mull Face, 70 Murphy Point, 28 Mnrr lalets, 9(} Murr Ledges, 194 Murray Bay, 117 Murray Harbour, 152 Muababoon, 163 Muequarrb Riter, 100 Mnsquaab, Cape and Har- bour, 192 Mnssel Bank, 25 Mnaael Harbour, 56 Muatard-Bowls, 28 Mutton Bay, 51 Mutton Island, 96 Nabeaippi River, 101 Nag's Head Roek, 158 Nameleaa Core, 78 Napetepee Bay, 95 Nataahquan Point and River, 101 Navr lalaad, 196 Neck Point, 59 Neddick, Cap*, 50 Negro Harbour, 182 Negro Head, 192 Neptune Roek, 122 Netwamu lalanda, 97 Nenf, Port, 112 Now Carlisle, 142 Newcastle, 144 New Ferolle Bay, 76 New Glaagow, 146 New Jf arbour, 24 New Harbour, 31 New Harbour, 63 New London, or Ofenvillo Bay, 153 New Perliean, 24 New World laland, 35 Newfoundland, Island of: General descrip- tion, xz, 14—16 The Banks, 17—19 Newfoundland, laland of: Poaitions, x— xii East Coaat, 19—49 S.E. Coast, 49—51 South Coast.Sl— 7 1 West Coaat, rt— ^8 Newman'a Sound, 29 ,^v Niapisca laland, 103, 104 )' Nicolaa, St., Hkrbour, lit' Nicolas,8t., Point, 111 . ,' Niger Island, 80 "*' j^;'" Niger Sound, 80 ^ ' Nipper's Hsrboor Noble, Point, 48 Noddy Harbour, 48 Noggin, The, 117 Nonnan.Cape, zvii, 48, 78 North Channel, River St. Lawrence, 117 North Battle Island, 79 North Bill, 86 North Broad Cove, 29 North Harbour, St. Mary 'a Bay, 52 North Harbour, Placehtia Bay, 56 North Middle Rocks, 79' North-weat Arm, 31, 32 ''^ Nortb-weat Ledge, Bryit'a laland, 187 '„ Norwich BAnk. 139 ''"^. Notre Dame, Bay of, 35 '*,* v Nova Scotia: ^*^ Poaitions, xiv, *v, — North Coaat, \4i— 148 — Soilih CoastiJjfeAi Chedabucto to Halifax, US 160—165 — Halifax to 'Cape Sable, 170— 188 -North-west Coast, 183—188 Nota Scotia Baiiks, 170 Oak Point, or Devil's Head, 196 Obaervation, Cape, 90 ObserHrioQ River, 91 ' Odd Ii|aAd,S2 OflTer Gooseberry Isle, 31 Offer Wadbani Island, 33 Old Feroll«. 77 Old Fort laland, 94 Old Harry Head, 88 Old Harry ROck, Cipe Broyle, 50 ' * -^^ T F F 3 renvilto 5 lof: lescrip- 17—19 dof: i-tli , 19—49 ,49-51 t,5l— tl t,t«— 78 J ■■' ■ 1.104 ir.lU 111 . i, 48, 78 Wvw St. 1,79 It. M«ry s Bks, 79 31, $9 el 'I \9 «, xir, *v, loMt, \4*~- ]onltl fro™ HaMiu, to Cape ifeit Coaat, kli,170 evil's Head, ft«,90 «t,91 ' ■land, 98 . ," i ,94 1,88 Rttck, CipB Old Harrj Rock, 127 Old Harry Sbo«l, S.*) Old Man'i Uay. 67 Old Perlican, 34 Old Proprietor Rook, 193. 194 Old Roger Sboal, 36 Olomenoeheebo Rirer, 100 One Head laland, 76 Ooion, Cape, 49 Open Bar, 79 Oraoge Baj, or Great Har- bour Deep, 40 Origoal, or Arignole. Capo, 115 Orleans, leland of, 1S3 Orpben laland, SOS Ottey, River, 114 Otter Bay, 70 Ouelle, or Oval Point, 118 Outarde.or BuatardPoint.ltS Outer Ledge, Mahone Bay, 178 Outer Rook, S9 Oven's Point, 178 Owen Rock, 17S Owl's Head, or Keppel Har- bour, 164 Owl's Head and Ligbt, xxv, SOI Pabou, or PabotHsrbour,14S Paoquet Harbour, 37 Pain and Bliss Islands, 196 Palnerston Bay, or Broad Cove, 179 Paradise Harboors,Creat and LiUle, 57 Psradisa Sound) 57 Pardv's Island, 58 Paraborough River, 188 Parsley, Port, 116 Partridge Island, 188 Partridge Island and Ligbt, xxiv, 189 Partridge Point, White Bay. 38 Partridge Point, East Coast, Ne'rfoundIand,48 Partridge Point, Pillage Bay, 103 Paspebiao, 142 Pass Islanid, Fortune Bay, 6S, 65, 66 Passage Pfint, 156 Passages across the Atlantic, 8—11 to the Gulf of St. LawMnoe, 14 PassamnquQttdv Bay, 195 Patrick's, St.. Hole, 193 Paul, St., Bur of^ 75 Paul'e, St., day, t»8 Paul's, St.. Island, zviii, zzi,86 Pavilion River, 91 Peak Point, 93 Pearl Island, 74 INDEX. Pearl Reef. 88 Peckford Island. 33 Peggy's Point, 177 Pendant Harbour, or Port AflSeok, 176 Pendant Point, 176 Penguin Islands, near Cape Freels, S3 Penguin Islands,SouthCoast, Newfoundland, 66 Penobscot Bay, xxv, tOO Penobscot Hills. 198 Pentecost River. 108 Peuton, or Sable River, 1*80 Perc6, Town of. 141 Perc6 Rock and Mountain, 141 Perc^e Rocks, 118 Peril Rock, 95 Perlican, New, 84 Perlican, Old, S4 Perroquet Island, Strait of Belle Isle, 9S Perroquet Islands, Mingan Islands. 104 Petcudiao River, 189 Peter, St.,Bay and Island8,8l Peter, or Flat Point, 139 Peter'?, St., Harbour, 153 Petit Fort Harbour, 57 Petit Maitre, 43 Petit Passage, 187 Petit River, 179 Petite Riviere, ISS Petty Harbour, 49 Philip, River. 145 Picarre Harbour. 65 Pictou, Island, Harbour, kc, xri, 146 Pictou, Toon of, 147 Pierre, St., or St. Peter, Island of, zvii. zzi, 60 Pierre de Gros Cap Reef, 88 Pies, Point, 117 Pigeon Cove, 48 Pigeon Hill Bay, «00 Pigeon Island.near Partridge Point. 38 Pigeon l8lan(ia,Wbitc Bay .39 Pilgrim Shoal, 118 Pilgrims, The, 118 Pilier Bois^, or Woody Pillar, 120 Pillage Bay, 102 Pillar Bay, 43 Pilotage, Rates of, for the River St. Lawrence, 137 Pine, Cape, 51 Piper's Hole, 56 Pistolet, Bay of, 49 Pit-Sound Islands, 30 Pitt's Harbour, 81 Placentia Bay, 53 — 55 Placeotia Harbour, 53, 54 Plaster, or Gypsum Cove, 149. 150 Plate Island, 47 % 211 riate Islands, 6S Pleasant Bay, Magdalen Islands, 87 Pleasant Bay, Bsy of Fundv, 200 ' Pocklington Island, 80 Po^wasb Harbour, 145 Point aux Gaul, 60 Poklogan, 193 Polluck Shoal. 165 Pomkat Island. 148 Pond Point, 93 Poor laland, 59 Pope's, or DeaneHarbou r, 1 64 Porcupine, Cape, 149, 160 Porpoise Rocks, 95 Port aux Basque, 70 Port au Choix, 76 Port au Choix, Old, 76 Port.au.Port,72, 73 Port Grave. S3 Portage Bay, 96 PorUand Hill, 75 Portsmouth, or Brasil Rooks, 180 Portugal Cove, SI Powie Head, 51 Powles, The, 51 Pownall Fort, 201 Prairie Bay, 1 19 Presque, 57 Price Island, 97 Priest's Cove, 42 Prim Point and Light, xix, 152, 187 Prince Edward Island, 15 —154 Prince of Wales's, or Cros Island and Lighthouse, 178 Prospect Harbour, 176 Pubnico, 185 Pudner's Cove, 30 Puffin Bay, 103 Puffin Rock, SS Purbeck Cove, 39 Quako Lighthouse and Ledge, zziv, 189 Quarry Island and Cove, 104 Quebec, zviii, 123, 124 Quidi Vidi, 20 Quin Island, 103, 104 Quoddy Head and Light- house, zzv, 195 Quirpon, or Kirpon, 48 Rag Ledge, 97 Ragged Harbour, 33 Rom Islands, 56 Ramca Isles, 67 Ram's Head Hill, 167 Ramsheg Harbour, 145 Random Western Head, 24 Random Sound, 24 Raspberry Harbour. 160 Rastico or Harris Bay, 153 Raven, Point, 48 i 2|t^ Ravcna Hock*, 44 r • R»7, Cape, zvii, 69—71 lUiadet IslcU, llA Keaui, Isle lux, Kl Red Baj, 8Jt Red HemI, «0 Red Head, 293 Red lalaod, Plaeantia l)aj, 56 Red Island. VV. Co. Now- fouodlond, 73 Red laland Harbours, ^7 Red Island, R. St. Lawrenee, 116 Red Point, 96 Red Rooks and Cote, Vf Reef Point, 90 Reid't Rook, 17t Rencontro, B«j of, 66 Roneontre lalaods, 63 RiOB««res,5t Repisse Sboul, 44 Ribb Reefs, 80 Rich, Point, 75, 76 Riohard I.. t9 Riohard'a Harbour, 66 Richard's Head, 68 Richelieu Rapid, 196 . Ricbibuoto Harbour, 144 Richmond Bay, or Malpec, 153 Ridge Point, 106 RioMMiBliy Road, 1«9 Riat'gouebe Harbour, 14S Hirer Head, 38 River Islands, 79 Rivi^ro du Loop, 118 Road Island, 70 RwriogBuH Point, 147 Roaring BvU Roek. 194 Robert, Cape, 90 Robin Hood's Bay, t5 Roobe, Point, 65 Roobes, Point, 119 Rock Harbour, 58 Rooks, BajT of. Gulf of St. Lawrence, 97 Rooks, Bay of, River St. Law- rence, 116 Rocky Bay, 95 Rooky Bay and Point, 34 Rocky Fiabiog Ground, 34 Roger Island) 1 64 Rook Island^ 159 St. Roque iles Auoais^ 119 Rose, Point, 178 Rose BlanoLe Point, 70 Roseneath, or Maonutt's Is- land, 180 Roseway, Port, or Sbelbume Harbour, xiiii, 180 Rosier, Cape, 109 Aoss Island, 193 llott«BM,i69^^ Rouge, Cam, Hiirliour, 49 Roug«,Pointkll3 Jtouge Isbod, £. Co. Vtw- fonndland, \2 . i INDfcX. Rouge Island, St. Lunairo Bay, 47 Round Harbour, 65 Round Head, W. Coast, New- foundland, 73 Round Head, 96 Row Galley Head, 48 Rug Point, 180 Rugged Harbour, t& RuKgrd Island Harbour, or Port Mills, 180 Rugged Island Rooks, 181 Ruse Rock, 45 Rushabee, 196 Ryder Shoal, 19 Sable laland, xviii, zxiii, 165 —170 Positions, 165 { Tides, 165; General Oeseription and Directions, 165—169 Sable Island and Cape, Bay of Fundy, xiz, xxiii, 183* Sable or Pentoo River, 180 Sacred Buy, 49 Sacred Islands, 49 Saddle Hill, 10« Saddle Islsod. 8t Saddle Baek Rook, 57, 58 Safe Rock, 97 Sagona laland, &t, 64 Saguenay River, 113 Saints Rocks, llie. 109 Salaberry, Bay do, 97 Salmon, Capo and Port, 116 Salmon Cove, Cone4«ption Day. 21 Salmon Cove, Trinity Bay, t5 Salmon Islet, 93 Silt Ldw Bay, 91 Sulut laland. 47 Salvage Bay, 30 Salvage Rook, 9S Sambro' Harbour, 176 Sumbro' Lighthouse, xix, xxiii, 171 Saad lop, Cape, 90 Sandwiob Head and Cove, 81 Sandy Bay, 78 Sandy Cove, Bonsviata Bay, 29 Suodv Cove, Bay of Fundy, 187 Sandy Harbours, Great and Little, 56 Sandy Harbour, 95 Sandy Point, Sbelburae Har> hour, 181 Sandy-beach Point, 140 Sans Fond, or Hooping Har- bour, 40 Ssuker Headj 59 SauU an Coohon.lSfi.. ^vi '>. Sault ae Mouton, IM^'i''^ ' Saunders Harbour, or Shoal B»v, 164 Sauuders, Port, 75 5-' riH^. Sauvagea, Point, 46 Savage Core, 78 . uJ^: Savage Island, 76 > :< B Sawbill River. 10«H Uc.m Scale Rook, 97 «»««^'> Scatari Island, xsi, 158 '''"'- Schooner Cove, 8t Schooner or Goelette Islsnd, 49 Sroodio Point. <00 Sculpin or Cat Roak, MN^^ Scurvy Ialsnd,f9 ' -«< i^ Sea Coal Buy, 150 8eaCow Island, 10(1 "'J Seal laland and Ltght^Bay of Fundy, xix, 184 Seal laland LigbtbonM, (See Alaobiaa Seal L) I94r « Seal Island»,Sir.ef Belli lale, 77 Seal lalea, St. Lewis Sound, 79 Seal Reefs, R. St. Lawrence, 120 Seal Roehs, MiqueloaI>, 61 Seal Rocks, Oasp4 Bsy,189 Seal Rocks, Paaaanaquoddy Bay, 195 Seldom-come-by Harbour, 94 Serpilliire lalMd, 45 Seven Island«%ay, 107 Seymour Island, 159 Shag laland) Bonariata Bi^, «8 Shag lalet and Rook, Labra- dor, 95 Shag Ledge, Jegogan Harb., 168 '•<" Shag Ledgea, off Sheet Har- bour. 169 ) ' Shag or Laitb Haritoor, *fi Shag Roek, off Fogo IslaiRl,55 Shallop Creek, 91 Shallop River, 106A aitKit^ Shallop Rook. 63 Sharp, Cape, 188 Shecatica Island, 95 r;<>A Shediae Harbour, 144>'cr<>. Sheep Cove, 23 Sheet Harbour, 163 Shelbume Harbour, or Port Roseway, 180 Shelbume Lighthouse, 180 Sherbrook, 162 Sherbrook Tower Lighl,zxHi, 17: Shevwiok Point, 29,25 Ship Cove, Plaeantia Bay, 59 Ship Cov«, Newfoundisnd, S.Coast,62 Ship Harbour, PlaeoBtia Bey, 55 ■ Ship Harbool-, Git of Canto, 149 ' "^ Ship Harbour, Nova Sootia, S. Coast, 164 - • i ■- I I -Bajr of Ship Rook, SO Bhoal Baj, Foro I., 34 Shml B«y. NawfoundUad, S.P.. CMat, 49 Shoal Haj, Nora S«olia, 8. Coast, 164 Shoal Uitv Point, At Shoe Cove, Cape St. Franoia, '■•■ U Shoe Cove, Bay of Notre Dame, 86 Sho« Cove Point, 31 St. Sbot'a nay, 51 Wreoka in, 6—8 CoRMw and Harpooner, k V 6; II.M.S. Urak*. 7; Sneiiee and Marshal m»': Blaodonald, 8 Shuuin Island, Tbrae Fathom Harboar, t66 Shut>in Island, Margaret's B«y, 177 Signal Island, 80 SilM Core, t4 Single Rooir, 97 Sisaibon Rirer, 187 Sistera lalands, 4« Sisters Rook, 38 Sistera or Black Bocka, 17« Sise laland. 80 Skuttock Hills. 198 Slim* Rook, ^8 Small Point, 51 Sttall Point, 59 Smith Sound, t4 Smith or Whit* Point, I6« ■ Smith'a Flag-Staff, Sable lalaad, 168 Smoke, or Ensum^ Cap*, 156 SitokT Ridge, SO Smooth Island, 60 Saattr*noae Point, 34 Sinp Roek, or Darell'a Ledge, 33 Snooks Arm, 36 Snug Core, 195 Soldier's Lwlg*. 185 Sop lalaad, 89 Sop'a Arm, 39 South Channel, Rirer St. Lavronoe, 117 South Harboara, Great and Little, 56 Sooth Roek, Belle Isle Strait, 42 South Trarera*, 119 South Broad Core, 29 South Brown Rocks, SO South, or Stone Pillar and Light, ixii, ISO South-west Arm, t4 South-west Point, Antieosti Island, 91 fMath*mArm( WhiteBajr).S8 Southern Head, f8 SoHt1imak«tB' Ledge, 93, 98 Spaniard Bay, 23 INDEX. Spat* laleud, 80 Spear, Cape, Light, xxi, 19 Spear Islsnd, 60 Sp*ar Point, 89 Spectacles, or Saddle lalands, 180 SpenoiL Wreck of tbe, 8 Spillcr^s Point, 96 Split Cape, 188 Split Point, «1 Split Rock, 19« Spout, Thu, 50 Spray Reef, 97 Springa Island, 45 Sproule, Point, 108 Spry,orTaylor'a Harbour.KiS Staff Islet, 97 Steering Island, 75 Stinking Islands, Si, 32 Stone Island, «7 Stone Island, 50 Stone Pillar, or Pilier de Pierre and Lighthouae, ISO Ston* Hors* Rock, 179 Stony Point, 93 Storm Cape, 48 Stormont Rirer, or Port Jolie, 180 Stormy Point, 72 Straptub Rock, 181 StreiitB, or Jollimore'a Islas, 177 Sugarloaf Point, 20 Sunk Ledge, 82 Surf Island, 80 Swale laland, 29 Swale Tickle, 29 Swallow'aTail Point, 198 Swerry Head and Rooks, 27 Sword Point, 74 Sydney Harbour, zxi, 157 Table Head, Strait of Belle Isle, 81 Table Head, Antieosti Island, 90 Tadousac, Trading Poat, 113 Tail Rock, 97 Tonoook Islands, 178 Tatmagouche, 145 Tavlor'sB»y,60 Taylor's Island, 176 Taylor's, or SpryHarbour,16S Taylor'a Goose Rook, 163 Telegraph Point, Strait of Belle Isle, 79, 80 Tenant, or Bristol Bay, 176 Tender Rock, 98 Tennant Harbour, 202 Tent Island, 94 Temple B*y and Pass, 81 Tertiary Shell Bay, 99 Thomas, St.^ 121 Thoma*orRuggedlBland,180 Thompson'* Boaob, 64 Three Fathom* Harbour, 165 Three Mountains, 46 dl3 Three Rocks, Tb*. 95 Thr**. or K*nt'* Islands, 193 Tbrun. Cap R**f, 172 Tickl* Harboar, 24 Tides, South Coaat of New* foundland, 71 Straits of Belle Isle,78 Antieosti Island, 91 — — Serenlslsnds Day ,108 Ri»er St. Lawr^ce, 124—126 -OutofCanso, I5t South Side of Gulf of St. Lawreno*, 151 Prino* Edward Island, 154 Bay of Fundy, 184 New Brunswick, 184 Buin of Min**, 188 ■ St. John**,N*wBninB- wick,191 — — ^Psssamaquoddy Bar, &c.,l96 ' • Bay of Fundy, 198 Tiger Rock, 180 Tilt Core, 36 Tilton Harbour, 34 Toad Core, .50 Tol'soeo Isle, 102 Tom Cod's Rock, S3 Tooth Head, 69 Torbay, South-east Coast of Newfoundland, 20 Torbay, Nora Scotia, South Coast, 161 Tormentin, Cape, 144 Tortoise Head, 74 Toulinguet.or Twillingat*, 35 Toulinguet Island, 35 Tourmente, Cap*, 122 Tower Rook, 88 Towing of ressels b*twe«n Quebec and Montreal, Hates of, 138 Traoadia, or Bedford Bay,153 Trafalgar, Wreck of the, 186 Trarerse Spit, zsii, 122 Treble Islet, 100 Treble Hill Island, 96 Tr^pass^B, or Deadnm'* Bay, S3 >i Trepassey Harbour, 51 Trilobite Bay, 108 Trinity Bay, Nowfonndland, South-east Coast, 23—26 Trinity Bay, Rirer St. Law- rence, 103 Trinity Core, St. Paul** Island, 86 Trinity Harbour, 25 Trinity L«dg«, 186 Triton Harboar, 85 Triton, Gr*at, Island, 35 Tfois Pistoles, 118 Trout Rirer, 107 Tarbalton Head, 150 'i'usket I^es, 185 .♦. 314 Tweed Idand, 73, 74 Tw8ed'e,orUreet Harbour, 69 Twillingate, or TouIiagaet,S5 TwiDlelands,St.Jobn'eB»r>7(> Twin Island, Strtit of Belle Isle, 88 « Union, or Grandeii Vaches Cove, 40 Vale of Misery, 168 Valen Islandp, Great and Little, Sf Vallier, St., Itl Variation8oftli«Compess,l,3l , Local Attraction in River St. Lawrence ; note on the aberration, by Mr. Bain, If 8 Varket Island, SO Vent, Cape, 4S Venus Creek, 149 Verde,or Green Point,53— 55 •Verdons, Tbe, Roeksi 45 Verte, Bujr, 145, 189 Vice-Admiral's Cove, Trinity Harbour, 95 Vice'Admiral's Cove, South- east Coast of Newfound- land, 51 Vide-Bidon, Point, 45 Virgin Books, Grand Bank of Newfoundland, 18 Virgin Rocks, Placenlia Bay, Vuhura Rock, 182 Wa4bam lalandslSS Walrond Ground/)p5 Walrus Island, lOJ Wapitagan Harbour, 98 Wash-sheoootai Bay, 100 INDEX. Waibtawooka Bay, 101 Wass Islands, 199 Watagheiatio Island, 97 Watch Rock, Bonne Esper- ance Harbour, 94 WatcbRocks,HareHarbour,97 Watcbeaboo Hill, 101 Wedge Isle. niii,16< '^Wedi* Point, 80 West Bay, 8t West Cape, Prinee Edward Island, 153, West Point»Anticosti Island, 90 Western Arm, White Bay, 39 Western Head, or Bald Point, 179 Western Pond Rook, St Whale Channel, 94 Whale Cove, 199 Whale Gut, 81 Whale IsUod, 93 Whale Rock, 67 Whale or Folle Rock, 43 Whelp Rock, 94 * White Bay, 38 White Haven, 161 White Ialand,Wadham Is., 35 White Island, River St. Lawrence, 117 White Islands, White Bay, 48 White Inlands, Nova Scotia, South Coast, 163 White Bear Bay, 67 . White Cape Harnonr, 47 White Head island, xz, 193 White Horse Islet, Passama- quoddy Bay, 195, 196 White Horse R«ef, The, 88 White Horse Shoal, 59 White North CliiF, 90 Whittle, Cape, 99 Wild Cove, 39 Wild Fowl Reef, lt« William Henry, or Sorel, 136 Willis Island, 30 Winds, generally, 1 Winds of the St. Lawrence, deacribed by Capt. Bay* field,*, 3 . •• Strait of Belle Isle, 78 Gulf of St. Lawrence, Cj Bay of Fundy, 198 Windmill Mount, S3 Windsor River, 188 Wine Harbour, 16t Widess Bay, 50 Wolf Buy, 68 Wolf Island and Bay, 99 Wolf Islands, 195 Wolfe Island, 88 Wood Island,^ Hardy Hsir-' hour, 37 Wood Island, Blanc Sablon Bay, 9S Wood Island, Gulf of St. Lawrence, North Shore, 96 Wood Island, Grand Manan Island, 193 Wooden Ball Rock, and Lights, xzv, iOl Wood's Harbour, 74 Woody Pillar, or Pilier Bois6, IffO Wreck Bay, 8!l Wrigbt'a Bank, 153 Wye Rock, ISi Yankee Jack Ledge, 163 Yarmouth, 186 York Harbour, 74 York Point, 81 Young Harry Rock, 27 y i I. Rider, Printer, u, BanbdooMw CIoim, J/mdon. It Sorel, 136 L Lawrence, apt. Bay He Isle, 78 Lawrence, ady, 198 39 )8 9 Jay, 99 lardy Har- [anc Seblon iulf of St. th Shore, 9(i rand Manan Rock, and iO\ ,74 or Pilier 153 dge, 163 '4 ock, 87 .